The Library of
t
:
*
THE
OF
Class
Book
COMMUNE VINCULUM
OMNIBUS ARTIBUS
MINNESOT
448.2
014n
•

OLLENDORFF'S
*14
K.
NEW METHOD
OF LEARNING TO
READ, WRITE, AND SPEAK
THE
FRENCH LANGUAGE:
WALDORF BINDERY COMPANY,
WITH
THE LESSONS
DIVIDED INTO SECTIONS OF A PROPER LENGTH FOR DAILY
TASKS, AND NUMEROUS CORRECTIONS, ADDITIONS, AND
IMPROVEMENTS, SUITABLE FOR THIS COUNTRY.
BY V. VALUE.
TO WHICH, ARE ADder,
4
}
VALUE'S SYSTEM OF FRENCH PRONUNCIATION,
HIS GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS, A NEW INDEX,
AND SHORT MODELS OF
COMMERCIAL CORRESPONDENCE.
LIBRARY BINDERS,
SAINT PAUL, MINN.
NEW-YORK:
D. APPLETON & COMPANY, 200 BROADWAY.
1853.
Entered, according to the Act of Congress, in the year 1850, by
D. APPLETON & COMPANY,
in the Clerk's Office of the District Court of the United States for the Southern
District of New York.
ATOZIMMIN
NOTICE.-A KEY to the Exercises of this. Grammar is pub
lished in a separate volume.
PREFACE.
In undertaking to edit an improved edition of OLLENDORFF'S FRENCH
GRAMMAR, I may be allowed to state my personal familiarity and
experience with the system which I have practically taught for many
years. However, as the Method is called a New Method; if it deserves
that title, its active principle must differ from that of the old mode
of tuition, and consequently any one, let him be ever so talented,
who, without being well acquainted with its modus operandi, would
attempt to correct, improve, or compose a work based on that princi-
ple, would be as likely to fail, as an experienced stage-driver would
be, if he were to endeavor to take the management of a steam or loco-
motive engine. It is then incumbent on me to show that I am fully
acquainted with the fundamental principle of that New Method.
In 1882, before the publication of Ollendorff's or Manesca's System,
I published a pamphlet entitled Experience Consulted; or V.Value's
System for teaching Modern Languages." At page 3 of the introduc
tion, is this passage:
"We will merely notice that the principle which furnishes the stu-
dent with the means, from the first lesson, of forming his own sentences,
or, in other words, of making an immediate and continued use of the words
he learns, so as to speak, will appear new to the public, although it has
here been acted upon for many years."
At page 5, will be found:
"Since the means ought always to be made subservient to the end
in view, and since immediate is in direct opposition to postponed use, we
must reverse the practice usually adopted, and consequently furnish
the student with words susceptible of inter-combinations, instead of
teaching him such as, not being combinable together, cannot be incor-
porated into the same sentence, and must, of course, render his efforts
entirely fruitless."
This is what Ollendorff has practically carried out; and, as I have
long used his system, its details are perfectly familiar to me.
The difference in the extent of the lessons cannot have escaped the
notice of teachers and scholars who have practically used the work.
The 1st, 2d, and 3d are of a proper length for one recitation, even
(3)
2 5 5 4 26
IV
PREFACE.
with an ordinary capacity; but from the 4th they begin to assume a
size that makes it difficult to learn one, at a single lesson. True, a
part only of a lesson may be assigned as a task, but the teacher must
then daily ascertain the extent of the lesson, in order to portion it
according to the capacity of his class. With a private scholar, even
with a private class, that may be done without much inconvenience;
but the case is different when applied to classes in schools, where
more regularity and uniformity are required, and where, the scholars
having to pass quickly from one study to another, have no time allowed
for measuring the fractional part they ought to have for the next reci-
tation. With the view of remedying this serious objection, the equali-
zation of the lessons was thought expedient.
To divide each long lesson into two, three, or four small ones, would
in a great measure have destroyed the unity which characterizes each
particular and successive lesson in the book. This was thought objec-
tionable; and hence the idea of dividing each lesson, according to its
length, into two, three, or four sections, so as to obtain the equaliza-
tion of the parts without destroying the unity of the whole.
It is what has been accomplished, and which is now presented to the
American public.
One of the strongest proofs that can be adduced of the superiority
of the principle here followed is that, in spite of the numerous faults,
inaccuracies, defects, omissions, and errors with which the former book
is teeming, scholars learn, and learn well. The half of those errors
would destroy the reputation of any other grammar or method, was
not the fundamental principle so self-efficient. Those defects are like
grades on a rai read: they may partially impede the way, but the
moving power of the engine easily overcomes them. We will notice a
few of them. At page 24, we find
This or that ox. This or that hay! Ce bœuf.
Ce foin.
As the three words this or that are translated by ce alone, it is very
natural that the student should, in the fourteenth line of the 13th
Exercise, translate "Has the peasant this or that ox?" by "Le paysan
a-t-il ce boeuf?" and nothing more; and the answer, "He has neither
this nor that," by "Il n'a ni ce," without adding anything else.
This is one of those results that experience alone can teach and
record; and which no reasoning a priori could suggest. At the same
time it shows how carefully we must weigh and analyse the expres-
gions offered to the learner. For, in this instance, the error came not
from any fault of his; but solely from the combination of the three.
words this or that being carelessly translated by ce. To obviate the
difficulty, say: this, that-ce; this, that ox-ce bœuf. And then, when
he comes to this or that ox, he cannot possibly translate by ce bœuf
alone, but he will use Ce boeuf-ci ou celui-là, &c. Some may consider
:
PREFACE.
this as a trifle. So it is; but the teacher's or author's business is to
give right directions. Below will be found a few of Ollendorff's
defects.¹
The è grave has purposely been placed on the e of siège, privilège, &c.,
to conform to the pronunciation; although, from mere habit or whim,
those words usually have an acute accent. (siége.)
Some have found fault, because the feminine was not introduced
before the 55th Lesson; but experience proves it to be one of the hap-
piest innovations in the Method.
The manner here adopted, of forming the subjunctive present from
the third person plural of the indicative present, and of placing that
third person plural at the bead of the tense, will have a tendency to
make the acquisition of the tense much more easy. For instance:
Boivent, boive, boives, boive, being pronounced in the same way, may
be considered as a single word, already known to the student, (since it
is the third person plural of the indicative present,) and the first and
second persons plural being similar to those of the imperfect, the pupil
has in fact nothing new to learn. He actually knows the tense before
he comes to it.
A great portion of the difficulties attending the subjunctive, arise from
the manner of presenting that mood, in the conjugations intended to teach
French to the Americans. It is one of the most inaccurate and deficient
parts of all grammars. From its nature, the subjunctive being subser-
1 At page 22, we find personne and ne separated by a hyphen (-)-wrong.
30. Porte-feuille, no directions anywhere how to form the plural of
compound nouns of this class.
73. What, nominative, que: it should be qu'est-ce qui? (No trifle.)
73. Obs. B. wrong. 60. To, with whom, for, to whose house: chez qui.
90. Soldier in 71st Exercise, the French given only at 160.
101. Do and AM, for all persons and tenses, should be for the present
tense.
112. Obs. A. wrong, because the preposition does not belong to the se-
cond, but to the first verb. The list there given by Ollendorff
is transferred to the Synopsis, because the verbs not being
introduced in the exercises, uselessly encumber the lesson.
118, 119. Rules on the past participles, not fully explained. The word
object, applied both to le, les, and en, show that the author was
not aware of their difference in French.
138, 141. How long. No explanation, so that the pupil is constantly at a
loss.
169. Je, me, (separated.) Wrong; they should be connected.
183. Rule on the future and note below, wrong. 199. Obs. E. defective.
208. 5th and 6th line of Exercise: Has he already kept something from
you? wrongly translated by A-t-il déjà gardé quelque chose de
vous?
245. Obs. A. not correct. 273. Obs. A. wrong. 325. Obs. A. wrong
389. Il s'en faut beaucoup, a knotty point uselessly presented to the
student, who can already trans.ate in several ways the ques-
tions there asked, &c. &c
1*
vi
PREFACE.
Let us
vient to, or governed by an antecedent, can separately have no specific
meaning, and ought consequently never to be used by itself. Now, as
in grammars, the subjunctive is mostly given by itself, independently
of the governing expression, it follows that the English translation
attached to it, is calculated to lead into numerous errors.
select a few examples. In the verb, to have, avoir; to know, savoir;
to go, aller; the subjunctive present is in all grammars, and in Ollen-
dorff's also, given thus: que j'aie, that I may have; que je sache, that I
may know; que j'aille, that I may go; and as the English is the
prototype of the French, the student must necessarily connect the
idea of the French subjunctive with that I may, and with no other
English. Hence the phrases, William says that I may have his dic-
tionary; She says that I may know my lesson; He thinks that I may
go; having each the English that I may, which is intimately linked in
the student's mind with the French subjunctive, must inevitably lead
him to use that mood, and translate by, Guillaume dit que j'aie son
dictionnaire; Elle dit que je sache ma leçon; II croit que j'aille. And
such translations would hardly be understood by the very authors of
the grammars, if unconnected with the English. Now, such modes of
expression abound in English: what an inexhaustible source of mis-
takes!! But this is not all; it is only one side of the medal; let us
see the reverse. The French subjunctive being connected exclusively
with that I may, will never be thought of, when this prototype does not
constitute a part of the English phrase: consequently, I must have;
unless I know; he wishes me to go; cannet by the student be translated
by the French subjunctive mood; for they do not remind him of his
English prototype, that I may, which alone can recall the idea of the
French subjunctive. Here, then, is another source of innumerable
errors. What a sad dilemma is then presented to the student! Both
the presence and the absence of his prototype mislead his steps. He
is in an intricate labyrinth, and there is no Ariadne to furnish him
with a clew to escape.
The unpleasant dilemma in which the student is involved, is avoided
by always presenting the subjunctive mood, as I do, in connexion with
the expression by which it is governed.
All those defects and many others have been rectified. The Gram-
matical Synopsis will be found to contain many useful explanations,
the result of experience. The Prétérit, Conditionnel, Imperative, Sub-
junctive, the Reflected Verbs, the Negations, are new and important
articles. It was thought preferable to transfer into the Synopsis many
of the rules and directions given in the body of Ollendorff's work, so
as to have under the same head everything relating to the subject it
treats of.
V. VALUE.
CONTENTS.
Preface
Page ii
System of Pronunciation
ix
Directions for using the Method
xxiii
Explanation of the Signs used in this book
xxiv
Lessons-1 to 86
25-456
Grammatical Synopsis
457
Recueil Épistolaire
539
Index
Idiomatical Expressions
547
575
(7)
!
Directions for using V. VALUE'S SYSTEM OF FRENCH PRO-
NUNCIATION, by which an accurate knowledge of the sounds
of that Language may be acquired in a few Lessons
$
AFTER READING THE DEFINITION OF VOWELS.
Teacher.-Please to pronounce the English word, add.
Student pronounces it.
T-What is the sound of the letter a in that word?
S. gives it, if he can. If he does not give it correctly, the teacher
does it, and tells him to dwell on the sound; as, aaaa-d, and finally
ααα alone, so as to abstract the sound of the vowel a. When done-
T.-This is the sound of the French letter a, marked 1 on the 1st
column, aaa,
• • •
a.
S. repeats the prolonged sound.
T.-Whenever you wish to ascertain the French sound, marked 1
(one), you must recur to the English word add, and you cannot miss it.
S. repeats the word, prolongs the sound aaa, and abstracts it, a.
T.-The sound of awith a circumflex accent), marked 12 (one two,
to show that it is the second sound of the same letter a), is found in
the word far..faaa-r... a. Pronounce the word, dwell upon the vowel
sound, and abstract it.
S. tries to do it. If he does not succeed, the teacher must go
through the same process as for the a of add. When done
T.-In what English word do you find the French sound marked 1
(one)? S. gives it.
T.-What is the sound? S. gives it.
T.-How is it represented? S.-By the letter a, in add.
T-In what word do you find 12 (one two)? S. gives it.
T.-What is the sound? S. gives it.
T.-How is it represented? S.-By the letter â, with a circumflex.
T.-What is the last sound in the word take?
S. tries to give it. If he cannot, the teacher will do it, and, tell
him to dwell on the sound e e e-ta-ke-e e e. This is in fact the sound
heard at the end of every English consonant sounded. The name of
this letter (k) is kay; but its sound in bank, for instance, is not bankay,
but bank e e, ending with a prolonged mute sound, which is exactly
the sound of the French mute e. It is a very important sound with
them; it is marked 2 (little two), to indicate its faintness.
The cough sound, as I have called it (marked 2), is that heard in
the French words peu, deux. If, in coughing, both teacher and pupil
get that sound, it will be secured; but if they do not, then the teacher
(9)
FRENCH PRONUNCIATION
must make him pronounce either deux or peu, and make him refer the
sound to the word he pronounces best, and retain the word as a model.
The letter u, marked 6, represents the sound heard immediately
after 8, in sweet, as it is usually pronounced by Americans. However,
some say soocet. With those, the teacher must devise some way to
make them pronounce the u properly.
The French nasal sounds are not difficult to acquire; for the Ameri-
cans have many words in which they give to an, in, on, un, the same
Found as the French do; but, in general, they end it by dwelling
separately on the n, while the French never do. With the latter it is
a simple or a vowel sound; with the former, a compound one. For
instance, the English combination in is pronounced ee-n, having
nothing of a nasal nature at the beginning, but ending with the full
nasal sound of n, thus presenting two distinct parts, while the French
in has but one sound, as heard in the ain of faint, or en of pent. So
that, to pronounce the French nasal sound properly, you must retain
throughout the sound you begin with, and not dwell separately on
the n.
է
ON DIVIDING AND MARKING WORDS.
There are, at pages xv, xvi, xvii, xviii, words given to be divided into
syllables, and to be marked. When the pupil has learned as far as
the words to be divided, (page xv, a very important one,) let him, on
some paper or a slate, divide the first word thus: fi-ni, saying men-
tally, the first syllable must be FI, in order to end in a vowel sound, ana
because the N being followed by the vowel, I must go with it; the second
syllable is ni. The vowel sound of the first is i, like the e in be,
marked 4, which is to be put under fi. The vowel sound of the second
is also 4; so that the word divided and marked will assume this form :-
fi-ni. The second, me-né, &c.
4 4
2
3
Let the pupil take but one line here at a time; then proceed with the
rules at xv and xvi, dividing and marking the few words they contain
as examples, until he comes to the paragraph (page xvi) of words to
be divided and marked, then he must take one line of them, with the
one at page xv. When, in going through the other rules, at xvi and
xvii, he comes to the paragraph of words (p. xvii) to be divided, let
him take one line there also, with those at xv, xvi, &c. This gradual
progress by line is essential; for, the words to be divided and marked,
although intended to exemplify the rules under particular heads,
contain rules belonging to other sections, which the student is thus
enabled to reach just in time to divide and mark them correctly.
I have said, one line at a time; but, although the progress must be
gradual, it must vary according to the aptness of the class or scholar;
for, in some instances, two lines will hardly be enough; while, in
others, three words would be too much. The teacher must be guided
by circumstances.
"
FRENCH PRONUNCIATION.
BY V. VALUE
TABLE I.-Vowel Sounds.
VOWELS are simple sounds, which can be lengthened without any
change in the position of the organs that produce them.
leu, cu, eu, cet, oe.
The French
1
α
sounds
12
a
as a
as a
in add
in far
Other combinations.
à, ea.
eâ.
as e at end of take.
2
e
eu*
as the cough sound
feu, cu.
22
eu
as u
in bud
†
3
é
(acute)
as a
in gate
32
ê
{& (erovimflex)}
as e
in get
45
i
as e
in be
52
0
0
น
as o
in no
as o
in nor
678
9
ои
an, en
in
10
on
11 un
as
in sweet
as oo in good
as an in want
as ain in faint
{i
as on in wont
as un in grunt
ai, ei, (er, ez, final.)
ai, ai, ei.
î, y (i grec).
ô, au, eau, eo, eô.
ô, au, eau, eo, eô.
ù, û, (eu, in avoir.)
où, oû.
am, em, en, aon.
im, in, aim, ain, ein, ym,
yn (EN, final.)
om, eon.
um, eun.
TABLE I.-Two Irregular Diphthongs.
12. où sounds like wa in water-or (ou+â) (7+1º) oî.
13. oin sounds like uain in quaint—or (ou+in) (7+9),
They are irregular, because in those combinations the i and the o
change their primitive sounds. As in regular diphthongs each vowel
retains its proper sound, they offer no difficulty.
* There is in peu, deux, heureux, vœux, &c., a sound of French eu, cu, that has
no representation in English, except the guttural sound heard in coughing; heugh!
haugh' (if so spelt.) It is between the u of budge and the final e of the same
word. In French it is not guttural, and not difficult to sound.
Rules will be given to determine the sound of these combinations.
11
FRENCH
PRONUNCIATION.
Every French sound having a representative in an English word, it
is evident that the mere recollection of the English word secures the
pronunciation of the French sound, and secures it effectually; for the
scholar is expected to be correct in the utterance of his own language.
(See Appendix, Note 1.)
TABLE III.—French Consonants differing in Sound from the English
14. g (with a cedilla) like s before a, o, u-sa, so, su.
15. ch, in French words, like sh in show,
16. gn sounds like the gn of mignonette.
17. il, ill (when liquid), sounds like lli, of brilliant.
18. j (and g, which is ALWAYS soft before e, i, and y), like z, in azure
19. qu like k,—gu like g at the end of fig.
20. s like z, when single and between two vowels,-rose, nose.
21. th sounds ALWAYS like t alone.
22. ti, when in English they sound like sh (as in nation, patient, &c.),
sound in French like the English word see.
TABLE IV.-Consonant Letters.
Consonants have no sound without the help of a vowel. Such is the
definition; yet, in the word abstract, the b, the s, the t, and the r, &c.,
are each sounded, and sounded respectively as b in tube; as s in base;
as tin rate; and as r in glare; or else, as if connected with the faint
or mute French e, or e at the end of take. So that, any consonant
sounded by itself, or at the end of a word, is supposed to be connected
with the mute or faint e.
Each consonant, in French, as in English, has a SOUND differing
from its NAME. This distinction is important. Although the French
names will be found in this table, yet the student is invited, particu-
larly at first, to use the English names, bee, cee, dee, &c., or else the
final sound of the English consonants, b, c, d, f, g, g, h, j, k, l, m, n,
p, qu, r, s, t, v, x, z.
b (bay), as in English at the end of mob.
1 12 2 2 22 3 32 4 5 52 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
ba, ba, be, beu, beu, bé, bê, bi, bo, bô, bu, bou, ban, bin, bon, bun, boi, boin.
*c (say), hard before a, o, u, as the English k in bank. `.
ca, câ
co, cô, cu, cou, can,
e (say), soft, always before e, i, y, like s in so.
ce, ceu, ceu, cé, cè, ci, cy,
c (say), hard, as k before a consonant or at the
clâ, cre, creu, creu, clé; clè, cti, oc, cdo,
cloi, cloin.
cin.
con, cun, coi, coin.
end of a word. Ac,
ctu, clou, cran, crin,
†ç (with a cedilla), only before a, o, u, like s in so, instead of k. CB,
ça, ce, ceu, cé, cè, ci, ço, çu, çou, çan, cin, çon, çun, çoi, çoin.
*c, ir second and its compounds, sounds like g hard-segon,-secondaire, &e.
† See Table III.
FRENCH PRONUNCIATION.
xiii
*ch (say, ash), like sh in show. cha, châ, che, cheu, cheu, ché, chè,
chi, cho, chu, chou, chan, chin, chon, chun-choi, choin.
d (day), as in English at the end of lad. Note.-When final, it sounds
like t, if united to the following initial vowel; as grand ami, pro-
nounced gran tami-da, dâ, de, &c.
f(eff),
ph (pay, ash),
as in English in proof. Note.-In neuf (9) it sounds
like v, if joined with the following vowel; as neuf
hommes, pronounced, neu-vom-ph, does not-fa, fâ,
fe, feu, &c.
g (zhay,) hard, Always before a, o, u, or a consonant, like g hard in
the English word bag-garde, fagot, figure, gloire. Note. When
final, like k, if joined to the following vowel; as, rang honorable-
pronounced, ran-konorable. ga, ga, go, gô, gu, gou, gan, gon,
gun-goi, goin.
*g (zhay), ALWAYS soft before e, i, y,—like z in azure--gea, gea, ge,
geu, geu, gé, gè, gi, geo, geo,—geou, gean-gin, geon, geun-
geoi, geoin.
*gn (zhay, enn), like gn in mignonette. Note.-Ifg and n are separated,
they sound as in English in magna, mag-na.
*gu, like
g hard. The u is usually silent.
h (ash). This letter, at the beginning of words, is called either mute
or aspirated; but it is never sounded. The word aspirated usually
leads the English student to think that the h in French must have
the same guttural sound as in English; but that is not the case.
When aspirated in French the h, without being pronounced, pre-
vents the elision or cutting off of the preceding vowel. For instance,
the h being aspirated in the French word héros (hero), you must
write le héros (the hero), and pronounce le éro in two words. On
the contrary, when the h is mute, you write l'horime (the man) and
pronounce l'om, in one word. But in both cases the h is entirely
silent-ha, hâ, he, heu, &c.
*j (zhee), always soft, like z in azure, joujou—ja, jâ, je, jeu, &c.
k (kah), as k in English at the end of pack-ka, kâ, ke, &c.
ch (say, ash), when followed by a consonant, like k, as in English.
Christ. Note. It is usually in words of foreign origin.
1 (ell), as in English, when not liquid, as in until. La, lâ, le, &c.
*1 (ell mouillé), liquid, always written il, ill, sounds like the lli of the
English word brilliant. Examples: Ail, aille, paille, veille, fille,
juillet, œil.-Illa, illâ, ille, illeu, illeu, illé, illè, illo, illo, illu,
illou, illan, illan, illin, illon, illun, illôi, illoin.
}
m (emm), Į as in English, when not combined with the preceding vowel
n (enn), sound, as in clam, din-ma, me, mo, &c.
* See Table III.
2
giv
FRENCH PRONUNCIATION.
p (pay), as in English in pump. Note.-Silent after m, when they are
in the same syllable, as prompt, temps. Pa, pâ, &c.
9 (ku), as in English like k.
qu (ku-u), like the English k, not the English qu, as quand, kan; qui,
kee, not kwee. Do not mark qu 6, and i 4, but qui (4); qua, quâ,
que, queu, queu, qué, què, qui, quo, quo, qu, quou, quan, quin,
quon, qu'un, quoi, quoin.
r (air), as in English in roar-strongly articulated-ra, râ, re, &c.
8 (ess), hard, like s in so.
1st. At the beginning of words, as sage.
2d. When final and pronounced, as atlas, mœurs.
3d. When doubled, as passer, possession.
4th. Single and preceded by another consonant; as conserver,
absolu, observation. Note.-Although the English s fre-
quently sounds like a z, after the letter b, as in absolve,
observe, &c., it does not in French;-sa, sâ, se, &c.
*s (ess), soft or like z, when single and between two vowels, as plaisant,
rose. Note. When final, if joined to the following vowel, it sounds
like z; as ils ont, eelzon,† &c.;—asa, ase, aseu, asè, asé, asi, iso,
iso, isu, isou, esan, esin, eson, asun, usoi, usoin.
t (tay), as in English in fat.-ta, tâ, te, teu, teu, &c. .
*ti (tay ee). Note.-When the ti, in English, sounds like sh, as in
nation, patient, minutia, the French ti sounds like see in English.
Examples: Nation, patient, minutie,-tia, tiâ, tie, &c.
*th (tay, ash), like the English initial t. Examples: Thalie, theâtre.
tha, thâ, the, theu, theu, thé, thè, &c.
v (vay), as in English at the end of drive-va, vâ, ve, veu, &c.
w (do.ble vay), as v, or as the vowel ou (7th.)
k
ks
gz
x (eeks), like k, ks, gz, s, z; as excepter, extrême, exercice, Bruxelles
(Brussels), sixième.
z (zed), as in phiz.
Examples: Zone, azur, amazone.
DIVISION or woRDS INTO SYLLABLES.
This is a very important exercise, and one which should be daily
practised for a considerable time, and now and then renewed.
In dividing the words, attend to the combination of letters in Tables
I., II., III. For instance, in the word hautement, the combination au,
being at No. 5 in Table I., take them together and mark them 5º. In
hua, the combination ua not being in the table, separate them into u
and ɑ, and mark them 6 and 1. So with oi, which being in Table II.,
* See Table III.
† And sometimes before m, as enthousiasme, mes mérisme.
FRENCH PRONUNCIATION.
XV
is marked 12, whilst io must be separated, because that combination
is not in the tables. Ai, in the table; ia, not in, &c.
The apostrophe (') is used to connect two words into one, and takes
the place of a vowel suppressed before another. L'eau sounds just
like lo; qu'avez-vous? like kahvayvoo.
The END OF ANY SYLLABLE must be a vowel sound. This is an all-
important direction. Note. A vowel sound may (as is the case with an,
en, in, on, oin, &c.) end with a consonant letter.
A consonant, when final or sounded by itself, is supposed to form a
compound syllable with the mute or faint e. So chef is separated into
chè-fe; avec into a-vè-ke; fil into fi-le; ver into vè-re; porte into
po-r-te. Hence each consonant is marked 2 from the faint e.
m or n, mm or nn, followed by a vowel, goes with it; if not, it goes
with the preceding. Image separates into i-ma-ge, and not as in Eng-
lish (im-age). Note. h after n is always null. Inhérent separates into
i-nhé-rent, (the h being mute, is null in inherent;) inhumain, becomes
i-nhu-main; inhumaine, i-nhu-mai-ne.
Homme
Divide and mark:-Fini, mené, promené, amène, ananas.
becomes ho-mme; donné, do-nné; comme, commune, commère, connu,
sommé, pommé, adonna, ronde, campagne, enfant, son, mon, pardon,
parfum, instrument, commun, commence, inhocent, inoui, inhabité,
continental, inharmonieux, immobilité.
A final consonant having no vowel connected with it, ought, from its
definition, to be silent. It is so in French. Hence it is united to the last
syllable, or to a monosyllable; as, avant becomes a-vant-the final t
being silent goes with van, so as to make vant; four letters, although
but three (van) are pronounced. In the French word port the four
letters are taken, although only por are pronounced; but porte becomes
por-te, because the last e causes the t to sound.
Divide and mark:-Comment dents, prudent, prudente, camp,
temps, nid, pied. (4+3.)
RULE.-Final consonants are silent, except c, f, l, and r preceded by
a, i, o, u. Sac, avec, lac, vif, actif, sel, miel, fil, car, par, finir, cor,
leur, auteur. See Appendix, Note 2.
RULES ON FRENCH E.
Letters and Combinations, marked 2 (little two), and pronounced like the e at
the end of take.*
Any sound marked 2 (little two) is in French called mute or faint;
e (without accent) is mute or faint, in the following cases.
Rule 1st.
2
e=² at the end of words, as ce, de, traite, père, donne,
heure.
* This is the only vowel sound that is slighted or suppressed in French-a, é, i,
»), u, &c., have always their full sounds.
xvi
FRENCH PRONUNCIATION.
Rule 2d. e= 2 before a single consonant not final, (except the con-
sonant x, which has usually a compound sound.) Venu, devant,
recevoir, demande, redemande.
Rule 3d. e=2 before two consonants, the second of which is l, or r;
as in replace, représente, secrètement, repliant.
Rule 4th. es=2 at the end of words of more than one syllable, as
Bibles, places, dites, faites.
*
Rule 5th. ent at the end of the third person plural of verbs; as
chantent, ils jouent, ils disaient. When immediately after a vowel, with-
out any intervening consonant, they merely lengthen the preceding
vowel sound.
Rule 6th. 2 is placed over a consonant sounded by itself, either in
the body or at the end of a word, for the e mute is supposed connected
with it. Examples: pour, pou-r; corde, co-r-de; fil, fi-l; soldat,
so-1-dat.
AN ACCENT,
Observation.-E is null, and therefore not marked, when, WITHOUT
An accent, it is before a and o, as George, nageait. It is frequently
so in English, as George, pageant, dungeon. It is thus placed to soften
the g.
When pronounced in French, the é is accented.
These constitute what the French call mute syllables.
Divide and mark:-Le, me, que, tête, habite, élève, montagne, revenu,
revenant, devoir, repos, repose, reposant, celui, retire, retiré, cédé,
cède, accable, devant, replace, replaçant, repli, replie, une, moine,
moins, prenant, refuse, tu refuses, vie, lui, joué, jouée, petit, petite,
il entre, ils entrent (3d pers. pl.) montagnes, ils replacent (3d), voies,
élèves, ils prient (3d), ils disent (3d), poindre, mangea, mangeâmes,
Georgie, col, protocol, sel, chef, il, foin, cordial, plongea, seul, parasol.
IMPORTANT REMARK ON E MUTE.
When e without accent is mute or faint, it invariably (we may even
say universally) lengthens the preceding syllable.
In French, in the following cases, it does not merely lengthen, but it
likewise alters the sound of the preceding vowel.
â, ea, before a mute syllable, is open and marked 12: mâle.
e, before a mute syllable, usually takes the grave or circumflex
accent, and is marked 32 or e open: père, mère, même.
ai, aî, ei, before a mute syllable, are marked 32: aime, connaître,
Feine.
o, ô, au, eau, before a mute syllable, 52: période, côte, haute.
=22, before a mute syllable: rieuse, meute.†
The same vowel sounds, viz: â, e, ai, &c., o, &c., eu, are open and
marked in the same manner, before two or more consonants; as, âpre,
* See Appendix, Note 3.
† See Appendix, Note 4.
FRENCH PRONUNCIATION.
xvi
ferme, paraître, faible, autre, noble, heurte. And likewise before a
final consonant sounded: ver, fer, air, chef, cor, parasol, leur, seul.
Because, in both cases, the following consonant is supposed to be con-
nected with the e mute or faint, and may be considered as forming a
mute syllable: vè-re, fè-re, ai-re, chè-fe, co-re, &c. In these two last
situations (before two or more consants and before a final consonant
sounded) the e takes no accent, though marked 32.
Divide and mark :-Changea, changeâmes, âne, hâte, diadême, bref,
plongé, plongèrent (3d), frère, nagea, nageâtes, lève, promène, promè-
nera, suprême, rieur, rieuse, haut, haute, côté, côte, côtes, ose, relief,
osé, saut, saute, osant, gueux, gueuse, sauté, sonne, sonné, liberté,
fameux, fameuse, faible, heureux, heureuse, espoir, aube, ode, odeur,
preneur, preneuse, sel, mer, sec, bonheur, malheur, élèves, gloire,
mouvoir, égale, égales, égoût, retirent (3d), sèche, sec, compagnes,
égalera, entreprises, replantent (3d), bonnes, égalèrent, mangeâtes,
petites, pour, mer, noircir, George, lient (3d), jouent (3d), concourir,
foui, fouine, neige, neigea, voient (3d), bel, beau, belle, vendent (3d),
vendant, content, content (3d), neigeant, plongea, replongèrent (3d),
diagonal, replient (3d), moindre.
Letters and Combinations marked 3, and pronounced like a in gate, or é
(close or with acute accent.)
Rule 1st. é (with acute accent) called e close, is marked 3.
Rule 2d. e=3 in the conjunction et (and). The t is never sounded,
and never connected with the following initial vowel: un et un (un é
un); et enfin (é enfin).
Rule 3d. e=3 before cc, dd, ff, or any other double consonants not
followed by a mute syllable: effacer, dessin, reddition, excellent, terri-
toire, paresseux.
Rule 4th. e= 3 in ex followed by a vowel: exact, exiger. The x
sounds then like gz, egzact, egzigé.
Rule 5th. ez=3 when final, or taken in combination at the end of
words; as avez, prenez, nez.
Rule 6th. er= 3, when final, in words of more than one syllable;
and then the r is never sounded, as parler, pommier.*
Rule 7th. ai, eai, ei=8, when not followed by a mute syllable, and
likewise when final: J'ai, aimer, to love-aimons, let us love-je man-
geai, I ate-peiné, grieved-gai, gay.
Divide and mark the following words :-Été, é-té; allé, a-llé; écarté,
bordé, chanté, répété, décidé, pilé, peigné, et, trois et un, errant,
erronné, ecclésiastique, efface, errata, exagérer, effacer, exactement,
●ssai, écarter, écartez, effort, bouchez, bouches, exister, existez, exil,
* See Appendix, Note 5.
2*
xviii
FRENCH PRONUNCIATION.
effarouche, effarouché, exaction, écarté, paresseux, paresseuse, tu
donnes, effaroucher, donnés, effarouchez, donnez, donner, causai, et
avec, et au, et après, verrai, prendrai, aîné, là et ici, et avant, peinai,
aimant, aimez, aimé, neigé, neigeant, neiger, mangeai, nous nageons,
démangeaison, raison, plaisir, peignant, plein, pleine, peigné, chez,
rendez-vous, prendrai, peindrai, effréné, effarouchés.
Letters and Combinations marked 32, and pronounced like e in get, or è
(grave or open) and ê.
Rule 1st. è (with a grave accent) called e open, and also é, marked 32.
Rule 2d. e=32 in monosyllables ending with a consonant; as ces,
des, est, les, mes, ses, tes, &c. Note.-If the consonant is c, f, l, or r,
it sounds after the e; as, sec, sè-k; chef, chè-f; sel, sè-l; ver, vè-r.
Rule 3d. e=32 before two or more consonants; as, espérer, restons,
liberté. Note. The consonant that immediately follows the e is pro-
nounced separately, and of course marked 2: as espérer, e-s-pé-rer:
restons, re-s-tons.
Rule 4th. e=32 before double consonants, cc, ff, ss, rr, ll, &c., when
the following syllable is mute: as nette, querelle, cesse, terre, richesse,
paresse.
Rule 5th. e=32 before a sounding final consonant; as avec, relief,
miel, Oreb, hier,* respect; and in every monosyllable ending in er, as
fer, mer.
Rule 6th. ais, ait, aient, oient,† aix, et=32 when final: as j'avais, il
était, ils étaient, ils étoient, paix, objet.
ence.
Rule 7th. e 32 in ex, followed by a consonant; as extrême, expéri-
Note. The x is usually pronounced ks; ekstrême, ekspérience.
Rule 8th. ai, eai, ei=32 when followed by a mute syllable; as aime,
ai-je ? peine, enseigne.
Divide and mark:-Sévère, scène, même, suprême, mes, est, bref,
sec, tel, mer, espoir, destitution, fermenté, serment, telle, cette, quelle,
pièce, cachette, richesse, richesses, grief, griefs, miel, fiel, j'avais, tu
avais, il donnait, ils portaient, elle joignait, ils jouaient (3d), fait, effet,
elles étaient, objet, sujet, portefaix, ils étaient (3d), elles priaient (3d),
venaient (3d), aime, semé, sème, aiment (3d), ils semèrent (3d), peiné,
peine, peigné, peigne, secret, mené, mène, sain, saine, ancien, ancienne,
le mien, les miens, les miennes, boulet, faite, jeter, jette, baudet, cachet,
met, mets, paix, exprès, extravagant, extraordinaire, exposèrent (3d),
fɛï, ver.
* See Appendix, Note 5.
†cient is the termination of the third person plural of the imperfect and condi
dional, old orthography.
FRENCH PRONUNCIATION.
xix
VARIOUS EXPLANATIONS.
e (without accent)=1, or sounds like French a in the combination
emme. Examples: femme (pro. fam)-décemment, dé-ce-mment. (3+1
+8.)
en at the end of words=9. Examples: bi-en, well; rien, nothing.
Note. In the words composed from bien, the combination en, although
it may no longer be final, retains the ninth vowel sound. Examples:
bi-en-tôt, soon; bi-en-fe-sant, benevolent.
=9, in the termination iens, when s is the mark of the plural.
Examples: mien, miens; entretien, entretiens.
en = =9, in the combinations ien, iens, ient, of the verbs tenir, to hold,
to keep; venir, to come, and their compounds. Examples: je vi-en-
drai, I shall come; je tiens, I hold; elle convient, she agrees.
en everywhere else, except in the termination ent of the third person
plural, (see Rule 5 on e mute, page xiv.) always-8: entends, senti-
ment, en.
Remarks on the letter Y.
When the letter y in any word is preceded by a vowel, it is equiva-
lent to i, i. The first i unites with the foregoing vowel, and must be
marked accordingly. The second i sounds separately, or unites with
what follows. Examples: ayant, ai-i-ant; citoyen, ci-toi-i-en; pays,
pai-is.
The diæresis (…) separates two letters, which otherwise would sound
together. Thus, in Saul, (the apostle's name,) au=52; but in the
name of the Hebrew king Saül, with the diæresis, a and u are sepa-
rated, and pronounced Sa-u-1. (1, 6, 2.)
Of the liquid sounds, AIL, EIL, IL, EUIL, CIL, OUIL, AILS, EILS, &c.
Note. The sound of lli in the English word brilliant is similar to
the French liquid il, ill.
When il or ils final is liquid, the preceding vowel is pronounced
separately with its open sound, viz: a=1², e=3², eu=2², œ=2², and
then follows the liquid sound of il or ils=17. Examples: ail, a-il;
réveil, ré-ve-il; seuil, seu-il; fenouil, fe-nou-il. Note.-œil is pro-
nounced like euil. (22, 17.)
Those vowels, a, e, i, &c., have a long sound, because the il final is
supposed to be followed by e mute.
AILL, EILL, ILL, EUILL, ŒILL, OUILL,
When followed by a mute syllable, the preceding vowel a, e, i, &c.,
sounds as it does with the final il, as explained above. Examples:
pa-ill-e, ve-ill-e, fi-ill-e, feu-ill-e, fou-ill-e.
When not followed by a mute syllable, the preceding vowel is close,
XX
FRENCH PRONUNCIATION.
viz: a=1, e=3, eu=2, œ=2. Examples: ma-ill-et, ve-ill-er, pi-ill.
a-ge, feu-ill-et, fou-ill-ant, œillet, œ-ill-et. (2, 17, 32.)
CUEIL, GUEIL, when final.
In these combinations the u serves only to make the c and the g hard:
the e represents the long sound of eu marked 22, and the letters il have
the liquid sound=17. Examples: re-cue-il, o-r-gue-il.
CUEILL, GUEILL, not final.
When followed by a mute syllable, the preceding vowel sounds as it
does with the final cueil, gueil, as explained above. Example. je re-
cue-ill-e.
When not followed by a mute syllable, the preceding vowel is short or
close; that is, e sounds like eu marked 2, and the letters ill have their
usual liquid sound=17. Examples: re-cue-ill-ant, o-r-gue-ill-eux.
Stress of the voice.
The stress of the voice is placed on every vowel preceding a mute
syllable. The faint or mute e is the only slighted sound, all the other
vowels receive a full and distinct utterance.
Entre; en, distinct; tre, faint-entreprise; en, full; tre, faint; pri,
full; se, faint. In communication, every syllable is distinct, and the
stress of the voice rests on the last.
NOTE 1, (page xii.)
APPENDIX.
In this I differ totally from Mr. Charles Picot, who in his excellent
system of pronunciation says (page 6): "The English words at,
father, &c., are merely given as means of comparison and association,
to enable the pupil to proceed from what he knows to what he is to
learn, and must be dispensed with as soon as the sounds are well
mastered." Far from discarding those words, I strongly recommend
the scholar to retain them carefully as unerring guides. If they are
useful at first, they must ever be so, and would it not be ungrateful
to throw aside those that befriended us in the beginning of our career?
Treasure them up, therefore.
NOTE 2, (page xv.)
In French, final consonants are not generally pronounced; for, not
being followed by a vowel, they ought naturally to be silent. Hence
the French words port and grand are pronounced as if written por and
FRENCH PRONUNCIATION.
xxi
gran; but the t and the d are pronounced as in English, when spelled
in French with a final e, as porte, grande.
The above observation will sufficiently explain why the final conso-
nants are silent in the following
Table, exhibiting the sixteen vowel sounds and two diphthongs, as represented
at the end of words.
12 ât, âts.
es, (in words of two syllables and more,)
No. 1.
as, at, ats
2
2.
eux, eut, œud, œuds, œufs.
ent.*
22. with this vowel, the next consonant sounds, as boeuf, leur,
seul; but the second consonant is silent; leurs, sœurs, cœurs.
3. aie, ed, eds, ée, ées, és, er, et (conjunction), ez.
32. ais, ait, et, ès, ect, ets (and es in monosyllables), aient,* oient,†
4. id, ie, is, it, ies, ys.
ient. **
52. with this vowel, the consonant which immediately follows
sounds. Examples: fol, Jacob, soc, cor; but the second con-
sonant is silent: socs, cors, mort, port.
5. aud, aut, aux, op, os, ot, ots, auds, auts, eaux.
ue, ues, ût, ùts, ud (and in the verb avoir, eus, eut, eue, eues),
6.
7.
oue, oues, oud, ouds, oup, oups, ous, out, outs, oux.
8.
9.
10.
uent.*
ouent.*
amp, amps, ant, ants, ems, emps, ent, ents, ans, ens.
ins, int, ingt, ingts, ains, aint, ainc, aincs, eins, eint, eints,
ons, ont, ond, onds, amb, ombs, ompt, onc, oncs.
11. uns, ums.
12. oie, oies, ois, oit, oid, oids, oix,
13. oing, oins, oint, oints, oings.
NOTE 3, (Page xvi.)
(en, ens.)‡
oient.*
The reason why es is marked 2 and pronounced like the faint e, may
be stated as follows.
In English, THE book, THE friend, MY pen, &c., are expressions used in
the singular number. Now, as THE and MY undergo no change in the
plural number, should book, friend, and pen, be spelt and pronounced
as before, there could be no distinction between the singular and the
plural. To render that distinction sensible, an s is added to the end of
each noun, (for the eye,) and is articulated to apprise the ear that the
idea of plurality is intended. In French, on the contrary, the articles
in the singular, le, la, being changed into les for the plural, mon, ma,
*Third person plural of verbs.
†oient, old orthography, third person plural of imperfect and conditional.
(en and ens) final, and in the verbs tenir, venir, and their compounds.
xxii
PRONUNCIATION.
FRENCH
into mes, &c., when those words les, mes, &c., are heard, they at once
intimate to the ear that the plural is meant, hence the alteration of
the noun becomes useless; and although the s is added, (for the eye,)
it is not pronounced, and of course final es is marked little 2.
NOTE 4, (page xvi.)
The e mute or faint, marked little 2, after a consonant, has the effect
of lengthening and altering the sound of the preceding vowel or syl-
lable, in English, as may be seen below.
hat, on account of the faint e that follows, becomes hate;
met decomes mete;
hop becomes hope;
bit becomes bite;
tub becomes tube.
In French the e mute always lengthens the preceding syllable, but it
alters the vowel sound, when it is after a consonant, only in four
instances, instead of doing it in every case, as in English.
mal (marked 1) becomes mâle (marked 12).
heureux (2, 2), heureuse (2, 22); cédé (3, 3), cède (32, 2); haut (5),
haute (52, 2). Hence the following rule:
Silent E lengthens the preceding syllable, and when the vowel has two
sounds, that vowel takes the sound marked with double figures; 22,
32, 52, and likewise 12 when there is a circumflex on the â; not other-
wise.
When the faint e comes immediately after a vowel, no consonant
intervening, as ie, ue, ée, eue, &c., it lengthens that vowel without
altering its sound.
NOTE 5, (pages xvii and xviii.)
The ris sounded only in a few words of two or more syllables
Amer (1, 32, 2), bitter; cuiller, cu-i-ll-e-r (6, 4, 17, 32 2), spoon; enfer,
hell; fier, proud; hier, yesterday; hiver, winter; magister, country
school-master; ancer, ether, frater, Alger, Jupiter, Lucifer, Stathouder.
DIRECTIONS HOW TO USE THIS METHOD
As there is now a System of Pronunciation with this Method, let the
first ten or twelve lessons be devoted to acquiring a complete know-
ledge of that important branch of a modern language. If that is
thoroughly done, the teacher will have no further trouble with the
pronunciation, for the pupils will be able to read correctly by them-
selves.
Each lesson now consists of one, two, three, &c., separate vocabu-
laries, each followed by exercises, English at first, but French and
English at the Twelfth Lesson; that is, when the student's ear begins
to become a little familiar with French sounds.
The first vocabulary must be read by the pupils, each taking a line
and pronouncing aloud both the English and French, the latter being
divided into syllables, and distinctly uttered under the direction of the
teacher, who ought, as they proceed, to ask questions respecting the
pronunciation. This done, the students are directed:-1st, to learn
for the next recitation, the English and French vocabularies, so as to
be able to give the French when the English is mentioned, or the
English when the French is given out; and, 2dly, to write down the
translation of the first exercise, to be handed to the teacher, who,
directing them to close their books, will, while correcting the errors,
give out the English of every question and answer, to be put in French
by the students.
The correction and translation ended, let the next vocabulary be
read, or rather syllabled, slowly and distinctly, and explained by the
teacher, if need be, and so on, the vocabularies being learned and the
exercises translated.
As this method is simple and gradual enough for every capacity,
should there be pupils too young to write the translations, let them
prepare the exercises and recite them to the teacher, who will do well
to make them spell out a number of words at each recitation.
(23)
EXPLANATION OF THE SIGNS USED IN THIS BOOK.
THE irregular verbs are designated by a (*) star.
The figures 1, 2, 3, 4, placed after verbs, denote that they are regu.
lar, and indicate the conjugation to which they respectively belong.
Idiomatical expressions are marked thus: †.
The verbs taking être (to be) as auxiliary, are marked thus; e.
¿1 to 164, refer to paragraphs in the Synopsis, (from p. 457 to 538.)
Dir. 1, means first Direction, &c., (p. 457 to 460.)
R. 1, means first Rule, &c., (from p. 460 to 461.)
Obs. or Ob. 7, means Observation 7th, &c.
24¹, 24³, means 24th Vocabulary, first Section; second Section.
24³, N. 2; 24th Vocabulary, Note 2.
282, Ob. 65; 28th Vocabulary, Observation 65th.
? 24-R. 2,)
824-A. 2,
¿ 24-2,
mean the 2d article or rule of 24th paragraph.
490-3, means the article marked 3, at p. 490.
Pa. or p. 419, means page 419; 405, 6, 7, mean 405, 406, 407.
See Pronun. See System of Pronunciation.
(24)
OLLENDORFF'S
FRENCH METHOD.
FIRST LESSON, 1st.-Première Leçon, 1*e.
VOCABULARY.
Have you?
Yes, Sir, I have.
I.
The..
Have you the hat?
VOCABULAIRE.¹
Avez-vous ? 2
Oui, Monsieur, j'ai.
Je, which becomes j' before a vowel
or silent h. (See Pronunciation.)
Le chapeau.
Avez-vous le chapeau ?
Oui, Monsieur, j'ai le chapeau.
The hat.
Le.
Yes, Sir, I have the hat.
The bread.
The sugar.
Le pain.
Le sucre.
The broom.
The paper.
Le balai.
Le papier.
The soap.
Le savon.
My.
My hat.
Mon.
Mon chapeau.
Your.
Your bread.
Votre.
Votre pain.
Have you my hat?
Yes, Sir, I have your hat.
Have you your bread?
I have my bread.
Which or what?
Which hat have you?
I have my hat.
Which bread have you?
I have your bread.
My exercise.
Avez-vous mon chapeau?
Oui, Monsieur, j'ai votre chapeau.
Avez-vous votre pain ?
J'ai mon pain.
Quel? (before a noun.)
Quel chapeau avez-vous ?
J'ai mon chapeau.
Quel pain avez-vous ?
J'ai votre pain.
Mon exercice.
FIRST EXERCISE, 1st.-PREMIER EXERCICE. 1er.
Which exercise have you, Sir? I have the first exercise.-Have
you the bread? Yes, Sir, I have the bread.-Have you your bread?
¹ For the manner of teaching the lesson, see Manner of using the Method.
• When the verb is interrogative the French always put a hyphen (-) be.
tween the verb and the nominative pronoun. (Mind this in writing.)
8
(25)
26
SECOND LESSON.
I have my bread.-Have you the broom? I have the broom.-
Have you the soap? I have the soap.-Have you your soap? I
have my soap. Which soap have you? I have your soap.-Have
you your sugar? I have my sugar.-Which sugar have you? I
have your sugar.-Which paper have you ? I have my paper.-
Have you my paper? I have your paper. Which bread have
you? I have my bread.-Which broom have you? I have your
broom.-Have you your exercise? Yes, Sir, I have my exercise.-
Which exercise have you? I have my first exercise.¹
Daily Salutations.
Good day, Miss.
How do you do, Madam?
Very well, thank you.
Salutations journalières.
Bon jour, Mademoiselle.
Comment vous portez-vous, Ma-
dame?
Très-bien, merci.
Obs. 1. Très is always connected, by a hyphen, with the following word.
Good evening.
| Bon soir.2
SECOND LESSON, 2d.-Seconde Leçon, 2de.
VOCABULARY.
VOCABULAIRE.
Le, before a consonant.
It. (Objective pronoun.)
L', before a vowel, &c. (Pronun.)
I have.
I have it.
| J'ai.
Je l'ai.
Obs. 2. Objective pronouns are usually placed before the verb, in
French. Instead of: I have it, the French say: I it have. Je l'ai.
Have you my hat?
Avez-vous mon chapeau ?
Yes, Sir, I have it
Oui, Monsieur, je l'ai.
Good.
Bad.
Bon.
Mauvais.
Pretty.
Ugly.
Joli.
Vilain.
Old.
Fine, handsome.
Vieux.
Beau.
My cloth.
My fine cloth.
Mon drap.
The salt.
The good salt.
Le sel.
Mon beau drap.
Le bon sel.
› Pupils desirous of making rapid progress may compose a great many
phrases, in addition to those given in the exercises; but they must pro
nounce them aloud, as they write them. They should also make separate
lists of such substantives, adjectives, pronouns, and verbs, as they meet with
in the course of the lessons, in order to be able to find those words more
readily, when required to refer to them in writing their lessons.
2 When no daily salutations are found in some of the lessons, the teacher
may introduce some, or else use the preceding ones.
SECOND LESSON.
27
The shoe.
The old shoe.
Le soulier.
My wood.
Your pretty wood.
Mon bois.
Your stocking. The ugly stocking.
Votre bas.
Le vieux soulier.
Votre joli bois.
Le vilain bas.
The thread.
The dog.
Your bad thread.
The horse.
Le fil.
Votre mauvais fil.
Le chien.
Le cheval.
Not. (See negations in Synopsis.)
I have not.
I have.
I have not the bread.
No, Sir.
No, Miss.
Have you my old hat?
No, Sir, I have it not.
Which cloth have you?
I have the fine cloth.
What dog have you?
I have my old dog.
Of.
The thread stocking.
Ne (before), pas ‘after the verb).
J'ai. Je n'ai pas. (See Pronu.)
Je n'ai pas le pain.
Non, Monsieur.
Non, Mademoiselle.
Avez-vous mon vieux chapeau ?
Non, Monsieur, je ne l'ai pas.
Quel drap avez-vous ?
J'ai le beau drap.
Quel chien avez-vous ?
J'ai mon vieux chien.
Le bas de fil.
De.
Obs. 3. As no noun can in French, as it is in English, be used as an
adjective to another noun: the preposition, de, is always put between the
name of the thing and the name of the substance of which it is made,
which latter, in French, is always placed last.
The paper hat, [the hat of paper.]
The velvet.
The gun.
The wooden gun, [the gun of wood.]
The velvet shoe.
Which gun have you?
I have the wooden gun.
Which stocking have you?
I have my thread stocking.
Have you my velvet shoe?
No, Miss, I have it not.
Yes, Miss, I have it.
Le chapeau de papier.
Le fusil.
Le velours.
Le fusil de bois.
Le soulier de velours.
Quel fusil avez-vous ?
J'ai le fusil de bois.
Quel bas avez-vous ?
J'ai mon bas de fil.
Avez-vous mon soulier de velours?
Non, Mademoiselle, je ne l'ai pas.
Oui, Mademoiselle, je l'ai.
SECOND EXERCISE, 2d.-SECOND EXERCICE, 2d.
Good day, Miss.-Good day, Sir.-Good day, Madam.-How do
you do, Sir? Very well; thank you, Miss.-How do you do, Ma-
dam? Very well, Sir, thank you.-Have you my fine horse? Yes,
Sir, I have it.-Have you my old shoe? No, Miss, I have it not.-
Which dog have you? I have your pretty dog.-Have you my bad
paper? No, Sir, I have it not.-Have you the good velvet cloth?
Yes, Sir, I have it.-Have you my ugly gun? No, Sir, I have it
not. Which gun have you? I have your fine gun.-Which stock-
ing have you? I have the thread stocking.-Have you my thread
28
THIRD LESSON.
stocking? I have not your thread stocking.-Have you my wooden
gun? No, Sir, I have it not.-Have you the old bread? I have
not the old bread.—Which shoe have you? I have the fine velvet
shoe.-Which velvet shoe? Your velvet shoe.-Which soap have
you? I have my old soap.-Which sugar have you? I have your
good sugar.-Which salt have you? I have the bad salt.-Which
exercise have you? I have my second exercise.-Have you the
first exercise? No, Madam, I have it not.-Which hat have you?
I have my bad paper hat.-Have you my ugly wooden shoe? No,
Sir, I have it not.-What vocabulary have you? I have the second.
-Have you the first? Yes, I have it.
THIRD LESSON, 3d.-Troisième Leçon, 3me.
VOCABULARY.
Something, anything.
Have you anything?
I have something.
Nothing, not anything.
VOCABULAIRE.
Quelque chose.
Avez-vous quelque chose ?
J'ai quelque chose.
Ne (before), rien (after the verb).
Obs. 4. Quelque chose (something, any thing), is never used with a nega-
tion. Not....any thing, as well as nothing, must be translated by ne
(before, and) rien (after the verb), and not by ne.... •pas quelque chose.
I have not anything.
I have nothing.
}
Je n'ai rien. (Not: je n'ai pas
quelque chose.)
Le vin.
Mon argent.
The wine.
My money or silver.
The gold.
L'or. (Pronun.)
Obs. 5. Le, the, becomes l' before a vowel or silent h.
The string.
The ribbon.
Le cordon.
The golden ribbon. The button.
The coffee.
The cheese.
Le ruban d'or.
Le café.
Le ruban.
Le bouton.
The coat.
My coat.
The silver candlestick.
L'habit. (Pronun.)
Le fromage.
Mon habit.
Le chandelier d'argent.
Are you hungry?
† Avez-vous faim?
I am hungry.
I am not hungry.
Are you thirsty ?
I am thirsty.
I am not thirsty.
Any thing or something good.
Have you anything good?
Nothing or not anything bad.
I have not anything (nothing) good.
† J'ai faim.
† Je n'ai pas faim.
† Avez-vous soif?
† J'ai soif.
† Je n'ai pas soif.
Quelque chose de bon.
Avez-vous quelque chose de bon
Ne.... rien de mauvais.
Je n'ai rien de bon.
THIRD LESSON.
29
Obs. 6.
What? is quel? before a noun, as: Quel bouton avez-vous? but
que? (before a verb.)
What? What have you?
I Que? Qu'avez-vous ?
Obs. 7. Quelque chose and ne.... rien require de when they are before an
adjective; and so does what?
What have you good?
I have the good coffee.
Have you anything pretty?
I have nothing pretty.
Are you sleepy?
I am sleepy.
I am not sleepy.
Examples:
Qu'avez-vous de bon ?
J'ai le bon café.
Avez-vous quelque chose de joli ?
Je n'ai rien de joli,
† Avez-vous sommeil ?
† J'ai sommeil.
† Je n'ai pas sommeil.
THIRD EXERCISE, 3d.-TROISIÈME EXERCICE, 3me.
What have you? I have the third exercise.-Ilave you your
second exercise, Miss? Yes, Sir, I have it.-Good evening, Ma-
dam, how do you do? Very well, Sir, thank you. Good morning,
Miss. Good morning, Sir.-Have you my good wine? I have it.-
Have you the gold? I have it not.-Have you the money? I have
it. Have you the gold ribbon? No, Sir, I have it not.-Have you
your silver candlestick? Yes, Sir, I have it.-What have you? I
have the good cheese. I have my cloth coat.-Have you my silver
button? I have it not.-Which button have you? I have your good
gold button.-Which string have you? I have the gold string.—
Have you anything? I have something-What have you? I have
the good bread. I have the good sugar.-Have you anything good?
I have nothing good.-Have you anything handsome? I have no-
thing handsome. I have something ugly.—What have you ugly?
I have the ugly dog.-Have you anything pretty? I have nothing
pretty. I have something old.—What have you old? I have the
old cheese.—Are you hungry? I am hungry.-Are you thirsty? I
am not thirsty.—Are you sleepy? I am not sleepy.—What have
you beautiful? I have your beautiful dog.-What have you bad?
I have nothing bad.-Which paper have you? I have your good
paper.-Have you the fine horse? Yes, Sir, I have it.-Which shoe
have you? I have my old velvet shoe.-Which stocking have
you? I have got your fine thread stocking.
Obs. 8. Always translate I have or I have got, by: J'ai. I have not or I
have not got, by: Je n'ai pas,¹ &c.
Salutations journalières.—To day. Aujourd'hui.
'N. B.-The use of the word, got, is condemned by grammarians, but,
as it is constantly introduced in common practice, it is perhaps expedient to
C
3*
80
FOURTH LESSON.
!
FOURTH LESSON,, 4th.-Quatrième Leçon, 4me.
VOCABULARY. 1st Section.
that, (with a noun.)
This
This
that book.
"
Of the (before a consonant).
Of the dog.
Of the tailor.
Of the baker. Of the neighbor.
That or the one.
The neighbor's, or that of the neigh-
bor.
The baker's, or that of the baker.
The dog's, or that of the dog.
Or.
Have you my book or the neigh-
bor's?
I have the neighbor's.
Have you my bread or that of the
baker?
I have yours.
I have not the baker's.
Mine or my own.
Of mine or of my own.
Yours or your own.
Of yours or of your own.
Obs. 9. Votre, your, has no
one. Notre, our, has no accent.
Of ours or of cur own.
VOCABULAIRE. 1re Section.
Ce (before a consonant, 34.)
Ce livre.
Du (genitif) avant une consonne.
Du chien.
Du tailleur.
Du boulanger.
Du voisin.
Celui.
($35.)
Celui du voisin.
(French way to express the possessive
case.)
Celui du boulanger.
Celui du chien.
Ou.
Avez-vous mon livre ou celui du
voisin ?
J'ai celui du voisin.
Avez-vous mon pain ou celui du
boulanger ?
J'ai le vôtre.
Je n'ai pas celui du boulanger.
Le mien.
Du mien.
Le vôtre.
Du vôtre.
circumflex accent. Le vôtre, yours, has
Le nôtre, ours, has one.
Du nôtre.
FOURTH EXERCISE. 1st Sec.-QUATRIÈME EXERCICE. 1re Sec.
Have you that book? No, Sir, I have it not.-Which book have
you got? I have that of the neighbor.-Have you my bread or the
baker's? I have not yours; I have the baker's.-Have you the
neighbor's horse? No, Sir, I have it not.-Which horse have you
got? I have that of the baker.-Have you the pretty gold string of
my dog? I have it not. Which string have you? I have my sil-
insert it now and then. When entirely omitted, pupils, after learning a
considerable time, are frequently at a loss how to translate: Have you got
my hat? thinking that they do not know the French of got; while they
would not hesitate to translate: Have you my hat? &c.
í
FOURTH LESSON.
31
气
​ver string.-Have you my gold button or the tailor's? I have not
yours; I have the tailor's.-Which coffee have you? I have the
neighbor's. Are you sleepy? I am not sleepy; I am hungry.—
Are you thirsty? I am not thirsty.-Which stocking have you? I
have my own or mine.-Have you your thread stocking or mine?
I have not yours; I have mine.-Which shoe have you? I have
the neighbor's wooden shoe.-What have you? I have nothing.—
Have you anything good? I have nothing good. Have you any-
thing bad? I have not got anything bad.—Are you hungry or
thirsty? I am hungry.—Which exercise have you got? I have the
fourth.-Have you your neighbor's exercise? No, Sir, I have got
mine.-Have you our velvet? I have it not. Have you our coffee?
I have not ours; I have the baker's. Have you the neighbor's golden
candlestick? No, Sir, I have got ours.-How do you do to-day?
To-day? Yes, to-day. Very well, thank you.
VOCABULARY. 2d Section.
Are you warm?
I ar warm.
I am not warm.
Are you cold?
I am not cold.
Are you afraid?
I am afraid.
I am not afraid.
VOCABULAIRE. 2de Section.
† Avez-vous chaud?
† J'ai chaud.
+ Je n'ai pas chaud.
† Avez-vous froid?
+ Je n'ai pas froid.
† Avez-vous peur
+ J'ai peur.
↑ Je n'ai pas peur.
The, (before a vowel or h mute). (See L', (avant une voyelle ou un h muet).
Obs. 5, p. 28.)
Man.
The friend.
Friend.
The man.
Of the, (before a vowel or h mute).
Of the friend.
That, or the one, of the friend.
Of the man.
That, or the one, of the man; the
man's.
Of the gold or silver.
The stick.
The coal.
The thimble.
My brother.
My brother's, or that of my brother.
Your friend's, or that of
your friend.
Our gold thimble, or the silver one.
The wooden one.
'The leather.
The leather one.
Of the leather.
(Voyez Obs. 5, p. 28.)
Homme.
L'ami.
Ami.
L'homme.
De l', (avant une vc yelle ou h muet)
De l'ami.
Celui de l'ami.
De l'homme.
Celui de l'homme.
! De l'or ou de l'argent.
Le bâton.
Le charbon.
Le dé.
Mon frère.
Celui de mon frère.
Celui de votre ami.
Notre dé d'or, ou celui d'argent.
Celui de bois.
Le cuir.
Celui de cuir.
Du cuir.
32
LESSON.
FIFTH
FOURTH EXERCISE. 2d Sec.-QUATRIÈME EXERCICE. 2de Séc.
Have you my stick, or that of my friend? I have that of you
friend. Have you your thimble, or the tailor's? I have mine of
my own. Have you my brother's coat or yours? I have you!
brother's.-Have you your dog or the man's? I have the man's.-
Have you your friend's money? I have it not.-Are you cold? I
am cold.-Are you afraid? I am not afraid.-Are you warm? I am
not warm.-Have you my coat, or the tailor's? I have the tailor's.
-Have you my gold candlestick, or that of the neighbor? I have
yours. Have you your paper or mine? I have mine.-Have you
your cheese or the baker's? I have my own.-Which cloth have
you? I have that of the tailor.-Have you the old wood of my
brother? I have not got it.-Which soap have you got? I have
my brother's good soap.-Have you my wooden gun or that of my
brother? I have yours.-Have you your friend's shoe? Yes, Sir,
I have the velvet shoe of my friend. What have you pretty? I
have my friend's pretty dog.-Have you my handsome or my ugly
stick? I have your ugly stick.-Have you the second exercise of
your good friend? No; I have the third.-Which soap have you?
I have ours.—Have you your friend's bread? No; I have ours.—
Have you the man's? No; I have it not.-Have you the silver
button? No; I have the golden one, or that of gold. -Have you the
first or the second section to-day? I have the second section.
Pretty well, well enough.
| Assez bien.
Obs 10. Good day, good morning, good afternoon, good evening (and
good night, before bed-time), are expressed in French by: bon jour or bon
soir.
FIFTH LESSON, 5th.-Cinquième Leçon, 5me.
VOCABULARY. 1st Section.
VOCABULAIRE. 1re Section.
The merchant.
Le marchand.
Of the shoemaker.
Du cordonnier.
The boy.
The pencil.
The merchant's boy. Le garçon. Le garçon du marchand
The chocolate.
The penknife. The boy's penknife.
Have you the merchant's stick, or
yours?
Neither.
Nor.
I have neither the merchant's stick
nor mine.
Le crayon. Le chocolat.
Le canif.
Le canif du garçon.
Avez-vous le bâton du marchand,
ou le vôtre?
Ne...ni.
...ni.
Je n'ai ni le bâton du marchand m
le mien.
FIFTH LESSON.
33
Have you the shoemaker's leather?
Are you hungry or thirsty?
I am neither hungry nor thirsty.
Are you warm or cold?
I am neither warm nor cold.
Have you the bread or the wine?
I have neither the wine nor the bread.
I have neither my thread nor that
of the tailor.
I have neither yours nor mine.
My boy's thimble, [the thimble of...]
Your brother's penknife.
That of mine.
Miss Rose's velvet.
That of ours.
My baker's bread, or that of yours.
Avez-vous le cuir du cordonnier ?
† Avez-vous faim ou soif?
+ Je n'ai ni faim ni soif.
† Avez-vous chaud ou froid?
† Je n'ai ni chaud ni froid.
Avez-vous le pain ou le vin?
Je n'ai ni le vin ni le pain.
Je n'ai ni mon fil ni celui du tailleur.
Je n'ai ni le vôtre ni le men.
Le dé de mon garçon.
Le canif de votre frère.
Celui du mien.
Celui du nôtre.
Le velours de Mademoiselle Rose.
Le pain de mon boulanger, ou celui
du vôtre.
FIFTH EXERCISE. 1st Sec.-CINQUIÈME EXERCICE. 1re Sec.
How do you do to-day? Pretty well, thank you.-How are you
this evening, Miss Charlotte? Very well, thank you. Good even-
ing, Sir.-Are you hungry or thirsty? I am neither hungry nor
thirsty. Have you my shoe or the shoemaker's? I have neither
yours nor the shoemaker's.-Have you your pencil or the boy's? I
have neither mine nor the boy's.-Which pencil have you? I have
that of the merchant.-Have you my chocolate or the merchant's?
I have neither yours nor the merchant's; I have my own.-Which
penknife have you? I have my brother's penknife.-Have you
Miss Rose's velvet? No, Madam, I have it not.-Are you warm,
or cold? I am neither warm nor cold; I am sleepy.-Are you
afraid? I am not afraid.—What have you? I have Miss Charlotte's
fine ribbon. The velvet ribbon? No, the golden ribbon.-Have
you anything, Sir? I have something.—What have you? I have
something fine.-What have you fine? I have the shoemaker's
fine dog. Have you my gun or yours? I have neither yours nor
mine.-Which gun have you? I have my friend's. Have you my
velvet ribbon or my brother's? I have neither yours nor your
brother's, but ours.-Which string have you? I have my neigh-
bor's thread string.-Have you the book of the tailor or that of the
boy? I have neither the tailor's nor the boy's.
This evening.
This morning.
Are you well, Miss Clara?
Not very well.
Ce matin.
Ce soir.
+ Vous portez-vous bien, Mlle. Clara!
Pas très-bien.
34
FIFTH LESSON.
VOCABULARY. 2d Section.
What have you? (ails you ?)
What is the matter with you?.
I have nothing; or
Nothing is the matter with me.
Is anything the matter with you?
No. Nothing, or Not anything.
}
VOCABULAIRE. 2de Section.
+ Qu'avez-vous ?
} Je n'ai rien.
† Avez-vous quelque chose?
Non, rien.
Obs. 11. When the verb is understood, nothing, or not anything, is
translated not by: ne...rien, but by: rien alone; and no, nothing, by:
non, rien.
Have you anything very pretty?
No, nothing.
Have you anything ugly, or old?
No, not anything. The shawl.
The parasol.
The dictionary.
The umbrella.
The cotton.
Avez-vous quelque chose de très-
joli?
Non, rien.
Avez-vous quelque chose de vilain
ou de vieux ?
Non, rien.
Le parasol.
Le châle.
Le parapluie.
Le dictionnaire. Le coton.
FREE
The Frenchman.
The carpenter.
The hammer.
The nail.
Of the Frenchman. Le Français.
Of the carpenter.
The iron.
Le charpentier.
Le marteau.
The iron nail.
Le clou.
The golden nail; that of silver.
Du Français.
Du charpentier.
Le fer.
Le clou de fer.
Le clou d'or; celui d'argent.
FIFTH EXERCISE. 2d Sec.-CINQUIÈME EXERCICE. 2de Sec.
Are you well this morning? Yes, Sir, pretty well, thank you.—
How do you do, Miss Clara? Not very well, Madam.—Are you
well, Mr. Robert? Yes, Sir, this evening I am very well.-Have
you the fifth exercise? Yes, I have it.-Have you my dictionary
or my book? I have neither your dictionary nor your book.-Have
you your parasol or mine? I have neither yours nor mine; I have
Clara's. Which shawl have you? I have the neighbor's.-Have
you the iron or the silver nail? I have neither the iron nor the sil-
ver nail; I have the gold one.-Have you my hammer or the car-
penter's? I have neither yours nor the carpenter's; I have ours.-
Which nail have you? I have the iron nail.-Which hammer
have you? I have the wooden hammer of the carpenter.-Have
you anything very fine? I have something very fine.-What have
you? This fine shawl.-Have you the Frenchman's pretty umbrella?
No, I have not the pretty one, I have the old one. The old um-
brella? Yes, the old one.-Have you the cotton, or the thread stock-
ing? I have neither the cotton nor the thread stocking.-Have you
the book of the Frenchman or that of the merchant? I have nei-
ther the Frenchman's nor the merchant's.-Which book have you?
SIXTH LESSON.
35
1
I have ours. What is the matter with you? Nothing.-Is anything
the matter with you, Mr. Robert? No, Miss, nothing.-Are you
afraid? No, I am not afraid. Nothing ails me.-Have you the cot-
ton, the cloth, or the shawl? I have neither the cotton, nor the
cloth, nor the shawl.-What have you? I have Webster's Dictionary.
I am glad to hear it. I am glad of it. | J'en suis bien aise.
And you, Sir, how are you?
Et vous, Monsieur, comment vous
portez-vous ?
SIXTH LESSON, 6th.-Sixième Leçon, 6me.
VOCABULARY. 1st Section.
VOCABULAIRE. 1re Section.
The beef, or ox.
The biscuit.
Le bœuf.
Le biscuit.
Of the captain.
The mutton.
Du capitaine.
Le mo: ton.
Of the cook.
The knife.
Du cuisinier.
Have I ?
Have I it?
You have.
You have got it.
You have not.
You have not got it.
You have nothing, (not got anything).
Am I afraid?
You are afraid.
Am I ashamed?
You are not ashamed.
Are you ashamed?
I am ashamed.
Have I anything ugly?
You have not got anything ugly.
What have I got?
Ai-je?
Vous avez.
Le couteau.
L'o'je?
Vous l'avez.
Vous n'avez pas.
Vous ne l'avez pas.
Vous n'avez rien.
+ Ai-je peur ?
† Vous avez peur.
† Ai-je honte?
+ Vous n'avez pas honte.
† Avez-vous honte ?
+ J'ai honte.
Ai-je quelque chose de vilain ?
Vous n'avez rien de vilain.
What is the matter with me? (ails me?)} Qu'ai-je ?
The fine one
The ugly one.
Which, meaning which one?
Obs 12.
out the noun.
Le beau.
Lequel? ·
Le vilain.
Which is translated by: quel, with a noun,-by: lequel, with-
Which parasol ?
Which one?
Am I afraid or ashamed?
You are neither afraid nor ashamed.
You are neither hungry nor thirsty.
Lequel?
Quel parasol ?
† Ai-je peur ou honte ?
+ Vous n'avez ni peur ni honte.
+ Vous n'avez ni faim ni soif.
SIXTH EXERCISE. 1st Sec.-SIXIÈME EXERCICE. 1re Sec.
Good evening, Miss; are you well? Very well, thank you.-1
am glad to hear it. And you, Mr. Louis, how do you do? Not
very well, to-day.-Are you well, this evening, Madam? Pretty
well, thank you.-I am glad of it. I have neither the baker's dog
36
SIXTH LESSON.
nor that of my friend.-Are you ashamed? I am not ashamed.-
Are you afraid or ashamed? I am neither afraid nor ashamed.-
Have you my knife? Which one? The fine one.-Have you my
beef or the cook's? I have neither yours nor the cook's.-Which
(lequel) have you? I have that of the captain.-Have I your bis-
cuit? You have it not.-Am I hungry or thirsty? You are neither
hungry nor thirsty.-Am I warm or cold? You are neither warm
nor cold.-Am I afraid? You are not afraid. You are neither
afraid nor ashamed.-Have I anything good? You have nothing
good.—What have I?—You have nothing. Which pencil have I?
You have that of the Frenchman.-Have I your thin.ble or that of
the tailor? You have neither mine nor that of the tailor.-Which
one have I? You have your friend's.-Which umbrella have I?
You have mine.-Have I the baker's good bread? You have it not.
-Which dictionary have I? You have your own.-Have you my
iron gun? I have it not.-Have I it? You have it.-Have I your
mutton or the cook's? You have neither mine nor the cook's.-
Have I your knife? You have it not.-Have you it? I have it.-
Which biscuit have I? You have that of the captain.
VOCABULARY. 2d Section.
Am I hungry?
You are hungry.
You are not hungry.
Am I wrong?
You are wrong.
You are not wrong.
Am I right?
You are not right.
You are right.
The butter.
The grocer.
Our grocer.
The grocer's butter or that of the
cook.
Have I the boy's penknife?
You have it not, (not got it.)
Have I Miss Clara's ?
You have neither Miss Clara's nor
the boy's.
Which one have I ?
You have the grocer's.
Have 1 the cook's butter?
You have it not. You have nothing.
Have I anything bad or old?
You have neither anything bad nor
old. (nothing)
VOCABULAIRE. 2de Section.
+ Ai-je faim?
+ Vous avez faim.
+ Vous n'avez pas faim.
† Ai-je tort?
+ Vous avez tort.
† Vous n'avez pas tort.
+ Ai-je raison?
+ Vous n'avez pas raison.
+ Vous avez raison.
Le beurre.
L'épicier.
Notre épicier.
Le beurre de l'épicier ou celui du
cuisinier.
Ai-je le canif du garçon ?
Vous ne l'avez pas.
Ai-je celui de Mlle. Clara?
Vous n'avez ni celui de Mlle. Clara,
ni celui du garçon.
Lequel ai-je ?
Vous avez celui de l'épicier.
Ai-je le beurre du cuisinier ?
Vous ne l'avez pas. Vous n'avez rien.
Ai-je quelque chose de mauvais ou
de vieux ?
Vous n'avez rien de mauvais ni de
vieux.
EVENTH LESSON.
37
Obs. 13. You have neither anything bad nor old, being a negative sen-
tence, must not be translated by: Vous n'avez pas quelque chose de mauvais
ni de vieux; but by: Vous n'avez rien de mauvais ni de vieux.
Have you anything ugly or old?
I have neither anything ugly, nor
old, nor pretty.
Avez-vous quelque chose de vilain
ou de vieux ?
Je n'ai rien de vilain, ni de vieux, i
de joli.
SIXTH EXERCISE. 2d Sec.-SIXIEME EXERCICE. 2de Sec.
Have you the fifth vocabulary to-day? No, Miss, I have the exer-
cise. Which one: the fifth or sixth? I have the fifth to-day.-Sir,
have I the sixth vocabulary, this evening? No, Miss, you have it not.
-Which one have I? You have the fifth vocabulary, second section.
-Which cloth have I? You have the merchant's.-Have you my
coffee or that of my boy? I have that of your good boy.-Have you
your shawl or mine? I have neither yours nor mine.-What have
you? I have my brother's good candlestick.-Am I right? You
are right.-Am I wrong? You are not wrong.-Am I right or
wrong? You are neither right nor wrong; you are afraid. You are
not sleepy. You are neither warm nor cold.-Have I the good
coffee or the good sugar? You have neither the good coffee nor the
good sugar.-Have I anything good or bad? You have neither any
thing good nor bad.-What have I? You have nothing.-What
have I pretty? You have my friend's pretty dog.-Which butter
have I? You have that of your cook.-Have I your parasol or the
merchant's? You have neither mine nor the merchant's.-Which
chocolate have you? I have that of the Frenchman.-Which shoe
have you? I have the shoemaker's leather shoe.—Which one have
I? You have that of the old baker.-Which one have you? I have
that of my old neighbor. What is the matter with you? I am
afraid.—Have I anything? You have nothing.
You are well, I hope ?
I am well, perfectly well.
I am no very well.
Vous vous portez bien, j'espère ?
Je me porte bien, parfaitement bien.
Je ne me porte pas très-bien.
SEVENTH LESSON,
VOCABULARY. 1st Section.
Who?
Has. TVho has?
Who has the pencil-case?
The man has the pencil-case.
7th.-Septième Leçon, 7me.
The man has not this pencil-caso.
VOCABULAIRE. 1re Section.
Qui? a. Qui a?
Qui a le porte-crayon?
L'homme a le porte-crayon.
L'homme n'a pas ce porte-crayon,
4
38
SEVENTH LESSON
Who has it?
The farmer has it.
The farmer has not got it.
His or her, (always with a noun,) 1's.
The chicken.
His chicken.
The chest, trunk, coffer. Her chest.
'The waistcoat, the vest.
Qui l'a ?
Le fermier l'a.
Le fermier ne l'a pas.
| Son, (toujours avec un nom.)
Le poulet.
Le coffre.
Son poulet.
Son coffre.
Son gilet.
His vest.
Le gilet.
The ship, vessel.
The young man.
Young.
The youth.
His rice.
Le bâtiment, le vaisseau.
Le jeune homme. Jeune.
L'adolescent.
lo, (or it, nominative case.)
II.
le has, it has.
He has not.
Il a.
Son riz.
Il n'a pas.
e has got his chest.
Il a son coffre.
He has not his waistcoat.
Il n'a pas son gilet.
He has it.
He has it not.
Il l'a.
Has he or has it?
Has he it?
A-t-il?
Il ne l'a pas.
L'a-t-il ?
→
Has he is oid knife?
Has the farmer ?
A-t-il son vieux couteau ?
Le fermier a-t-il ?
Obs. 14. In French, when in the third person, a noun is the nominative
or subject of an interrogative sentence, begin the question with the noun.
and place the pronoun, il, after the verb, as shown above.
Has our friend got?
Has this young man ?
Has the dog got the mutton?
Notre ami a-t-il ?
Ce jeune homme a-t-il ?
Le chien a-t-il le mouton ?
Obs. 15. The letter (-t-) between a and il, is inserted for the sake of
phony, and must be used whenever the verb ends with a vowel.
He has neither... nor...
He has neither mine nor yours.
Il n'a ni... ni...
Il n'a ni le mien ni le vôtre.
SEVENTH EXERCISE. 1st Sec.-SEPTIEÈME EXERCICE, 1re Sec.
You are well, I hope, Miss? Yes, Sir, I am perfectly well.—And
you, Sir, how are you? Pretty well, to-day, thank you.-I hope
yva are well, Madam? Yes, Miss, I am very well this morning.
I um very glad to hear it.-Are you cold this morning? No, Sir, I
amı not cold.—Has the youth his chicken? He has got it.-Who has
my waistcoat? The young man has it.-Has the young man his
pretty ship? The young man has it not.-Who has it? The cap-
tain nas got it.—Has the grocer my knife or yours? He has neither
yours nor mine.-Which knife has he? Which knife or penknife?
Which penknife? He has ours.-Has he it? Yes, he has got it.—
Has his brother got my gold? He has not got it.-Have you it? No,
I have it not.—Who has got it? You have it.-Has the youth your
waistco or mine? He has neither yours nor mine.-Wnich one
has he He has the tailor's.-Have you his hammer or his nail?
SEVENTH LESSON.
39
I have neither his hammer nor his nail. The carpenter has the
hammer, his boy has the nail.-Have you his umbrella or his stick?
I have neither his umbrella nor his stick.-What have you? Not
anything. Has this farmer his horse or his dog? He has neither
this nor that.-Have I the merchant's rice? Which merchant?
The old one or the young one? The young one.-You have it not ;
the old grocer has it.-Has he his coffee or my sugar? He has
neither his coffee nor your sugar.-Has the boy his dictionary, my
brother's, or that of the Frenchman? He has not his dictionary nor
your brother's; he has the Frenchman's.-Who has my pencil-case?
Which pencil-case? The gold pencil-case or the silver one? The
gold one. I have it. Has the young captain the old ship of Mr.
Henri (Henry)? He has not Mr. Henry's old ship: he has Mr.
Robert's good ship, the Helvetius.
How is your friend ?
He is not very well.
He is better.
VOCABULARY. 2d Section.
What has he? What has he got?
What ails him, or is the matter with
him?
What has the farmer? (ails him ?)
He has something. He has nothing.
The bird.
His bird.
His or hers (without the noun.) its.
My money or his or hers.
My bag or his. (hers.)
His bag of rice-of money.
This servant.
}
Comment se porte votre ami?
Il ne se porte pas très-bien.
Il se porte mieux.
VOCABULAIRE. 2de Section.
Qu'a-t-il? (Obs. 4, p. 28.)
Qu'a le fermier ?
qu'a-t-il ?
Il a quelque chose.
L'oiseau.
Le sien, (sans nom.)
Mon argent ou le sien.
Mon sac ou le sien.
Le fermier
Il n'a rien.
Son oiseau.
Son sac de riz-d'argent.
Ce domestique.
Has his servant your trunk or mine? Son domestique a-t-il son coffre ou
He has his own, (no noun being used.)
He has neither ours nor yours, he
has his own. (its own.)
Somebody, anybody.
Some one, any one.
Has anybody my book?
Somebody (some one), has it.
Has any one got it?
No one, nobody, not anybody.
Nobody has your stiek.
No one has it.
le mien ?
Il a le sien.
Il n'a ni le nôtre ni le vôtre, il a le
sien.
Quelqu'un, (not used with a nega-
tive.)
Quelqu'un a-t-il mon livre ?
Quelqu'un l'a.
Quelqu'un l'a-t-il ?
Personne ne. (Nominatif.)
Personne n'a votre bâton.
Personne ne l'a.
Is any one hungry, sleepy, or thirsty? Quelqu'un a-t-il faim, sommeil, ou
soif?
40
SEVENTH LESSON.
Some one is warm, cold, or afraid.
No one is ashamed, wrong, nor right.
Quelqu'un a chaud, froid, ou peur.
Personne n'a honte, tort, ni raison.
Obs. 16. Never translate: No one, not any one, nobody, not anybody
has, by: Quelqu'un n'a pas ; but by: personne n'a.
is
SEVENTH EXERCISE. 2d Sec.-SEPTIÈME EXERCICE. 2de Sec.
-
You are well, I hope, this evening? I am not very well, thank
you. And you, Sir, how are you? I am better, thank you.-How
your brother? He is perfectly well to-day.-How is Mr. Robert?
He is better.-Who has my trunk? The boy has it.-Is anyone
thirsty? This old servant is thirsty.-Is he hungry? No, he is not
hungry; he has his bread.-Has he the butter? He has not got it.
-What has he? He has his cheese. What has the youth? He
has the farmer's fine chicken. Has he the knife? No, he has it
not; he has the pencil-case.-Is he afraid? He is not at aid.—Is
he afraid or ashamed? He is neither afraid nor ashamed.-Is the
grocer right or wrong? He is neither right nor wrong.-Have I the
bag of rice? Yes, Sir, you have it.-Who has the farmer's rice?
My servant has it.-Has your servant my umbrella? No, he has it
not. Has he yours? No, he has it not.-Which one has he got?
He has neither yours nor mine. Has he his own? He has it.-
What has your friend's boy? He has my old penknife.-Has your
baker my bird or his? He has his.-Who has mine? The carpen-
ter has it. Is he warm or cold? He is neither warm nor cold.-
Is any one cold? Nobody is cold.-Is anybody warm? Nobody
is warm.-Has anybody my chicken? Nobody has it.-Has that
servant your vest or mine? He has neither mine nor yours.—
Which one has he got? He has his own.-Has any one my gun?
Which gun? The old one. No one has it. What has the youth?
He has nothing.-Have I your bag or that of your good friend? No,
you have the farmer's bag.-Who has Miss Clara's? Nobody has
it. Who has her shawl? Which shawl? The cotton or velvet
one? The velvet one. I have it.-Who is afraid? The tailor's
boy is (afraid).-What is the matter with him? He is afraid of
your bad dog. Has the farmer my money? He has it not.-Has
the captain got it? He has it not.-Has he anything good? He
has nothing good.-What has he ugly? He has nothing ugly.—
Has your cook his mutton? He has it.-Have I your bread or your
cheese? You have neither my bread nor my cheese.-Has any
one my gold button? No one has it.
Is your friend better, this morning?
Mr. Robert is better.
Votre ami se porte-t-il mieux, co
matin ?
Monsieur Robert se porte mieux.
EIGHTH LESSON.
41
EIGHTH LESSON, 8th.-Huitième Leçon, 8me.
VOCABULARY. 1st Section.
This, that handkerchief.
VOCABULAIRE. 1re Section.
Ce mouchoir.
This, that ox.
This, that hay.
Ce bœuf.
This, that friend.
Ce forn.
Cet ami. (Cet, always before a vowel)
Obs. 17. Cet, (before a vowel or h Cet, (avant une voyelle ou un h
mute.)
This, that man.
This, that inkstand. My inkstand.
muet).
Cet homme.
Cet encrier.
Mon encrier.
Obs. 18. Ce, meaning: this or that: Ce livre, does not offer the nice
distinction found in English, between: this book and that book. To obtain
the same degree of precision, the French say as follows:
This book.
This inkstand.
That book.
That inkstand.
Ce livre-ci.
Cet encrier-ci.
Obs. 19. Mind the hyphen (-) before ci and là.
Le matelot.
Cet arbre-là.
Son porte-feuille.
Le. matelas.
Ce livre-là.
Cet encrier-là.
Ce matelot-ci.
L'arbre.
Ce miroir-ci.
The sailor.
This sailor.
That tree.
The tree.
His looking-glass. (or her.) This...
Son miroir.
The mattress.
This garden.
Which mattress?
That pistol.
Ce jardin-ci.
Quel matelas ?
Ce pistolet-là.
L'étranger.
Notre étranger.
Ce gant.
His (her) pocket-book or portfolio.
The stranger, the foreigner. Our....
This or that glove.
Have you this or that book?
I have this one, I have not that one.
This one.
That one.
Avez-vous ce livre-ci ou celui-là ?
J'ai celui-ci, je n'ai pas celui-là.
Celui-ci.
Celui-là.
Obs. 20. Instead of: this or that book, the French say: This book or
that, because, that, (a true pronoun in this case) must have an antecedent to
agree with. (Mind the construction, and see § 35.)
Have I this one or that one ?
Ai-je celui-ci ou celui-là ?
You have this one, you have not that Vous avez celui-ci, vous n'avez pas
one.
Has the man this or that glove?
(Mind the French construction.)
celui-là.
L'homme a-t-il ce gant-ci ou celui-
là?
EIGHTH EXERCISE. 1st Sec.-HUITIEME EXERCICE. 1re Sec.
Good evening, Miss Clara, how do you do? I am not very well,
Sir, thank you.-And you, Sir, are you well? Pretty well, thank
you. I hope your brother is better. Yes, Sir, brother (mon f.) is
better. Which inkstand has the stranger? He has that of the
sailor. Has the sailor my looking-glass? He has it not: I have
sailor.-Has
it. Have you this pistol or that one? I have this one.-Have you
4*
42
EIGHTH LESSON.
the mkstand of my neighbor or that of yours? I have neither that
of your neighbor nor that of mine.—Which one have you? I have
the stranger's. Which glove have you got? Which one? Yes,
which one.
I have the sailor's. You have the sailor's glove?
Yes, I have it.-Have you his mattress? I have it not.-Which
pocket-book has the sailor? He has his own.-Who has my good
handkerchief? This stranger has it.-Has he got it? Yes, he has
it.—What has he? He has my pretty handkerchief.-Have I Miss
Victoria's handkerchief or pencil-case? You have neither this nor
that. What have I? You have not anything.-Who has that pis-
tol? The stranger's friend has it.-What has your servant? He
has the farmer's old tree.-Has he that grocer's old handkerchief?
He has not that of the grocer; he has the sailor's. -Has that ox he
hay of this horse? No, it has its own.-Which ox has the farmer?
He has that of our neighbor.-Have I your inkstand or his? You
have neither mine nor his; you have your brother's.-Has the
foreigner my bird or his own? He has got that of the captain.-——
Have you this tree? I have it not.-Are you hungry or thirsty?
I am neither hungry nor thirsty; I am sleepy.-Has the old sailor
this bird or that one? He has not this; he has that. Has our ser-
vant this broom or that one? He has the ugly one. Has your cook
this or that chicken? He has neither this nor that; he has his own.
-Am I right or wrong? You are not wrong-Who is right? No-
body. Have I this or that penknife? No; nobody has either this
or that.
Take a seat and sit down.
I thank you.
VOCABULARY. 2d Section.
The note, the billet, the ticket.
The garret, the attic, the granary.
His corn, his grain, its grain.
This copybook. That copybook.
Big, bulky, thick, coarse, large.
That big tree.
Your coarse cloth-thick paper.
But.
But not.
He has not this one, but he has that.
He has this one, but not that one.
I have that one, but not this one.
Have you this or that note?
(Mind the construction in French.
I have not this one, but that one.
Prenez un siège et asseyez-vous.
Je vous remercie.
VOCABULAIRE. 2de Section.
Le billet.
Le grenier.
Son grain.
Ce cahier-ci. Ce cahier-là.
Gros.
Ce gros arbre-là.
Votre gros drap-gros papier.
Mais. Mais non.
Mais non pas.
Il n'a pas celui-ci, mais il a celui-là.
Il a celui-ci, mais non celui-là.
J'ai celui-là, mais non pas celui-ci.
Avez-vous ce billet-ci ou celui-là ?
Je n'ai pas celui-ci,
mais j'ai celui
là.
mais celui-là.
EIGHTH LESSON.
43
I have this one, but not that one.
Has my friend my dog or his ?
He has mine, but I have his.
That or which, (relative pronoun.)
Have I the copybook that you have?
(Have I the copybook you have?)
|
J'ai celui-ci,
mais je n'ai pas celui-
là.
mais non celui-là.
Mon ami a-t-il mon chien ou le sien?
Il a le mien, mais j'ai le sien.
Que, (never understood in French,
as it is frequently in English.)
Ai-je le cahier que vous avez?
I have not the note which your bro- Je n'ai pas le billet que votre frère a.
ther has. (the note your, &c.)
That which, the one which.¹
I have not that which you have.
I have not that which he has.
Have I the glove which you have?
You have not that which I have.
Celui que. ($$ 35, 36.)
Je n'ai pas celui que vous avez.
Je n'ai pas celui qu'il a.
Ai-je le gant que vous avez?
Vous n'avez pas celui que j'ai.
EIGHTH EXERCISE. 2d Sec.-HUITIEME EXERCICE. 2de Sec.
Good evening, Madam, you are well, I hope? Perfectly well,
Sir, I thank you.—I am glad to hear it. And you, Sir, how do you
do? Not very well; but take a seat and sit down. Thank you, I
have a seat.-Have you the corn of your granary or that of mine?
I have neither that of your granary nor that of mine; but I have
that of our merchant.-Have you the grocer's? No, I have it not.
Who has my glove? That servant has it.—What has this servant?
He has the old farmer's big tree.-Has the farmer this or that ox (mind
the French construction.) He has neither this nor that; but he has
the one which the boy has not.-Which boy? The big one or the
good one? The big one.-Have you that young horse's corn? I
have it not; our servant has it.-Has your brother my note or his :
He has neither yours nor his own; but he has that of the big sailor.
-Have you the copybook? Which copybook? The big copybook.
-The big copybook? No, I have it not; but Charles has it. What
have you got? I have my copybook, yours, his, or hers, and the
grocer's. Have you the chest which I have? I have not that
which you have.-Which handkerchief have you? I have the one
which your brother has not.—Which inkstand has our friend's bro-
ther? He has that which the farmer's boy has not.-What copy-
book have you? I have the big one which you have not.-What
horse has the shoemaker? He has that which our brother's farmer
has not. What has the grocer? He has the bag of rice which I
1 Translate the one, by celui, except when the one is in apposition to the
other. (Less. 15.)
44
NINTH LESSON.
have not. Which waistcoat have you? I have that which my
young friend has not got.-Are you cold. or hungry? I am neither
cold nor hungry; but Jean (John) is afraid.—Is he afraid? Yes,
he is afraid of that big ox.-Who is sleepy? I am not sleepy, but
I am thirsty. Have you the iron or the wooden ship? I have
neither this nor that; but I have that which the big captain has not.
I am very sorry to hear it, (or for it.) | J'en suis bien fâché.
NINTH LESSON, 9th.-Neuvième Leçon, 9me.
VOCABULARY. 1st Section.
VOCABULAIRE. 1re Section.
FORMATION OF THE PLURAL.-Formation du Pluriel.
As the plural of nouns, in French, is shown by the preceding article or
attending word, we will, in the first place, give the plural of those different
expressions.
Singular.
Singulier.
Masculine.
Masculin.
Plural for
both genders.
Pluriel pour
The.
Le.
The.
les deux genres.
Les.
Of the.
Du (for: de le.)
Of the.
Des (for: de les.)
Obs. 21. Des, (contraction of: de les; preposition and article plural,) is
not, [and mind it carefully] the plural of: de, which, being a preposition, is
invariable; but that of: du, (contraction of: de le, preposition and article
singular.)
My,
Your, of your.
His, her, of his.
of my. Mon,
de mon.
My,
Votre,
de votre.
of
Mes,
Your, of your. Vos,
my.
de mes.
de vos.
Son,
de son.
His, her, of her.
Ses,
de ses.
Our,
of our.
Notre, de notre.
Our, of our.
Nos,
de nos.
Their,
of their.
Leur,
de leur.
Their, of their.
Leurs,
de leurs.
Which?
Quel ?.
Which?
Quels ?
Which one?
Lequel?
Which ones?
Lesquels ?
This, that,
Ce, cet.
These, those.
Ces.
General Rule for the formation of the Plural.
The plural number, as in English, is formed by adding an s to the singu
lar. But, in French, this rule is not only applicable to nouns, but also to
articles, adjectives, and pronouns.
The books.
Of the book.
The sticks.
Of the sticks.
Les livres.
Du livre.
Les bâtons.
Des bâtons.
Of the copybooks. Des cahiers.
The good books. Les bons livres.
Of the books. Des livres.
The good sticks. Les bons bâtons.
The copybooks. Les cahiers.
The pretty copy- Les jolis cahiers.
books.
NINTH LESSON.
45
The good friends.
Our pretty shawls.
My penknives.
Small.
Les bons amis.
Nos jolis châles.
Nos jolis châles.
Mes canifs.
Petit. Petits.
Of the friends.
Of our shawls.
Which large fans have I?
You have my large fans.
Who has the merchant's shawls?
Nobody has his shawls, but some one
has his pretty parasols and ribbons.
Which ones? The small ones.
Have you my leather shoes?
Des amis.
De nos châles.
Of his penknives. De ses canifs.
Great, large. Grand. Grands,
Quels grands éventails ai-je ?
Vous avez mes grands éventails.
Qui a les châles du marchand?
Personne n'a ses châles, mais
quelqu'un a ses jolis parasols et
ses rubans.
Lesquels ?
Les petits.
Avez-vous mes souliers de cuir ?
I have not your leather shoes, but Je n'ai pas vos souliers de cuir, mais
your cloth coats.
vos habits de drap.
NINTH EXERCISE. 1st Sec.-NEUVIÈME EXERCICE. 1re Sec.
Good evening, Miss, I hope you are well? Perfectly well, Sir,
I thank you. I am glad to hear it.-How is your father? He is
well, I hope. No, Sir, not very well. I am sorry to hear it. But
take a seat and sit down. Thank you.-Have you my gloves?
Yes, Sir, I have your gloves.-Have you the stranger's gloves? No,
Sir, I have not his gloves.-Have I your looking-glasses? You
have our looking-glasses.-What has the little sailor? He has the
pretty parasols.-Has he my sticks or my guns? He has neither
your sticks nor your guns.-Who has the tailor's good waistcoats?
Nobody has his vests; but somebody has his silver buttons.-Has
the Frenchman's boy our good umbrellas? He has not our good
umbrellas, but our parasols.-Has the shoemaker the shoes of the
strangers? He has not their shoes.-Has he their bags? Which
bags? Their leather bags. No, he has neither their shoes nor their
leather bags; but he has the velvet shoes of the merchants.-What
has the captain? He has his good sailors.—Which brooms has our
servant? He has the brooms on our grocer.-Of the young or of
the old grocer? Of the old one.-Has this man those large fans?
He has not those large fans. Has he your copybook or your friend's?
He has neither mine nor my friend's; he has his own. Have you
three of the exercises? Of which exercises? Of the exercises of
V. Value. Yes, I have three of his exercises. Has your brother
the wine which I have or that which you have? He has neither
that which you have nor that which I have.-Which wine has he?
He has that of his grocer.-Have you the bag which my servant
has? I have not the bag which your servant has.-Have you the
chicken which my cook has or that which the peasant has? I have
neither that which your cook has nor that which the peasant has.-
Is the peasant cold or warm? He is neither cold nor warm.
;
46
NINTH LESSON.
VOCABULAIRE. 2de Section.
VOCABULARY. 2d Section.
Exceptions to the General Rule to form the Plural.
1st EXCEPTION.-Nouns ending in s, x, or z, admit of no variation in the
plural; because those terminations are considered as plural ones.
The stockings.
The French.
The Englishman.
Our choice.
The nose.
Les bas.
Les Français.
L'Anglais.
My mattresses. Mes matelas.
Their woods, forests. Leurs bois.
The English.
Les Anglais.
Notre choix.
Our choices.
Le nez.
The noses.
Nos choix.
Les nez.
2d EXCEPTION.-Nouns ending in au, eu, and some in ou,¹ take x instead
of s.
The hats.
The place.
This fire.
Les oiseaux.
Les lieux.
Les chapeaux.
The birds.
Le lieu.
The places.
Ce feu-ci.
Those fires.
Ces feux-là.
That jewel.
The cabbages.
into aux.
As:
The horses.
Ce bijou-là.
These jewels.
Ces bijoux-ci.
Les choux.
Your toys.
Vos joujoux.¹
3d EXCEPTION.-Nouns ending in al,² or ail,³ change those terminations
3
Les chevaux.
General,genera. Général, généraux.
The works, labors.Les travaux.
The work, labor. Le travail.
Obs. 22. There are a few more exceptions in the formation of the plural
of nouns and adjectives, which will be separately noted as they occur.
Les bâtiments or bâtimens.
The ships.
Obs. 23. According to some grammarians, nouns of more than one sylla
ble, (polysyllables,) ending in the singular in nt, drop t in the plural, but
nouns of one syllable (monosyllables) having this ending, never do.
The gloves.
Les gants.
Ꮖ
1 The other nouns ending in ou, that take x in the plural, are: le caillou,
the pebble; le genou, the knee; le hibou, the owl. All others that have
this termination mow follow the general rule, taking s in the plural; as, le
clou, the nail, plur les clous, the nails; le verrou, the bolt, plur. les verrous,
the bolts, &c.
2 of the nouns ending in al, several follow the general rule, simply taking
s in the plural, particularly the following: le bal, the ball; le cal, the callo
sity; le pal, the pale; le régal, the treat; le carnaval, the carnival, &c.
3 The nouns ending in ail, which make their plural in aux, are particularly
the following: le bail, the lease; le sous-bail, the under-lease; le corail,
the coral; l'émail, the enamel; le soupirail, the air-hole; le travail, the
work; le vantail, the leaf of a folding-door; le ventail, the ventail. All
others having this termination follow the general rule, i. e. take s in the
plural, as, l'attirail, the train; le détail, particulars; l'éventail, the fan;
le gouvernail, the rudder: le portail, the portal; le sérail, the seraglio; &c.
NINTH LESSON,
47
The eye.
The scissors.
L'œil.
The eyes.
Les yeux.
Les ciseaux.
The pocket-
Les porte-feuilles.¹
books.
Which horses have you?
Quels chevaux avez-vous ?
I have the fine horses of your good J'ai les beaux chevaux de vos bons
neighbors.
Have I his small gloves?
you have his large hats.
voisins.
Ai-je ses petits gants?
You have not his small gloves, but Vous n'avez pas ses petits gants, mais
vous avez ses grands chapeaux.
Quels gants ai-je ?
Which gloves have I?
You have the pretty gloves of your
brothers.
Have you the large hammers of the
carpenters?
Vous avez les jolis gants de vos
frères.
Avez-vous les grands marteaux des
charpentiers?
I have not their large hammers, but Je n'ai pas leurs grands marteaux,
their large nails.
Has your brother my wooden guns?
He has not your wooden guns.
Which ones has he?
Have you the Frenchmen's fine um-
brellas ?
mais j'ai leurs grands clous.
Votre frère a-t-il mes fusils de bois?
Il n'a pas vos fusils de bois.
Lesquels a-t-il ?
Avez-vous les beaux parapluies des
Français ?
I have not their fine umbrellas, but I Je n'ai pas leurs beaux parapluies,
have their fine sticks.
The oxen.
Of my gardens.
Of your woods or forests.
Have you the trees of my gardens ?
I have not the trees of your gardens.
Of my pretty gardens.
Of my fine horses.
mais j'ai leurs beaux bâtons.
Les bœufs. (in the plural, f silent.)
De mes jardins.
De vos bois.
Avez-vous les arbres de mes jardins?
Je n'ai pas les arbres de vos jardins.
De mes jolis jardins.
De mes beaux chevaux.
NINTH EXERCISE. 2d Sec.-NEUVIÈME EXERCICE. 2de Sec.
Are you well, Miss Gertrude? Yes, Sir, I am very well, thank
you. And you, Sir, how do you do? Not very well, thank you,
Miss.-Indeed! I am sorry to hear it. Take off your shawl and hat,
and sit down.-Thank you, thank you. With pleasure, I will.-Have
I your pretty pocket-books? You have not my pretty pocket-books.
-Which pocket-books have I? You have the small pocket-books
of your friends.-Has the foreigner our good pistols? He has not
our good pistols, but our old sticks.-Who has our ships? The fo-
reigner has our ships.—Who has our fine horses? Nobody has our
fine horses; but somebody has our fine oxen.-Has your neighbor
the choice of those trees? Our neighbor has not the choice of those
trees; but the great general has it.—Who has the old jewels of Mrs.
1 ( 140.) For the formation of the plural of compound words.
42
TENTH LESSON.
Le Noir? Her brother has her jewels.-Has the little boy his toys
or his birds? He has his birds, but little John (le petit) has his play-
things. Has the farmer got the horses' hay? He has not their hay,
but their corn. Has that tailor my fine gold buttons? He has not
your fine gold buttons; but our old silver strings.-Has our friend
our big pencils? He has not our big pencils, but he has the ugly
dogs of the generals. Has little John the choice of those toys?
No, he has not the choice of those toys; but little Robert has it.
-Who has the merchant's fine inkstands? Nobody has his fine
inkstands; but I have his large copybooks.-Who has their coarse
handkerchiefs? The captain's sailor has their coarse handkerchiefs.
-Have you the grocer's coal? No, I have it not.-Have I got it?
You have it not.-Who has his coal? The servants of the generals.
-What have you? I have something bad.-What have you bad?
I have the bad chocolate.—The grocer's bad chocolate? No, the
old sailor's. Has your friend the small knives of our merchants?
He has not their small knives, but their golden candlesticks.-Have
you the big cabbages or the little ones? I have neither the big
cabbages nor the little ones.-Which have you? I have the farm-
er's good cabbages.-Have you the choice of the cabbages? No, I
have it not; but my brother has it.-Which choice has he? He has
the first.-Who has the second choice? I have it not.-What fan
have you? What fan have I? Yes, what fan have you? I have
not yours, but mine.
A sore throat.
A cold.
A headache.
A bad cold.
Mal de gorge.
Un rhume.
Mal de tête.
Un mauvais rhume
TENTH LESSON, 10th.-Dixième Leçon, 10me.
VOCABULARY. 1st Section.
VOCABULAIRE. 1re Section.
Those.
Those of the generals.
Ceux.
Ceux des généraux.
Have you my dictionaries or those of
the general?
Avez-vous mes dictionnaires ou ceux
du général ?
I have not yours, I have those of the Je n'ai pas les vôtres, j'ai ceux du
general.
Those which.
général.
Ceux que. ($36.)
Have you the handkerchiefs which I Avez-vous les mouchoirs que j'ai ?
have?
I have not those (which) you have.*
The cloak.
This seat.
Je n'ai pas ceux que vous avez.
Le manteau.
Our cloaks.
These seats.
Ce siège.
Has the tailor this gentleman's
cloak ?
Nos manteaux.
Ces sièges.
Le tailleur a-t-il le manteau de ce
Monsieur?
TENTH LESSON.
40
The gentlemen.
Ladies.
Les Messieurs.
Young ladies.
Mesdames.
(Used when speaking to them.)
Have you my silver knives?
No, I have mine.
Obs. 24.
Mesdemoiselles.
Avez-vous mes couteaux d'argent?
Non, j'ai les miens.
As mine refers to a plural noun, it must be translated by a
plural pronoun. Then use: les miens, which is plural, and not the singular:
le mien.
Mine, my own.
Yours, your own.
His or hers (his or her
Ours, our own.
Theirs, their own.
Of mine.
Of yours.
own.) Of his.
Of our own.
Of theirs.
These substantives. Those nouns.
The article.
The articles.
Which adjective? Which adjectives?
This verb.
The pronoun,
Also.
Singulier.
Pluriel.
Le mien. Les miens.
des miens.
Le vôtre.
Les vôtres.
des vôtres.
Le sien.
Les siens.
des siens.
Le nôtre.
Les nôtres.
des nôtres.
Le leur.
Les leurs. des leurs.
Ces substantifs-ci. Ces noms-là.
L'article.
Quel adjectif?
Those verbs.
pronouns personal,
Ce verbe-ci.
namely, or viz: I, you, he, it, &c.
The catalogue.
Les articles.
Quels adjectifs ?
Ces verbes-là.
Le pronom. Les pronoms personnels,
savoir: Je, vous, il, le, et cetera.
Le catalogue.
Aussi.
TENTH EXERCISE. 1st Sec.-DIXIÈME EXERCICE. 1re Sec.
Good day, Miss, you are well, I hope? Very well, Sir, I thank
you.—And you, how do you do? Not very well, this morning.
-Indeed! I am very sorry for it.-What is the matter with you?
I have a bad cold and a sore throat. How is the general? (M. le
général?) He is pretty well.-And his brother? He is pretty well
also. Take a seat and sit down.-Have you these or those nouns?
I have neither these nor those nouns.-Which ones have you? I
have those which little Robert has-namely, (savoir :) handker-
chief, inkstand, cloak, dictionary, fan, penknife, &c.-Have you:
the eye? Yes, I have : l'œil.—Have you the plural of ceil? I have it,
and he has got it, also.-Has Charles the catalogue of the verbs
which you have? He has the catalogue of those which I have and
that of yours, also. Have you the French of: to give? I have
it not; but I have that of, He is better, and that of the places. Have
you the horses of the French or those of the English? I have those
of the English, but not those of the French.-Which oxen have you?
I have those of the foreigners.—Have you the fans which I have?
I have not those which you have, but those which your brother
has. Has your brother his biscuits or mine? He has his own and
mine also.—Has he got yours or those of the young general? He
has neither ours nor those of the young general.-Which horses has
5
50
TENTH LESSON.
your friend's grocer? He has those which the stranger has not.
Has your farmer my copybooks or theirs? He has neither ours nor
theirs, but he has those of the captain.-Have I your vests or those
of the tailors? You have not theirs, you have mine.-Have I the
large cloaks? No, you have not got the large cloaks.-Which ink-
stands have I? You have not ours, but those of our neighbors.-
Have you the birds of the sailors? I have not their birds, but their
fine sticks.—Which jewels has this ugly boy? He has mine.-Have
I my shoes or those of the shoemakers? You have not yours, but
theirs.-Which paper has the man? He has ours.-Has he our
coffee? He has it not.-Have you our big coats, or those of the
strangers? I have not anything. -Has your brother this or that
lawyer? He has that one.-Have I these or those books?—You
have not anything.
I hope you are better?
Much better, at your service.
The toothache.
VOCABULARY. 2d Section.
This word.
Those words.
Have you these words or those?
Have you these or those words?
These (plural of: this one.)
Those (plural of: that one.)
I have neither these nor those.
Has he these or those ?
He has these; he has not those.
You have neither these nor those.
You have neither the one nor the
other.
You have neither the former nor the
latter.
J'espère que vous vous portez mieux
Beaucoup mieux, à votre service.
Mal aux dents.
VOCABULAIRE. 2de Section.
Ce mot-ci.
}
Ces mots-là.
Avez-vous ces mots-ci ou ceux-là?
Ceux-ci. (pluriel de celui-ci.)
:
Ceux-là. (pluriel de celui-là.)
Je n'ai ni ceux-ci ni ceux-là.
A-t-il ceux-ci ou ceux-là ?
Il a ceux-ci; il n'a pas ceux-là.
Vous n'avez ni ceux-ci ni ceux-là.
Obs. 25 The English phrases: the former or the latter; the one and the
other, are generally expressed by: celui-ci, ceux-ci; celui-là, ceux-là; but
in an inverted order: celui-ci, referring to the latter or nearest object; and
celui-la, to the former or more distant one.
Have you my guns or yours?
I have neither yours nor mine.
I have neither the former nor the
latter.
Have you not?
Have you nothing? (not anything.)
Nobody, (no one, not any one) (ob-
jective.)
You have nobody.
What have you not? (or not got?)
}
Avez-vous mes fusils ou les vôtres ?
Je n'ai ni les vôtres ni les miens.
Je n'ai ni ceux-là, ni ceux-ci.
N'avez-vous pas ?
N'avez-vous rien?
Ne....
personne. (Régime.)
Vous n'avez personne.
Que n'avez-vous pas
TENTH LESSON.
51
Has he?
Has he anything?
Has he any one?
Has he not?
What has he not?
Has he nothing?
Has he nobody?
Has not the man got?
Has not the dog got anything?
Have you my penknife?
Yes, Sir, I have got it.
Have you not (got) my penknife?
No, Sir, I have it not.
Have you not got it, Miss?
Yes, I have it.
Obs. 26. When the question is
affirmatively by: Si fait, instead of:
as usual.
Has he nothing?
No, nothing.
Yes, he has something.
Have you not your money?
Yes, I have it. No, I have it not.
Has not the scholar his book ?
Yes, he has it.
The scholar, pupil, student.
A-t-il? N'a-t-il pas ?
A-t-il quelque chose? N'a-t-il rien?
A-t-il quelqu'un? N'a-t-il personne?
Que n'a-t-il pas ?
L'homme n'a-t-il pas ?
Le chien n'a-t-il rien?
Avez-vous mon canif?
Oui, Monsieur, je l'ai.
N'avez-vous pas mon canif?
Non, Monsieur, je ne l'ai pas.
Ne l'avez-vous pas, Mademoiselle ?
Si fait, je l'ai.
asked negatively, the French answer
Oui. The negative answer remains
N'a-t-il rien?
Non, rien.
Si fait, il a quelque chose.
N'avez-vous pas votre argent?
Si fait, je l'ai Non, je ne l'ai pas.
L'écolier n'a-t-il pas son livre ?
Si fait, il l'a.
L'écolier.
TENTH EXERCISE. 2d Sec.-DIXIÈME EXERCICE. 2de Sec.
I hope you are better this evening, Miss.-I thank you, I am much
better; but my young brother has the toothache.-I am very sorry
for it.—How is Mr. Charles? He is not well; he has a bad cold.-
Has he a sore throat? No, he has not a sore throat; but he has a
headache. And you, Sir, are you well? I am perfectly well, thank
you.—I am glad of it.-Has your carpenter our hammers or those
of the scholars, our friends? He has neither ours nor those of the
scholars. Which nails has he? He has his good iron_nails.—Has
any one the fans or shawls of the English? No one has those of
the English, but some one has those of the French.-Have you not
my cloak? Yes (si fait), I have it.—Have you not the hats of the
generals? Yes, I have the generals' hats.—Has not the dog the
cook's chickens? Yes, it has his chickens.-Has he not his large
knives? Yes, he has his large knives.-Who has his cheese? His
cheese? He has it. Has he got it?-Who has my old gun? The
sailor has it. Has not the shoemaker the student's old shoe?
Yes,
he has it. Has not our cook the stranger's money? No, he has
not.—Have you not got that money? Yes, I have. (1st Direction)—
Have I anything? Yes, you have something.—What have I? You
have your friend's leather gloves.--Has not big John something
good? Yes, he has something good.-And little Charles, what has
52
TENTH LESSON.
he? Nothing. What have you small? I have Lamartine's pretty
little bird (joli petit.)—Who has our copybooks and his? I have
neither these nor. those.-Has the general's boy nothing? Yes, he
has his dictionary of French, his inkstand, his pencil, his copybooks,
and his little brother's toys.-Have I that farmer's bags? You have
not his bags, but his corn.-Has he your books or her shawls? He
has neither these nor those; but he has the old handkerchiefs.—Is
the stranger's brother hungry? He is not hungry, but thirsty.-Is
your friend cold or sleepy? He is neither cold nor sleepy; but he
is afraid.—Is he afraid of your dog? He is not afraid.-Has not the
young man the brooms of our servants? He has not their brooms,
but their soap.-Which pencils has he not? He has not mine.-Has
he not large eyes? Yes, he has large_eyes.-What eyes has the
bird? It has small eyes.
How is the weather?
What kind of weather is it?
Is it warm?
It is not warm.
† Quel temps fait-il ?
It is warm.
† Fait-il chaud?
It is fine (bad) weather.
It is cold.
Is it not cold?
Il fait chaud.
Il ne fait pas chaud.
+ Il fait beau (mauvais) temps.
Is it cold?
t Il fait froid.
I wish (or bid) you a good morning.
VOCABULARY. 3d Section.
Ne fait-il pas froid?
Fait-il froid?
Je vous souhaite le bonjour.
VOCABULAIRE. 3me Section.
Qui n'a pas ?
Qui a quelque chose?
Who has ?
Who has not?
Qui a?
Who has something?
Who has nothing?
Who has some one?
Who has nobody?
Who has not got the young bird?
Has he neither this nor that?
Has he neither these nor those?
T'he comb.
My glass.
These large combs.
Their little glasses.
Have you the glasses? I have them.
Them. (objective, § 43.)
Has he my fine glasses?
He has them.
[He them has.]
He has them not.
Have I got them? (Them have I ?)
You have them. You have them not.
Have you them not? (not got them?
Yes, I have them.
Has he not got it?
Has not the sailor got my old pistols?
Yes, he has it.
Qui n'a rien ?
Qui a quelqu'un ?
Qui n'a personne ?
Qui n'a pas le jeune oiseau ?
N'a-t-il ni celui-ci ni celui-là ?
N'a-t-il ni ceux-ci ni ceux-là ?
Le peigne.
Mon verre.
Ces grands peignes.
Leurs petits verres.
Avez-vous les verres ? Je les ai.
Les, (régime direct: avant le verbe.)
A-t-il mes beaux verres ?
Il les a. (§ 51, &c.)
Il ne les a pas.
Les ai-je ?
Vous les avez. Vous ne les avez pas
Ne les avez-vous pas ?
Si fait, je les ai.
Ne l'a-t-il pas ? Si fait, il l'a.
Le matelot n'a-t-il pas mes vieux
pistolets ?
TENTH LESSON.
53
He has them not.
Yes, he has them.
Has he not got them?
Have I it not?
Have I them not?
Yes, you have it. You have them.
Have I nobody?
Yes, you have somebody.
Have I nothing ugly?
Yes, you have something ugly.
Il ne les a pas.
Si fait, il les a.
Ne les a-t-il pas ?
Ne l'ai-je pas ? Ne les ai-je pas ?
Si fait, vous l'avez-vous les avez.
N'ai-je personne ?
Si fait, vous avez quelqu'un.
N'ai-je rien de vilain?
Si fait, vous avez quelque chose do
vilain.
Have I neither your gold nor your N'ai-je ni votre dé d'or ni celui
silver thimble ?
Yes, you have them.
What have I not?
You have not the scissors of silver.
Am I neither hungry nor thirsty?
This lawyer.
The minister.
Has not this lawyer got?
Has our cook got nothing?
Has their neighbor nobody?
What has not the doctor got?
Is not the dog hungry or thirsty?
Is Carnot neither sleepy nor afraid?
Is he not right?
Yes, he is.
Is not that minister wrong?
No; that minister is right.
Which lawyer has the stranger?
He has the minister's brother.
d'argent?
Si fait, vous les avez.
Que n'ai-je pas ?
Vous n'avez pas les ciseaux d'argent.
N'ai-je ni faim ni soif?
Cet avocat.
Le ministre.
Cet avocat n'a-t-il pas ?
Notre cuisinier n'a-t-il rien?
Leur voisin n'a-t-il personne ?
Le médecin que n'a-t-il pas ?
Le chien n'a-t-il pas faim ou soif?
Carnot n'a-t-il ni sommeil ni peur ?
N'a-t-il pas raison ? Si fait.
Ce ministre-là n'a-t-il pas tort?
Non; ce ministre-là a raison.
Quel avocat l'étranger a-t-il ?
Il a le frère du ministre.
TENTH EXERCISE. 3d Sec.-DIXIÈME EXERCICE. 3me Sec.
Mlle. Charlotte, I wish you a good morning.-How do you do
Thank you, Sir, I am very well, but very cold.-Is it cold? Yes, i
is very cold.—I am sorry for it. How is your young friend? I hope
he is better this morning.-Yes, Sir, he is better.-And how is Ma-
dame? Madame is perfectly well.-Mlle. Anne is well, I hope?
No, not very well. And her brother has a bad cold.-Take a seat
and sit down. Thank you -Is it warm to-day? No, it is not
warm.-Have you my fine glasses? I have them.-Have you not
the fine horses of the English? I have them not.-Who has them?
The old minister has. (Dir. 1st.)—Which sticks have you? I have
those of the foreigners.-Who has our small combs? My boys have
them. Which knives has the lawyer's servant? He has those of
your friends.—Which (ones) has he not? He has not ours.-Have
I not your good guns? No, you have not got them; but the old
general has them.-What has the farmer got? He has the grocer's
bag of rice.—Has not the pretty young man Miss Clara's beautiful
心
​5*
54
ELEVENTH LESSON.
handkerchiefs? He has them not, I have them.-Have you them?
Yes, I have them. I have also her velvet shawl, her gold pencil-
case, her silver inkstand, her small copybooks, her two large dic-
tionaries of French; her fans, and the toys of her friend Auguste.→
Who has the fine cloaks of the generals? The minister's servant
has them. Has the scholar the words which you have? He has
them not. Has not the scholar got good dictionaries? Yes, he has
good dictionaries of French.-Which playthings has the grocer's
little boy? He has little Henry's playthings.-Have you the nouns,
adjectives, and pronouns of the (la) ninth lesson? I have those
of the ninth vocabulary and those of the exercises.-Has the lawyer
or the minister the choice of the farmer's cabbages? The lawyer
has it.-Has he not also the choice of the grocer's cheese? Yes, he
has.—Who has the choice of the merchant's wine? The minister,
the lawyer, or the generals? Neither the minister, the lawyer, nor
the generals, but the grocer.-Are you not ashamed? No, I am
not. Is the scholar ashamed? Yes, he is.-Is he right or wrong?
He is not wrong, he is right.-Is not the tailor ashamed of his coats?
Yes, he is ashamed of his coats. Who is not cold? I am not.-
Who has nothing ugly? Their brother's friend has nothing ugly.—
Has the youth Anne's handkerchiefs? Which handkerchiefs? The
small ones. No, he has them not; but he has those of her brother.
Who has the cook's mutton? Nobody has it; but the carpenter's
dog has. (Dir. 1st.)—Has the stranger got the farmer's fine mutton?
He has it not. Have you my pretty pistols or those of my brothers?
I have neither yours nor your brothers', but my own.- -Who has
these or those nails? Nobody has either these or those.
I am glad to hear it.
I am glad to see you.
Je suis bien aise de l'apprendre.
Je suis bien aise de vous voir.
I am sorry to hear that you have the Je suis fâché d'apprendre que vous
toothache.
Out of doors. Pleasant, agreeable.
avez mal aux dents.
Dehors.
Agréable.
ELEVENTH LESSON, 11th.-Onzième Leçon, 11me.
VOCABULARY. 1st Section.
They. have. They have got.
They have not. They have nothing.
They have it. They have it not.
They have them.
They have not got them.
The Germans. The Turks.
VOCABULAIRE. 1re Section:
ont.
Ils.
Ils n'ont pas.
Ils l'ont.
Ils les ont.
Ils ne les ont pas.
Les Allemands.
Ils ont.
Ils n'ont rien.
Ils ne l'ont pas
Les Turcs.
ELEVENTH LESSON.
55
The Germans have.
The Turks have not.
Have they?
The Italians.
Have they not?
The Spaniards.
Of the Italians. Those Spaniards.
Have the Spaniards?
Have not the Italians got?
Have they got anything?
Have they nothing?
Have they got it? Have they them?
What have they? The fine ones.
They have the Spaniard's fine dogs.
What have they not?
They have not the general's paper.
ARTICLE PARTITIVE OR INDEFINITE
ADJECTIVE PRONOUN.
Some or any. (§4, § 25.)
Of some, of any, from some, any.
Some or any wine.
Les Allemands ont.
Les Turcs n'ont pas.
Ont-ils ?
Les Italiens.
Des Italiens.
N'ont-ils pas ?
Les Espagnols.
Ces Espagnols-là.
Les Espagnols ont-ils ? (Obs. 14,
p. 38.)
Les Italiens n'ont-ils pas ?
Ont-ils quelque chose?
N'ont-ils rien?
L'ont-ils ?
Qu'ont-ils ?
Les ont-ils ?
Les beaux.
Ils ont les beaux chiens de l'Espagnol.
Que n'ont-ils pas ?
Ils n'ont pas le papier du général.
ARTICLE PARTITIF.
Sii.gulier. mas.
Du. de l'.
De, (not de du.)
Du vin.
Bread.
Some or any butter.
Milk.
Du beurre.
Some or any books.
Buttons.
Des livres.
Some or any knives.
Men.
Des couteaux.
This steel.
Some or any steel.
Cet acier.
Some or any gold.
Silver.
De l'or.
Some or any friends.
Birds.
Des amis.
Pluriel, m. et f
Des.
De, (not de des.)
Du pain.
Du lait.
Des boutons.
Des hommes.
De l'acier.
De l'argent.
Des oiseaux.
Have you any wine? I have (some
wine).
Has that man any cloth?
He has some cloth, or, He has.
Has the scholar any copybooks?
He has (some copybooks).
Have they any steel?
The English have steel.
No, or not any .
I have no wine.
•
. (before a noun.)
He has no steel.
You have no cloaks.
Have they no friends?
Avez-vous du vin ? J'ai du vin.
(1re Direction.)
Cet homme a-t-il du drap ?
Il a du drap.
L'écolier a-t-il des cahiers?
Il a des cahiers.
Ont-ils de l'acier ?
Les Anglais ont de l'acier.
Ne.... pas de .... (§ 26.)
Je n'ai pas de vin.
Il n'a pas d'acier.
Vous n'avez pas de manteaux.
N'ont-ils pas d'amis?
Obs. 27. Mind that the noun after a negation, takes, not: du, nor des 1
but merely de or d'. (Or, you put de before the noun that follows a nega
tiou.)
Is anything the matter with them?
† Ont-ils quelque chose?
What is the matter with them? (ails† Qu'ont-ils ?
them ?)
Nothing is the matter with them.
What is the matter with the Italians?
+ Ils n'ont rien.
+
† Qu'ont les Italiens ?
56
ELEVENTH LESSON.
ELEVENTH EXERCISE. 1st Sec.-ONZIÈME EXERCICE. 1re Sec.
Good day, Miss Amanda, I am glad to see you. You are well, I
hope? Very well, thank you; but my father is not well.-Indeed!
I am sorry to hear it.-What is the matter with him? He has a
bad cold.—I am sorry to hear that he has a bad cold.-Has he a
sore throat too? No, but he has a pain in his head.-Is the general
well? No, but he is much better.-I am glad to hear it.-Is it cold
or warm to-day out of doors? It is neither warm nor cold; but
pleasant. I am pleased at it.-Sit down. With pleasure.-Take
this seat. Thank you.-Which ships have the Germans? The
Germans have no ships.-Have the sailors our fine mattresses? They
have them not.-Have the cooks got them? They have them.-
Has the captain your big copybooks? He has no copybooks.-Have
I them? You have them not; but I have.-Has the Italian the
boys' steel inkstand? He has it not.-Have the Turks any steel guns?
They have no steel guns.-Have not the Spaniards got them? Yes,
They have them.-Has not the Spaniard the pretty umbrellas of the
Germans? Yes, he has them.-Has he them? Yes, indeed, he
has them.
Have not the two big Italians our pretty thread gloves? They
have not. (Dir. 1st.)-Who has? The Turks have them, and they
have also our big paper fans.-The pretty ones or the old ones?
The pretty ones.-Have not the tailors our cloth waistcoats or those
of your friends? They have neither the latter nor the former; but
they have those of the general, of the lawyer, and of little John.—
Which coats have they? They have the velvet coats which the
Turks have not.-Which dogs have you? I have those which no-
body has.—Have I the handkerchiefs that nobody has? Yes, indeed,
you have those which nobody has.-Have you not any wood?—Yes,
I have some wood.-Has not your small brother got some soap ?
No, he has no soap.-Have I not some mutton? No, you have no
mutton, but you have some birds and chickens.-Have I no beef?
No, you have no beef.-Who has beef? Nobody has beef.-Have
your friends any money? They have money.-Have they no milk?
They have no milk, but they have butter.-Have I no wood? No,
you have no wood, but you have some coals. (sing. in. Fr.)-Have the
old merchants any cloth? They have no cloth, but they have cotto",
thread, ribbons, and stockings.
I wish you a good even.ng. (I bid you.)
How have you been?
I have been pretty well.
I have not been very well.
Je vous souhaite le bonsoir.
Comment vous êtes-vous. porté ?
Je me suis assez bien porté.
Je ne me suis pas très-bien porté.
ELEVENTH LESSON.
57
VOCABULARY. 2d Section.
Some or any (before an adjective).
Some or any good cheese.
Some or any fine velvet.
Some or any excellent wine.
Some or any excellent coffee.
Some or any very pretty glasses.
Some or any large fans.
Some or any old wine.
Some or any excellent cabbages.
No or not any.
'Have you any good butter?
I have no good butter, but some ex-
cellent cheese.
Has not this man some good books?
He has not any good books.
Have the young merchants pretty|
gloves and pocket-books?
They have neither pretty gloves nor
pocket-books, but fine jewels.
The clerk.
Our bookseller.
Their shoe-dealer.
These clerks.
Those cloth-merchants. (drapers.)
The milkman-butter-man.
This wood (coal) merchant.
The picture.
The painter.
Some coals.
What has the baker?
}
What have the cloth-merchants?
They have excellent clerks.
Are the Americans afraid ?
The Americans are not afraid.
De and d';
the adjectives
VOCABULAIRE. 2de Section.
De, (not du nor des.) (§ 26.)
De bon fromage.
De beau velours.
D'excellent vin.
D'excellent café.
De très-jolis verres.
De grands éventails..
Du vin vieux.
coming before
the nouns.
Repeat it bef.
every noun.
Du and des;
the nouns be-
Des choux excellents. ing before the
adjective.
Ne.... pas de..
Avez-vous de bor beurre ?
Je n'ai pas de bon beurre, mais
d'excellent fromage.
Cet homme n'a-t-il pas de bons
livres ?
Il n'a pas de bons livres.
Les jeunes marchands ont-ils de jolis
gants et de jolis porte-feuilles ?
Ils n'ont ni de jolis gants ni de jolis
porte-feuilles, mais de beaux
bijoux.
Le commis.
Ces commis.
Notre marchand de livres.
Leur marchand de souliers.
Ces marchands de drap.
Le marchand de lait-de beurre.
Ce marchand de bois-de charbon.
Le peintre.
Le tableau.
Du charbon, (always sing. in Fr.)
Le boulanger qu'a-t-il? (14 et 15
Obs. p. 38.)
Qu'a le boulanger?
Qu'ont les marchands de drap ?
Ils ont d'excellents commis.
Les Américains ont-ils peur ?
Les Américains n'ont pas peur.
ELEVENTH EXERCISE. 2d Sec.-ONZIÈME EXERCICE. 2de Sec
I wish you a good evening, Mr. Charles.-How have you been?
I have been pretty well; and you, Miss, how have you been? I
have not been well. I am sorry to hear it.-What kind of weather
is it out of doors? The weather is fine enough, (pretty tine)· hud
58
ELEVENTH LESSON.
cold. Is it very cold? Not very cold, but pleasant.-I hope, Miss
Emilie, that you are well? Thank you, but I am not well, I have a
sore throat.—And your friend Robert, how is he to-day? He is
better, much better.-I am very glad to hear that he is better.-
Which exercise have the scholars to-day? They have the eleventh,
the tenth, and the ninth.-Which ones has the young clerk? He
has the fifth, first and second section.-Have the English any silver?
They have no silver, but they have excellent iron. (§25.)-Has the
grocer any good coffee? He has no good coffee, but some excellent
wine.-Has the bookseller no old dictionaries? Yes, he has those
of Boyer and Chambaud.—Has he those which your brothers have?
No, he has not those which they have.--Has the milk-man no milk?
Yes, he has some milk.--Have the French any good gloves? They
have excellent gloves.-Have they no birds? No, they have no
birds, but they have pretty jewels.-Who has excellent chocolate?
The Spaniards have excellent chocolate.-Have they not some fine
horses? Yes, they have some very fine horses.-Have not the
Germans got large dogs? Yes, they have large dogs and oxen.¹
-Have the Americans large oxen? No, they have little oxen and
horses. Has your friend's brother got some pretty little fans?
Yes, he has some pretty little fans, shawls, and ribbons.¹-What
has he not? He has neither my shoes, nor yours, nor theirs.--Who
has those of the French? They have them and ours also.—Are
not the coal-merchants ashamed? No, but they are afraid.—Is the
clerk, the lawyer, or the minister wrong? No, they are not wrong;
but right.--Have the wine-merchants anything good? No, they
have nothing good.-Have not the Americans something beautiful?
Yes, they have the electric telegraph, (télégraphe électrique.)-Has
the painter any umbrellas? He has no umbrellas, but he has
beautiful pictures.-Has he the pictures of the French, or those of
the Italians? Who? the painter? Yes, the painter.-He has
neither the latter nor the former.
As usual.
Better than usual.
Not so well as usual.
Comme à l'ordinaire.
Mieux qu'à l'ordinaire.
Pas si bien qu'à l'ordinaire.
Is he not better? Yes, he is a little N'est-il pas mieux ?
better.
Si fait, ou
Pardonnez-moi, il est un peu mieux.
Obs. 28. Pardonnez-moi, is as frequently used as: Si fait, by the
French. (Obr. 26.)
I present my respects to you.
J'ai l'honneur de vous saluer.
¹ Repeat the article and adjective: (et de grands bœufs.)
TWELFTH LESSON.
59
TWELFTH LESSON, 12th.-Douzième Leçon, 12me.
VOCABULARY. 1st Section.
Some of it, any of it, of it, some.
Some or any of them, of them, some.
Have you any wine?
VOCABULAIRE. İre Section.
En, (before the verb.) (§ 4, § 25.)
Avez-vous du vin ?
I have some of it-of it some-I have. J'en ai. (1re direction.)
Have you any coals?
Have you no coals?
I have none, not any-I have not.
Have you not any? Yes, I have.
Have you any good steel?
I have some good... or I have.
Have I good cloth and velvet?
You have not any good. You have not.
Has the grocer any sugar and salt ?
He has sugar, but no salt.
He has (some). He has not.(any).
Has he good sugar and soap ?
He has (some good). He has not.
Have I any bread and butter ?
Have I no bread and butter?
You have some bread, but no butter.
You have neither bread nor butter.
You have some. You have none.
Have you any shoes and stockings?
I have shoes; I have no stockings.
I have (some good).
I have not (any good).
Has the farmer got good horses ?
He has (some good ones). He has not.
Has he any pretty knives and scis-
and scis-
sors ?
Has he no small penknives?
Avez-vous du charbon ?
N'avez-vous pas de charbon? (§ 26.)
Je n'en ai pas.
N'en avez-vous pas ? Si fait, j'en ai.
Avez-vous de bon acier ?
J'en ai de bon.
Ai-je de bon drap et de bon velours?
Vous n'en avez pas de bon. (1re dir.)
L'épicier a-t-il du sucre et du sel?
Il a du sucre; mais pas de sel.
Il en a.
Il n'en a pas.
A-t-il de bon sucre et de bon savor!
Il en a de bon. Il n'en a pas de bon.
Ai-je du pain et du beurre ?
N'ai-je pas de pain et de beurre ?
Vous avez du pain, mais pas de
beurre.
Vous n'avez ni pain ni beurre.
Vous en avez. Vous n'en avez pas.
Avez-vous des souliers et des bas?
J'ai des souliers: je n'ai pas de bas.
J'en ai de bons.
Je n'en ai pas de bons.
Le fermier a-t-il de bons chevaux ?
Il en a de bons. Il n'en a pas de bóns.
A-t-il de jolis couteaux et de jolis
ciseaux ?
N'a-t-il pas de petits canifs?
Il n'en a pas.
Yes, he has (some small ones). He Il en a de petits.
has not.
Have I no gold pencil-cases?
N'ai-je pas de porte-crayons d'or ?
Si fait, vous en avez.
Yes, you have.
Who has any?
Who has none ?
Qui en a?
The derk has some.
The man has none.
Who has no clerk ?
The lawyer has none.
Le commis en a.
Qui n'en a pas ?
L'homme n'en a pas.
Qui n'a pas de commis?
L'avocat n'en a pas.
TWELFTH EXERCISE. 1st Sec.-DOUZIÈME EXERCICE. 1re Sec.
Je vous souhaite le bonjour, Mr. Carnot, j'espère que vous vous
portez mieux aujourd'hui.-Merci, Madame, je me porte beaucoup
60
IWELFTH LESSON.
mieux-Mais vous, M. Napoléon, comment vous êtes-vous porté?
Je ne me suis pas bien porté, comme à l'ordinaire. Je suis bien
fâché de l'apprendre. Asseyez-vous. Prenez ce siège.-Avez-vous
assez chaud? Oui, je vous remercie, je n'ai pas froid.-Avez-vous
mal de gorge? Non, mais mal de tête.-Votre ami se porte-t-il
mieux qu'à l'ordinaire? Oui, beaucoup mieux. Je suis bien aise
d'apprendre qu'il se porte mieux.-Fait-il froid? Non, il fait agré-
able.—Mr. Charles, avez-vous mon petit canif? Non, M., je ne l'ai
pas. Qui l'a? Votre ami Jules (Julius) l'a.-Non, Jules n'a pas
le mien, il a le vôtre.-Le mien? Non, je l'ai.-Pardonnez-moi,
Jules l'a.-Les Espagnols n'ont-ils pas de beaux chevaux? Ils en
ont de beaux.-Le domestique de l'avocat qu'a-t-il? Il a le vieux
chapeau du jeune Français.-Le commis de l'épicie: n'a-t il pas
mon joli petit chien? Non, M. il n'a pas de chien.-Son frère ne
l'a-t-il pas? Pardonnez-moi, il l'a.-Avez-vous peur de ce chien-ci?
Oui, j'en ai peur.-Avez-vous peur de celui-là? Non, je n'en ai
pas peur.-L'adolescent n'a-t-il pas peur de ce bœuf-là? Pardonnez-
moi, il en a peur.
Have you any coal? I have. (1st dir.)-Have you any wood?
I have not.-Have you any good beef? I have (some good).—Any
young mutton? I have not.-Have you no good cloth? No, I have
none. No good paper? Yes, I have.-Have I the silver ribbon?
none.-No
No, you have it not.-Which have I? The velvet one.-Have I
the grocer's rice? You have it not.-Have I any rice? You have
(some.)-Has the lawyer any thread handkerchiefs? He has none.
-Who has any? Miss Rose has some very pretty ones.-Has the
clerk any money? He has none.—
He has none.-What has he? He has not
anything. Who? The clerk. Has the lawyer's servant any old
cheese? He has some.-Have not the Spaniards the scholar's dic-
tionary? Yes, they have it.-Have they our books? No, they
have them not.-Who has them? Your good friend, the minister,
has them.-Has the American any gold? He has some.-Have
the tailors our vests? No, they have them not.-Have they any
vests? They have some.-Have the French the pictures? Which
pictures? Those of the young painter.-No, the French have them
not;
but the Italians have.-What have they? The young painter's
pictures. Has not the milkman some fine oxen? Yes, he has some
fine ones. What leather has the shoemaker? He has some excel-
lent. Has the big general any jewels? He has not any.-Who has
playthings? The butterman's son has.
TWELFTH LESSON,
61
VOCABULARY. 2d Section.
The hatter.
This joiner.
The apothecary. These apothecaries.
Have our friends any old cloaks ?
They have (some old ones). (1st dir.)
They have not (any old).
Have they not (any old ones)?
Yes, they have (some old ones).
Have they good or bad books?
They have some good ones.
What have they good?
They have good books.
Have you any good ones also ?
Have you no pretty ones?
Has the hatter any hats?
Has he any ugly ones?
Has he neither ugly nor old ones?
Yes, he has old ones.
Have the joiners any hammers?
They have (1st dir.) and the hatters
also.
Have not the carpenters got some?
Yes, they have, and so have the doc-
tors.
Are the Spaniards cold?
No, they are not; they have fire.
Have the Italians any?
VOCABULAIRE. 2de Section.
Le chapelier. Ce menuisier.
L'apothicaire. Ces apothicaires.
Nos amis ont-ils de vieux manteaux?
Ils en ont de vieux.
Ils n'en ont pas de vieux.
N'en ont-ils pas de vieux?
Si fait, ils en ont de vieux.
Ont-ils de bons ou de mauvais livres !
Ils en ont de bons.
Qu'ont-ils de bon ?
Ils ont de bon livres.
En avez-vous de bons aussi ?
N'en avez-vous pas ce jolis?
Le chapelier a-t-il des chapeaux ?
En a-t-il de vilains?
N'en a-t-il ni de vilains ni de vieux ?
Si fait, il en a de vieux.
Les menuisiers ont-ils des marteaux?
Ils en ont, et les chapeliers aussi.
Les charpentiers n'en ont-ils pas ?
Si fait, ils en ont et les médecins
aussi.
Les Espagnols ont-ils froid?
Non, ils n'ont pas froid; ils ont du feu.
Les Italiens en ont-ils ?
Are the Turks afraid of the Ger- Les Turcs ont-ils peur des Alle-
mans?
No, they are not afraid of them.
Are they not afraid of the Russians? |
Yes, they are. (1st dir.).
Are they neither warm, sleepy, hun-
gry, nor thirsty ?
No, they are neither warm, sleepy,
mands?
Il n'en ont pas peur.
N'ont-ils pas peur des Russes?
Si fait, ils en ont peur.
N'ont-ils ni chaud, ni sommeil, ni
faim, ni soif ?
Non, ils n'ont ni chaud, ni sommeil,
ni faim, ni soif, mais ils ont tort.
Les chapeliers n'ont-ils pas honte de
leurs chapeaux de velours?
hungry nor thirsty, but wrong.
Are not the hatters ashamed of their
velvet hats?
No, they are not (ashamed of them). | Non, ils n'en ont pas honte.
The Russian's apothecary.
L'apothicaire du Russe.
TWELFTH EXERCISE. 2d Sec.-DOUZIÈME EXERCICE. 2de Sec.
M. Lamartine, j'ai l'honneur de vous saluer. Comment vous
portez-vous ce matin, et comment vous êtes-vous porté ? Bien: et
vous, Mr., j'espère que vous vous portez mieux aujourd'hui. Un peu
mieux, à votre service.-Quel temps fait-il? Fait-il chaud ou froid?
il ne fait ni chaud ni froid, mais agréable.-Comment se porte notre
6
62
TWELFTH LESSON.
ministre? Il ne se porte pas bien.-Qu'a-t-il? Il a un mauvais
rhume et mal de gorge.-A-t-il aussi mal aux dents? Non, il n'a
pas mal aux dents.-J'en suis bien aise.-Le bon commis a-t-il les
éventails de nos marchands? Il n'a pas d'éventails, mais il a leurs
gants de cuir.-Avez-vous du grain du fermier? Oui, j'en ai.-
Auguste a-t-il froid ou faim? Il n'a ni froid ni faim, mais il a chaud,
-Le marchand a-t-il quelque chose de joli? Il n'a rien de joli.—
N'a-t-il rien de beau?—Non, il n'a rien de joli ni de beau.—Qu'ai-je ?
Vous avez de bon chocolat.-Avez-vous le bois du menuisier? Je
ne l'ai pas, mais j'ai son marteau.-Lequel; le grand ou le petit ?
J'ai le grand.—N'avez-vous pas le petit? Si fait, ou pardonnez-moi,
je l'ai. J'ai celui que vous n'avez pas.-Quels exercices ai-je ? Vous
avez ceux de Mr. Charles, ceux de Mr. Robert, ceux de ce Mon-
sieur-là. (gentleman) et les miens.-Avez-vous le dixième, le onzi-
ème, ou le douzième ?-Je n'ai pas ceux-là, mais le huitième, et le
neuvième.-Lequel ont les Italiens? Ils ont le septième.
-
·
Has the captain any good sailors? He has some good ones.—
Have the sailors any fine mattresses? They have not (1st dir.)—
Have the painters any very old pictures? No, they have no old
pictures; but the booksellers have.-Have not the minister and the
lawyer got some also? This one has some, that one has none.-
Who has beautiful shawls, ribbons, and handkerchiefs? Messrs.
Boutilliers and Cowell have some. Has the apothecary's clerk my
penknife or his? He has his own penknife, but not yours.—Who
has biscuits? The young baker of our big neighbour has.-Who has
beautiful ribbons? The French have. Have not the carpenters
some gold and silver nails? No, they have iron nails; but the
joiners have gold, silver, and steel nails? What is the matter with
their brothers? They are wrong and ashamed.-What is the mat-
ter with the foreigners? Which? These or those? Those.-Those
are afraid of the general's dogs.—And these? These? Nothing is
the matter with them.-They are neither cold nor warm, hungry
nor thirsty. Have you Miss Clara's shawl and gloves? No, I have
them not.-Who has them? I have some, but not hers.-Who has
any of the grocer's rice? The lawyer, the general, the apothecary,
and the joiner have some of it.-Have the painters fine pictures
and gardens? They have.-Have not his joiner and his carpentør
got some beautiful old wood? The former has, but not the latter.-
Have the hatters good and bad hats? They have good and bad
ones.—Who has no pocket-book? The milk and butter men have
none.-Have you none? I have none.
I have none. Has your little clerk got
any? No, he has none.-Who has any? The booksellers have
some leather ones.-Has the apothecary anything pretty? He has
TWELFTH LESSON.
63
not anything pretty, but he has something good.-Who has you
birds? The farmer has them.-Has he their grain? He has it
also.
How are they at home?
All well-Everybody is well.
Almost all are sick.
VOCABULARY. 3d Section.
Fresh.
This fresh butter.
A dry goods store.
Fresh bread.
A journal, daily paper, gazette
To-day's paper, the paper of to-day.
A or an (article indéfini, § 3).
In, into.
In a or an.
A horse. One horse.
Have you a book? I have a book.
Have you a glass? I have no glass.
Of a.
Of a horse.
Obs. 29. The French use: je n'ai pas
I have one, (meaning: one of the
things spoken of.)
Have you a good journal?
I have a good journal.
I have a good one-two good ones.
I have two good journals.
I have three, no, four good ones.
Have I an eye?
You have one.
one.
You have an eye.
You have a large
You have two large ones.
Has your brother a dry goods store?
He has a dry goods store.
He has one. He has a small one.
He has two. A large and a small one.
He has two fine ones-three fine ones.
Four-five-six-seven-eight.
Has the scholar a paper of to-day?
He has not any (none).
Have the gentlemen five good horses?
They have six. No; they have seven
or eight.
Who has a fine satin umbrella ?
Nobody has one.
Oh yes; some-
body has one.
Anna has one.
Some or any good fresh butter.
|
Comment se porte-t-on chez vous?
Tout le monde se porte bien.
Presque tout le monde est malade.
VOCABULAIRE. 3me Section
Frais (after the noun).
Du pain frais
Ce beurre frais.
Un magasin de nouveautés.
Un journal-Un papier.
Le papier d'aujourd'hui.
Un. (mas. sing. before all letters.)
Dans. Dans un.
D'un.
Un cheval.
Avez-vous un livre ?
D'un cheval.
J'ai un nvre.
Je n'ai pas
Avez-vous un verre ?
de verre.
de ... in preference to: je n'ai pas un.
J'en ai un, (literally: I, of them; have
one. The quantity placed aftur
the verb.)
Avez-vous un bon journal?
J'ai un bon journal.
J'en ai un bon-deux bons.
J'ai deux bons journaux.
J'en ai trois, non, quatre bons.
Ai-je un œil?
Vous en avez un.
grand.
Vous avez un œil.
Vous en avez un
Vous en avez deux grands.
Votre frère a-t-il un magasin de nou-
veautés.
Il a un magasin de nouveautés.
Il en a un. Il en a un petit.
Il en a deux. Un grand et un petit
Il en a deux beaux-trois beaux.
Quatre-cinq-six-sept-huit.
L'écolier a-t-il un papier d'aujour
d'hui ?
Il n'en a pas.
Les messieurs ont-ils cinq bons che
Ils en ont six. Non:
ils en ont sept ou huit.
Qui a ur beau parapluie de satin?
Personne n'en a. Oh! si fait; quel
qu'un en a un.
Anne en a un.
vaux ?
De bon beure frais, ( frais, after)
*
64
TWELFTH LESSON.
TWELFTH EXERCISE. 3d Sec.-DOUZIÈME EXERCICE. 3me Sec.
Mr. Louis, j'ai l'honneur de vous saluer. Comment se porte-t-ou
chez vons? Tout le monde se porte bien, merci. Et chez vous?
comment se porte-t-on? Presque tout le monde est malade. Ma-
dame a mal de gorge. George a mal aux yeux. Clara a mal aux
dents. Le petit Jean a un vilain rhume. J'ai un peu mal de tête.
En vérité, tout le monde est malade. Asseyez-vous, et prenez un
peu de café. Non, je vous remercie.
Have you any fresh butter? I have some; but I have no fresh
tread.—Which bread have you? I have some old baker's bread.—
Have they any coffee? They have not.-Who has any good wine?
The grocer has some in his store. Has the cloth merchant any gold
cloth? He has some silver cloth.-Have I not got good sugar? Yes,
you have in your chest; but the farmer has not.-What has the
clerk got? Which one? The bookseller's. That one has nothing;
but mine has something good.-What has he good? He has, in his
bag, some of the good rice of the big stranger.-Have the Germans
any fresh cheese? They have none.-Have not the English got
any? Yes, they have some good fresh cheese.-Which words have
the scholars? They have the words of seven lessons.-Who has
those of the eighth? The minister, the lawyer, and Robert have
them.-Have they also those of the ninth? No, they have them
not.—Have you a pencil? I have one, and a pencil-case also.—Has
the apothecary a young clerk? He has none. Has not the general
a fine satin handkerchief? Yes, he has, and the sailor also.
Has the old tailor a satin coat? He has three.-Has the captain a
fine dog? He has two.-Have your friends two fine horses? They
have four.-Has the young man a good or bad pistol? He has no
good one. He has a bad and ugly one in his trunk (§ 18.)-Have
you a copy-book? I have six or eight. Has your servant a pen-
knife? He has.-Have I a friend? You have an old and good
one. You have two old ones. He has three ugly small ones.-Has
Mr. Cowell a dry goods store? Yes, he has a fine one.-Have not
the Germans a cloth store? No, they have a dry goods store.-Have
his carpenter and her joiner iron and steel nails? They have, and
they have also a small silver hammer.-Who has the youths' jour-
nals? Nobody has their journals; but somebody has their fans,
their satin vests (§ 140), velvet shoes, steel toys, cloth cloaks, and
hread gloves. Has the ugly Turk a young and good cook? He
has two; one young, and one old. Have you none of his coffee?
Yes, I have some, in my big cotton bag.
THIRTEENTH LESSON.
65
THIRTEENTH LESSON, 13th.-Treizième Leçon, 13me.
VOCABULARY. 1st Section.
How much? How many? (bef, a noun.)
How much satin? How much steel?
How many words? How many birds?
How much (of it) has he? (no noun.)
How many (of them) has he?
VOCABULAIRE. 1re Section.
1
Combien de ¹ (avant un nom. Dir. 7.)
Combien de satin? Combien d'acier?
Combien de mots ? Combien d'oi.
seaux ?
Combien en a-t-il ? (pas de nom.)
Combien en a-t-il ?
Obs. 30. Of it, of them, being usually omitted, when there is no noun;
say.
How much?
How many?
How many friends have you?
How many has he?
Only, but, (with a noun.)
Only, but, (without a noun).
After.
Before.
Only one (of them). But two.
I have but one friend.
I have but one-but two or three.
How many horses has your brother?
He has but one-but two young ones.
Much, many, a good deal of, very
much, many, a great many, (with
nouns.)
Much, many, &c. (without a noun.)
Much fresh butter (a great deal of).
Much gold.
Many words.
Has he many cabbages?
He has (many)—not (many).
Have they neither much iron nor
steel?
Too much. Too many, (with and
without noun).
Have you too many words?
I have (too many). I have not. (Dir. 1.)
He has neither too much of this one
nor of that.
Combien en (avant le verbe,)
Combien d'amis avez-vous?
Combien en a-t-il ?
Ne (avant) que, (après le verbe.)
N' en
Avant.
que.
Après.
N'en...qu'un. N'en... que deux.
Je n'ai qu'un ami.
Je n'en ai qu'un-que deux ou trois.
Combien de chevaux a votre frère ?
Il n'en a qu'un-que deux jeunes.
Beaucoup de.... (avec les noms.)
(Dir. 7.)
En.
beaucoup (sans nom).
Beaucoup de beurre frais.
Beaucoup d'or. Beaucoup de mots
A-t-il beaucoup de choux?
Il en a beaucoup-Il n'en a pas beau
coup.
N'ont-ils ni beaucoup de fer, ni
beaucoup d'acier ?
Trop de (avec). En....
nom.)
trop (sans
Avez-vous trop de mots ?
J'en ai trop. Je n'en ai pas trop.
Il n'a ni trop de celui-ci ni de celui-
là.
A-t-il beaucoup de choses? Il en a
beaucoup trop.
Has he many things? He has too
many by far (a great deal too much).
THIRTEENTII EXERCISE. 1st Sec.-TREIZIÈME EXERCICE. 1re Sec.
Comment! (How!) Vous avez mal de gorge? Oui, j'ai un très-
mauvais mal de gorge.-Avez-vous un rhume aussi? Non, je n'ai
pas de rhume. J'espère que votre jeune frère se porte bien.—Oui,
Cardinal numbers answer the question: Combien ?
How many?
Two-Deux, &c.
3
6*
66
THIRTEENTH LESSON
il se porte très-bien. Quelqu'un est-il malade chez vous? Personne
n'est malade. Mr. j'ai l'honneur de vous saluer et j'espère que
vous vous portez mieux.-Je me porte beaucoup mieux, je vous
remercie. Fait-il chaud? Il ne fait pas froid.-Asseyez-vous, pre-
nez ce siège-ci. Non merci.-Votre cuisinier se porte-t-il mieux"
Il se porte bien. J'en suis bien aise.
How many friends have you? I have two good friends.-Have
you eight good trunks? I have nine.-Has our servant three brooms'
He has only one good one.-Has the captain two fine ships? He
has only one.-How many sailors has he? He has too many; he
nas thirteen.-How many hammers have the carpenter and joiner'
They have many.--Have they too many? They have not. (Dir.-1.)—
Have not the shoemakers many shoes? Yes, they have many, bu:
not too many. Has not the young man an old copy-book? Yes, he
has.-Has the clerk ten fans? No, he has but seven; but he has
ten handkerchiefs, nine inkstands, eight combs, and many pencils.-
How much money have the Spaniards? They have not much.-
Have they not many fine horses? Yes, they have. Has your neigh
bor much coffee? He has some.-How many bags has he? He
has only six or seven:-Who has too much grain? Nobody has.-
What has he got in his hat? He has some journals.-How many
has he? He has three or four.-Has he but three or four? No, he
has but three or four.
How many good generals have the Americans? They have a
great many. What have the Russians? They have much salt:
but not too much.-Have the farmers much fresh butter? They have
some old, but none fresh.-Have you brothers? I have but one.-
What have the apothecaries got in their stores?—They have many
things.-Have they too many? Yes, too many by far.-Has the dry
goods merchant any satin, cotton and thread? He has neither satin
cotton, nor thread.—What has he got? He has many things.-Has
he anything pretty? Yes, he has. (Dir. 1.)-Has the scholar a
copybook? No, he has none. Oh! yes, he has one in his trunk.—
What has the grocer got in this and in that bag? In this he har
some clothes. In that, he has cabbages, grain, and fresh cheese.-
Has he biscuits? He has.-Is the man afraid? No, he is no
afraid.—Are not the generals cold and hungry? No, but they ar
warm and thirsty.-Who is ashamed? The minister's little boy i
ashamed. He is wrong.-Who has the electric telegraph? The
Americans have it. -Ḥas the youth any pretty sticks? He has n
pretty sticks, but some beautiful birds.-What chickens has ou
cook? He has some pretty chickens.-How many has he? He ha
six. Has the hatter any hats? He has a good many. Has the
joiner much wood? He has not a great deal; but enough.
THIRTEENTH LESSON.
67
VOCABULARY. 2d Section.
Have we ?
We have not.
Have we not got?
VOCABULAIRE. 2de Section.
Avons-nous ?
Nous n'avons pas.
Nous avons.
N'avons-nous
We have.
What have we? is the matter with us?
We have nothing, or nothing is, &c.
Have we it? We have them.
Hr.ve we anybody?
We have nobody, (not anybody).
Whom?
Whom have we?
We have our young and old friends.
Are we warm? We are not cold.
Enough. (Dir. 6.) Enough of it, of them.
Money enough. Enough knives.
We have enough (of it or them).
But little, only a little, not much, not
many, but few. (Dir. 7.)
Who has but little money?
I have not much, or but little.
Not much of it, but few of them.
Have we not many friends?
We have but few.
Have I but few?
You have not many.
Has he but little ?
The lawyers have but few
Who has but little ?
Nobody has much (many).
The merit.
Some merit.
This lawyer has great merit.
Little-Little merit. (Dir. 7.)
Little of it-He has little of it.
A little....
A little cloth.
A little of it.
Jle has a little.
Nine-ten-eleven-twelve.
Courage.
Pepper.
Some vinegar.
pas ?
Qu'avons-nous ?
Nous n'avons rien.
L'avons-nous ?
Nous les avons.
Avons-nous quelqu'un ?
Nous n'avons personne.
Qui?
Qui avons-nous ?
Nous avons nos jeunes et nos vieux
amis.
Avons-nous chaud? Nous n'avons
pas froid.
Assez de (av. le nom.). En.. assez.
Assez d'argent. Assez de couteaux.
Nous en avons assez.
de}
avant le nom,
Ne.. guère de, or
Ne..pas beaucoup de
Qui n'a guère d'argent?
Je n'en ai guère-Je n'en ai pas
beaucoup.
N'en..guère-N'en..pas beaucoup.
N'avons-nous pas beaucoup d'amis?
Nous n'en avons guère.
N'en ai-je guère ?
Vous n'en avez pas beaucoup.
N'en a-t-il guère ?
Les avocats n'en ont guère.
Qui n'en a guère ?
Personne n'en a guère.
Le mérite.
Du mérite.
Cet avocat a un grand mérite.
Peu de (av. le n.). Peu de mérite.
En peu-Il en a peu.
•
Un peu de....
En.... un peu
Un peu de drap. Il en a un peu.
Neuf-dix-onze-douze.
Du cœur, (du courage).
Du poivre.
Du vinaigre.
THIRTEENTH EXERCISE. 2d Sec.-TREIZIÈME EXERCICE. 2de Sec.
J'ai l'honneur de vous saluer, Mle. Sophie. Monsieur, je vous
souhaite le bonjour-Comment vous êtes-vous porté ? Je vous
remercie, Mle., je me suis très-bien porté, comme à l'ordinaire-
Comment se porte-t-on chez vous? Chez moi? Tout le monde se
porte bien, merci-Le menuisier se porte-t-il mieux? Il ne se porte
pas mieux. Je suis fâché de l'apprendre. Qui a mal de tête chez
68
FOURTEENTH LESSON.
vous? Personne n'a mal de tête chez moi; mais mon frère a mal
aux dents.
Have we many notes? We have only a few.-How many notes
have we? We have only three pretty ones.-Have you fresh butter
enough? We have not enough.-Have our boys too many ink-
-stands? They have not too many, but enough.-Has our young
friend too much milk?. He has only a little, but enough.-Who has
good many words? The scholars have enough, but not too many.-
Have they many gloves? Who? The farmers or scholars (§ 15)?
The farmers. They have not any. Has the cook any pepper (§ 25),
salt, and vinegar? He has not enough vinegar, but he has too much
pepper and salt. Have we inuch soap? We have only a little.-
Has the merchant much cloth? He has a good deal.-Who has a
good deal of paper? Our neighbors have.-Have these tailors
many buttons? They have but few.-Has the painter many gar-
dens? He has not many.-How many gardens has he? He has
but two. Have we the Germans' knives? We have them.-Have
we the captain's fine horses? We have them not; the general has
them.-Have we any good and fine (§ 18) jewels? We have a
good many. What jewels have we? We have gold, silver, and
steel jewels (§ 140). What candlesticks have our friends. They have
the old iron ones (les vieux de fer.) Have we not Sarah's satin ribbons?
No, we have them not.-Have we not any ribbons? Satin ribbons?
Yes, satin ribbons? Yes, we have many, but not Sarah's.-Has the
clerk any of the grocer's chocolate, sugar, coffee, vinegar, pepper,
salt, and biscuits (§ 140)? He has not.-Whom have you to-day?
We have the minister of merit.-Whom has your brother? He has
nobody.-Whom have I? The lawyer who has little merit.-Who
has merit? Doctor (Docteur) M— has much merit.-Have we
neither gold nor silver? Yes, we have.—What have they? They
have something fine.-Have you anything bad? Yes, and I am
ashamed of it.
+
FOURTEENTH LESSON, 14th.-Quatorzième Leçon, 14me.
VOCABULARY. 1st Section.
A few-Some. ($ 3.)
A few books.
A few friends.
exercises?
Some (of them).
Have you a few
A few of....
|
VOCABULAIRE. 1re Section."
Quelques (no de, before the noun).
Quelques livres. Quelques amir
Avez-vous quelques exercices?
A few (of them). En.... quelques un.
Quelques uns des..
• • •
They have a few of mine (some of). Ils en ont quelques uns des miens.
Have we not a few?
One or a sou.
Some sous.
N'en avons-nous pas quelques uns f
Des sons.
Un sou.
FOURTEENTH LESSON.
69
¿
One or a franc.... Some francs.
A dollar.
Half a dollar.
Obs. 31. In the United States, the
to the ar final, its French sound.
A one dollar note. Two dollars.
A three, five, or ten dollar note.
A two dollar one, or one of two dollars.
Other. One or another. Some others.
Another dollar. Some other dollars.
Have we another franc?
Have we some other francs? (some
more ?)
We have another. We have some
more.
No other horse.... horses ($ 26).
I have no other horse.
I have no other.
Have they other horses?
They have others.
We have no others (§ 28).
The arm.
The heart.
The work.
The foot.
The month.
The volume.
I have but a few dollars.
You have but a few (of them).
We have but a few volumes.
They have but a few.
He has but a few.
Quelques francs.
Un demi-dollar.
Un franc.
Un dollar.
French use the word: dollar; giving
Un billet d'un dollar. Deux dollars.
Un billet de trois, de cinq ou de dix
dollars.-Un de deux dollars.
Autre. Un autre. D'autres (§ 26).
Un autre dollar. D'autres dollars.
Avons-nous un autre franc ?
Avons-nous d'autres francs?
Nous en avons un autre (à autres).
Ne.... .pas
chevaux.
d'autre chuval-d'autres
Je n'ai pas d'autre cheval.
Je n'en ai pas d'autre.
Ont-ils d'autres chevaux?
Ils en ont d'autres.
Nous n'en avons pas d'autres.
Le bras.
Le cœur.
L'ouvrage.
Le pied.
Le mois.
Le volume.
Je n'ai que quelques dollars.
Vous n'en avez que quelques uns.
Nous n'avons que quelques volumes.
Ils n'en ont que quelques uns.
Il n'en a que quelques uns.
FOURTEENTH EXERCISE. 1st Sec.-QUATORZIÈME EXERCICE, 1re Sec.
Have you many knives? I have a few.-Have you many pen-
cils? I have only a few.-Has the painter's friend many looking-
glasses? He has only a few.-Have your boys a few sous? They
have a few. Have we not a few francs? Yes, we have. (Dir. 1.)—
How many francs have we? We have ten.-Have we but ten?
We have but ten.-How many dollars has the Spaniard? He has
not many, he has only five.-How many half dollars has he? He
has ten. Who has a ten dollar note? I have a five dollar note;
little John has a three dollar one; the clerks have two two dollar
notes; the doctor has one of a dollar; but nobody has a ten dollar
one.-Who has the beautiful glasses of the Italians? We have
them.-Have the English many ships? They have.-Has the milk-
man many horses? No, he has but two.-What have the Germans?
They have inany dollars.-How many have they? They have
eleven. Have we the journals of the English or those of the Ger
70
FOURTEENTH LESSON.
He
mans? We have those of the former, but not of the latter.-Have
we the satin parasols of the Spaniards? We have them not, but
the Americans have. Has the butter man much fresh butter?
has only a little, but enough.-Have the sailors the cotton mattresses
that we have? They have not those which we have, but those
which their captains have.--Has the Frenchman many francs? He
has only a few, but he has enough.-Has your servant sous enough?
He has only a few, but he has dollars enough.
Have the Russians dollars, half dollars, francs, and so.as? No, they
have none. Who has any? The Americans have dollars and half
dollars, and the French have francs and sous.-Have you a ten dollar
bill in your pocket-book? No, but I have two five dollar ores, and
a few of one and two dollars.-How many feet have men? They
have two. How many has that one? He has but one.-How many
has that other one? Which one? The big or the tall one? The
big one. He has two. How many feet have horses, oxen, birds
and chickens? (§ 15.) Horses and oxen have four feet, but birds and
chickens have but two.
N. B.-Let the pupil try to compose a French exercise on the words of
daily salutations, as none is given here.
VOCABULARY. 2d Section.
What day of the month is it?
What day of the month have we?
It is the first.
The second.
We have the first.
The second.
It is not the third; it is but the
second.
VOCABULAIRE. 2de Section.
Quel jour du mois est-ce ?
Quel jour du mois avons-nous?
C'est le premier. C'est le deux.
Nous avons le premier. Le deux.
Ce n'est pas le trois; ce n'est que le
deux.
Obs. 32. The cardinal numbers are used in French for dates, though the
ordinal be used in English except : le premier, for the first of every month.
It is the eleventh.
We have the eleventh.
It it not the twelfth ?
Have we not the twelfth ?
C'est le onze (not l'onze).
Nous avons le onze.
N'est-ce pas le douze?
N'avons-nous pas le douze ?
Obs 33. The ordinal numbers are formed of the cardinal by adding ième,
(and when they end in e, this is dropped.) Premier and second are irregular,
ind used for first and second, but not in compound numbers, such as: twenty
first, twenty-second; which are not: vingt-premier, vingt-second; but ving‣
et unième, vingt-deuxième.
Which volume have you?
I have the eleventh-the thirty-first.
One,
Two.
un.
The first.
deux. The second.
Quel volume avez-vous?
J'ai le onzième-le trente et unième
Singulier.
Pluriel.
Le premier.
Les premiers.
Le deuxième, le Les deuxièmes, les
second.
seconds,
FOURTEENTH LESSON.
71
Three,
trois. The third.
Four,
quatre. The fourth.
Five,
cinq.
The fifth.
Nine, neuf.
Eleven, onze.
The ninth.
The eleventh.
'Twenty, vingt. The twenty-first.
Le troisième.
Le quatrième.
Le cinquième.
Le neuvième.
Le onzième.
Le vingt et uni-
ême.
Les troisièmes.
Les quatrièmes.
Les cinquièmes.
Les neuvièmes.
Les onzièmes.
Les vingt et uni-
èmes.
The twenty-second. Le vingt-deux- Les vingt-deux.
Thirty, trente, The thirty-first.
Hundred, cent.
ième.
Le rente et unième. 1
ièmes.
The hundred and
first.
The last.
Le cent-unième. Les cent-unièmes.
Les derniers.
These last exercises.
Le dernier.
His last dollar. Ces derniers exercices. Son dernier
Our last paper or journal.
The first and last day of the month.
That is right. That's not right.
Is this, is that, or is it his copy-book?
It is, this is, that is his.
dollar.
Notre dernier papier ou journal.
Le premier et le dernier jour du mois.
C'est bon. Ce n'est pas bon.
Est-ce son cahier?
C'est le sien.
N. B.-No French exercise is given here. Let the pupil try to compose
ɔne on the words of daily salutations.
FOURTEENTH EXERCISE. 2d Sec.-QUATORZIÈME EXERCICE. 2de Sec.
Monday, April fourteenth, 1849.
S Lundi, quatorze Avril, mil huit cent
quarante-neuf.
ناكم
How many exercises have we, to-day? We have but one.-Have
we but one? No, we have but one.-What day of the month is it?
it is the fourteenth.-Is it the fourteenth, indeed? Yes, it is (the
14th). Have you the paper of to-day? To-day's paper? No; but
the clerk has it.-Has he but one? No, he has three.-Is this the
last journal? Yes, it is.-Is not to-day the fourteenth? No, it is
only the thirteenth.-Indeed! yes, indeed! That's right. That's
very well.-How many stockings has the merchant? He has but
few; but he has many shawls, gloves and ribbons.-Have you any
other biscuits? I have no other.-How many servants has that gen-
tleman? He has but three; but these foreigners have five.-Has
the general much merit? He has.-Has W. Irving's last work much
merit? Yes, it has.-How many arms has this man? He has one.-
How many feet has the captain? He has but one.-How many has
1 Let the learner write the date, before his task. Ex. Lundi, seize
Avril, mil huit cent quarante-neuf. Monday, April 16th, 1849.
Days of the week-Jours de la Semaine-Sunday, Dimanche; Monday,
Lundi; Tuesday, Mardi; Wednesday, Mercredi; Thursday, Jendi; Fri-
day, Vendredi; Saturday, Samedi.
For the names of the months, ($ 143,)
*
72
FIFTEENTH LESSON.
the general? He has two.-What heart has your boy? He has a
good heart.-Have you no other servant? Yes, I have another.-
Has your friend no other birds? Yes, he has.-How many? He
has six others.-Have the Spaniards and Italians many trees in their
gardens? No, they have but few; bat the lawyer of merit has a
great many in his.
Which volume have you? I have the first.-Have you the second
volume of my work? I have it.-Have you .the third or fourth
exercise? I have neither the former nor the latter.-Have the
boys the fifth or sixth volume? They have the fifth, but we
have the sixth.-Which volume has your friend? He has the
twenty-first. Is not to-day the eleventh of this month? The eleventh
of the month? No. It is the twelfth. The twelfth! indeed!-Has
the youth much money? No, but he has our gold.—Who has cou-
rage? The baker's little friend.-Have we the nails and hammers
of the joiner, or those of the carpenter? We have neither those of
the joiner nor of the carpenter, but those of the grocer. Is this
your copy-book? Yes, it is mine.-Is not this Miss Anne's velvet bon-
net? Yes, it is hers.-Has your clerk or mine got the good two dollar
note? Mine has it not.-What has he? He has the five dollar
one. Has the minister this or that work? He has but that one.-
Who has the other? Nobody has it. It has no merit.-Whom have
we to-day? We have our young friends and those of the farmer.—
Have the Russians (les Russes) pepper? They have but little pep-
per, but a good deal of salt.-Have the Turks much wine? They
have not much wine, but a good deal of coffee.-Who has a good
deal of milk? The Germans have a good deal.-Have you no
other gun? I have no other.-Have we any other cheese? We
have some other.-Have I no other pistol? You have another.
FIFTEENTH LESSON, 15th.-Quinzième Leçon, 15me.
VOCABULARY. 1st Section.
The tome (volume). The last tome.
Have you the first or second tome of
my work?
Both, or both the one and the other.
I have both.
Have you their gold or silver?
I have neither (the one nor the cther).
The one and the other, (plural.)
Has your brother my gloves or his?
He has (both) yours and his.
VOCABULAIRE. 1re Section.
Le tome.
Le dernier tome.
Avez-vous le premier ou le deuxième
tome de mon ouvrage ?
L'un et l'autre.
J'ai l'un et l'autre.
Avez-vous leur or ou leur argent?
Je n'ai ni l'un ni l'autre.
Les uns et les autres.
Votre frère a-t-il mes gants ou les
siens ? Il a les uns et les autres.
FIFTEENTH LESSON.
73
Has he theirs or those of the clerks? | A-t-il les leurs ou ceux des commis?
He has neither. (Mind Dir. 1.)
Have they neither? (sing.).
Have they neither? (plur.)
They have the one, but not the other.
The Scotchman. The Dutchman.
The Irishman.
The Swiss.
Still, yet, some, or any more, more.
Any more satin. Some more steel.
Yet some dollars. A few more francs.
Have you any more cloth ?
I have still some cloth. I have more.
Has he any more steel? He has.
Have I yet many things?
You have still many (many more).
Have the Dutch any more pepper?
They have not, but we have.
Have you yet vinegar and sugar
enough?
We
e have enough of the one, but not
enough of the other.
Il n'a ni les uns ni les autres.
N'ont-ils ni l'un ni l'autre ?
N'ont-ils ni les uns ni les autres?
Ils ont l'un mais non pas l'autre.
L'Écossais.
Le Hollandais.
Le Suisse.
L'Irlandais.
Encore (affirmatif).
Encore du satin. Encore de l'acier.
Encore des dollars. Encore quelques
francs.
Avez-vous encore du rap?
J'ai encore du drap. J'en ai encore.
A-t-il encore de l'acier? Il en a
encore.
Ai-je encore beaucoup de choses?
Vous en avez encore beaucoup.
Les Hollandais ont-ils encore du poi-
vre ?
Ils n'en ont pas; mais nous en avons.
Avez-vous encore assez de vinaigre
et de sucre ?
Nous avons assez de l'un; mais pas
assez de l'autre.
N. B.-Let the pupil compose a French Exercise.
FIFTEENTH EXERCISE. 1st Sec.-QUINZIEME EXERCICE. 1re Sec.
Tuesday, April.... 1849. Write the date fully in French.
Which exercises have these gentlemen to-day? We have two.-
Which? The fourteenth and fifteenth.-Have you many words?
No, not many. Which volume of Cuvier's great works has your
brother? He has the last.-Has he not the seventh, also? He has
it not.-Ho ▾ many tomes has that work? It has ten. (Dir. 1.)—
Have you my work o. my friend's? I have both.-Has the foreigner
my comb or your knife? He has both.-Have the Dutch the fresh
bread or cheese? They have neither the one nor the other.-Have
I your penknife or my friend's? You have neither.-Who has them?
I have. Has the Dutchman my glass or that of this scholar? He
has neither. (Dir 1.)-Has the Irishman our horses or chests? He
has both. What have those Irishmen? They have some one dol-
lar notes. Has the Scotchman our leather shoes or cotton stockings?
He has neither.-What has he? He has the iron guns of the Swiss.
-What has the Swiss got? He has the Scotchman's stick.-Have
the Dutch our ships or those of the Spaniards? They have neither.
-Which ships have they?. They have their own.
Has our grocer any more pepper? He has some more.-Has the
2
7
74
FIFTEENTH LESSON.
lawyer's clerk any more half dollars? He has some more. He has
yet four or five.-Has he any more jewels? He has no jewels.—
Is the Swiss warm and hungry? No, he is neither warm nor hun-
gry; but the Irishman is dry and sleepy.-Who is ashamed? No
one is ashamed, but the minister is afraid of our big dog.-Is not
the Scotchman right? Yes, he is, and the Russian too. Are not
the doctor and the apothecary wrong? No, they are not wrong.-
Have the Irish anything old? They have.-Who has something
ugly? No one has.-Have the Americans any more salt? They
have, and some fresh butter, too. Have the painters anything pretty?
No, to-day they have nothing.-Have they not one pretty fan? Oh,
yes! They have still one.-How many lawyers have you? We
have a great many; we have also many (Dir. 7) physicians, minis-
ters, grocers, gentlemen, apothecaries, and merchants.-Has the
youth Miss Anne's shawl? He has, and he has also her velvet
bonnet (§ 32), her gold pencil-case, satin bag, handkerchief, and
jewels. That's right. Is this the last journal? No, it is that of the
eleventh. Very well.
VOCABULARY. 2d Section.
Obs. 34. More, affirmative, is encore.
Not any more, no more. No longer
any-no longer any more.
I have no more fire, and he has no
more.
He has no more rice. He has no more.
Have we any more fresh butter ?
I have no more (no longer any).
We have no more (no longer any).
Has the wine merchant any more
vinegar? No, he has no longer any.
We have no more of that good coffee.
Have the grocers no more of it?
They have no more. I have no more.
Have they no more gold nor silver?
Yes, they have a little more.
Not much more, not many more.
VOCABULAIRE. 2de Section.
But with a negation, use, for:
Ne... plus de, (avec un nom.)
Nen.
plus, (sans le nom.)
Je n'ai plus de feu, et il n'en a plus.
..
Il n'a plus de riz. Il n'en a plus.
Avons-nous encore du beurre frais ?
Je n'en ai plus.
Nous n'en avons plus.
Le marchand de vin a-t-il encore du
vinaigre? Non, il n'en a plus.
Nous n'avons plus de ce bon café.
Les épiciers n'en ont-ils plus ?
Ils n'en ont plus. Je n'en ai plus.
N'ont-ils plus ni or ni argent?
Si fait, ils en ont encore un peu.
Ne...plus guère de, (avec un nom.)
N'en.... plus guère, (sans nom.)
Have you much more velvet? (Dir. 7.) Avez-vous encore beaucoup de ve-
I have not much more.
lours? Je n'en ai plus guère.
Has the boy many more toys? He Le garçon a-t-il encore beaucoup de
has not many more.
joujoux? Il n'en a plus guère.
One more inkstand. No more ink- Encore un encrier. Plus d'encrier.
stand.
A few words. No more words.
Encore quelques mots. Plus de mots,
Que 35. Plus d'encrier-Plus de mots, which seem to signify: more ink.
FIFTEENTH LESSON.
75
stand—more words, is, however, in French, a negative expression. As the
verb: I have, he has, &c., is understood, so is the nc, which precedes it.
($171, R. 8.)
One more cabbage. A few more.
Have you a few more dollars?
I have (a few more).
Have I still too many sous?
You have not too many, but enough.
How much more gold has he?
He has a little more (yet a little).
How much or how many more has he?
The last. The last two, three.
Encore un chou. Encore quelques
uns.
Avez-vous encore quelques dollars?
J'en ai encore (quelques uns).
Ai-je encore trop de sous ?
Vous n'en avez pas trop, mais assez.
Combien d'or a-t-il encore ?
Il en a encore un peu.
Combien en a-t-il encore?
Le dernier. Les deux, les trois der-
niers.
The general's stick and gloves. (§ 32, Le bâton du général et ses gants.
N. 3.)
FIFTEENTH EXERCISE. 2d Sec.-QUINZIÈME EXERCICE. 2de Sec.
Wednesday, April .... 1849. Mercredi,.... Avril, 1849.
Have you one more exercise, Messrs.? We have two more.-
Which? The last two.-Has our cook much more fresh beef? He
has not much more.—Has he many more chickens? He has not.—
Has the farmer much more milk? He has not much more milk;
but he has a great deal more butter.-Have the French many more
horses? They have not many more.-Has our friend one more
umbrella? He has no more.-Has the tailor no more buttons? He
has no more. Has our carpenter no more nails? He has no more
nails; but he has a little more wood.-Has this cook no more fire?
Yes, he has a little more.-Have those Spaniards a few more half
dollars? They have a few more.-Have you a few more francs?
We have no more francs; but some more dollars.-Have the Swiss
still vinegar enough? They have theirs and mine.-Have they?
(Dir. 1.) Yes, they have.-Have we any of the grocer's sugar?
No, we have no more. Has the joiner wood enough? He has
enough.-Has he the stranger's wood? He has it not.-Has he his
iron and wooden hammers? He has them not.-Have the sailors
got their rice (§ 32), biscuits, beef, bread, and wine? They have
them; but they have neither fresh butter nor cheese.
How many ships has the little Russian? These two.-Has he no
more? No, he has but two.-Is this to-day's paper? No, it is not.-
Which journals has the lawyer? He has the last three.-What day
of the month is it? It is the sixth.-How many friends have you?
I have but one good friend.-Has the farmer's horse too much grain ?
He has not enough.-Has he not much money? Yes, he has a great
deal.Has he much iron? He has still much.-Have we the cotton
*
76
SIXTEENTH LESSON.
or thread stockings of the Americans? We have neither their thread
nor cotton stockings.—Is John cold, in the garden? No, he is not.—
Are you very thirsty? I am thirsty enough.-Is the Irishman too
(trop) warm? Too warm? No, indeed, he is not too warm.-Who
is too warm? Nobody is too warm; but I am too hungry and
sleepy.—What ails your young dog? Nothing ails him.—What ails
those Dutchmen? They are afraid of the farmer's oxen and dog.
(§ 32, N. 3.)—Who has my friend's book and dictionary? I have
them not; but we have Edward's (Edouard) penknife, copy-book,
and pencil.
SIXTEENTH LESSON, 16th.-Seizième Leçon, 16me.
VOCABULARY. 1st Section.
Several.
Several (of them).
Several men.
Several children.
Several copy-books and pencils.
(Dir. 2.)
The father.
This child.
A son A cake. Tea.
·
Has this gentleman several sons
He has several.
As much, as many.
As much as, as many as.
•
·
As much soap as sugar.
As many men as children.
Have you as much gold as silver?
I have as much of this as of that.
I have as much of the one as of the
other.
Has he as many shoes as stockings?
He has as many of these as of those
as many of the one as of the other.
Quite (or just) as much, as many.
Quite as much . . . as, as many as.
...
VOCABULAIRE. 1re Section.
Plusieurs, (no de before the noun.)
En... plusieurs.
Plusieurs hommes. Plusieurs enfants.
Plusieurs cahiers et plusieurs cray-
ons.
Le père.
Un fils.
Cet enfant.
Un gâteau.
Du thé.
Ce Monsieur a-t-il plusieurs hls?
Il en a plusieurs.
Autant de, (avant un nom.)
...
Autant de... que de (avant les
noms.)
Autant de savon que de sucre.
Autant d'hommes que d'enfants.
Avez-vous autant d'or que d'argent?
J'ai autant de celui-ci que de celui-là.
J'ai autant de l'un que de l'autre.
A-t-il autant de souliers que de bas?
Il a autant de ceux-ci que de ceux-là.
-autant des uns que des autres.
Tout autant de... (avant un nom.)
Tout autant de... que de, (av. leg
noms).
Have I quite as much velvet as satin? Ai-je tout autant de velours que de
You have (quite or just as much).
Quite or just as much (of it).
They have just as much of this as of
that.
Just as many of these as of those.
satin ?
Vous en avez tout autant.
En... tout autant.
Ils ont tout autant de celui-ci que de
celui-là.
Tout autant de ceux-ci que de
ceux-là.
SIXTEENTH LESSON.
77
Tout autant de l'un que de l'autre.
Quite as much of the one as of the
other.
Quite as many of the one as the other.
Quite as much of the grocer's coffee
as sugar. (§ 32, N. 3.)
Tout autant des uns que des autres,
Tout autant du café de l'épicier que
de son sucre.
Jeudi,
• •
...
April, 1849.
SIXTEENTH EXERCISE. 1st Sec.-SEIZIÈME EXERCICE. 1re Sec.
Thursday, April . . . . . . 1849.
How many exercises have we, to-day? We have but one.-
Which is it? It is this. That's right.-What have you? I have
several horses.-Has he several coats? He has only one.-Who
has several looking-glasses? My brother's painter has. (Dir. 1.)—
What looking-glasses has he? He has pretty ones.—Who has our
good cakes? Several boys have them.-Is this your friend's child?
Yes, it is (his child).—Has he several children? Yes, he has.-Is
not this his son? No, it is not (his son).—Have you as much coffee
as tea?
I have. Has this stranger a son? He has several.― How
many sons has he? He has four.-How many children have the
minister and the physician? Have they as many, the one as the
other? No; the first has four, and the last six.-Indeed! Yes,
indeed. That is a great many.-Have we as much old cheese as
fresh butter? You have as much of the one as of the other.-Have
we as many shoes as stockings? We have. (Dir. 1.)—Have I as
much good as bad paper? You have.-How many small pistols
have the Swiss? They have as many small ones as large ones.-
Have you as much of your wine as of mine? I have.
Has the ugly cook as much fresh butter as beef? He has not
(as much of the one as of the other). Has the carpenter as many
sticks as nails? He has just as many of these as of those.-What
has the hatter? He has velvet and satin hats.-Has he not as many
of the one as of the other? Yes, he has just as many.-Who has
my books, his pencils, your copy-books, Robert's inkstand and pen-
knife (§ 32, N. 3), and many other things? The little scholar has.—-
Have you as many biscuits as cakes? I have not as many of these
as of those.-Have the Dutch as many horses as the Germans? No,
they have not as many.-What has the Irishman? He has another
note. Has your son one more pocket-book? He has several more.
-Have you much money? We have only a little money; but
enough bread, beef (repeat the prep. bef. every noun), fresh butter,
cheese, and old wine. Has this boy as much courage as our neigh
bor's son? He has just as much.-Has the youth many notes? He
has. Has the merchant cloth and velvet? (§ 25.) He has cloth,
but no more velvet. (Obs. 35.)-Have the boys your farmer's ox
and horse? They have that one, but not this.
Q
7*
78
SIXTEENTH LESSON.
VOCABULAIRE. 2de Section.
Un ennemi, des ennemis.
VOCABULARY. 2d Section.
The finger.
An enemy, enemies.
More, (a comparative adverb.)
The thumb, inch.
Le doigt.
More bread.
More men.
Than.
More bread than wine.
More knives than sticks.
More of this than of that.
More of the one than of the other.
More of these than of those.
More of the ones than of the others.
I have more of your sugar than of
mine.
He has more of our books than of his.
Less, fewer, not so much or many.
Less satin than velvet (not so much..).
Fewer penknives than pencils.
Not so many penknives as pencils.
Less than, more than, (bef. a number.)
I have more than three dollars.
He has not more than five francs.
They have not less than ten.
More than 1, (bef. a pronoun.)
More than he.
Less than you.
They.
More than we.
Less than they.
Than they.
Just as many as he.
As much as you.
As much as I. Quite as many as they.
So much, so many. So much as that.
Not so much. Not so many as that.
They have six servants.
Have they so many? No, they have
not so many as that. They have
but four.
Le pouce.
Plus de, (avant un nom.)
Plus de pain. Plus d'hommes.
Que de, (avant un nom.)
Plus de pain que de vin.
Plus de couteaux que de bâtons.
Plus de celui-ci que de celui-là.
Plus de l'un que de l'autre.
Plus de ceux-ci que de ceux-là.
Plus des uns que des autres.
J'ai plus de votre sucre que du mien
Il a plus de nos livres que des siens
Moins de, (avant un nom.)
Moins de satin que de velours.
Moins de canifs que de crayons.
| Moins de, plus de, (av. un nombre.)
J'ai plus de trois dollars.
Il n'a pas plus de cinq francs.
Ils n'en ont pas moins de dix.
Plus que moi, (avant un pronom.)¹
Plus que lui. Plus que nous.
Moins que vous.
Eux.
Moins qu'eux.
Qu'eux.
Tout autant que lui.
Autant que moi.
Tant de.
Autant que vous.
Pas tant.
Tout autant qu'eux.
Tant que cela.
Pas tant que cela.
Ils ont six domestiques.
En ont-ils tant? Non, ils n'en ont
pas tant que cela. Ils n'en ont que
quatre.
SIXTEENTH EXERCISE. 2d Sec.-SEIZIÈME EXERCICE. 2de Sec.
Friday, April...... 1849. Vendredi, ... ... Avril, 1849.
Have you three exercises to-day, Mr. Charles? No, Miss, I have
not so many. How many have you? I have got but two.-We
have as many as you; but those young scholars have more than
we. Have they five or six? No, they have not so many; they
Moi, I, instead of: Je.
Tei, thou,
.64
tu,
Are used in French as no-
minative cases, when the
verb is understood or
separated from the pro-.
noun. (§ 38.)
Lui, he, instead of: il.
Eux, they,"
ils
SEVENTEENTH
79
LESSON.
have only four. Four? That's a great deal.—Has this lawyer more
friends than enemies? He has more enemies than friends.-Has
the farmer as many sheep (moutons) as oxen? He has just as
many.-Have you as many small guns as I? I have just as many.-
Has the ugly foreigner as much courage as we? He has less than
we.-Have our neighbors as much fresh butter as cheese? They
have more of the latter than of the former.-Have not your sons
as many books as copy-books? They have not so many of these
as of those; they have fewer of the latter than of the former.—
How many noses has that stranger? That small man? Yes. He
has but one.-How many fingers has he? He has several.—Has he
ten? No, he has not so many.—Has he not so many? No, he has
less than ten.-How many has he? He has but eight fingers and
two thumbs.-How many thumbs and fingers has you young scholar?
He? (mind the last note.) (Lui?) Yes, he. He has not more than
seven fingers and one thumb.-—And I, how many have I? You
have just as many as we (nous).-Very well.
Has the minister more children than the lawyer? The minister
has more than he, but he, the lawyer, has more than they and we.-
How many pistols have you? I have only one; but my father has
more than I and they. He has five.-Has he so many, indeed?
Yes, he has just as many.-John, have you more than seven dollars?
No, I have less than that. I have not so many.-Have my children
as much courage as yours? Yours have more than mine.-Have I
as much money as you? You have less than I, but more than he.-
Have you as many books as I? I have fewer than you. I have not
more than nine.-Have I as many enemies as your father? You
have fewer than he; but more than they.-Have the Russians as
many children as we? We have fewer than they.-Have the French
as many ships as we? They have fewer than we.-Have the dogs
more feet than the horses? No, they have just as many.-Has not
your bird two feet? Yes, it has two.-Has not this little boy more
arms than feet? Yes, he has two arms; but he has only one foot.-
What is the last verb of the last exercise? It is..
the last noun of this exercise? It is.....
-What is
SEVENTEENTH LESSON, 17th.-Dix-septième Leçon, 17me.
VOCABULARY. 1st Section. I VOCABULAIRE. 1re Section
OF THE INFINITIVE.-De l'Infinitif.
There are in French four Conjugations, which are distinguished by the
ermination of the Present of the Infinitive, viz:-
80
SEVENTEENTH LESSON.
1. The first has its infinitive terminated in ER, as: parler,
which will be the model of its regular verbs.
2. The second in IR, its model
3. The third in OIR,
4. The fourth in RE,
"
•
finir,
to speak,
to finish, to end
recevoir, to receive.
vendre, to sell.
Obs. 36. A verb, in French, is regular, when conjugated like the mode.
of its conjugation. Irregular, of course, when not conjugated like it. Each
verb given, hereafter, will have the number of its class.
with an asterisk (*) are irregular.
Those marked
To buy.
To choose.
To perceive.
To wait for
Acheter,
Choisir, 2.
Apercevoir, 3.
Attendre,
1.1
To cut, cut off.
To build.
Couper, 1.
Bâtir, 2.
Devoir, 3.
To owe.
4.
To render, restore, Rendre, 4.
Fear, peur.-Shame, honte.-Time, le temps.-Courage, le courage.-
Wrong, tort.-Right, raison.-A mind, a desire, a wish, envie.
Obs. 37. These seven words require the preposition (de, of,) after them,
when followed by an infinitive. Example.-Are you afraid to speak? Avez
vous peur de parler ?
To work.
Have you a mind to work?
I have a mind to work.
He has not the courage to speak.
Are you afraid to speak?
I am ashamed to speak.
Ilave they time to wait?
Travailler, 1.
Avez-vous envie de travailler ?
J'ai envie de travailler.
Il n'a pas le courage de parler.
Avez-vous peur de parler?
J'ai honte de parler.
Ont-ils le temps d'attendre?
They have neither time nor a wish Ils n'ont ni le temps, ni envie d'at-
tendre.
to wait.
To cut it, him.
To cut them.
Le couper.
To cut one more.
En couper.
To cut some.
Has he time to cut the bread?
He has (time to c it it).
Has he a mind to cut other trees?
He has (a mind to cut others).
Les couper.
En couper encore un.
A-t-il le temps de couper le pain?
Il a le temps de le couper.
་
A-t-il envie de couper d'autres ar
bres?
Il a envie d'en couper d'autres.
SEVENTEENTH EXERCISE. 1st Sec.-DIX-SEPTIÈME EXERCICE. 1re Sec.
•
Samedi ...... Avril mil huit, &c.
Saturday.. April, 1849.
Have you more than one exercise this morning? We have no
exercise, but we have a vocabulary.-Have you not more than one
I Questions to be asked and answered in French, on the introduction of
a verb.
Of what conjugation is it? De quelle conjugaison est-il? Of the
1st, 2d, 3d, or 4th. De la 1re, 2de, 3me, ou 4me.-Why? Pourquoi? Be-
cause it ends in: er, ir, oir, or re. Parce qu'il finit en: er, ir, oir, ou re.—
Is it regular? Est il régulier? It is. Il l'est.-Why? Pourquoi? Be-
cause it is conjugated like the model: parler, finir, recevoir, or vend: e.--
Parce qu'il est conjugué comme le modèl.: parler, &c.-It is not.
l'est pas.-It is not conjugated, &c. Il n'est pas conjugué, &o.
Il pad
SEVENTEENTH LESSON.
81
vocabulary? No, we have not. (Dir. 1.) That is not much. No, that
is not much, but it is enough.-Have you still a mind to buy my
friend's horse and sheep? (§ 32, N. 3.) I have still a mind to buy
them; but I have no more money.-Have you time to work? I
have time, but no mind to work.—Has your brother time to cut
some beef or mutton? He has.-Is he afraid to cut any? He is
not, but he has no mind to cut any.-Has he got no knife? (§ 26.)
Yes, he has one.-Have you time to cut some cheese? I have.—
Has he a desire (a mind) to cut the cabbages? He has, but he is
ashamed to cut them.-Is the tailor of the minister wrong to cut
the coarse cloth? He is not wrong in cutting it.—Who has time to
cut the trees? What trees? The general's big trees. The farmer
has time to cut them.-How many trees has he time o cut? He
has only time to cut two.-Who has time to cut more than two ?
Nobody has. Are the little scholar and the little boy ashamed to
speak? They are not ashamed, but afraid to speak.
་
Am I not right in buying as many cakes as they? Yes, y、 u are
right in buying as many cakes as they.-Is our friend right in buying
that ugly old horse? No, he is wrong; but we are right in buying
this pretty little dog.-Has any one a mind to speak? You, he,
John, and I, have (469, N. 1) a mind to speak; but we have not
courage enough.-Have you the courage to receive those gentle-
men? I have the courage and the wish to receive them.-Is he
not wrong to receive that note? He is right to receive it. Has that
sailor the courage to cut off the finger and thumb of this little boy?
No, he has not; but the doctor has.-Has the cloth merchant a mind
to choose a few more cloaks? He has a mind to choose a few
more, but he has no more money.-Are the carpenters ashamed to
build a ship? They are not ashamed to build a small one; but the
captain is afraid to build a large one.-What are they afraid to
build? They are afraid to build a great many things.-Is not the
lawyer of merit wrong in receiving his young friends in his garden?
No, he is not wrong in receiving them in his garden; but he is not
right in choosing those old cakes and that bad wine.
VOCABULARY. 2d Section.
To break.
To mend, to repair.
Casser. Of what conjugation is it?
Of the first. Why?
Because it ends in er.
Is it regular? Yes, it is.
VOCABULAIRE. 2de Section.
Casser, 1. Raccommoder, 1.
De quelle conjugaison est-il?
De la première. Pourquoi?
Parce qu'il finit en er.
Est-il régulier? Oui, il l'est.
Why? Because it is conjugated like Pourquoi ? Parce qu'il est conjugué
the model: parler.
To pick up.
comme le modèle: parler.
To look for, to seek. Ramasser, 1.
Chercher, 1.
82
LESSON.
SEVENTΤΕΕΝΤΗ
To buy, purchase.
To buy some more.
To buy one.
To buy two.
To buy one or two more.
Have you a mind to buy one more
horse?
I have a mind to buy two more.
Am I not right to pick up that beau-
tiful satin shawl?
Yes, but you are wrong to break that
pretty paper fan.
Is he afraid to mend this cloak ?
He is not afraid to mend it.
What have they a mind to look for?
They do not wish to look for anything.
Have those children the courage to
wait in the garden?
They have (the courage). (Dir. 1.)
Is not the young scholar wrong to
sell his dictionary?
No, he is not wrong in selling it, be-
cause it is an old dictionary.
Has the merchant more sugar than
the grocer? He has not so much.
Acheter, 1.
En acheter un.
En acheter encore. En acheter deux.
En acheter encore un ou deux.
Avez-vous envie d'acheter encore
un cheval?
J'ai envie d'en acheter encore deux.
N'ai-je pas raison de ramasser ce
beau châle de satin ?
Si fait mais vous avez tort de casser
ce joli éventail de papier.
A-t-il peur de raccommoder ce man-
teau-ci ?
Il n'a pas peur de le raccommoder.
Qu'ont-ils envie de chercher ?
Ils n'ont envie de rien chercher.
Ces enfants ont-ils le courage d'at-
tendre dans le jardin ?
Ils en ont le courage.
Le jeune écolier n'a-t-il pas tort de
vendre son dictionnaire ?
Non, il n'a pas tort de le vendre, par-
ce que c'est un vieux dictionnaire.
Le marchand a-t-il plus de sucre que
l'épicier? Il n'en a pas tant.
SEVENTEENTH EXERCISE. 2d Sec.-DIX-SEPTIÈME EXERCICE. 2de Sec.
Monday, May.
1849.
Lundi, ...... Mai, 1849.
Have we not the two exercises of the seventeenth lesson (de la)?
Yes, we have the seventeenth lesson.-How many verbs have we
in our vocabularies? We have ten.-Have we not more than ten?
Is it not enough? Yes, it is enough.-Have we any adjectives and
nouns? We have several.-Have we not many nouns and pro-
nouns? We have more of the last than of the first.-Has the
young sailor any more biscuits or bread? He has biscuits, but
(Obs. 35) no more bread.-What has the old grocer got? He has
fresh cheese, but no more rice. Who has fresh butter? I have
some yet, the physician has a little more, but the lawyer and the
minister have no more.
What has our tailor a mind to mend? He has a mind to mend
our old friend's (467, N. 1) coats and vests.-Has he not a mind to
mend our hats and theirs? No, but the hatter has a mind to mend
them. Has the little shoemaker time to mend our old shoes? He
has time, but he has no mind to mend them.-Are you afraid to
look for my horse? I am not afraid, but I have no wish to look for
it. What are the carpenters right in building? They are right in
building vessels.-Are their children afraid to pick up some nails?
EIGHTEENTH LESSON
83
They are not.-Have you a mind to break my jewel? I have a
mind to pick it up, but not to break it.—Am I wrong in picking up
your leather gloves? You are not wrong in picking them up; but
you are wrong in cutting them.-Who has a mind to break our
large looking-glass? Our enemy has a mind to break it.-Has the
lawyer more merit than the minister? The one has no more merit
than the other.-Has the big chicken more feet than this little bird
No, it has just as many.
EIGHTEENTH LESSON,
VOCABULARY. 1st Section.
18th.-Dix-huitième Leçon, 18me.
To make, to do, to perform.
To be willing, to wish, to will.
Will you? Do you wish?
Are you willing? Will you have?
I will, am willing, wish. I will not.
Will he ? is he willing? does he wish?
He will, is willing, wishes. He will
not.
We will, are willing, wish, will have.
You will, are willing, wish, will have.
They will, are willing, wish,will have.
Who will (have)? Who does not wish?
Nobody wishes. Some one wishes.
Do you wish to have it?
VOCABULAIRE. 1re Section.
Faire,* 4.
Vouloir,* 3.
Voulez-vous?
Je veux.
Veut-il ?
Il veut.
Nous voulons.
Vous voulez.
Ils veulent.
Qui veut?
Je ne veux pas.
Il ne veut pas.
Vous ne voulez pas.
Veulent-ils ?
Qui ne veut pas ?
Personne ne veut.
Le voulez-vous ?
Quelqu'un veut.
Does any one wish to make my fire? Quelqu'un veut-il faire mon feu ?
I am willing to make it.
I do not wish to make it.
Does he wish to buy your horse?
He wishes to buy it; does he not i
Is it not as I say? Is it not so?
Je veux le faire.
Je ne veux pas le faire.
Veut-il acheter votre cheval?
Il veut l'acheter; n'est-ce pas ?
+ N'est-ce pas ? (Idiom.)
Obs. 38. (Important.) This French: N'est-ce pas ? answers to any nega
tive interrogation in the same person as a preceding affirmation, as:
1. You are going to write, ARE YOU NOT?
2. You would write, woULD YOU NOT?
3. They wrote, DID THEY NOT ?
4. He has the cloth, HAS HE NOT?
5. We were reading, WERE WE NOT?
meaning:
is it not so 1
meaning:
is it not so:?
meaning:
is it not so ?
meaning:
is it not so ?
is it not so!
meaning:
These five negative interrogations (in the same person as the five pre-
ceding affirmations and immediately connected with them) are all translated
in French by: n'est-ce pas ? and so are all similar ones, in all moɔds, tenses,
and persons.
84
EIGHTEENTH LESSON.
You have the French of: to do, to
make? Have you not?
Yes, we have it. It is: faire.
You have also that of: to be willing:
We have it also.
have you not?
To go.
To be.
To, at, or in the house of.....
To be at the man's house.
To go to the grocer's.
To be in one's friend's house.
To go to their father's.
To be in
To go to S
house-his house.
my
To be at, to go to, our house.
To be in, to go to, your house.
To be at, to go to, their house.
To be at some one's house.
To go to no one's house.
To
go
home.
At home.
Will you wait at home?
At, in, or to whose house?
To whose house do you wish to go?
I do not wish to go to any one's.
Vous avez le Français de: to do, ti
make? N'est-ce pas ?
Oui, nous l'avons. C'est faire.
Vous avez aussi celui de : to be wil-
ling: N'est-ce pas ? Nous l'avona
aussi.
Aller,* 1.
Chez.....
Être chez l'homme.
Aller chez l'épicier.
Être chez son ami.
Aller chez leur père.
Être,* 4
Etre
Aller
}
chez moi-chez lui.
Aller chez nous.
Aller chez vous.
Aller chez eux.
Etre chez nous.
Être chez vous.
Etre chez eux.
Etre chez quelqu'un.
N'aller chez personne.
À la maison. Aller à la maison.
Voulez-vous attendre à la maison
Chez qui?
Chez qui voulez-vous aller ?
Je ne veux aller chez personne.
EIGHTEENTH EXERCISE. 1st Sec.-DIX-HUITIÈME EXERCICE. 1re Sec.
Tuesday, May...... 1849.
Mardi, . . . . . . Mai, 1849.
Have you a mind to work? Yes, I have.-What will you do?
I wish to do an exercise.-Which? This one. Very well.-Does
the little son of the general wish to break that big stick? No, he
does not wish to break it.-Are you willing to look for my son? I
am (willing, &c.). (Dir. 1.)-What do you wish to pick up? I wish
to pick up the shawl, hat, and gloves, of Miss Clara.-You wish to
pick up that dollar, do you not? Yes, I wish to pick it up.-Will
you pick up that old pencil? No, I will not.-Do you wish to go to
that man's house? No, I wish to go to the minister's.-You wish to
go to the physician's, do you not? No, I do not wish to go to the
physician's, but to the lawyer's and grocer's.-Who wishes to go to
the doctor's? Nobody wishes to go to his house.-Does our neigh-
bor wish to buy these or those combs? (mind the French construc-
tion.) He wishes to buy them.-Does that farmer wish to cut your
tree? He does not wish to cut mine, but his own.-Which? The
big tree. What does the shoemaker wish to mend? He wishes to
mend our old shoes.-Does the tailor wish to mend anything? He
wishes to mend (§ 25) waistcoats.-He wishes to mend their coats,
does he not? He does not:-Do the Swiss wish to wait for your son?
EIGHTEENTH LESSON
85
They do. What do they wish to choose? They wish to choose
some coarse cloth. And their children, what do they wish to
choose? They wish to choose some fine handkerchiefs.-Who has
any? The dry goods merchants have.-Do they wish to sell them?
Yes, indeed!
Is Charles willing to wait for the lawyer's son? No, he is not.-
Robert will wait for him; will he not? He! No, he will not.—Who
will do it? Nobody will do it.-Are the Scotchmen willing to walf
for the minister at your father's or at the doctor's? They will wait
for him neither at my father's nor at the doctor's, but at the book
seller's. Am I wrong to go to the hatter's? No, you are not wrong
to go to his house.-At whose house is their father? He is at his
friend's, the apothecary.-To whose house do your sons wish to
go They? They do not wish to go to anybody's house.-Wil
you go to my house? I will not go to yours, but to my brother's.-
Does not this little child wish to go to the cake shop (chez le mar-
chand de gâteaux)? Yes, indeed, he does. (Dir. 1.)-Why Be-
cause he has two sous, and he wishes to buy two cakes.-Will no
your children buy some cakes, too? No, they do not wish to buy
any; they are not hungry.-Have you the French of: a quarter of a
dollar? No, I have it not. Do you wish to have it? Yes, Sir.
It is: un quart de dollar.-Have you two quarters of a dollar? I have
two.-How many quarters has he? He has several quarters.-Has
Charles his brother's pretty little stick and playthings? (467, N. 1.)
He has his pretty little stick, but not his toys.-The general's and
doctor's horses are hungry; are they not? No; but the cook's birds
and chickens (§ 140, Art. 2,) are thirsty.
VOCABULARY. 2d Section.
To burn.
To tear.
The broth.
To warm.
To put, put on.
My linen clothes.
Beautiful, superb.
Will you put on this satin vest?
I will put it on; it is beautiful.
At whose house is your brother? {
He is at ours, in ours.
Is he at home? at his house?
He is not at home-in his house.
He is at or in yours.
Who is at or in theirs?-at mine?
Nobody is at theirs; yours; mine.
Are you?
Tired, fatigued.
I am.
Are you tired?
VOCABULAIRE. 2de Section
Brûler, 1.
Déchirer.
Le bouillon.
Superbe.
Chauffer, 1.
Mettre*4, (17¹, N. 1).
Mon linge, (singular.)
Voulez-vous mettre ce gilet de satin ?
Je veux le mettre; il est superbe.
Chez qui est votre frère ?
Chez qui votre frère est-il?
Il est chez nous.
Est-il à la maison? Est-il chez lui !
Il n'est pas à la maison-chez lui.
Il est chez vous.
Qui est chez eux ?-chez moi ?
Personne n'est chez eux; vous; moi
Êtes-vous ?
Fatigué.
Je suis.
Êtes-vous fatigué ?
8
86
EIGHTEENTH LESSON.
I am tired.
I am not tired.
Very tired.
He is not.
I am a little tired.
Is he ? He is.
Busy... He is busy; is he not?
Are we? We are not.
Are they? They are. They are not.
Are they busy? Yes, they are.
He is busy, and we are tired.
To drink. To drink a little more.
Where? Where do you wish to go?
What do you wish to do?
What does your brother wish to do?
Is your father at home?
What will the Swiss drink?
They wish to drink some broth.
They wish to drink something good.
They do not wish to drink anything.
Do they wish to tear this old paper?
They do not wish to tear, but to
burn it.
• •
•
1849.
Je suis fatigué. Je ne suis pas fatigué
Je suis un peu fatigué très-fatigué.
Est-il. Il est. Il n'est pas.
Occupé. Il est occupé; n'est-ce pas ?
Sommes-nous? Nous ne sommes pas.
Sont-ils? Ils sont. Ils ne sont pas.
Sont-ils occupés? Oui, ils sont oc-
cupés. (§ 137.)
Il est occupé et nous sommes fatigués.
Boire* 4. Boire encore un peu.
Qu? Où voulez-vous aller ?
Que voulez-vous faire ?
Votre frère que veut-il faire ?
Votre frère est-il à la maison?
Les Suisses que veulent-ils boire
Ils veuler boire du bouillon.
Ils veulent boire quelque chose de
bon. Ils ne veulent rien boire.
Veulent-ils déchirer ce vieux papier ?
Ils ne veulent pas le déchirer, mais
le brûler.
All. Is it, is this, is that all? It is. Tout. Est-ce tout.? C'est tout.
EIGHTEENTH EXERCISE. 2d Sec.-DIX-HUITIÈME EXERCICE. 2de Seo.
Wednesday, May.
Mercredi, ...... Mai, 1849.
You have the 18th exercise to-day, have you not? No, we have
only the 18th vocabulary.-Have you but the vocabulary? Yes,
indeed, that's all. Very well.-Miss Caroline, will you put on this
or that hat? I will put on neither this nor that; but the other.—
Which? This ugly old hat (vieux vilain)? This ugly old hat! It
is superb. Superb! indeed.-Will you not put your velvet shawl
on? Yes; I will put it on, because I am cold.-Has the young
painter any fire? He has.-Does he wish to burn anything? Yes,
he has a mind to burn these old papers.-What will you tear? I
will tear this coarse handkerchief.-Who is busy? I am busy.-
Who is tired? I am not tired.-Who is good? The grocer's little
son.-Are you busy, very busy? I am very busy.-Are you not
tired? Yes, I am a little tired.-What does the cook wish to warm 2
He wishes to warm our tea, and our father's coffee. Is that all?
Yes, that is all.-Do you wish to warm my brother's broth and
coffee? I am willing to warm this, but not that. Is the farmer wil-
ling to put some wood in the fire? Yes, he is.-Will they put any
grain in the bag? No, they do not wish to put any in the bag, but
in the granary; that's all.
Is not the grocer's clerk willing to put your rice in his bag? Yes, he
is willing to put it in his bag.-Am I not right in warming your broth?
NINETEENTH LESSON.
87
Yes, you are.-Is not the merchant wrong in tearing the satin? Yes,
he is. Have we time to go in the garden? No, we have not time.-
What does Charles wish to tear? He does not wish to tear any-
thing; but we and they (467, N. 1.) wish to (nous voulons) tear the
cotton bags. Is he afraid to tear your coat? He is not; but to burn
it. What are you willing to put on? I am willing to put on my
coat, (Dir. 2,) vest, shoes, stockings, and gloves; that's all. Very
well; that's enough.-Are you tired? I am not tired.-Who is
tired? My brother is tired.-Has the Spaniard a mind to buy as
many horses as oxen? No; but he has a mind to buy as many
birds as you and I.-Do you wish to drink anything? I do not.
How many chickens have you at home? We have four; that's
all.—Where is your father? At his friend's house.-Is the physician
at the lawyer's? No; but the minister is at the lawyer's.-Do the
strangers wish to go to the American's or to the Dutchman's? They
wish to go neither to the American's nor to the Dutchman's?-Where
do they wish to go? They do not wish to go to anybody's house.-
Where are your little friends, Robert and John? They are at their
father's. That's all.-Is your friend's brother's horse sick? (§ 140,
Art. 3.) No, it is not sick.
NINETEENTH LESSON, 19th.-Dix-neuvième Leçon, 19me.
VOCABULARY. 1st Section.
Are you going? do you go?
I am going. I go. I am not going.
Are you going to choose a book ?
I am going to choose a book.
I am not yet going to choose any.
I am not going to choose anything.
Are you going home? I am (going
there).
To it, at it, in it, there, thither.
To go thither.
To be there.
It to it, it in it, him, there, or thither.
To take, to carry. To send.
To take, to lead, to conduct-him
there.
To take you there. To take us there.
To carry it there. To send him there.
To commence, to begin. To proceed.
Them, there, or thither.
Some of it, there, or thither.
To carry them thither.
VOCABULAIRE. 1re Section.
Allez-vous?
Je vais.
Je ne vais pas.
Allez-vous choisir un livre ?
Je vais choisir un livre.
Je ne vais pas encore en choisir.
Je ne vais rien choisir.
Allez-vous chez vous? J'y vais.
Y, (avant le verbe.) (§ 47.)
Y aller,* 1. Y être,* 4.
L'y, (avant le verbe.) (§ 57.)
Porter, 1.
Mener, 1.
Envoyer,* 1.
L'y mener.
Vous y mener.
L'y porter.
Commencer, 1. Continuer, 1.
Les y, (av. le verbe.) (§ 57.)
Y en, (av. le verbe.) († 60.)
Les y porter.
Nous y mener.
L'y envoyer.
88
NINETEENTH LESSON.
To carry some there or thitner.
Will you send him to my father's?
I am going to send him there.
I am not yet going to send him there.
Y en porter.
Voulez-vous l'envoyer chez mon
père ?
Je vais l'y envoyer.
Je ne vais pas encore l'y envoyer.
Obs. 39. The adverb y always stands before the verb. When there is a
pronoun like le, it, him, les, them; that pronoun stands immediately before
the adverb y; but en, some of it, stands after the y, as may be seen above.
To come. To come to it, thither.
Y venir.
Are you going to come
Will you come (meaning)
Are you coming
Venir,* 2.
to my
Allez-vous venir chez moi ?
house?
Je vais y venir.
I am coming (going to come) there.
When? To-morrow. To-morrow
morning.
With pleasure.
With.
At first, in the first place. Afterwards.
What are you going to do first?
First, I am going to the grocer's, and
then to the apothecary's.
With me with him-with them-
nobody.
To study.
To recite.
Quand ? Demain. Demain matin.
Avec.
Avec plaisir.
D'abord.
Ensuite.
Qu'allez-vous faire d'abord?
D'abord, je vais chez l'épicier, et en
suite chez l'apothicaire.
Avec moi-avec lui-avec eux-avec
personne.
Étudier, 1.
Réciter, 1.
NINETEENTH EXERCISE. 1st Sec.-DIX-NEUVIÈME EXERCICE. 1re Sec.
Thursday, May...... 1849.
Jeudi,
Mai, 1849.
Have you an exercise or a vocabulary, to-day? We have both.-
Are you going to recite the vocabulary first? Yes, with pleasure ;
and then the exercise: will we not? (won't we?)-Very well.—
Will you begin, Mr. Charlemagne? Yes, Sir, with pleasure.-What
is the French of: I am going? It is
-Is it right? Yes, or
no (according to the answer).—Do you wish to go home? I do.
(Dir. 1.)—Does your son wish to go with you? He does.—Is your
brother at home? He is.-Where are you going, Mr. Charles? I
am going to the minister's.-Do your children wish to come with
me? They do not (wish to go with you).-To whose house are
you going to send this note? I am not going to send it, but I am
going to carry (take) it to the general's.-Will your servant take my
note to the American's house? He has no time to take it there,
but little Henry will take it there-Will those children take the
stranger to the Russian's? They will take him there.-Are you not
going to take the painter to the physician's? No, but I am going to
send him there.-Is the painter willing to begin that picture, to-day?
No, he does not wish to commence it before to-morrow.-To-mor-
' When the will is not particularly referred to, use vais, instead of veux.
NINETEENTH
89
LESSON.
tow morning? (demain matin?) Yes, to-morrow morning.-What
are you going to study first, to-morrow morning? To study? I am
not going to study anything.—Are you not going to study the 19th
vocabulary? I am going to study it to-day.
Where will the son of my friend take the Swiss's large dog?-He
will not take the Swiss's large dog, but the Scotchman's pretty little
horse. Where will he take him? He will take him to the cook's
house. When will he take him there? This evening or to-morrow
morning? Neither this evening nor to-morrow, but to-day.-When
are you coming to my house? First, this morning; and afterwards,
to-morrow.-Will you proceed? I have no time to proceed, but
Carnot has.-Will he proceed? Yes, he will.-Will the shoemaker
take the boy's shoes home, to their house? No, he will not,
because he is afraid of their bad dog.-That old man is hungry and
thirsty; is he not? This one is neither hungry nor thirsty, but that
one is.—We will first go to the Englishman's, and afterwards to the
Italian's; won't we? Yes, we will; but the Dutch will not.-Will
your son begin Thiers's work, to-morrow? No, because he has not
yet got it, and because he is going to recite the last vocabulary.—
Has he not got it yet? No, he has not.-Have you it? Yes, I have
it. When do the Germans wish to go in the farmer's garden? To-
morrow? No, they do not yet wish to go thither (or in it).—Is the
doctor very busy? Yes, he is very busy and very tired, this eve-
ning.-Are you going to put those trees in your son's garden? I
am; but not this evening, because I am too tired and too busy.—
What is the student going to drink? He is first going to drink some
coffee and milk, and afterwards some wine.
Nineteenth VOCAB., 2d Sec.-DIX-NEUVIÈME VOCABULAIRE. 2de Sec.
Somewhere, anywhere.
Are you going anywhere?
Nowhere, not anywhere (§ 151).
I am not going anywhere (nowhere).
To write them.
To write.
To translate.
To read.
To correct.
Some.
To copy.
Will you read the last vocabulary?
Does he not wish to copy anything?
Will they translate this or that ex-
ercise?
Quelque part, (not used with a nega-
tion.) Allez-vous quelque part?
Ne... nulle part.
Je ne vais nulle part.
Écrire,* 4. Les écrire. En écrire.
Traduire,* 4.
Lire,* 4.
Corriger, 1.
Copier, 1.
Voulez-vous lire le dernier vocabu-
laire ? Ne veut-il rien copier ?
Veulent-ils traduire cet exercice-ci
ou celui-là? ($ 37.)
Will you not correct it? Yes, I will. Ne voulez-vous pas le corriger? Si
Va-t-il? (Obs. 15.)
Is le going, does he go?
fait.
He goes is going.) He is not going.
Who is going? Nobody goes, (is
going.)
Il va.
Il ne va pas.
Qui va?
Personne ne va.
8*
90
NINETEENTH LESSON.
Is he going to read, translate, and Va-t-il lire, traduire, et écrire ?
write? He is going neither to
read, translate, nor write.
What is he going to do?
He is not going to do anything.
Is the teacher going to correct an-
other of our exercises? He is
(going to do it).
Is he coming (going to come) to the
teacher's or to the minister's?
He is coming neither to this one's
house nor to the other's.
The teacher, master. French teacher.
This professor.
Our professor of
English.
At what o'clock ?
At one o'clock.
Half.
At two o'clock.
The or a quarter.
At half past one.
At a quarter past one.
At a quarter past two.
At a quarter to (or of, or before) three.
At twelve, noon. Half past twelve.
At twelve at night, or midnight.
Less.
Now, at present.
Ready.
Are we ready?
Not now.
I am ready.
Ready to. They are ready to go.
Il ne va ni lire, ni traduire, ni écrire.
Que va-t-il faire ?
Il ne va rien faire.
Le maître va-t-il corriger un autre
de nos exercices? Il va le faire.
Va-t-il venir chez le maître ou chez
le ministre ?¹
Il ne va venir ni chez l'un ni chez
l'autre.
Le maître. Le maître de Français.
Ce professeur.
Notre professeur
d'Anglais.
À quelle heure ?²
À une heure.
Demi.
À deux heures.
Le ou un quart.
demie.³
À une heure et
À une heure et quart (or et un quart).
À deux heures un quart. (Mind the s.)
À trois heures moins un quart.
À midi.
Midi et demi.
À minuit. À minuit et un quart.
Moins, (comparative of peu, little.)
À présent. Pas à présent.
Prêts. (plur.)
Prêt.
Sommes-nous prêts? Je suis prêt.
Prêt à prêts à. Ils sont prêts à
aller.
In a quarter of an hour. Before half Dans un quart d'heure. Avant de-
an hour.
mi-heure.
DIX-NEUVIÈME EXERCICE. 2de Section.
Friday, May...... 1849. Vendredi, ...... Mai, 1849.
Gentlemen, what are you going to do, to-day? Recite the voca-
bulary, translate and correct our exercises.-Very well. Will you
¹ Va-t-il venir? literally, is he going to come? Allez-vous venir? &c., are
awkward expressions in English, but much used in French, and philosophi-
cally so.
He is writing, is never used in English for: he is going to write.
Why should he is coming be substituted for: he is going to come? [Ditto
of: Sortir, to go or come out, &c.]
2 Heure, hour, is a feminine noun. This class of nouns will be spoken
of hereafter. For the present, the learner has only to write them as he sees
them written in the lessons.
3 The adjective demie is here in the feminine gender, agreeing with the
feminine noun heure. But when this adjective precedes the noun, it does
not agree with it in gender and number, as: une demi-heure, half an hour.
NINETEENTH
91
LESSON.
begin, Sir? With much pleasure.-What is the French of: some-
where? It is...... is it not? Yes, or no (as the case may require).
Have you the French of: is he going? Yes, we have.-What is
it? (quel est-il?) It is...... . it is right; is it not? Yes, or no.-Is
the youth going, in a quarter of an hour, to the Scotchman's or to
the Irishman's? He is going neither to the one's nor to the other's
house; but I am going to take (conduct) him to the young Dutch-
man's.-When are you going to take him there? Now. I he
ready? No, he is not yet ready.-Very well; I will wait for him.
(Je vais.)—Do you go to the physician's this evening? No, I do
not. -Do you go anywhere?-I go somewhere at seven o'clock.-
Will their children go anywhere, in half an hour? No, they will
go nowhere, because they are tired and busy.-Do you wish to go
anywhere? I do not wish to go anywhere, but my brother's friends
have a mind to go to the Englishman's.—Where is the Englishman
now He is at home.-Are his sons at home? They are there
1:0w. Are you ready to write and translate? I am ready to trans-
late, but not to write. I have no pencil.-Has the cook any more
butter? No, he has no more; but he is going to buy some.-Where
is he going to buy any? He is going to buy some at the milk-
man's. Has he much? He has but little now; but he is going to
make some this evening.-At what o'clock? At eight.
--
When will you go with me to the bookseller's? At six o'clock.-
I am busy at six o'clock.-Will you go at seven? No, not before
eight or half past eight.-Very well.-When are you coming (going
to come) to my house? To-day at noon? Not at twelve, but at
half past twelve.-With whom are you coming? With nobody.-
Is not the student going to study first, and to recite afterwards? Yes,
he will (va) study first, and recite afterwards.-Is he ready to com-
mence? No, not yet. Why is he not yet ready? Because he has
but little time, not much time.-Who is going to correct our exer-
cises? The old professor is.-What is the young teacher going to
do? He is going to put on his hat and gloves, and go to his father's.
Will you read, translate, and copy your French with us to-day? 1
am afraid to do it.—Are you ashamed also? No, I am not ashamed;
I am only afraid.-Who has time and courage to copy those two
exercises? These, or those? Those. This little scholar has time,
courage, and a desire to copy them.-When will the clerk go to the
lawyer's and to the teacher's, to copy something? He will go there
first to-day, and then to-morrow also.-Does the grocer wish to buy
as many bags of coffee as of rice? He is going to buy more of the
former than of the latter. We have biscuits; but have we encugh?
We have not too many.-How many more bags have we? We
92
LESSON.
NINETEENTH
have yet six.-Have we but six? Have we not eight? Ye: re
have eight; and the baker is going to send another.-At what
o'clock ? At a quarter to six or at a quarter to seven.-Very well.
TWENTIETH LESSON, 20th.-Vingtième Leçon, 20me.
VOCABULARY. 1st Section.
To, in order to, for the purpose of.
VOCABULAIRE. 1re Section.
Pour, (avant un infinitif.)
Obs. 40. In English, all prepositions (to, excepted) are usually followed
by the present participle, as: of coming, without having, &c. In French,
all prepositions are followed by the infinitive mood, except en (in), which is
followed by the present participle. (Mind this Obs. Rul. 1.)
To see.
In order to see him.
Have you money to buy or, for the
purpose of buying) bread?
I have some to buy some.
Are you going to your brother's to
(in order to) see him?
I have no time to go there to see
him.
Voir,* 3.
Pour le voir.
Avez-vous de l'argent pour acheter
du pain ?
J'en ai pour en acheter.
Allez-vous chez votre frère pour le
voir ?
Je n'ai pas le temps d'y aller pour le
voir.
Has your servant a knife to cut the Votre domestique a-t-il un coutea
cheese?
He has none to cut it.
To be able, (can.)
Can you? Are you able?
I can. I am able.
I cannot. I am not able (unable).
Can you read? Are you able to write?
I can read and write. (Rul. 2.)
I can neither read nor write.
To sweep.
To kill.
To salt.
To sweeten.
Can I? may I?
Am I able?
pour couper le fromage?
Il n'en a pas pour le couper.
Pouvoir,* 3.
Pouvez-vous?
Je peux (ou je puis).
Je ne peux pas (ou je ne puis).
Pouvez-vous lire ? Pouvez-vous
écrire ?
Je peux lire et écrire (ou je puis).
Je ne puis ni lire ni écrire.
Balayer, 1. .
Saler, 1.
Tuer, 1.
Sucrer, 1.
Puis-je ? (never peux-je ?)
Obs. 41. Peux-je? Ne peux-je pas? are not used interrogatively say
therefore: Puis-je? Can I? Ne puis-je pas? Can I not? (of which here-
after, Lesson 28th.)
May I or can I see that picture?
You can, or may.
Can he may he?
He can, or may.
Can we, may we?
You cannot.
Can he not?
He is not able.
Can we not?
We can, are able.
We cannot.
Can we see the vessels ?
Puis-je voir ce tableau-là ?
Vous pouvez.
Peut-il?
Il peut.
Pouvons-nous?
pas ?
Vous ne pouvez pas.
Ne peut-il pas ?
Il ne peut pas.
Ne pouvons-nous
Nous pouvons. Nous ne pouvons pas,
Pouvons-nous voir les vaisseaux ?
TWENTIETH LESSON.
93
JA
Are we going? Do we go? We do.
there? We do.
Do we go there?
Allons-nous?
Y allons-nous ?
We are not going. We are not going Nous n'allons pas.
to it.
Are we going to kill the ox?
To try.
pas.
Nous allons.
Nous y allons.
Nous n'y allons
Allons-nous tuer le bœuf ?
Essayer.
TWENTIETH EXERCISE. 1st Sec.-VINGTIÈME EXERCICE. 1re Sec.
•
• •
1849.
Samedi,... ... Mai, 1849.
Saturday, May,
Are we going to recite our lesson now? Not now. Mr. V. is not
ready. Where is he? He is at his friend's.-Is he coming (going
to come)? Yes, he is coming.-Very well.-Can you translate to-
day's exercise? We can translate it.—At what o'clock can we com-
mence? We can commence in a quarter of an hour.-Can you,
gentlemen, read and correct these exercises? We can commence,
and you can continue (or proceed).—Can you cut the bread with the
knives that you have? We are going to try.-Can you mend my
gloves? You may mend them. We are going to look for some
thread to mend those of the young professo1.-Are you going
to the tailor's to look for the old vests? We are not going
there to look for them. We have neither the time nor the
wish to do it.-Can you put those shoes on? We are going to
try them.-Will you try our scissors? No, thank you, I have mine,
and mine are very good (are sharp).-Can the tailor make a coat
to-day? No, he cannot make any.-Have we glasses to drink our
wine? We have glasses to drink it; but have we any wine? We
can send the servant to buy some.-Can you drink as much coffee
as tea? We can drink more tea than coffee, can we not?-Have
you any sugar to sweeten the coffee? I have some to sweeten the
coffee, but not the tea.-Has not the young man time to see my
brother's chud? Yes, he has time to see him.-Where is he? He
is in the garden.-No, not in the garden, but in the large and beau-
tiful vessel of the big captain.
How much money have you with you? I have a good deal.-
Have you a hundred dollars? I have more than that. More than
a hundred dollars? Why have you so much? Because I have a
mind to buy a horse. Which one? The general's? Will he sell
his? He will. It is not that (which) I wish to buy; but the farmer's
young horse. Are we going to take any cakes home? We are not
going to take any.-Can we not take some? No, we cannot.-Can-
not the cake-merchant send them to our house? Yes, he can send
them there in half an hour. That will do (C'est bou.)-Will the
Swiss send his son to the painter's? No, not to the painter's, but to
the bookseller's.-Will he send him there now? No, he is not going
E
94
TWENTIETH LESSON.
to send him there now, but to-morrow.-Is not to-morrow Saturday?
No, it is Sunday.-What day of the month is it? It is the 18th.
The 18th, indeed ?-Who is going to read and copy the last vocabu-
lary? Nobody is.-Is not Mr. Lenoir wrong in going to Mrs. Ver-
dier's house? Yes, he is wrong to go there; but he will go.—Are
you going to put on but one glove? No, because I have but one.
Is the servant going to buy a broom to sweep the store (magasin)?
No, he is afraid to sweep it.-Why is he afraid to sweep it? Be-
cause the big dog is there (in it).-Who can sweep it? Little Robert
can. Has he a broom to sweep it? He has a broom to sweep it.-
Has the cook sugar enough to sweeten the cakes? He has enough
to sweeten them; but he has no more salt to salt the birth, nor the
beef.-Is he not going to salt them? Yes, he is; because he is
going to the merchant's to buy some salt to salt them.
VOCABULARY. 2d Section.
action,
VOCABULAIRE. 2de Section.
To, at, in. 1. To the. 2. To the. À 1. À l'.
2. Au, aux.
Obs. 42. À l' is used before a vowel or silent h, in the sing. (Obs. 5.)
Au (the contraction of: à le, § 9), is used before consonants.
Aux (contraction of: à les, § 9), is the plural, before all letters.
To the friend.
To the man.
To the captain.
To the penknife.
The basket.
This carpet.
His noor.
My cat.
To mine.
To yours.
To him, to her
To me.
To us.
To the friends.
To the men.
To the captains.
To the penknives.
To the basket.
To this carpet.
To his floors.
To my cat.
To mine (plur).
To ours (plur).
indirect object.)
To you.
To them.
Are they able? Can they? May they?
They cannot.
They can.
Cannot these men work?
What can your children do ?
To speak to me.
To speak to him, (to her.)
To write to him, (to her.) To me.
To speak to the general and to his
friend.
To send the grocer a dollar. (§ 514.)
To give, give away. To lend.
À l'ami.
À l'homme.
Au capitaine.
Au canif.
Le panier.
Ce tapis-ci.
Son plancher.
Mon chat.
Au mien.
Au vôtres.
Aux amis.
Aux hommes.
Aux capitaines.
Aux canifs.
Au panier.
À ce tapis-ci.
À ses planchers.
À mon chat.
Aux miens.
Aux nôtres.
Lui, (régime indirect av. le verbe.)
Me, (régime indirect av. le verbe.
$ 47, &c.)
Nous.
Peuvent-ils ?
Vous.
Leur.
Ils peuvent. Ils ne peuvent pas.
Ces hommes ne peuvent-ils pas tra-
vailler ?
Vos enfants que peuvent-ils faire ?
Me parler. Peuvent-ils me parler?
Lui parler. Ils peuvent lui parler.
Lui écrire. M'écrire.
Parler au général et à son ami
Envoyer un dollar à l'épicier.
Donner,
Prêter.
TWENTIETH
95
LESSON.
To give you-them-us. ($ 45.)
Vous donner. Leur donner. Nous
donner.
To lend a friend some money. (51) | Prêter de l'argent à un ami.
Can you write to me?
They can write to you.
Can the clerk speak to you?
He cannot speak to us now.
Can they not write to your brother?
Yes, they can write to him.
Pouvez-vous m'écrire ?
Ils peuvent vous écrire.
Le commis peut-il vous parler?
Il ne peut pas nous parler à présent.
Ne peuvent-ils pas écrire à votre
frère ?
Si fait; ils peuvent lui écrire.
TWENTIETH EXERCISE. 2d Sec.-VINGTIÈME EXERCICE. 2de Sec.
Monday, June ...... 1849.
Lundi,
•
Juin, 1849.
At what o'clock are you going to recite, to-day? My brothers
cannot recite before twelve o'clock.-Can they not recite at ten?
No, they cannot.-Will you take your big basket to my house? I
will not take my basket there, but to the general's.-When? Now?
No, I will take the basket there to-morrow.-Do your sons wish to
take mine to the physician's? No, they cannot take it there.-
Why can they not? Because they have not time enough.-Is the
farmer going to kill anything? He is going to kill his big ox.-Is
he going to kill it now? Yes, he is.-Can they write to me? They
cannot write to you.-Can they speak to you? They can speak to
us. Can they not wait for their friends? Yes, they can.-Can they
not burn as much coal as wood? No, they cannot burn so much of
the former as of the latter.-Have we more friends than the Dutch?
We have more than they.-Has the grocer less coffee than tea? Ho
has less tea than coffee; but we have more of that than of this.-
Who has a cat? The sailors have a cat.-Where is their cat?
Their cat is in a small basket of wood.-Can the little servant
sweep the carpet? He can.-Can he sweep the garret floor? Yes,
he can do it.—Will you lend him a broom to sweep that floor? We
cannot lend any to sweep the floor, but we can lend one to sweep the
carpet.-Who is going to write to the merchant and to the grocer?
The clerks can write to them.
Is the professor of English going to write a book? Yes, he is
going to write one. He can write a good one; can he not? Yes,
he can.
He is a man of merit. (§ 39, N. 3.)—Are we not going to
Pratt's garden to-night? No, we are not going there to-night, but
to-morrow, at nine or ten o'clock.-Will you give a dictionary to
your son? Yes, I will give him a good dictionary.-Will they
end me their horse? They cannot lend you their horse, because
the old minister has it.-Are we going to lend the lawyer (§ 513)
anything? We are going to lend the physician something-Are
96
TWENTIETH LESSON.
}
you not going to lend many things? Yes, we are going to lend
many things. What are we going to lend? We are going to lend,
first, handkerchiefs, shawls, and hats; and afterwards cloaks, bags,
and parasols, to the friends of the lawyer.-Why? Because they
have none. You are very good.-Who is busy? The grocer and
his clerk, the doctor and his neighbor the minister, the captain and
his son, are busy.—Are you not busy, also? Yes, we are busy, but
not very busy.-Are you ready to go to the garden of the Scotch-
man? I am ready to go, but Charles is not.-Why is he not ready?
He is going to the grocer's to buy some good salt. Is he going to
buy much? He is. What does he wish to do? He will salt the
beef and the mutton which we have.-Cannot the servants salt
them? No, they cannot, or they will not.
VOCABULARY. 3d Section,
Are they going? Do they not go?
They are going, or they are. They
go, They do not.
To the museum. To the wharf.
Are they going to the museum?
No, they are going to the wharf.
Are the carpenters going to the ship?
They go there to work.
They go neither to the wharf, nor
the museum.
Are they going to see anybody?
They are not going to see anybody.
What are they going to do?
They are not going to do anything.
Where are they going? They go
nowhere.
VOCABULAIRE. 3me Section.
Ne vont-ils pas ?
Ils ne vont pas.
Vont-ils ?
Ils vont.
Au musée.
Vont-ils au musée ?
Non, ils vont au quai.
Au quai.
Les charpentiers vont-ils au bâti-
ment? Ils y vont pour y travailler.
Ils ne vont ni au quai, ni au musée.
Vont-ils voir quelqu'un ?
Ils ne vont voir personne.
Que vont-ils faire ?
Ils ne vont rien faire.
Où vont-ils ? Ils ne vont nulle part.
Do they wish to send the good book Veulent-ils envoyer le bon livre
to the man ?
They are going to send it to him.
When are they going to send it to
him?
They are going to give it to him to-
morrow.
Can they lend you the old diction-
ary?
They can (lend it to me) on Thursday.
Cannot your friend lend you one be-
fore Thursday? No, he cannot
(lend me one) before Friday or
Saturday.
à l'homme?
Ils vont le lui envoyer.
Quand vont-ils le lui envoyer?
Ils vont le lui donner demain.
Peuvent-ils vous prêter le vieux
dictionnaire ?
Ils peuvent me le prêter, jeudi.
Votre ami ne peut-il pas vous en
prêter un avant jeudi? Non, il ne
peut pas m'en prêter un avant
vendredi ou samedi.
For the order in which objective personal pronouns must be invariably
connected in sentences, before the verb, (§ 57), and with the partitive pro
noun en (§ 59 and
60).
TWENTIETH LESSON.
97
Are they going to give me some
sugar? They will give you some.
Can he lend some money to my
brother? Can he lend my brother
any money? (Dir. 4, § 514.)
He cannot lend him any.
Will they lend us some?
Vont-ils me donner du sucre?
Ils vont vous en donner.
Peut-il prêter de l'argent à mon
frère ?
Il ne peut pas lui en prêter.
Veulent-ils nous en prêter?
They will not lend you any, but they Ils ne veulent pas vous en prêter,
can lend some to them.
Are they going to give me the book?
They are not going to give it to you,
but to lend it to you.
Are you not going to send it to us?
I am not going to send it to you.
Are you going to send it to them?
We are going to send it to them.
Will you send the cabbages to the
cook ?
We will send them to him (to her).
Who is going to give the jewels to us?
Our good friends are going to give
them to us.
Am I going to give them to them?
Can he not lend them to you? ·
mais ils peuvent leur en prêter.
Vont-ils me donner le livre ?
Ils ne vont pas vous le donner, mais
vous le prêter.
N'allez-vous pas nous l'envoyer?
Je ne vais pas vous l'envoyer.
Allez-vous le leur envoyer?
Nous allons le leur envoyer.
Voulez-vous envoyer les choux au
cuisinier ?
Nous voulons les lui envoyer.
Qui va nous donner les bijoux ?
Nos bons amis vont nous les donner.
Vais-je les leur donner ?
Ne peut-il pas vous les prêter ?
TWENTIETH EXERCISE. 3d Sec.-VINGTIÈME EXERCICE. 3me Sec.
•
1849.
Mardi,...... Juin, 1849.
Tuesday, June,
Who is going to recite to-day? We are going to recite.—Can you
copy the vocabulary? We cannot copy it; we have not time to
copy it; but we can translate it.—Will you try? With pleasure.-
Is le the French of: to the? No, Sir, au is the French of: to the.
Very well, that is right.-Can you give me the Frencu of: to the
museum? We can give it; it is. is it not? (Yes, or no, as
he case may be.)—And that of: to the baskets?-Have you that of:
Are they going to see any one? Yes, we have.-What is it? It
is ... Is it right? Yes, or no..... -Who is going to the
wharf? To which wharf? To Girard wharf (au quai Girard). Our
merchant is going there to see his ship.-To see what? His ship.-
Is his ship at the wharf? It is there.-Has he many sailors? He
has more than ten. More than what? More than ten.-How many
has he? He has twelve or thirteen.-Has he so many? Yes, he has.
Can you cut me some bread? I can cut you some.-Have you a
knife to cut me some? I have one.-Can you mend my gloves?
I can mend them, but I have no wish to do in Can the tailor make
me a coat? He can make you one.-Will you speak to the physi
cian? I will speak to him.-Does your son wish to see me in order
C
9
9€
TWENTIETH LESSON.
to speak to me? He wishes to see you in order to give you a dol.
lar.-Does he wish to kill me? He does not wish to kill you; he
only wishes to see you.-Does the son of our old farmer wish to
kill an ox? He wishes to kill two.
Who has a mind to kill our cat? Our neighbor's bad boy has a
mind to kill it.-How much money can you send me? I can send
you twenty francs.-Will you send me my carpet? I will send it
to you.-Will you send the shoemaker anything? (quelque chose au
cordonnier?) I will send him my shoes.-Will you send him your
coats? No, I will send them to the tailor.-Can the tailor send me
my cloak? He cannot send it you. Are your children able to write
to me? They are able to write to you.-Will you lend me your
basket? I will lend it you.
Have you a glass to drink your wine? I have one, but I have no
wine; I have only tea.-Will you give me money to buy some? I
will give you some, but I have only a little.-Will you give me that
which you have with you? I will give it you.-Can you drink as
much wine as milk? I can drink as much of the one as of the
other.-Has our neighbor any wood to make a fire? (du feu?) He
has some to make one, (pour en faire,) but he has no money to buy
bread and butter.-Are you willing to lend him some? I am willing
to lend him some.-Do you wish to speak to the German? I wish
to speak to him.—Where is he? He is at the museum. Very well,
I am going to see him and speak to him.
RECAPITULATORY EXERCISE. RÉSUMÉ.
L'adolescent (va-t-il venir aujourd'hui ? L'adolescent va venir
pour nous apporter de l'acier et du fer.-Qu'allons-nous acheter?
Nous n'allons rien acheter que du velours.—N'ai-je pas un bon ami
allemand? Vous n'avez pas d'ami allemand; mais vous en avez
un suisse.--Les marchands de nouveautés n'ont-ils pas de châles,
de rubans, de gants, de bas, de velours, de drap? Si fait, ils ont de
tout cela; et c'est ce que nous allons acheter.-Chez qui allez-vous
acheter tout cela? Quelque chose chez celui-ci; quelque autre
chose, chez celui-là.-Qui va acheter des livres ? Ces deux écoliers
vont en acheter.-Le ministre et l'avocat ne vont-ils pas en acheter
quelques uns aussi? Si fait; mais il ne vont pas en acheter beau
coup.-Chez qui vont-ils les acheter? Chez Appleton.-Le petit
garçon de l'épicier ne va-t-il pas y acheter un joli canif de bon
acier, un porte-crayon d'argent, un encrier de fer, du papier, et des
crayons? Si fait, il va y acheter tous ces articles. Non, non, pas
tous ces articles (Obs. 34.) Il ne veut ni enerier, ni canif.—
TWENTIETH LESSON.
99
A-t-il un canif et un encrier? Il a encore un encrier, mais pas de
canif.-Pourquoi ne veut-il pas en acheter un ? Parce qu'il a celui
de son frère.
Comment se porte-t-on chez le général? Tout le monde s'y
porte bien. Je suis bien aise de l'apprendre.--Et chez le ministre ?
Chez lui, plusieurs personnes sont malades.-Qu'a Jean? Jean
a mal de gorge.-Charles l'a-t-il aussi? Non, celui-là a mal
aux dents.-Qu'ont les deux petits? Ils ont mal de tête.-Et
Sophie? Sophie n'a rien. J'en suis bien aise.-Le ministre est-il
malade? Oui, comme à l'ordinaire. Il a un mauvais rhume.-
Comment vous êtes-vous porté ? Je ne me suis pas bien porté.—
Vous vous portez bien, à l'ordinaire, n'est-ce pas ?
Je me
porte parfaitement à l'ordinaire, mais pas ce matin.-Il fait si
chaud, n'est-ce pas ? Oui, il fait trop chaud.-Où allez-vous? Je
vais chez l'apothicaire, chez le marchand de souliers.-Ou le
cordonnier, n'est-ce pas ? Non pas le cordonnier, mais le marchand
de souliers. Est-ce tout? Non, je vais chez le marchand de charbon
et au télégraphe électrique. Je vous souhaite beaucoup de plaisir.-
J'ai l'honneur de vous saluer.-Je vous souhaite le bonjour. Le
Russe se porte-t-il mieux? Oui, un peu mieux. J'espère que votre
frère se porte bien? Très-bien, je vous remercie. Comment se
porte-t-on chez lui? Tout le monde s'y porte bien. Personne n'y
est malade.
•
Votre cuisinier a-t-il assez d'argent pour acheter du bœuf et du
mouton? Oui, il en a assez pour acheter l'un et l'autre.-Va-t-il
porter autant de celui-ci que de celui-là? Il va porter plus de
celui-là quc de celui-ci.-Les matelots ont-ils des billets pour acheter
du chocolat? Ils n'ont pas de billets; mais, ils ont de l'or. C'est
assez bon, n'est-ce pas ?-En ont-ils assez pour acheter des poulets,
du sel, du poivre, des biscuits, du beurre frais, du pain frais, du
bœuf frais, du vin, du sucre, du thé, du café....est-ce tout? Non,
ce n'est pas tout.-Des choux, du vieux fromage, du vinaigre, du
grain, de la farine.—De la farine? Quel est l'anglais de cela?.
N'avez-vous pas l'anglais de farine? Non, nous ne l'avons pas.-
Qui l'a? Personne ne l'a.-Votre domestique a un balai pour
balayer le plancher du magasin, n'est-ce pas ? Non, il n'en a pas.-
Voulez-vous lui donner un quart de dollar pour en acheter un? Je
vais lui en donner un.-Je n'en ai pas. Je n'ai que des demi-dol-
N'avez-vous pas un quart de dollar? Non, je n'en ai plus.
Quel est l'Anglais de: faire? C'est: to do, to make. C'est bien,
c'est cela. De quelle conjugaison est-il? Il est de la......conju
gaison.-Pourquoi ? Parce qu'il finit en:.... Est-il régulier?....
Pourquoi? Parce qu-il n'est pas conjugué comme le modèle..
ars.
100
TWENTY-FIRST LESSON.
(Le maître peut faire les mêmes questions sur quelques autres
verbes, comme: Voir-porter-écrire.)-Quel est votre dernier vo-
cabulaire ? C'est le......Quelle section? La ....Y avez-vous
des verbes? Oui, nous en avons plusieurs.-Quels verbes avez-
vous?......Les avez-vous dans votre catalogue? Avez-vous des
noms dans le vocabulaire? Combien en avez-vous? Les écoliers
ont-ils des adjectifs dans le leur ?-En avez-vous dans le vôtre ?—
L'étranger en a-t-il dans le sien?-Qu'avons-nous dans le nôtre ?—
Prenez mon parapluie pour le prêter à Robert.-Où va-t-il? Il va
sortir.-Oui, mais, où va-t-il? Ne va-t-il pas au musée? À quel
musée? Sara, Jean, et Guillaume n'y vont-ils pas aussi? Pouvez-
vous sucrer mon thé? Ne veut-il pas sucrer son café ?-N'allez-
vous pas mettre du sucre dans le chocolat? Nous allons y en
mettre. Qu'allez-vous mettre dans le vin? Je ne vais rien y
mettre.—Pouvez-vous écrire au commis?....à l'épicier?….. aux
étrangers?....à nos amis?....Quelqu'un veut-il tuer l'oiseau du
petit enfant?......Le cuisinier a-t-il tué les jeunes ou les vieux
poulets?
TWENTY-FIRST LESSON, 21st.—Vingt et unième Leçon, 21me.
VOCABULARY. 1st Section.
INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS.
For persons. Pour les personnes.
Nominative. Who? Nominatif. Qui?
Object direct. Whom? Régime direct,
Qui?
Objective, with a preposition.
To whom?
À qui?
Of or from whom? De qui?
VOCABULAIRE. 1re Section.
PRONOMS INTERROGATIFS.
For things.
What?
What?
Pour les choses.
Qu'est-ce qui?
Que? Qu'? Quor?
Régime indirect, avec une prépo-
To what?
sition.
De quoi?
À
quor?
Of or from what?
quoi?
With whom? (whom.. with?) Avec qui ? With what? (what.. with ?) Avec
For whom? (whom..for ?) Pour qui?
For what? (What.. for ?) Pour quoi
Qui? Who? has no plural, and always refers to persons, without distinc-
tion of sex; as, who, in English.
Que? and Quoi? What? have no plural, and always relate to things.
Obs. 43. As direct object, use que before the verb in an interrogative
form; and quoi after the verb, in an affirmative form. After a preposition
use quoi, never que. [Mind that all those pronouns are not relative, but
interrogative.]
What have they? Qu'ont-ils ?
What will you say?
What do you mean?
Que voulez-
vous dire?
TWENTY-FIRST LESSON.
101
They have, what? Ils ont, quoi?
What is he going to reply to? À quoi
va-t-il répondre ?
To answer, to reply to.
}
He will say what? Il veut dire,
He means what? quoi?
He is going to answer what? Il va
répondre, à quoi?
Répondre, 4, (takes à before a noun.)
Obs. 44. Répondre, taking à before the noun, coincides with, to reply
to, better than with to answer, which has no preposition after, and the
scholar is invited mentally to connect répondre à with to reply to, even
when to answer is used in the book.
To answer the man, (to reply to.)
To answer the men,. (to reply to.)
Whom do you wish to answer? (reply
to?)
I wish to answer (reply to) my brother.
To answer (reply to) him, her.
To answer (reply to) them.
To answer (to reply to) the note.
To answer (reply to) it.
To it, to them, (usually for things.)
To answer the notes.
To answer them, (things.)
To ask a question of some one, some-
body.
Will you ask me a question?
I am going to ask you one.
In French. In English. In German.
Can you answer me in French?
I believe so. I believe I can.
Has he my book? I believe he has it.
|
Répondre à l'homme.
Répondre aux hommes.
À qui voulez-vous répondre ?
Je veux répondre à mon frère.
Lui répondre. (§ 47.)
Leur répondre, (pour les personnes.)
(§ 47.)
Répondre au billet.
Y répondre. ($ 47.)
Y, (généralement pour les choses.)
Répondre aux billets.
Y répondre, (pour les choses.)
Faire une question (fem. noun) à
quelqu'un.
Voulez-vous me faire une question?
Je vais vous en faire une.
En Français. En Anglais. En Al
lemand.
Pouvez-vous me répondre en Fran-
çais ?
Je crois que oui.
A-t-il mon livre ? Je crois que oui.
Obs. 45.—Any affirmative answer after: I believe, may be expressed by:
oui. A negative answer, by: que non. (Dir. 6.)
que oui.
Can they speak German well?
Peuvent-ils bien parler l'Allemand?
I believe not. I believe they cannot. Je crois que non.
TWENTY-FIRST EXERCISE. 1st Sec.-VINGT ET UNIÈME EXERCICE. 1re Sec.
Wednesday, June,
1849. Mercredi, ...... Juin, 1849.
• •
• •
What are we going to try to-day? We are going to try to recite.—
To recite what? To recite a vocabulary.-Which? This one.-Is
it the 20th? No, it is not the 20th, but the last. It is the: what?
The last, the 21st. -Very well. Will you begin? With pleasure.-
Will you ask us questions in French or in English? I am going to
ask you some in English first, and in French afterwards.-We are
ready to answer you. Are you ready, indeed? I believe we are,
(que oui.)-Can I begin? I believe you can.-To how many notes
can you reply (answer) this evening? I can reply to six or seven.—
9*
102
TWENTY-FIRST LESSON
}
Can you answer so many? (à autant que cela?) I believe I can.-
Have you as many brothers as I? We have just as many as you;
and more than they.-How many volumes of Irving's works have
they? They have eight.-Have they so many? Yes, indeed, and
they are going to buy more.-How many more? Two more, I
believe. Has Miss Clara as many shawls as Miss Emily (Emilie)?
No, Miss Clara has less of them than Miss Emily.-Have you my
copybook? I? No, I believe not.-Has he got it? He? I believe
not. Who has it? I cannot tell you. Have not those children got,
it? They? I believe not.-Are you not going to give a handsome
fan to Miss Victoria? Yes, I am going to give her one.
Will you write to the Italian? I will write to him.-Will your
brother write to the English? He will write to them, but they have
no mind to answer him.-Will you answer your friend? I will
answer him. But whom will you answer? I will answer my good
father. Will you not answer your good friends? I will answer
them.-Who will write to you? The Russian wishes to write to
-Will you answer him? I will not answer him.-Who will
write to our friends? The children of our neighbor will write to
them. Will they answer them? They will answer them. To
whom do you wish to write? I wish to write to the Russian.—Will
he answer you? He wishes to answer me, but he cannot.-Can the
Spaniards answer us? They cannot answer us, but we can answer
them.-To whom do you wish to send this note? I will send it
to the joiner. From whom is this boy going to receive a hat? He
is going to receive one from his friend, the lawyer. For whom is
this coat? It is for our father.-Whom are these gloves for? They
are for our friend's clerk. With whom are your children going to the
museum? They are going there with the old professor.-Are they
not also going to the wharf to see the merchant's beautiful vessel?
Yes, they are going there with the young teacher, the old captain,
and the good sailor.
VOCABULARY, 2d Section.
The play, the theatre. The ball.
To or at the play. To the theatres.
To the balls.
To the ball.
The parlor, drawing-room.
The storehouse, magazine, warehouse.
This counting-house.
The market. In, at, to the market.
There, thither. To go there; to be
there.
To send there. To carry it there,
VOCABULAIRE, 2de Sec.
Le théâtre.
Au théâtre.
Au bal.
Le salon.
Le magasin.
Ce comptoir.
Le marché.
Y.
Le bal.
Aux théâtres.
Aux bals.
Le grand salon.
Au marché.
Y aller.
Y être
Y envoyer.
L'y porter.
TWENTY-FIRST
103
LESSON.
Will they go to the theatre?
They wish to go there.
Will you go there? I will. (Dir. 1.)
Are you going now?
I am.
Is your cousin in the parlor ?
He is; or, he is there. He is not.
My cousin. This cousin.
Where is our cousin?
Do you know? I know not (do not).
Do you know the French of: to see?
I do. I know it. I do know it.
I know something. I know nothing.
Do you know the French of: to have?
I do not know it.
Veulent-ils aller au théâtre ?
Ils veulent y aller.
Voulez-vous y aller? Je veux y aller.
Y allez-vous à présent?
J'y vais,
Votre cousin est-il dans le salon ?
Il y est.
Mon cousin.
Où est notre
cousin est-il?
Savez-vous ?
Il n'y est pas.
Ce cousin.
cousin?
Où notre
Je ne sais pas.
Savez-vous le Français de: to see?
Je le sais.
Je sais quelque chose. Je ne sais rien.
Savez-vous le Français de: to have?
Je ne le sais pas.
I will tell you (I am going to). (19 N. 1.) Je vais vous le dire.
To have, to get. To have got.
To have to.
Avoir.
Avoir à.
Obs. 46.-When avoir, to have, expresses obligation, use the preposition
d, before the following infinitive, and repeat it with each verb.
What have you to do?
I have to copy and translate that.
I have nothing to recite, nor read.
Have your cousins nothing to say?
Yes, they have something to say.
What has John to answer (reply to)?|
He has to answer our questions.
Then. If, if he.
If he can.
Qu'avez-vous à faire ?
J'ai à copier et à traduire cela.
Je n'ai rien à réciter, ni à lire.
Vos cousins n'ont-ils rien à dire ?
Si fait. Ils ont quelque chose à dire.
À quoi Jean a-t-il à répondre ? Jean
a à répondre à quoi?
Il a à répondre à nos questions.
Alors. Si, s'il.
S'il peut.
Obs. 47.—The i, of si, is cut off, only when followed by il, or ils, but in
no other case. If he has, they have; s'il a; s'ils ont s'il veut, &c.
We are well.
| Nous nous portons bien.
TWENTY-FIRST EXERCISE. 2d Sec.-EXERCICE 21ME. 2de Sec.
Thursday, June ...... 1849.
Jeudi... . Juin, 1849.
Good morning, ladies and gentlemen! I hope you are well.
Yes, Sir, we are well, thank you. How is Miss Emily's cousin ?
Is he better? I believe he is. How is your brother's cold? His
cold is better, but he has the toothache. I am sorry to hear it.-Do
you know how the general is? Yes, I know that he is well; but
Captain Henry is sick.-I know it; but he is better; is he not? I
cannot tell you.-What have we to do this evening? We have to
recite, as usual.-Who is going to begin? I and he.-Why not he
and I? Very well; he and I, then.-I am going to ask (faire) a
question of the one and the other. (à l'un et à l'autre.)—-Will you
answer me in French? I am going to try.-What have you got?
104
TWENTY-FIRST LESSON.
!
Nothing. What have you to do? I have only to write.-What
have you to write? I have to write a note -To whom? To the
carpenter's cousin.-What have you to give him? We have to
give him some fresh bread and butter. Has your servant anything
to drink? I believe that he has to drink some tea.-Are we not
going to drink some, too? Yes, we are going to drink some.—At
what o'clock? At eight.-At half past eight, you mean (vous vou-
lez dire).-No, I mean at a quarter to nine.-Have we to send much
rice to the cook of Mr. Girard's vessel? Yes, we have to send him
much.-Has he any? I believe that he has but little more.-Then,
we have to send it to him to-day; have we not? Yes, indeed.-
Who is going to take it to him? Do you know? Yes, I do. Who?
The joiner's little boy.
When will the lawyer go to the play? He is going only to-mor
row night. When can his cousin go with him? He cannot go to
the play if he is going to a ball.-To which ball is he going? To that
of the physician.-Is he going to give a grand ball? Yes, he is, to-
morrow evening.-Where is your son? I believe he is at the counting-
room.-Where are they going to take me? To the counting-room,
in their warehouse.-Where are the cook and the grocer going? If
they are going anywhere, they are going to market.-Can I go with
them? Yes, you may (Dir. 1), if you have nothing to do.-To
which market are they going? To the large one.-Are the farmer
and his cousin at market? No, they are in the shoe-store.-Can you
come to my house to go to the wharf? I have no wish to go to your
house first, and afterwards to the wharf; but I am ready to go to
the wharf now.-Have you your hat, gloves, and umbrella? Um-
brella? Is it bad weather? Yes, it is. Then, I will not go there,
but to the museum, if you wish to go with me.—Are they going,
too? Yes, they, also.-Very well; then we may go (y), if you are
ready.—Is the picture of the Italian in the parlor? Yes, it is there.
Is the servant going to sweep the parlor? No, he cannot sweep
it now. Why can he not? Because I believe somebody is in the
parlor. Who is in it (y)? Madam Vernet and her cousin Frede-
rick. Will you send them some biscuits, fresh butter, and some
wine? I cannot, because the servant is not at home.-If you will
send them something, I can take it to them; can I not? Very well
you may, if you wish.-How many biscuits have you? I have
only six or seven; is that enough? It is.
Ah!
Since.
Since last Sunday.
Not quite well.
I am glad to see you, them, him.
Ah!
Depuis.
Depuis dimanche dernier.
Pas tout-à-fait bien.
Je suis bien aise de vous, les, le voir.
TWENTY-SECOND LESSON.
105
TWENTY-SECOND LESSON, 22d.—Vingt-deuxième Leçon, 22me
VOCABULARY. 1st Section.
To, at, or in the corner.... corners.
To, at, or in the hole .... holes.
In the hole.
In the holes.
To, or at the bottom.
In the bottom of the bag... of this
chest.
At the corner of the fire... of the
garden.
The lawyer's office.
The office.
This workshop. The joiner's work-
shop.
To, or at the end.
The road.
At the end of the road... of the roads.
That cousin of yours, of mine, of his,
of theirs, &c.
To send for. To go for, to fetch.
To come for. To come for me.
To send for me. To go for them.
Whom are you going to send for?
I am going to send for nobody.
At what o'clock are you coming for
him? (192, N. 2.)
Are you going for any one?
I? No. But John is going for his
cousin, who is in our office.
VOCABULAIRE. 1re Section.
Au coin.
Au trou.
Aux coins.
Aux trous.
Dans le trou.
Au fond.
Dans les trous.
Au fond du sac. Au fond de ce coffre.
Au coin du feu. Au coin du jardin.
Le bureau.
Cet atelier.
Au bout.
Le bureau de l'avocat.
L'atelier du menuisier.
Le chemin.
Au bout du chemin... des chemins.
Votre, mon, son, leur, &c., cousin.
($108.)
Envoyer chercher. Aller chercher.
Venir chercher. Venir me chercher.
M'envoyer chercher. Les aller cher-
cher.
Qui allez-vous envoyer chercher ?
Je ne vais envoyer chercher personne.
À quelle heure allez-vous venir le
chercher ?
Allez-vous chercher quelqu'un ?
Moi? Non. Mais Jean va chercher
son cousin, qui est dans notre bu-
reau.
Is not the cat in the workshop? Yes, Le chat n'est-il pas dans l'atelier?
it is at the end.
These gentlemen are going to send
for cakes and wine; are they not?
Yes, they are going to send for some.
Will your boy go for some fresh
butter and vinegar for us?
He will not go for any for you.
He is very kind (or good), indeed!
Are you not going to send for the
doctor, for the clerk who is sick?
Yes, we are going to send for him.
He will send for my brothers.
No, he has a mind to go for them.
Si fait, il est au bout.
Ces messieurs vont envoyer chercher
des gâteaux et du vin, n'est-ce pas?
Oui, ils vont en envoyer chercher.
Votre garçon veut-il aller chercher
du beurre frais et du vinaigre pour
nous ?
Il ne veut pas en aller chercher pour
vous.
Il est très-bon, en vérité !
N'allez-vous pas envoyer chercher le
docteur pour le commis qui est
malade ?
Si fait.
cher.
Nous allons l'envoyer cher-
Il veut envoyer chercher mes frères.
Non, il a envie de les aller chercher
106
TWENTY-SECOND LESSON.
Voulez-vous envoyer chercher plus
Will you send for more glasses, or
have we enough?
I will send for more, because we
have only three.
1
de verres, ou en avons-nous assez ?
Je veux en envoyer chercher, parce
que nous n'en avons que trois.
TWENTY-SECOND EXERCISE.1st Sec.-VINGT-DEUXIÈME EXERCICE. 1re Sec.
Friday, June,.
•
1849.
Vendredi,... June, 1849.
Ah! Mr. Robert, I am glad to see you. How have you been since
last Monday? I have not been very well.-Ah! indeed! I am
very sorry to hear it.—But you are well now, I hope? Not quite,
but much better. Thank you.-How is it with you at home? (Com-
ment se porte-t-on chez vous?) We are all well, at your service.-It
is cold, is it not? Yes, it is.-Where is Samuel going? I am going
to send him for something.—At what o'clock are you going to send
him? At half past nine.-Is it not yet half past nine? No, not
quite. It is only a quarter past nine. Then he can wait a quarter of
an hour.-What is he going for? He is going to buy sugar, biscuits
and cheese, if we have no more.-Who is in the garden? The
children of our friends are there.-Will you send for the physician?
We will send for him.-Who will go for him at the joiner's work-
shop? Little Thomas (Thomas) will go for him.-Can he do it?
Yes, indeed.-Will you give me my broth? Will you drink some
broth now? I wish to drink a little.-Where is it? It is at the
corner of the fire. I will give it to you (vais).
·
Will you give little Thomas three sous to fetch some milk? Is
that enough? It is enough.-Where is he going to buy it? He can
buy it at the market.-Very well. I am going to give him three
cents to get milk, and another to buy a cake. You are very good.
But I have no money with me; it is at the counting-house.-Will
you go for it? I am not afraid to go for it.-Will you buy my Web-
ster's Dictionary? I cannot; I have no more money.-No more
money (plus d')! No, I have no more with me.-Where is your
cat? At the bottom of the garret, in a hole.-In which hole is it?
In its hole. Where is that old man's dog? It is in a corner of the
ship. Have the sailors any cats? Yes, they have.-Has not the
servant to sweep the office and parlor? He has to sweep them.-
Has their cook got a good fire? He has an excellent fire, because
he has to burn the coffee.-Has he not to make tea? He has to
make it. Where is our cat? I believe it is in Miss Sophia's basket
in the parlor.-Is not my Fleming's Dictionary in the parlor? Yes,
it is there, and Surenne's also.
Have you anything to do? I have something to do.—What have
you to do? I have to mend my clothes, and go to the end of the
TWENTY-SECOND LESSON.
107
road. Why have you to go to the end of the road? I am going
to the grocer's to buy some grain for our bird and chickens.-Is not
the professor there with his scholars, the minister, the apothecary,
the lawyer, and the physician? Yes, I believe they are there.-
Can you give me as much fresh butter as bread? I can give you
more of the latter than of the former.-Can that cousin of yours
(votre) drink as much wine as coffee or tea? He cannot drink so
much of the former as of the two latter. Have you to speak to any
one? I have to speak to several men, if I can see them at the end
of the road. They are in the work-shop. Very well, I will go
(192, N. 1) there to say a few words to them.-Have you not to
answer this young man's last note? No, we have not to answer
it. (y. Ob. 44.)
Yesterday. Yesterday morning.
Yesterday evening; last evening,
night.
Come in, walk in, go in. For (because)
Some (meaning, some of us, you,
them).
VOCABULARY. 2d Section.
Thou. Thou hast. Hast thou? Thou
hast not.
Hast thou my pencil-case?
Thou art. Art thou? Thou art not.
Art thou not busy and in a hurry?
I am busy, but not hurried.
Are the farmers tired?
Hier.
Hier matin.
Hier soir ou hier au soir.
Entrez.
Quelques uns.
Car.
}
VOCABULAIRE. 2de Section.
Tu. Tu as. As-tu? Tu n'a pas.
As-tu mon porte-crayon?
Tu es. Es-tu ? Tu n'es pas.
N'es-tu pas occupé et pressé ? ~
Je suis occupé, mais non pas pressé.
Les fermiers sont-ils fatigués ?
Obs. 48. Adjectives agree in number with the nouns or pronouns they
qualify. If the noun or pronoun is in the plural, the adjective takes an s.
They are not tired but busy.
Thou wilt, thou wishest, (art willing.)
Canst thou Art thou able? Thou
canst, &c.
Art thou willing to make my fire?
I am, if I can.
Art thou afraid? cold or hungry?
Ils ne sont pas fatigués mais occupés.
Tu veux. Veux-tu? Tu ne veux rien.
Peux-tu ? Tu peux. Tu ne peux
pas.
Veux-tu faire mon feu ?
Je veux le faire, si je peux.
As-tu peur? As-tu froid? As-tu
faim ?
I am not afraid, but I am cold and Je n'ai pas peur; mais j'ai froid et
hungry.
faim.
¹ In addressing one another the French use the second person plural, as in
English. The second person singular, however, is employed: 1. In sub-
lime or serious style, and in poetry; 2. It is a mark of intimacy among
friends, and is used by parents and children, brothers and sisters, husbands
and wives, towards one another: in general it implies familiarity founded
on affection and fondness, or hatred and contempt.
R
108
TWENTY-SECOND LESSON.
Art thou neither ashamed nor sleepy? | N'as-tu ni honte ni sommeil ?
Art thou going? Thou art not going.
Dost thou go there?
Thou art go-
Vas-tu? Tu vas.
Tu ne vas pas
Y vas-tu? Tu y vas. Tu n'y va
pas.
ing. Thou art not going.
Thou goest to the work-shop, dost Tu vas à l'atelier, n'est-ce pas ?
thou not ?
To be sure; of course; without doubt.
Immediately.
Soon, VERY SOON.
To sell something to somebody.
What are you going to sell the Swiss?
We are not going to sell him any-
thing.
To tell, (to say) something to some one.
Wilt thou say a word to Thomas?
Yes, I will tell him one.
To tell....to...
de, before the infin.)
Will you tell the boy to bring some
coals ?
Sans doute.
Tout de suite.
Bientôt.
Vendre quelque chose à quelqu'un.
Qu'allez-vous vendre au Suisse ?
Nous n'allons rien lui vendre.
Dire (* 4) quelque chose à quelqu'un.
Veux-tu dire un mot à Thomas ?
Oui, je veux lui en dire un.
(à before the noun; Dire à....de... (à, avant le nom;
de, avant l'infinitif.)
I will tell him to do it. (192, N. 1.)
Thee, to thee. It to thee. Them to
thee..
Thy.... Thy thimble.
bles.
Thine.
Voulez-vous dire au garçon d'appor-
ter du charbon ?
Je vais lui dire de le faire.
Te, t.
Te le.
Te les.
Thy thim- Ton, sing. Tes, plur.-Ton dé. Tes
dés.
Le tien.
Les tiens.
Je peux t'en donner.
+ Le matin.
Some to thee, thee some. I can give T'en.
thee some.
In the morning, (meaning) any morn-
ing.
In the evening, (that is) any evening. † Le soir.
TWENTY-SECOND EXERCISE. 2d Sec.-VINGT-DEUXIÈME EXERCICE. 2de Sec.
June, 1849.
Samedi,. . . . . . Juin, 1849.
Saturday,
Bonjour, Mr., enzez, prenez un siège et asseyez-vous. Avec
plaisir, car je suis fatigué.-Vous n'êtes pas malade, j'espère ?
Non, je ne suis que fatigué.—Comment vous êtes-vous porté depuis
hier matin? Très-bien, comme à l'ordinaire. Et vous? Moi aussi.
Quelqu'un est-il malade chez-vous? Non, personne n'est malade à
la maison depuis dimanche dernier.-Votre cousin l'avocat est-il
tout-à-fait bien? Non, pas tout-à-fait bien; mais beaucoup mieux.
J'en suis bien aise.
Who is in the joiner's workshop? The three boys are there.--
What have they to do? They have a great deal to do:-Can they
do it? To be sure.-Have 'ney as much to do as the carpenter's or
the baker's boys? They have just as much.-Hast thou enough to
study? To be sure.-Hast thou too much? No, not too much, but
enough.-Art thou going to copy thy exercise soon? I am going to
TWENTY-SECOND LESSON.
109
copy it immediately.—What will thy brother do first? He will first
read, then translate, and afterwards write.-Canst thou translate
well? Yes, when I wish to do it.-To how many corners is John
going? He goes only to thee.-To how many lawyers hast thou to
speak? I have to speak to four.-When hast thou to speak to them?
This evening. At what o'clock? At a quarter to nine.-Not before?
I believe not. When canst thou go to the office of the big general?
I can go there only in the morning (to-morrow morning).—At what
o'clock? At half past seven.-When wilt thou go to the old French-
man's? I am going to his house immediately.-Will thou not ge
first to the hatter's store, or work-shop, to choose a hat? Oh, yes, I
have to go there first, and then to the Frenchman's.-Will thou go
to the physician's to-morrow morning, or to-morrow evening? I will
go in the morning, at a quarter past ten, if it is fine weather, or at a
quarter of eight in the evening.
Have you to write as many notes as the Englishman? I have to
write fewer of them than he.-Will you speak to the German? I
will speak to him.-When will you speak to him? At present.—
Where is he? He is in his office, at the other end of the wood.-
Will you go to the market? I will go thither to (pour) buy some
linen. Do thy neighbors not wish to go to the museum and wharf?
They cannot go there; they are fatigued, and too busy to go. (y.)~
Hast thou the courage to go to the wood in the evening? I have
the courage to go thither, but not in the evening.—Are your children
able to answer my notes? They are able to answer them.-What
dost thou wish to say to the servant? I wish to tell him to make
the fire and to sweep the warehouse, our office, and the boy's gar-
ret.—Wilt thou tell thy brother to sell me his horse? I will tell
him to sell it to thee.-What do you wish to tell me? I wish to tell
you a word.—Whom do you wish to see? I wish to see the Scotch-
man. Has thou to tell him to send thee some milk? I have to tell
him to send me some.-Will you tell your cousin to go to the gene-
ral's in the morning, for he wishes to see him. With pleasure.—
Which book does my brother wish to sell them? He wishes to sell
only thine and his own.-Thou hast the last exercise, hast thou not?
Yes, I have it. My young friend wishes to see me, does he not?
I believe he does. He has a mind to see thee, to tell thee something
pretty.
A
10
110
TWENTY-THIRD LESSON.
1
TWENTY-THIRD LESSON, 23d.-Vingt-troisième Leçon, 23me.
VINGT-TROISIÈME VOCABULAIRE, 1re Sec.
To go out.
To remain, to stay. | Sortir,* 2.
Rester, 1.
Obs. 49. Sortir, means to leave the place one is in, without any refe-
rence to the place one goes to; when the latter is mentioned, use: aller,
and not sortir. As:
Are you going out? Yes, I wish to
go out to my friend's.
To remain, to stay at home.
Here.
There.
Wilt thou stay here?... stay there?
I wish to stay here.... there.
Obs. 50. Là, ici, require no
repeated.
Wilt thou go to thy friends?
I am going there, but he is not:
The pleasure, the favor.
Allez-vous sortir? (going to go out.)
(192, N. 1.) Oui, je veux aller (not
sortir) chez mon ami.
Rester à la maison, (fem. noun, of
which hereafter.)
Ici, y.
Là, y.
Veux-tu rester ici?... rester là?
Je veux y rester.
antecedent; y requires one. Y must be
Veux-tu aller chez tes amis ?
J'y vais, mais il n'y va pas.
Le plaisir. (de avant un infinitif.)
Will you be so kind as (good enough)| Voulez-vous me faire le plaisir de
to read that?
To do a favor.
All, every.
Every day.
Every Sunday.
All the scholars.
Every morning... evening... month.
All the velvet.
lire cela ?
Faire un plaisir.
Sing. Tout. Plur. Tous.
Tous les jours. Tous les dimanches.
Tous les matins ... soirs ... mois.
Tout le velours. Tous les écoliers.
Obs. 51. All of the velvet; all of the scholars; are frequently used in
English, but the of must not be expressed in French. [Mind that.]
A sore finger.
A sore thumb.
Is your little finger sore?
My little finger pains me. It is sore.
Whose foot is sore? John's is.
Late. It is late. Is it late?
It is not late.
Is it not late?
What o'clock is it?
It is twelve o'clock, mid-day.
Is it not a quarter past twelve?
No; it is but half past twelve.
Is it not too late to go out?
No, it is but a quarter to six; or it
wants only a quarter to six.
Is it half past one?
Write the date of the month.
+ Mal au doigt.
Mal au pouce.
† Avez-vous mal au petit doigt?
† J'ai mal au petit doigt. J'y ai mal.
+ Qui a mal au pied? Jean y a mal.
Tard. Il est tard. Est-il tard?
N'est-il pas tard? Il n'est pas tard.
Quelle heure est-il? (quelle is fem.
to agree with heure.) (192, N. 2.)
Il est midi. (Never use douze heures.)
N'est-il pas midi et demi ?
Non, il n'est que midi et quart.
N'est-il pas trop tard pour sortir?
Non, il n'est que six heures moins
un quart.
Est-il une heure et demie ? (N. 3, 192.)
Ecrivez le quantième du mois.
TWENTY-THIRD LESSON.
111
Write it every day.
Écrivez-le tous les jours. (§ 54.)
nombres.
The names of the months are after Les noms des mois sont après les
the numbers.
TWENTY-THIRD EXERCISE, 1st Sec.-VINGT-TROISIÈME EXERCICE. 1re Sec.
Écrivez ici, en Français, le quantième du mois.
Ah! Mr. Charles, I am glad to see you; come in. Take a seat.
Take this one, and sit down. Thank you. I have one here. It is
good enough.-How have you been since last month? Quite well
and how are you all? We are pretty well now-How is your cousin
Samuel? He is not well. He has a bad cold, a sore throat, and the
headache. I am sorry to hear that he is sick.-Who is in the parlor?
In the large parlor? No, in the little parlor. Your father, the
minister, his young brother, yours, my cousin Louis, Madame Leblanc,
her son, and two or three other persons are there.-Is anybody in the
large parlor? No; nobody is there.-Is the clerk going to stay at
home? No, he is going out (going to go out) to look for steel
knives. Has the Turk's tailor an iron or steel thimble? He has
neither a thimble of iron nor of steel; he has none.
lend him one. (19º, N. 1.)—One of silver? No, a steel one.-Which
dictionary have you here? Here, I have Surenne's Dictionary, French
and English, and there, Webster's.-Art thou going to the theatre?
No, I am not. Then thou art going to a ball, art thou not? No, I
am not (going there).-Where then? To my friend's the doctor.
Is that all? Will you be so kind as to copy that note for me? I
have not time to copy it, but little Robert is going to copy it for you,
in his cousin's office.
Then I will
Is it late? It is not late.-What o'clock is it? It is a quarter
past twelve.—At what o'clock does the captain wish to go out? He
wishes to go out at a quarter to eight.—What are you going to do?
I am going to read.-What have you to read? I have to read a
good book.—Will you lend it to me? I will lend it to you.-When
will you lend it to me? I will lend it to you to-morrow, if you
have time to come for it then, (venir le chercher.)-Have you a
mind to go out? I have no mind to go out.-Are you willing to
stay here, my dear (cher) friend? I cannot remain here.-Whither
have you to go? I have to go to the counting-house.-When will
you go to the ball? To-night.-At what o'clock? At midnight.-
Do you go to the Scotchman's in the evening or in the morning? 1
go there (y) both in the evening and in the morning.-Where are
you going to now? I am going to the theatre.-Where is your son
going to? He is going nowhere; he is going to stay at home to
(pour) study his French and translate it; for he has a sore foot.-
Where is your brother? He is in the parlor.-Is he not going to his
112
TWENTY-THIRD LESSON.
counting-house? No, he is not going there.-Is he going to stay
here? Yes, he is.-Why? Because he has a sore thumb and finger,
and he cannot write.-Cannot his clerk write for him? Yes, he can;
and brother is going to send for him to do it.-Wilt thou come for
John, at seven? With pleasure.
Since I had the pleasure of seeing | Depuis que je n'ai eu le plaisir de
you, of seeing them, him.
I have been perfectly well.
Oh! Will you come in and sit down?
I can neither go in nor sit down.
Many thanks.
The heat.
Need.
Too warm, too hot.
VOCABULARY. 2d Section.
To have need of....
To have need of it.
To be in want of it.
for it.
I have need of that.
To want it.
To have use
I want that.
I am in want of it. I have need of it.
Have you need of this knife?
Do you want this knife? (in want of)
I do not want it, (have no need for it.)
Are we in want of these scissors ?
I believe that you have need of them.
Do you want them any more?
I do not want them any more.
Has he need of money?
He has great need of it.
He is much in want of it.
Has the merchant need of any?
He does not want any.
Who wants or has need of any?
Nobody wants any.
They have need of it, of them, of
some.
}
}
Do John and Charles need the horses?
Have J. and C. need of the horses? S
They do not want them.
vous voir, de les voir, de le voir.
Je me suis parfaitement porté.
Oh! Voulez-vous entrer et vou
asseoir ?
Je ne peux ni entrer ni m'asseoir.
Je vous rends graces.
Le chaud.
Trop chaud.
VOCABULAIRE. 2de Section.
Besoin.
Avoir besoin de....
En avoir besoin. ($ 50.)
J'ai besoin de cela.
J'en ai besoin.
Avez-vous besoin de ce couteau ?
Je n'en ai pas besoin.
Avons-nous besoin de ces ciseaux !
Je crois que vous en avez besoin.
En avez-vous encore besoin?
Je n'en ai plus besoin.
A-t-il besoin d'argent?
Il en a grand besoin.
Le marchand en a-t-il besoin?
Il n'en a pas besoin.
Qui en a besoin ?
Personne n'en a besoin.
Ils en ont besoin.
Jean et Charles nt-ils besoin des
chevaux ?
Ils n'en ont pas besoin.
Of what? Of what have you need? De quoi? De quoi avez-vous besoin
I have need of all that.
I want nothing.
What is he in want of?
What does he want?
What has he need of?
J'ai besoin de tout cela.
Je n'ai besoin de rien.
De quoi a-t-il besoin? ($ 95.)
(He wants) nothing, that, everything Connaître,* 4.
| De rien. De cela. De tout.
To be acquainted with.
TWENTY-THIRD LESSON.
113
To be acquainted with (to know) a
man; somebody; a good teacher.
To be acquainted with nobody.
of thee, of him,
Of me,
Of us,
of you,
of it.
of them.
Is your father in want of me?
He is in want of you.
Are you in want of these books?
I am in want of them.
Is he in want of my brothers?
He is in want of them.
Does he want that? He does (want it.)
Whom do I want? (have I need of?)
You want the lawyer's clerk.
What else or what more?
|
|
Connaître un homme; quelqu'un;
un bon maître.
Ne connaître personne.
De moi, de toi, de lui, (en, § 474
De nous,
de vous,
d'eux, (en.)
Votre père a-t-il besoin de moi?
Il a besoin de vous.
Avez-vous besoin de ces livres ?
J'en ai besoin.
A-t-il besoin de mes frères ?
Il a besoin d'eux. (pour les personnes.)
Il en a besoin. (pers. et choses.)
A-t-il besoin de cela? Il en a besoin.
De qui ai-je besoin?
Vous avez besoin du commis de
l'avocat.
Quoi encore? De quoi encore?
TWENTY-THIRD EXERCISE. 2d Sec.-VINGT-TROISIÈME EXERCICE, 2de Sec.
Écrivez, en Français, le quantième du mois.
I am much pleased at seeing you, Miss Clara. Sit down; take
this seat. How do you do, this morning? I am pretty well; better
than last Tuesday.—I am glad of it. How is your father? I do
not know. Father is not here, but he is coming in two or three
days. But you, Sir; how have you been since I had the pleasure
of seeing you? I have been perfectly well, I thank you.-Is it
cold or warm, out of doors? It is warm, quite warm.-Indeed! I
am sorry for it.—I bid you good morning, Sir. Miss, I present my
respects to you. Adieu!
Is the professor going to make us recite (nous faire réciter) im-
mediately? No, not before a quarter of an hour or half an hour.-
Then, I may still study my vocabulary; can I not? To be sure you
can. But do you not know it yet? Yes, I know it pretty well; but
not too well, (trop bien. Obs. 35.)—May I go in the parlor, to study
there? Can you not study here? I can write, read, copy, and,
translate here; but I can study better in a corner of the parlor.-I£
you will stay here, I can ask you (vous faire) a few questions, and
then you can ask me some.-Very well, I am going to stay. Will
you begin or may I (puis-je ?) ask you the first questions? You
may begin, if you are ready; for, I am ready to answer you.-I am
not quite ready. I wish first to correct a word there. Now I am
ready. You know the date of the month; do you not? I believe
I do. And you; do you know it? To be sure. And he; can he
say it? I believe not. Who cannot tell the date of the month?
10*
114
TWENTY-FOURTH LESSON.
Robert cannot.-I? Yes, I can. Is it not the 8th of May? Yes,
it is (or that's it).
Are you going out? (N. 1, 192.) To be sure; have I not my hat,
cloak, and gloves? Yes, you have.-Have you to purchase (buy)
anything? Yes, I have to purchase many things. What? A large
shawl, for Sarah; a pretty little stick, for Henry; some gloves,
handkerchiefs, and velvet, for Charlotte.-Is that all? All! No,
indeed!-What else (or more)? What more? A great many things.
---Have you not to buy something for our little cousin, John? Yes,
I have several things to get for him. First, a wooden gun and other
toys; and afterwards some little books.-Is that all for him? To be
sure; it is enough; is it not? Yes, indeed.-Have you a catalogue
of those things? No, I have none; but, will you do me the favor
of making one for me? Yes, with pleasure.-Where is the paper,
where is the pencil? The paper is here, and the pencil there.—
Have you money enough to buy all that? I believe so.-What can
you lend me? A knife, if you have need of one.-A what
knife. Thank you, I have no need of a knife.—What have you
need of? I have need of a good gun.-An iron or a steel one? A
steel one. Why do you want it? I want it to kill a cat, a dog, and
some birds. Are you in want of this picture? Which? Our good
painter's last picture. I? No; but he wants it.-Who wants it?
This young man does.-How much will he give for it? I do no
know how much.-Does your brother want money? He does not
want any.-Who wants sugar? Nobody wants any.-Oh! yes; I
want some, to sweeten my tea.-Has anybody need of pepper?
Nobody has. Has the grocer but one eye? No, he has twɔ; but
he has but one thumb.
Always. (§ 170.) A moment, a little while. Toujours. Un moment,
un petit moment.
TWENTY-FOURTH LESSON, 24th.-Vingt-quatrième Leçon, 24me.
VOCABULARY. 1st Section.
VOCABULAIRE. 1re Section.
INDICATIVE MOOD.-Indicatif.
THE PRESENT TENSE.-Temps Présent ou Présent.
For its formation see ($ 144.) That article must be carefully studied.
Obs. 52. The three present tenses: I love, I do love, I am loving, will for
the present be expressed in French by: j'aime. (Mind that: am loving, are
reading, &c., are never translated literally.)
To love, to like, to be fond of.
I love.
I do not love.
Aimer, 1. (à, avant un infinitif.)
J'aime.
Je n'aime pas.
2
TWENTY-FOURTH LESSON.
115
Does he like?
Does he not love?
Are you fond of?
Dost thou love?
Who loves to read?
read.
He does. (Dir. 1.)
He does not.
We are (fond of).
Thou lovest tea.
They like to
Do you like him ? ... them?
I do (like him, them).
I do not (like him, them).
{_Aime-t-il ?
Il aime.
N'aime-t-il pas ? Il n'aime pas.
|
Aimez-vous ?
Aimes-tu ?
Nous aimons.
Tu aimes le thé.
Qui aime à lire ?
Ils aiment à lire,
Les aimez-vous ?
L'aimez-vous ?
(§ 51.)
Je l'aime.
Je ne l'aime pas.
Je les aime.
Je ne les aime pas.
Not at all. I do not like him or it
Pas du tout.
Je ne l'aime pas du
& all.
Does he sell his horse?
He does.
Do you sell anything?
I do not.
Je ne
Do those farmers sell cabbages?
They do.
They do not.
Do you finish your task?
I do.
I do not (finish it).
What do the pupils finish?
This one finishes his exercise, those
finish their tasks..
Whom are you waiting for? I ex-
pect the boy whom he expects.
Do you receive any notes to-night?
Yes; as many as they receive.
tout.
Vend-il son cheval? Il le vend.
Vendez-vous quelque chose?
vends rien.
Ces fermiers-là vendent-ils des
choux ?
Ils en vendent. Ils n'en vendent pas.
Finissez-vous votre devoir?
Je le finis.
Je ne le finis pas.
Que finissent les écoliers?
Celui-ci finit son exercice, ceux-là
finissent leurs devoirs.
Qui attendez-vous ? J'attends le
garçon qu'il attend.
Recevez-vous des billets ce soir?
J'en reçois autant qu'ils en reçoivent.
TWENTY-FOURTH EXERCISE. 1st Sec.-VINGT-QUATRIÈME EX. 1re Sec.
Mettez (put) ici le quantième du mois en Français.
Are you going to see Mr. Charles, to-day? I am.-How is he
now? He is better, but not at all well.-How is his old cousin? He
is quite well.-How have you been since I had the pleasure of seeing
you at your friend's? I have always been well, as usual.-How
are you all at home? Every one is well.-Is any one sick at your
house? No, nobody is sick.-Is not your little boy sick? Oh! yes;
he is a little sick; but not much.-Are you not coming in? Yes, I
am coming in (N. 1, 19²), to sit down a moment.—Come in, come
in. Take this seat.-No, thank you; I will (vais) sit here. (N. 19¹.)
Do you always speak French? No, we do not always speak it.
-Why do you not always speak it? Because I do not speak it
very well, Jules does not speak much better, and the children do
not speak it at all.-How many exercises do the scholars copy every
day? They copy two; one in the morning, the other in the eve-
ning. At what o'clock do they copy the morning one? They copy
it at past 9.And the evening one; do they also copy it at past 9 ?
2
116
TWENTY-FOURTH LESSC N.
They copy it at
past 7.—When do you correct them? I correct
them at two or of two.
Do you not dine (dîner) at one? No, we dine later.-Who
dines at one? All our neighbors do.-Why do you not dine at one
also? Because we like to dine later.-Do your children dine, or
eat dinner, when you do? No, they dine before us.-Do they like
to eat dinner before you? Yes, they do like to do it, because they
are always hungry.-Do they like to drink tea or coffee? They
like to drink neither tea nor coffee, but milk.-Do you love
your brother? I do love him.-Does your brother love you?.
He does not love me.-Dost thou love me, my good child?
I do love thee.-Dost thou love this ugly man? I do not love him.
-Whom do you love? I love my children.-Whom do we love?
We love our friends.-Do we like any one? We like no one.-
Does anybody like us? The Americans like us.-Do you want
anything? I want nothing.-Whom is your father in want of? He
is in want of his servant.-What do you want? I want the note.-
Do you want this or that note? I want this one.-What do you
wish to do with it? (en?) I wish to open it, in order to read it.—
Does he receive as many notes as I? He receives more of them
than you.—What do you give me? I do not give thee anything.-
Do you give this book to my brother? I do give it him.-Do
you give him a bird? I do give him one.-To whom do you lend
your books? I lend them to those scholars.-Does your friend lend
me a dollar? He lends you one.-To whom do you lend your
clothes? (habits?) I do not lend them to anybody.
VOCABULARY. 2d Section.
VOCABULAIRE. 2de Section.
PRESENT TENSE CONTINUED -Le Présent Continué.
Are you fond of, do you like beef? | Aimez-vous le bœuf?
Obs. 53. As the noun beef is here used in its general sense, the French
use, not the partitive, but the definite article, le, les, (the.) (§ 15.)
Does he like the Prussians ?
To eat. To arrange, to set in order.
Do you like to eat beef?
Aime-t-il les Prussiens?
Manger, 1.
Arranger, ranger, 1.
Aimez-vous à manger du bœuf ?
Obs. 54. As the noun beef is here used to express a portion of beef, not
all the beef, the French use the partitive, du, des, (some or any.)
Does he like to eat cakes? ($ 20.)
They like to eat some.
Aime-t-il à manger des gâteaux ?
Ils aiment à en manger.
we eat.
Manger, mangeant, nous mangeons.
nous chan.
To eat,
To change, changing, we change. Changer, changeant,
eating,
(§ 144, R. 2.)
geons.
To neglect, neglecting, we neglect. Négliger, négligeant, nous négli
geons
TWENTY-FOURTH LESSON.
117
Do you neglect your French?
We do not neglect it at all.
Does he send you the bank-note?
He does. ( 144—3.) He does not.
I send, thou sendest, he sends, they
send, who sends? What does he
send?
I sweep, thou sweepest, he sweeps,
they sweep, who sweeps? does he
not sweep
}
Who sweeps the parlor carpet?
I do not know who sweeps it.
Open,
to open one,
opening.
I open,
thou openest,
he opens.
Does he open his chest?
He does.
He does.
Does he open his eyes?
Négligez-vous votre Français ?
Nous ne le négligeons pas du tout.
Vous envoie-t-il le billet de banque?
Il me l'envoie. Il ne me l'envoie pas.
J'envoie, tu envoies, il envoie, ils
envoient, qui envoie? Qu envoie-t-
il?
Je balaie, tu balaies, il balaie, ils
balaient, qui balaie? Ne balaie-t-il
pas ?
Qui balaie le tapis du salon?
Je ne sais pas qui le balaie.
Ouvrir,* 2, en ouvrir un,
tu ouvres,
J'ouvre,
Ouvre-t-il son coffre ?
+Ouvre-t-il les yeux ?
ouvrant.
il ouvre.
Il l'ouvre.
Il les ouvre.
Obs. 55. Use the definite article, le, les, (the,) instead of the possessive,
when the sense clearly indicates the possessor. Ses may be used, but les
is preferable.
To suffer. I cannot bear it, (them.)
To put away, to put by, lay up, (put
any article in its proper place.)
Will you put away your hat, clothes,
money, shoes, books, pencils, &c.
(Dir. 2.)
To shut, to shut up the store.
Is the servant shutting up the office?
He does not now, but he is going to
shut it in a moment (presently.)
This soldier.
Some cider.
Has the captain more than thirty sol-
diers? He has less than twenty.
Often, pretty often, (enough.)
What does the American like?
He is very fond of coffee and tea.
To dine, to eat dinner, to eat supper.
The dinner, at dinner.
at supper.
Souffrir.
'souffrir.
Serrer, 1.
Je ne peux pas le (les)
Voulez-vous serrer votre chapeau,
vos habits, votre argent, vos sou-
liers, vos livres, vos crayons, &c.
Fermer, 1. Fermer le magasin.
Le domestique ferme-t-il le bureau?
Il ne le ferme pas à présent; mais il
va le fermer dans un moment.
Ce soldat-ci.
Du cidre.
Le capitaine a-t-il plus de trente sol-
dats? Il en a moins de vingt. (162.
Souvent,
assez souvent.
Qu'aime l'Américain ?
Il aime beaucoup le café et le thé.
(Obs. 53.)
Dîner.
The supper,
Le dîner, à dîner.
souper.
Souper.
Le souper, à
Do they often change their servants? Changent-ils souvent de domes
We often change them.
To change something.
tiques? Nous en changeons souvent.
Changer de quelque chose. (de.)
TWENTY-FOURTH EXERCISE. 2d Sec.-VINGT-QUATRIÈME Ex. 2de Sec
Mettez ici le quantième en Français.
Ah! Mr. Arago, I am glad to see you. You are well, I hope.
Tolerably well, thank you. I am glad to hear it.-Do you know where
C
118
TWENTY-FOURTH LESSON.
Mr. Lamartine is? Yes, he is at home. Thank you, Sir. I have to
write to him.—Well! come in my house and sit down a little. Many
thanks. I am not tired. I am, as usual, in a hurry (pressé), for I
want to see Mr. Rush..... who is going to Liverpool at 4 past 10.
Adieu, then; for you have not much time. Adieu.-It is warm,
very warm, is it not? No; it is not too warm for me.-Not too warm
for you! Then you like the heat (le chaud), indeed! I do.-Do
you not like the heat? Not quite so much as you, I believe.
Do you recite this evening at 6 or at 7 o'clock? We recite only
at 7, I believe. Do you know what vocabulary we recite? You
recite the last one.-Which is the last one? The... is it not?—
I believe not.-Which, then? This one.-I know these two. And
I also. Then, I am ready to recite. And you? I also. What are
you looking for (or, do you seek), Miss Charlotte? Is it your shawl
or cloak that you seek (are looking for)? No, Sir, I am looking for
my copy-book of French, to translate my exercise in it.
What do you eat at breakfast? We eat a little beef or mutton,
bread and butter, &c.-Do you like beef at breakfast? Yes, a little,
but I like it very well (beaucoup) at dinner.-Do you like to eat it
also at supper? I do not like it so much (tant). As for me (moi),
I do not like it at all. I cannot bear it. You cannot bear it? indeed!
No, indeed, I cannot.-Do you eat much cheese? We do not eat
much; we do not like it; we cannot bear it.—Do you often change
servants (de domestiques)? Yes, we often change them. We change
them every month.-Does not Julius neglect his task often? Yes,
he does; but we do not neglect ours.-What do you neglect? 1
believe that we do not neglect anything. (Obs. 4.) You are good
scholars, then, if you neglect nothing. Thank you.-What are you
going to fix or arrange? When? To-day. To-day? We do not fix
anything, but these boys set their books in order (fix).-Does your
father send you anything? He sends me all I wish.-Does he send
you shoes, stockings, and gloves? No, but he sends me money to
buy some. How much does he send you? He sends me more than
ten dollars every month.-Is that all? Yes, and that is enough.-
Will you be kind enough to tell Isaac to open the parlor? He is
opening it now (l'ouvre).-Very well. Then you need not tell him
to open it; but you may tell him to sweep it. I will. (Je vais le
faire.) (19¹, N. 1.)
Do you cut anything? We cut some wood.-What do those mer-
chants cut? They do not cut anything; but their clerk cuts some
coarse cloth.-Does he not cut the fine cloth too? No, he is afraid to
sut it.—You mean, he is afraid to tear it, do you not? Yes, I mean,
TWENTY-FOURTH LESSON.
119
to tear it. Does he not tear the cotton? Yes, he tears it, and the
coarse cloth too; but he tears neither the velvet nor the satin.-
When do you receive your notes? I receive them every morning
when you receive yours.-Does our neighbor, the lawyer, receive
his journals when we receive ours? I do not know when he receives
his.—What does your servant carry? He carries several things in a
large trunk.-Does he open it? He does not.-Where is he carry-
ing it?
He is carrying it home. (Obs. 52.)-Are you waiting for
anybody? Yes, I am only waiting for the little Irishman.-Do you
wait for him often? Yes, I do.-Every morning or every evening?
Morning and evening.-Are you killing two birds? I am killing
only one. How many chickens does that old cook kill? He does
not kill any. Who kills them, then? The farmers kill then. -Do
(the) farmers work as much as (the) sailors? They do.-Who works
more? You or your son? We work as much the one as the other.
Very ill. Worse. Much worse.
Does the doctor hope yet? Go (imper.
To rest yourself, myself. Good-by.
VOCABULARY. 3d Section.
Très-mal. Plus mal. Beaucoup p. m.
Le docteur espère-t-il encore? Allez.
Vous reposer, me repo. Je vous salue
VOCABULAIRE. 3me Section.
PRESENT TENSE CONTINUED (§ 144.)-Le Présent Continué.
Exceptions to the general rule given in §( 144).
This desk.
The teacher's desk.
What are your brothers doing?
They are doing nothing.
Are you not doing an exercise?
No, we do not do one.
What are you doing in the office?
We do the task we have to do.
Do you say anything to me?
We tell you that they wish to eat.
Do you say nothing?
No, nothing.
That may be.
At the corner of Walnut and 13th.
That cannot be.
Ce pupitre. Le pupitre du maître
Vos frères que font-ils ?
Ils ne font rien.
Ne faites-vous pas un exercice?
Non, nous n'en faisons pas.
Que faites-vous dans le bureau ?
Nous y faisons le devoir que no
avons à faire.
Me dites-vous quelque chose ?
Nous vous disons qu'ils veulent
manger.
Ne dites-vous rien?
Non, rien. (§ 151. A. 8.)
Cela peut être.
Au coin de Walnut et de la 13me.
Cela ne peut pas être.
TWENTY-FOURTH EXERCISE. 3d Sec.-VINGT-QUATRIEME EX. 3ME Sec.
Mettez ici le quantième du mois, en Français.
Mr. Jean, je suis bien aise de vous voir. Pouvez-vous me dire
comment se porte votre cousin Armand? Il est très-mal. En
vérité ! J'en suis bien fâché. Est-il plus mal que hier? Oui, il
est beaucoup plus mal. Le docteur espère-t-il encore? Oui, il
espère encore, parce que Armand est jeune; mais il est très mal.-
*
120
TWENTY-FOURTH LESSON.
Prenez un siège. Asseyez-vous. Non, je ne peux pas m'asseoir a
présent. Ne pouvez-vous pas vous asseoir un petit moment, pour
vous reposer? Non, je ne le peux pas; car j'ai à aller chez l'apo-
thicaire pour acheter quelque chose. Est-ce pour Armand? Oui,
c'est pour lui. Alors, allez, allez. Adieu! Je vous salue.
Miss Emilie, what are you waiting for? I am waiting for the
scholars. Are they coming, or do they come? (Obs. 52.) I be-
lieve they are coming. What are they doing? Who? The shoe-
makers. They are making shoes (§ 4).-Are the carpenters making
a ship? No, they are not making one.-What do they do? They
do something, but we do not know what. Do you know where are
my dictionaries? Which? The French ones. We kno where
they are.-Will you tell us where they are? No, we win not tell
you. You may look for them.-You are very good, indeed! Do
the teachers owe anything to the butter-man? They do not owe
him anything. Do they not owe something to the tailors? They
owe them something.-How much? Not much. Not more than
two or three dollars.-Do they owe more to the joiner? No, they
do not owe him so much; for, they owe him nothing.-Nothing at
all? No, nothing at all. I believe they owe him nothing at all.-
I know they owe him something for their last desk.-That may be,
(cela peut être.)
Do the Messrs. Cowell & Son keep a dry goods store? Yes, they
keep one. Where do they keep it? They keep it at the corner of
Chestnut and Seventh (de Chestnut et de la 7me).-What do they
keep? They keep gloves, ribbons, satin, velvet, fine cloth, and
many other things.-Do they receive their satin, velvet, gloves, and
ribbons from France (France)? No, I believe they do not receive
them from France; they buy them (achètent) from our merchants.
-What do they receive from France? They do not receive any-
thing. Do the French take much tea? No, they do not take much.
-They take more coffee than tea; do they not? Yes, they take a
little more. Do they not take a great deal more of it? No, they
do not take a great deal more; but they take more wine than either
tea or coffee, (que de thé ou de café.)-What do the Italians and
Spanish drink? They drink chocolate.-Do they not drink wine
also? Yes, they do.-Do you know that the general's old brother
is very sick? Yes, we know it; and we know also that he is better
this morning.—We are glad to hear it.--Do you say anything to
me? We do not say anything to you. Do you tell them anything?
We do not say anything to them.-Do you say anything pretty to
your good neighbor? We tell him something pretty.-What do
you tell him pretty? We are not going to tell you of it, or it to you.
TWENTY-FIFTH
121
LESSON.
You have been well. I believe it.
At the hour. Before the hour.
On the way, the road,
Punctual.
coming.
I think.
Dust.
It is very dusty.
Vous vous êtes bien porté. Je le crois.
À l'heure.-
Ponctuel.
Avant l'heure.
En chemin.
Je pense. De la poussière, (fémi.)
Il fait beaucoup de poussière.
TWENTY-FIFTH LESSON, 25th.-Vingt-cinquième Leçon, 25me.
VOCABULAIRE. 1re Section.
PRESENT TENSE CONTINUED.-Le Présent Contir ué.
As the rule given in (§ 144), on the formation of the plural of the present
tense, is applicable to irregular as well as regular verbs, it remains now only
to point out the present tense singular of a few irregular verbs, to enable
the learner to use them in his exercises. They are the following:
Faire, faisant.
To do, to make. Doing.
I do, thou dost, he does.
To drink, drinking.
I drink, thou drinkest, he drinks.
To come, coming.
I come, thou comest, he comes.
To write, writing.
I write, thou writest, he writes.
To see, seeing.
I see,
thou seest, he sees.
To say, tell, saying.
I say, thou sayest, he says.
To go out, going out.
I go out, thou goest out, he goes out.
To read, reading.
I read, thou readest, he reads.
To know, (to be acquainted
with,) knowing.
I know, thou knowest, he knows.
To put on, putting on.
I put on, thou puttest, he puts.
To sleep, sleeping.
I sleep, thou sleepest, he sleeps.
To serve, serving.
I serve, thou servest, he serves.
To take, taking.
I take, thou takest, he takes.
To translate, translating.
I translate, thou translatest, he trans-
lates.
Je fais, tu fais, il fait.
Boire,* buvant.
Je bois, tu bois, il boit.
Venir,* venant.
Je viens, tu viens, il vient.
Ecrire, écrivant.
*
J'écris, tu écris, il écrit.
Voir,* voyant.
Je vois, tu vois, il voit.
Dire, disant.
*
Je dis, tu dis, il dit.
Sortir,* sortant.
Je sors, tu sors, il sort.
Lire,* lisant.
Je lis, tu lis, il lit.
Connaître,* connaissant.
S Je connais, tu connais, il connaît.
Je sais, tu sais, il sait.
Mettre,* 4, mettant.
Je mets, tu mets, il met.
Dormir,* 2, dormant.
Je dors, tu dors, il dort.
Servir,*2, servant.
Je sers, tu sers, il sert.
Prendre,* 4, prenant.
Je prends, tu prends, il prend.
Traduire,* 4, traduisant.
Je traduis, tų traduis, il traduit.
11
122
TWENTY-FIFTH LESSON.
:
VINGT-CINQUIÈME EXERCICE. 1re Sec.
Mettez (put) le quantième, en Français, ici.
Bonsoir, Mr. Je suis bien aise de vous voir. J'espère que vous
vous êtes bien porté depuis que je n'ai eu le plaisir de vous voir.
Très-bien, merci. Suis-je le premier ici, ce soir? Vous êtes pre-
mier. Vous l'êtes assez souvent, mais pas toujours.-Je suis souvent
trop occupé pour venir toujours à l'heure. Je le crois, car vous êtes
bien ponctuel. Où sont les autres écoliers?
Où sont les autres écoliers? En chemin, je pense,
car ils sont ponctuels aussi. Mais pas tant que vous.-Voulez-vous
prendre un siège? Non, je vous remercie, pas encore. Je veux
d'abord chercher un mot dans le dictionnaire.-Quel mot voulez-
vous savoir? Je veux savoir le Français de: dust.-Que voulez-
vous dire en Français? Je veux dire: it is dusty. Le Français de
it is dusty, est: il fait de la poussière. A présent, je peux vous dire:
Il fait beaucoup de poussière. Oui, je le sais, et la poussière n'est
pas agréable. Prenez un siège à présent. Merci, je vais en prer-
dre un.
Dost thou see anything? I do not (see anything).—Does your
father see our ships? He cannot see them at all from there; but we
see them very well from here.-How many soldiers do you see?
We see a good many; we see more than thirty of them.-The cap-
tain expects more soldiers, does he not? I do not know if he expects
any others. Do you know the captain? No, I believe I do not
know him; but I know the general.—Do you also know the general's
cousin? Who? that tall and handsome young man who comes
often to the museum to see the pictures? Yes, that one. I do not
know him, but I see him very often.-What do these sailors and
soldiers drink? They drink wine and cider.-Do they drink more
of the latter than of the former? No, they drink more of the former
than of the latter.-Do they drink wine every day? They do; but
they do not drink cider every day.-Why not? Can they not get
some? (en avoir ?) No, they have not money enough to buy any.—
What do we drink? You know that we drink tea, coffee, and
wine. Do we not drink chocolate too? Yes, we do. We do like
it as much as the Italians and Spaniards.-Do we drink as much of
it as they? No, we do not, for they drink it in the morning, at din
ner, and supper.-What art thou writing? I am not writing, I am
reading.—Who writes? (is writing?) The lawyer is writing.—What
is the Prussian doing? He does nothing. Does he not study Eng-
lish? Yes, he is studying it.—Does he not write it? He does not.
What dost thou say? I say nothing. I am too sleepy to say any
thing. Does thy brother say anything? He is afraid to say a word.-
·
TWENTY-FIFTH LESSON. (2.)
123
Do you say anything? Yes, I tell our servant to go to the book.
seller's to bring me the last work of Cooper.-Do you like his last
work? Do you not like it? I say that I like it very much.-Who
does not like it? Several gentlemen whom (que) I know. (§ 77.)—
Do you tell me anything? I tell you something. Yes; but you do
not tell me something pretty. Is it not pretty? No, not at all.-Do
you do (are you doing) anything for me? We do not do anything
for you; but those boys are (doing something for you).—What are
they doing for me? Do you not see it? No, I do not see it.-Dost
thou see my shawl or gloves? (Dir. 2.) I see neither these nor
that.-What dost thou see? I see nothing.-Who sees them? Who
sees what? My shawl and gloves. Nobody sees them.-Are they
not here? No, they are not. I see but this old cotton shawl.—What
do you say to the tailor and shoemaker? I do not tell them any
thing.—What do our friends say to them? They tell the latter to
mend their shoes, and the former to make them some coats and
vests. Have they time to do it? They have time and a wish to do
it. What are you doing? I am putting my gloves on.-Is he put-
ting on his large hat? No, he puts on the old one.-Do you not put
any sugar in your coffee? Yes, I put some, for I have not enough.-
Do you not put milk in it? No, I do not.-Do you know those Ger-
mans? I know one, but not the others.-Who is acquainted with
this Swiss? We know him.-Does he know us? He does.-Whom
dost thou know? I know nobody.-Does he not know you. I
believe he does. (que si.)
Do I look sick? You do (look sick).
You look very well. On the contrary.
You do not look well. You look
cold, (as if you were cold.)
Miss, how have you been?
VOCABULAIRE.
To give something to do to some one.
Do you give anything to the dog to
cat? Do you feed the dog?
1 give it some beef to eat.
I give him nothing to eat.
Ai-je l'air malade?
l'air malade.
Vous avez
Vous avez très-bon air. Au contraire.
Vous n'avez pas très-bon air. Vous
avez l'air d'avoir froid.
Mle. comment vous êtes-vous portée.
(fém.)
2de Section.
Donner quelque chose à faire à quel-
qu'un.
Donnez-vous quelque chose à manger
au chien?
Je lui donne du bœuf à manger.
Je ne lui donne rien à manger.
What do you give the scholars to Que donnez-vous à traduire aux
translate ?
I give them the 25th exercise.
écoliers ?
Je leur donne le 25me exercice.
2
To bring.
To, at the play.
To find.
Apporter, 1.
Au spectacle.
Trouver, 1.
124
TWENTY-FIFTH LESSON. (2.)
Our butcher.
His sheep.
What, that which, (relative pronoun,
objective case.)
Do you bring me what I wish?
I do not bring you what you want,
(or what you wish.)
Notre boucher.
Son mouton.
Ce que, (pronom relatif, régime
direct.) ($ 89.)
M'apportez-vous ce que je veux ?
Je ne vous apporte pas ce que vour
voulez.
Do you find what you look for, (or Trouvez-vous ce que vous cherchez?
what you are looking for ?)
I find what I look for. (am looking.)
He finds not what he seeks.
We bring what we find.
All, or all that, all that which.
Je trouve ce que je cherche.
Il ne trouve pas ce qu'il cherche.
Nous apportons ce que nous trouvons.
Tout ce que, (pron. rel. rég. direct.)
($ 91.)
They do not find all they look for, Ils ne trouvent pas tout ce qu'ils
(or all that which they seek.)
Do you mend all I do not? (Dir. 1.)
I mend it all.
We eat all we have.
Instead of.
cherchent.
Raccommodez-vous tout ce que je
ne raccommode pas ?
Je le raccommode tout.
Nous mangeons tout ce que nous
avons.
Instead of reading.
Au lieu de.
Obs. 56. Instead of is in English
Au lieu de lire.
followed by the present participle, but
in French it is followed by the infinitive, as all other prepositions, except
en. (Rule 1st.)
This room, apartment.
Put yourself, (imperative.)
Cet appartement-ci.
Mettez-vous.
Near. Near Miss Ann. Near the fire. Près de. Près de Mlle. Anne. Près
Now that I think of it.
As you think of it, he thinks of it.
A8
Come, (imperative.) (§ 150.)
du feu.
À présent que j'y pense. (§ 50.)
Comme vous y pensez, il y pense.
Come
Venez, (impér.)
here.
Here I am.
If you please.
If he pleases.
To finish, to quit studying.
voici.
S'il vous plaît.
Finir d'étudier.
At least I do, or I, at least. He, at least. | Moi, du moins.
VINGT-CINQUIÈME EXERCICE, 2de Sec.
1
Venez ici.
S'il lui plaît.
Me
Lui, du moins.
Écrivez la date ici, en Français, (the date noun fem., of which hereafter.)
Ah! Mr. Charles, j'ai l'honneur de vous saluer. Je vois que vous
vous portez bien. Très-bien, merci. Et vous, Mr., êtes-vous ma-
lade? Ai-je l'air malade? Un peu. Je suis un peu fatigué, mais
non pas malade. J'en suis bien aise. Vous n'êtes pas le premier,
ce soir. Non, je vois que Mlle. Clara est ici avant moi. Com-
ment vous êtes-vous portée (fém.), Mlle., depuis jeudi dernier. Je
me suis très-bien portée, merci. Je n'ai pas l'air malade, j'espère.
Oh! non.
Au contraire, vous avez très-bon air, comme à l'ordi-
naire. Merci, Mr. Comment est le mal de gorge du général? Son
TWENTY-FIFTH LESSON. (2.)
125
mal de gorge est mieux, mais non pas son rhume. Entrez, Mr.
Lenoir. Vous avez l'air d'avoir froid. Oui, j'ai froid. Mettez-vous
ici, près du feu et de Mlle. Clara. Avec beaucoup de plaisir. Vous
avez bon feu. Le feu est très-agréable quand vous avez froid, n'est-
ce pas, Mr.? Oui, Mlle. Il est alors très-agréable. Vous avez
parfaitement raison. Fait-il froid dehors? Oui, il fait très-froid.-
Connaissez-vous Mr. de Genlis? J'ai le plaisir de le connaître et de
le voir très-souvent. Il a l'air malade, à présent, n'est-ce pas ?
Mais, je crois que non. À présent que j'y pense, je crois qu'il a mal
aux dents. Cela peut être. Si cela est, j'en suis bien fâchée. Et
moi aussi. Mr. de Genlis est un homme de mérite, n'est-ce pas ? Je
le crois.
Do you go to the play, in the evening? I do not.-Why? What
have you to do? I have to study.-Does your teacher give you any-
thing to study in the evening? Yes, he gives us something to do
then.-At what o'clock do you finish studying? We finish at 9 or
10 oclock; in a word (en un), we finish when we are tired, or
sleepy, (when we are.)-Does he give you anything to write ?
Yes, he always gives us (§ 170) the quarter or the half of an
exercise to write; because he says that we know it better then.-
Do you know it better when you write it? To be sure. I do (moi)
at least. Do you copy your father's notes in the evening? We
copy them only in the morning, and afterwards we send them
(away).—Do the scholars write all they translate? No, they do not.
-Do they mend all they tear? They do not.-Do they find all
they look for? They do.-Does the captain find all he looks for?
No, indeed, he does not.-Who finds all he looks for? Nobody
does. What do they wish to find? They wish to find but their
books. Do they not put them away? They do not.-Who puts
them away? Nobody does.-Where are they? You know; do
you not? No, not at all.-The Swiss wants something; do you
bring him all he wishes? I bring it to him, when I can find it.-
Where dost thou take me to? I take thee to the museum.-Do you
not take me to the wharf? I have neither time nor a mind to take
you there, because it is bad weather.
Do not the merchants put away what they do not sell? They
put away all they do not sell.-At how much does the butcher sell
his beef? He sells it at ten cents, or sous.-Does the butcher
wish to buy your sheep? He does.-What will he give you for
it (en)? He will give me two dollars and a half for it.-Is it
enough? I think not.—If this butcher will not give you more than
that, I know another who can give you more.-Have our butchers
11*
126
TWENTY-FIFTH LESSON. (3.)
as many oxen as sheep? No, they have many more of the latter
than of the former. Do they sell as much beef as mutton? They
sell much beef, but they sell only a little mutton.-What is the old
cook looking for? He is looking for a young chicken, which he
does not find. Where can it be? Who knows?-What is the Ger-
man doing in his room? He is reading the journal and feeding his
birds.—What does he give them to eat? (what does he feed them
with?) He gives them but grain to eat, (feeds them with.)-What
journals does he read? He reads those which your cousin lends
him.-Does not your father lend him some, too? He has three in
his desk, which my father lends him; but he is not reading them
now.
It
John, come here. Here I am.-Come with me. Where? Here,
near the fire.-Near the fire? No, indeed! I am warm enough
where I am. Take that seat. No, I am going to take this one;
that one is too big for me.-Very well; take that little one, if you
please.-Now that I think of it, go in that apartment to bring me
the cake which is in my desk.-Which one of your desks? The
French one. I am going to bring it to you, if you please.-You are
going to give me some; are you not? Yes, to be sure. It is to
give you some that I tell you to bring it to me.-Have you a knife
to cut it? I can cut you a little with my penknife.-You cannot
cut me enough with your penknife.-Do you want so much? Yes,
I want a great deal; you know that I like it much. Go, then, go,
instead of speaking.-Will you go with me to the grocer's? Here
I am, ready to go. Do you want a basket? Why? To put in it
something good, which you are going to buy; are you not? Yes, I
am going to buy something good, but the grocer can put it in paper
bags.
VOCABULAIRE.
To play.
To listen.
Instead of listening-of playing.
Do you play instead of studying?
I study instead of playing.
That man speaks instead of listening
Have you a sore finger? Thumb?
I have a sore finger.
Thumb.
Has your brother a sore foot?
He has a sore eye. A sore nose.
We have-They have sore eyes.
The elbow.
The right arm.
The left knee.
The back.
The right elbow
The left arm.
The right one.
The dog's back.
3me Section.
Jouer, 1.
Ecouter (sans prépos.)
Au lieu d'écouter-de jouer.
Jouez-vous au lieu d'étudier ?
J'étudie au lieu de jouer.
Cet homme parle au lieu d'écouter.
+Avez-vous mal au doigt? Au pouce!
†J'ai mal au doigt.
Au pouce.
+Votre frère a-t-il mal au pied ?
tIl a mal à l'œil. Au nez.
+Nous avons-Ils ont mal aux yeux.
Le coude.
Le bras droit.
Le genou gauche.
Le dos.
Le coude droit.
Le bras gauche
Le droit.
Le dos du chien.
TWENTY-FIFTH LESSON. (3.)
127
Has the dog a sore back? It has.
Is the dog's back sore? It is (sore).
Is your left arm sore?
It is (sore).
It is not.
Whose elbow is sore?
Who has a
sore elbow? Nobody's. Nobody.
Are not the child's fingers sore?
Has not the child sore fingers?
They are-He has.
Which of his eyes is sore? The left.
Is not my right eye sore? Yes, it is,
or your right eye is sore.
This bed.
Those beds.
Does the servant make the bed?
He makes the fire instead of making
the bed.
The bedstead.
To learn, to learn how, learning.
I do learn, thou learnest, he learns.
They learn.
I learn to read, how to read.
They learn to write, how to write.
Do they not learn to speak French?
Yes, they do.
Do Arthur and his cousin go out?
Neither Arthur nor his cousin does.
Le chien a-t-il mal au dos ?
Il y a mal.
Avez-vous mal au bras gauche ?
J'y ai mal. Je n'y ai pas mal.
Qui a mal au coude?
Personne n'y a mal.
L'enfant n'a-t-il pas mal aux doigts?
Il y a mal.
A quel œil a-t-il mal? Au gauche.
N'ai-je pas mal à l'œil droit? Si fait,
vous y avez mal.
Ce lit-ci.
Ces lits-là.
Le domestique fait-il le lit?
Il fait le feu au lieu de faire le lit.. Ie
bois de lit.
Apprendre,* 4, apprenant, (il prend
à, avant un infinitif.)
J'apprends, tu apprends, il apprend
Ils apprennent. (§ 144.)
J'apprends à lire.
Ils apprennent à écrire.
N'apprennent-ils pas
pas à parler
Français ? Si fait, ils l'apprennent.
Arthur et son cousin sortent-ils ?
Ni Arthur ni son cousin ne sortent.
Obs. 57. NEITHER, connected with nominatives, is: Ni.... ni .... ne,
before the verb. (§ 162, R. 6.) The following verb is usually in the plural:
Neither this scholar nor that one
studies enough.
The dentist.
The sofa.
Does the carpenter mend the bed.
stead?
No, because he has a sore thumb.
Ni cet écolier-ci ni celui-là n'étu-
dient assez.
Le dentiste.
Le sofa.
Le charpentier raccommode-t-il le
bois de lit?
Non, parce qu'il a mal au pouce.
Which of his thumbs is sore? The tÀ quel pouce a-t-il mal? Au droit.
right one.
VINGT-CINQUIÈME EXERCICE. 3me Sec.
Mettez la date ici, en Français.
An! Mr. Letourneur, je suis bien aise de vous voir. Comment
se porte-t-on chez vous? Tout le monde s'y porte bien. Personne
n'est malade à la maison; mais chez mon voisin, le ministre, tout
le monde est malade. Qu'ont ils? L'un, a mal de gorge, un autre,
mal de tête; celui-ci a un rhume, celui-là mal aux dents. Alors, ils
ne sont pas très malades. Non, mais il fait si mauvais, qu'ils souf-
rent beaucoup. Je suis fâché d'apprendre qu'ils souffrent. Celui
qui a mal aux dents ne peut pas dormir. Pourquoi ne va-t-il pas
128
TWENTY-FIFTH LESSON. (3.)
chez le dentiste? Il a peur. En vérité! Qui est-ce? C'est lo
jeune Arthur. Il a tort d'avoir peur. Il le sait, mais il continue à
avoir peur. Qui a le rhume? C'est George. Prend-il quelque chose
pour son rhume? Oui, sans doute. Qu'est-ce que c'est? Je ne
sais pas quoi.
Does your father go out? He does not.-What does he do? He
writes.-Does he write a book? He does. (Dir. 1.)—When does he
write it? He writes it in the morning, in the evening, and when he
has time. He is at home now, then? To be sure. Do you wish
to see him? No, because he is too busy.-Does the Prussian go
out? No, neither he nor the Swiss goes out.-Why do they not go
out? They have sore feet.-What do they do for their sore feet?
They do something, but I cannot tell you what.-Does the shoe-
maker bring our shoes? He does not.-Does he drink? Does he
not work? He does not work, because his left knee is sore.-Has
anybody the toothache? Yes, this youth has it.-Is he not going to
the dentist? No, he is not.-Is he going to send for him? He does
not send for him. He does not wish to have the dentist.-Has any-
body a sore elbow? I believe so. Let me see. (§ 154.) Yes, the
dentist has a sore elbow.-Which of his elbows is sore? The right
or his right. (le.)—Who has a sore arm? I have.-Do you not see it?
No, I do not see it.-Which of your arms is sore? The left.-Does
the minister write now? No, he cannot yet. Is not his right thumb
better? It is better, but not well.
Do you read your pretty book? I do not. I have a sore eye.—
Which of your eyes is sore? Do you not see? My right eye is
sore.—Let me see it. See it or look at it. (voyez-le.)—Who has sore
eyes? The old cooks have sore eyes. What day of the month
is to-day? It is the...And to-morrow? The...-What is the
German doing in his room? He is learning to read.-Does he
not learn to write? Yes, he does.--Does your son learn to trans
late? He learns to translate, and to copy French.-Does the Prus-
sian speak instead of listening? He speaks instead of listening.-
What does he do then? Afterwards he goes to the farmer's to drink
milk.-Does the dentist fix (arranger) the teeth of your son? He
does not. What does he? He makes teeth for the Dutchman,
instead of fixing my son's teeth.-Who studies instead of playing?
A few boys study instead of playing; but a great many play instead
of studying.—Does our English teacher speak French to us instead
of speaking English? He does often.-Do the children of the Swiss
drink wine in the morning, instead of drinking tea or coffee? They
drink neither wine, tea, nor coffee.
Can you find the French of: to offer, in this small dictionary? I
TWENTY-SIXTH LESSON. (1.)
129
am going to look for it immediately. Very well; take the dictionary.
I have it. Do you find the word in it? No, I do not. Indeed! Let
me see. I see why you cannot find it. You are looking for it in the
French instead of the English.-What is the grocer putting in that
paper bag? I believe he puts in it salt instead of sugar.-Is that
salt, Sir? No, it is sugar, but it looks like (a l'air de) salt, does it
not? Yes, it looks like it. (§ 50.)-Let me, let me, I want to say:
Let me taste it, but I do not know the French of: to taste. Will you
tell me, William? To be sure; it is goûter. Goûter, very well.
Now I can say: Let me taste it. Do. (Dir. 1.) Take some and
taste it. (§ 54.)—Is it sugar or salt? You are right, it is sugar. Then
we can sweeten what we eat and drink.-Do his little friends receive
more books than copy-books? They receive less of the former than
of the latter.—Do you sleep in this pretty little bed? No, I sloep
in that large bed.—Who sleeps in this one? Sophia does.—Do the
joiner's boys make sofas, desks, and bedsteads? Yes, they make
sofas, bedsteads, and desks.-Do they work as much as the boys
of the carpenter? They work quite as much.
TWENTY-SIXTH LESSON, 26th.-Vingt-sixième Leçon, 26me.
VOCABULAIRE. 1re Section.
Do you learn French?
Russian ?
I do not.
Russian.
I do.
Turkish.
The Polish.
Latin. Greek. Arabian, Arabic.
Syrian, Syriac. Swedish.
Does your son learn Latin?
No, he does not.
The Pole. The Roman. The Greek.
The Swede. The Arab. The Syrian.
To speak French. German.
Apprenez-vous le Français ?
Russe ?
Le
Je l'apprends. Je ne l'apprends pas.
Le polonais.
Le russe. Le turc.
Le latin.
Le syriaque.
Le grec.
Le suédois.
L'arabe.
Votre fils apprend-il le latin?
Non, il ne l'apprend pas.
Le Polonais. Le Romain. Le Grec.
Le Suédois. L'Arabe. Le Syrien.
Parler Français. Parler Allemand.
Obs. 58. After the verb, parler, the article (le) is usually omitted before:
Français, Anglais, &c., although it is used after all other verbs. (§ 471.)
Who speaks Swedish? Not I; but |
I am studying Polish.
This minister reads Latin well, and
translates Greek and Syrian.
Are you an Englishman-English?
Qui parle suédois? Pas moi; mais
j'étudie le polonais.
Ce ministre lit bien le latin, et il
traduit le grec et le syriaque.
Êtes-vous Anglais ?
Obs. 59. Where the indefinite article is used in English to denote quali
ties, the French make use of no article. (6 38, R. 2. p. 469.)
K
130
TWENTY-SIXTH LESSON. (1.)
No, Sir, I am a Frenchman. (French.)|
Is he a Turk, a Greek, or an Arab?
Is your cousin a minister?
No, he is an apothecary.
Crazy, foolish.
Sure, certain.
He?
Are they sure they have it? They are.
Non, Monsieur, je suis Français.
Est-il Turc, Grec, ou Arabe?
Votre cousin est-il ministre ? Lui
Non, il est apothicaire.
Fou. (plur. s. 92.)
Sûr. (de avant un infinit.)
Sont-ils sûrs de l'avoir ? Ils en sont
sûrs.
To take away, pull off, throw off.
Oter.
Lake away, off.
Otez.
Well, very well!
Eh bien!
Are you tired and sleepy?
I am tired and sleepy.
Étes-vous fatigué et avez-vous som.
meil ?
Je suis fatigué et j'ai sommeil.
Obs. 60. Change the verb when the adjective requires a different one.
I am much obliged to you, (him, them.) | Je vous (lui, leur) suis bien obligé.
You are welcome. It is not worth De rien.
mentioning.
VINGT-SIXIÈME EXERCICE. 1re Sec.
N'oubliez pas (do not forget) le quantième en Français.
Quel jour du mois est-ce? C'est le.... De quel mois? Du
mois de En êtes-vous sûr? Oui, j'en suis sûr. N'est-ce
pas aujourd'hui jeudi? Si fait, c'est jeudi. Eh! bien, le papier
dit: jeudi le.... N'ai-je pas raison? Si fait, je crois que vous
avez raison. Je vous remercie. De rien. Vous êtes bien bon. Je
suis bien aise de savoir le quantième, parce que j'ai un billet à écrire.
Avez-vous besoin de papier? Non, je vous suis bien obligé. J'en
ai, je crois; mais je ne puis trouver mon encrier. Êtes-vous sûr
qu'il n'est pas dans votre pupitre? Je n'en suis pas tout-à-fait sûr,
mais je crois, qu'il n'y est pas. Laissez-moi voir (§ 54) si je ne
peux pas l'y trouver. Cherchez. (§ 150.) Eh bien! L'y trouvez-
vous? Non, il n'est pas ici. Qui peut l'avoir? Votre cousin Arthur,
je pense. Car il écrit son devoir dans son appartement. Puis-je
aller le chercher? Non; s'il en a besoin, il peut l'avoir. Je vais
écrire mon billet aveo mon crayon.
Do you go for anything? I do go for something.—What do you
go for? I go for some cider.-Does your father send for anything?
He sends for some wine.-Does your servant go for some bread?
He goes for some.-For whom does your neighbor send? He sends
for the physician.-Does your servant take off his coat in order to
make the fire? He takes it off in order to make it.-Do you take
off your gloves in order to give me money? I do take them off in
order to give you some.-Do you lean French? I do learn it.-
TWENTY-SIXTH LESSON. (2.)
131
Does your brother learn German? He does learn it.-Who learns
English? The Frenchman learns it.-Do we learn Italian? You
do learn it. What do the English learn? They learn French and
German.-Do you speak Spanish? No, Sir, I speak Italian.-Who
speaks Polish? My brother speaks Polish.-Do our neighbors speak
Russian? They do not speak Russian, but Arabic.-Do you speak
Arabic? No, I speak Greek and Latin.-What knife have you? I
have an English knife.-What money have you there? Is it (est-ce)
Italian or Spanish money? It is Russian money.-Have you an
Italian hat? No, I have a Spanish hat.-Are you a Frenchman ?
No, I am an Englishman.-Art thou a Greek? No, I am a
Spaniard.
Are these men Germans? No, they are Russians.-Do the Rus-
sians speak Polish? They do not speak Polish, but Latin, Greek,
and Arabic.—Is your brother a merchant? No, he is a joiner.—Are
these men merchants? No, they are carpenters.-Are you a cook?
No, I am a baker.-Are we tailors? No, we are shoemakers.—Art
thou crazy? No, I am not crazy.-What is that man? He is a phy-
sician. Does the son of the painter study Greek? No, he studies
English before Greek. He is right.-Is he going to learn Greek
before Latin? No, he is going to learn Latin before Greek.-Does
the butcher kill anything to-day? He kills oxen and sheep.-Does
he kill some every day? He does.-Why does he kill some? He
sells the beef and mutton in market.-Do you listen instead of doing
your task? Yes, I do, because what you say is very pretty.-Do
they listen also? No, they neither listen nor study, nor copy; but
they sleep. They do right, if they are tired and sleepy. Afterwards
they can work better. (§ 170.)
To wish.
VOCABULAIRE.
I wish you a good morning.
Does he wish me a good evening?
He does.
What do they wish me?
They wish you much pleasure.
The forehead.
He has a large forehead.
His forehead is large. (Obs. 55.)
He has blue eyes. His eyes are blue.
Blue.
Black.
Large.
The blue ones. A black one.
Square.
Round.
Long.
2de Section.
Souhaiter, 1.
+ Je vous souhaite le bonjour.
† Me souhaite-t-il le bonsoir ?
Il vous le souhaite.
Que me souhaitent-ils ?
Ils vous souhaitent beaucoup de
plaisir.
Le front.
} Il a le front large.
Il a les yeux bleus.
Bleu.
Les bleus.
Rond.
Noir.
Large.
Un noir.
Carré.
Long.
132
TWENTY-SIXTH LESSON. (2.)
A great, or large knife. A great man. Un
A French book. An English penny.grand couteau. Un grand homme.'
Un livre Français. Un sou Anglais.
Obs. 61. Adjectives of nations, colors, and shapes, come after the noun.
A square handkerchief. A square bed. Un mouchoir carré.
A round hat.
Russian money.
A round tree.
Italian velvet.
A good American sailor.
Un chapeau rond.
De l'argent Russe.
Italien.
Un lit carré.
Un arbre rond.
Du velours
Un bon matelot Américain.
Do the Italians make fine black satin? Les Italiens font-ils de beau satin
To listen to something.
To listen to some one, to somebody.
Do you listen to what your teacher
tells you?
I do.
Does he listen to what I tell him?
He does.
He does not at all.
Do you listen to what I tell you?
по
Do you listen to me?
Whom do you listen to?
I do.
Nobody.
Do you listen to my brother?
I do not (listen to him).
Do you not listen to the men?
Yes, I do (listen to them).
The exercise.
To take, to drink coffee.
To take, to drink tea.
The last exercise.
noir ?
+ Écouter quelque chose, (sans prépos.)
† Écouter quelqu'un.
† Écoutez-vous ce que votre maître
vous dit?
Je l'écoute.
+ Écoute-t-il ce que je lui dis?
Il l'écoute. Il ne l'écoute pas du
tout.
+ Écoutez-vous ce que je vous dis ?
† M'écoutez-vous? Je vous écoute.
Qui écoutez-vous ? Personne.
(§ 171, R. 8.)
+ Écoutez-vous mon frère ?
Je ne l'écoute pas.
+ N'écoutez-vous pas les hommes ?
Si fait, je les écoute.
Le thême.
Le dernier thême.
+ Prendre, boire du café ou le café.
+ Prendre, boire le thé ou du thé.
Obs. 62. With the verbs, to take and to drink, (le) or (du) may be used
indifferently, with tea, coffee, and
and nons.
Will you eat bread?
Will he take the bread?
Do you take (drink) tea?
I do.
Do they drink tea every day?
They do take some every day.
My father drinks coffee.
chocolate, but not so with other verbs
The French take coffee after dinner.
Do they take it at breakfast?
Does her brother take chocolate?
Voulez-vous manger du pain? (not,le.)
Veut-il prendre le pain? (not du.)
† Prenez-vous (buvez) du (le) thế?
+ J'en prends. Je le bois.
+ Prennent-ils le thé tous les jours?
+ Ils le prennent tous les jours.
+ Mon père prend du café.
† Les Français boivent du café après
dîné.
+ Le prennent-ils à déjeuner ?
+ Son frère prend-il du chocolat?
1 Un grand homme means a great man, but un homme grand a tall man.
A similar distinction is made with respect to the word pauvre, poor, which
expresses pitiful, or a want of intellect, when before, and indigent, when
after the substantive. Ex. Un pauvre homme: a sorrowful (pitiful, miserable)
man; and un homme pauvre, an indigent man.
TWENTY-SIXTH LESSON. (2.)
133
He drinks chocolate every morning.
Is your exercise easy to-day?
It is not very difficult, (or it is not) a
very difficult one, (or hard one,) but
it is long, or it is a long one.
+ Il prend le chocolat tous les matins.
Votre thême est-il aisé aujourd'hui ?
Il n'est pas très-difficile, mais il est
long.
VINGT-SIXIÈME THEME. 2de Sec.
N'oubliez pas le quantième en Français.
Mlle. Victoria, j'ai l'honneur de vous saluer, vous vous portez
bien, n'est-ce pas ? Oui, Mr., je me porte bien, merci. Et vous,
Mr., comment vous êtes-vous porté depuis que j'ai eu le plaisir de
vous voir au musée ? Je ne me suis pas très-bien porté, je vous
suis très-obligé. Je suis fâché de l'apprendre. Mais vous êtes
mieux, j'espère? Oui, beaucoup mieux; je peux dire: bien à pré-
sent. Mais, je vois M. Guillaume. Il va entrer, je crois. J'espère
que non. Pourquoi donc? (so?) Ne l'aimez-vous pas? Non, je
ne peux pas le souffrir. Je vois qu'il n'entre pas. Pourquoi ne
pouvez-vous pas le souffrir? Il est trop vain. N'a-t-il pas raison
d'être vain? N'est-ce pas un joli jeune homme? Si fait; mais il a
tort d'en être vain.-A présent que j'y pense, savez-vous où est
votre ami, Edouard? Oui, il est à Burlington, chez un de ses cou-
sins. Va-t-il venir içi bientôt? Je ne peux pas répondre à votre
question; car, je ne sais pas quand il va venir ici.
Do you wish me anything? I wish you a good morning.—What
does the young Prussian wish me? He wishes you a good evening.
-Where are the children? They are at your father's.-Why are
they there? To wish him much pleasure.-Has the German black
eyes? No, he has blue eyes.-Who has black eyes? The Spa-
niards, Italians, and Turks have black eyes.-Has not that Greek
small feet, a large forehead, and a big nose? Yes, he has small
feet, a large forehead, but he has not at all a big nose.
Do you
listen to me? I do, with much pleasure.-Does the lawyer lister.
to the minister? He does listen to him, in order to answer him,
(reply to him.)—Are you going to listen to him? No, I am going to
study my exercise instead of listening to him. I do not wish to
know what he is going to say.-Have you your cousin's note? To
pe sure I have it.-Have you to answer it immediately? Yes, I
have to answer it immediately.-Are you answering it now? Yes,
I am; but my eyes are sore, and I cannot answer it very well.-
Answer it (§ 150, Art. 8) for me; will you? With pleasure, if I
can. Tell me what I have to write.-Tell him first why I do not
answer, and then tell him that I send him his round hat, his blue coat,
his black satin vest, his black velvet shoes, his French fan, his
12
134
TWENTY-SEVENTH LESSON. (1.)
English gun, and several other articles, by (par) one of my friends,
who goes where he is.
Listen to what the professor says, instead of speaking. Now, I
listen to what he says.-Is the doctor a man of merit? Listen to
him, and then you can say whether (if, si) hê is a man of merit.
-Do the scholars listen to their English teacher? Those who are
good, listen to him; the bad ones play instead of listening.-Are
your gloves French? Yes, they are French gloves. (3, § 39.)-
Do you give me English or German paper? I give you neither
English (repeat papier) nor German paper; but I give you some
fine French paper.-Do you read Spanish well? (§ 170.) I do not
read Spanish well, but German.-What book is the soldier reading?
He is reading a pretty French book.-Do the sailors drink tea or
coffee, in the morning? Some take coffee, others drink tea.-What
do you drink, in the evening? I take tea, then-You take coffee
in the morning; do you not? No, I take tea in the morning, also.-
Do you drink no coffee? No, I do not drink it any more.-Who
takes chocolate? The Spaniards and Italians drink a great deal of
it.—Do the French take it also? They take some, but not so much
as the others.-Do the Turks take tea, chocolate, or coffee? They
take neither tea nor chocolate, but they are very fond of coffee.
Why so?
How goes it?
Is it possible?
however.
It is true,
Is it not true?
Then.
(First rate.)
It is possible.
Is it true?
It is not true.
+ Pourquoi donc ?
donc.
Comment va? Cela va bien, très-bien,
Est-il possible? C'est possible.
C'est vrai, cependant. Est-ce vrai ?
N'est-ce pas vrai? Ce n'est pas vrai.
TWENTY-SEVENTH LESSON, 27th.-Vingt-septième Leçon, 27me.
To show.
VOCABULAIRE. 1re Section.
I show, do show, am showing.
He does not show.
Dost thou show?
Show him the apartment.
To show something to some one.
To show one something.
Do you show me your gun?
I do.
What do you show the man?
I show him my fine clothes.
Tobacco. Tobacco, (for smoking.)
Montrer, 1.
Je fais voir.
Faire voir.
Je montre.
Il ne fait pas voir.
Fais-tu voir ?
Montrez-lui
Il ne montre pas
Montres-tu ?
l'appartement.
Faites-lui voir$ (§ 150.)
Montrer
{Font }
Faire voir
quelque chose
à quelqu'un.
Me faites-vous voir votre fusil ?
Je vous le fais voir, (le montre.)
Que faites-vous voi: à l'homme?
Je lui montre mes beaux habits.
Du tabac. Du tabac à fumer.
TWENTY-SEVENTH LESSON. (1.)
135
Snuff.
To smoke.
To snuff, take snuff.
Do you smoke or take snuff?
I neither smoke nor snuff.
You chew; do you not?
I neither smoke, snuff, nor chew.
Is it possible! It is wonderful!
To chew. Do not chew, (imperat.)
The gardener.
This valet.
That concert. To the concert of Mr...
To intend, to intend to.
Do you also intend to go to the ball?
I intend to go to it, (going there.)
To know, to know how, (bef. a verb.)
Dost thou know? Dost thou not know?
Does the child know? He does not.
To swim.
Swimming.
Do you know how to swim ?
Can you swim?
Du tabac en poudre, (à priser.)
Fumer,1. Prendre* du tabac ou priser
Fumez-vous ou prisez-vous ?
Je ne furne ni ne prise. (§ 162, A. 6.)
Vous chiquez, n'est-ce pas'?
Je ne fume, ni ne prise, ni ne chique.
Est-il possible! C'est extraordinaire'
Chiquer, 1. Ne chiquez pas.
Le jardinier. Ce valet-ci.
Ce concert-là. Au concert de M....
Compter, 1, (sans prépos.)
Comptez-vous aussi aller au bal?
Je compte y aller.
Savoir,* 3. (§ 144, sans prépos.)
Sais-tu ? Ne sais-tu pas ?
L'enfant sait-il ? Il ne sait pas.
Nager, 1. Nageant. (§ 144, R. 2.)
} Savez-vous nager?
Does he read? He does not know Lit-il ?
how.
A cigar.
A Spanish cigar.
To think of, [meaning, what is your
opinion of.] What do you think
of the weather?
Un cigare.
Il ne sait pas lire.
Un cigare espagnol.
Penser, 1, de....
Que pensez-vous du temps?
VINGT-SEPTIEME THÊME. 1re Sec.
N'oubliez pas d'écrire la date en Français.
Bon soir, Michel, comment vous portez-vous aujourd'hui? Je
me porte très-bien, merci. Et vous, Mr., comment va? Cela va
bien, je vous remercie. Vous voyez que je fume un cigare espa-
gnol, en voulez-vous un? Non, je vous suis bien obligé; mais je ne
fume plus. Vous chiquez, n'est-ce pas ? Non, je ne chique pas.
Est-il possible! Vous ne fumez ni ne chiquez! C'est extraordi-
naire! N'est-ce pas? Oui, en vérité! Mais vous prisez? Non,
je ne prise pas. Quoi! Vous ne chiquez, ni ne fumez, ni ne
prisez? Est-il possible! C'est possible. Ce que je vous dis est.
vrai. Mais, pourquoi est-ce extraordinaire ? Parce que tout le
monde fume ou prise ou chique. Non pas tout-à-fait. Que pensez-
vous du temps? Je pense, qu'il est superbe. Quoi! Ne fait-il pas
trop chaud pour vous? Pour moi? Non, en vérité.
What does your father want? He wants some tobacco.-Will
you go for some? I will go for some.-What tobacco does he want?
He wants some snuff.-Do you want tobacco, (for smoking?) Ido
not want any; I do not smoke.-Do you show me anything? I
show you gold ribbons, (des rubans d'or.)-Does your father show
136
TWENTY-SEVENTH LESSON. (2.)
his gun to my brother? He does show it him.—Does he show him
his beautiful birds? He does.-Does the Frenchman smoke? He
does. Do you go to the ball? I go to the theatre instead of going
to the ball.-Does the gardener go into the garden? He goes to the
market instead of going into the garden.-Do you send your valet
to the tailor? I send him to the shoemaker instead of sending him
to the tailor.-Does your brother intend to go to the ball this eve-
ning? He does not intend to go to the ball, but to the concert.-
When do you intend to go to the concert? I intend to go there this
evening. At what o'clock? At a quarter past ten.-Do you go for
my son? I do go for him.-Where is he? He is in the counting-
house. Do you find the gardener whom you are looking for?—I
do. Do your sons find the gardeners whom they are looking for?
They do not.
Do your friends intend to go to the theatre? They do.-When
do they intend to go thither? They intend to go thither to-morrow.
-At what o'clock? At half past seven.-What does the merchant
wish to sell you? He wishes to sell me some pocket-books.-Do
you intend to buy some? I will not.-Dost thou know anything?
I do not know anything.-What does your little brother know? He
knows how to read and to write.-Does he know French? He does
not. Do you know German? I do.-Do your brothers know Greek?
They do not, but they intend to study it.-Do you know English? I
do not, but intend to learn it.-Do my children know how to read
Italian? They know how to read, but not (mais non) how to speak
it. Do you know how to. swim? I do not know how to swim, but
how to play. Does your son know how to make coats? He does
not know how to make any; he is no tailor.-Is he a merchant?
He is not, (ne l'est pas.)—What is he? He is a physician.
We are well.
Nous nous portons bien. Nous vous
remercions.
We thank you.
VOCABULAIRE.
2de Section.
Conduire,* 4.
To conduct, conducting.
Conduisant.
I conduct, thou conductest, he con- Je conduis, tu conduis, il conduit.
ducts.
Conduct him to his uncle's house.
Conduct me there also.
I will, willingly, with pleasure.
'l'o extinguish, put out, extinguishing.
Do you extinguish (put out) the fire?
I do not put it out.
Put it out.
He extinguishes it. Thou puttest it out.
To light, to kindle, to fire.
This burner.
The gas.
burner?
Conduisez-le chez son oncle.
Conduisez-y-moi aussi (§ 58.)
Volontiers.
Eteindre,*4, éteignant.
Eteignez-vous le feu?
Je ne l'éteins pas. Éteignez-le.
Il l'éteint. Tu l'éteins.
Allumer, 1.
Which Le gaz. Ce bec-ci. Quel bec?
TWENTY-SEVENTH LESSON. (2.)
137
How many burners do you light?
A single gas burner is enough.
Put out this burner, and light up the
other.
Often. As often as you. (§ 170)
As often as I. As often as we, thou.
Do
you often go to the wharf?
As often as he. As often as they.
As good as he, we, they, I, thou.
Not so often.
Less often.
Do you frequently see my uncle?
I do not see him so often as you.
Not so often as I, as they.
Oftener, more often. Often enough.
Oftener than we, than they.
Too often. Does he come too often?
I believe he comes too often.
To count.
The number.
Do you know this number in French?
What number?
To pronounce.
To count in French.
The numbers.
This, 76.
Can you pronounce my name?
Well, try. VALUE.
I can try.
Can I pronounce it?
well.
Yes, pretty
Combien de becs allumez-vous ?
Un seul bec de gaz est assez.
Eteignez ce bec-ci et allumez l'autre.
Souvent.
Aussi souvent que vous.
Aussi souvent que moi, que nous.
que toi.
-Allez-vous souvent au quai ?
Aussi souvent que lui, qu'eux.
Aussi bon que lui, nous, eux, moi, to
Moins souvent.'
Voyez-vous souvent mon oncle?
Je le vois moins souvent que vous.
Moins souvent que moi, qu'eux.
Plus souvent. Assez souvent.
Plus souvent que nous, qu'eux.
Trop souvent. Vient-il trop souvent?
Je crois qu'il vient trop souvent.
Compter. Compter en Français.¹
Le nombre. Les nombres.
Savez-vous ce nombre-ci en Français?
Quel nombre ? Celui-ci. ($38.)
Prononcer, 1. (§ 144, R. 1.)
+Savez-vous prononcer mon nom?
Je puis essayer. Eh bien! essayez.
Puis-je le prononcer? Oui, assez
bien.
VINGT-SEPTIÈME THÊME. 2de Sec.
N'oubliez pas d'écrire la date ici, en Français.
Bon jour, Messieurs, comment vous portez-vous? Nous nous por-
tons bien, excepté M. le Blanc, qui n'est pas ici. Va-t-il venir?
Non, il ne vient pas aujourd'hui. N'est-il pas assez bien pour venir?
Non, il n'est pas bien du tout. Qu'a-t-il? Je ne sais pas; et le Doc-
teur ne le sait pas mieux que moi, du moins, je le crois. Lui donne-
t-il quelque chose à prendre? Il lui donne quelque chose. Je suis
bien aise, Messieurs, d'apprendre que vous vous portez bien. Nous
vous remercions. Le thême que vous avez est-il difficile? Moi, je
le trouve difficile; mais ces trois messieurs ne le trouvent pas diffi-
cile. C'est vrai, au contraire nous le trouvons aisé. Que trouvez-vous
difficile? Je ne peux pas vous le dire en Français. Vous pouvez
1 The teacher is invited to make the pupils count in French, by the
minute-slowly at first; but when they pronounce the numbers well and
regularly, let them count as fast as they can; not for the mere satisfaction
of knowing whether they can count 150 or 170 in a minute, but to give ease
and readiness to their utterance. Pupils are generally fond of this exercise
12*
138
TWENTY-SEVENTH LESSON. (2.)
4
essayer, n'est-ce pas ? Oui, sans doute. Eh bien! essayez. Volon
tiers. Nous avons beaucoup de new mots. Ne savez-vous pas le
Français de: new? Je ne le sais pas. Ces autres messieurs e
savent-ils? Moi, je le sais. Nous, nous ne le savons pas. Je vais
vous le dire, c'est nouveau. Pouvez-vous l'écrire? Moi, non-moi,
oui—n, o, u, v, e, a, u. Comment formez-vous le pluriel? Avec x,
n'est-ce pas ? Oui, c'est vrai, vous avez raison.
Do you wish to drink some cider? I wish to drink some wine;
have you got any? No, I have none, but I will send for some.
Has not your uncle got some excellent? Yes, he has.-Conduct
me to his house, then. I will, or willingly. Now? No, not now,
but very soon.-Do you know how to make tea? I know how to
make it; but I cannot make coffee.-Who knows how to make
chocolate? I; it is not difficult.-Where is your father's dentist
going to? He is going nowhere. He remains at home to fix the
teeth of his uncle.-Dost thou conduct anybody? I conduct no-
body.—And you, whom do you conduct? I conduct my son's valet.—
Where are you conducting him? I conduct him to the lawyer's
office, to show him where it is.-Does your valet conduct this German
boy? He does.-Where to? He conducts him into the garden to
speak to our old German gardener.-Does your old German gardener
snuff? No, but he smokes.-Does he work well? Yes, he does, for
he cannot talk (parler à) with the other servants; and he has to work.
Do we conduct any one? We conduct our children.-Where are
your children conducting their uncle? They are conducting him to
the museum, to show it to him.-Conduct me there also. Come
with us.--Are they going to show him the theatre? No, they have
no time to show it to him to-day; they have time only to show him
the museum.-Can you pronounce the French of: to extinguish?
I believe I can. Let us see, (Voyons, § 150, Art. 2.) Try. Pronounce
it. .... is it right?
is it right? Not quite. Try it again. .... is it better? It
is right now. I am very glad of it, for it is a difficult word.—The
imperative is not easy. Do you know it? Yes, I do.-P onounce
it, if you please. With pleasure..... is it right? Not quite. Pro-
nounce the gn like gn, in the English word mignonette, gne.
That is better. Try it again. That's right now.-Can you
count a little in French? Not much, but I intend to learn.—Will
you count? Willingly.-Begin. 1, 2, 3, 4, 6—No, 5—5, 6, 7, 8.
No; do not pronounce the h of huit, say: uit. Uit, 9, 10, 11, 12, &c.
(Let the teacher correct, in French, the mistakes as they occur, and
note down the number counted in a minute, whenever this exercise
takes place.)
Éteignez-vous le feu? Je ne l'éteins pas, le cuisinier l'éteint.
TWENTY-EIGHTH LESSON. (1.)
139
Qui allume le feu le matin? Le cuisinier allume son feu, et mon
valet allume le mien. Qui allume celui de votre oncle et de votre
cousin? Ils n'ont pas de feu dans leurs appartements, parce qu'ils
n'y restent pas. Où restent-ils? Ils sont avec nous dans le salon
quand ils sont à la maison.—Sortent-ils souvent? Oui, très-souvent.
Vont-ils souvent à Fairmount? Non, pas très-souvent. Pourquoi y
vont-ils? Ils y vont pour voir la machine hydraulique, (the water
works) Vont-ils plus souvent au musée? Oui, ils y vont plus sou-
vent.- Sortons-nous aussi souvent que nos voisins à gauche ? Nous
sortons moins souvent qu'eux. L'épicier va-t-il aussi souvent au
marché que mon jardinier? Je crois qu'il y va aussi souvent. Al-
lumez-vous le gaz tous les jours? Oui, nous l'allumons tous les
soirs. À quelle heure votre domestique l'allume-t-il? A présent, il
allume le premier bec à sept heures et demie et les autres plus tard.
À quelle heure l'éteint-il? Il l'éteint à dix heures et demie dans le
salon, et dans nos appartements, nous l'éteignons à onze heures ou
à onze heures et demie.
At the beginning (commencement) of | Au commencement du thême.
the exercise.
Unwholesome.
weather.
It is unwholesome Malsain.
Damp, humid. How goes the tooth- Humide.
dents?
Bien obligé.
C'est un temps malsain.
Comment va le mal de
ache?
Since when? It is better. Excepted. Depuis quand ? Il va mieux. Excepté.
Much obliged.
TWENTY-EIGHTH LESSON, 28th.-Vingt-huitième Leçon, 28me.
VOCABULAIRE. 1re Section.
Obs. 63. Do and Aм, when used to interrogate, in the present tense, may
be rendered by EST-CE QUE, which must be used with the first person sin-
gular, of those verbs in which the transposition of the pronoun would pro-
duce an unpleasant or a difficult sound. (Dir. 8.)
Do I wish?
Am I able?
Am I doing?
What am I doing?
Am I willing?
Can I?
Do I do?
Est-ce que je veux ?
Est-ce que je peux ?
Est-ce que je fais?
Qu'est-ce que je fais ?
1 Verbs whose first person singular forms only one syllable, as: je sens,
I feel; je prends, I take; je tends, I tend; je fonds, I melt: or whose last
syllable sounds like je, such as: je mange, I eat; je venge, I revenge; je
range, I range; je songe, I dream and others, such as: j'unis, I unite; je
permets, I permit; j'offre, I offer; &c., &c.
:
140
TWENTY-EIGHTH LESSON. (1.)
What do I say 2
Where am I going to ?
Am I coming?
To whom do I speak?
Am I going?
Are you coming?
He says.
You are.
Do you tell or say?
I do say or tell.
He does not say.
say?
Qu'est-ce que je dis ?
Où est-ce que je vais ?
À qui est-ce que je parle ?
Est-ce que je vais ?
Est-ce que je viens?
Vous vénez. Est-ce que vous venez ?
Dites-vous? Est-ce que vous dites?
Je dis.
What does he not Il ne dit pas.
What do we not say?
dit pas ?
Il dit.
Qu'est-ce qu'il ne
Qu'est-ce que nous ne disons pas ?
Obs. 64. Some verbs, however, ending in e mute in the first person sin
gular, present tense, may be used interrogatively in that person, but then
they change e mute into é with the acute accent, followed by je.
Do speak?
Do I love ?,
Are you acquainted with that man?
I am not at all acquainted with him.
Is your brother acquainted with him?
He is well acquainted with him.
Do you drink cider?
S Parlé-je? (pas si bon que)
Est-ce que je parle ?
Aimé-je ?
Est-ce que j'aime?
Connaissez-vous cet homme ?
Je ne le connais pas du tout.
Votre frère le connaît-il ?
Il le connaît beaucoup.
Buvez-vous du cidre?
I begin to drink cider, but my brother Je commence à boire du cidre, mais
drinks milk.
To begin to (commence) beginning.
I begin to like it.
Does he begin to study well?
I begin to be cold-to be warm-
He begins to be ashamed-sleepy.
We commence to be hungry and
thirsty.
Badly, awkwardly. (§ 170.)
Does your uncle speak English well?
He speaks it badly.
They both write it well.
A minute. In a few minutes.
mon frère boit du lait.
Commencer à, commençant.
Je commence à l'aimer. (à av. l'inf.)
Commence-t-il à bien étudier ?
Je commence à avoir froid-chaud-
Il commence à avoir honte-sommeil.
Nous commençons à avoir faim et
soif. ( 144. R. 1.)
Mal-très-mal-plus mal-trop mal.
Votre oncle parle-t-il bien Anglais ?
Il le parle mal.
Ils l'écrivent bien l'un et l'autre.
Une minute. (fém.)
minutes.
VINGT-HUITIEME THÊME. 1re Sec.
Dans quelques
Écrivez le quantième au commencement (at the beginning) du thême.
Que pensez-vous du temps? Nous le trouvons très-désagréable.
Il est froid et humide. Je ne le trouve pas froid; mais très-humide.
C'est un temps malsain. Très-malsain, en vérité.
Il n'est pas
bon pour ceux qui ont des rhumes. Non, et je suis fâché de vous
dire que Louis en a un très-mauvais. Depuis quand? Depuis
mercredi. J'ai l'honneur de vous souhaiter le bonsoir. Comment
va le mal de dents? Il va mieux, bien obligé. J'en suis bien aise.
TWENTY-EIGHTH LESSON. (1.)
141
Comment se porte-t-on chez le général? Tout le monde s'y porte
bien, excepté le valet irlandais. Qu'a-t-il? Nous ne savons pas ce
que c'est. Est-il très-mal? Oui, il est obligé de rester dans son lit.
Depuis quand est-il malade? Depuis plusieurs jours. Cependant
le Dr. croit qu'il est un peu mieux. Quand est-il mieux; le ma-
tin ou le soir? Il est mieux à midi et plus mal le soir. Qu'a Henri?
Il a mal à un coude. À quel? Au droit ou au gauche? Je crois que
c'est au gauche; mais je n'en suis pas sûr.
Do I read well? You do.-Do I speak pretty well? You do.—
Does my little brother speak French well? He does.-How does
he write German? He writes it badly.-Who writes it well? Our
young minister does.-Does he write it as well as the Swiss dentist?
They both write it well, very well. I do not know who writes the
best.-Do we speak badly? You do not.-Do I drink too much.
You do.-Am I able to make hats? You are not; you are not a
hatter.-Am I able to write a note? You are.-Am I doing my
exercise well? You are. What am I doing? You are doing
exercises.—What is my brother doing? He is doing nothing.-
What do I say? You say nothing.-Do I begin to speak? You
do begin to speak.-Do I begin to speak well? You do not
begin to speak well, (à bien parler,) but to read well, (mais à bien
lire.)-Where am I going to? You are going to your friend's.-Is
he at home?-Do I know? Am I able to speak as often as the son
of our neighbor?—He is able to speak oftener than you.-Can I
work as much as he? You cannot.-Do I read as often as you?
You do not, but you speak oftener than I.-Do I speak as well
(aussi bien).as you? You do not speak as well as I.-Do I go to
your house, or do you come to mine? You come to mine, and I
go to yours. When do you come to mine? Every morning, at
half past six.
Do you know the Russian whom I know? I do not know the
one you know, but I know another.-Do you drink as much cider
as wine? I drink less of the latter than of the former.-Does the
Pole drink as much as the Russian? He drinks just as much.-Do
the Germans drink as much as the Poles? The latter drink more
than the former.-Dost thou receive anything? I do.-What dost
thou receive? I receive some money.-Does your friend receive
books? He does.-What do we receive? We receive some cider.
-Do the Poles receive tobacco? They do.-From whom (de qui)
do the Spaniards receive money? They receive some from the
(des) English, and from the (des) French.
Comptez-vous tous les jours en Français? Oui, nous comptons.
N'aimez-vous pas à compter? (Let the pupil give his or her own}
142
TWENTY-EIGHTH LESSON. (2.)
answer.) Combien comptez-vous dans une minute 'a minute)? Je
compte 125.-Et vous? Moi, je ne compte pas tant. Je ne compte
que 98.—Et vous, et votre cousin Armand? Nous comptons 128
Est-ce plus que lui? Oui, c'est plus. Combien de plus? Trois de
plus. (30¹.) C'est vrai, vous avez raison. Et vous, combien comp-
tez-vous de moins qu'eux? Je compte trois de moins. Combien
de plus que lui? Je compte 27 de plus que lui. C'est beaucoup,
n'est-ce pas ? C'est assez, du moins.
A degree, 32°, zero, 75°, 100°, 2120.
Thank God.
VOCABULAIRE.
Before, (previous to.) (R. 1.)
Do you speak before you listen ?
I listen before I answer.
Un degré, 32º, séro, 75°, 100°, 212°.
Dieu merci.
2de Section.
Avant, (de, avant un infinitif.)
Parlez-vous avant d'écouter?
J'écoute avant de répondre.
Obs. 65. As speak and listen have you for nominative, dispense with the
second you, and use the infinitive mood after the preposition. (Rule 3.)
Does he go to market before he
breakfasts ?
To breakfast.
To eat breakfast.
He goes (there) before he writes.
Do you take off your stockings be-
fore you take off your shoes?
Va-t-il au marché avant de déjeuner ?
Déjeuner, 1.
Il y va avant d'écrire.
Otez-vous vos bas avant d'ôter vos
souliers ?
Quand comptez-vous partir?
Je
pars demain pour Paris.
Je pars, tu pars, il pari.
To depart, set out, start; departing. | Partir,* 2; partant..
When do you intend to depart?
I set out to-morrow for Paris.
I depart, thou startest, he sets out.
Do they go to see their uncle before
they start for Charleston? They do.
To wet, to moisten, to damp, wetting.
Wet, damp, (adjectives.)
Are your shoes wet?
Yes, they are quite wet.
Vont-ils voir leur oncle avant de par-
tir pour Charleston? Ils y vont.
Mouiller, 1. Mouillant.
Mouillé, (sing.) Mouillés, (plur.)
Vos souliers sont-ils mouillés ?
Oui, ils sont tout mouillés..
Obs. 66. Tout, quite, being an adverb is invariable, that is, does not take
an s.
To dry, to get to dry.
I dry, thou driest, he dries. (§ 144,
R. 5.)
Dry your shoes.
Sécher, 1.
Faire sécher.
Je sèche, tu sèches, il sèche.
Séchez vos souliers (better) faites
sécher, &c.
Take a seat near the fire and dry Prenez un siège près du feu, et faites
your shoes and feet.
It is very warm; very cold.
In use.
Much, commonly, greatly,
used.
Almost, all, always, too much.
sécher vos souliers et vos pieds.
Il fait grand chand; grand froid.
En usage. En grand usage.
Presque, presque tout, toujours, trop.
TWENTY-EIGHTH LESSON. (2.)
145
VINGT-HUITIEME THEME. 2de Sec.
Écrivez le jour du mois au commencement du thême.
Mr., nous vous souhaitons le bonjour, et nous espérons que vous
vous portez bien. Je vous suis bien obligé, Messieurs, et je vois avec
plaisir que vous avez l'air de vous bien porter. Nous nous portons
bien, Dieu merci, (thank God,) mais nous avons grand chaud, (very
warm.) Je le crois, car, il fait grand chaud. À quel degré est lø
thermomètre? Le mien est à 80°; mais celui du voisin est à 824.
Vous parlez du thermomètre de Fahrenheit, n'est-ce pas ? Oui, car
c'est ici le seul en grand usage. Si ce temps continue je ne peux
pas rester ici. Où allez-vous? A Cape May. Quand partez-vous?
Je pars mardi ou jeudi. Partez-vous seul? Non, je pars avec mon
cousin. Pourquoi part-il avec vous? Parce qu'il est malade. Qu'a-
t-il? Il a peur d'avoir le tic douloureux. Le tic douloureux! Je
suis bien fâché de l'apprendre. Nous en sommes tous fâchés. Je
le crois. Vos souliers sont-ils mouillés? Je crois que non. S'ils le
sont, je peux vous en prêter d'autres, et vous pouvez faire sécher les
vôtres. Non, merci. Vous êtes bien bon. Il est 8 heures et Louis
n'est pas encore ici. Ce matin il n'est pas ponctuel comme à l'ordi-
naire. Mon habit est tout mouillé et mon gilet aussi. Changez les
et faites-les sécher. Où puis-je les faire sécher? Donnez-les au
domestique pour les mettre près du feu. Les souliers et les bas de
ce petit enfant sont mouillés. Jean, ôtez-les et faites-les sécher; car
le pauvre enfant commence à avoir froid. Oui, Mlle.
Do I receive as much Spanish money as American? You receive
inore of the latter than of the former.-Do I receive as many people
(autant de monde) as the Doctor? You do.-Who receives more
than he? more than we? The apothecary does. From whom (de
qui) do your children receive books? They receive some from me,
(de moi,) and from their friends.-Do the English receive as much
Turkish as American cotton? They receive more American than
Turkish cotton.-Our New Orleans merchants receive more French
than English cloth, do they not? I believe they do.-What gloves
do we receive? We receive French gloves.-How many books
does your neighbor lend you? He lends me three more. (30¹.)—
When does the foreigner intend to depart? He intends to depart
to-day.-Depart with him, can you not? Can I not? No, indeed;
and you know very well that I am not ready.—But you can soon
be ready. Do you think so? (le?) To be sure I do. Does the
Swede depart soon? He departs in a few minutes -Does he depart
alone? No, he takes a valet with him, because he does not speak
English well enough to go alone. He is right.-Dost thou set out
144
TWENTY-NINTH LESSON. (1.)
}
to-morrow? Dost thou intend to go with me? No, for we do not
intend to depart before 10 days. Then I have to bid you adieu.
(§ 140, Art. 5) answer you imme-
Do the Clintons (Les Clinton,
diately when you write to them? They usually answer me imme-
diately, when they are not sick. Well; write to them to know if I
can go to their house on Saturday, and tell them to answer directly.—
Are you not going to read the dentists' note before you answer it?
Yes, I am reading it now. Ah! pardon me, (pardonner.)—Does
this Irish servant of yours (votre domestique irlandais, § 108) sweep
your apartment before he makes your bed? No, he makes the bed
before he sweeps the room.-Dost thou drink before thou goest out?
I do.—Do you like to go to market before you eat breakfast? I do
not, for I am almost always sick when I do it.-Henry, put on your
shoes and stockings. No, indeed, I intend to put on my stockings
before I put on my shoes.-Dost thou read first and translate after-
wards? Yes, I do so; but I translate the exercise first, and write it
afterwards. You do well; that is right.-Do you go to the Pole's
house before you breakfast? Yes, I do.-At what o'clock do your
children breakfast? They breakfast at seven o'clock.-Do you take
snuff before breakfasting? No, but I smoke after breakfast.-Does
your son smoke also after breakfast? He does not smoke at all, and
I am glad of it. Does he chew or snuff? No, he does neither.
TWENTY-NINTH LESSON, 29th.-Vingt-neuvième Leçon, 29me.
VOCABULAIRE. 1re Section.
COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES AND ADVERBS.
The French have two kinds of comparison; that of equality, formed by
autant de before nouns, and aussi, before adjectives or adverbs, and que
after them; (16¹, 272.) and that of inequality, formed by plus or moins,
before, and que after the same parts of speech. The superlative is formed
by prefixing to the comparative, not only the definite article le, les, but any
of those which we have called articles (§ 1), mon, mes, &c. ce, cet, ces.
Positive. Comparative. Superlative. | Positif. Comparatif. Superlatif.
plus grand, le plus grand.
plus petit,
Great, greater,
the greatest.
Small, smaller,
my smallest.
Rich, richer,.
Poor,
poorer,
these richest.
my poorest.
Grand.
Petit,
Riches, plus riches,
Pauvres, plus pauvres,
mon plus petit.
ces plus riches.
mes plus pau-
vres.
Learned, more learned, the most
Quickly, quicker,
Often,
more often,
learned.
the quickest.
most often.
Savant, plus savant, le plus savant
Vite, plus vite, le plus vite.
Souvent, plus souvent, le plus sou-
vent.
TWENTY-NINTH LESSON. (1.)
148
This book is small, that is smaller, | Ce livre-ci est petit, celui-là est plus
and this is the smallest of all.
This hat is large, but that is larger.
Is your hat as large as mine?
ft is larger than yours.
It is not so large as yours.
Bulky, less bulky, the least bulky.
Fine, less fine, the least fine.
Slowly, not so slowly,
slowly..
the least
Good, not so good, the least good.
Are our neighbor's children as good
as ours? (good is sage when applied
to children.)
They are better than ours.
petit, et celui-ci est le plus petit
de tous.
Ce chapeau-ci est grand, mais celui
là est plus grand.
Votre chapeau est-il aussi grand que
le mien ?
Il est plus grand que le vôtre.
Il est moins grand que le vôtre.
Gros, moins gros, le moins gros.
Beau, moins beau, le moins beau.
Lentement, moins lentement,
le
le moins sage.
moins lentement.
Sage, moins sage,
Les enfants de notre voisin sont-ils
aussi sages que les nôtres ?
Ils sont plus sages que les nôtres.
They are not so good as ours, they Ils sont moins sages que les nôtres,
are the least good of all.
ce sont les moins sages de tous.
·
Obs. 67. To express the absolute superlative, that is, the highest degree,
without comparison, the French, like the English, use one of the adverbs,
très, fort, bien, very; extrêmement, extremely; infiniment, infinitely.
Un très-joli couteau.
A very fine sofa.
Very fine sofas.
Un très-beau sofa.
sofas.
De très-beaux
A very pretty knife.
Very well.
Très-bien,
To be used to
To be used to it.
fort bien.
Etre accoutumé à....
Y être accoutumé. ($ 50.)
Why do you speak more in English Pourquoi parlez-vous plus en Anglais
than in French?
qu'en Français ?
Because we are used to it. (Obs. 48.) Parce que nous y sommes accou-
tumés.
le matin et le soir?
What are they used to take in the Que sont-ils accoutumés à prendre
morning and evening ?
They are used to take coffee in the
morning and tea in the evening.
What am I used to?
He is not yet used to it.
Ils sont accoutumés à prendre du
café, le matin, et du thé, le soir.
À quoi est-ce que je suis accoutumé?
Il n'y est pas encore accoutumé.
VINGT-NEUVIÈME THÊME. 1re Sec.
Mettez le quantième du mois ici en Français.
Faites-nous des questions aujourd'hui, s'il vous plaît. Volontiers
Quel temps fait-il? Qui peut me répondre? Nous pouvons tous
vous répondre. Commencez, M. Legris. Vous voulez savoir que'
temps il fait ? Oui, M., s'il vous plaît. Je vais vous le dire avec
grand plaisir, le plus grand plaisir du monde. Dites-le donc, (then.)
13
146
TWENTY-NINTH LESSON. (1.7
Laissez-moi voir si j'ai le Français de unwholesome. Oh! oui; nous
l'avons. Alors, il fait un temps humide et malsain. Oui, vous
avez raison, il fait un temps humide et malsain, depuis deux ou
trois jours. N'est-ce pas extraordinaire? Si fait; c'est extraordi-
naire, car le temps change très-souvent. Mais il ne fait pas froid.
Au contraire, il fait chaud. Il fait presque toujours chaud quand il
fait humide, n'est-ce pas? Oui, sans doute. Ce temps humide
n'est pas bon pour le rhume du petit Robert, qu en pensez-vous ?
Je pense que non, et j'en suis fâché, car c'est un bon petit garçon.
Comment se porte le frère du docteur? Il se porte très-bien à pré-
Et comment va le vieux cuisinier du général? Il va mal.
Il est presque toujours malade, n'est-ce pas ? Oui, mais ce n'est pas
extraordinaire, car il est très-vieux.
sent.
Are you taller (grand) than I? I am taller than you.—Is your
young brother taller than you? No, but I believe that he is just as tall.
-Is thy leather hat as bad as my father's? It is better, but not so
black as his.—Are the clothes (les habits) of the Italians as fine as
those of the Irish? They are finer, but not so good.-Who makes
the finest gloves? The French make them.-Who makes the
finest cloth? The French and Spanish do.-Who has the finest
horses? Mine are fine, yours are finer than mine, but those of our
friends are the finest of all.-Why do the French take wine at
breakfast? Because they are used to it.-See, those poor children
have neither shoes nor stockings; are they not cold? No, indeed!
they are used to it.-Am I used to write quick or slow? You are
used to write slowly; but your cousin is used to write very quick.-
Who is more learned than this old Prussian? I do not know who
Is more learned than he.-Is the minister more learned than the
druggist? Yes, he is more learned than the druggist; but the law-
yer is the most learned of all.-Who is the richest merchant here?
Mr. is the richest.-Do we read more books than the Dutch?
We read more (of them) than they, but the Prussians read (of them)
more than we, and the Russians read the least, (le moins.)
Hast thou a finer garden than that of our physician? I have a
finer one than he.-Have the Americans a finer telegraph than the
other nations? They have the finest of all.—Are the shawls of this
merchant larger and finer than those of that one? They are larger,
but not so fine.-Have we as fine children as our neighbors? We
have finer ones.-Is the weather as bad as yesterday? No, it is not
so bad; but it is warmer, and I am not sorry for it. I believe it, for
I know that you like the heat.-Do the French speak more quickly
than the English, Irish, Scots, and other nations? I believe not.
Some (quelques uns) speak quickly, but others speak slowly. (§ 38.)
TWENTY-NINTH LESSON. (2.)
147
Are your clothes as wet as mine or his? Yours are more wet
than mine, but his are not wet at all.—Do you depart for Washing-
ton, soon? I start to-morrow. Do you go alone? No, cousin
William starts with me.-When do you set out? We set out at 3
o'clock.-George, go for some cigars; these gentlemen want some
to smoke.-Yes, Sir; but before going, I have to put my shoes on.
They are wet, and they are near the fire to dry.-Which of these
two children is the better? (sage?) The one (N. pa. 43) who studies
is better than the one who plays.
VOCABULAIRE. 2de Section.
Adjectifs Irréguliers.
Irregular Adjectives.
Good,
Bad,
better,
worse,
my best.
Bon,
meilleur,
mon me.lleur,
the worst.
Mauvais, pire,
le pire.
Small, little, less,
the least.
Petit,
moindre, le moindre.
Irregular Adverbs.
Adverbes Irréguliers.
Well,
better,
the best.
Bien,
mieux, le mieux.
Bad,
worse,
the worst.
Mal,
pis.
le pis.
!
Little,
less,
the least.
Peu,
moins,
le moins.
Much,
the most.
Beaucoup, plus,
le plus.
more,
Obs. 68. We may with equal correctness say: plus mauvais, plus mal,
plus petit, but never plus bon, plus bien, plus peu.
*
Obs. 69. Never use pire immediately before a noun. Do not say: un
pire chien; but, un plus mauvais chien. Votre chien est pire que celui-ci
is correct, but: plus mauvais, is to be preferred.
Whose, (to whom?) ($ 109.)
Whose hat is this?
It is. It is mine-hers-yours.
It is my uncle's dictionary,
It is the dictionary of my uncle.
It is my uncle's.
Whose kid gloves are those?
They are ours-thine-theirs. (§ 39.)
They are the children's cloaks.
Who has the best rice ?
Whose rice is the best?
The grocer has it. It is the grocer's.
Who has the smallest feet?
Whose feet are the smallest ?
Miss C. has the smallest.
Miss C.'s are.
That of my father is the finest.
Whose ribbon is the handsomer,
yours or mine? Yours is, (so left
out.)
A qui? (Pronom poss. non relatif.)
À qui est ce chapeau-ci ?
C'est.
C'est le mien-le sien-le
vôtre. ($ 104, &c.)
C'est le dictionnaire de mon oncle.
qui sont ces gants de chamois ?
Ce sont les vôtres, les tiens, les leurs.
Ce sont les manteaux des enfants.
Qui a le meilleur riz ?
| L'épicier l'a. C'est celui de l'épicier.
} Qui a les plus petits pieds ?
Mlle. C. a les plus petits.
Ce sont ceux de Mlle. C.
Celui de mon père est le plus beau.
Quel ruban est le plus beau? Le
vôtre ou le mien?
l'est.
Le vôtre
Obs. 70. So, in similar sentences, whether expressed or not, is rendered
m French, by le or l'.
---
148
TWENTY-NINTH LESSON. (2.)
Does that boy read better than the Ce garçon lit-il mieux que l'homme i
man?
He does so.
He does not (do so).
Is this grain better than the last?
It is.
It is much better.
Il le fait.
Il ne le fait pas.
Ce grain-ci est-il meilleur que le
dernier ?
Il l'est.
Il est beaucoup meilleur.
Do the Swedes write less than the Les Suédois écrivent-ils moins que
Poles?
'They write less than the other na-
tions.
Who makes most money?
The
baker, the butcher, or the milkman ?
They all make a great deal.
Is your gardener good, or a good one?
He is, but his cousin is not.
Here is. Here he is or it is.
Here is some.
Where are the big knives?
Here they are.
les Polonais ?
Ils écrivent moins que les autres
nations.
Qui fait le plus d'argent? Le bou-
langer, le boucher, ou le laitier?
Ils en font tous beaucoup.
Votre jardinier est-il bon?
Il l'est, mais son cousin ne l'est pas
Voici. Le voici.
En voici.
Où sont les gros couteaux?
Les voici.
VINGT-NEUVIÈME THÊME. 2de Sec.
Ici, n'oubliez pas de mettre le quantième, en Français.
Vous avez l'air d'avoir froid. Fait-il froid dehors? Oui, il fait
grand froid. À quel degré est le thermomètre? Je n'ai pas de ther-
momètre; je ne sais pas à quel degré il est. Mais j'ai froid, ça,
(§ 38, N. 6,) je le sais. Comment se porte le médecin ? Il se porte
plus mal. Son rhume est-il pire? Oui, il l'est. Quelqu'un a-t-i
mal de tête? Moi, je l'ai un peu; avez-vous quelque chose à me don-
ner? Oui, j'ai quelque chose qui est très-bon pour le mal de tête.
Donnez-le-moi. Je l'ai dans mon portefeuille. Laissez-moi le cher
cher. Très-bien, cherchez-le et donnez-le-moi. Je l'ai à présent.
Le voici. Prerez-le. Je l'ai. Lisez le papier pour savoir comment
le préparer (to prepare) et le prendre. Je vous suis bien obligé. Je
vais le lire tout de suite pour le préparer et le prendre. Préparez-le
bien. Je vais essayer. Est-ce difficile à préparer? Non, ce n'est
pas difficile à préparer. Adieu: je vais l'arranger. Adieu, adieu.
Whose big book is this? It is mine.-Whose hat is that? It is
my father's. Is your baker good? (or a good one?) He is good,
but yours is better; and that of the Prussian is the best of all our
bakers. Take some pretty velvet shoes. I have very pretty ones,
but my brother has still prettier ones than I.-From whom (de qui)
does he receive them? He receives them from his best friend in
Paris. Is your wine as good as mine? Here is some; taste it, anc.
then you may know, and tell me. Is it better, or as good, or worse ?
It is better.-Does your merchant sell good knives? He sells the
best.-Do we not read more books than the Irish? Yes, we read
THIRTIETH LESSON. (1.)
149
more than they, but the Russians read (of them) more than we, and
the Prussians read the most.-Why do they read the most? Because
they wish to be the most learned. Do the merchants sell more
sugar than coffee? They sell more of the latter than of the former.—
Does your shoemaker make as many shoes as mine?—He makes
more of them than yours.-Can you swim as well (aussi bien) as
my son? I can swim better than he, but he can speak French better
than I-Does he read as well as you? He reads better than I.-
Does the son of your neighbor go to market? No, he remains at
home; he has sore feet.-Do you learn as well as our gardener's
son? I learn better than he, but he works better than I.—Whose
gun is the finest? Yours is very fine, but that of the captain is still
finer, and ours is the finest of all. Has any one finer children than
you? No one has finer ones.-Does your son read as often as I?
He reads oftener than you.-Does my brother speak French as often
as you? He speaks and reads it as often as I.-Do I write as much
as you? You write more than I.-Do our neighbor's children read
German as often as we? We do not read it so often as they.-Do
we write it as often as they? They write oftener than we.-
whom do they write? They write to their friends.-Do you read
English books? We read French books instead of reading English
books.
+
-To
THIRTIETH LESSON, 30th.-Trentième Leçon, 30me.
To believe, believing.
VOCABULAIRE. 1re Section.
I believe, thou believest, he believes.
I believe that you know it.
I believe you know nothing of it.
To put, put on. Put, put on, (impera.)
Do I put on your kid gloves?
Does he not put on? is he not putting?
He puts on.
He does not.
What do you put on? I put this on.
Do they put on anything more?
Croire,* 4, croyant.
Je crois, tu crois, il croit.
Je crois que vous le savez.
Je crois que vous n'en savez rien.
Mettre. (25¹.) Mettez, (impéra.)
Est-ce que je mets vos gants de cla
mois ?
Est-ce qu'il ne met pas ? Ne met-il
pas ?
Il met.
Il ne met pas.
Que mettez-vous? Je mets ceci.
Mettent-ils quelque chose de plus ?
Obs. 71. We saw in (Obs. 7,) that: quelque chose; ne....rien and que?
require de before the following adjective; now we add: when a noun, pro-
ncun, number, or adjective precedes an adverb or past participle, the prepo
sition de (as a connecting link) must be put before the adverb.
13*
150
LESSON. (1.)
THIRTIETH
They put nothing more.
Do you go out? I do.
Do you not put on your big shoes?
Yes, I do. I do not go out without
putting them on when the weather
is bad.
Without you, me, him, them, us, thee.
Does he go out without taking his
umbrella, and his cloak?
He does not go out without taking
them.
To rain. Does it rain? It does.
Is the weather cloudy? It is (so).
Do I go out when the weather is
cloudy? Neither you nor we go
out.
Early.
Early enough.
As early as you, as they.
He goes out as early as we.
Too soon, too early.
Too little, (adv.), too small, too great.
You speak too little, and he too much.
Together. We go out together.
Later than you.
I go out later than you.
Do you go to the play as early as I?
I go thither earlier than you.
Earlier, (sooner.)
Ils ne mettent rien de plus.
Sortez-vous?
Je sors.
Ne mettez-vous pas vos gros souliers,?
Je ne sors pas
Si fait, je les mets.
sans les mettre quand il fait mau-
vais temps.
Sans vous, moi, lui, eux, nous, toi.
Sort-il sans prendre son parapluie e
son manteau? (R. 1.)
Il ne sort pas sans les prendre.
Pleuvoir,* 3.
Le temps est-il couvert? Il l'esi.
Est-ce que je sors quand le temps
est couvert ? Ni vous ni nous ne
sortons.
Pleut-il? Il pleut.
De bonne heure. D'assez bonne heure.
D'aussi bonne heure que vous, qu'eux.
Il sort d'aussi bonne heure que nous.
Trop tôt, de trop bonne heure.
Trop peu, trop petit, trop grand.
Vous parlez trop peu, et lui trop.
Ensemble. Nous sortons ensemble,
Plus tard que vous.
Je sors plus tard que vous.
Allez-vous au spectacle d'aussi bonne
heure que moi ?
J'y vais plus tôt (de meilleure heure)
que vous.
Plus tôt, (de meilleure heure.)
Does your father go thither earlier Votre père y va-t-il plus tôt que moi,
than I?
Try to go as soon as he.
(de meilleure heure que moi ?)
Essayez d'y aller aussi tôt que lui.
TRENTIÈME THÊME. 1re Sec.
N'oubliez pas la date ici.
Bon jour, M., vous vous portez bien, j'espère; mais pourquoi avez-
vous un parapluie? Pleut-il? Non, il ne pleut pas encore; mais
le temps est couvert, très-couvert, et quand il l'est, je ne sors pas
sans prendre un parapluie. Vous avez raison de le faire, car il est
très-désagréable d'être dehors sans parapluie, quand il pleut. No
pleut-il pas à présent? Si fait, je crois qu'il commence à pleuvoir.
Oui, c'est vrai. Il commence à pleuvoir, mais pas beaucoup encore.
Moi, je suis bien aise de voir la pluie, (the rain,) car nous avons trop
de poussière. C'est vrai, vous n'avez pas tort; il fait beaucoup trop
de poussière. N'avez-vous pas mal aux yeux quand il fait de la
poussière? Si fait, j'y ai souvent mal alors. Pas moi. Comment
3
151
THIRTIETH
LESSON. (1.)
se porte-t-on chez vous? Tout le monde y est assez bien. Per-
sonne n'est malade, excepté notre domestique. Qu'a-t-il? Il a un
gros rhume et un peu mal aux dents.--Il pleut, mais il ne fait pas
froid, n'est-ce pas ? C'est vrai, il ne fait pas froid, mais très-humide
et malsain. Nous le croyons comme vous. Quand il fait froid et
humide, mettez quelque chose de plus. Et quand il fait chaud,
quelque chose de moins, n'est-ce pas ? Oui, c'est cela. C'est le
plus prudent.
Do you put on another coat in order to go to the play? I put on
my French coat to go.-Do you put on your kid gloves before you
put on your big shoes? I put on my overshoes before I put on my
kid gloves.-Does the lawyer put on his round hat before he puts
on his blue coat? He puts on his coat first, instead of putting on
his round hat. Is he not right in doing so? Yes, he is.-Do you
go out early, every morning? Yes, we do.-Do you go out when
your son does? Yes, we go out together.-Early? No, not very
early. We breakfast first.-Do you breakfast together? To be
sure. At what o'clock do you begin to breakfast? We begin at
half past 6. (Do you, indeed?) En vérité? Then you breakfast
early. Do you eat dinner early, too? I think we dine earlier than
you, for we dine at half past one.-Is it possible? Do you dine as
early as that? We dine then, when we are all at home; but if we
wait for those who are absent, (absents,) then we dine together, and
later.-Does your uncle write before he breakfasts? No, he does
not.—What does he? He reads the paper.-Is he fond of reading
the paper? Yes, he likes it very much.-When it is cloudy wea-
ther, does he go out without his umbrella? No, he always takes
it.-Does he often go to the museum? He does, often.-Does he
go there oftener than your cousin? No, they always go together.
Do you translate your exercise early or late? I always
translate it in the morning, as early as I can.-Do you translate
it from the book or do you read it, when you recite it to your
teacher? We translate it instead of reading it, when we recite it
to him.-Do you begin to like mutton? No, I cannot bear it.—
Does your cousin like it? No, he does not; he cannot bear it.—
But your uncle William does like it; don't he? He! yes, he likes
it.—Do you eat supper early? We do not eat supper late.—At what
o'clock do they take tea at the doctor's? They take tea quite late.
—Later than you do? Yes, much later; but at the general's they
take it very early.-Do the Pole and Russian go early to the con-
cert? Yes, they do.-Let us go earlier than they; will you? Will-
ingly. Let us go before them.—At what o'clock can you be ready?
I can be ready at 6 or past 6. It is soon enough; is it not? I
!
7
152
THIRTIETH LESSON. (2.)
believe so; for the concert does not begin before 7.—Do you not
put on something more? No, this is enough; I wish nothing more.
-Do I write too much? No, but you talk (speak) too much.—Do
I speak more than you? You do, very often, and so does your
brother.-Do you count quick? Yes, in English I count pretty
fast.——No, I mean in French.—I do not count very fast in French.--
Does he count as fast as you? Who? This youth? Yes, he; this
youth. Do I know ?--How many do you count in a minute ?-How
many does he count? Try, both of you.-We are going to try to
count as fast as we can.-Very well; try to do it.-Must we try
anything more? No, nothing more, now.
VOCABULAIRE.
2de Section.
Already, yet. Is it already done?
Do you speak already?
Does he start already?
Not yet.
No, not yet.
I do not speak yet.
He departs immediately.
(depart.)
Do you finish your exercise already?
I finish it at this very moment. (time.)
Do you give us anything to do?
Déjà. Est-ce déjà fait ?
Parlez-vous déjà ?.
Part-il déjà ?
Ne... pas encore. Non, pas encore.
Je ne parle pas encore.
Il part tout de suite.
Finissez-vous déjà votre thême ?
Je le finis à présent même.
Nous donnez-vous quelque chose a
faire ?
Do I not always give you something Est-ce que je ne vous donne pas
to do?
toujours quelque chose à faire ?
Obs. 72. We have seen, in the preceding lessons, that when two verbs
are joined, the first sometimes requires no preposition¹ to connect itself
with the second; that sometimes it takes the preposition à ;2 at others de. 3
See lists of those verbs (§ 156), preceded by a short explanation.
The scholar was directed to form for himself lists of those verbs, of nouns,
adjectives, &c., as they are presented in the vocabularies. In order to sce
how he has performed that task, I here insert the model of a dialogue on
the subject, which teachers may modify according to circumstances.
Mr. Armand, have you a catalogue | M. Armand, avez-vous un catalogue
of the verbs which govern other
verbs without a preposition? Yes,
Sir, I have. Which is the first verb
on your catalogue? It is voulez-
vors ? That is right. But instead
of writing down voulez-vous? make
use of the infinitive. Do you know
it? Yes, Sir, I do. It is vouloir,
is it not? Yes, that is it. So, your
first verb which governs another
¹(18¹, 19¹.)
des verbes qui en gouvernent d'au-
tres sans préposition? Ou M.,
j'en ai un. Quel est le premier
verbe sur votre catalogue ? C'est
voulez-vous? C'est bien. Mais
au lieu d'ecrire, voulez-vous ?
faites usage de l'infinitif. Le savez-
vous? Oui, M., je le sais. C'est
vouloir, n'est-ce pas ? Oui, c'est
cela. Ainsi, votre premier verbo
2 (212, 25³.)
3 (171, 223.)
THIRTIETH LESSON. (2.)
153
A
without a preposition is vouloir, is
it not? Yes, Sir, it is that. In
what vocabulary is it? I do not
know, but I have the folio, (page.)
That will do. What is the second
verb of your catalogue? It is allez-
vous? What is its infinitive? It
is aller. Very well. Make use of
aller, instead of allez-vous? On
what page is it? On the....
To hear, to understand.
Hearing.
I understand. I do not understand.
Do you understand me? I do.
I understand you in part.
I do not understand you at all.
Is it possible? Do you not understand
a single word? No, not a single
one.
qui en gouverne un autre sans
préposition est vouloir, n'est-ce
pas? Oui, M., c'est cela. Dans.
quel vocabulaire est-il? Je në
sais; mais j'ai le feuillet. Cela
suffit. Quel est le second verbe
de votre catalogue? C'est allez-
vous ? Quel en est l'infinitif?
(31.) C'est aller. Tres-bien.
Faites usage de aller au lieu de
allez-vous? A quel feuillet est-
il? Au....
Entendre, 4.
J'entends.
Entendant.
Je n'entends pas.
M'entendez-vous ? Je vous entends
Je vous entends en partie.
Je ne vous entends pas du tout.
Est-il possible? N'entendez-vous
pas un seul mot ?
Non, pas un
seul.
Obs. 73. The infinitive has no preposition before it when it is used in an
absolute sense, or as a nominative case.
To eat too much is dangerous.
To speak too much is foolish.
To do good to those who have offended
us, is a commendable action.
Sometimes. Several times.
Never mind, no matter.
Manger trop est dangereux.
Parler trop est imprudent.
Faire du bien à ceux qui nous ont
offensés, est une action louable.
Quelque fois.
N'importe.
TRENTIÈME THÊME. 2de Sec.
N'oubliez pas le quantième en Français.
Plusieurs fois.
Comment vous êtes-vous porté depuis que je n'ai eu le plaisir de
vous voir? Quelque fois bien, quelque fois mal; mais vous, com-
ment vous êtes-vous porté ? Je me suis toujours bien porté. Je le
crois, car vous avez très-bon air. Le pensez-vous? Tout le monde
me dit que j'ai l'air malade. Moi, au contraire, je pense que vous
avez très-bon air. Mais, ce petit garçon-là n'a pas bon air. C'est
vrai, et je crois qu'il est un peu malade. L'êtes-vous, mon petit
ami? Oui, M., j'ai un peu mal de tête. Depuis quand? Depuis
ce matin de bonne heure. Avant déjeuner? Oui, un peu avant.
Entendez-vous ce que ce petit garçon dit? Non, je ne l'entends pas
bien. L'entendez-vous, vous? Oui, je l'entends parfaitement, parce
que je suis accoutumé à l'entendre. Et moi, je ne l'entends pas,
parce que je n'y suis pas accoutumé. Vous avez raison. Voyez-
vous quelquefois le cousin du vieux général? Je le vois souvent:
mais savez-vous qu'il part? Pour où? (where to?) Pour la Cali-
154
THIRTIETH LESSON. (2.)
fornie. Est-il possible? Quand part-il? Je crois qu'il est dejà prêt
à partir. Dans quel bâtiment part-il? Il part dans le .... Est-ce
un bon bâtiment? Je crois que oui. N'est-ce pas le bâtiment de
M. C? Non, il n'est plus à Mr. C; mais à M. H-
Allons le voir. Oui, allons-y, Mais, voyez donc, (see there,) il pleut.
N'importe. Prenons nos parapluies. Je n'ai pas le mien ici. N'im-
porte. Nous pouvons vous en prêter un. Pourquoi n'avez-vous pas
le vôtre? Je ne le prends pas toujours quand le temps est couvert.
Moi, au contraire, je ne sors pas sans prendre le mien quand le
temps est couvert. Vous êtes plus prudent que moi. N'importe.
Partons. Vous faut-il un mouchoir de plus? J'en ai un ; c'est assez.
Is my Italian hat too large? It is neither too large nor too small.-
Do you speak French oftener than English? I speak the latter
oftener than the former.-Do your uncle and cousin buy much New
York corn? They buy but little.-Have I enough fresh bread? You
have only a little, but enough.-Is it late? Why do you believe it is
late? Because I begin to be sleepy, (à avoir sommeil.) You may
be sleepy, but it is not late.-What o'clock is it? It is only half past
nine. Is it too late to go to your father's? Why do you wish to go
to my father's? I wish to return (rendre) him this French book.-
Is it, (3, § 39,) a pretty book? It is a very pretty book. Will you
conduct me there? Can you not find the way alone? I believe I
cannot in the evening.-I do not wish to go there now.
Give me
the book, I can return it to him. No; I have to return it to him
myself. (Moi-même, § 41.) Very well. Do it, then.-Does the
young Spaniard buy an Arabian horse? He cannot buy one.— -Why?
Is he poor? He is not poor; he is richer than you. Why can he
not buy one then? Because (no Arabian horse can be found here) he
cannot find any Arabian horse here.-Is this Swiss as learned as that
Pole? He is just as learned, I believe; but you are more learned
than they and I.—Are you studying already? No, not yet. I am
smoking.—Do you smoke so early? Yes, sometimes; when I am
cold.
Do you understand that gentleman? I do.-Is he learned? He
is.-What is he? A lawyer? A minister? An apothecary? A mer-
chant? Or nothing at all? I believe he is a little of everything, (un
peu de tout.)-Is your horse worse than mine? It is not so bad as
yours.—Is mine worse than the Dutchman's? It is worse. It is the
worst horse (Obs. 69) that I know, (connaisse, subjunct.) Do you
give those men less silver than paper? (Dir. 3.) I give them more
of the former than of the latter; for some of them cannot read, and
they do not like the paper.-Who receives the most money? The
English do.-Cannot your scn write a note in French? He cannot,
THIRTIETH LESSON. (2.)
155
but he begins to read a little.-Do the Americans write more than
we? They write less than we; but the Italians write the least.-
Are they as rich as the Americans? They are less rich than they.-
Are your birds as fine as our neighbor's? They are less fine; but
never mind, ours are fine enough. Faites du bien; do you under-
stand that, Mr. Charles? Is it do well? No, Sir, that's not it, or it
is not that. Then I do not understand it all, but in part. And you,
Mr Durand, do you understand it? I believe I do not understand it..
Never mind. Who understands it? I. What is its English? (§ 31–1.
Do good. That's right. I see that you understand it. I believe I do.
RECAPITULATORY EXERCISE.-RÉSUMÉ.
L'oiseau a-t-il son grain? Non, il ne l'a pas. Ne le lui donnez-
vous pas tous les matins? Si fait, quand j'y pense; mais aujour
d'hui il n'a pas faim, il ne mange pas, parce qu'il a mal au pied.
-Qui a le pistolet de l'étranger? Personne ne l'a.-Avez-vous les
porte-feuilles de cuir de ces deux matelots? Je n'ai que le porte-
feuille de l'un d'eux. Je ne sais pas qui a celui de l'autre. Est-ce
celui du grand et vieux que vous avez? Non, c'est celui du jeune
et petit que nous avons. N'allez-vous pas le lui rendre? Si fait,
s'il le veut; mais il dit qu'il n'en a pas besoin. N'a-t-il plus d'ar-
gent? Je crois que non; du moins, il n'a plus de billets.-Le bœuf
et le cheval ont-ils leur foin? Oui, ils ont leur foin. Mangent-ils le
foin que vous leur donnez? Ils le trouvent bon, car ils le mangent
bien. Que mangent-ils encore? Ils mangent leur grain.-Qu'a ce
garçon? Lequel? Le bon garçon. Lui? il a toujours quelque
chose de joli.—L'enfant du tailleur a-t-il quelque chose de vieux ou
de vilain? Non, il n'a rien de vieux ni de vilain; mais il a un joli
porte-crayon d'acier.
Qu'avez-vous? Rien.-Qu'a M. Carnot? Il n'a rien.-Qu'a son
frère? Qui le frère de Carnot? Oui, son frère. Il n'a rien.-Ce
jeune homme-là a-t-il faim? Non, il n'a pas faim, car il a du pain,
du fromage, des biscuits, et il n'en mange pas.-Pourquoi faites-
vous cela? Nous avons honte de vous. Quoi! Vous avez honte de
ce que je fais? Nous en avons honte, pour vous. Vous êtes bien
bon, en vérité !-Ils ont soif; avez-vous beaucoup de café ce soir à
leur donner? Je n'en ai guère; mais j'en ai assez pour eux.—Que
pensez-vous de l'habit de ce garçon-là? Il a trop de boutons, n'est-
ce pas? Oui, vous avez raison de le dire, et son gilet n'en a pas
assez. Combien en a-t-il ? Il n'en a que deux, je crois.-Le fermier
n'a-t-il pas de vieux chevaux? Non, il n'en a que de jeunes. Nous
avons faim, avez-vous du pain à nous donner? Je n'ai pas de pain
mais j'ai d'excellents biscuits.-Le jeune étranger a-t-il soif? Je crois
156
THIRTY-FIRST LESSON. (1.)
que oui, car il boit souvent. (§ 170.) Il boit quoi? Un peu de laít,
un peu de vin.
•
J'ai besoin de savon; dites-moi où je puis en trouver de bon?
Vous pouvez en acheter de très-bon chez M..... Où est son
magasin? Dans la rue Chestnut, près de la. Je vous re-
mercie. De rien. N'avez-vous besoin de rien de plus? Non pas
ce matin.—Qui a le gros et grand couteau du cuisinier? En a-t-il
besoin pour tuer quelque chose? Je ne sais pas pourquoi il en a
besoin; mais il le cherche. L'avez-vous? Savez-vous où il peut
le trouver? Non, je n'en sais rien.-Le Hollandais a-t-il quelque
chose à boire? Pourquoi? A-t-il soif? Oui, il a soif, et le Prussien,
l'Irlandais, et l'Écossais ont soif aussi. Donnez-leur du vin, s'ils ont
soif, et de vieux pain, s'ils ont faim.—Ce Suisse n'a pas bon air; est-il
malade? Je ne sais pas, et comme il ne parle ni Anglais ni Français
nous ne pouvons pas parler ensemble. Qu'est-ce qu'il parle? Suisse,
je pense. Quel joli oiseau Mlle. Émilie a!
Qu'est-ce que c'est?
Je n'en sais pas le nom. Chante-t-il? Parle-t-il? N'importe. S'il
est joli, n'est-ce pas assez? C'est beaucoup; mais s'il fait quelque
chose de plus, c'est encore meilleur.
:
Madame Leblanc, je suis bien aise de vous voir. Comment se
porte-t-on chez vous? Tout le monde se porte bien, je vous remercie.
Entrez; venez vous asseoir. Non, je n'ai pas le temps de m'asseoir.
Pourquoi donc ? J'ai à aller chez notre épicier pour acheter beau-
coup de choses. Qu'avez-vous à acheter? Je ne peux pas vous
dire tout, mais en voici le catalogue. Lisez-le, si vous voulez savoir
ce qu'il nous faut.-Voyons. D'abord du beurre. Quoi! n'achetez-
vous pas votre beurre au marché? Si fait, mais quand nous ne
pouvons pas y en trouver de bon, je vais chez cet épicier, où je suis
sûre (fém.) d'en trouver de bon, d'excellent. C'est bon à savoir.
Du sucre blanc, du poivre, des biscuits, du fromage, du vinaigre, du
sel, &c., &c. C'est assez. En vérité, votre catalogue est bien (very)
long. Mais pourquoi n'achetez-vous pas tout cela près de chez
vous? N'y avez-vous pas des épiciers? Si fait, nous en avons,
mais leurs articles ne sont pas aussi bons que ceux de celui chez
qui je vais.
THIRTY-FIRST LESSON, 31st.—Trente et unième Leçon, 31me.
VOCABULAIRE. Ire Section.
OF THE PAST PARTICIPLE.-Du Participe Passê.
The Past Participle is usually placed after the auxiliaries, to have, avoir,
and to be, être, to form the past or compound tenses. The past partic.ples
of regular verbs may be formed by changing the terminations of the iufini-
THIRTY-FIRST LESSON. (1.)
157
3
tive, for the first conjugation into é with the acute accent, thus: parler-
parlé; for the second, into i, thus: finir-fini; for the third, into u,
thus: recevoir reçu; and for the fourth, also into u, thus: vendre―vendu.
Examples:-
PREMIERE CONJUGAISON.
SECONDE CONJUGAISON.
Inf.
P. P.
Inf.
P. P.
Aimer,
to love,
aimé.
Bâtir,
to build,
bâti.
Pleurer,
to weep,
pleuré.
Gémir,
to sigh,
gémi.
Manger,
to eat,
mangé.
Bénir,
to bless,
béni.
Commencer, to begin,
commencé.
Choisir,
to choose,
choisi.
TROISIÈME CONJUGAISON.
QUATRIÈME CONJUGAISON.
Devoir,
to owe, dû.1
Vendre,
to sell,
vendu.
Concevoir, to conceive, conçu.
Rendre,
to render,
rendu.
Recevoir,
to receive, reçu.
Entendre, to hear,
entendu.
Apercevoir,
to perceive, aperçu.
Défendre,
to defend,
défendu.
To be,
been.
Etre,*
été.2
Perfect Tense.
Have you been to market?
I have (been there). I have nɔt.
Have I been there? You have.
Have you been there?
Have you not?
Has he been there?
Has he not?
He has not.
Never.
He has been there.
Ever.
A bridge.
To the iron bridge.
The covered bridge. This wire bridge.
Have you ever been at the bridge?
I have never been there.
Thou hast never been there.
He has never been there.
You have never been there.
Mr. Brunet, have you a catalogue of
the verbs which govern other verbs
with the preposition à? No, Sir,
I have no catalogue of them. Make
one, if you please. Write down in
French: Verbs with the preposi-
tion à. Have you the title now?
Not quite yet, Sir.-Now, I have
it. Read it aloud, if you please.
•
Parfait ou Présent Composé.
Avez-vous été au marché ? 3
J'y ai été.
Y ai-je été ?
Y avez-vous
pas été ?
Y a-t-il été ?
Il y a été.
Jamais.
Un pont.
Je n'y ai pas été.
Vous y avez été.
été ?
N'y avez-vous
N'y a-t-il pas été ?
Il n'y a pas été.
Ne...jamais.
Au pont de fer.
Le pont couvert. Ce pont de fil de fer.
Avez-vous jamais été au pont ?
Je n'y ai jamais été.
Tu n'y as jamais été.
Il n'y a jamais été.
Vous n'y avez jamais été..
M. Brunet, avez-vous un catalogue
des verbes qui en gouvernent
d'autres avec la préposition à?
Non, M., je n'en ai pas de cata-
logue. Faites-en un, s'il vous plaît.
Écrivez en Français: Verbs with
the preposition à. Avez-vous le
titre à présent? Non pas tout-
à-fait encore.A présent, je l'ai.
'It will be perceived, that in the third conjugation it is not oir, but evoir,
which in the past participle must be changed into u. Irregulars hereafter.
2 The pupil, in repeating the irregular verbs already given, must not fail
to mark in his list the past participles of those verbs.
3 Avoir été is used for went and did
go.
14
158
THIRTY-FIRST LESSON. (1.)
Verbes avec la préposition à.
That's it. Now, what is the first
verb of that class which you have
to set down, do you know? Not
yet, Sir. You may find it if you
Sir.-You
look for it. Where can I find it?
In some of the vocabularies. I am
going to look for it. I believe it is
the verb to have, at the 21st vo-
cabulary, 2d section.
Lisez-le haut, s'il vous plaît
Verbes avec la préposition à. C'es'
cela. À présent, quel est le pre-
mier verbe de cette classe (fém.)
que vous avez à écrire ? Le savez-
vous? Non pas encore, M.-Vous
pouvez le trouver, si vous le
cherchez. Où puis-je le trouver ?
Dans quelques uns des vocabu-
laires. Je vais le chercher. Je crois
que c'est le verbe Avoir, au 21me
vocabulaire, 2de section.
TRENTE ET UNIÈME THEME. 1re Sec.
N'oubliez pas le quantième.
Bon jour, Messieurs, il fait chaud, n'est-ce pas ? Pas trop chaudi
Pas aussi chaud qu'au commencement du mois. Vous croyez?
Oui, je le crois, ou plutôt (rather) j'en suis sûr, car le thermomètre
n'est à présent qu'à 78 ou 79 degrés, et au commencement du mois,
il a été (was up) à 81 et 82. Je n'ai rien à dire à cela, vous avez
raison. Mais comment va? Cela va assez bien. Se porte-t-on
bien chez vous? Pas tout le monde. Qui est malade? Jules a
été malade, mais il est mieux à présent, je puis dire presque bien.
Je l'apprends avec plaisir. Jeanne a mal au pied droit, et ne peut pas
sortir; Victor a mal de tête depuis trois jours. Je suis bien fâché
de cela. Ne trouvez-vous pas la poussière bien désagréable? Si
fait, mais comme le temps est couvert, j'espère que nous allons
avoir de la pluie. Je l'espère aussi. Mes amis m'ont dit de vous
présenter leurs compliments, (present their compliments to you.) Je
leur suis très-obligé. Voulez-vous me faire le plaisir de leur pré-
sente: les miens? Sans doute.
Where have you been? I went to the market to buy some fresh
butter. Have you been to the ball? I have. (Dir. 1.)—Did I not
go to the bridge with you? Yes, you did.-Hast thou been to the
play? No, I have not.-Has your oldest son ever been to the thea-
tre? He has never been there, but his young brother has (been
there).-Hast thou already been to my large store? I never was
there, (have never been.)-Do you intend to go there? I do.-When
will you go? I will to-morrow, if I can.- -At what o'clock ?-Why
do you wish to know?-Because I wish to be there, if you come.—
Very well; at 12 o'clock.-Has your good uncle already been in
my large garden? He has not yet been there. He intends to see
it; does he not? I believe he does.-When can he go there? To-
day, may be.-Have you already been to the wire bridge? No, not
yet; but I have been to the covered bridge.-Have you not been to
THIRTY-FIRST LESSON. (1.)
159
the other? Is it possible! No, I have not yet; but I intend to go
soon, if I have time to go.-Go there early in the morning; that is
the best time. I have been somewhere early every morning.
Has your uncle been at the lawyer's office? Yes, he has.-Has
he been to the wharf and museum? He was at the former, but he
has not yet gone to the latter.—Are you not going to take your two
cousins there? No, they have already been there.-Have they
indeed! When did they go? They went yesterday.-Did they g
alone; without you? They did not go alone; we went together.-
How many went together? Five or six.-Has the Italian beeu to
the workshop of the joiner or that of the painter? He has beer.
neither in the one nor in the other, but he has been all the day with
the German dentist.-Is not that German or Prussian dentist in our
parlor now? He has been there, but he is no longer (no more)
there.--When was he (has he been) there? This morning, early.
-Before breakfast? Yes, before breakfast.-Has the son of our
gardener been to market? I believe he is there now. What does
ne intend to do there? He intends first to sell his cabbages and
several other things, and then to buy some chickens, corn, (Dir. 2,)
wine, cheese, and cider. Is that all he has to buy? No, he has
to buy several other articles; but he is going to buy them at the
grocer's. What other articles is he going to buy? Tea, coffee,
sugar, biscuits, cakes, and pepper.
VOCABULAIRE.
Have you already been at the play?
I have already been there, and he too.
You have already been there, have
you not? I have been there seve-
ral times.
I have not yet been there.
Hast thou ever been there alone?
I have neve· been there alone.
Where have we never been?
We have never been at the bridge.
At which bridge has he been?
He was (has been) at the wire one.
We have not yet been there.
Thou hast not yet been there.
You have not yet been there.
He has not yet been there.
Have Julius and Lewis ever been at
the museum? (Did they ever go ?)
They have not yet been there.
Never mind. They may go there
this evening or on Tuesday.
2de Section.
Avez-vous déjà été au spectacle?
J'y ai déjà été, et lui aussi.
Vous y avez déjà été, n'est-ce pas ?
J'y ai déjà été plusieurs fois.
Je n'y ai pas encore été.
Y as-tu jamais été seul?
Je n'y ai jamais été seul.
Où n'avons-nous jamais été ?
Nous n'avons jamais été au pont.
À quel pont a-t-il été ?
Il a été a celui de fil de fer.
Nous n'y avons pas encore été.
Tu n'y as pas encore été.
Vous n'y avez pas encore été.
Il n'y a pas encore été.
Jules et Louis ont-ils jamais été au
musée ?
Ils n'y ont pas encore été.
N'importe. Ils peuvent y aller, s
soir ou mardi.
160
THIRTY-FIRST LESSON. (2.)
Where did you go this morning?
I went to (have been in) the garden.
Where has thy uncle been? (Did he
go?)
He went to the store near the bridge.
Did he go there as early as I?
He was there earlier than you.
Où avez-vous été ce matin ?
J'ai été au jardin.
Où ton oncle a-t-il été ?
Il a été au magasin près du pont.
Y a-t-il été d'aussi bonne heure que
moi ?
Il y a été de meilleure heure que vous
Obs. 74. Été, past participle of the verb être, to be, is in French often
employed for allé, past participle of the verb aller, to go. We say j'as
élé au spectacle, when the meaning is, that I went to the play, and am re-
turned from it; and, il est allé au spectacle, that he is gone to the play, but
is not yet returned. Accordingly it is better to say, in the first and second
persons sing. and plur.: J'y ai été, I have been there; tu y as été, thou hast
been there; nous y avons élé, we have been there; vous y avez été, you
have been there,—than, j'y suis allé, tu y es allé, nous y sommes allés, vous
y êtes allés, when motion is not particularly to be expressed.
To have, to get. Had, got.
Have you had my book?
I have had it. I did get it.
I have not had it.
You have had it.
Who has had it?
Have I had it?
You had it not.
You had it.
I have had it, but I have it no longer.]
Avoir,* 3.
eu.1
Avez-vous eu mon livre ?
Je l'ai eu, (not j'ai l'eu, § 52.)
Je ne l'ai pas eu. L'ai-je eu?
Vous l'avez eu. Vous ne l'avez pas eu.
Qui l'a eu? Vous l'avez eu. (Dir. 8.)
Je l'ai eu, mais je ne l'ai plus.
TRENTE ET UNILME THEME. 2de Sec.
Écrivez la date en Français ici.
Mlle. Clara, je suis bien aise de vous voir. Comment vous êtes-
vous portée (fém.) depuis mardi dernier, jour de notre leçon? Je
me suis très-bien portée, je vous remercie. Je le crois, car vous avez
très-bon air. Comment se porte M. Jean? Jean n'est pas bien du
tout. Alors je pense qu'il ne va pas venir aujourd'hui. Je ne sais
pas, car il aime beaucoup à prendre leçon. Aussi, il apprend bien,
car il étudie aussi bien que possible. Les autres écoliers vont-ils
venir? Pourquoi pas? Il est un peu tard, n'est-ce pas? Il n'est
que 5 heures et 3 minutes. Est-ce tout? n'est-il pas 5 heures et
10? Non, j'ai l'heure exacte. Je crois qu'ils sont ici, à présent. Qui,
c'est vrai, les voici. J'ai l'honneur de vous saluer, Messieurs. Ah!
M. Jean, je suis bien aise de vous voir. Il fait chaud, n'est-ce pas ?
Je trouve qu'il fait agréable. Nous avons un air frais (cool) et agre-
able. Mais le soleil est chaud. M'entendez-vous? Je n'entends
pas tout.
J'entends une partie. Vous entendez le mot: chaud,
n'est-ce pas? Oui, j'entends cela. Que n'entendez-vous pas alors?
Eu. This combination, throughout the verb avoir, sounds like French.
d. See Pronun.)
7
THIRTY-FIRST LESSON. (2.)
161
Un mot au commencement. Est-ce le mot: soleil, que vous n'en
tendez pas? Oui, c'est celui-là. Savez-vous si M. Louis l'entend.
Je crois qu'il ne l'entend pas. Je vais vous en dire l'Anglais. C'est:
the sun.
Entendez-vous la phrase à présent? Oui, parfaitement.
Je peux vous en donner l'Anglais. Faites-le, s'il vous plaît. C'est:
the sun is warm or hot. Très-bien, c'est vrai.
Have you a mind to write, translate, or study an exercise? I have
a mind to translate and write one. (Dir. 2.)—To whom do you wish
to write a note? I wish to write one to my son.-Does he imme-
diately answer your notes, when you write to him? He does.-Do
your brothers answer (reply to) the Swiss's notes? No, they do
not.-Do they not answer them? No; I tell you, no, (que non.)—
Have your uncle and father already been at ...... museum? The
former has, but not the latter.-Why did not the latter go? Because
he has not had time.-Has he time to go there this afternoon?—At
what o'clock? At past 3.—No, he has no time then; for he has
an engagement (un engagement) at. 4.-Never mind; he may go
another day.—When does your cousin set out? He does not set out
yet.—When, then? He does not set out before Monday.-Did you
not go to the iron bridge, yesterday? Yes, we went (have been) to
the iron bridge, near the lawyer's garden.-Is it not a beautiful
bridge? Yes, it is beautiful.-Do you like it as much as the wire
bridge? I like it quite as much.-Did you go to the play, last
night? I? No, I did not go, because I never go.-Who went to the
wharf early this morning? Thomas went there before he break-
fasted. Did you go there together? I did not go with him; he
went there alone.-Why did you not go with him? Because I had
not time to go then.-What have you had to do? I had (have had)
to speak to the gardener.
Has our neighbor been at the theatre as often as we? He has
been there oftener than we.-Do our friend's brothers go to their
counting-house too early? They go too late, sometimes.-Do they
go as late as we? They go later than we.-Has the clerk been as
often as you at the dentist's, to-day? He has been (was) there
oftener than I.-Where do your friends Charles and Thomas re-
main? They remain at home, because it is very warm.-Do they
not go out? They do not go out before past 8 in the evening,
because then it begins to be cool.-Are they sick? No, but they
are afraid of the heat.-Have you had my blue gloves? I have
had them. Have you got them now? No, I have had them, but I
have them no longer. When had you (have had) them? I had
them in the parlor, and I think they are there yet.-Go and get them
14 *
162
THIRTY-SECOND LESSON. (1.)
for me, if you please.-Can you not go yourself? (§ 414.) No; de
you not see that I am very busy? Very well; I am going for them.
-Hast thou had my old umbrella? I have not had it.-Have I had
your English penknife? You had it.—When had I it? (l'ai-je eu?)
—Had you it not yesterday, in the garden, to cut a bouquet? Oh!
yes; that's true. I had it then; but now I do not know where it is.
—Can it not be in your apartment? It may be there.-Who has
had my Russian stick? Nobody has had it; you have had it you.
self. (41)
THIRTY-SECOND LESSON, 32d.—Trente-deuxième Leçon, ɔ2me.
VOCABULAIRE.
1re Section.
Hast thou had?
Thou hast (had).
it).
Has he had?
He has had.
Hast thou had the coat? I have not
Hast thou had it?
Thou hast not (had
As-tu eu?
Tu as eu.
L'as-tu eu?
Tu ne l'as pas eu.
Has he had it?
He has not had it.
A-t-il eu?
L'a-t-il eu?
Il a eu.
As-tu eu
Il ne l'a pas eu.
l'habit?
Je ne l'ai pas
had it.
eu.
Who has had it?
(had it).
The tailor has Qui l'a eu?
Le tailleur l'a eu.
Somebody has had it. Nobody has. Quelqu'un l'a eu. Personne ne l'a eu.
Have you had anything?
I have not had anything, (nothing.)
Have we had? We have not had.
Have we not had? Yes, we have had.
We have had it.
Have the children had the gun?
They have not.
They have had it.
What have they had?
What have you had?
What was the matter with you?
What has been the matter with him?
What has he had?
He has had a headache.
Has anything been the matter with
us?
What have we had?
Have I had anything good?
Have you had the books?
Avez-vous eu quelque chose?
Je n'ai rien eu. (Obs. 4.)
Avons-nous eu? Nous n'avons pas
eu.
N'avons-nous pas eu? Si fait, nous
avons eu. Nous l'avons eu.
Les enfants ont-ils eu le fusil ?
Ils l'ont eu. Ils ne l'ont pas eu.
Qu'ont-ils eu?
} Qu'avez-vous eu?
} Qu'a-t-il eu?
Il a eu mal de tête.
Qu'avons-nous eu?
Ai-je eu quelque chose de bon ?
Avez-vous eu les livres ?
Obs. 75. The French past participle, with: avoir, to have, for auxiliary
must agree with its direct object ($43) in number, when that object comes
first, and only then. If the object is plural, the past participle takes an s.
THIRTY-SECOND LESSON. (1.)
163
I have had them. I have not had them.
Have I had them? You had them.
You have not had (did not get) them.
Has he had them? He had them.
Which gloves have you had? Theirs?
Neither he nor I have had them.
Have you had mine? (obj. after.)
Neither they nor you have had them.
Ilave you had bread? (any.)
I have had some.
Ilave I had any?
I had¹ none.
You had some.
Je les ai eus.
Les ai-je eus ? Vous les avez eus.
Vous ne les avez pas eus.
Les a-t-il eus? Il les a eus.
Je ne les ai pas eus.
Quels gants avez-vous eus? Les
leurs ?
Ni lui ni moi, ne les avons eus.
Avez-vous eu les miens? (obj. après.)
Ni eux ni vous, ne les avez eus.
Avez-vous eu du pain?
J'en ai eu.
En ai-je eu?
Je n'en ai pas eu.
Vous en avez eu.
Obs. 76. The past participle, with avoir, never agrees with its indirecí
object, (§ 44,) even when the object comes first. Consequently, when the
ject, is before the past participle, the
pronour en, which is an indirect
latter does not take an s.
You have not had any.
Has he had any?
Have they had any?
(Dir. 1.)
Who has had any?
some).
What has he had?
nothing.
What did I get?
Vous n'en avez pas eu.
He had none.
En a-t-il eu?
Il n'en a pas eu.
They have.
En ont-ils eu?
Ils en ont eu.
Nous en avons et
We have (had Qui en a eu ?
He (has) had Qu'a-t-il eu?
You got that.
We had somebody. (We have had.)
You have had nobody, (had.)
Qu'ai-je eu?
Il n'a rien eu.
心
​Vous avez eu cela.
Nous avons eu quelqu'un.
Vous n'avez eu personne.
TRENTE-DEUXIÈME THÊME. 1re Sec.
Mettez ici le quantième du mois en Français.
Ah! bon jour, M. George, comment vous êtes-vous porté depuis
que je n'ai eu le plaisir de vous voir? Merci, Mlle., je me suis fort-
bien porté depuis ce temps-là, (time.) Et vous aussi, j'espère? Moi
aussi, merci. Mais, avez-vous été absent? Oui, j'ai été absent
presque dix jours. En vérité! Où avez-vous été ? J'ai été à New
York, dans le Connecticut, et à Providence. Avez-vous eu beaucoup
de plaisir? Oui, beaucoup. Je suis bien aise de l'apprendre. Com-
bien de jours avez-vous été à New York? Je n'y ai été que deux
jours. Ce n'est pas beaucoup.-Avez-vous aussi été deux jours à
Providence? Oui, j'y ai été un peu plus de deux jours. Qu'en
pensez-vous? (How do you like it?) Je l'aime beaucoup.-Y con-
naissez-vous beaucoup de monde? Oui, j'y connais des personnes
¹ Had, alone, in English, is frequently used instead of have had; but in
French, ai eu is used when the action is fully past.
164
THIRTY-SECOND LESSON. (2.)
très-aimables.—A présent que j'y pense, votre ami Jules y a-t-il été
avec vous, comme à l'ordinaire? Non, il n'y a pas été. Qu'avez-
vous eu d'agréable? Beaucoup de choses.
Has your brother had my wooden hammer? He has.-Has he
had my golden, velvet, and satin ribbons? (Dir. 2.) He has had the
first and the second, but not the third.-Have the English had my
beautiful ship? They have had it.-Who has had my thread stock-
ings? Your servants have had them.-Have we had the iron trunk
of our good neighbor? We have had it.-Have we had his fine
pistol? We have not had it.-Have we had the mattresses of
the foreigners? We have not had them.-Has the American had
my good work? He has had it.-Has he had my silver knife? He
has not had it.—Has the young man had the first volume of my
work? He has not had the first, but (mais il a eu) the second.
Has he had it? Yes, Sir, he has had it. When has he had it?
He has had it this morning.-Have you had any sugar? I have had
some.—Have I had any good paper? You have not had any.-Has
the cook of the Russian captain had any chickens? He has had
some. He has had none at all.
Has the Frenchman had good old wine? He has had some, and
he has some yet.—Hast thou had large cakes? I have. Has thy
brother had any? He has not.—Has the farmer's son had any fresh
butter? He has had a great deal, has he not? To be sure, he has.-
Have the Poles had good Spanish segars and tobacco? They have
had some, because they are very fond of smoking and snuffing.—
What tobacco do they usually smoke and snuff? They usually
smoke Turkish and Polish tobacco; but sometimes they have the
best American and Spanish tobacco.-What have the Spaniards
had? They have had fine merino sheep, (de beaux moutons meri-
nos.)-Who has had courage? The American sailors and soldiers.-
Have the Germans had more friends than the Scotch? They have
had less. Has your little son had more toys than his big cousin?
He has had many more.-Have the Turks had more pepper than
corn and tobacco? They have had less of the former than of these.-
Has the Italian painter had anything? He has had nothing at all.-
Who has been at the garden of Carr?
the covered bridge? Yes, that one.
What have you had to do? I have
gardener's son to write notes also? He has had to work in his
father's garden. Have we had to work?
The garden which is near
Many of our friends have.-
had to write notes.-Had the
late and copy. Have the boys sore feet?
No, we have had to trans-
No, they have had sore
feet, but they are well now.-Who has had a sore nose? The little
Russian baker.--Has the tobacco merchant had sore eyes? His
eyes are always sore.
THIRTY-SECOND LESSON (2.)
165
So.
VOCABULAIRE. 2de Section.
So well. Not so often as....
Have you been hungry or cold?
I have been thirsty and warm.
Who has been right, and who wrong?
If John has been wrong, then Julius
has been right.
No, they have both been wrong.
We have been afraid to show any.
To take place. The ball will take
place.
When is the ball in honor of the
President going to take place?
Does the concert take place to-day?
Is the concert to come off to-day?
It takes place. It takes place this
evening.
It does not take place to-day.
When did the grand dinner take place?
It took (has taken) place yesterday.
It has not yet taken place. [had place.]
The day before yesterday.
Where had you a mind to go the day
before yesterday? To Bristol.
How many times? Once, (or one time.)
Twice, (two times.
times)
}
Si. Si bien. Ne....
que...
•
pas si souvent
Avez-vous eu faim ou froid?
J'ai eu soif et chaud.
Qui a eu raison et qui a eu tort?
Si Jean a eu tort, alors Jules a eu
raison.
Non, ils ont l'un et l'autre eu tort.
Nous avons eu peur d'en montrer.
† Avoir lieu. Le bal va avoir lieu.
† Quand le bal en honneur du Prési-
dent va-t-il avoir lieu ?
+ Le concert a-t-il lieu aujourd'hsi?
† Il a lieu. Il a lieu ce soir.
† Il n'a pas lieu aujourd'hui.
† Quand le grand dîner a-t-il eu lieu
† Il a eu lieu hier.
† Il n'a pas encore eu lieu.
Avant-hier.
Où avez-vous eu envie d'aller avant-
hier ?
À Bristol.
Combien de fois ?
Thrice, (three
|
Deux fois.
Many times, a great many times.
Formerly. More than six times.
Has the President a bad cold?
No, he has had one, but he is well
am glad to hear it.
now.
I thought he was sick.
I thought you were in New York.
I thought they were Prussians.
*
I did.
I thought I had your hat.
Did you think you had it?
Did you think you knew your lesson?
Did you think you knew that man?
I thought I did, but I see that I do
not (know him).
Gone. To have gone.
there.
Did you go to the concert of V.?
I went or did go.
Bien des fois.
Autrefois.
Une fois. (adv.)
Trois fois.
Plus de six fois. (162.)
Le Président a-t-il un mauvais
rhume?
Il en a eu un, mais il se porte bien à
présent. J'en suis bien aise.
Je le croyais malade.
Je vous croyais à New York.
Je les croyais Prussiens.
Je croyais avoir votre chapeau.
Croyiez-vous l'avoir ? Je le croyais
Croyiez-vous savoir votre leçon ?
Croyiez-vous connaître cet homme.
là? Je croyais le connaître, mais ja
vois que je ne le connais pas.
être allé,
y être allé.
Allé,
Êtes-vous allé au concert de V.?
To have gone
J'y ai été.
Il y a été.
Qui y est allé?
I did not go,
He went (there.) He did not go (there.)
Who has gone? Who went? Lewis
hag.
Je n'y suis pas allé.
Il n'y est pas alié.
Louis y est allé
100.
THIKTY-SECOND LESSON. (2.)
Has he had a sore arm? He has.
What has been the matter with him?
He had a sore elbow, and he has it
yet.
How many children has the Presi-
dent had? (eus, because the object
precedes.)
He has had three, I believe.
That is to say, that is, (i. e.)
}
A-t-il eu mal au bras? Il y a eu mal
Qu'a-t-il eu ?
Il a eu mal au coude, et il y a encore
mal.
Combien d'enfants le Président a-t-il
eus? (eus, parce que l'objet est
avant.)
Il en a eu trois, je crois.
C'est à dire.
TRENTE-DEUXIÈME THÊME. 2de Sec.
Vous continuez à mettre le quantième, n'est-ce pas ?
Quoi, Madame! vous êtes ici? Je vous croyais à Baltimore. J'y
ai été, M.; mais je suis ici depuis deux jours. Est-il possible! Et
je n'ai pas eu le plaisir de vous voir. Je pense que vous vous por-
tez bien, car vous avez très-bon air. Le Président a-t-il été à Balti-
more? Non, il n'y a pas été. Où est-il allé? Il est allé à Richmond
pour y voir ses meilleurs amis. N'a-t-il pas été malade? Si fait,
il l'a été, mais très-peu. Il a eu un rhume, n'est-ce pas? Oui, au
commencement du mois d'Avril; mais cela n'a pas été grand' chose¹
(much-expression constantly used.) Je le croyais encore malade.
En vérité! Il ne l'est plus, et nous en sommes bien aises.—N'avez-
vous pas eu mal de tête? Si fait, mais cela n'a pas été grand' chose.
A présent, j'ai mal au pied, mais ce n'est pas grand' chose.—Je
croyais avoir votre éventail, Mlle. Sophie, mais je vois que vous
l'avez.—Je l'ai, mais il est à votre service. Merci. Si vous n'avez
plus chaud, prêtez-le-moi un moment, s'il vous plaît. Le voici,
prenez-le. Il est joli et bon. Oh! ce n'est pas grand' chose. En
avez-vous besoin, à présent? Non, je n'en ai pas encore besoin,
vous pouvez en faire usage. Votre cousin a-t-il le cheval du fer-
mier? Nou, le fermier en a eu besoin, lui-même. (§ 414.)
Have the English had as much sugar as tea? They have had as
much of the one as of the other; but they want more sugar than
tea. Has the physician been cold, this evening? No, he has been
warm.-Has he been warm enough? He says that he has been
too warm.-Can that be? Has the Dutchman been right or wrong?
He has been right or wrong.-If he has been right, he has not been
wrong. If he has been wrong, he has not been right.-I believe
you are right when you say that.-To be sure.-Have I been right
¹ Pas grand' chose, not much, no great thing. As chose is feminine,
grand' chose ought to be spelt: grande chose. But as, in pronouncing those
words, the d is not sounded, the French use the apostrophe to show that
the e is suppressed and the d silent. So in: grand' faim, grand' soif, grand'
mère, &c. Grand' chose is always used with a negative.
THIRTY-THIRD LESSON. (1.)
167
!
in writing to my brother? You have not been wrong in writing to
him.-Have you had a sore finger
had a sore finger? I have had a sore eye.-Have
you had anything good? I have had nothing bad.—Did the ball
take place yesterday? It did not take place.-Does it take place
to-day? It takes place to-day.—When does the ball take place? It
takes place this evening.-Did it take place the day before yester-
day? It did take place.-At what o'clock did it take place? It
took place (a eu lieu) at eleven o'clock.-Did you go (Obs. 74) to
my brother's? I went thither.-How often have you been at my
friend's house? I have been there twice.-Do you go sometimes
to the theatre alone? I do, many times.-How many times have
you been at the theatre? I have been there only once.
S-
Have you sometimes been at the ball? I have often been there.
-Has your brother ever gone to the concert? He has never gone
thither. Has your father sometimes gone to the museum? He
went (a été) there formerly.-Did he go as often as you? He went
oftener than I.-Dost thou go sometimes into the small garden? I
go there often; I go every day, two or three times.-Does your old
cook often go to the market? He does, sometimes twice in a day.
-Does he go there oftener than my gardener? He does; for he
goes there to buy, and your gardener to sell.-Has the great supper
in honor of General S————, taken place? Yes, it took place last
Wednesday, that is, the day before yesterday, at 6 o'clock, in the
great saloon of the museum. I went to it. Indeed! I thought you
were at Boston on that day.-Are you hungry sometimes? Yes,
many times. Are you hungry and thirsty in the morning? I am
so, at noon, too, and likewise in the evening.-Are you sometimes
ured in the evening? I am so, when I have been very busy.-Did
you go earlier to your office than the merchant to his counting-
house? I went sooner than he; but the painter went to his work-
shop (laboratory or studio) earlier than he and I.-Do they translate
French into English as well as English into French? No, they do
not.
THIRTY-THIRD LESSON, 333 -Trente-troisième Leçon, 33me.
PERFECT TENSE.-Parfait ou Présent Composé.
Le Parfait is formed as the perfect tense is in English, viz: from the
present of the auxiliary and the past participle. ($145 to be carefully
studied.)
¹ On. Never translate the preposition on, when connected with a day
or date.
168
LESSON. (1.)
THIRTY-THIRD
Perfect. I have studied this day.
I have studied this month.
Columbus has discovered
America.
Imperfect. I studied yesterday.
I studied last month.
J'ai étudié aujourd'hui.
J'ai étudié ce mois-ci.
Colomb a découvert l'Amerique.
J'ai étudié hier.
J'ai étudié le mois dernier.
Columbus discovered Ame-Colomb a découvert l'Amérique
rica in the year 1492.
To make, to do. Made, done.
What have you done?
I have done nothing-bad.
Has that shoemaker made my shoes?
He has.
He has not.
He made some. He did not make any.
No (nominative) No man has. (§ 171,
R. 6.)
dans l'année 1492.
Faire.*
fait. (311)
Qu'avez-vous fait ?
Je n'ai rien fait-de mal.
Ce cordonnier a-t-il fait mes souliers?
Il les a faits. Il ne les a pas faits.
Il en a fait. Il n'en a pas fait.
Aucun...ne (sujet.) Aucun homme
n'a.
No (objective) before a noun. ($171, Ne... aucun (objet.) (avant un nom.)
R. 5.)
I have done no ill or evil.
I have been to no bridge.
Has the tailor any of my clothes?
He has none. None. ($171, R. 5.)
To put, to put on. Put, put on.
Have you put on your shoes?
I have (put them on).
I have put some on.
on.
I have not.
I have put none
Did we not take off our gloves?
Yes, we took them off, and our vests
also.
Take off your coat if it is wet.
To tell, to say.
Told, said.
Have you said the word? the words?
I have.
Have you told me the word?
I have told you the word.
Je n'ai fait aucun mal.
Je n'ai été à aucun pont.
Le tailleur a-t-il aucun de mes habits?
Il n'en a aucun.
Mettre.*
•
N en aucun.
·
Mis. (31.¹)
Avez-vous mis vos souliers ?
Je les ai mis. Je ne les ai pas mis
J'en ai mis. Je n'en ai mis aucun
N'avons-nous pas ôté nos gants?
Si fait, nous les avons ôtés, et nos
gilets aussi.
Ôtez votre habit s'il est mouillé.
Dire.*
Dit.
Avez-vous dit le mot ? les mots ?
Je l'ai dit.
Je les ai dits.
M'avez-vous dit le mot ?
Je vous ai dit le mot.
I have told it to you, (or told you of it Je vous l'ai dit.
That, (meaning that thing.)
This, (meaning this thing.)
That is the very thing.
Has he told you that?
He told me this.
What have you told them?
Have you told them nothing?
We have told them neither this nor
that.
Have they told you anything?
They have told us nothing.
To whom have they told that ?
They have said it to nobody.
Cela. (38, N. 4.)
Ceci.
C'est cela même.
Vous a-t-il dit cela?
Il m'a dit ceci.
Que leur avez-vous dit?
Ne leur avez-vous rien dit?
Nous ne leur avons dit ni ceci ni
cela.
Vous ont-ils dit quelque chose?
Ils ne nous ont rien dit.
À qui ont-ils dit cela?
Ils ne l'ont dit à personne.
THIRTY-THIRD LESSON. (1.)
169
TRENTE-TROISIÈME THÊME. 1re Sec.
Vous continuez à mettre le quantième, n'est-ce pas ?
Qu'avez-vous fait ce matin? Nous avons fait notre devoir.—Quel
devoir avez-vous fait ? Nous avons fait celui que vous nous avez
donné à faire. L'avez-vous tous fait? Je sais que j'ai fait le mien:
je crois que Charles et Henri ont fait les leurs, mais je ne peux pas
vous dire si Guillaume a fait le sien.-Le tien est-il fait, Guillaume?
Le mien? sans doute, il est fait. Tous vos devoirs sont donc faits.
-Alors, asseyez-vous tous, et comme vous avez fait vos devoirs,
nous pouvons commencer. M. Jules, quel est le parfait du verbe:
donner? C'est: j'ai donné, n'est-ce pas ? C'est cela même. Com-
ment l'épelez-vous? Je ne vous entends pas, M. Quoi! vous n'en-
tendez pas: épelez-vous? Non, je ne l'entends pas. Et toi, Guillaume,
l'entends-tu? Moi, non plus, (I neither, or neither do I, § 162, R. 9.)
Et vous, Messieurs, ne l'entendez-vous pas non plus? (do you not
understand it either?) Non, nous, non plus.—Qui l'entend ici? Au
cun de nous ne l'entend. Quoi! Aucun de vous ne sait l'Anglais
de: épeler? Épeler? Non, aucun de nous ne le sait. Ne vous ai-je
pas donné le Français de: to spell? Non, M., vous ne nous l'avez
pas encore donné. Je croyais vous l'avoir donné l'autre jour. Non,
nous ne l'avons pas encore eu. Mais vous le savez à présent, n'est-
ce pas? Je pense que c'est le mot que vous avez dit, n'est-ce pas ?
C'est cela même. Prononcez-le encore, si'l vous plaît. Volontiers:
Epeler. De quelle conjugaison est-il? De la première, parce qu'il
finit en er. Très-bien, c'est cela même. Alors quel est l'Anglais
de: Comment l'épelez-vous? C'est: how do you spell it? C'est
cela même. À present; répondez à ma question: Comment épe-
lez-vous: j`ai donné? J' (apostrophe) a, i, d, o, n, n, é, avec un accent
aigu. Comment formez-vous le participe passé de donner? Je
change la terminaison, er, en é.
•
Have you anything to do? I have nothing to do. What hast
thou done? I have done nothing.-Have I done anything? You
have done something.-What have I done? You have torn my
books. What have your children done? They have torn their
clothes. What have we done? You have done nothing, but your
brothers have burnt their copy-books.-Has the tailor already made
your coat? He has not yet made it.-Has your shoemaker already
made your shoes? He has already made them-Have you some-
times made a hat? I have never made one.-Have our neighbors
ever made books? They made (—ont fait) some formerly.― How
many blue coats has your tailor made? He has made twenty or
thirty.--Has he made good or bad coats? He has made (both) good
•
15
170
THIRTY-THIRD LESSON. (2.)
and bad. Has your father put on his coat? He has not yet put it
on, but he is going to put it on.
Has your brother put his shoes on? He has put them on.-Put
on your shoes and stockings. (Dir. 2.) We are going to put on
neither, (ni ceux-ci ni ceux-là.)-What has the physician taken
away? He has taken away nothing.-What have you taken off?
I have taken off my large hat.-Have your children taken off their
gloves? They have taken them off.-When did the ball take place ?
It took place the day before yesterday. Who has told you that?
My servant has told me of it.--What has your brother told you?
He has told me nothing.-Did I tell you that? You did not tell me
of it. Has he told it you? He has told it me.--Who told your
neighbor of it? The English have told him of it.-Have they told
it to the French? They have told them of it.-Who has told it to you?
(or you of it?) Your son has (told me of it).-Has he told it to you?
He has told me of it.-Are you willing to tell that to your friends?
I am willing to tell them of it.
VOCABULAIRE. 2de Section.
Have you told it to me? (or me of it?)|
I have not.
I did not.
He has told it to me, (or he told me.)
He did not tell me, (or me of it.)
Have you told (did you tell) him that?
I have. I did.
I have not. I did not (tell him so).
What have I told you?
You told me that John is sick.
You did not tell me anything.
Did I say so to you? (tell you that ?)
Yes, you did.
You did not.
Did we say so to you? (tell you so ?)
You said so to us, (told us of it.)
You did not say so to us.
What did you tell us? (to us?).
What did you tell him? (to him ?)
I told you that your horse has a sore
foot.
I told them that you are here.
I told him but a word.
You have told him of it.
You told us of it.
You did not tell them (of it).
Did any one tell you of it?
Somebody did.
Nobody did
Me l'avez-vous dit? ($ 57.)
Je ne vous l'ai pas dit.
| Il me l'a dit.
Il ne me l'a pas dit.
Lui avez-vous dit cela ?
Je le lui ai dit.
Je ne le lui ai pas dit..
Que vous ai-je dit?
Vous m'avez dit que Jean est malade.
Vous ne m'avez rien dit.
Vous l'ai-je dit!
Oui, vous me l'avez dit.
Vous ne me l'avez pas dit.
Vous avons-nous dit cela!
Vous nous l'avez dit.
Vous ne nous l'avez pas dit.
Que nous avez-vous dit?
Que lui avez-vous dit?
Je vous ai dit que votre cheval a ma
au pied.
Je leur ai dit que vous êtes ici.
Je ne lui ai dit qu'un mot.
Vous le lui avez dit.
Vous nous l'avez dit.
Vous ne le leur avez pas dit.
Quelqu'un vous l'a-t-il dit?
Quelqu'un me l'a dit,
Personne ne me l'a dit.
THIRTY-THIRD LESSON. (2.)
171
Who told them ?
Have you told them of it?
I have.
I did.
Qui le leur a dit ?
Le leur avez-vous dit?
Je le leur ai dit.
Have you told them the words they Leur avez-vous dit les mots qu'ils
wish to know?
I did. I have (told them to them).
He told them to me, to us.
He has not told them to you, to thee.
Have you spoken to the men?
I have spoken to them.
To whom did you speak?
I spoke to no one.
veulent savoir ?
Je les leur ai dits.
Il me les a dits.
Il nous les a dits.
Il ne vous les a pas dits, (ne te les.)
Avez-vous parlé aux hommes?
Je leur ai parlé.
A qui avez-vous parlé ?
Je n'ai parlé à personne.
Obs. 77. The pronoun le, which is sometimes rendered into English by
so, and very frequently omitted, may in French relate to a substantive, an
adjective, or even a whole sentence. It changes neither its gender nor num
ber when it relates to an adjective or a whole sentence. (292, Obs. 70.)
Are you the brothers of my friend?
We are. (We are so we are they.)
Are they rich? They are not.
Are those men learned?
They are.
They are not.
Are you and your friend fatigued?
I am not, but he says he is.
Is he so indeed? He says he is.
Are our neighbors as poor as they
say (they are)? They are.
I believe they are not.
Did your brother speak yesterday?
I do not know. He says he did.
Etes-vous les frères de mon ami?
Nous les sommes.
Sont-ils riches? Ils ne le sont pas.
Ces hommes sont-ils savants?
Ils le sont.
Ils ne le sont pas.
Vous et votre ami, êtes-vous fatigués?
Je ne le suis pas, mais il dit qu'il l'est.
L'est-il, en vérité ? Il le dit.
Nos voisins sont-ils aussi pauvres
qu'ils le disent? Ils le sont.
Je crois qu'ils ne le sont pas.
Votre frère a-t-il parlé hier ?
Je ne le sais pas.
TRENTE-TROISIÈME THÊME. 2de Sec.
Mettez la date en Français.
Il le dit.
Avez-vous parlé à votre maître? Oui, je lui ai parlé. Où est-il ?
Il est dans son appartement. Pourquoi n'en sort-il pas ? Il est ma-
lade. Est-il bien (very) malade? Non; mais il l'est trop pour
donner des leçons aujourd'hui. Le médecin lui a-t-il donné quelque
chose à prendre? Oui, il lui a donné quelque chose. Que lui a-t-il
donné? Je ne sais pas ce qu'il lui a donné. Est-il au lit? (in bed?)
Non, il n'est pas au lit, il est dans son grand fauteuil. Son fauteuil?
Qu'est-ce que c'est? (What is that?) N'en savez-vous pas l'Anglais↑
Non, en vérité. Votre maître ne vous en a-t-il pas dit l'Anglais '
Non, je suis sûr qu'il ne me l'a jamais dit. Charles, ne vous l'a-t-il
pas dit? Lui, non plus.-Eh! bien, je vais vous le dire. C'est:
arm-chair. Fauteuil: Arm-chair? Est-il possible? C'est très-pos-
sible, car c'est cela même. C'est tout-à-fait différent (different) de
"'Anglais. C'est vrai, vous avez raison.
172
THIRTY-THIRD LESSON. (3.)
Have you spoken to my father? I have.-When did you?
spoke to him the day before yesterday.-How many tinies have you
spoken to the captain? To which captain? To the French, no, no,
I do not mean the French, but the Greek. I have not spoken to the
Greek captain; I do not know a Greek one; bu: 1 have spoken to
the American.-How many times have you spoken to him? I spoke
to him many times.-Have you ever spoken to his son? I have,
often.-To which strangers has your young cousin spoken? He has
spoken to these and to those.-To these three and those four? Yes,
to them all, (à tous, ou à eux tous.)—Are you the brother of that
handsome young man, (ce beau garçon, is as often used as: ce beau
jeune homme.)—Is that other young man the minister's cousin? That
one or this? That one. No, that one is not; but this one is.-I wish
to speak to him. Have you never done it? No, never. And I
neither. Are your friends as busy as they say? They are (so).-
Are the carpenters as tired as they think? I believe they are..
.
Is the valet tired because he sweeps the stores? He is.-Does he
sweep them often? He does it as often as he can.-Has the Pole
money enough to buy wood or coal? I believe he has not got any.
Give him this three dollar note.-Is the dentist at home? No, he
has gone to the wire bridge. Has your old cook gone to market?
No, he has gone to bed instead of going to market. Is he ill? (ma-
lade?) He is not ill, but only tired.-Is he very tired? He is,
because he made a great dinner in honor of the uncle of the French
minister. Who is ill? I do not know who is. I am not.-Are you
as tall (grand) as I? I am.-Is your son much taller than you? He
is. Are these young men clerks? They are.-Are you as busy as
your brother? I am more so than he.-Do you know the name of
the English minister? No, I do not.-Does Thomas know it? He
neither. Has not Lewis told it to you? No, he did not.-Did he
not tell it to your uncle? I do not know if he has told it to him.-
To whom has he told it? He has told it neither (§ 56, § 64) to him,
nor to them, nor to you, nor to me, nor to anybody.
VOCABULAIRE. 3me Section.
•
To write,
written.
Which notes have you written?
Écrire,*
écrit. (Obs. 75.)
Quels billets avez-vous écrits?
I have written these.
Which words has he written?
He has written those which you see.
To drink,
drunk.
J'ai écrit ceux-ci.
Quels mots a-t-il écrits ?
Il a écrit ceux que vous voyez.
bu.
To see,
To read,
To be acquainted with,
quainted with.
Boire,*
seen.
Voir,*
read.
Lire,*
been ac-
Connaître,*
vu.
lu.
copnu.
THIRTY-THIRD LESSON. (3.)
173
Which men have you seen?
I have seen those.
Which books have you read?
I have read those which you have
lent me.
Quels hommes avez-vous vus?
J'ai vu ceux-là.
Quels livres avez-vous lus?
J'ai lu ceux que vous m'avez prêtés
Have you been acquainted with these Avez-vous connu ces hommes ? J
men?
I have not.
Which ones have you known?
Have you seen any sailors?
I have seen some.
I have not seen any.
ne les ai pas connus.
Lesquels avez-vous connus ?
Avez-vous vu des matelots ?
J'en ai vu.
Je n'en ai vu tucun. (32¹, Obs. 76.)
To call, to name, (not to call at, upon.) | Appeler,1.
To throw, throw away-them-some.
To call at, upon.
Call on me.
Do you call me?
I do not call you..
i.
Passer, 1, chez. Passez chez moi.
Jeter, 1. Les jeter, en jeter.
M'appelez-vous? Je vous appelle.
Je ne vous appelle pas.
Obs. 78. In verbs ending in eler and eter, as appeler, to call; jeter, to
throw; the letter l or t is doubled in all persons or tenses where it is fol-
lowed by e mute.¹
Who calls me?
Your father calls you.
Have you called the men?
I have called them.
Do you throw your money away?◄
I do not throw it away.
Who throws away his books?
Have you thrown away anything?
I have thrown away my gloves.
Have you thrown them away?
Qui m'appelle ?
Votre père vous appelle.
Avez-vous appelé les hommes ?
Je les ai appelés.
Jetez-vous votre argent?
Je ne le jette pas.
Qui jette ses livres ?
Avez-vous jeté quelque chose ?
J'ai jeté mes gants.
Les avez-vous jetés?
TRENTE-TROISIÈME THEME. 3me Sec.
Vous mettez le quantième ici, n'est-ce pas ?
Bon jour, mon cher Monsieur, j'espère que vous vous portez bien.
Oui, Dieu merci, je me porte parfaitement bien. J'en suis bien aise,
j'en suis charmé. Savez-vous que nous attendons le professeur
grec?-Va-t-il passer chez vous ce matin? Il va passer ici, nous
l'attendons à 9 heures. J'en suis charmé; car, j'ai grande envie do
le connaître. Ne le connaissez-vous pas encore? Non, je n'ai pas
encore eu le plaisir de le voir. Comment l'appelez-vous? Je ne
sais pas son vrai nom, mais je l'appelle Miaulitz.-Comment épelez-
vous son nom? Je l'épelle M, i, a, u, l, i, t, z—mais je ne sais pas
s'il l'épelle comme cela. N'importe, s'il vous répond quand vous
'appelez comme-ça. Mais, à présent que j'y pense, parle-t-il Fran-
•
1 Custom, however, does not observe this rule with regard to the verb
acheter, to buy, and its compound, racheter, to redeem, to buy again. (25¹.)
15*
174
THIRTY-THIRD LESSON. (3.)
çais? Sans doute. Il le parle bien pour un étranger. Il parle aussi
Lalien, allemand, et un peu Anglais. Il est donc savant? Oui, il
l'est. N'est-il pas encore neuf heures? Non, pas tout-à-fait. Je
pense que comme il est professeur, il est ponctuel. Je le pense
aussi; et comme il est près de l'heure, je pense qu'il vient et qu'il
est en chemin. N'entendez-vous pas quelqu'un? (30².) Si fait,
j'entends quelqu'un. Est-ce lui, croyez-vous? Oui, c'est lui-
même. (§41.) Voyez. Ah! il est bien grand, n'est-ce pas ?
What have you to tell me? I have to tell you to call ou Professor
C-Does he wish to see me? He does.-What does he want
with me? '(me veut-il?) I do not know what he wants with you;
he did not tell it to me. When? Immediately after breakfast.—
Does he breakfast early? He finishes usually at of 7 o'clock.-
Which exercises has your friend written? He has written those.—
Which men have you seen at the wharf? I have seen these.—
Which books have your children read? They have read those
which you have lent them.-Have you seen these strangers or those ?
I have neither seen these nor those.--Which strangers have you
seen? I have seen those to whom (à qui) you have spoken.—Have
you been acquainted with these men? I have been acquainted with
them.—With which boys has your brother been acquainted? He
has been acquainted with those of our merchant.-Have I been
acquainted with these Frenchmen? You have not been acquainted
with them. Which wine has your servant drunk? He has drunk
mine.-Have you seen my brother's pretty little cousins? I have.--
Where have you seen them? I have seen them at their own house,
(chez eux.)—Have you ever seen Greeks? I have never seen any.
(Obs. 76.)—Has your father seen any? He has sometimes seen
some. Do you call me?
call me? I do call you.-Who calls your brother?
My father calls him.-Dost thou call any one? I call no one.-Have
you thrown away your hat? I have not thrown it away.-Does your
father throw away anything? He throws away the notes which he
has read, if they are not important, (importants.)—Have you thrown
away your pencils? I have not thrown them away, for I want
them. (232)-Dost thou throw away thy book? I do not throw it
away; I want it to (pour) study French.-Do you translate and write
three exercises every day? No; I translate and write only one. but
study an ad several.
:
<
THIRTY-FOURTH LESSON. (1.).
175
THIRTY-FOURTH LESSON, 34th.-Trente-quatrième Leçon, 34me.
VOCABULAIRE. 1re Section.
INFINITIFS.
PARTICIPES PASSÉS IRRÉGULERS.
To extinguish,
Eteindre.*
Extinguished,
éteint.
To open,
Ouvrir.*
Opened,
To conduct,
Conduire.*
Conducted,
To take,
To believe,
Prendre.*
Taken,
ouvert.
conduit.
pris.
Croire.*
Believed,
cru.
To be able, (can,) Pouvoir.*
To know,
To be willing,.
Savoir.*
Been able, (could,)
Known,
Been willing.
pu.
su.
voulu.
Obs. 79.
Vouloir.*
NEUTER VERBS.-Verbs Neutres ou Intransitifs.
See (§ 158, and Art. 1, &c.) and study it carefully.
Those neuter verbs which are conjugated with the auxiliary,
être, in French, and to have, in English, will be marked thus, °.
To set out,
To go out,
To come,
Partir.*
Sortir.*
Venir.*
Has your father set out?
Have your friends set out?
They have not set out.
When did your brothers go out?
They went out at ten o'clock.
Did the men come to your father's
and to your uncle's?
They did.
Which fires have you extinguished?
Which storehouses have you opened,
and which shut? (have you.)
Have you conducted them to the
storehouse and to the office?
I have.
Which books have you taken ?
How
many notes have you received?
I received but one.
The same.
This secretary.
The same jewel.
This scrutoire.
The secretary of the minister.
Upon, on, the scrutoire (writing desk.)
The bench.
Upon that bench.
Set out, departed,
Gone out,
Come,
Votre père est-il parti?
Vos amis sont-ils partis?
Il ne sont pas partis.
partie.
sorti⚫.
venu
Quand vos frères sont-ils sortis?
Ils sont sortis à dix heures.
Les hommes sont-ils venus chez
votre père et chez votre oncle ?
Ils y sont venus.
Quels feux avez-vous éteints?
Quels magasins avez-vous ouverts,
et lesquels avez-vous fermés ?
Les avez-vous conduits au magasin
et au bureau ?¨
Je les y ai conduits.
Quels livres avez-vous pris?
Combien de billets avez-vous reçus ?
Je n'en ai reçu qu'un.
Le même. Les mêmes. Le même bijou.
Ce secrétaire.
Le secrétaire du ministre.
Sur le secrétaire.
Le banc. Sur ce banc-là.
TRENTE-QUATRIÈME THÊME. 1re Sec.
N'oubliez pas d'écrire la date en Français.
Quel vilain temps nous avons, n'est-ce pas? Oui, nous avons un
emps très-désagréable. Il pleut trop; il fait trop humide, et le
temps est malsain. Quelqu'un est-il malade chez vous? Non,
176
THIRTY-FOURTH LESSON. (1.)
Dieu merci, tout le monde se porte bien; mais presque tous ont été
malades. Qu'ont-ils eu? Non pas le choléra, j'espère! Non, pas
le choléra. Quoi donc ? L'un a eu le tic douloureux, l'autre mal
aux dents; celui-ci a eu un violent mal de tête, celui-là quelqu'au-
tre chose, en un mot ils ont presque tous été malades. Je suis
charmé d'apprendre qu'ils se portent bien à présent. Quand avez-
vous vu votre ami le jeune secrétaire du général? Je l'ai yu avant-
hier. Comment l'appelez-vous? Je l'appelle Lucien. Lucien est
le nom d'un des fières de Napoléon, n'est-ce pas? Oui, ce l'est. Je
sais le nom à présent. Est-il ici encore, ou est-il parti? Parti pour
où? Je le croyais à Boston. Le général n'y est-il pas allé ? Non,
le général est malade, au lit. Ne sort-il pas? Non, en vérité.
Qu'a-t-il? Le médecin dit que c'est la goutte, (gout.)
Where are your cousins gone to? They have gone to the bridge.—
Have your friends left? (partis?) They have not yet left. When
do they set out? This evening.-Early or late? At what o'clock?
At half past nine.-When did the French boys come to your
brother's? They came there the day before yesterday.—Did they
come alone, or did their friends come also? They came also.—
Has any one come to see us? The Swiss came.-Who came to the
Englishman's office? The French did.-When did you drink any
German wine? We never drank any.-Did you not drink some the
day before yesterday and to-day, at the secretary's house? Is the
wine that we drank there German wine? To be sure it is.-Then
German wine is very good.—Has the big servant carried my notes?
He has.-Where did he carry them? He carried one to the law-
yer's office, the other to the merchant's counting-house.-Did you
not cany a pocket-book to the captain's? Yes, I did carry there
that which you gave me to carry.—Which papers has the gardener's
son brought here? Did he bring any (aucun) here? Yes, he
brought here those which you lent to his father. Where has he put
them? I have not seen them.-I believe he gave them to Jacob,
who has put them in the secretary, or under it, in the parlor.
Which books has the clerk taken? He has taken the one which
you do not read, and those which you have read.-Have the
clerks opened the stores? They have.-Which did they open?
They opened those you have seen, under the lawyer's offices.-
When did they open them? They did early in the morning.—Did
they shut them last night? No, the servants did.-Do they shut
them every night, and open them every morning? They do.-
Why did they not open them this morning? Because they are busy
on the vessel, at the wharf.-Did Jacob conduct the foreigners to
the museum? He did.-Did he not conduct them to the wire
=
THIRTY-FOURTH LESSON. (2.)
177
bridge also? He did not, but he intends to conduct them there very
soon. Has the cook extinguished the fires? He has not yet extin-
guished them.—Who has extinguished the parlor fire? The Irish
servant has.-Have you received any (aucun) bench, sofa, and
arm-chair? We have received some-Has your brother received
his? He has not received them; but our friends have received
theirs.
VOCABULAIRE. 2de Section.
Upon it. The shawl is upon it.
Under. Under the writing-desk.
Under it, (underneath.)
Dessus (adv.) Le châle est dessus.
Sous 'prép.) Sous le secrétaire.
Dessous (adv.)
Where are my velvet and satin hats? Où sont mes chapeaux de velours et
They are upon the sofa.
Are my kid gloves on it also?
No, they are under. I see them.
To learn how, learned how.
Do you learn how to read and count?
I do learn how to do both.
Have you learned how to speak?
I have learned how, (or it.)
Gone. Have they gone?
In the stove. In it or within.
To get or have...mended.
had...mended.
mended. Got or
de satin ?
Ils sont sur le sofa.
Mes gants de chamois y sont-ils aussi?
Non, ils sont dessous. Je les vois.
Apprendre à, appris à.
Apprenez-vous à lire et à compter ?
J'apprends l'un et l'autre.
Avez-vous appris à parler?
Je l'ai appris.
Allé.
Sont-ils allés?
Dans le poêle. Dedans (adv.)
† Faire raccommoder.
mmoder.
Fait racco
To wash. To have... washed. Got Laver. † Faire laver. Fait laver,
washed.
To get...made, (bespeak,) have...
made.
To have... swept. Got... swept.
To get... sold. Had... sold.
+ Faire faire.
Fait faire.
† Faire balayer.
Fait balayer.
† Faire vendre. Fait vendre.
Obs. 80. The two French verbs come together, while the English verba
are separated by some noun.
To get the coat mended.
To have it mended.
'To get them mended.
To get some mended.
Are you getting a coat made? (do
you order or bespeak a coat?)
I am getting one made, (I order one.)
I have had one made.
+ Faire raccommoder l'habit.
+ Le faire raccommoder.
† Les faire raccommoder.
+ En faire raccommoder.
† Faites-vous faire un habit?
† J'en fais faire un.
+ J'en ai fait faire un.
Has he had his handkerchief washed? † A-t-il fait laver son mouchoir ?
He has had it washed.
He did not get it washed.
I have had my shoes mended.
I have had them mended.
To wipe, wiped.
+ Il l'a fait laver.
† 11 ne l'a pas fait laver.
† J'ai fait raccommoder mes souliers.
† Je les ai fait raccommoder.
Essuyer, 1, essuyć. (§144, R. 3.)
178
THIRTY-FOURTH LESSON. (2.)
I wipe, thou wipest, he wipes.
Have you not seen my book?
Yes, I have put it away for you.
When did you see my brother?
I saw him last evening at the bridge.
Where did you see my cousins?
I saw them at the museum.
J'essuie, tu essuies, il essuie.
N'avez-vous pas vu mon livre?
Si fait, je l'ai serré pour vous.
Quand avez-vous vu mon frère ?
Je l'ai vu hier soir au pont.
Où avez-vous vu mes cousins?
Je les ai vus au musée.
TRENTE-QUATRIÈME THÊME. 2de Sec.
Où est le châle de velours de Mlle. Clara? Il est sur le sofa,
n'est-ce pas? Ne l'y voyez-vous pas ? Ses gants de fil sont-ils des-
sus aussi? Non, ils sont sous le banc. Dessous! avez-vous dit?
Oui, c'est-ce que j'ai dit. Qui les a mis dessous? Je ne sais pas
en vérité. Ramassez-les donc vite, et mettez les sur le sofa avec
son châle.-Comme son chapeau de satin est sur le grand fauteuil
de cuir, je vais mettre ses gants de fil dedans et son châle sur le
dos du fauteuil. Très-bien, faites-le. Mes souliers sont-ils sur le
banc? Non, ils sont dessous. Je les ai mis dessus: Qui les a mis
dessous? Moi. C'est moi qui les ai mis dessous. Je vous remercie.
De rien. (26.)-Le charbon est-il dans le coin ou sous le banc? Il
est dans le poêle.-Avez-vous mis du bois dedans? Oui, d'abord,
j'ai mis du bois dedans, ensuite j'y ai mis du feu pour l'allumer, et
après cela du charbon. Brûle-t-il? Oui, le bois et le charbon brû-
lent bien. Nous avons bon feu. Si vous avez froid, mettez-vous
près du poêle. Je n'ai pas grand froid. J'ai vu un peu de bois daug
un coin, est-il tout dans le poêle? Il est dedans et brûlé. Où sont
mes journaux? Je les ai ôtés de dessus le poêle, parce que je n'ai pas
voulu les brûler. Les avez-vous mis sur le secrétaire? Non, ils sont
dessous. Avez-vous envoyé votre petit garçon au marché? Je n'ai
pas voulu l'y envoyer.-Pourquoi n'avez-vous pas voulu l'y envoyer?
Je n'ai pas voulu l'y envoyer, parce qu'il a été un peu malade.
Qu'a-t-il eu? Il a eu un violent mal de tête. Avez-vous écrit à votre
oncle, l'apothicaire? Je lui ai déjà écrit.—Vous a-t-il répondu ? Il
ne m'a pas répondu.-Vous a-t-il envoyé l'argent que vous voulez?
Il ne me l'a pas encore envoyé.-Avez-vous déjà fait faire un habit?
Je n'en ai pas encore fait faire.-Avez-vous fait faire un gilet? Je
n'en ai pas fait faire. N'avez-vous rien fait faire? Non, tien, parce
que je veux avoir mon argent avant de faire faire quelque chose.
Are you getting your floor swept? I am.-Have you had your
office swept? I have not yet had it swept, but I intend to have it
swept to-day. Have you the same servant? The same! No, in
deed, we have not the same. We have changed several times, (en,
§ 50.)—But you have the same cook; have you not? Yes, we have
the same yet. Have you wiped your feet? I have. Where did
THIRTY-FIFTH
179
LESSON. (1.)
you wipe them? I wiped them on the old carpet. Have you had
your benches, your sofas, and arm-chairs wiped? I have (had them
wiped).—What does your little valet wipe? He wipes the big and
small knives.-Have you ever seen a Syrian? I have already seen
two or three.-Have you ever shown one to your cousin? I have
already shown him one at the museum.-Has he ever seen a Turk?
He saw one before I did, (moi.)—Have you ever lent anything to
anybody? Yes, indeed, I have many times lent something to a
great many persons, (beaucoup de monde.)-Does the joiner's son
know how to read? He does.-Is he learning how to write? No,
he does not; he is too young yet to learn how to write.
When is the great caucus going to take place? It has already
taken place. Did you go? I did not.-Miss Charlotte wishes to
know if Mrs. B—'s concert has taken place? It took place last
Tuesday. Did the gentlemen go to it? They did.-Have we yet
the same milkman? Yes, we have the same. We have not
changed, (en,) because his milk is good, and he is puncti al; but
we have neither the same baker, nor the same butcher, nor the
same grocer.-Does the lawyer get his office washed? Yes, he
gets it washed every Saturday.-Get yours washed to-day; will
you? No, I cannot get it washed to-day; I am too busy, I have too
much to write.-Hast thou ever had thy shoes mended? I have
sometimes had them mended.-Has the little Dutchman had his
vessel sold? He had it sold last Wednesday.-Why has he had it
sola! He had it sold because he is going to California.-Have his
cousins gone there? Yes, they have.
!
THIRTY-FIFTH LESSON, 35th.-Trente-cinquième Leçon, 35me.
VOCABULAIRE. 1re Section.
promised.
To promise,
(Promettre est comme son primitif,
mettre.)
To promise some one to come.
To compose, to compound, composed.
Compound Tenses.
Thus, so.
1
Promettre,* 4, promis, (prend. a
avant le nom; de, avant l'inf.)
Promettre à quelqu'un de venir.
Composer, 1, composé.
Les Temps composés. Ainsi.
Obs. 81. Les verbes composés sont conjugués comme les primitifs. Ainsi,
Promettre est comme mettre; Apprendre, comme prendre. (24³, 25¹,
93¹, 342.)
To forget, forgotten, forget, (impera.) | Oublier, 1. Oublié. Oubliez, (impér.)
I forgot to take that to the dentist.
de avant l'inf.
J'ai oublié de porter tela au dentiste.
180
THIRTY-FIFTH LESSON. (1.)
How?
So, so.
In this manner, (way.) Like that.
Do you promise me to come?
I do promise you.
What have you promised the man?
I have not promised him anything.
Have you ever learned French?
I learned it formerly.
To wear out.
To refuse.
To spell.
How has your brother written his
exercise? He has written it well.
To put to dry,
put to dry.
Do you put your vest to dry?
I have already put it to dry.
How old are you?
I am twelve years old.
How old is your brother?
He is thirteen years old.
Almost,
hardly ever.
He is almost fourteen years old.
About, about sixteen years and .
I am about fifteen years old.
Nearly, (before numbers.)
He is nearly fifteen years old.
Hardly. Scarcely. Scarcely nine.
You are hardly seventeen years old.
Not quite eleven years and two
months.
I am not quite sixteen years old.
Art thou older than thy brother?
I am younger than he.
I cannot tell you how old I am.
There is, there are.
How many francs are there in a
Three.
crown?
There are five centimes in a sou.
There are twenty sous or a hundred
centimes in one franc.
A, or one hundred.
The centime.
How many francs are there in a
dollar ?
There are 5 francs and 7 sous.
| Comment ?
+ Comme cela.
† De cette manière. Comme cela.
Me promettez-vous de venir?
Je vous le promets..
Qu'avez-vous promis à l'homme ?
Je ne lui ai rien promis.
Avez-vous jamais appris le Français |
Je l'ai appris autrefois.
User, 1.
Épeler, 1. (Obs. 78.ì
Refuser, 1, (de, avant l'inf.)
Comment votre frère a-t-il écrit son
thême ?
Mettre à sécher,
Il l'a bien écrit.
mis à sécher.
f
Mettez-vous votre gilet à sécher ?
Je l'ai dejà mis à sécher.
+ Quel âge avez-vous ?
† J'ai douze ans.
+ Quel âge votre frère a-t-il ?
† Il a treize ans.
Presque,
presque jamais.
† Il a presque quatorze a:.s.
Environ, environ seize ans et demi.
† J'ai environ quinze ans.
Près de, (avant les nombres.)
† Il a près de quinze ans.
À peine.
À peine neuf.
† Vous avez à peine dix-sept ans.
Pas tout-à-fait onze ans et deux
mois.
† Je n'ai pas tout-à-fait seize ans.
Es-tu plus âgé que ton frère ?
Je suis plus jeune que lui.
Je ne puis pas vous dire quel âge j'ai.
lly a.
Combien de francs y a-t-il dans un
Trois.
écu?
Il y a cinq centimes dans un sou.
Il y a vingt sous ou cent centimes
dans un franc.
Cent.
Le centime.
Combien de francs y a-t-il dans un
dollar ?
Il y a 5 francs et 7 sous..
TRENTE-CINQUIÈME THÊME. 1re Sec.
Si vous oubliez de mettre le quantième au commencement du thême, vous
pouvez le mettre à la fin, (end fém.)
Bon jour, mon cher ami, j'ai reçu votre billet et je vois avec plaisi
que vous me promettez de venir à notre petit concert. Je vous le
THIRTY-FIFTH LESSON. (1.)
181
·
promets, si je me porte bien. Je suis sûr de vous avoir, car vous
vous portez toujours bien. Non, je vous assure (assure you), car hier
j'ai eu mal de tête.-Vous ai-je promis quelque chose? Vous ne
m'avez rien promis. Je croyais vous avoir promis d'aller quelque
part avec vous. Si vous me l'avez promis, je l'ai oublié. Qu'est-ce
que mon père vous a promis? Il a promis de m'acheter un beau
livre. Donnez-moi ce que vous m'avez promis.-Je ne peux pas
vous le donner avant après-demain.-Votre ami a-t-il reçu beaucoup
d'argent? Il n'en a guère reçu.-Combien a-t-il reçu? Il n'a reçu
qu'un dollar et un écu.-Combien avez-vous donné à mon fils? Je
lui ai donné six dollars, ce qui fait un peu plus de trente francs.-
Est-ce tout ce que vous lui avez promis? Oui, c'est tout ce que
je lui ai promis. Avez-vous de l'argent Français? J'en ai. Avez-
vous des francs, des sous, et des centimes? Oui, j'en ai.-Combien
de sous y a-t-il (are there) dans un franc? Il y en a vingt.—Avez-
vous quelques centimes? J'en ai quelques uns.-Combien de
- centimes y a-t-il dans un sou? Il y en a cinq.-Et combien y en
a-t-il dans un franc? Cent.-Avez-vous un habit à prêter à ce
pauvre homme? À lui prêter? Ou à lui donner. J'ai un habit
qui est un peu usé, il peut l'avoir.
Are your shoes worn out? They are almost worn out, but not
quite. Are you going to have them mended? The shoemaker has
them to mend.—Have you anything to lend to cousin Charles? I
have. To whom have you lent your hat? I have not lent it; I have
given it away, because it is almost worn out.-To whom have you
given it away? I have given it to a pauper, (à un pauvre.) Does
your little brother already know how to spell? He does.-Does he
spell well? He does.-How old is he? He is six years old. -Let me
hear him. Robert, come here to spell.-How has the doctor's little
my spelt? He has spelt so so. Is he as old as Robert? He is
older.-How have their children written their exercises? They have
written them badly, as usual; but they are young, they are only
ten. Has my neighbor lent you his gloves? He has refused to lend
them to me.-Do you know Spanish? No, I do not like it. I have
refused to learn it.
Does the secretary's son speak Italian? He speaks it well.-Does
he speak it with every Italian he sees? ($78.) He does usually, but
yesterday he refused to speak to a stranger.—How old are you, my
young boy? I am eleven nearly.-How do our friends speak?
They do not speak badly.-Do they listen to what you tell them?
They do almost always.-How hast thou learned Italian? I have
earned it in this manner.-As you understand it well, I suppose it
+
10
182
THIRTY-FIFTH LESSON. (2.)
is a good way, (une bonne manière,) is it not? I believe it is; at
least, I like that way.-Have you called me? I have not called
you; but I have called your brother to tell him to prepare his clothes
(habits) to start to-morrow for Boston.-To start so soon? Yes, I
want to send some one to Boston, and he has time to go.-Is he
come? No, he has not yet come. Do you know where he has
gone? He has gone to the tailor's to bespeak a coat and a vest. →
VOCABULAIRE. 2de Section.
To understand, to comprehend.
To hear, to understand.
To wait for, to expect. To lose.
Do you understand me?
I do.
Have you understood the man?
I have understood him.
I hear you, but I do not understand
you.
The noise..
The wind.
The noise (roaring) of the wind.
Do you hear the roaring of the wind?
I do.
To bark.
I do not.
Comprendre,* 4, (conjugué comme
prendre. (24³, 25¹, 342.)
Entendre, 4.
Attendre, 4.
Perdre, 4.
Me comprenez-vous? M'entendez-
vous ?
Je vous comprends. Je vous entendz
Avez-vous compris l'homme ?
Je l'ai compris.
Je vous entends, mais je ne vous
comprends pas.
Le bruit.
Le bruit du vent.
Le vent.
Entendez-vous le bruit du vent?
Je l'entends. Je ne l'entends pas.
Aboyer. ($144, R. 3.)
What (211) barks? Dogs bark. (§ 15.) Qu'est-ce qui aboie? Les chiens
aboient.
The barking. Have you heard the L'aboiement.
barking of the dogs?
I have.
I have not.
To wait for some one or something.
To expect some one or something.
Are you waiting for my brother ?
I am waiting for him.
Do you expect some friends?
I do expect some.
How much has your brother lost?
He has lost about a crown.
I have lost more than he.
To remain, to stay, to dwell.
Avez-vous entendu
l'aboiement des chiens?
Je l'ai entendu. Je ne l'ai pas
entendu.
ou quelque
Attendre quelqu'un ou
chose.
Attendez-vous mon frère ?
Je l'attends.
Attendez-vous des amis ?
J'en attends quelques uns.
Combien votre frère a-t-il perdu ?
Il a perdu environ un écu.
J'ai perdu plus que lui.
Rester, 1, (prend plus souvent être
que avoir pour auxiliaire.)¹
1 This verb takes avoir when it signifies to live in, and être, when it
signifies to remain. Ex. J'ai resté sept mois à Colmar sans partir de ma
chambre, (Voltaire ;) I remained (lived) seven months at Colmar without
leaving my room. Je l'attendais à Paris, mais il est resté à Lyon, (The
French Academy;) I waited for him in Paris, but he remained at Lyons.
THIRTY-FIFTH LESSON. (2.)
183
The nobleman.
Noblemen.
Le gentilhomme.
Les gentilshommes. (§ 140—7.)
Obs. 82. Quand un mot est composé d'un nom et d'un adjectif, l'un et
l'autre prennent la marque (the mark) du pluriel.¹
Genteel, pretty.
Where has the nobleman remained?
He has remained at home.
Have you remained with him?
! Gentil.
Où le gentilhomme est-il resté ?
Il est resté à la maison.
Êtes-vous resté avec lui?
TRENTE-CINQUIÈME THÊME. 2de Sec.
Si vous ne mettez pas la date ici, mettez-la à la fin du thême.
Où avez-vous mouillé vos habits de cette manière? Un des gar-
çons m'a mouillé comme cela. N'importe. Otez vite votre habit,
vos souliers, et vos bas, et mettez-les près du feu, à sécher. Je ne le
peux pas, j'ai besoin d'être à la maison à six heures et demie, et il est
presque six heures et quart à présent, ainsi vous voyez que je n'ai
pas assez de temps pour faire sécher mes habits. Vous avez raison.
Alors, allez chez vous, changez-y d'habit, de bas et de souliers, aus-
sitôt que possible. Mais quel est le garçon qui vous a mouillé ?
C'est celui qui a mouillé le petit Jules l'autre soir. Le même! Oui,
le même, en vérité. C'est donc un mauvais garçon! Oui, je vous
assure. Quel âge a-t-il? Il a à peine dix ans. Me comprenez-vous?
Je vous comprends. Qu'est-ce qui a fait ce bruit-là? Je pense que
c'est le domestique dans le salon. Quel âge a notre voisin? Il n'a
pas tout-à-fait trente ans.-Nos amis sont-ils aussi jeunes que nous?
Ils sont plus vieux que nous. Quel âge ont-ils? L'un a à peine dix-
neuf ans, et l'autre en a près de vingt.-Votre oncle est-il aussi âgé
que le mien? Quel âge a le vôtre? Le nôtre a environ cinquante-
sept ans et demi. Combien le vôtre a-t-il ? Il a à peu près le même
âge.
How old are you? I am hardly eighteen years old.-How old is
your brother? He is about twenty-one. He is then older than you?
To be sure. But as you are much taller, I thought you were older.
No, he is 3 years older than I, (il a 3 ans de plus que moi.)-How
old art thou? I am not going to tell you how old I am.-Do you
understand me? I do.-Does the Frenchman understand us? He
does. Do you understand what (cè que) we are telling you? We
do understand it.-Dost thou understand French? I do not yet, but
I am learning it.-Do we understand the English ?-We do not un-
derstand them.-Do the English understand us? They do.-Do we
understand them? We hardly understand them.-Do you hear any
I Except the adjective demi, half, which does not take it (192, N. 3.)
134
THIRTY-SIXTH LESSON. (1.)
n'vise? I hear nothing.-Have you heard the roaring of the wind?
I have heard it.
?
What do you hear? I hear the barking of the dogs.-Whose (292)
dog is this? It is the dog of the Scotchman.-Have you lost your
stick? I have not lost it. Has your servant lost my bank-notes?
(billets de banque ?) He has lost them.-Did you go to the ball?
I did not. Where did you remain? I remained at home.--Where
lid the noblemen remain? They remained in the garden.-Has
your father lost as much money as I He has lost more than you.
-How much have I lost? You have hardly lost a crown.- -Did
your friends remain at the ball? They remained there.-Do you
know as much as the English physician? I do not know as much
as he.-How many books have you read? I have hardly read two.
-Do you wait for any one? I wait for no one.-Are you waiting
for the man whom I saw this morning? I am waiting for him.—
Art thou waiting for thy book? I am waiting for it. Do you expect
your father this evening? I do. Do you expect some friends?
I do.
THIRTY-SIXTH LESSON, 36th.-Trente-sixième Leçon, 36me.
VOCABULAIRE.
To beat,
To bite,
beaten,
bitten,
1re Section.
beat.
bite.
Battre, 4, battu,
Mordre, 4,
•
battez.
mordu, mordez.
Why do you beat the dog?
I beat it because it has bitten me.
To owe,
owed.
How much do you owe me ?
I owe you fifty crowns.
How much does the man owe you?
He owes me sixty francs.
Do our neighbors owe as much as
we?
We owe more than they.
How much dost thou owe?
Eighty francs. Two hundred crowns.
Eighty-three francs..
Two hundred and fifty francs.
Pourquoi battez-vous le chien ?
Je le bats parce qu'il m'a mordu.
Devoir,
Combien me devez-vous ?
dû.
Je vous dois cinquante écus.
Combien l'homme vous doit-il ?
Il me doit soixante francs.
Nos voisins doivent-ils autant que
nous ?
Nous devons plus qu'eux.
Combien dois-tu ?
Quatre-vingts francs.
écus.
Deux cents
Quatre-vingt-trois francs.
Deux cent cinquante francs.
Obs. 83. As seen above, quatre-vingt and cent take s when they are fol
fowed by nouns; but they have no s when followed by another numeral.
I am to....
Are you to....?
+ Je dois....
Where are you to go this morning + Où devez-vous aller ce matin
after breakfast?
+
† Devez-vous...?
après déjeuner?
THIRTY-SIXTH LESSON. (1.)
185
I am to go to the store.
Is your brother to come here soon?
He is to come here very soon.
† Je dois aller au magasin.
+ Votre frère doit-il venir ici bientôt !
+ Il doit venir ici bientôt.
Obs. 84. Are you to...? I am to..., &c., not being used here in their
natural or literal sense, but expressing duty, obligation; the French translate
them by the verb to owe, viz. devez-vous.
To return, (to come back.)
(It is also translated by retourner, 1.)
At what o'clock do you return from
the market ?
I return from it at twelve o'clock.
From it, from there, thence.
? Je dois..., il doit..., &c.
Revenir,* 2, revenu• (conjugué
comme son primitif, venir. (243
25¹, 252, 34¹.)
À quelle heure revenez-vous du
marché?
J'en reviens à midi.
En.
Does the servant return early from Le domestique revient-il de bonne
the warehouse?
He returns from it at six o'clock in
the morning.
At nine o'clock in the morning.
At five o'clock in the evening.
At eleven o'clock at night.
|
heure du magasin ?
Il en revient à six heures du matin.
† À neuf heures du matin.
† À cinq heures du soir.
† À onze heures du soir
TRENTE-SIXIÈME THÊME, 1re Sec.
matin? Bien; et vous.
Oui, j'ai très-bien dor-
Prêt! Avez-vous déjà
Très-bien. Je vais
N'oubliez pas le quantième ou (either) ici ou à la fin du thême.
Bon jour, mon cousin, comment va, ce
Moi aussi. Avez-vous bien dormi, (slept.)
mi. Savez-vous si le déjeuné est prêt?
faim? Oui, j'ai grand'faim, je vous assure.
voir si le cuisinier est revenu du marché. Allez, et revenez vite; ou,
plutôt (rather) laissez-moi aller avec vous.-Bien, allons ensemble
voir si le cuisinier a été au marché, et s'il en est revenu, et en (at
the) même temps, savoir quand il peut nous donner à déjeuner.
Allons, venez, (come, let us go.) Allez-y, mes enfants.-Moi, je
vais compter les et les de dollars que mon vieux fermier m'a
apportés-1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18,
19, 20-20 quarts de dollar, font 5 dollars.. C'est bien. À présent,
comptons les dollars. 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 18, et 1 font 19.
J'ai mal compté. Comptons encore. 3, 6, 9, 12, 15, 18, et 2 font 20.
C'est juste, (that's right.) Ah! vous voilà, Messieurs, et bien, le
cuisinier a-t-il été au marché et en est-il revenu? Oui, il en est
revenu, et le déjeuner va être prêt dans un instant. J'en suis
charmé, car je commence aussi à avoir faim. Tenez! (hear!) Le
domestique a donné le signal; le déjeuner est prêt. Allons déjeu-
ner.—Donnez-moi mon mouchoir qui est sur le dos du fauteuil. Le
voici.-Devez-vous dîner en ville? (in town?) Oui, je dois dîner
avec l'avocat de mon oncle.. À quelle heure devez-vous y aller?
16*
186
THIRTY-SIXTH LESSON. (2.)
}
Mon cousin et moi, nous devons y aller à 2 heures . Doit-il y
aller avec vous? Oui, il doit y venir avec moi.-Nous devons tous
deux dîner avec l'avocat.
Why does your neighbor beat his dog? Because it has bitten his
boy. How many times did it bite him? It has bitten him only
once; and that is enough, is it not?-Is your farmer returned from
market? He is not yet returned from it.—At what o'clock did your
brother return from the ball? He returned from it at one o'clock in
the morning.-At what o'clock didst thou come back from thy
friend's? I came back (en) at eleven o'clock in the morning.—
Didst thou remain long with him? I remained with him about an
hour. How long do you intend to remain at the ball? I intend ‘o
remain there a few minutes.-How long did the Frenchman remain
with you? He remained with me for two hours.-How long
did the Prussians remain in town? They remained there during
three months.
Do you intend to remain long with us? I intend to remain with you
8, 10, or perhaps 15 days, (a fortnight.)—How much do I owe you ?
You do not owe me much.-How much do you owe your tailor? I
owe him eighty francs, or about sixteen dollars.-How much dost thou
owe thy shoemaker? I owe him already eighty-five francs, that is,
about seventeen dollars. Do I owe you anything? You owe me
nothing.-How much does the Englishman owe you? He owes
me more than you.-Do the English owe as much as the Spaniards?
Not quite so much.-Do I owe you as much as my brother? You.
owe me more than he.-Do our friends owe you as much as we?
They owe me less than you.-How much do they owe you? They
owe me two hundred and fifty francs.-How many dollars is that?
How much do we owe you? You owe me three hundred francs,
that is, about 60 dollars.
How long?
VOCABULAIRE.
During, for.
Whilst. Whilst I am here.
How long has he remained there?
A minute.
An hour.
A day.
A month.
A year.
2de Section.
Combien de temps? Pendant.¹
Pendant que. Pendant que je suis ici.
Combien de temps y est-il resté ?
Pendant une minute.2
Pendant une heure.2
Pendant un jour.
Pendant un mois.
Pendant une année.2
The winter.
L'été.
L'hiver.
'The summer.
1 The adverb pendant, when it signifies for, may be omitted in French
as well as in English.
2 Minute, heure, année, and rue, are feminine nouns, of which the in
THIRTY-SIXTH LESSON. (2.)
187
Obs. 85. Les noms des saisons, (seasons,) des mois, et des jours, sont
masculins, excepté l'automne, autumn, qui est masculin et féminin.
During the summer.
Last winter.
To dwell, to live, to reside, to remain.
Where do you live?
Pendant l'été.
Demeurer, 1.1
L'hiver dernier.
Où demeurez-vous ?
I live in William street, number Je deineure (dans la) rue Guillaume,
twenty-five.
Where did your brother live?
He lived in Rivoli street, number
forty-nine.
Dost thou live at thy brother's house?
I do not live at his, but at my father's
house.
(au) numéro vingt-cinq.2
Où votre frère a-t-il demeuré ?
Il a demeuré (dans la) rue de Rivoli,
(au) numéro quarante-neuf.2
Demeures-tu chez ton frère ?
Je ne demeure pas chez lui, mais
chez mon père.
Does your friend still live where I Votre ami demeure-t-il encore où
lived.
He lives no longer where you lived.
No longer. Number, at number.
How long were you speaking to the
man ?
I spoke to him for two hours.
Did you remain long with my father?
I stayed there a long time.
I remained with him an hour.
A long time,
long.
j'ai demeuré ?
Il ne demeure plus où vous avez
demeuré.
Ne..plus. Numéro, au numéro.
Combien de temps avez-vous parle
à l'homme ?
Je lui ai parlé pendant deux heures.
Êtes-vous resté long-temps chez mon
père ?
J'y suis resté long-temps.
J'y suis resté une heure.
Long-temps, (never un long-temps..
TRENTE-SIXIÈME THÊME. 2de Sec.
N'oubliez pas de mettre le quantième ici, ou au bout du thême.
Avez-vous dit qu'il y a dans le bureau quelqu'un qui veut me
voir? Oui, je vous l'ai dit. Quand est-il venu? Il y a un moment.
Qui est-ce? Le connaissez-vous? Non, je ne le connais pas. Je
ne l'ai jamais vu. Je ne peux pas le voir à présent, parce que je
dois être au quai à huit heures et demie, et il est déjà huit heures et
vingt-cinq minutes.-Dites-lui de revenir, cet après-midi. Non,
n'importe, je vais le lui dire moi-même. Combien de temps avez-
vous lu? J'ai lu environ trois quarts d'heure.-Combien de temps
definite article is une, a, one, and the definite la, whose plural (les) is the
same as that of le. Feminine nouns take, like masculine nouns, an s in
the plural, as will be seen hereafter.
1 The verb demeurer takes avoir for its auxiliary when it means to live
in, and être when it signifies to remain. Ex. Il a demeuré à Paris, he has
lived in Paris; il est demeuré court en haranguant le roi, he stopped short
in haranguing the king.
2 Dans la before rue, and au before numéro, have been put between
parentheses, because they are generally omitted.
188
THIRTY-SIXTH LESSON. (2.)
le fermiera-t-il attendu? Il n'a pas attendu long-temps.-Jean a-t-il
étudié long-temps? Non, pas très-long-temps.-Combien de temps
a-t-il étudié? Près d'une demi-heure, (19², N. 3.) Qu'a-t-il fait pen-
dant le reste du temps? Il a dormi. Quoi! Il a dormi une heure
et demie, et il n'a étudié qu'une demi-heure? C'est comme je vous
le dis. A-t-il fait son devoir? Il dit qu'il l'a fait.-C'est bon. Cela
suffit. N'avez-vous pas promis à M. P. d'aller à son concert? Si
fait, je le lui ai promis, s'il a lieu pendant que je suis ici. Partez-
vous bientôt? Oui, dans quelques jours. Voyez-vous le soldat qui
est malade? Non; mais je vois celui qui l'a été. Combien de
temps l'a-t-il été? Il l'a été pendant quinze jours, (a fortnight.)
Votre cousin ne va-t-il pas à Charleston pendant l'hiver? Si fait, il
y va. Y reste-t-il pendant l'été ? Il n'y reste pas pendant l'été. Où
va-t-il alors? Il en revient, pour rester avec nous. Combien de
temps avez-vous demeuré dans la rue Chestnut? Nous y avons
demeuré long-temps. Le chien est-il resté près du feu pendant
deux heures? Il n'y est resté qu'une heure, parce qu'il a mal au
dos.
How much have you given for that English horse? I gave 220
dollars for it.—Did not your little son give something to that poor little
boy? Yes, he has given him 5 cents.-Do you owe anything to
the grocer? No, I believe I owe him nothing.-Does your neighbcr
take bread from your German baker? He does.—Does he owe him
anything? I believe he does.-Does he owe the butcher? I do
not know if he owes him anything.—Do you see the sailor who is
in the ship? I do not see the one (§ 87) in the ship, but the one on
the wire bridge. Do you know his name? I do not.—Where are
you to go? I am to go to the old bridge.-Is your friend's uncle to
come here to-day? He is.-At what o'clock is he to come? He is
to come very soon.-When are your sons to go to the play? They
are to go to-night, (ce soir.)-When are they to return from it?
They are to return from it at half past ten.-When are you to go to
the physician's? I am to go at ten o'clock at night.-When is
your son to return from (de chez) the painter's? He is to return at
five o'clock in the evening.-Where do you live? I live in Rivoli
street, number forty-seven.-Where does your father live? He lives
at his friend's house, in Walnut street, (rue Walnut,) No. 251.-
Where do your brothers live? They live in William street, number
one hundred and twenty.-Dost thou live at thy brother's house? I
live at his house.-Do you still live where you did? I live there
still.--Does your friend still live where he did? He no longer lives
where he did.—Where does he live at present? He lives at his
father's house
THIRTY-SEVENTH LESSON. (1.)
189
THIRTY-SEVENTH LESSON, 37th.-Trente-septième Leçon, 37me
Till, until.
VOCABULAIRE. 1re Section.
Till, until noon, (twelve o'clock.)
Till to-morrów.
Till this evening.
Till the day after to-morrow.
Till Sunday.
Till Monday.
Till evening.
Till morning.
Until the next day.
Until the day before yesterday.
Till to-day.
Until this moment-that moment.
Till now-hitherto.
Until then.
How long?
Until what time?
What hour?-What period?
Jusque, (followed by a preposition and
its objective case.) Jusqu'à midi.
Jusqu'à demain.
Jusqu'après demain.
Jusqu'à ce soir.
Jusqu'au matin.
Jusqu'à dimanche à lundi.
Jusqu'au soir.
Jusqu'au lendemain.
Jusqu'avant hier.
Jusqu'à aujourd'hui.
Jusqu'à ce moment-ci-moment-là.
Jusqu'à présent-jusqu'ici.
Jusqu'alors.´
} Jusqu'à quand ? Jusques à quand ?
Obs. 86. How long, meaning, until what time, what hour, or period,
must be translated by jusqu'à quand. But when it means, How many
hours, days, &c., or what length of time: (362) translate by Combien de
temps? or Combien? For instance: How long did you stay in New York?
may mean: Until what o'clock did you stay in New York, or in other words,
when did you leave or quit it? The answer might then be: At six o'clock,
or on Tuesday, &c. Or else it may mean, How many hours or days, &c.,
did you stay there? The answer might then be, six hours, three days, &c.
Hence, when How long is used, consult the answer to know exactly the
meaning of the question.
Until what hour do you take lessons?
We take them till one o'clock, (we
quit at 1.)
Tuesday, on Tuesday-Wednesday.
On Thursday-Friday-Saturday.
Till I return, (till my return.)
Jusqu'à quand prenez-vous leçons ?
Nous les prenons jusqu'à une heure.
Mardi. Mercredi. (On is not trans-
lated.)
Jeudi. Vendredi. Samedi. (32º, N. 1.)
Jusqu'à mon retour.
Till my brother returns, (till my bro- Jusqu'au retour de mon frère.
the.'s return.)
Till four o'clock in the morning.
Till midnight, (till 12 at night.)
The return or coming back.
How long did you remain at my fa-
ther's house?
I remained at his house till eleven
o'clock at night.
To be able, (can,) been able, (could.)
Has the boy been able to read it?
He was able to read it. He could not.
Could you find the word?
Yes, I found it immediately,
Jusqu'à quatre heures du matin.
Jusqu'à minuit.
Le retour.
Jusqu'à quand êtes-vous resté chez
mon père ?
J'y suis resté jusqu'à onze heures
du soir.
Pouvoir,* pu. (20¹, 243, 341.)
Le garçon a-t-il pu le lire? ($ 148.)
Il a pu le lire.
Il n'a pas pu.
Avez-vous pu trouver le mot ?
Qui, je l'ai trouvé tout de suite,
190
THIRTY-SEVENTH LESSON. (1.)
TRENTE-SEPTIÈME THÊME, 1re Sec.
·
N'oubliez pas de mettre le quantième du mois ici ou à la fin.
Mon cher Lucien, je suis charmé de vous voir. Je vous croyais
absent. Depuis quand êtes-vous revenu? Je suis revenu samedi
dernier. Jusqu'à quand allez-vous rester ici? (How long or until
what time.) Je vais y rester jusqu'au retour de mon oncle, et peut-
être plus long-temps. L'attendez-vous bientôt? Je l'attends dans
8 ou 10 jours. Demeurez-vous avec votre cher cousin? Non, je ne
demeure plus avec lui.-Avec qui demeurez-vous? Je ne demeure
avec personne. Je suis dans un hotel. Allez-vous y rester jusqu'au
retour de votre oncle? Je pense que oui. Laissez votre hotel et
venez demeurer avec nous. Je vous suis bien obligé. Jusqu'à
quand le commis du marchand de livres est-il resté au musée? Il
n'y est resté que jusqu'à midi. Pourquoi donc? (so.) Parce qu'il
n'a pas pu. Et pourquoi n'a-t-il pas pu y rester jusqu'à deux heures
comme les autres? Il n'a pas pu, parce que son père dîne de bonne
heure. Allez-vous à Lancastre cet été ? Non, je n'y vais pas. Et
vous, Jules, y allez-vous? Moi non plus. Et Charlotte et son frère,
y vont-ils ? Eux non plus.-Le professeur y va-t-il? Lui non plus.
Qui y va? Personne n'y va.-Combien de temps êtes-vous tous
restés à Bordeaux? Mon oncle y a demeuré pendant 6 ans, mon
cousin pendant trois ans, moi pendant six mois; mais ces jeunes
garçons n'y sont restés que quelques jours.
Until what time do the carpenters work at noon? They work till
twelve. When do they leave off work in the evening? (or, until
what hour do they work?) Until 6 o'clock, or rather 4 to 6.—How
long did I work? (or, until what? &c.) You worked till 4 o'clock in
the morning. Has the physician still long to wait? (encore pour
long-temps?) He has.-Am I to remain long here? You are to
remain here till Sunday.-Is my brother to remain long with you?
He is to remain with us till Monday.-How long (until what time)
are we to work? You are to work till the day after to-morrow.—
Have you still long to speak? I have still an hour to speak.-Did
you speak long? I spoke (ai parlé) till the next day.-Did you
remain long in my counting-house? I remained in it till this mo-
ment.
Have you still long to live at the Frenchman's house? I have
still long to live at his house.-How long (till what time) have you
still to live at his house? Till winter.-Has he swept the floor? He
has swept it. How long did he remain here? Till noon,
Till noon, (midi.)—
with me no longer.
Does your friend still live with you? He lives
-How long did he live with you? He lived with me only a year,--
THIRTY-SEVENTH LESSON. (2.).
191
How long (till what time) did you remain at the ball? I remained
there till midnight.-How long (what time) did you remain in the
ship? I remained an hour in it.-Have you remained in the garden
till now? I have remained there till now.
VOCABULAIRE.
One, some or any one, people, (and they,
we, you, in an indefinite sense.)
Have they brought my shoes?
They have brought them.
They have not brought them yet.
What have they said?
They have said nothing.
What have they done?
They have done nothing.
To be willing, been willing.
Has one wished to burn my coat?
No one would burn it. (§ 148-4.)
Could they find the books?
They could not find them.
Can they do what they wish?
They do what they can; but they do
not do what they wish.
What do they say?. Nothing new.
What do they say new?
They say nothing new.
Something or anything new.
New.
My new coat.
My new horse.
My handsome horse.
My new friend.
My handsome coat.
2de Section.
On, (pronom indéfini, toujours singu
lier.
38.)
A-t-on apporté mes souliers?
On les a apportés.
On ne les a pas encore apportés.
Qu'a-t-on dit?
On n'a rien dit.
Qu'a-t-on fait ?
On n'a rien fait.
*
Vouloir, voulu. (18), 243, 34¹.)
A-t-on voulu brûler mon habit?
On n'a pas voulu le brûler.
A-t-on pu trouver les livres ?
On n'a pu les trouver.
Peut-on faire ce qu'on veut ?
On fait ce qu'on peut; mais on ne
fait pas ce qu'on veut.
Que dit-on ?
Rien de nouveau.
Que dit-on de nouveau? (Obs. 7.)
On ne dit rien de nouveau.
Quelque chose de nouveau.
Neuf, nouveau, (before a vowel or h
mute, nouvel.)¹
Mon habit neuf.
Mon nouveau cheval.
Mon beau cheval.
Mon nouvel amí.
|
Mon bel habit.2
´¹ Nouveau (nouvel before a vowel or h mute) is used for things which are
new from nature or invention, as: du vin nouveau, new wine; un nouveau
commis, a new clerk; un nouvel ami, a new friend; un livre nouveau, a
book just published. Neuf, on the contrary, is used of things made by
men, as: un habit neuf, a new coat; un livre neuf, a new book, (which has
been printed long ago, but has not been used.) Thus we may say: Ce
livre neuf est-il nouveau? Is this new book a new publication? Neuf
figuratively means inexperienced. Ex. Ce valet est bien neuf, this valet is
very inexperienced.
2 Bel and nouvel are used only before masculine substantives beginning
with a vowel, or h mute, as may be seen from our examples. But in the
plural the adjectives remain beau and nouveau. Ex. Ces beau arbres, these
fine trees: mes nouveaux amis, my new friends.
192
THIRTY-SEVENTH LESSON. (2.)
To brush,
brushed,
brush.
This fine-looking man.
These fine-looking men.
This fine tree.
Those fine trees.
My new friends.
Do they believe that?
They do not believe it.
Brosser, 1, brossé, brossez, (impera.,
Ce bel homme.
Ces beaux hommes.
Ce bel arbre.
Ces beaux arbres.
Mes nouveaux amis.
They do.
Croit-on cela ?
On le croit
On ne le croit pas.
Do they speak of that?
They do speak of it.
They do not speak of it.
Parle-t-on de cela?
On en parle.
On n'en parle pas.
TRENTE-SEPTIEME THÊME. 2de Sec.
Quel est le quantième? Apprenez-le et mettez-le ici.
Que faites-vous ce matin? Je lis. Que lisez-vous? Le journal
d'aujourd'hui. Avez-vous déjà vu quelque chose de nouveau? Je
n'ai encore rien lu de nouveau. Je n'ai lu qu'un article. Que dit-on
du choiéra? Pas grand' chose encore. Parle-t-on de l'or de la Cali-
fornie? Je crois qu'on en parle; mais laissez-moi lire, et alors je
peux vous dire ce qu'on dit de nouveau. Eh! bien. Lisez.-Tra
vaillez avant de déjeuner. Non, je ne peux pas travailler avant de
déjeuner. Je n'ai jamais pu. Moi, je peux, et j'en suis bien aise.-
George a-t-il lu et écrit? Il n'a voulu ni lire ni écrire. Qu'a-t-il
fait? Il n'a rien voulu faire. C'est extraordinaire! Est-il malade ?
Non, il se porte très-bien au contraire, car il a très-bien déjeuné.
Pourquoi n'a-t-il pas voulu étudier comme à l'ordinaire? Il a dit: Je
veux jouer au lieu de travailler. A-t-il perdu son livre? Non, je le
lui ai donné; mais au lieu de l'ouvrir, il l'a serré dans son pupitre.
Le voisin vous a-t-il prêté son cheval? Non, il a refusé de me le
prêter. Le fermier vous a-t-il prêté le sien? Non, il a aussi refusé,
parce qu'il en a besoin pour aller en ville. Ah! Mlle., je suis charmé
d'avoir le plaisir de vous voir. Ôtez votre châle et votre bonnet, et
asseyez-vous dans ce fauteuil. Ce fauteuil de velours est trop chaud,
je vais prendre ce siège. Je veux voir Charlotte. Charlotte n'est
pas ici. En vérité. Alors, je vais partir. Adieu, M. Adieu, Mlle.
Has the shoemaker been able to mend my shoes? He has not
been able to mend them.-Why has he not been able to mend them?
Because he has had no time.-Have they (on) been able to find my
gold buttons? They have not been able to find them.-Why has
the tailor not mended my coat? Because he has no good thread.—
Why have you beaten the dog? Because it has bitten me.-Why
do you drink? Because I am thirsty.-What have they wished to
say? They have not wished to say anything.-Have they said any-
thing new? They have not said anything new.-What do they (on)
THIRTY-EIGHTH LESSON. (1.)
193
say new in the market? They say nothing new there.-Did they
kill any dogs this morning? They killed more than 65.-Do they
believe that? They do not believe it.-Do they speak of that?
They do speak of it.-Do they speak of the man that has been
killed? They do not speak of him.-Can people do what they
wish? They do what they can; but they do not what they wish.-
What have they brought? They have brought your new coat.-Has
my new servant brushed my fine carpets? He has not yet brushed
them.-Have you bought a new horse? I have bought two new
horses. How many fine trees have you seen? I have seen but one
fine tree.-Have you seen a fine-looking man? I have seer several
fine-looking men.-Have you a new friend? I have several.-Do
you like your new friends? I do like them.
THIRTY-EIGHTH LESSON, 38th.-Trente-huitième Leçon, 38me.
VOCABULAIRE. 1re Section.
Jusqu'où ? (adv.)
Jusque chez mon oncle.
Jusqu'ici.
Jusque là.
Jusque.
To. How far? Up to, as far as.
To, or as far as my uncle's.
This far, as far as here, hither.
That far, as far as there, that; thither.
As far as London. Paris. Rome.
To, at, or in Paris. To, at, or in Berlin.
Obs. 87. Mettez (a) avant les noms des villes-Le Havre, to Havre, au
Havre, (§ 12), et mettez (en) avant ceux des pays, (countries,)—To Hungary,
en Hongrie.
To, at or in France -England.
As far as England.
As far as Spain.
As far as France.
As far as Italy.
As far as my house.
As far as the warehouse.
As far as the corner.
As far as the end of the road.
As far as the middle of the road.
Up stairs.
Down stairs.
As far as above. As far as below.
As far as the other side of the road.
This side, on this side.
That side, on that side.
Germany.
Holland.
Jusqu'à Londres, à Paris, à Rome.
À Paris.
A Berlin.
En France-en Angleterre.
Jusqu'en Angleterre.
Jusqu'en Espagne.
Jusqu'en France.
Jusqu'en Italie.
Jusque chez moi.
Jusqu'au magasin. († 13.)
Jusqu'au coin.
Jusqu'au bout du chemin.
Jusqu'au milieu du chemin.
En haut.
Jusqu'en haut.
E bas.
Jusqu'en bas.
Jusqu'à l'autre coté du chemin.
De ce côté-ci.
De ce côté-là.
In America.
Hungary, (to.)
L'Allemagne. ·
La Hollande.¹
En Amérique.
La Hongrie,' (en,)
¹ In Hollande the letter h is aspirated; therefore we say la Hollande,
17
194
THIRTY-EIGHTH LESSON. (1.)
Obs. 88. The names of states, empires, kingdoms, and provinces, ars
generally feminine when they end in e mute, and masculine, when they
do not.
The middle.
The well.
The castle.
Le milieu.
Le puits.
The cask.
To travel.
Do you go to Paris?
Do you travel to Paris?
I do travel (or go) thither.
Is he gone to England?
He is gone thither.
How far is he gone?
How far has he travelled to ?
He is gone as far as America.
Le tonneau.
Voyager, 1.
} Allez-vous à Paris?
J'y vais.
Le château.
Est-il allé en Angle.orre?
Il y est allé.
Jusqu'où est-il allé ?
Jusqu'où a-t-il voyagé ?
Il est a.lé jusqu'en Amérique.
TRENTE-HUITIÈME THÊME. 1re Sec.
Si vous ne savez pas le quantième, apprenez-le et écrivez-le ici.
Ah! vous voilà, M. Henri. Je vous croyais à voyager. Je suis
revenu depuis un mois environ.—Jusqu'où avez-vous été ? J'ai ete
jusqu'en Allemagne. Ainsi, vous avez voyagé en Angleterre et en
France? Oui, j'y ai voyagé, et en Italie aussi. Avez-vous été jus-
qu'en Hongrie? Non, je n'ai pas eu le temps d'y aller; parce que
j'ai resté trop long-temps à Paris. Combien de temps y êtes-vous
resté? J'y suis resté un mois. Ce n'est pas grand' chose. Pardon-
nez-moi, c'est beaucoup quand vous avez beaucoup de pays à voir.
Vous avez raison.-Avez-vous voyagé seul? Non, mon cher ami
François a voyagé avec moi, et nous avons été ensemble tout le
temps.-Le père Matthieu est-il venu jusqu'en Amérique? Oui, il
y est venu. Qui est le père Matthieu? Le grand champion Irlan-
dais de la tempérance.—Jusqu'où les Espagnols sont-ils allés? Ils
sont allés jusqu'à Londres.-Jusqu'où ce pauvre homme est-il venu?
Il est venu jusqu'ici. Est-il venu jusque chez vous? Il est venu
jusque chez mon père.-Combien a-t-il perdu? Il a perdu tout
son argent. Mon ami est-il allé de ce côté-là? Oui, il est allé de
ce côté-là. Je croyais qu'il était (§ 147) allé de ce côté-ci. Non,
personne n'est allé de ce côté-ci.-Voilà votre garçon, où était-il?
Il était avec moi.-Et où étiez-vous? Moi? j'étais en haut.-Vous
étiez en haut, et moi j'étais en bas. Qui était en bas avec vous?
Personne n'était en bas avec moi, j'y étais seul.
How far did you wish to go? I wished to go as far as the wood,
Have you gone as far as there? I have not gone as far as there.-
How far does your brother wish to go? He wishes to go as far as
the end of that road.-How far does the wine go? It goes to the
middle of the cask.-Where art thou going? I am going to the
THIRTY-EIGHTH LESSON. (2.)
195
bridges. How far are we going? We are going as far as ne thea-
tre.-Are you going as far as the well? I am going as far as the
castle. Has the carpenter drunk all the wine? He has drunk it.—
Has your little boy torn all his clothes? He has torn them all.—
Why has he torn them? Because he does not like them.-How
much have you lost? I have lost all my money.-Do you know
where my father is? I do not know.-Have you not seen my
book? I have not seen it.-Do you know how this word is written?
It is written thus.-Do you travel sometimes? I travel often.-
Where do you intend to go to, this summer? (cet été ?) I intend to
go to Paris.-Do you not go to Italy? I do go thither.-Hast thou
sometimes travelled? I have never travelled.-Have your friends
a mind to go to Holland? They have a mind to go thither.-When
do they intend to depart? They intend to depart the day after to-
morrow.—Where is General Lewis going? He is going as far as
Hungary.
VOCABULAIRE. 2de Section.
To steal, to rob, commit a theft.
To steal something from some one.
Have they stolen your hat from you?
They have stolen it from me.
Has the man stolen the books from
thee?
He has stolen them from me.
What have they stolen from you?
They have stolen gloves from me.
Did they steal many?
They did.
How do you spell this word?
How is this word written ?
It is written thus.
To dye or colour, dyed, dye.
I dye, thou dyest, he dyes; dyeing.
To dye black.
To dye red.
To dye green,
To dye blue.
To dye yellow.
Is that brown cloth French, Ame-
rican, or English? It is French.
Is not that blue velvet beautiful?
Yes, it is superb.
This round white hat.
Do you dye your coat blue?
I dye it green.
How does he dye his satin?
Voler, volé, ne volez pas, (impéra.)
+ Voler quelque chose à quelqu'un.
† Vous a-t-on volé votre chapeau?
† On me l'a volé.
+ L'homme t'a-t-il volé les livres !
† Il me les a volés.
+ Que vous a-t-on volé ?
On m'a volé des gants.
Vous en a-t-on volé beaucoup ?
On m'en a volé beaucoup.
Comment épelle-t-on ce mot?
Comment écrit-on ce mot?
On l'écrit ainsi, (de cette manière.)
Teindre,* 4, teint, teignez (impéra.)
Je teins, tu teins, il teint; teignant.
† Teindre en noir.
† Teindre en rouge.
† Teindre en vert.
Teindre en bleu.
† Teindre en jaune.
Ce drap brun est-il Français, Amé-
ricain, ou Anglais ? Il est Français.
Ce velours bleu n'est-il pas beau ?
Si fait, il est superbe.
Ce chapeau rond et blanc. (Obs. 61.)
† Teignez-vous votre habit en bleu ↑
+ Je le teins en vert.
+ Comment teint-i son satin ?
196
THIRTY-EIGHTH LESSON. (2.)
He dyes it blue.
The dyer.
To get dyed, got dyed.
+ Il le teint en bleu.
Le teinturier.
+ Faire teindre, fait teindre.
What colour have you had your † Comment avez-vous fait teindre
white nat dyed?
I have got it dyed black.
Red. Brown. Gray. Pink.
votre chapeau ?
† Je l'ai fait teindre en noir.
Le printemps passé-prochain.
Clair.
Rouge. Brun. Gris. Rose.
Spring.
In (in the) spring.
Le printemps.
Au printemps.
Last spring.
Next spring.
Clear, light.
Dark, deep.
Foncé.
Light blue.
Dark pink.
Rose foncé.
Gray, light brown, and pink, are
good for spring.
Bleu clair.
Le gris, le brun clair, et le rose, sont
bons pour le printemps.
TRENTE-HUITIEME THEME. 2de Sec.
Savez-vous le quantième? Oui, je le sais. Mettez-le ici.
Achetez-vous un chapeau blanc ou noir ce printemps? J'en
achète un blanc. Le noir est bon pour l'automne. Allez-vous
serrer le noir? Sans doute. Votre châle est trop foncé pour le
printemps, n'allez-vous pas en mettre un autre? Je n'en ai pas
d'autre ici.-Vous a-t-on volé une partie de votre linge? Non, on ne
m'a rien volé; mais on a volé quelque chose à mon frère. -Que lui
a-t-on volé? On lui a volé son parapluie et ses gants neufs.-Où les
lui a-t-on volés? On les lui a volés dans le bureau de son cousin.
Je suis bien fâché de l'apprendre. Mais si vous n'avez
vous n'avez pas d'autre
châle, Victoria peut vous en prêter un plus clair. Trouvez-vous le
mien trop foncé? Oui, je le trouve trop foncé. Votre chapeau est
beaucoup plus clair, n'est-ce pas? Oui, vous avez raison.-Victoria,
prêtez-moi un de vos châles. Lequel voulez-vous? J'en veux un
moins foncé que celui-ci; en avez-vous de moins foncé? Oui, j'en
ai un plus clair, un peu plus clair que le vôtre. Laissez-moi l'aller
chercher. Allons-y ensemble. Allez-vous voyager le printemps
prochain? Non pas le printemps prochain, mais l'automne pro-
chain.
I
Have they stolen anything from you? They have stolen all the
good wine from me.-Have they stolen anything from your father?
They have stolen all his good books from him.-Dost thou steal any-
thing? I steal nothing.-Hast thou ever stolen anything? I have
never stolen anything.-Have they stolen your good clothes from
you? They have stolen them from me.-What have they stolen
from me? They have stolen all the good books from you.-When
did they steal the money from you? They stole it from me last
spring.-Have your servants ever stolen anything from us? They
have never stolen anything from us.-Does your son get his white
vest dyed? He does get it dyed.-Does he get it dyed red? He
THIRTY-NINTH LESSON. (1.)
197
gets it dyed gray.-What color have your friends got their coats.
dyed? They have got them dyed green.-What color have the
Italians had their hats dyed? They have had them dyed light
brown. Have you a white hat? I have a black one.-What hat
has the nobleman? He has two hats; a white one and a black
-What hat has the American? He has a round black hat.-
Have I a white hat? You have several white and black hats.-
Has your dyer already dyed your cloth? He has dyed it.-What
color has he dyed it? He has dyed it green.
THIRTY-NINTH LESSON, 39th.-Trente-neuvierne Leçon, 39me.
VOCABULAIRE. 1re Section.
To be necessary-must.
Is it necessary?
Must I, thou, he, she, we, you, they?
Falloir,* 3 (verbe irrégulier, défectif,
et unipersonnel), p. passé fallu.
Faut-il ?
Ne faut-il pas ?
It is necessary. I, thou, he, &c., must. Il faut. Il ne faut pas.
Obs. 89. All verbs expressing necessity, obligation, or want, as, to be
obliged, to want, to be necessary, must, are in French generally rendered by
falloir.
Is it necessary to go to the market?
It is not necessary to go thither.
What must be done to learn French?
It is necessary to study a great deal.
What must I do?
Faut-il aller au marché?
Il ne faut pas y aller.
Que faut-il faire pour apprendre le
Français ?
Il faut étudier beaucoup.
Que me faut-il faire ?
Obs. 90. Faut (as all unipersonal verbs) can have no other nominative
but il. Hence, the English subject of must, is to be rendered in French by
the indirect object: ($ 47,) me, te, lui, nous, vous, or leur.
You must stay still.
Whither must he go ?
He must go for his book.
What must they buy?·
They must buy some beef.
What must we read?
What must you have?
Il vous faut rester tranquille.
Où lui faut-il aller ?
Il lui faut aller chercher son livre.
Que leur faut-il acheter?
Il leur faut acheter du bœuf.
Que nous faut-il lire ?
Que vous faut-il ?
Obs. 91. The verb have, following in English the verb must, is not ren-
dered in French.
I must have some money.
Must you have a sou?
Must you have a great deal?
I must have a great deal.
Il me faut de l'argent.
Vous faut-il un sou?
Vous en faut-il beaucoup ?
Il m'en faut beaucoup.
17*
198
THIRTY-NINTH LESSON. (1.)
I want only one sou.
Is that all you want?
That is all I want.
How much must thou have?
How much dost thou want?
I want only a franc.
How much must your brother have?
He wants only two francs.
Have you what you want?
I have what I want.
He has what he wants.
They have what they want.
More.
Il ne me faut qu'un sou.
+ Ne vous faut-il que cela?
+ Il ne me faut que cela.
} Combien te faut-il ?
Il ne me faut qu'un franc.
Combien faut-il à votre frère?
Il ne lui faut que deux francs.
Avez-vous ce qu'il vous faut ?
J'ai ce qu'il me faut.
Il a ce qu'il lui faut.
Ils ont ce qu'il leur faut.
Davantage.
Obs. 92. This adverb has the same signification as plus, with this differ
ence only, that it cannot precede a noun.
No more (of it, them).
Do you not want more?
I do not want more.
He does not want more.
N'en. pas davantage.
•
• •
Ne vous en faut-il pas davantage?
Il ne m'en faut pas davantage.
Il ne lui en faut pas davantage.
TRENTE-NEUVIÈME THÊME. 1re Sec.
Cherchez le quantième et mettez-le ici.
Faut-il envoyer au marché? Oui, il faut y envoyer. Pourquoi
faut-il y envoyer? Il nous faut du beurre, du bœuf, et du lait. Du
lait? Le laitier n'en a-t-il pas apporté ce matin? Non, il nous a
oubliés, ou il est malade. N'importe. Coinme vous dites, il nous
faut du lait.-Le cuisinier a-t-il assez d'argent pour acheter tout ce
qu'il nous faut? Ne lui avez-vous pas donné un billet de deux dol-
lars? Il n'a pas voulu le prendre, et je ne lui ai donné que trois
quarts de dollar. S'il n'a pas davantage, je crois que ce n'est pas
assez. Alors, il faut lui en donner davantage. Combien davantage?
Un demi-dollar. En avez-vous un? Oui, en voici un. Donnez-le-
lui. Qui fait ce bruit-là? C'est François. Qu'a-t-il? Que lui faut-
il? Il a mal à l'œil. Dites-lui de rester tranquille. Il ne peut pas
rester tranquille. Il lui faut rester tranquille, et dormir. Ce n'est
pas difficile à dire; mais c'est plus difficile à faire.
Is it necessary to go to the market?—It is not necessary to go
there.-What must they buy? They must buy some gloves.-Must
I go for some salt? You must go for some.-Am I to go to the ball?
You must go. When must I go? You must go this evening.
Must I go for the carpenter? You must go for him.-What must
be done to learn Russian? It is necessary to study a great deal.-
Is it necessary to study a great deal to learn German? It is. (Dir. 1.)
-What must I do? You must buy a good book.-What is he to
do? He must stay still.-What are we to do? You must not stay
THIRTY-NINTH LESSC N. (2.)
199
still, but work.-Must you work much in order to learn the Arabic?
I must work much to learn it.-Why must I go to the wharf? You
must go there to bring the sailors here.
Must I go anywhere? Thou must go into the garden.—Must I
send for anything? Thou must send for some wine.-What must I
do? You must write an exercise.-To whom must I write a note?
You must write one to your friend.-Do you not want any shoes?
I do not want any.-Dost thou want much money? I want much.
-How much must thou have? I must have five crowns.-How
much does your brother want? He wants but six sous.-Does he
not want more? He does not want more.-Does your friend want
more? He does not want so much as I.-What do you want? I
want money and clothes.-Have you now what you want? I have
what I want. Has your father what he wants? He has what he
wants.
VOCABULAIRE. 2de Section.
Have you been obliged to work much. Vous a-t-il fallu travailler beaucoup
to learn French?
I have been obliged to work much.
What am I to do?
You must work.
Am I to go thither?
You may go thither.
To be worth-been worth.
How much may that horse be worth?
It may be worth a hundred crowns.
I am worth.
He is not worth.
Are you worth?
Thou art worth.
We are worth-they are worth.
How much is that gun worth?
It is worth but one crown.
How much is that worth?
That is not worth much.
That is not worth anything.
This is worth more than that.
The one is net worth so much as the
other.
To be better.
Am I not as good as my brother?
You are better than he.
I am not so good as you.
To give back, to restore.
Does he restore you your book?
He does restore it to me.
Has he given you back your gloves?
He has given them back to me.
pour apprendre le Français ?
Il m'a fallu travailler beaucoup
Que dois-je faire ?
Vous devez travailler.
Faut-il y aller?
Vous pouvez y aller.
Valoir,* 3-valu.
Combien ce cheval peut-il valoir ?
Il peut valoir cent écus.
Valez-vous ?
Tu vaux.
Je vaux.
Il ne vaut pas.
Nous valons-ils valent.
Combien ce fusil vaut-il ?
Il ne vaut qu'un écu.
Combien cela vaut-il ?
Cela ne vaut pas grand' chose.
Cela ne vaut rien.
Celui-ci vaut plus que celui-là.
L'un ne vaut pas autant que l'autre.
Valoir mieux.
Est-ce que je ne vaux pas autant que
mon frère ?
Vous valez mieux que lui.
Je ne vaux pas autant que vous.
Rendre, 4. Rendu.
Vous rend-il votre livre ?
Il me le rend.
Rendez
Vous a-t-il rendu vos gants !
Il me les a rendus. -
200
THIRTY-NINTH LESSON. (2.)
Has your brother already commenced | Votre frère a-t-il déjà commencé 9 ¹º
his exercises?
Not yet.
He has not yet commenced them.
The gift.
The present.
Have you received a present?
I have received several.
Have you received the books?
I have received them.
From whom?
From whom have you received pre-
sents ?
From my friends.
Whence?
Where from?
Where do you come from?
I come from the garden.
Where is he come from?
He is come from the theatre.
Where did they come from?
thêmes ?
Pas encore.
Il ne les a pas encore commencés.
Le don.
Le présent.
Avez-vous reçu un présent?
J'en ai reçu plusieurs.
Avez-vous reçu les livres ?
Je les ai reçus.
De qui?
De qui avez-vous reçu des présents
De mes amis.
D'où ?
D'où venez-vous ?
Je viens du jardin.
D'où est-il venu?
Il est venu du théâtre.
D'où sont-ils venus ?
TRENTE-NEUVIÈME THÊME. 2de Sec.
N'oubliez pas d'écrire la date ici ou à la fin du thême.
Je
Voulez-vous sortir avec moi? Pourquoi sortez-vous? Je sors
pour acheter quelque chose. Que vous faut-il? Il me faut plu-
sieurs articles. Allons--allons-sortez-vous sans chapeau?
croyais l'avoir.—Je l'ai à présent. Êtes-vous prêt, vous-même?
(§ 411.) Je crois que oui. Non, non, attendez, attendez. Je n'ai pas
pris mon portefeuille. Ainsi vous n'avez pas d'argent. C'est une
bonne manière d'aller acheter. Chez qui allons-nous? D'abord
chez le marchand de drap. Vous faut-il du drap pour un habit?
Oui, il m'en faut. Vous en faut-il du bleu, du vert, du noir, ou du
gris? Je n'ai pas encore fait de choix. Nous sommes près du
magasin. Entrons. Bon jour, M. Bertrand. Messieurs, j'ai l'hon-
neur de vous saluer. Vous faut-il quelque chose ce matin? Du
drap, du velours, du satin? Quoi? Il faut du drap à Monsieur.
Et vous, M., ne vous faut-il rien? Non pas aujourd'hui. Vous
savez qu'avant-hier j'ai acheté plusieurs articles chez vous.
vrai; vous avez raison.
C'est
What do you want, Sir? I want some cloth.-How much is that
hat worth? It is worth four crowns.-Do you want any stockings?
I want some.—How much are those stockings worth? They are
worth two francs.-Is that all you want? That is all-Has your
little boy received a present? He has received several.-From
whom has he received any? He has received some from my father
and from yours.-Have you received any presents? I have received
FORTIETH LESSON. (1.)
201
some. What presents have you received? I have received fine
presents. How much may that horse be worth? It may be worth
five hundred crowns.
Is this book worth as much as that? It is worth more.-How
much is my gun worth? It is worth as much as that of your friend.
-Are your horses worth as much as those of the English? They
are not worth so much.-How much is that knife worth? It is
worth nothing.-Is your servant as good as mine? He is better
than yours. Are you as good as your brother? He is better than
I.-Art thou as good as thy friend? I am as good as he.-Are we
as good as our neighbors? We are better than they.-Is your um-
brella worth as much as mine? It is not worth so much.-Why is
it not worth so much as mine? Because it is not so fine as yours.
How much is that gun worth? It is not worth much.-Do you wish
to sell your horse? I do wish to sell it.-How much is it worth? It
is worth two hundred crowns.
FORTIETH LESSON, 40th.-Quarantième Leçon, 40me.
VOCABULAIRE. 1re Section.
After breakfast-dinner-supper.
After me, him, you, them, my friend.
After having spoken.
After having sold (selling) his horse.
After having been (being) there.
I put away the knife after cutting (or
having cut) the beef.
We took tea after dining.
We ate a late supper
To pay. ($144-3.)
To pay a man for a horse.
To pay the tailor for the coat.
Après déjeuné-après dîné-soupé.
Après moi, lui, vous, eux, mon ami.
† Après avoir parlé. (Rul. 1, N. 1.)
† Après avoir vendu son cheval.
† Après y avoir été.
† J'ai serré le couteau après avoir
coupé le bœuf.
† Nous avons pris le thé après avoir
dîné.
† Nous avons soupé tard.
Payer, 1, payé, payez (impéra. ·
† Payer un cheval à un homme.
+ Payer l'habit au tailleur,
!
Do you pay the shoemaker for the† Payez-vous les souliers au cor
shoes?
I pay him for them.
Does he pay you for the knife?
He does pay me for it.
I pay what I owe.
To ask, to ask of, to ask for. Ask for.
donnier ?
† Je les lui paie.
+ Vous paie-t-il le couteau ?
+ Il me le paie.
Je paie ce que je dois.
Demander, 1, demandez, (impéra.)
Obs. 93. The English verbs: to pay and to ask, require the preposition
for, before the object. In French, the object has no preposition, but the
person takes a. When the verb payer, however, has no object, do not use
& before the person.
202
FORTIETH LESSON. (1.)
I have paid the tailor.
I have paid him.
Have you paid the shoemaker ?
I have paid him.
Ask Lewis for some money.
I ask my father for some money.
Ask him for some.
Do you ask me for your hat ?
I do ask you for it.
To ask him for it.
To ask him for them.
What do you ask me for?
I ask you for nothing.
Ask (of) John if he has my pencil.
I did (ask him, or ask it of him).
What did you ask of the clerk?
I asked him to copy that.
He does not ask you to come.
J'ai payé le tailleur.
Je l'ai payé.
Avez-vous payé le cordonnier ?
Je l'ai payé.
+ Demandez de l'argent à Louis.
† Je demande de l'argent à mon
Demandez-lui-en.
père.
† Me demandez-vous votre chapeau ?
† Je vous le demande.
† Le lui demander.
† Les lui demander.
† Que me demandez-vous ?
† Je ne vous demande rien.
+ Demandez à Jean s'il a mon crayon.
† Je le lui ai demandé.
+ Qu'avez-vous demandé au com-
mis ?
† Je lui ai demandé de copier cela.
+ Il ne vous demande pas de venir.
QUARANTIÈME THEME. 1re Sec.
Qui est là? C'est le boulanger.-Lui avez-vous demandé trois
pains? (loaves?) Non, je ne lui en ai demandé que deux, comme
à l'ordinaire. Demandez-lui-en un autre. Je vais le lui demander.
Quel pain faut-il lui demander? Un rond ou un tortillon? (a twist
loaf?) Demandez-lui un tortillon, et s'il n'en a pas, prenez-en un
rond.-Faut-il lui payer cet autre pain? Oui, voici cinq sous,
payez-le.—Le laitier est-il venu? Non, pas encore, il vient, à l'ordi-
naire, après le boulanger. S'il a assez de lait, achetez-en pour 3
sous de plus qu'à l'ordinaire. Il n'en a jamais assez. Alors dites-lui
d'en apporter davantage, un peu plus, cet après-dîner. Faut-il le
payer? Non, n'importe. Le marchand me demande un dollar et
un quart pour ce parapluie, vaut-il cela? Je crois qu'il ne vaut pas
tant.—Quel âge as-tu, mon enfant? Je n'ai pas encore dix ans.-
Et ton frère, quel âge a-t-il? Il n'en a que huit. Apprenez-vous
déjà le Français tous deux? Je l'apprends déjà, mais il ne l'apprend
pas encore. Pourquoi donc? Parce que notre père croit qu'il est
trop jeune. N'écrit-il pas? Non, il n'écrit pas.-Et toi? Moi,
j'écris.
*
Have you paid for the new gun? I have paid for it.-Has your
uncle paid for the satin and the velvet? He has.-Have I not paid
the tailor for the clothes? Yes, you have (paid him for them).-
What is he asking for, then? He is not asking you to pay him for
the clothes, but for the handkerchiefs and gloves. He is right. I
have not yet paid him for them.-Have we paid for our cloaks?
FORTIETH LESSON. (2.)
203
}
We have. Has our cousin already paid for his shoes? He has not
yet paid for them.-Does my brother pay you what he owes you?
He does pay it me.-Do you pay what you owe? I do pay what I
owe. Have you paid the old baker? I have.-Has your uncle
paid the butcher for the beef? He has.-Who has broken my
knife? I have broken it after cutting the bread.
Has your son broken my pencils? He has broken them after
writing his notes.--Have you paid the merchant for the wine after
drinking it? I have paid for it after drinking it.-What did you do
after finishing your exercises? I went to my cousin's, in order to
conduct him to the museum.-What do you ask this man for? I
ask him for the money he is to pay me.-What does this boy ask
me for? He asks you for some money.-Do you ask me for any
thing? I ask you for a crown.-Do you ask me for the bread? I
do.—Which man do you ask for money? I ask it of the one who
owes me some. (82, N. 1.)-Which merchant do you ask for gloves?
I ask for some from those who live in William street. What do you
ask the baker for? I ask him for some fresh bread.
VOCABULAIRE.
Must I try to do that?
Yes, try to do it and to do it well.
You must try to do better.
To hold, held, hold. (24³.)
I hold, thou holdest, he holds, (one.)
Do you hold my dictionary?
I do.
I do not.
2de Section.
+ Me faut-il essayer de faire cela ?
Essayez de le faire et de le bien faire.
+ Il vous faut essayer de mieux faire
Tenir,* 2, tenu, tenez, (impéra,)
Je tiens, tu tiens, il tient, on tient.
Tenez-vous mon dictionnaire ?
Je le tiens.
Je ne le tiens pas.
Who holds the horse? The valet Qui tient le cheval? Le valet le
does.
tient.
Do we not hold them? We do not, Ne les tenons-nous pas ? Nous ne
but they do.
les tenons pas, mais ils les tiennent.
They hold what? The ladies' fans. Ils tiennent quoi ? Les éventails
des dames.
Obs. 94. I say! here! stop! wait! there! or any interjection used to
attract the attention of the person one speaks to, is... Tenez.
See! here! see here! Is it what you
seek?
No, I am looking for my thimble.
Here! Is that it? No, but there,
that is it.
My relation. All my relations.
My parents, (mean exclusively my
father and mother.)
A brother of mine. (§ 107.)
A cousin of yours.
Tenez! Est-ce ce que vous cher-
chez?
Non, je cherche mon dé. Tenez!
Est-ce cela? Non, mais tenez, e
voilà.
Mon parent. Tous mes parents.
Mes parents, (mean all my relations,
including father and mother.)
† Un de mes frères.
† Un de vos cousins.
204
FORTIETH LESSON. (2.)
A relation of his, or hers.)
A friend of ours.
A neighbor of theirs.
He tries to see you.
Does he try to see me?
He tries to see an uncle of his.
To try to....
To inquire after some one.
After whom do you inquire?
I inquire after a friend of mine.
They inquire after you.
Do they inquire after me?
Properly.
You write properly.
They do their duty properly.
Try to do your task or duty.
We have done it properly. (§ 170.)
A glass of wine.
A piece of bread.
† Un de ses parents.
† Un de nos amis.
+ Un de leurs voisins.
Il cherche à vous voir.
Cherche-t-il à me voir?
Il cherche à voir un de ses oncles
Chercher à...
+ Demander quelqu'un.
+ Qui demandez-vous ?
† Je demande un de mes amis.
† On vous demande.
† Me demande-t-on ?
Comme il faut.
Vous écrivez comme il faut.
Ils font leur devoir comme il fau
Cherchez à faire votre devoir.
Nous l'avons fait comme il faut.
Un verre de vin.
Un morceau de pain.
QUARANTIÈME THÊME. 2de Sec.
Bon jour, Monsieur. Comment ai-je prononcé cela? Vous n'avez
pas prononcé bon, comme il faut. Comment faut-il le prononcer?
Comme ceci: bon, sans continuer le son de l'n, (sound of the n.) Je
vais essayer de le prononcer comme il faut.-Le son de l'n Français
est difficile, n'est-ce pas? Non, ce son-là n'est pas très-difficile.
Comme je vous l'ai dit: il ne faut pas le continuer long-temps.
Comment est-ce que je le prononce à présent? bon: Vous le pro-
noncez mieux, presque comme il faut.-Comment mon cousin a-t-il
écrit son thême ? Il l'a écrit et traduit comme il faut.-Mes enfants
ont bien fait leurs devoirs, j'espère? Oui, ils les ont faits comme
il faut.-Ce général ne fait-il pas son devoir? Si fait, il le fait tou-
jours comme il faut, et il ne peut pas faire davantage. Ces deux
jeunes soldats font leur devoir, n'est-ce pas ? Ils le font aussi bien
qu'ils le peuvent.-Faites toujours votre devoir. Je le fais aussi bien
que je peux, c'est-à-dire, j'essaie.
At whose house do you dine to-day? My cousin and I (we) dine
at the house of a friend of mine, in Walnut street. With whom
did you take tea yesterday, that is to say, the day before yesterday?
Must you know it? If you will tell me. I will (N. 19¹) tell you. I
took ea at the house of a relation of yours. The one who has so
much merit. That very one, (celui-là même ou lui-même.)—Where
are you going? I am going to the house of a relation of mine,
in order to breakfast with him.-Art thou willing to hold my
gloves? I am willing to hold them.-Who holds my hat? Your
FORTIETH LESSON. (2.)
205
son holds it.-Dost thou hold my stick? I do.-Do you hold any-
thing? See, I hold your gun.-Who has held my book? Your
servant has.-Will you try to speak well? I will try.-Has your
little brother ever tried to do exercises? He has tried.-Have you
ever tried to make a hat? I have never tried to make one.-Whom
are you looking for? I am looking for the man who has sold a
horse to me. Is your relation looking for any one? He is looking
for a friend of his.-Are we looking for any one? We are looking
for a neighbor of ours.-Whom dost thou look for? I look for a
friend of ours.-Are you looking for a servant of mine? No, I am
looking for one of mine.-Have you tried to speak Spanish to your
uncle? I have tried to speak Italian to him.-Have you tried to see
my father? I have tried to see him.-Has he received you? He
has not. Has he received your brothers? He has.-Have you been
able to see your relation? I have not.
What did you do after writing your exercises? I wrote my note
after writing them.-After whom do you inquire? I inquire after
the tailor.-Does this sailor inquire after any one? He inquires
after you. Do they inquire after you? They do inquire after me.-
Do they inquire after me? They do not inquire after you, but after
a friend of yours.-Do you inquire after the physician? I do inquire
after him and after the lawyer.-What does your little brother ask
for? He asks for a small piece of bread.-Has he not yet breakfasted?
He has breakfasted, but he is still hungry.-What does your uncle
ask for? He asks for a glass of wine.-Has he not already drunk?
He has already drunk, but he is still thirsty. Then give him a glass
of wine.-Must I give a piece of old bread or of fresh bread to my
little brother? Give him neither a piece of old bread nor of fresh
bread; but give him a small piece of the cake which the cook made
last evening. If he wants a glass of new milk, can I give him one?
No, do not give him a glass of milk so soon after breakfast.-What
has the clerk got there? He has his thread gloves.-Has he had them
dyed? He has.-How has he had them dyed? He had them dyed
yellow. Light or dark? Neither light nor dark.-Did you ask the
butcher for beef or mutton? I asked him for beef. I do not like
mutton. (Obs. 53.)
RÉSUMÉ POUR LA 40ME LEÇON.
Les chevaux n'ont-ils pas assez de foin? Si fait, ils en ont
assez, mais nos petits oiseaux n'ont pas assez de grain.-N'avons-
nous ni poivre, ni vinaigre? Nous avons du poivre, mais nous
n'avons pas de vinaigre. Le jeune étranger n'a-t-il pas beau-
coup d'argent? Si fait, il en a beaucoup; mais le commis du grand
W
18
206
FORTIETH LESSON. (2.)
---
marchand n'en a pas beaucoup. N'avons-nous pas de lait? Si fait,
nous en avons un peu. En avons-nous assez? Nous n'en avons
guère, mais assez.-Le garçon du cuisinier a-t-il le cordon de fil de
notre vieux voisin? Non, il ne l'a pas. Que n'a-t-il pas ? Il n'a
pas le cordon de fil de notre vieux voisin.-Le petit garçon n'a-t-il
pas les bas de coton? Quels bas de coton? Ceux du jeune avocat.
Il ne les a pas.-Avez-vous du fromage de l'épicier? J'en ai un
peu. En avez-vous assez? Je n'en ai pas assez.-Avez-vous peur
de ce jeune homme-là? Non, je n'en ai pas peur.-Qui a soif?
Nous avons soif, et nous avons sommeil.-Le menuisier a-t-il eur
du chien? Non, le chien a peur du menuisier.-N'avons-nous pas
le parapluie de coton du chapelier? Non, nous ne l'avons pas, mais
nous avons les gants de fil de son ami.
Combien de bœufs avons-nous? Nous en avons trois. Combien
en a-t-il? Il n'en a qu'un. Combien les Allemands en ont-ils, ou,
Les Allemands, combien en ont-ils? Ils en ont cinq. N'en ont-ils
pas six? Non, ils n'en ont que cinq.-Qui a du courage? Notre
jeune commis en a. En a-t-il trop? Non, il n'en a pas trop, mais
assez.-Ce petit garçon-là a-t-il du cœur? Il n'en a guère.-Les
peintres ont-ils beaucoup d'argent? Non, ils n'en ont guère. En
avez-vous beaucoup? Je n'en ai qu'un peu. Qui en a beaucoup?
Nous en avons beaucoup.-Qu'avons-nous? Nous avons beaucoup
d'or et d'argent. En avons-nous trop? Nous n'en avons pas trop,
mais assez.—Les domestiques de l'épicier combien de verres ont-
ils? Ils en ont sept ou huit. N'en ont-ils pas neuf? Si fait, ils en
ont neuf. N'en ont-ils pas dix? Ils n'en ont que neuf. N'en ont-
ils pas assez? Pardonnez-moi, ils en ont assez.-Combien d'yeux
cet homme-ci a-t-il ? Il en a deux. Et celui-là, combien en a-t-il ?
Il n'en a qu'un.-N'avez-vous qu'un oiseau? Pardonnez-moi, j'en
ai deux. Ces garçons ont-ils beaucoup de bâtons? Quels garçons ?
Ceux-ci ou ceux-là? Ni ceux-ci ni ceux-là, mais ceux du menui-
sier. Ils n'en ont pas beaucoup.
Avez-vous le dernier papier? Non, je ne l'ai pas.-Avez-vous
un papier? Non, je n'en ai pas.-Le ministre a-t-il le journal de
hier? Il en a un.-Votre frère a-t-il le parapluie du président?
Non, mais il a le bâton du gouverneur, (governor.)—Qui a le cheval
du gouverneur? Notre vieux matelot l'a. A-t-il les gants du pré-
sident? Non, le président lui-même les a.-Le lieutenant-gouver-
neur a-t-il les billets du préfet? Il ne les a pas. Il n'a pas quoi?
Il n'a pas les billets du préfet. Je les ai.-Combien de francs le
président du Sénat a-t-il? Il n'en a pas; mais il a des dollars.
Combien en a-t-il ? Il en a beaucoup. En a-t-il trop? Il n'en a
pas trop. En avons-nous assez? Nous n'en avons pas assez. Les
FORTY-FIRST LESSON. (1.)
207
Américains n'en ont-ils pas assez? Ils n'en ont pas trop. Qui en a
trop? Personne n'en a trop.-Le président et le vice-président ont-
ils beaucoup d'amis? Ils en ont beaucoup; mais le préfet n'en a
guère. N'en avons-nous pas beaucoup? Si fait, nous en avons
beaucoup. Qui en a peu? Le Russe en a peu.
Avez-vous quelques sous? Oui, j'en ai quelques uns.-Ai-je
quelques écus? Vous n'en avez pas, mais vous avez des francs, et
des billets de banque. Combien en ai-je ? Vous en avez dix.- N'ai-
je pas deux billets de dix dollars? Non, vous n'en avez qu'un,
mais vous avez trois billets de cinq dollars.-Jean a le premier
volume de l'ouvrage de Thiers, n'a-t-il pas le second? Non, il n'a
que le premier. L'Américain n'a-t-il pas le dernier volume? Non,
il ne l'a pas. Qui l'a? Personne ne l'a.-Quelqu'un a le journal
du cinq de ce mois-ci, n'est-ce pas ? Le Russe a celui du six, du
sept, et du huit, mais non pas celui du cinq.-Quels papiers le jeune
chapelier a-t-il? Il a ceux que vous n'avez pas.-Les Allemands
n'ont-ils pas froid? Non, ils ont chaud et soif.-Le menuisier et
l'épicier n'ont-ils pas tort? Non, ils ont raison.-Notre cordonnier
n'a-t-il pas les souliers de cuir du gouverneur? Il a ceux du lieu-
tenant-gouverneur.--J'ai le douzième exercice, mon ami Charles a
le treizième, les avocats ont le quatorzième, qui a le quinzième?
Personne n'a le quinzième, mais nous avons le seizième et le dix-
septième.-Quel cahier avez-vous? J'ai le mien.-Le fils de l'ami
de votre maître est-il ici? Non, il est à Boston.
FORTY-FIRST LESSON, 41st.-Quarante et unième Leçon, 41me.
VOCABULAIRE.
The one who, he who, him who.
Those who
They who.
To perceive, perceived, perceive.
Do you perceive the scholar who
comes?
I do perceive the one who is coming.
The one on... Those in ... (§ 87.)
(§ 87.)
I do not like the one (those) coming.
Does your uncle perceive the soldiers
who are going to the covered bridge?
He does not perceive those who go.
Whom do the children perceive?
They perceive r.obody.
1re Section.
Celui qui. (§ 40.)
Ceux qui.
Apercevoir, aperçu, apercevez, (conju-
gué comme recevoir. (24¹, 243, 311.)
Apercevez-vous l'écolier qui vient?
J'aperçois celui qui vient.
Celui qui est sur Ceux qui sont
dans....
•
|
Je n'aime pas celui qui vient, ceux
qui viennent.
Votre oncle aperçoit-il les soldats qui
vont au pont couvert?
Il n'aperçoit pas ceux qui y vont.
Qui les enfants aperçoivent-ils ?
Ils n'aperçoivent personne.
208
FORTY-FIRST LESSON. (1.) .
How was the weather yesterday?
What kind of weather was it yest.?
What weather had we yesterday?
Was it fine weather yesterday?
It was bad weather yesterday.
It is fine weather this morning.
+ Quel temps a-t-il fait hier?
Quel temps avons-nous eu hier?
† A-t-il fait beau temps hier?
+ Il a fait mauvais temps hier.
+ Il fait beau temps ce matin.
It is neither cold nor warm, but plea-† Il ne fait ni chaud ni froid, mais
sant and dry.
Dark, obscure.
Clear, light.
Dusky, gloomy. Dry. Wet, damp.
Is the weather damp?
It is not damp, but dry.
The weather is too dry to be pleasant.
The moonlight, moonshine.
Is it moonlight?
The sun.
It is.
Have we too much sun?
Is.it too
sunny?
It is too sunny.
This syrup.
It is not.
His vinegar syrup.
Have you tasted this vinegar syrup?
I have.
How do you like it?
I have not.
agréable et sec.
Obscur.
Sombre.
† Fait-il humide ?
Clair.
Sec.
Humide.
+ Il ne fait pas humide, mais sec.
† Il fait trop sec pour être agréable.
+ Le clair de lune. Le soleil.
† Fait-il clair de lune? Il fait clair
de lune.
+ Fait-il trop de soleil?
† Il en fait trop. Il n'en fait pas trop.
Ce sirop. Son sirop de vinaigre.
Avez-vous goûté ce sirop de vinaigre?
Je l'ai goûté. Je ne l'ai pas goûté.
Comment le trouvez-vous ?
Obs. 95. The French seldom use aimer in similar cases.
What do you think of it?
I like it pretty well.
I do not like it at all.
To learn by heart. Learned by heart.
Learn every day something by heart.
I learn by heart.
What have you learned by heart?
We learned our exercises.
Who likes to learn by heart?
This fish. Do you like fish? (Obs. 53.)
+ Qu'en pensez-vous ?
† Je le trouve assez bon. Je l'aime
assez.
† Je ne le trouve pas bon du tout.
Apprendre par cœur. Appris par cœur.
Apprenez tous les jours quelque chose
par cœur. J'apprends par cœur.
Qu'avez-vous appris par cœur ?
Nous avons appris nos thêmes par
cœur.
Qui aime à apprendre par cœur ?
Ce poisson. Aimez-vous le poisson?
QUARANTE ET UNIÈME THÊME. 1re Sec.
Comment est le temps aujourd'hui? Il fait très-beau temps.-
A-t-il fait beau hier? Il a fait mauvais hier. Quel temps a-t-il fait
ce matin? Il a fait mauvais, mais à présent il fait agréable. Fait-il
chaud? Il fait très-chaud. Le thermomètre est à 81 degrés et .
Il ne fait pas froid, alors. Non, en vérité, il ne fait pas froid, mais
très-chaud, au contraire.-Avez-vous déjà été au nouveau jardin de
M.....? Non, je n'y ai pas encore été. Pourquoi donc ? Parce
que nous avons eu mauvais temps. Avez-vous peur du mauvais
temps? Je n'en ai pas peur quand je suis obligé de sortir; mais je
FORTY-FIRST LESSON. (2.)
209
n'aime pas à sortir quand il pleut. Mais il n'a pas fait de pluie
depuis plusieurs jours. Vous avez oublié; car, il en a fait hier,
avant-hier, et le jour avant. C'est-à-dire : jeudi, mercredi, et mardi.
Oui, vous avez raison.
Do you perceive the man who is coming? I do not perceive him,
—Do you perceive the soldier's children? I do perceive them.-Dc
you perceive the men who are going into the garden? I do not per-
ceive those who are going into the garden, but those who are going
to the market.—Does your brother_perceive the man who has lent
him money? He does not perceive the one who has lent him, but
the one to whom he has lent some.-Dost thou see the children who
are studying? I do not see those who are studying, but those who
are playing. Dost thou perceive anything? I perceive nothing.-
Have you perceived my parents' warehouses? I have perceived
them.-Where have you perceived them? I have perceived them
on that side of the road.
Allez-vous manger de ce poulet ou de ce poisson? De ce poulet,
s'il vous plaît. Je n'aime pas le poisson. Quel morceau voulez-
vous? N'importe. Donnez-moi le premier venu. N'avez-vous pas
de choix? Non, je n'ai pas de choix. Tenez, voici un bon morceau;
du moins, je l'aime. L'aimez-vous aussi? Je crois que oui, car, je
mange de tout; j'aime tout. Voulez-vous un verre de vin ou un
verre de sirop? Donnez-moi un verre de sirop; mais n'y mettez
pas beaucoup de sirop. Mettez-l'y vous-même. Donnez-le-moi
Je vais y en mettre un peu. Tenez, voilà le verre. Mettez-y le
sirop qu'il vous faut. Qui est ce petit Monsieur? C'est mon plus
jeune frère. En vérité ! Est-ce un bon enfant? Étudie-t-il comme
il faut? Il fait assez bien son devoir. Aime-t-il à apprendre par
cœur? Oui, il apprend tous les jours quelque chose par cœur. Les
écoliers n'aiment-ils pas généralement (generally) à apprendre par
cœur? Il y en a qui aiment à le faire; mais beaucoup aiment à
étudier, mais non pas à apprendre par cœur.
Do you intend going to see the new vessel of Mr. Tessier? I
do. When? to-morrow, or the day after? The day after to-mor-
row, if the weather is fine. Is it light enough in your counting-
house? It is not light in it.-Do you wish to work in mine? I do
wish to work in it.-Is it light there? It is very light there.-Why
cannot your brother work in his warehouse? He cannot work there,
because it is (il y fait) too dark.-Where is it too dark? In his
warehouse. Is it light in that hole? It is dark there.-Is the wea-
ther dry? It is very dry.-Is it damp? It is not damp. It is too
dry. Is it moonlight? It is not moonlight; it is very damp.f
→
18*
210
FORTY-FIRST LESSON. (2.)
what does your uncle speak? He speaks of the fine weather.-Of
what do those men speak? They speak of fair and bad weather.—
Have you tasted that wine? I have tasted it.-How do you like it?
I like it well.-How does your cousin like that cider? He does not
like it. Which wine do you wish to taste? I wish to taste that
which you have tasted.-Will you taste this tobacco? I have tasted
it already. How do you like it? I like it well.-Why do you not
taste that cider? Because I am not thirsty.-Why does your friend
not taste this beef? Because he is not hungry.
The pupil.
VOCABULAIRE. 2de Section.
Once a day.
Thrice, or three times a month.
So much a year.
So much a head.
So much a soldier. Six times a year.
Early in the morning.
We go out early in the morning.
When did your father go out?
To speak of some one or something.
Of whom do you speak?
L'élève.
† Une fois par jour.
+ Trois fois par mois.
† Tant par an.
+ Tant par tete.
(La tête, the head, est un nom fém.)
Tant par soldat.
Six fois par an.
Le matin de bonne heure.
Nous sortons le matin de bonne
heure.
Quand votre père est-il sorti}
Parler de quelqu'un ou de quelque
chose.
De qui parlez-vous ?
We speak of the man whom you Nous parlons de l'homme que vous
know.
Of what are they speaking?
They are speaking of the weather.
To be pleased, content, satisfied with.
connaissez.
De quoi parlent-ils ?
Ils parlent du temps.
Être content de……….
Obs. 96. To be pleased, cannot be translated literally in French; because
the verb plaire is intransitive, and cannot be used in the passive form.
Are you satisfied with this man?
I am pleased with him.
Are you pleased with your new coat?
I am pleased with it.
What are you pleased with?
Displeased, discontented.
I am displeased with him, or it.
They speak of your friend.
Do they? What do they say of him?
Are they speaking of your book?
They are. They are not.
Not. (§ 171, N. 2.)
The teacher and his pupil have not
gone out.
Be satisfied with what you have,
Êtes-vous content de cet homme-ci?
J'en suis content.
Êtes-vous content de votre habit
neuf ?
J'en suis content.
De quoi êtes-vous content?
Mécontent.
J'en suis mécontent.
On parle de votre ami.
En parle-t-on ? Qu'en dit-on ?
Parle-t-on de votre livre ?
On en parle. On n'en parle point
Ne.... point (nearly synonymous
to pas.)
• • •
Le maître et son élève ne sont point
sortis.
Soyez content de ce que vous avez.
FORTY-FIRST LESSON. (2.)
211
I am not dissatisfied with it.
Do they speak of the cholera?
They do.
What do they talk of? (or about?)
Nothing is spoken of.
Water. The water. Some water.
Wine and water. Syrup and water.
A glass (or drink) of water.
A drink of cider.
Je n'en suis point mécontent.
Parle-t-on du choléra?
On en parle.
De quoi parle-t-on ?
On ne parle de rien.
Eau, (féminin.) L'eau. De l'eau.
Du vin et de l'eau.
l'eau.
Un verre d'eau.
Un verre de cidre.
Du sirop et de
A glass of wine and water-of mine- Un verre de vin et d'eau-d'eau
ral water.
minérale.
QUARANTE ET UNIÈME THÊME. 2de Sec.
•
Ah! vous avez un morceau de pain et de beurre. Allez-v. us le
manger, ou le donner à quelqu'un? Je vais le manger, car j'ai
grand'faim.-Comment! Vous avez déjà faim? Il n'est pas tard
cependant. Combien de fois mangez-vous par jour? Nous man-
geons quatre fois.-Combien de fois vos enfants boivent-ils par jour?
Ils boivent plusieurs fois.-Buvez-vous aussi souvent qu'eux? Je
bois plus souvent.—Combien de fois par mois allez-vous au théâtre ?
Je n'y vais qu'une fois par mois.-Les élèves y vont-ils? Ils n'y
vont point.-De quoi parlent-ils? Ils parlent de leurs leçons. Font-
ils trois thêmes par jour? Ils n'en font que deux, mais ils les font
comme il faut.—Avez-vous pu lire le billet qu'on vous a écrit? Je
n'ai pas pu le lire tout. Est-ce qu'il est mal écrit? Oui, je vous
assure; voyez, vous-même. C'est vrai. Soyez le bien venu, M.—
Allons prendre un verre d'eau minérale. J'y mets toujours du sirop;
et vous? Moi, non.
How many times a year does your cousin go to the ball? He
goes two or three times during the winter.-Do you go there as
often as he? I am not used to go.-How often does your cook
go to market? He goes generally once a day; sometimes twice.
-Then he goes every day, except (excepté) Sunday; does he
not? Yes, he does.-Whom are you inquiring for? I inquire
for your English cousin. Is he at home? No, he is not.-Do
you like a large hat? I do not like a large hat, but a large
umbrella.—What do you like to do? I like to write.-Do you like
to see these little boys? I like to see them.-Do you like mineral
water, with syrup? I do.-Does your brother like cider? He does.
-What do the soldiers like? They like wine.-Dost thou like tea
or coffee? I like both. Do these children like to study? They
like to study and to play. Do you like to read and to write? I like
to read and to write. How many times a day do you go out? I go
212
FORTY-SECOND LESSON. (1.)
out as often as I need to go out.-Do you often go to my uncle's? 1
go there six times a year.-Do you understand the man who is
speaking to you? I do not.-Why do you not? Because he speaks
too badly.-Does this man know French? He knows it, but I do
not know it. Why do you not learn it? I have no time to learn it.
Of whom have they (on) spoken? They have spoken of your
friend. Have they not spoken of the physicians? They have not
spoken of them.-Do they not speak of the man of whom we have
spoken? They do speak of him.-Have they spoken of the noble-
men? They have spoken of thein.-Have they spoken of those of
whom we speak? They have not spoken of those of whom we
speak, but they have spoken of others.-Have they spoken of our
children or of those of our neighbors? They have spoken neither
of ours nor of those of our neighbors. Of which children have they
spoken? They have spoken of our master's.-Do they speak of
my work? They do speak of it.-Are you satisfied with your
pupils? I am satisfied with them.-How does my brother study?
He studies well.-How many exercises have you studied? I have
already studied forty-one.—Is your master satisfied with his scholar?
He is satisfied with him, and with the presents he has received.
FORTY-SECOND LESSON, 42d.--Quarante-deuxième Leçon, 42me.
VOCABULAIRE. 1re Section.
OF PASSIVE VERBS.-Des Verbes Passifs.
Passive verbs represent the subject as receiving or suffering from others
the action expressed by the verb. In French, as in English, they are con-
jugated by means of the auxiliary verb être, to be, joined to the past par-
ticiple of the active verb. Thus any active verb may be changed into the
passive voice. The past participle agrees with the nominative. (§ 159.)
Active voice.
I love.
Thou conductest.
He praises.
We hear.
To praise,
To punish,
Passive voice.
I am loved.
Thou art conduct-
ed.
He is praised.
We are heard.
Voix active.
J'aime.
Tu conduis.
Il loue.
Nous entendons.
Voix passive.
Je suis aimé.
Tu es conduit.
Il est loué.
Nous sommes
entendus.
Vous êtes punis.
Ils sont blâmés.
louez, (impéra.)
punissez.
You punish.
They blame.
You are punished.
They are blamed.]
Vous punissez.
Ils blâment.
praised,
praise.
punished,
punish.
Louer, 1,
Punir, 2,
loué,
puni,
To blame,
blamed,
blame no
Blâmer, 1, blâmé,
one.
sonne.
By.
Par or de.
Br me.
By us.
De or par moi,
de or par nous,
Ne blâmez per-
FORTY-SECOND
213
LESSON. (1.)
By thee,
By him,
by you.
by them.
By whom is the naughty punished?.
He is punished by his father.
By whom is the good loved?
He is loved by everybody.
De or par toi,
De or par lui,
de or par vous.
d' or par eux.
Par qui le méchant est-il puni?
Il est puni par son père.
De qui le bon est-il aimé ?
Il est aimé de tout le monde.
Obs. 97. Par is used for physical or mental actions. De relates to the
affections of the heart or soul.
Which man is praised, and which is | Quel homme est loué, et lequel est
blamed?
Naughty, wicked. The naughty.
Skilful, clever. Diligent.
Assid.ous, industrious, studious.
Idle, lazy.
Ignorant.
The idler, the lazy fellow.
blâmé ?
Méchant. Le méchant.
Habile.
Diligent.
Assidu, industrieux, studieux.
Paresseux. Ignorant.
Le paresseux.
To reward. To esteem. To despise. Récompenser, 1. Es imer, 1. Mé-
To hate, hating, hated.
I hate, thou hatest, he hates.
Good, wise.)
These children are loved, because
they are studious and good.
To travel (to go) to a.... (to the.)
Where has he travelled to ?
He has travelled to Vienna.
Is it good travelling?
It is good travelling.
It is bad travelling.
In the spring.
It is bad travelling in the winter.
priser, 1.
Hair,* 2, haissant, haï. (24¹.)
Je hais, tu hais, il hait, (le sing. est
irrégulier.)
Sage, (said only of childr a.)
Ces enfants sont aimés, parce qu'ils
sont studieux et sages.
Aller,*1, à ... (au) (avant un nom.)
Où est-il allé ?
Il est allé à Vienne.
+ Fait-il bon voyager?
+ Il fait bon voyager.
+ Il fait mauvais voyager.
Dans le printemps, au printemps.
Il fait mauvais voyager dans l'hiver.
QUARANTE-DEUXIÈME THÊME. 1re Sec.
De qui avez-vous parlé? Nous avons parlé de vous. M'avez-
vous loué? Nous ne vous avons pas loué, au contraire, nous vous
avons blâmé. Pourquoi m'avez-vous blâmé? Parce que vous
n'étudiez pas bien.-Votre frère vous a parlé de quoi? Il a parlé de
ses livres, de ses chevaux et de ses chiens.-Pourquoi ses enfants
sont-ils aimés? Parce qu'ils sont bons, ils sont aimés. Sont-ils plus
sages que nous? Ils ne sont pas plus sages que vous, mais ils sont
plus studieux. Votre cousin est-il aussi assidu que le mien? Il est
aussi assidu que le vôtre, mais le vôtre est plus sage que le mien.
Fait-il bon voyager au printemps? Il fait bon voyager au printenips
et dans l'automne; mais il fait mauvais voyager dans l'été et dans
l'hiver.-Aimez-vous à voyager? Avez-vous quelque fois voyagé en
hiver? J'aime assez à voyager, et j'ai souvent voyagé en été, mais
214
FORTY-SECOND LESSON. (2.)
pas en hiver.-Le général est souvent malade, vous savez qu'il a la
goutte. Pourquoi ne voyage-t-il pas ? Il dit que le printemps est trop
humide, l'été trop chaud, et l'hiver trop froid. Et que dit-il de l'au-
tomne? Il dit qu'alors il est trop occupé pour voyager.
Are you loved? I am loved. By whom are you loved? I am
loved by my uncle.-By whom am I loved? Thou art loved by thy
parents. By whom are we loved? You are loved by your friends.
-By whom are those boys loved? They are loved by their neigh-
bors. By whom is this man conducted? He is conducted by me.-
Where do you conduct him to? I conduct him home.-By whom
are we blamed? We are blamed by our enemies.-Why are we
blamed by them? Because they do not love us.-Are you punished
by your master? I am not punished by him, because I am good and
studious. Are we heard? We are.-By whom are we heard? We
are heard by our neighbors.-Is thy master heard by his pupils?
He is heard by them.-Which children are praised? Those that are
good. Which are punished? Those that are idle and naughty.-Are
we praised or blamed? We are neither praised nor blamed.
Is our friend loved by his masters? He is loved and praised by
them, because he is studious and good; but his brother is despised
by his, because he is naughty and idle.—Is he sometimes punished?
He is (il l'est) every morning and every evening.-Are you some-
times punished? I am (je ne le suis) never; I am loved and
rewarded by my good masters.-Are these children never punished?
They are (ils ne le sont) never, because they are studious and good;
but those are so (le sont) very often, because they are idle and
naughty.-Who is praised and rewarded? Skilful children are
praised, esteemed, and rewarded, but the ignorant are blamed,
despised, and punished. Who is loved, and who is hated? He who
is studious and good is loved, and he who is idle and naughty is
hated. Must one be (faut-il être) good in order to be loved? One
must be so, (il faut l'être.)-What must one do (que faut-il faire) in
orde. to be loved? One must be good and assiduous.—What must
one do in order to be rewarded? One must be (il faut être) skilful,
and study much.
VOCABULAIRE.
'T'o drive, to ride in a carriage.
To ride (on horseback).
To go on foot, to walk.
Do you like to ride on horseback ?
I like to drive.
2de Section.
Aller en voiture,
Aller à cheval,
Aller à pied,
take the aux-
iliary être.
Aimez-vous à monter à cheval?
J'aime à aller en voiture.
To live,
I live.
lived,
thou livest,
living.
Vivre,* 4,
vécu, vivant.
hives.
Je vis,
tu vis,
il vit.
FORTY-SECOND LESSON. (2.) ·
215
Is it good living in Paris?
Is the living good in Paris?
It is good living there.
The living is good there.
Dear.
Is the living dear in London ?
Is it dear living in London?
The living is dear there.
Thunder.
The thunder roars.
This fog, mist.
Does the wind blow?
The wind blows.
'This storm.
Is it windy?
It is windy.
It is not windy.
It is very windy.
Does it thunder?
Is it foggy?
It is stormy.
It is not stormy.
Does the sun shine?
It thunders very much.
As soon as, as soon as I, as they.
As soon as I have eaten, I drink.
As soon as I have taken off my shoes,
I take off my stockings.
What do you do in the evening?
Do I sleep? Thou sleepest. Who
sleeps ?
Does the child sleep? He still sleeps.
Without money. Without speaking.
Without saying anything, (a word.)
At last.
To arrive.
Arrived.
Has he arrived at last?
He has not arrived yet.
}
+ Fait-il bora vivre à Paris í
† Il y fait bon vivre.
| Cher.
† Fait-il cher vivre à Londres?
+ Il y fait cher vivre.
Le tonnerre.
Cet orage.
Le tonnerre gronde.
Ce brouillard.
+ Fait-il du veni?
t Il fait du vent.
+ Il ne fait pas de vent.
+ Il fait beaucoup de vent.
+ Fait-il du tonnerre ?
† Fait-il du brouillard?
+ Il fait de l'orage.
+ Il ne fait pas d'orage.
t Fait-il du soleil ?
+ Il fait beaucoup de tonnerre.
Aussitôt que, aussitôt que moi, qu'eux,
Aussitôt que j'ai mangé, je bois.
Aussitôt que j'ai ôté mes souliers,
j'ôte mes bas.
Que faites-vous le soir?
Est-ce que je dors? Tu dors. Qui
dort?
L'enfant dort-il?
Il dort encore.
Sans argent. † Sans parler. (Dir. 1.)
↑ Sans rien dire. † Sans dire un mot.
Enfin.
Arriver, 1. Arrivée. (être pour auxil.)
Est-il enfin arrivé ?
Il n'est pas encore arrivé.
Is he coming at last? To be sure, he is. Vient-il enfin ? Sans doute, il vient.
And then.
Puis, et puis.
As soon as he has supped, he reads, Aussitôt qu'il a soupé, il lit, puis il
and then he sleeps.
dort.
QUARANTE-DEUXIÈME THÊME. 2de Sec.
Aimez-vous à monter à cheval le matin? Non, mais j'aime à
monter à cheval le soir. Pourquoi? Parce que le soir, il fait plus
frais, et vous dormez mieux après votre retour. Je crois que vous
avez raison, et cependant on monte plus à cheval le matin que le
soir. Votre frère a-t-il jamais monté à cheval? Il n'y a jamais
monté. Votre oncle monte-t-il à cheval aussi souvent que votre
père? Ils vont souvent à cheval l'un avec l'autre.-Avez-vous été
en voiture au pont de fil de fer? Oui, nous y avons été plusieurs fois.
Y avez-vous déjà été à cheval? Non, je n'y ai jamais été à cheval
216
FORTY-SECOND LESSON. (2.)
Allons-y cet après-midi. À cheval ou en voiture? À cheval. Non,
mais à pied, si vous voulez.-Aimez-vous à aller à pied? Oui, j'aime
beaucoup à aller à pied, il fait trop de poussière pour y aller à cheval.
Have you been in London? I have been there.-Is the living
good there? The living is good there, but dear.-Is it dear living
in Paris? It is good living there, and not dear.-Do you like travel-
ling in France? I like travelling there, because one finds good peo-
ple (de bonnes gens) there.-Does your friend like travelling in Hol-
land? He does not like travelling there, because the living is bad
there. Do you like travelling in Italy? I do like travelling there,
because the living is good there, and one (et qu'on y) finds good
people there; but the roads are not very good there.-Do the English
like to travel in Spain? They do like to travel there; but they find
the roads there too bad.-How is the weather? The weather is very
bad. Is it windy? It is very windy.-Was it stormy yesterday?
It was very stormy, (un grand orage.) Do you go to the market this
morning? I do go thither, if it is not stormy.-Do you intend going
to France this year? (cette année ?) I intend going thither, if the
weather is not too bad.-Do you like to go on foot? I do not like
to go on foot, but I like going in a carriage when (quand) I am
travelling.—Will you go on foot? I cannot go on foot, because I am
tired.
4
What sort of weather is it? It thunders.-Does the sun shine?
The sun does not shine; it is foggy.—Do you hear the thunder? it
roars. Yes, I hear it: it roars much.-Is it fine weather? The
wind blows hard, and the thunder roars much.-What do you do in
the evening? I work as soon as I have supped.—And what do you
do afterwards? Afterwards I sleep.-When do you drink? Idrink
as soon as I have eaten.-When do you sleep? I sleep as soon as
I have supped.-Have you spoken to the merchant? I have spoken
to him. What has he said? He has left (partie) without saying
anything.-Can you work without speaking? I can work, but not
(non pas) study French without speaking.-Wilt thou go for some
wine? I cannot (point) go for wine without money.-Have you
bought any horses? I do not buy without money.-Has your father
arrived at last? He has arrived.-When did he arrive? This morn-
ing at four o'clock.-Has your cousin set out at last? He has not
set out yet. Have you at last found a good master? I have at last
found one. Are you at last learning German? I am at last learning
it. Why have you not already learned it? Because I have not been
able to find a good master.
FORTY-THIRD LESSON. (1.)
217
FORTY-THIRD LESSON, 43d.-Quarante-troisième Leçon, 43me.
VOCABULAIRE. 1re Section.
OF REFLECTIVE VERBS.-Des Verbes Réfléchis ou Pronominaux.
See ($180), and study it carefully.
To cut yourself.
To cut myself.
To cut ourselves.
Do you burn yourself?
I do not burn myself.
Me couper.
Vous couper.
To cut himself.
To cut herself.
se couper.
Nous couper.
To cut itself.
To cut one's self.
You do not burn yourself.
Vous brûlez-vous ?
Je ne me brûle point.
Vous ne vous brûlez pas.
Je ne me vois point.
I see myself.
I do not.
Je me vois.
Do I see myself?
Est-ce que je
me vois ?
He sees himself.
He does not.
We see ourselves.
They see themselves. They do not.
Do you wish to warm yourself?
I do wish to warm myself.
Does he wish to warm himself?
He does wish to warm himself.
They wish to warm themselves.
Il se voit.
Il ne se voit point.
Nous nous voyons.
Ils se voient. Ils ne se voient point.
Voulez-vous vous chauffer?
Je veux me chauffer.
Veut-il se chauffer?
Il veut se chauffer.
Ils veulent se chauffer.
To enjoy, to divert, to amuse myself. M'amuser, 1, (à, avant l'infinitif.)
To pass or spend my time.
elf.'}
Let me amuse myself. Amuse your-
self.
Laissez-moi m'amuser.
vous.
Amusez-
Enjoy yourself, but do not neglect Amusez-vous, mais ne négligez point
your duty.
How do you spend or pass your
time ?¹ I pass it in reading.
He passes his time in playing.
Each.
Each man.
Each one.
Each of those men.
votre devoir.
† À quoi vous amusez-vous ?
† Je m'amuse à lire.
+ Il s'amuse à jouer.
Chaque (avec le nom.) Chacun (sans
nom.)
Chaque homme.
hommes.
Chacun de ces
Each man amuses himself as he likes. Chaque homme s'amuse comme il
veut.
Each one amuses himself in the best
Chacun s'amuse de son mieux.
way he can.
The taste.
The good taste.
Le goût.
Le bon goût.
Chaque homme a son goût.
Le mien est d'étudier.
Each man has his taste.
Mine is to study.
Obs. 98.
Translate is to, meaning, consists in, by est de, (mind the prepos.)
¹ Vous amusez-vous? which is much used by the French, is rendered in
English, not by: do you amuse yourself? but by, pass or spend your time,
as above.
#
19
218
FORTY-THIRD LESSON. (1.)
QUARANTE-TROISIÈME THAME. 1re Sec.
Ah! vous voilà, enfin ! Je vous ai attendu long-temps. Je suis
fâché de vous avoir fait attendre; mais je n'ai pas pu (§ 148) venir
plutôt. Quelqu'un est-il malade chez vous? Non, mais... N'im-
porte. Parlons de votre nouveau cheval. Vous plaît-il? (are you
pleased?) Il ne me plaît pas beaucoup. Pourquoi donc? 11 est
bon, il va bien; mais il est si grand, si grand que j'ai l'air d'un enfant
quand je suis dessus. L'avez-vous essayé déjà? Oui, deux fois.-
Est-il difficile à monter? Non, pas du tout.-Joseph. Joseph! Or
m'appelle. Je crois que c'est mon oncle qui a besoin de moi
Allez, alors. Adieu. Attendez. Je veux vous demander quelque
chose. Quoi? Voulez-vous revenir ce soir? Ce soir? Je crois
que non.
Je suis très-occupé. Mais vous-même, venez me voir.
Et pourquoi? Si vous êtes si occupé, nous ne pouvons ni parler ni
nous amuser ensemble. Vous avez raison; mais, il me faut partir.
Adieu, au plaisir. Au plaisir.
Who kindles your fire? Our servant does.-Does he kindle it
well? He burns himself sometimes.-Does he make your coffee?
Yes, and he does it first-rate, (excellent.) You have been in Eng-
land, have you not? Yes, I have. And in Ireland too? No, I
would not (did not wish to) go there.-Were you afraid to go? Yes,
a little. How is the living there? (y vit-on ?) So, so; not so well
as in England and France.-Where is the living dearer, in Paris or
in London? It is dearer in Paris, no, I mean in London.-Do peo-
ple despise the lazy and the wicked? Yes, people despise them.
-What is esteemed? Merit is.-Do scholars love or hate their
teachers? Some love and esteem them; others hate them. The
studious is generally esteemed, is he not? Yes, he is, by every-
body. Do parents punish their bad children? Yes, they do, when
these do something wrong, (mal.)
Do you see yourself in that small looking-glass? I see myself
in it.-Can your friends see themselves in that large looking-glass?
They can see themselves therein. Why does your brother not light
the fire? He does not light it, because he is afraid of burning him-
self.—Why do you not cut your bread? I do not cut it, because I
fear to cut my finger.-Have you a sore finger? I have a sore finger
and a sore foot.-Do you wish to warm yourself? I do wish to warm
myself, because I am very (grand) cold.-Why does that man not
warm himself? Because he is not cold.-Do your neighbors warm
themselves? They warm themselves, because they are cold.-How
do you pass your time? I pass it in the best way I can.-How do
your children pass their time? They pass it in studying, writing,
and playing-How does your cousin spend his? He amuses him-
FORTY-THIRD LESSON. (2.)
219
self in reading good books and in writing to his friends.—What do
you do when you have nothing to do at home? I go to the play,
and to the concert.-I often say, "Every one amuses himself as he
likes."-Every man has his taste; what is yours? Mine is to study,
to read a good book, to go to the theatre, the concert, and the ball,
and to ride. His, is to do nothing. Theirs, is to have fine dogs.
Each of you, us, them.
VOCABULAIRE.
2de Section.
Chacun de vous, de nous, d'eux.
Le beau monde.
The world, (the people.) Genteel Le monde.
people.
Every one, everybody, says and be-
lieves so.
Everybody speaks of it, them, you,
&c.
Every one (any one) is liable to make
a mistake.
To be subject to (plagued with) the
toothache.
We are all liable to make mistakes.
To mistake, to be mistaken.
Do not make a mistake (impera.)
Are you mistaken? I am.
Is he mistaken?
To deceive, to cheat.
He has cheated me.
He is not.
He has cheated me of a hundred
francs.
You cut your finger.
Tout le monde le dit et le croit.
Tout le monde (chacun) en parle.
Tout homme (chaque homme) est
sujet à se tromper.
Etre sujet au mal de dents.
Nous sommes tous sujets à nous
tromper.
+ Me, te, se, nous, vous tromper, 1.
† Ne vous trompez pas. (§ 55.)
+ Vous trompez-vous? Je me trompe.
+ Se trompe-t-il ? Il ne se trompe
point.
Tromper, 1.
Il m'a trompé.
Il m'a trompé de cent francs.
Vous vous coupez le doigt.
Obs. 99. When an agent performs an act upon a part of himself, the verb
is made reflective.
I cut my nails.
A hair.
Je me coupe les ongles.
Un cheveu, (plur. x.)
To pull out, pluck out, extract, snatch. Arracher, 1.
He pulls out his hair.
He cuts his hair.
The dentist extracts one of his teeth.
To go away, (tear or take one's self
away from a place.)
Il s'arrache les cheveux.
Il se coupe les cheveux.
Le dentiste arrache une de ses dents.
M', t', s', nous, vous en aller,* 1.
Obs. 100. Je m'en vais, is equivalent to: I take myself from here.
Are you going away?
I am not.
Is he going away?
Is he not going away?
Am I going?
I am.
He is not.
He is.
You are.
Vous en allez-vous? Je m'en vais
† Je ne m'en vais pas.
+ S'en va-t-il ? Il ne s'en va point.
† Ne s'en va-t-il point? Il s'en va.
+ M'en vais-je ? Vous vous en allez.
220
FORTY-THIRD LESSON. (2.)
Are we not going away?
Yes, we are.
Are these pupils going away?
They are not.
To feel sleepy.
Do you feel sleepy?
I do feel sleepy.
To soil.
Do not soil.
To fear, dread, feared, fear nothing.
Not to fear. (§ 171–7.)
I dread. He fears he has nothing.
He fears to soil his fingers.
Do you dread to go out?
I do dread to go out.
He is afraid not to go there.
Do you fear that man?
I do not fear him.
What do you fear?
Nothing.
Whom do you fear?
I fear nobody.
Nobody.
+ Ne nous en allons-nous pas ?
† Si fait, nous nous en allons.
Ses élèves s'er. vont-ils ?
+ Ils ne s'en vont pas.
† Avoir envie de dormir.
† Avez-vous envie de dormir?
† J'ai envie de dormir.
Salir, 2. Ne salissez pas.
Craindre,* 4, craint.
Ne
rien.
pas
Ne craignez
craindre (de av. l'infin.)
Je crains. Il craint de ne rien avoir.
Il craint de se salir les doigts.
Craignez-vous de sortir?
Je crains de sortir.
Il craint de ne pas y aller.
Craignez-vous cet homme ?
Je ne le crains pas.
Que craignez-vous ? Rien.
Qui craignez-vous ?
Je ne crains personne.
QUARANTE-TROISIÈME THÊME. 2de Sec.
Personne.
Vous avez l'air d'avoir chaud, prenez un verre de sirop. Avez-
vous de l'eau minérale ici? Non, nous n'en avons point; mais nous
pouvons en envoyer chercher, ou plutôt, allons-en boire, chacun un
verre, chez l'apothicaire du coin. Volontiers. Allons-y. Venez
aussi, Frédéric, ne voulez-vous pas? Non, je n'ai pas soif, mais j'ai
faim. Ainsi, à votre retour, apportez-moi un ou deux gâteaux. Où
pouvons-nous en acheter? Vous pouvez en trouver chez le mar-
chand de gâteaux. Demeure-t-il au coin? Non, il demeure au
milieu de la rue. De quel côté? De ce côté-ci. N'avez-vous jamais
rien acheté chez lui? Non, je n'achète jamais de gâteaux. Pour-
quoi donc ? Ne les aimez-vous pas? Si fait, je les aime beaucoup,
au contraire, mais je n'ai pas souvent faim avant dîner. Avant de
vous en aller, prêtez-moi votre canif. Pour faire quoi? (ou mieux :
pourquoi faire?) Pour me couper les ongles. Ne vous coupez-vous
pas les ongles avec des ciseaux? Non, je ne peux pas me couper
les ongles avec des ciseaux. N'avez-vous pas de canif? Si fait,
j'en ai un; le voici; mais il ne coupe pas assez, pour me couper les
ongles.
Do you cut your hair? (les cheveux.) I do cut my hair.
hair.-Does
your friend cut his hair? He cuts his nails, but not his hair.-Why
does that man pull out his hair? Is he crazy? Yes, he is.-Why
does not your cousin brush his coat? He does not brush it, because
FORTY-FOURTH LESSON. (1.)
221
1
he is afraid of soiling his fingers.—What does my neighbor tell
you? He tells me that (que) you wish to buy his horse; but I know
that (que) he is mistaken, because you have no money to buy it.~~
What do they (on) say at the market? They say that (que) the
enemy is beaten.-Do you believe that? I believe it, because
every one says so.-Why have you bought that book? I have
bought it, because I want it to learn French, and because every one
speaks of it, and praises it.-Are your friends going away? They
are. When are they going away? They are going away to-mor-
row. When are you going away? We are going away to-day.—
Am I going away? You are going away, if you like, (si vous vou-
lez.)—What do our neighbors say? They are going away without
saying anything.-How do you like this wine? I do not like it.
What is the matter with you? I feel sleepy.-Does your frie ad
feel sleepy? He does not feel sleepy, but he is cold.- Why does
he not warm himself? He has no wood to make a fire.-Why does
he not buy some wood? He has no money to buy any.-Will you
lend him some? If he has none I will lend him some.-Are you
thirsty? I am not thirsty, but very hungry, (grand'faim.)—Is your
servant sleepy? He is sleepy.-Is he hungry? He is hungry.—
Why does he not eat? Because he has nothing to eat.-Are your
children hungry? They are hungry, but they have nothing to eat.
-Have they anything to drink? They have nothing to drink.-
Why do you not eat? I do not eat when (quand) I am not hungry.
-Why does the Russian not drink? He does not drink when he
is not thirsty.-Did your brother eat anything yesterday evening?
He ate a piece of beef, a small piece of fowl, and a piece of bread.
-Did he not drink? He also drank.—What did he drink? He
drank a glass of wine and water, and some syrup and water.
FORTY-FOURTH LESSON, 44th.—Quarante-quatrième Leçon, 44me.
VOCABULAIRE. 1re Section.
PERFECT OF REFLECTIVE VERBS.—Parfait des Verbes Réfléchis.
Have you cut yourself?
I have cut myself.
Have I cut myself?
You have cut yourself.
You have not cut yourself.
Hast thou cut thyself?
I have not cut myself.
Has your brother cut himself?
Vous êtes-vous coupé ? ($180—2.)
Je me suis coupé.
Me suis-je coupé ?
Vous vous êtes coupé.
Vous ne vous êtes pas coupé.
T'es-tu coupé ?
Je ne me suis pas coupé.
Votre frère s'est-il coupé !
19*
222
FORTY-FOURTH LESSON. (1.)
He has cut himself.
Have we cut ourselves? (§ 180—2.)
We have not cut ourselves.
Have these men cut themselves?
They have not cut themselves.
To walk, take a walk,
To go a walking, to stroll.
a stroll.
To take an airing in a carriage.
A new coach.
The coach.
To take a ride.
Do you take a walk?
I do take a walk.
Does he take a walk? He does.
We take a walk.
Thou wishest to take an airing.
They wish to take a ride.
To main a child.
Il s'est coupé.
Nous sommes-nous coupés ?
Nous ne nous sommes pas coupés.
Ces hommes se sont-ils coupés?
Il ne se sont pas coupés.
† Me, te, se, nous, vous, promener.
† Aller me, te, &c., promener.
† Se promener en carrosse.
Le carrosse. Un carrosse neuf
† Se promener à cheval.
Vous promenez-vous ?
† Je me promène. (§ 144-4.)
† Se promène-t-il? Il se promène.
Nous nous promenons.
Tu veux te promener en carrosse.
Ils veulent se promener à cheval.
Promener un enfant.
Do you take your children a walk- Promenez-vous vos enfants?
ing?
I take them a walking every morn-
ing.
To
go
to bed, lie down.
To go to bed, to get in bed.
Go to bed.
Je les promène tous les matins.
Couchez-vous.
† Aller se coucher, se mettre au lit.
Allez-vous coucher. Mettez-vous
au lit.
Go to bed.
† Se coucher, 1.
Get in bed, (impera.)
To get up, to rise.
Get up, rise.
+ Se lever, 1.
Do you rise early?
I rise at sunrise.
Levez-vous.
I go to bed at sunset.
The (or at) sunrise.
The (or at) sunset.
Gentlemen, at what time did you go
to bed?
At three o'clock in the morning.
At what o'clock did he go to bed
yesterday?
He went to bed late.
Vous levez-vous de bonne heure?
Je me lève au lever du soleil.
Je me couche au coucher du soleil.
Le (ou au) lever du soleil.
Le (ou au) coucher du soleil.
Messieurs, à quelle heure vous êtes-
vous couchés ? (§ 180-2.)
À trois heures du matin.
À quelle heure s'est-il couché hier?
Il s'est couché tard.
QUARANTE-QUATRIÈME THÊME. 1re Sec.
Je n'ai pas vu George, ce matin, où est-il? Il est allé chez le
dentiste. Pourquoi? A-t-il mal aux dents? Oui, il l'a eu toute la
nuit, (all night.) Va-t-il se faire arracher une dent? (féminin.) Qui,
si le dentiste veut l'arracher.-N'arrache-t-il pas toujours les dents
quand on le veut? Non, je vous assure. Pourquoi donc ? Parce
que quelque fois ce n'est pas nécessaire.-Avez-vous jamais eu unc
dent arrachée? Non, jamais encore. Que vous à dit le jardinier?
Il m'a dit qu'on a arraché un de ses petits arbres. En vérité! Qui
peut l'avoir arraché? Il n'en sait rien. J'ai oublié de vous rendre
FORTY-FOURTH LESSON. (2.)
223
votre canif, mais le voici, tenez, prenez-le. Merci. C'est moi qui
vous remercie. Qu'avez-vous au doigt? Je me suis coupé.-Avec
quoi? Avec un des couteaux du cuisinier. Qu'avez-vous mis des-
sus? Rien encore. N'allez-vous rien y mettre? Pardonnez-moi.
Un peu d'eau de Cologne et un morceau de linge.
Have you cut your hair? I have not cut it (myself), but I have had
it cut, (me les suis fait couper.)-What has this child done? He has
cut his foot.—Why did they give him a knife? They gave him onə
to (pour) cut his nails, and he has cut his finger and his foot.-Do
you go to bed early? I go to bed late, for I cannot sleep when I
go to bed early.-At what o'clock did you go to bed yesterday?
Yesterday I went to bed at a quarter past eleven.-At what o'clock
10 your children go to bed? They go to bed at sunset.-Do they
rise early? They rise at sunrise.-At what o'clock did you rise
to-day? To-day I rose late, because I went to bed late yesterday
evening, (hier au soir.)
Does your son rise late? He rises early, for he never goes to bed
late. What does he do when he gets up? He studies, and then
breakfasts.-Does he not go out before he breakfasts? No, he
studies and breakfasts before he goes out.--What does he do after
breakfasting? As soon as he has breakfasted he comes to my house,
and we take a ride.-Didst thou rise this morning as early as I? I
rose earlier than you, for I rose before sunrise. Do you often go a
walking? I go a walking when I have nothing to do at home.-Do
you wish to take a walk? I cannot take a walk, for I have too
much to do. Has your brother taken a ride? He has taken an
airing in a carriage.-Do your children often go a walking? They
go a walking every morning, after breakfast.—Do you take a walk
after dinner? After dinner I drink tea, and then I take a walk.
VOCABULAIRE.
To rejoice at something.
I rejoice at your happiness.
At what does your uncle rejoice?
I have rejoiced.
They have rejoiced.
You have made a mistake.
We have made a mistake.
To hurt somebody.
The evil, the pain,
Have you hurt that man?
I have hurt that man.
the harm.
Why did you hurt that man?
2de Section.
† Se réjouir 2 de quelque chose.
Je me réjouis de votre bonheur.
De quoi votre oncle se réjouit-il ?
Je me suis réjoui.
Ils se sont réjouis.
+ Vous vous êtes trompé.
+ Nous nous sommes trompés.
+ Faire du mal à quelqu'un.
Le mal.
† Avez-vous fait du mal à cet
homme ?
† J'ai fait du mal à cet homme.
+ Pourquoi avez-vous fait du mal à
cet homme ?
224
FORTY-FOURTH LESSON. (2.)
I have not hurt him.
Does that hurt you?
That hurts me.
To do good to anybody.
Have I ever done you any harm?
No; on the contrary, you have done
me good.
I have never done harm to any one.
Have I hurt you?
You have not hurt me.
That does me good.
To do with, to dispose of.
† Je ne lui ai pas fait de mal.
+ Cela vous fait-il du mal ?
+ Cela me fait du mal.
+ Faire du bien à quelqu'un.
† Vous ai-je jamais fait du mal ?
† Non; vous m'avez au contraire
fait du bien.
Je n'ai jamais fait de mal à per
sonne.
+ Vous ai-je fait mal?
+ Vous ne m'avez pas fait mal
Cela me fait du bien.
Faire de.
What does the servant do with his Le domestique que fait-il de s♡•
broom?
He sweeps the floor with it.
balai ?
+ Il balaie le plancher avec.
What does he wish to make of this† Que veut-il faire de ce bois ?
wood?
He does not wish to make anything Il n'en veut rien faire.
of it.
Obs. 101. When a proposition has no definite subject, the English, in
order to avoid the pronouns they, people, &c., use the verb in the passive
voice, and say: 1 was told, instead of, They told me; He is flattered,
instead of, They flatter him; It was given to me, instead of, They gave it to
This is always expressed in French by means of the indefinite pronoun
on, one. Ex.
He is flattered, but he is not beloved.
I am told that he is arrived.
On le flatte, mais on ne l'aime pas.
On me dit qu'il est arrivé.
QUARANTE-QUATRIÈME THÊME. 2de Sec.
Qui est cet enfant que vous louez tant? C'est Albert, le plus jeune
fils de notre épicier. Ne le connaissez-vous pas? Non, je ne le
connais pas. Ne l'avez-vous jamais vu dans le magasin de l'épicier?
C'est possible. Mais pourquoi l'avez vous tant loué? On l'a loué
parce qu'il a bien étudié. Mais il n'a fait que son devoir. Faut-il
le louer pour cela? Sans doute. Je ne croyais pas cela nécessaire.
Quand on le lou, il étudie mieux. C'est différent. Pourquoi
cet autre enfant a-t-il été puni? Pourquoi punit-on les enfants géné-
ralement? Parce qu'ils sont méchants et paresseux. C'est pour
cela même qu'on a puni cet autre.-Et celui-ci, l'a-t-on récom-
pensé? On l'a récompensé parce qu'il a bien travaillé.—Que faut-i)
faire pour ne pas être méprisé? Il faut être studieux, diligent, et sage.
-Ah! Louis, vous vous êtes fait couper les cheveux, vous avez mis
un habit neuf, un joli gilet de satin noir, vous avez l'air d'un autre
garçon. Je vous ai à peine connu. Que pensez-vous de mon habi
neuf? Je le trouve superbe.
FORTY-FOURTH LESSON. (3.)
225
What have you done with your money? I have bought a book
with it.—What has the joiner done with his wood? He has made
a bench of it.—What has the tailor done with the cloth which you
gave him? He has made clothes of it for (pour) your children and
mine. Has that man hurt you? No, Sir, he has not hurt me.-
What must one do in order to be loved? One must do good to
those that have done us harm.-Have we ever done you harm?
No; you have on the contrary done us good.—Do you do harm to any
one? I do no one any harm.-Why have you hurt these children?
I have not hurt them.-Have I hurt you? You have not hurt me,
but your boys have, (m'en ont fait.)—What have they done to you?
They have beaten me.-Is it (est-ce) your brother who has hurt my
son? No, Sir, it is not (ce n'est pas) my brother, for he has never
hurt any one.
Have you drunk that wine? I have drunk it.-How did you like
it? I liked it very well.-Has it done you good? It has done me
good.-Have you hurt yourself? I have not hurt myself.—Who has
hurt himself? My brother has hurt himself, for he has cut his
finger. Is he still ill, (malade?) He is better, (mieux.)—I rejoice
to hear that he is no longer ill, for I love him. Why does your
cousin pull out his hair? Because he cannot pay what he owes.—
Did your father rejoice to see you? He did rejoice to see me.-
What did you rejoice at? I rejoiced at seeing my good friends.-
What was your uncle delighted with, (s'est il réjoui?) He was
delighted with the horse which you have sent him.-What were
your children delighted with? They were delighted with the fine
clothes which I have had made for them, (que je leur ai fait faire.)
VOCABULAIRE.
A knife was given him to cut his
bread, and he cut his finger.
To flatter som? one.
To flatter one's self.
He flatters himself that he knows
French.
Nothing but.
He has nothing but enemies.
To become.
(Devenir does not take de after it.)
He has turned a soldier.
Have you turned a merchant?
I have turned (become) a lawyer.
What has become of your brother?
3me Section.
On lui a donné un couteau pour cou-
per son pain, et il s'est coupé le
doigt.
Flatter 1 quelqu'un.
Se flatter, (takes de before the infini-
tive.)
† Il se flatte de savoir le Français:
Ne... que.
Il n'a que des ennemis.
Devenir,* 2, p. passé devenuº, (con
jugué comme Venir. (25¹, 34¹.)
+ Il s'est fait soldat.
† Vous êtes-vous fait marchand?
Je me suis fait avocat.
+ Votre frère qu'est-il devenu ?
† Qu'est devenu votre frère ?
226
FORTY-FOURTH LESSON. (3.)
What has become of him?
+ Qu'est-il devenu?
I do not know what has become of † Je ne sais pas ce qu'il est devenu
him.
To enlist, to enroll.
He has enlisted.
I cannot pay you, for I have no
money.
S'enrôler, 1, se faire soldat.
St Il s'est enrôlé.
+ Il s'est fait soldat.
Je ne puis vous payer, car je n'ai
pas d'argent.
He cannot give you any bread, for | Il ne peut pas vous donner de pain,
he has none.
To believe some one.
Do you believe that man?
I do not believe him.
car il n'en a pas.
Croire* 4 quelqu'un.
Croyez-vous cet homme ?
Je ne le crois pas.
Obs. 102. The verb croire governs the accusative; we say, however:
'To believe in God.
I believe in God.
To utter a falsehood, to lie.
Do not lie, (impera.)
I lie, thou liest, he lies.
The story-teller, the liar.
Croire en Dieu.
Je crois en Dieu.
Mentir,* 2; past part. menti, pres.
Ne mentez pas.
part. mentant.
Je mens, tu mens,
Le menteur.
QUARANTE-QUATRIÈME THÊME, 3me Sec.
il ment.
Promenez-vous souvent vos enfants? Je les promène tous les
matins et tous les soirs, quand le temps le permet. C'est-à-dire,
quand il fait beau temps? Non; mais quand il ne fait pas trop
mauvais. Les menez-vous promener quand le temps est couvert ou
humide? Sans doute. Et quand il pleut? Oui, s'il ne pleut pas
beaucoup. Quand le tonnerre gronde? Oui, même quand le ton-
nerre gronde, s'il ne fait pas de pluie. Allez-vous les mener prome-
ner ce soir? Non, il fait trop de pluie et de vent. N'entendez-vous
pas le bruit du vent? Si fait, je l'entends. Et le bruit de la pluie
sur la maison? Oui, je l'entends aussi. On ne peut pas promener
avec plaisir pendant un orage comme celui-là. Vous avez raison,
je pense comme vous.-Croyez-vous ce petit garçon avec les che-
veux noirs? Oui, c'est un bon petit garçon, mais cet autre-là est un
grand menteur. Sait-il quand il ment? En vérité, je crois que non.
-Pourquoi n'entrez-vous pas? Avez-vous peur d'être mordu par
notre petit chien blanc? Mord-il aussi bien qu'il aboie? Il aboie
beaucoup, mais il ne mord pas.
What has become of your friend? He has become a lawyer.-
What has become of your cousin? He has enlisted.-Has your
neighbor enlisted? He has not enlisted.-What has become of
him? He has turned a merchant.-What has become of his children?
His children have become men.-What has become of your son?
He has become a great man.-Has he become learned? He has
FORTY-FIFTH LESSON. (1.)
227
•
become learned. What has become of my book? I do not know
what has become of it.-Have you torn it? I have not torn it.-
What has become of our friend's son? I do not know what has
become of him.-Is he in England or Italy? I cannot tell you.-I
believe his father does not know what has become of him.-Whom
did he go travelling with? He went with his cousin.-Do they
know what has become of the latter? Oh! yes; he has returned,
and he is studying to become a doctor. It is extraordinary.-Why
does this man rejoice so much? (tant?) Because he flatters himself
ne has good friends.-Is he not right in rejoicing? He is wrong, for
he has nothing but enemies.-Is he not loved? He is flattered, but
he is not beloved. Do you flatter yourself that you know French?
I do flatter myself that I know it; for I can speak, read, and write
it. Has the physician done any harm to your child? He has cut
his finger, (lui a coupé le doigt,) but he has not done him any harm,
so (et) you are mistaken, if you believe that he has done him any
harm.-Why do you listen to that man? I listen to him, but I do
not believe him; for I know that he is a story-teller.-How do you
know that ne is a story-teller? He does not believe in God; and all
those (tous ceux) who do not believe in God are story-tellers.
i.
FORTY-FIFTH LESSON, 45th.-Quarante-cinquième Leçon, 45me.
VOCABULAIRE. 1re Section.
OF IMPERSONAL VERBS.-Verbes Unipersonnels.
We have already seen (41¹, 423,) some idiomatical expressions with faire,
ail of which belong to the impersonal verbs. These verbs, having no deter
minate subject, are conjugated only in the third person, by means of the
pronoun 'l, it. Ex.
To rain,
To snow,
T'o hail,
it rains.
it snows.
it hails.
Pleuvoir, 3. il pleut, past part. plu.
Neiger, 1.
il neige.
Grêler, 1.
il grêle.
The substantives belonging to these three verbs are feminine, as will be
seen when we come to treat of feminine nouns.
To lighten.
Does it lighten ?
The lightning.
It does not lighten.
It lightens much.
Does it rain?
Does it snow?
+ Faire des éclairs.
It does.
† Fait-il des éclairs?
Il en fait
+ Il fait des éclairs.
It lightens.
L'éclair.
+ Il ne fait pas d'éclairs. (Obs. 27.)
+ Il fait beaucoup d'éclairs.
It rains very hard.
It snows hard.
+ Pleut-il ?
+ Neige-t-il ?
Il pleut à verse.
Il neige fort, (beau-
coup.)
228
FORTY-FIFTH LESSON. (1.)
It hails much.
The hail.
The snow.
The sun does not shine.
The sun is in my eyes.
To thunder,-it thunders.
To shine, to glitter, shining, shined.
The shutters. It hails, shut the
shutters quick.
Is the walking good?
It is good (bad) walking.
This country.
In that country.
He has made many friends in that
country.
Of which, of whom, whose.
see the man of whom you speak.
I have bought the horse of which you
spoke to me.
I see the man whose brother has
killed my dog.
I see the man whose dog you have
killed.
Il fait beaucoup de grêle.
La grêle. La neige. (noms fémining
+ Il ne fait point de soleil.
† Le soleil me donne dans la vue.
Tonner, 1,-il tonne.
Luire,* 4, luisant, Iui, (p. passé.)
Les volets. Il grêle, fermez vite les
volets.
+ Fait-il bon marcher ?
t Il fait bon (mauvais) marcher.
Ce pays-ci.
Dans ce pays-là.
+
Il s'est fait beaucoup d'amis dans
ce pays-là.
Dont, (pronom relatif. § 86.4
Je vois l'homme dont vous parlez.
J'ai acheté le cheval dont vous m'avez
parlé.
Je vois l'homme dont le frère a tué
mon chien.
Je vois l'homme dont vous avez tué
le chien.
Do you see the child whose father set | Voyez-vous l'enfant dont le père est
out yesterday?
Whom have you seen?
I see it.
I have seen the merchant whose
warehouse you have taken.
I have spoken to the man whose
warehouse has been burnt.
parti hier?
Qui avez-vous vu?
Je le vois.
J'ai vu le marchand dont vous avez
pris le magasin.
J'ai parlé à l'homme dont le magasin
a été brûlé.
QUARANTE-CINQUIÈME THEME. 1re Sec.
Quel mauvais temps il fait aujourd'hui ! Il pleut à verse; il fait
des éclairs, le tonnerre gronde....Ne grêle-t-il pas aussi? Je le
croyais il y a un moment, (a minute ago.) Ne vaut-il pas mieux
faire fermer les volets? (have....shut?) Je crois qu'il vaut mieux
les faire fermer. Car s'il grêle encore, la grêle peut casser nos car-
reaux de vitre, (panes of glass.) Dites à Salomon de venir fermer
les volets. Où est Salomon? Appelez-le, si vous ne pouvez pas
le trouver. Qu'est-ce que c'est que ce bruit? N'est-ce pas la grêle
qui vient contre les vitres? Salomon, fermez vite ces volets. N'y
a-t-il pas un carreau de cassé? (30¹, Obs. 71.) Non, M., je n'en
vois pas de cassé. Voici un volet de fermé. Fermez vite l'autre,
car je crains pour nos carreaux.
Have you seen the gentleman from whom I have received a pre-
sent? I have not.-Have you seen the fine gun of which I spoke
to you? I have. Has your uncle seen the books of which you
spoke to him? He has.-Hast thou seen the man whose children
FORTY-FIFTH LESSON. (2.)
229
have been punished? I have not seen him.-To whom have you
been speaking in the theatre? I have been speaking to the man
whose brother has killed my fine dog.-Have you seen the little boy
whose father has become (s'est fait) a lawyer? I have seen him.
-Whom have you seen at the ball? I saw the farmer whose horses
you bought (§ 88), and the men whose coach you had a mind to
buy. Whom do you see now? I see the man whose servant has
broken my looking-glass, and my two panes of glass.-Have you
heard the man whose friend has lent me English money? I have
not.-Whom have you heard? I have heard the French captain
whose son is my friend.
Hast thou brushed the coat of which I spoke to thee? I have
not yet brushed it.-Have you received the money which you have
been wanting? I have.-Have I the brown paper of which I have
need? You have it.-Has your brother the Italian books of which
he has need? He has.-Have you spoken to the merchants whose
warehouse we have taken? We have spoken to them.-Have you
spoken to the physician whose son has studied German? I have.
-Hast thou seen the poor men whose warehouses have been burnt".
I have.—Have you read the books which we have lent you? We
have. What do you say of them? (en?) We say that they ar
very fine. Do you give anything to the children who are idle? We
give them nothing.-Did it snow yesterday? Yes, it did hail, lighten,
and snow last evening and all night. I am very sorry for it. Why?
Because we are going to have bad walking for a few days. A19
we not?
That of which. (No antecedent.)
VOCABULAIRE.
2de Section.
That of which.
Those of which. Š
(with antecedents.)
(ont des antécédents.
Ceux dont.
Ce dont, (n'a point d'antécédent)
Celui dont.
I have that of which I have need. J'ai ce dont j'ai besoin.
I have wha I want.
He has wha. he wants.
Il a ce dont il a besoin.
Have you the book of which you have Avez-vous le livre dont vous avez
need?
I have that of which I have need.
Has the joiner the nails of which he
has need?
He has those of which he has need.
Which men do you see?
I see those of whom you spoke.
besoin?
J'ai celui dont j'ai besoin.
Le menuisier a-t-il les clous dont il a
besoin ?
Il a ceux dont il a besoin.
Quels hommes voyez-vous ?
Je vois ceux dont vous avez parlé.
Obs. 103. The relative, dont, of which, &c., being an indirect, not a
direct object, (or régime,) has no influence on the past participle. (32¹,
Obs. 75, 76.)
20
230
FORTY-FIFTH LESSON. (2.)
Do you see the pupils of whom I have, Voyez-vous les élèves dont je vous
spoken to you?
I do.
To whom, (relative), to which.
I see the children to whom you have
given some cakes.
To which pupils do you speak ?
I speak to those to whom you have
applied.
Which dogs do you feed?
Those to which you gave nothing.
Obs. 104. À qui, for persons only.
Apply to...
To apply to ....
Apply to the minister.
I did, (or, I applied to him.)
To meet with.
I have met with the men to whom
you have applied.
Of which men do you speak?
I speak of those whose children have
been studious and obedient.
Obedient, disobedient.
Kind, complaisant.
So that.
•
Unkind.
I have lost my money, so that I can-
not pay you.
I am ill, so that I cannot go out.
Je les vois.
ai parlé ?
À qui, (relatif.) aux quels, (mas. plur.)
Je vois les enfants à qui vous avez
donné des gâteaux.
À quels élèves parlez-vous ? (§ 79.)
Je parle à ceux auxquels (à qui) vous
vous êtes adresse.
À quels chiens donnez-vous à man-
ger?
À ceux auxquels vous n'avez rien
donné.
Auxquels, for persons and things.
S'adresser, 1, à.. Adressez-vous à..
Adressez-vous au ministre.
Je me suis adressé à lui. (§ 64.)
Rencontrer, 1, (transitif.)
J'ai rencontré les hommes à qui (aux-
quels) vous vous êtes adressé.
De quels hommes parlez-vous ?
Je parle de ceux dont les enfants ont
été studieux et obéissants.
Obéissant, désobéissant.
Complaisant.
Désobligeant.
De sorte que, (conjunction.)
J'ai perdu mon argent, de sorte que
je ne puis vous payer.
Je suis malade, de sorte que je ne
puis sortir.
QUARANTE-CINQUIÈME THÊME. 2de Sec.
Vous tenez votre chapeau! Mettez-le, (put it on.) Non, merci.
Alors, donnez-le-moi, je vais le mettre sur le porte-chapeau, (hat-
stand.) Vous êtes bien complaisant. Le voilà sur un fauteuil. Eh!
bien, que pensez-vous du tableau dont nous avons parlé hier matin,
et que vous avez sans doute vu hier après-midi? (doubtless?) Je
suis fâché de vous dire que je ne l'ai pas encore vu. Est-il possible?
Hier, j'ai été très-occupé, de sorte que je n'ai pas pu le voir. Dites
que vous n'avez pas voulu le voir. Non, vous vous trompez: vous
avez tort de croire cela. Car, je vous assure que j'ai grande envie
de le voir. Êtes-vous encore très-occupé? Oui, et très-pressé, (in a
great hurry,) parce que mon bâtiment va partir (192, N. 1) dans un
jour ou deux. Cependant, je veux essayer de voir le tableau dont
nous avons parlé. Comme vous êtes pressé, je vais m'en aller.
Adieu, au plaisir. J'ai l'honneur de vous saluer.
Have you at last learned French? I was ill, so that I could not
FORTY-SIXTH LESSON. (1.)
231
learn it. Has your brother learned it? He has not learned it, be-
cause he has not yet been able to find a good master.-Do you go
to the ball this evening? I have sore feet, so that I cannot go to it.
-Did you understand that German? I do not know German, so
that I could not understand him.-Have you bought the horse of
which you spoke to me? I have no money, so that I could not buy
it. Have your children what they want? They have what they
want. Of which man do you speak? I speak of the one whose
brother has turned soldier.-Of which children have you spoken?
I have spoken of those whose parents are learned.-Which new
book have you read? I have read that of which I spoke to you
yesterday. Which paper has your cousin? He has that of which
he has need.-Which fishes has he eaten? He has eaten those
which you do not like.
ད་
Of which books are you in want? I am in want of those of
which you have spoken to me.-Have you need of those which I am
reading? I have not.-Do you see the children to whom I have
given cakes? I do not see those to whom you have given cakes,
but those whom you have punished.-To whom have you given any
French money? I have given some to those who have been skilful.
To which children must one give presents? One must give some to
those who are good and obedient.-To whom do you give to eat
and to drink? To those who are hungry and thirsty.-Have the
captains at last listened to that man? They have refused (35') to
listen to him; all those to whom he applied have refused to hear
him. With whom have you met this morning? I have met with
the man by whom I am esteemed.-Have you given any cakes to
your pupils? They have not studied well, so that I have given them
nothing. You did right.
FORTY-SIXTH LESSON, 45th.—Quarante-sixième Leçon, 46me.
VOCABULAIRE. 1re Section.
OF THE FIRST FUTURE.-Du Futur, ou Futur Simple.
See (146) and study it carefully.-Among the exceptions (of which we
will soon treat) are the auxiliaries, and the following:
To have.
I shall or will have.
Avoir,* 3.
rez, ront.
J'aurai, ras, ra, rons,
To be.
I shall or will be.
I shall or will go.
To go.
To send.
I shall or will send.
Shall or will he have money?
Envoyer,* 1. J'enverrai. S the lat conj.
Aura-t-il de l'argent ?
Être,* 4.
Aller,* 1.
Je serai.
J'irai.
The only two
irreg, verbs of
232
FORTY-SIXTH LESSON. (1.)
He will have some. He will not.
Shall you soon have done writing?
I shall (soon have done).
He will soon have done his task.
Shall we have the bird?
they shall have it.
Il en aura. Il n'en aura pas.
† Aurez-vous bientôt fini d'écrire ?
J'aurai bientôt fini. (§ 170.)
No, but
Il aura bientôt fini son devoir.
Aurons-nous l'oiseau ? Non, mais
ils l'auront.
QUARANTE-SIXIÈME THÊME. 1re Sec.
Comment formez-vous le futur des verbes en Français ? Faut-il
vous répondre en Français? Sans doute. Le puis-je ? Essayez.
Est-ce que je sais tous les mots nécessaires pour cela? Je crois que
oui. Je vais essayer. Attendez. Savez-vous le Français de: final?
Je ne suis pas sûr du (about the) Français de: final. Est-ce le
même que l'Anglais? Oui, c'est le même. Vous savez traduire :
changing? n'est-ce pas ? C'est: changeant.-C est ela. Com-
mencez. Je vais répéter la question. Je pense que: répéter est to
repeat, n'est-ce pas? Oui, c'est cela même. Comment formez-
vous le futur des verbes Français? En changeant (R. 1), l'r final de
la 1re et 2de conjugaison, le oir, de la 4me, non, je me trompe, je
veux dire de la 3me et le re de la 4me, en rai. C'est cela. Pou-
vez-vous me dire le futur de: former? Oui, c'est: formerai. Quel
est celui de: devoir? C'est devoirai. Non, vous vous trompez. Ici,
il faut changer oir en rai: alors c'est: devrai. Très-bien. Quand
vous avez la première personne, pouvez-vous former les autres? Oui:
car le futur finit toujours en: rai, ras, ra, rons, rez, ront.
Shall you have any books? I shall have some.--Who will give
you any? My uncle will give me some.-When will your cousin
have money? He will have some next month.-How much money
shall you have? I shall have thirty-five francs.-Who will have
good friends? The English will have some.-Will your father be
at home this evening? He will be at home.-Will you be there?
I shall also be there.-Will your uncle go out to-day? He will go
out, if it is fine weather.-Shall you go out? I shall go out, if it
does not rain.—Will you love my son? I shall love him, if he is
good.-Will you pay your shoemaker? I shall pay him, if I
receive my money.-Will you love my children? If they are good
and assiduous, I shall love them; but if they are idle and naughty,
I shall despise and punish them.-Am I right in speaking thus?
You are not wrong.-Is your friend still writing? He is still
writing. Have you not done speaking? I shall soon have done.—
Have our friends done reading? They will soon have done.-When
will you send me the money which you owe me? I shall send it
to you soon.-Will your brothers send me the books which I have
lent them? They will send them to you. When will they send
them to me? They will send them to you next month.
་་
FORTY-SIXTH
233
LESSON. (2.)
To hold, keep.
To come.
To sit down.
To be necessary.
To provide.
To be able.
To foresee.
To know.
To suspend.
To be worth.
VOCABULAIRE.
I shall or will hold.
I shall or will come.
I shall or will sit
down.
It will be necessary.
I shall provide.
I will be able.
I shall or will fore-
see.
I shall or will know.
I shall suspend.
I will be worth.
2de Section.
Tenir,* 2.
Venir,* 2.
S'asseoir,* 3.
Je tiendrai.
Je viendrai.
Je m'asseierai or
Je m'assiérai,
Il faudra.
Je pourvoirai.
Je pourrai.
Falloir,* 3.
Pourvoir,* 3.
Pouvoir,* 3.
Prévoir,* 3.
Je prévoirai.
Savoir, 3.
Surseoir,* 3.
Valoir,* 3.
·
Je saurai.
Je surseoirai.
Je vaudrai.
Je verrai.
I shall or will see.
Voir,* 3.
I shall be willing.
Vouloir,* 3.
Je voudrai.
I shall or will do.
Faire,* 4.
Je ferai.
To see.
To be willing.
To do.
When shall you do your exercises?
I will do them soon, (ere long.)
My brother will do his exercises to-
morrow.
Next Monday.
Next Tuesday.
Last Wednesday. Last Thursday.
Next month.
This month. That age, century.
When will your son go to the bridge?
son go to the bridge?
He will go next Tuesday.
Shall you go anywhere?
We shall go nowhere.
Will he send me the book ?
He will send it you if he has done
with it.
Shall you be at home this evening?
I shall be there.
Will your father be at home?
He will be there.
Quand ferez-vous vos thêmes ?
Je les ferai bientôt.
Mon frère fera ses thêmes demain.
Lundi prochain.
Mercredi passé.
+ Le mois prochain.
Ce mois-ci.
Mardi prochain.
Jeudi dernier.
Ce siècle-là.
Quand votre fils ira-t-il au pont?
Il ira mardi prochain.
Irez-vous quelque part?
Nous n'irons nulle part.
M'enverra-t-il le livre ?
+ Il vous l'enverra s'il l'a fini.
Serez-vous chez vous (à la maison)
ce soir ?
J'y serai.
Votre père sera-t-il chez lui?
Il y sera.
Will your cousins be there? They Vos cousins y seront-ils ?
will.
seront.
Ils y
Obs. 105. (Important.) When a verb, in the future tense, is connected
with another by the conjunction if, si,' the French verb following si must
be in the indicative mood, present tense, although, in English, it may be in
the future tense, or subjunctive mood.
Will John go to the concert? Yes, Jean ira-t-il au concert?
if you go, or will go, or should go.
vous y allez.
Oui, si
1 Si, (if, meaning granting, supposing that.) But when si means whether,
the following verb must be in the future tense: I do not know whether he
will go or not, Je ne sais pas s'il ira ou non.
20*
234
FORTY-SIXTH LESSON. (2.)
QUARANTE-SIXIÈME EXERCICE. 2de Sec.
Allez-vous à Washington aujourd'hui ? Non, je n'ai pas le temps
d'y aller aujourd'hui. Quand irez-vous? J'irai jeudi ou samedi
prochain. Aurez-vous le temps de venir nous voir? Sans doute que
je l'aurai. (Dir. 6.) Quand viendrez-vous? J'irai demain. Non,
je me trompe, après-demain. Vraiment? Oui, vraiment.—Enver-
rez-vous du tabac en France? Oui, j'y en enverrai. Par quel bâti-
ment l'enverrez-vous? Je l'y enverrai par le même que M. Lippard.
--Y en enverra-t-il? Oui, il y en enverra. Y en enverra-t-il beau-
coup? Il y enverra tout ce qu'il a.—Qui tiendra le magasin du coin?
Je ne sais pas qui le tiendra. N'est-ce pas le petit marchand qui le
tiendra? Lui et ses frères le tiendront. Tiendront-ils, des nou-
veautés? Ils ne tiendront que du drap. Quand l'ouvriront-ils? Ils
l'ouvriront dans quinze jours. Ne vous trompez-vous pas? Non,
je vous assure.-Vos cousins viendront-ils bientôt? Il ne viendront
pas avant quinze jours. Votre oncle viendra-t-il avec eux? Il
viendra, si le capitaine ne vient pas. Croyez-vous que le capitaine
viendra? Il viendra s'il n'a pas la goutte.-Quand saurez-vous
votre thême? Je le saurai dans un quart d'heure. Croyez-vous
que vous le saurez si-tôt? Oui, je le saurai. Frédéric saura-t-il·le
sien? Il le saura. Les nouveaux écoliers sauront-ils les leurs? Ils
les sauront. Nous les saurons tous.
Has the tailor made my coat? He has not made it yet; but he
will soon make it.-When will he make it? When he shall have
time.-When will you do your exercises? I shall do them when I
shall have time.-When will your brother do his? He will do
them next Saturday.-Wilt thou come to me? I shall come.-
When wilt thou come? I shall come next Friday.-When have
you seen my uncle? I saw him last Sunday.-Will your cousins
go to the ball, next Tuesday? They will go.-Will you come to
my concert? I shall come, if I am not ill.-Will you be able to
pay me what you owe me? I shall not be able to pay it you, for I
have lost all my money.—Will the American be able to pay for his
shoes? He has lost his pocket-book, so that he will not be able to
pay for them.-Will it be necessary to send for the physician? No-
body is ill, so that it will not be necessary to send for him.-Will it
be necessary to go to the market, to-morrow? It will be necessary
to go there, for we want some beef, some bread, and some wine.-
Shall you see your father, to-day? I shall see him.-Where will
he be? He will be at his counting-house.-Will you go to the ball
to-night? I shall not go, for I am too ill to go to it.-Will your
friend go? He will go if you will.
FORTY-SIXTH LESSON. (3.)
235
VOCABULAIRE. 3me Section.
1
Obs. 106. (Important.) When a verb in the future tense is connected
with another by the word when, quand; the French verb following quand
must be in the future tense, although the present is then used in English. As,
Will he go when I go? (or I do.)
He will go when you do.
He will write it if you will.
He will write it when you do.
Will he send some white paper to
my counting-house?
He will, if you will have some.
He will, when you want some.
Shall you be able to pay the shoe-
maker if he send his bill ?
I will pay him when he sends it.
Who will hold my parasol ?
Ira-t-il quand j'irai?
Il ira quand vous irez.
Il l'écrira si vous l'écrivez. (Obs. 105.)
Il l'écrira quand vous l'écrirez.
Enverra-t-il du papier blanc à mon
comptoir ?
Il y en enverra si vous en voulez.
Il y en enverra quand vous en vou-
drez.
Pourrez-vous payer le cordonnier,
s'il envoie son mémoire?
Je le paierai quand il l'enverra.
Qui veut tenir mon parapluie ?
Give it to me, Miss, I will (hold it). Donnez-le-moi, Mlle., je le tiendrai.
He will hold it, or they will.
Will your cousin's friend come to
my concert ?
Shall you come?
He will.
I will be there.
I will employ.
To employ, use.
I shall or will try.
To try.
What will you use to do it?
I will use this.
Will you try soon?
Will he not try also?
I will.
Yes, he will, but they will not.
You are mistaken, they will try also.
I will acquire.
I shall or will run.
Il le tiendra, ou ils le tiendront.
L'ami de votre cousin viendra-t-il à
mon concert?
Il ira.
Y viendrez-vous ? J'y serai.
Employer. J'emploierai. ($144-3.)
Essayer. J'essaierai.
Qu'emploierez-vous pour le faire ?
J'emploierai ceci.
Essaierez-vous bientôt ? J'essaierai.
N'essaiera-t-il pas aussi ?
Si fait, il essaiera, mais ils n'essaie-
ront pas. Vous vous trompez, ils
essaieront aussi.
J'acquerrai.¹
To acquire.
Acquérir,* 2.
To run.
Courir,* 2.
Je courrai.
To gather, pick.
Will I gather?
Cueillir,* 2.
Cueillerai-je ?
To die, (lose life.) Who shall not die?
Mourir,* 2.
Qui ne mourra pas ?
What will you acquire?
I will
acquire what I can.
Qu'acquerrez-vous ?
ce que je pourrai.
J'acquerrai
Obs. 107. If, instead of when, quand, the words what, ce que; as soon as,
aussitôt que, dès que; after, après que; as, comme; where, où; connect
the English verbs, use the future tense after the 2d verb in French.
Will you run as soon as he runs ?
We will run after he has run, and
where he has run.
Courrez-vous aussitôt qu'il courra?
Nous courrons après qu'il aura couru
et où il aura couru.
1 These 4 verbs, and the lists given in 1st and 2d sections, amounting
(the auxiliaries included) to 21, are the most important exceptions.
236
FORTY-SEVENTH LESSON. (1.)
QUARANTE-SIXIÈME THÊME. 3me Sec.
Si je viens samedi prochain, votre fils viendra-t-il? Il viendra
quand vous viendrez. Fera-t-il ce que je ferai? Il fera ce qu'il
pourra. Iront-ils où vous voudrez? Non, ils n'iront pas où je vou◄
drai, mais où ils voudront.—Quand cueillerez-vous mon bouquet?
Je le cueillerai quand et où vous voudrez. En cueillerez-vous aussi
un pour Emma? Je lui en cueillerai un aussi, dès que vous me le
direz.-Acquerra-t-il de l'honneur s'il fait son devoir? Il en ac-
querra dès qu'il fera ce qu'il a à faire.-Courrez-vous si je cours?
Oui, e courrai quand vous courrez, ou aussitôt que vous aurez
court-Comment est le vieux soldat? Il est bien malade. Croit-
on qu'il en mourra? Oui, on croit qu'il en mourra. Et le matelot?
Il est mieux, on espère qu'il n'en mourra pas.-Qu'acquerront ces
écoliers? Ils acquerront de l'honneur.-Ce jeune cheval vaudra-t-il
deux cents dollars, quand il aura quatre ans? Je crois qu'il vaudra
plus que cela. Vraiment!
Will the farmer gather his corn to-day? No, he will gather it
only to-morrow, or the day after.-Will he be ready then? He will
be ready, we shall be ready, and our friends will also be ready.—
Where will our young neighbors go? They will go nowhere; they
will remain at home, for they will have a great deal to do.-What
will they have to do? They will have to cut their grain and to put
it in their granary. You will lose your money, if you do not keep
your pocket-book shut up, (fermé.)-Will your cousin keep an apo-
thecary store? He will keep one. Where will he take a store?
He will take one near the museum,-Will he be able to get one
there, (y en trouver un?) He hopes so. When will he come? He
will come when his father gives him (Obs. 106) the two thousand
dollars which he has promised him.-Will he give them to him
soon? He will receive them in a few days.-Will he receive any
money from you? Yes, I will lend him some.-Will he pay you
back? (repaiera-t-il ?) He will, for he is diligent, assiduous, and
he will without doubt do his duty. I hope that you are not mis-
taken
FORTY-SEVENTH LESSON, 47th.-Quarante-septième Leçon, 47me.
VOCABULAIRE. 1re Section.
To belong. (24³, 402, 462.)
Do you belong?
I do.
Does that horse belong to your bro-
ther? It does (belong to him).
Appartenir,* 2. (conj. comme tenir.)
Appartenez-vous? J'appartiens.
Ce cheval appartient-il à votre frère 1
Il lui appartient.
FORTY-SEVENTH LESSON. (1.)
237
To whom do these gloves belong?
They belong to the captains.
Do these horses belong to the Ame-
ican generals?
They will soon belong to them. ($170.)
To suit, (243, 25¹, 252, 462.) suited.
(Used principally in the 3d person.,
Did that cloth suit your brother?
It did not.
Do these shoes suit your children?
They will suit them.
Does it suit you to do that?
It will suit me to do it.
À qui appartiennent ces gants?
Ils appartiennent aux capitaines.
Ces chevaux appartiennent-ils aux
généraux Américains?
Ils leur appartiendront bientôt.
Convenir,* 2.(comme venir) convenu.
(à avant le nom; de, avant l'infini.,
Ce drap a-t-il convenu à votre frère ?
Il ne lui a pas convenu.
Ces souliers conviennent-ils à vos
enfants? Ils leur conviendront.
Vous convient-il de faire cela ?
Il me conviendra de le faire.
Does it suit your cousin to come with Convient-il à votre cousin de ver.ir
us?
It will not suit him to go out.
To succeed,
succeeded.
avec nous ?
Il ne lui conviendra pas de sortir.
Parvenir,* 2, à. (comme venir) par-
venue.
Do you succeed in learning French? † Parvenez-vous à apprendre le Fran-
I do (succeed in it).
I do succeed in learning it.
Do these men succeed in selling their
horses? If they have not yet suc-
ceeded, they will succeed in it.
To succeed, succeeding, succeeded.
Do you succeed in doing that?
I do; but he does not.
Did you succeed? I did. (§ 50.)
To clean.
Immediately,
This instant,
directly.
instantly.
I am going to clean it presently.
、 will do it immediately.
I am going to work.
çais ?
+ J'y parviens.
+ Je parviens à l'apprendre.
+
† Ces hommes parviennent-ils à ven-
dre leurs chevaux? S'ils n'y sont
pas encore parvenus, ils y par-
viendront.
Réussir, 2, à. réussissant, réussi.
Réussissez-vous à faire cela?
J'y réussis; mais il n'y réussit pas.
Y avez-vous réussi ? J'y ai réussi.
Nettoyer, 1.
Tout de suite.
À l'instant, sur le champ.
Je vais le nettoyer tout à l'heure.
Je vais le faire tout de suite.
Je vais travailler.
QUARANTE-SEPTIEME THEME. 1re Sec.
J'ai trouvé des gants. À qui appartiennent-ils ? Sont-ce des
gants de chamois? Oui. Ce sont des gants de chamois. Ils
m'appartiennent alors. Donnez-les-moi. Attendez un instant, s'il
vous plaît. Sont-ils blancs, jaunes, verts, ou bleus? Les miens sont
plutôt bruns que jaunes. Alors les voici. Ils vous appartiennent. Je
vous remercie. De rien, (you are welcome.) Avez-vous acheté
quelque chose? Oui. Qu'est-ce qui (21¹) vous a convenu? Ceci
m'a convenu, et cela conviendra à mon frère. Cela lui conviendra-
t-il? Oui, j'en suis sûr. Le cousin de l'avocat a-t-il été au musée
avec vos amis? Il ne lui a pas convenu d'y aller, de sorte qu'il a
238
FORTY-SEVENTH LESSON. (2.)
refusé d'y aller avec eux. Parvenez-vous à faire votre devoir tous
les jours? J'y parviens souvent.-Le menuisier est-il parvenu à
raccommoder votre pupitre? Oui, il y est parvenu tout de suite.
Est-il aussi parvenu à raccommoder le secrétaire? Non, il n'a pas
réussi à le faire. A-t-il mieux réussi avec le fauteuil? Oui, il y a
parfaitement réussi.-Qui a nettoyé votre gilet de satin? Notre
nouveau domestique l'a nettoyé. N'a-t-il pas bien réussi? Vrai-
ment, oui.-Vos souliers sont-ils nettoyés? Ils le sont. Je me
trompe, on les a pris pour les nettoyer.
To whom does that horse belong? It belongs to the English
captain, whose son has written a note to you.-Does this money
belong to you? It does belong to me.-From whom have you
received it? I have received it from the men whose children you
have seen.-Whose
Whose horses are those? They are (ce sont) ours.
(§ 39, N. 3.)-Have you told your brother that I am waiting for him
here? I have forgotten to tell him so, (le.)-Is it (est-ce) your
father or mine who is gone to Berlin? It is mine.-Have you
brought me the book which you promised me? I have forgotten
it.—Has your uncle brought you the pocket-books which he promised
you? He has forgotten to bring me them.-Have you already writ-
ten to your friend? I have not yet had time to write to him.-Have
you forgotten to write to your relation? I have not. Does this.
cloth suit you? It does not suit me; have you no other?-I have
some other; but it is dearer than this.-Will you show it to me? I
will show it to you.-Do these shoes suit your uncle? They do not
suit him, because they are too dear.-Are these (sont-ce) the shoes
of which (dont) you have spoken to us? They are (ce sont) the
same, (les mêmes.)-Whose shoes are these? They belong to the
nobleman whom you have seen this morning in my warehouse.
Is there ?
Are there ?
There is not.
VOCABULAIRE.
There is.
There are.
There are not.
2de Section.
+ Y a-t-il?
Il y a.
Il n'y a point.
Il y aura. Il n'y
+ Il n'y a pas.
+ Il n'y a rien-personne.
There is nothing-nobody.
Will there be? There will be-not be. 7 Y aura-t-il ?
What is there ?-the matter there?
aura pas.
+ Qu'y a-t-il là? Qu'est-ce qu'il y
a là
Was there, or has there been? There † Y a-t-il eu?
was.
There has been nothing.
Nothing has taken place.
Is there wine? syrup?
There is some. There is no more.
Are there men of merit ?
}+ Il n'y a rien eu.
+ Y a-t-il du vin ?
Il y a eu.
du sírop?
† Il y en a. Il n'y en a plus.
† Y a-t-il des hommes de mérite?
FÖRTY-SEVENTH LESSON. (2.)
239
Obs. 108. The interrogative: What is followed by a preposition, is
translated by: Qu'y a-t-il ? (§ 118.) The relative: What is, by: Ce qu'il
y a. ($87-4.)
What is in the barrel?
I do not know what is in.
+ Qu'y a-t-il dans le baril? (1 mute.)
† Je ne sais pas ce qu'il y a dedans.
Are there to be many people at the Doit-il y avoir beaucoup de monde
ball of Mrs. Rush?
There are to be a great many.
au bal de Mme. Rush?
Il doit y en avoir beaucoup.
Argent comptant. En argent comb
tant.
The credit.
On credit.
To sell on
Le crédit. A crédit. Vendre à crédit
credit.
Ready money.
In ready money.
To buy for cash.
To sell for cash.
To pay down.
Will you buy for cash?
Acheter compiant.
Vendre comptant.
Payer comptant.
Voulez-vous acheter argent comp
tant ?
Does it suit you to sell me on credit? Vous convient-il de me vendre à
To fit.
Does that coat fit me?
It fits you.
That hat does not fit your brother.
It does not fit him.
Do these shoes fit you?
They fit me.
That fits you very well.
To keep.
Will you keep the horse?
I shall keep it.
You must not keep my money..
crédit ?
† Aller bien.
+Cet habit me va-t-il bien ?
+ Il vous va bien.
† Ce chapeau ne va pas bien à votre
frère.
+ Il ne lui va pas bien.
† Ces souliers vous vont-ils bien ?
+ Ils me vont bien.
+ Cela vous va fort bien.
Garder, 1.
Garderez-vous le cheval?
Je le garderai.
Il ne faut pas garder mon argent..
QUARANTE-SEPTIÈME THÊME. 2de Sec.
Quand vous serez en Europe, irez-vous en Allemagne? Je crois
que j'irai; du moins, j'ai grande envie d'y voyager. Y voyagerez-
vous à pied? Non; il ne me convient pas d'y voyager à pied; de
sorte que j'irai en voiture. En voiture, ou en diligence? (public
coach.) Quelque fois en voiture; quelque fois en diligence. Croy-
ez-vous que vous aimerez à voyager en Allemagne autant qu' en
Italie ? Je n'en sais rien, en vérité, (I do not know anything about
it.)-Le marchand que vous connaissez à Amsterdam a-t-il beau-
coup de crédit? Oui, c'est un des premiers marchands de la ville.
Comment l'appelez-vous? On l'appelle....-Vous avez un habit
qui vous va bien; l'avez-vous fait faire ici? Non, je ne l'ai pas
fait faire ici. Où donc ? Nulle part. Je l'ai acheté tout fait, (ready
made.) Pourquoi ne dites-vous pas: déjà fait ? pour, already made?
240
FORTY-SEVENTH LESSON. (3.)
Parce que les Français ne l'emploient point. Vraiment, il vous va
aussi bien que possible.-Je vous ai prêté mon canif, n'est-ce pas ?
L'avez-vous gardé ? Je l'ai gardé, et je le garderai encore, car j'en
aurai besoin tout à l'heure.
Does this merchant sell on credit? He does not sell on credit.—
Does it suit you to buy for cash? It does not suit me.-Where did
you buy these pretty knives? I bought them at (chez) the mer-
chant's whose warehouse you saw yesterday,-Has he sold them to
you on credit? He has sold them to me for cash.-Do you often
buy for cash? Not so often as you.-Have you forgotten anything
here? I have forgotten nothing.-Is there any wine in this barrel?
There is some in it.-Is there any vinegar in this glass? There is
none in it.-Is wine or cider in it? (dedans?) There is neither wine
nor cider in it.-What is there in it? There is vinegar.
Are there any men in your warehouse? There are some there.
Is there any one in the office? There is no one there.-Were
there many people in the theatre? There were many there.—Will
there be many people at your ball? There will be many there.—
Are there many children that will not play? There are many that
will not study, but all will play.-Hast thou cleaned my trunk? I
have tried to do it, but I have not succeeded.-Do you intend buy-
ing an umbrella? I intend buying one, if the merchant sells it me
on credit. Do you intend to keep mine? I intend to give it you
back, if I buy one.-Have you returned the book to my brother?
I have not yet returned it.
VOCABULAIRE. 3me Section.
You had better.
I had better...
...
He had better...
† Vous ferez mieux de ...
† Je ferai mieux de...
† Il fera mieux de ...
Instead of keeping your horse, you † Au lieu de garder votre cheval, vous
had better sell it.
ferez mieux de le vendre.
Instead of selling his hat, he had bet- † Au lieu de vendre son chapeau, il
ter keep it.
To please, pleased, please.
I please, thou pleasest, he pleases.
To please some one, (transitive.)
fera mieux de le garder.
Plaire,* 4, a; p. p. plu, impér.
plaisez.
Je plais, tu plais, il plaît.
Plaire à quelqu'un, (intransitif.)
Obs. 109. Plaire, étant intransitif, ne peut pas être employé au passif.
Ainsi, il ne faut pas traḍuire: Are you pleased with this book? par, êtes-
vous plu avec ce livre? mais par l'unipersonnel.
Does this book please you?
I am very well pleased with it, but
he is not much pleased with it.
Ce livre vous plaît-il ?
Il me plaît beaucoup, mais il ne lui
plaît guère.
FORTY-SEVENTH LESSON. (3.)
241
Charles is delighted with it.
What are you so much delighted
with?
This.
I will do what you please.
Il plaît beaucoup à Charles.
Qu'est-ce qui (211) vous plaît tant?
Ceci.
+ Je ferai ce qu'il vous plaira.
You are pleased to say so. You joke. † Cela vous plaît à dire.
What is your pleasure?
What do you want?
What do you say?
To delight in, to be pleased.
How are you pleased here?
I am very well pleased here.
} + Que vous plaît-il?
† Plaît-il ?
† Se plaire,* 4. (à, avant un infin.)
+ Comment vous plaisez-vous ici ?
† Je m'y plais beaucoup.
Obs. 110. The impersonal it is, is rendered by c'est for the singular, and
by ce sont, when followed by a 3d pers. plur., and only then. (§ 38, N. 3.)
Whose book is this?
Whose shoes are these?
It is his.
They are ours.
It is they who have seen him.
It is your friends who are right.
À qui est ce livre ? C'est le sien.
À qui sont ces souliers?
Ce sont les nôtres.
Ce sont eux qui l'ont vu.
Ce sont vos amis qui ont raison.
QUARANTE-SEPTIÈME THÊME. 3me Sec.
Fait-il du soleil ce matin? Oui, il en fait. Alors je ferai bien de
prendre mon parasol, n'est-ce pas ? Oui, vous ferez bien de le pren-
dre.-Fait-il beaucoup de soleil en Angleterre? Non, le temps y est
presque toujours couvert. Y tonne-t-il souvent? Non, il n'y fait pas
beaucoup de tonnerre. Avez-vous peur du tonnerre? Non, mais
le petit chien blanc en a peur. Plaît-il? Ne me comprenez-vous
pas? Si fait; mais, je n'ai jamais vu un chien craindre le tonnerre.
Celui-là en a peur, je vous assure.-Vous plaisez-vous ici? Oui,
beaucoup, beaucoup, (very much.) Cela vous plaît à dire. Non,
vraiment. Je m'y plais beaucoup.-Que pensez-vous du dernier
o ivrage de C. D? Je ne l'aime pas du tout.
Cela vous plaît
à dire, car il plaît à tout le monde. S'il plaît à tout le monde, je
vous assure qu'il ne me plaît pas.-Quel parapluie voulez-vous?
C'est celui-ci que je veux. Et quels gants vous faut-il? Ce sont
ceux-là qu'il me faut.-Que faut-il à votre cousin? Il a ce dont il
a besoin. Alors, vous pouvez vous en aller. Nous allons nous en
aller dans un instant. Adieu, au plaisir. Je m'en vais aussi. Au
plaisir, donc.
What is your pleasure, Sir? I am inquiring after (402) your father.
-Is he at home? No, Sir, he is gone out.-What do you say?
(Plaît-il?) I tell you that he is gone out.-Will you sit down and
wait till he comes back? When do you expect him? When will
he come back? I do not know exactly. He may return in a quarter
of an hour or less; he may return only for dinner. That is, between
(entre) 2 and 3 o'clock, I suppose, (supposer.) Not between 2 and
21
242
FORTY-EIGHTH LESSON. (1.)
3, as you suppose, but between 1 and 2.-Never mind. I have no
time to wait now, so that I had better call again. As you please.-
What name shall I tell him? Give him this note; he will find my
name in it. I will give it to him. Good morning.—Is it our baker
or the doctor's, who has sold you bread on credit? It is ours. Is
that your son? He is not mine; he is my friend's neighbor's son,
(le fils du voisin de mon ami. § 140—2.)—Where is yours? He has
become a traveller, (voyageur;) he is now in Paris. No, I am mis-
taken, in Bordeaux.-Do you intend to sell your coat? I inten
keeping it, for I want it.-Instead of keeping it, you had better sell
it.-Do you sell your horses? I do not sell them.-Instead of keep-
ing them you had better sell them.-Does our friend keep his para-
sol? He does keep it; but instead of keeping it he had better sell
it, for it is worn out.-Does your son tear his book? He does tear
it; but he is wrong in doing so, for instead of tearing it he had better
read it.
FORTY-EIGHTH LESSON, 48th.-Quarante-huitième Leçon, 48me.
f
VOCABULAIRE. 1re Section.
When will you go away? (432.)
I will go soon.
By and by.
He will go away soon, (by and by.)
We will go to-morrow.
They will go to-morrow.
Thou wilt go immediately.
When, (conjonction adverbiale.)
What will become of you if
your money? (443.)
you lose
I know not what will become of me.
What will become of him?
What will become of us?
What will become of them?
Quand vous en irez-vous ?
Je m'en irai bientôt.
Tout à l'heure.
Il s'en ira tout à l'heure.
Nous nous en irons demain.
Ils s'en iront demain.
Tu t'en iras sur le champ.
Lorsque, (never used interrogatively.)
† Que deviendrez-vous si vous perdez
+
votre argent? (Obs. 105.)
† Je ne sais pas ce que je deviendrai.
† Que deviendra-t-il ?
+ Que deviendrons-nous ?
+ Que deviendront-ils ?
I do not know what will become of† Je ne sais pas ce qu'ils deviendront.
them.
The turn, my turn, in his, in my turn.
In my brother's turn.
Each in his turn.
When it comes to your turn.
Our turn will come.
To take a turn, (a walk.)
He is gone to take a walk.
Le tour, mon tour, à son, à mon tour.
Au tour de mon frère.
Chacun à son tour.
+ Quand votre tour viendra.
+ Nous aurons notre tour.
Faire un tour.
Faire un tour de promenade.
Il est allé faire un tour.
Il est allé faire un tour de prome
nade.
FORTY-EIGHTH LESSON. (1.)
243
To walk round the garden.
To run, to hurry.
I run, thou runnest, he runs.
Do you run? I do. I do not.
Shall I run? (463.) You shall not.
Behind, behind him, them, me.
Has that man gone away?
He has gone away.
Have your brothers gone away?
They have gone away.
They have not gone away.
Have they gone away?
They were not willing to go away.
+ Faire un tour de jardin.
Courir,* 2, p. passé couru. (impéra.)
courez.
Je cours, tu cours, il court.
Courez-vous? Je cours. Je ne cours
pas.
Courrai-je ? Vous ne courrez point.
Derrière, derrière lui, eux, moi.
Cet homme s'en est-il allé ?
Il s'en est allé.
Vos frères s'en sont-ils allés í
Ils s'en sont allés.
Ils ne s'en sont pas allés.
S'en sont-ils allés ?
Ils n'ont pas voulu s'en aller.
QUARANTE-HUITIÈME THÊME. 1re Sec.
Comptez-vous acheter un cheval? Je ne peux pas en acheter un,
car je n'ai pas encore reçu mon argent.-Me faut-il aller au théâtre?
Il ne vous faut pas y aller. Ce n'est pas votre tour d'y aller, et il
fait mauvais temps.-Pourquoi n'allez-vous pas chez mon frère? Ce
n'est pas mon tour d'aller chez lui.-Est-ce que c'est son tour de
venir vous voir? Oui, c'est son tour, et je n'irai chez lui qu'après
qu'il sera venu chez moi. Comme il vous plaira.-Le quel de ces
deux élèves commence à parler? Est-ce le plus grand ou le plus
petit? Le plus âgé ou le plus jeune? Ce n'est pas cela qui fait la
différence, (the difference, nom fém.) Quoi donc? Celui qui est
studieux apprend et commence à parler. Et que fait celui qui ne
l'est pas? Il apprend à lire et à traduire un peu; mais non à parler,
et il n'apprendra jamais, s'il ne devient pas (Obs. 105) plus studieux.
J'espère qu'il le deviendra. Je l'espère aussi.
Are you going away already? I am not going yet.-When will
that man go away? He will go presently.-Will you go away
soon? I shall go away next Thursday. When will your friends go
away? They will go away next month.-When wilt thou go away?
I will go away instantly.-Why has your father gone away so soon?
(si tôt?) He has promised his friend to be at his house at a quarter
to nine, so that he went away early in order to keep what he has
promised. When shall we go away? We shall go away to-mor
row.-Shall we start early? We shall start at five o'clock in the
morning. When will you go away? I shall go away as soon as I
have done writing.-When will your children go away? They will .
go as soon as they have done their exercises.
Will you go when (lorsque) I shall go? I shall go away when
you go, (quand vous vous en irez.)-Will our neighbors soon go
244
FORTY-EIGHTH LESSON. (2.)
away? They will go away when they have done speaking.-Wha
will become of your son if he does not study? If he does not study
he will learn nothing.-What will become of you if you lose your
money? I do not know what will become of me.-What will be-
come of your friend if he loses his pocket-book? I do not know
what will become of him if he loses it. What has become of your
son? I do not know what has become of him.-Has he enlisted?
He has not enlisted.-What will become of us if our friends go
away? I do not know what will become of us if they go away.-
What has become of your relations? They have gone away.
VOCABULAIRE. 2de Section.
A blow, a kick, a knock, a stab.
A clap, a slap.
Have you given that man a blow?
I have given him one.
A blow with a stick.
A kick, (with the foot.)
A blow with the fist.
A stab of a knife.
A shot, or the report of a gun.
The shot of a pistol.
A glance of the eye.
A clap of thunder.
To give a cut with a knife.
To give a man a blow with a stick.
To give a man a kick, (with the
foot.)
To give a man a blow with the fist.
To pull, to draw.
To shoot, to fire.
To fire a gun.
To fire a pistol.
To fire at some one.
I have fired at that bird.
I have fired twice.
I have fired three times.
I have fired several times.
How many times have you fired?
How many times have you fired at
that bird?
I have fired at it several times.
Un coup.
Avez-vous donné un coup à cet
homme ?
Je lui en ai donné un.
Un coup de bâton.
Un coup de pied.
Un coup de poing.
Un coup de couteau.
Un coup de fusil.
Un coup de pistolet.
Un coup d'œil.
Un coup de tonnerre.
Donner un coup de couteau.
Donner un coup de bâton à un
homme.
Donner un coup de pied à un
homme.
Donner un coup de poing à un
homme.
} Tirer, i.
+ Tirer un coup de fusil.
Tirer un coup de pistolet.
Tirer un coup de fusil sur quel.
qu'un.
† J'ai tiré un coup de fusil à cet
oiseau.
† J'ai tiré deux coups de fusil.
† J'ai tiré trois coups de fusil.
.
† J'ai tiré quelque coups de fusil.
+ Combien de coups de fusil avez
vous tirés ?
Combien de fois avez-vous tiré sur
cet oiseau ?
J'ai tiré plusieurs fois sur lui.
FORTY-EIGHTH LESSON. (2.)
245
t
I have heard a shot.
He has heard the report of a pistol.
We have heard a clap of thunder.
The fist.
To cast an eye upon some one or some-
thing.
Have you cast an eye upon that
book?
I have cast an eye upon it.
† J'ai entendu un coup de fusil.
† Il a entendu un coup de pistolet.
+ Nous avons entendu un coup de
tonnerre.
Le poing.
Jeter un coup d'œil sur quelqu'un ou
quelque chose.
Avez-vous jeté un coup d'œil sur ce
livre ?
J'y ai jeté un coup d'œil.
QUARANTE-HUITIEME THEME. 2de Sec.
Combien de fois les ennemis ont-ils tiré sur nous? Ils ont tré
plusieurs fois sur nous. Ont-ils tué quelqu'un? Ils n'ont tué per-
sonne.—Qu'avez-vous fait de mon livre? Je l'ai mis derrière le
pupitre, sur votre coffre.-Dois-je vous répondre ? Vous me répon-
drez à votre tour.-Est-ce le tour de mon frère? Quand son tour
viendra, je lui demanderai; car, chacun à son tour.—Avez-vous fait
un tour de promenade ce matin? J'ai fait un tour de jardin.-Où
votre oncle est-il allé? Il est allé se promener.-De quel côté est-il
allé? De ce côté-là.-Vous vous trompez, il est allé du côté du
pont, n'est-ce pas ? Oui, il est allé du côté où il se promène tou-
jours.-Pourquoi ce garçon-là court-il si vite? Il a peur de cet
étranger. L'étranger veut-il lui faire du mal? Oui, il veut lui don-
ner un coup de pied ou de poing.-Pourquoi donc ? Que lui a fait
le garçon? Le petit méchant (wicked little fellow) lui a tiré les
cheveux.-Qui court derrière nous? Notre chien court derrière nous.
Apercevez-vous l'oiseau qui est derrière l'arbre? Je l'aperçois.
Does not your boy listen to what you tell him? He does not listen
to it, if I do not give him a beating, (de coups.)—Why do those
children not work? Their master has given them blows with his
fist, so that they will not work. Why has he given them blows
with his fist? Because they have been disobedient.-Have you
fired a gun? I have fired three times-At what did you fire? I
fired at a bird.-Have you fired a gun at that man? I have fired a
pistol at him.-Why have you fired a pistol at him? Because he
has given me a stab with his knife.-How many times have you
fired at that bird? I have fired at it twice.-Have you killed it? I
have killed it at the second shot, (au deuxième coup.)
Have you killed that bird at the first shot (du premier coup?) I
have killed it at the fourth, (du quatrième.)—Do you fire at the
birds which you see upon the trees, or at those which you see in the
gardens? I fire neither at those which I see upon the trees, nor at
those which I see in the garde is, but at those which I perceive on
21*
246
FORTY-NINTH LESSON. (1.)
the castle behind the wood.-Have you a wish to fire at that bird?
I have a desire to fire at it.-Why do you not fire at those birds? I
cannot, for I have a sore finger.-When did the captain fire? He
fired when his soldiers fired.-How many birds have you shot at?
I have shot at all that I have perceived, but I have killed none,
because my gun is good for nothing.-Have you cast an eye upon
that man? I have cast an eye upon him.-Has he seen you? He
has not seen me, for he has sore eyes.-Have you drunk of that
wine? I have drunk of it, and it has done me good.-Why have
your pupils gone away? Why did they run so? They went away,
and they have run so quickly, because they did not wish to be seen
by the man whose (§ 88) dog they have killed.
FORTY-NINTH LESSON, 49th.-Quarante-neuvième Leçon, 49me.
To hear of...
VOCABULAIRE. 1re Section.
Heard of...
Have you heard of your brother?
I have heard of him.
Is it long since you breakfasted?
Entendre parler de ... Entendu par-
ler de...
† Avez-vous entendu parler de votre
frère ?
† J'en ai entendu parler.
† Y a-t-il long-temps que vous avez
déjeuné?
How long is it since you breakfasted? Combien de temps y a-t-il que
Obs. 111. The impersonal il y a
there is, there are, when it is used in
it since?
It is not long since I breakfasted.
It is a great while since.
It is a short time since.
vous avez déjeuné?
cannot be rendered into English by
reply to the question: How long is
+ Il n'y a pas long-temps que j'ai
déjeuné.
+ Il y a très-long-temps.
t Il y a peu de temps.
How long is it since you heard of † Combien de temps y a
your brother ?
It is a year since I heard of him.
It is only a year since.
It is more than a year since.
Obs. 112. Than, before a cardinal
More than nine.
More than twenty times.
It is hardly six months since.
a-t-il que vous
avez entendu parler de votre frère?
+ Il y a un an que j'ai entendu par-
ler de lui.
+ Il y a un an que j'en ai entendu
parler.
+ Il n'y a qu'un an.
+ Il y a plus d'un an.
number, is rendered by de (16º.)
Plus de neuf.
Plus de vingt fois.
+ Il y a à peine six mois.
FORTY-NINTH LESSON. (1.).
247
A few hours ago.
Half an hour ago.
Two years ago.
These few hours.
This half hour.
These two years.
Two hours and a half ago. (192, N. 3.)
A fortnight ago. These two weeks.
A fortnight.
Have you been long in France ?
+
Il y a quelques heures.
+ Il y a une demi-heure.
+ Il y a deux ans.
† Il y a deux heures et demie.
† Il y a quinze jours.
+ Quinze jours.¹
→ Y a-t-il long-temps que vous êtes
en France?
Obs. 113. In English the state of existence or of action, when in its
duration, is always expressed in the perfect tense, while in French it is
expressed by the present tense. For: Have you been long in France? means
that you are still there. Say, then, in French, que vous êtes and not que vous
avez été, which would mean that you are no longer at the place.
He has been in Paris these three
years.
I have been living here these two
years.
Il y a trois ans qu'il est à Paris.
Il y a deux ans que je demeure ici.
QUARANTE-NEUVIÈME THÊME. 1re Sec.
Vous avez-là de jolis livres, combien y a-t-il que vous les avez?
Il n'y a que trois ou quatre jours. Y a-t-il long-temps que vous
avez commencé à les lire? Non, il n'y a que quelques minutes.
Est-ce depuis que votre cousin est parti? Oui, c'est depuis cela.
Combien y a-t-il qu'il est parti? Il n'y a pas long-temps.—Quand
avez-vous rencontré mon père? Je l'ai rencontré il y a quinze
jours. Y a-t-il autant que cela? Je le crois. Ne vous trompez-
vous pas ? il n'y a pas si long-temps que ça. Non, je ne me
trompe pas. Il y a juste quinze jours aujourd'hui, que nous nous
sommes rencontrés au pont de fer.-Y a-t-il long-temps que vous
connaissez ce marchand suisse? Quel marchand suisse ? Je n'en
connais aucun. Il dit qu'il vous connait, lui. Il se trompe.-Il y a
près de trois mois que votre fils est en Europe, n'est-ce pas ? Trois
mois. Laissez-moi voir. Mai, Juin. Non, il n'y a que deux mois.
Vous a-t-il écrit ? Oui, plusieurs fois. D'où? De Liverpool d'abord :
ensuite, de Londres, où il est à présent. Y a-t-il quinze jours qu'il
y est? Oui, il y a environ 15 jours. S'y amuse-t-il? Il m'écrit
qu'il s'y plaît beaucoup. Que pense-t-il de Liverpool? Il ne m'en
a pas dit grand' chose; il n'y est resté que trois ou quatre jours.
Have you heard of any one? I have not heard of any one, for I
have not gone out this morning-Have you not heard of the man
who has killed a soldier? I have not.-Have you heard of my
brothers? I have not.-Of whom has your cousin heard? He has
¹ Literally 15 days. In 2 weeks there are 15 days and only 14 nights :
hence, fortnight.
248
FORTY-NINTH LESSON. (2.)
heard of his friend who is gone to America.-Is it long since he
heard of him? It is not long since he heard of him.-How long is
it? It is only a month.-Have you been long in Paris? These
three years. Has your brother been long in London? He has been
there these ten years.-How long is it since you dined? It is long
since I dined, but it is not long since I supped.-How long is it since
you supped? It is half an hour.-How long have you had these
books? I have had them these three months.-How long is it since
your cousin set out? It is more than a year since he set out.
What is become of the man who has lent you money I do not
know what is become of him, for it is a great while since (que je ne)
I saw him.-Is it long since you heard (que vous n'avez entendu
parler) of the soldier who gave your friend a cut with the knife?
It is more than a year since I heard of him.-How long have you
been learning French? I have been learning it only these five
months. Do you know already how to speak it? You see that I
am beginning to speak it.-Have the children of the English noble-
men been learning it long? They have been learning it these three
years, and they do not yet begin to speak.-Why do they not know
how to speak it? They do not know how to speak it, because they
are learning it badly.-Why do they not learn it well? They have
not a good master, so that they do not learn it well.
VOCABULAIRE.
How long have you had that horse?
I have had it these five years.
How long? (since what time?)
How long has he been here?
These three days.
This month.
It is six months since I spoke to him.
2de Section.
Combien y a-t-il que vous avez ce
cheval?
Il y a cinq ans que je l'ai.
Depuis quand ?
Depuis quand est-il ici ?
Depuis trois jours.
Depuis un mois.
Il y a six mois que je ne lui ai parlé.
Obs. 114. The meaning of, It is 6 months since I spoke to him, is ei
dently: Il ve not spoken to him these 6 months. When a negative turn may
be given to the English sentence, the French use NE, but suppress PAS.
(That is, they suppress only a part of the negative, instead of suppressing it
altogether, as the English do. $ 145-1.)
Since I saw you, it has rained very | Depuis que je ne vous ai vu, il a plu
often.
très-souvent.
It is more than a year since I heard Il y a plus d'un an que je n'en ai
of him.
To come from. To have just.
I come from your brother's office.
I have just seen your brother.
entendu parler.
Venir,* de. (24³.)
Je viens du bureau de votre frère.
Je viens de voir votre frère.
Obs. 115. To express an action very recently past, use the verb venir,
mmediately followed by the preposition de, and an infinitive. (§ 145—3.)
FORTY-NINTH LESSON. (2.)
249
He has just done writing.
The men have just arrived.
Has that man been waiting long?
He has but just come.
To have but just.
To do one's best.
I will do my best, (as well as I can.)
He will do his best, (as well as he can.)
To spend money.
How much have you spent to-day?
He has fifty crowns a month to live
upon.
Nephew, plur. my nephews.
Near by, this way, here.
Yonder. That way, there.
Had you? (imperfect.)
Had you not?
I had.
I had not.
+ Il vient d'écrire.
† Les hommes viennent d'arriver.
+ Y a-t-il long-temps que cet homme
attend?
+ Il ne fait que d'arriver.
Ne faire que de, used only negatively.
+ Faire de son mieux.
† Je ferai de mon mieux.
† Il fera de son mieux.
Dépenser, 1.
Combien avez-vous dépensé aujour.
d'hui ?
Il a cinquante écus par mois à dé-
penser.
Neveu, plur. mes neveux. (92.)
Par ici.
Par là.
Aviez-vous? (imparfait.) J'avais.
N'aviez-vous pas
QUARANTE-NEUVIÈME EXERCICE. 2de Sec.
Je n'avais pas.
Y a-t-il long-temps que vous n'avez vu le jeune homme qui a
appris l'allemand chez le maître avec lequel nous l'avons appris ?
Il y a près d'un an que je ne l'ai vu (§ 145-1.)—Combien y a-t-il que
cet enfant a mangé? Il a mangé il y a quelques minutes.-Com-
bien y a-t-il que ces enfants ont bu? Lesquels? Ces petits-là ou
les autres? Ces grands-ci. Ceux-là! Oh! ils ont bu il y a un
quart d'heure. Ne vous trompez-vous pas ? Non, je ne me
trompe pas, je vous assure; car, j'ai vu le jeune valet donner du
lait aux uns et de l'eau aux autres.-Combien y a-t-il que votre neveu.
est en Espagne? En Espagne? Il n'y est pas. Je le croyais en
Espagne, où est-il done? Il est à Baltimore. Depuis quand y est-
il? Il y est depuis six mois. C'est donc votre cousin qui est en
Espagne. Oh! c'est différent. Il y est, c'est vrai. Combien y
a-t-il qu'il y est? Il y a un mois. Y a-t-il vu notre ministre? Il
l'a vu plus de dix fois. Je me trompe, je veux dire plus de vingt
fois;
il le voit presque tous les jours. Que venez-vous de me dire?
Ils se voient? Oui, sans doute. Je les croyais ennemis. Ils ne le
sont plus. J'en suis charmé. N'aviez-vous pas mon journal Italien
hier après-midi? Je l'avais alors, mais je ne l'ai plus.
When did you meet the lawyer's nephew? I met him just now.
-Where have you just met him? I met him close by here, (tout
près d'ici.)—Whom did you see with him? I saw him alone.-Did
he do you any harm? He did me no (33¹) harm, for he is a very
good lad, (garçon.)-Where are my gloves? They (on) have
250
FORTY-NINTH LESSON. (3.)
thrown them away, for they were worn out, quite.-Who is the
man who has just spoken to you? He is a merchant.-What has
the shoemaker just brought? He has brought the shoes which he
has made us.-Who are the men that have just arrived? They are
Russians. Where did your uncle dine yesterday? He dined at the
hotel.-How much did he spend? He spent five francs.--How
much has he a month to live upon? He has two hundred francs a
month to live upon. It is about forty dollars; is it not? Yes, a
little less. Do you throw your hat away?
? I do not throw it away,
for it fits me very well.-How much have you spent to-day? I
have not spent much; I have spent only two francs.-Do you spend
every day as much as that? I sometimes spend more than that..-
Has that nephew of yours (votre neveu) been waiting long? He has
but just come.--What does he wish? He wishes to speak to you.
Are you willing to do that? I am willing to do it.-Shall you be
able (462) to do it well? I will do my best.-Will this man be able
to do that? He will be able to do it, for he will do his best.-Have
you my yellow copy-book? I had it this morning, but I have it no
longer. I thought you had it yet. You have made a mistake. (432,
442.)
VOCABULAIRE. 3me Sec.
Have the horses been found?
They have been found.
The men have been seen.
Our children have been praised and
rewarded, because they have been
good and studious.
By whom have they been rewarded?
By whom have we been blamed?
To pass.
To go by.
Before.
Les chevaux ont-ils été trouvés ?
Ils ont été trouvés. (42'.)
Les hommes ont été vus.
Nos enfants ont été loués et récom-
pensés, parce qu'ils ont été sages
et assidus.
Par qui ont-ils été récompensés ?
Par qui avons-nous été blâmés?
Passer, 1.
Devant.
Obs. 116. Before is expressed in French by avant when it denotes pri
ority, (13¹,) and by devant, when it signifies in presence of. Ex.
To pass before some one.
To pass before a place.
A place, this place, this fine place.
I have passed before the theatre.
He passed before I did before the
museum.
To spend time in something.
What do you spend your time in?
I spend my time in studying.
What has he spent his time in?
What shall we spend our time in?
To miss, to fail to.
Passer devant quelqu'un.
Passer devant un endroit.
Un endroit, cet endroit, ce bel en.
droit.
J'ai passé devant le théâtre.
Il a passé avant moi devant le
musée.
Passer le temps à quelque chose.
+ À quoi passez-vous le temps?
† Je passe le temps à étudier.
+ À quoi a-t-il passé le temps?
† À quoi passerons-nous le temps?
Manquer, 1, (de av. l'inf.)
FORTY-NINTH
251
LESSON. (3.)
Do not fail to go. Do not fail to do it,
(do not neglect it.) Mind! (you
hear?)
Ne manquez pas d'y aller.
N'y
manquez pas. Entendez-vous ?
The merchant has failed to bring the Le marchand a manqué d'apporter
money.
Did he ?
You have missed your turn.
You have failed to come.
Send them to me. Don't you forget
it now, (don't you fail,) mind!
To be good for something.
Of what use is that?
it is good for nothing.
A good-for-nothing fellow.
good-for-nothing fellow.
1
l'argent.
Y a-t-il manqué ?
Vous avez manqué votre tour.
Vous avez manqué de venir.
Envoyez-les-moi. N'y manquez pas,
entendez-vous?
† Être bon à quelque chose.
† À quoi cela est-il bon ?
+ Cela n'est bon à rien.
He is a Un vaurien.
Is the gun which you have bought a
good one?
No, it is good for nothing.
Have you thrown away anything?
He has thrown away what is good
for nothing, (worth nothing.)
($ 39, N. 3.)
C'est un vaurien.
Le fusil que vous avez acheté est-il
bon?
Non, il ne vaut rien.
Avez-vous jeté quelque chose?
| Il a jeté ce qui n'est bon à rien, (ce
qui ne vaut rien.)
QUARANTE-NEUVIÈME THÊME. 3me Sec.
Où ont-ils été trou-
A-t-on trouvé les châles? On les a trouvés.
vés? Ils ont été trouvés derrière le sofa, de ce côté-ci du pupitre.-
Avez-vous été vu par quelqu'un? Je n'ai été vu par personne. Je
croyais que vous aviez été vu par le nouveau jardinier. Je croyais
ne pas avoir été vu. (§ 171–7.)-Attendez-vous quelqu'un? Nous
'attendons que notre cousin, le capitaine. Est-il arrivé? Oui, il
vient d'arriver. Combien y a-t-il qu'il est ici? Il ne fait que d'ar-
river. Envoyez-moi chercher lorsqu'il viendra, n'y manquez pas;
entendez-vous? Ne pouvez-vous pas l'attendre? Il sera ici avant
une demi-heure. Je ne peux pas, je suis pressé dans ce moment.
Alors, je vous enverrai chercher. S'il vous plaît: n'y manquez pas,
entendez-vous? Non, non, soyez tranquille, (depend upon it.) Je
n'y manquerai pas.-Le roi (king) a-t-il passé sur le pont de fil de
fer? Non, il a passé devant.—Qu'est-ce que ce vaurien attend? Je
ne sais pas ce qu'il attend. Dites-lui de s'en aller. Il s'en va.-Où
est votre neveu? Tenez; le voilà.
Has the king passed here? (par ici?) He has not passed here,
(par ici,) but before the theatre.-Has he not passed before the
castle? He has passed there, but I have not seen him.-How do
you spend your time? (À quoi……..) I spend my time in studying.
-What does your brother spend his time in? He spends his time
in reading and playing.-Does this man spend his time in working?
-He is a good-for-nothing fellow; he spends his time in drinking
and playing-What do your children spend their time in? They
252
FIFTIETH LESSON. (1.)
spend their time in learning.-Can you pay me what you owe me!
I cannot pay it you, for the merchant has failed to bring me my
money.
Why have you breakfasted without me? You failed to come at
nine o'clock, so that we have breakfasted without you.-Has the
merchant brought you the gloves which you bought at his house,
(chez lui?) He has failed to bring them to me.-Has he sold them
to you on credit? He has sold them to me, on the contrary, for
cash. Do you know those men? I do not know them; but I
believe that they are (ce sont) good-for-nothing fellows, for they
spend their time in playing.-Why did you fail to come to my
father's, this morning? The tailor did not bring me the coat which
he promised me, so that I could not do what I had promised.
FIFTIETH LESSON, 50th.-Cinquantième Leçon, 5Cme.
VOCABULAIRE. 1re Sec.
Far, very far, too far, far enough.
How far, (meaning what distance?)
1
Loin, fort loin, trop loin, assez loin.
Quelle distance?
Obs. 117. The impersonal il y a cannot be rendered into English by
there is, there are, when it is used in reply to the question, How far? Quelle
distance?
How far is it from here to Paris?
Is it far from here to Paris?
Is it far?
It is not far.
How many miles is it?
A mile.
Is it ten miles?
It is more than two hundred miles
from New York to Washington.
It is nearly a hundred miles from
Berlin to Vienna.
From Venice, from Havre.
I am from Paris.
What countryman are you?
Are you from France ?
I am.
The Parisian.
I am not.
He is a Parisian, (from Paris.)
The king.
The philosopher.
The preceptor, the tutor.
The innkeeper, the landlord.
Are you an Englishman?
Whence do you come?
I come from Paris.
Quelle distance y a-t-il d'ici à Paris?
Y a-t-il loin d'ici à Paris ?
Y a-t-il loin? Il n'y a pas loin.
Combien de milles y a-t-il ?
Un mille. Y a-t-il dix milles?
Il y a plus de deux cents milles de
New York à Washington.
Il y a environ cent milles de Berlin
à Vienne.
De Venise, du Havre. ($ 9.)
Je suis de Paris.
+ De quel pays êtes-vous ?
Etes-vous de France ?
J'en suis.
Le Parisien
+ Il est Parisien.
Je n'en suis pas.
Le roi. Le philosophe.
Le précepteur.
L'aubergiste, l'hôte.
Êtes-vous Anglais ?
D'où venez-vous ?
Je viens de Paris.
FIFTIETH
259
LESSON. (1.)
Do not fly away.
To flee, to fly, run away.
Run away.
S'enfuir,* 2, s'enfuyant, fui.
Enfuyez-vous. Ne vous enfuyez pas.
I run away, thou runnest away, he Je m'enfuis, tu t'enfuis, il s'enfuit.
runs away.
Why do you fly?
I fly because I am afraid.
To assure.
I assure you that he is arrived.
To hear a sound, a noise.
To hear a news.
Have you heard nothing new?
I have heard nothing new.
Pourquoi vous enfuyez-vous ?
Je m'enfuis parce que j'ai peur.
Assurer, 1..
Je vous assure qu'il est arrivé.
Entendre un son, un bruit.
Apprendre une nouvelle (nom fém.)
† N'avez-vous rien appris de nou
veau ?
† Je n'ai rien appris de nouveau.
CINQUANTIÈME THÊME. 1re Sec.
Allez-vous quelque part? Pourquoi me demandez-vous cela?
Parce que je vois que vous êtes prêt à voyager. Vous avez tout ce
qu'il faut pour cela. Chapeau, gants, parapluie, manteau. (§ 140
-6.) Vous avez raison. Je vais partir pour Providence. Com-
bien y a-t-il d'ici à Providence? Il y a environ 250 milles.-Y a-t-il
plus loin de New York à Washington que de Philadelphie à Provi-
dence? Il n'y a pas tout-à-fait si loin.-Qui craignez-vous? Ce
méchant homme qui s'enfuit.-Ne craignez-vous pas ce gros chien
noir? Je ne le crains pas, il n'est pas méchant; il n'a jamais
mordu personne. N'a-t-il pas mordu l'aubergiste? Non, il ne lui
a pas fait de mal.-Qu'est-ce qui (§ 116) vous plaît tant, mon jeune
neveu? Ce petit chien-là. Il est si obéissant qu'il fait tout ce (§91)
qu'on veut.-N'aviez-vous pas mon dictionnaire ce matin? Si fait,
je l'avais, et je l'ai encore. En avez-vous eu besoin? Non, pas
jusqu'à présent. Si vous en avez besoin, je vous le rendrai. Don
nez-le-moi. Le voici.
How far is it from Paris to London? It is nearly two hundred
miles from Paris to London.-Is it far from here to Berlin? It is
far-Is it far from there to Vienna? It is almost a hundred and
fifty n.iles from there to Vienna.-Is it further from Paris to Blois
than from Orléans to Paris? It is further from Orléans to Paris than
from Paris to Blois.-How far is it from Paris to Berlin? It is
almost a hundred and thirty miles from Paris to Berlin.-Do you
intend to go to Paris soon? I intend to go soon.-Why do you
wish to go this time? (cette fois ?) In order to buy good books and
good gloves, and to see my good friends.-Is it long since you were
there? (n'y, 492, Obs. 114.) It is nearly a year since I was there.-
Do you not go to Italy, this year; (cette année?) I do not go, for it
is too far from here to Italy.
22
254
FIFTIETH LESSUN. (2.)
t
Who are the men that have just arrived? They are philoso-
phers. Of what country are they? They are from London.-What
countryman are you? I am a Spaniard, and my friend is an Ita-
lian. Are you from Tours? No, I am a Parisian.-How much
money have your children spent to-day? They have spent but
little; they have spent but one crown.-Where did you dine yester-
day? I dined at the innkeeper's. Did you spend much? I spent
a crown and a half.-Has the king passed here? (par ici?) He has
not passed here, but before the theatre.-Have you seen him? I
have seen him.-Is it the first time (la première fois que) you have
seen him? It is not the first time, for I have seen him more than
twenty times. I thought you had seen him a few times, but I did not
think that you had seen him twenty times.-Why does your servai t
run away? He is afraid of that ox.—Why do you run away? I!
I do not run away.
To happen.
The happiness, fortune.
VOCABULAIRE. 2de Sec.
The unhappiness, misfortune.
A great misfortune has happened.
He has met with a great misfortune.
What has happened to you?
Nothing has happened to me.
I have met with your brother.
The poor man.
I have cut his finger.
You have broken the man's neck.
To pity, pitying, pitied.
I pity, thou pitiest, he pities.
Pity that host and his nephew.
I pity him with all my heart.
With all my heart.
To complain.
Do you complain?
I do not complain.
Do you complain of my friend?
I do complain of him.
I do not complain of him.
To dare, to spoil. Damage nothing.
To serve, wait upon, served, serve.
Dost thou wait upon, (serve ?)
I do wait upon, (I serve.)
He waits upon, (he serves.)
Do you wait upon? (do you serve ?)
To serve some onc, to wait upon
some one.
Arriver, 1.
Le bonheur.
Le malheur.
Il est arrivé un grand malheur.
+ Il lui est arrivé un grand malheur
Que vous est-il arrivé?
Il ne m'est rien arrivé.
J'ai rencontré votre frère.
Le pauvre homme.
† Je lui ai coupé le doigt.
+ Vous avez cassé le cou à l'homme.
Plaindre,* 4, plaignant, plaint.
Je plains, tu plains, il plaint.
Plaignez cet hôte et son neveu.
Je le plains de tout mon cœur.
† De tout mon cœur.
+ Se plaindre,* 4.
Vous plaignez-vous ?
† Je ne me plains pas,
Vous plaignez-vous de mon ami?
Je m'en plains.
Je ne m'en plains pas.
Oser, 1. Gâter, 1. Ne gâtez rien
Servir,* 2, (25¹,) servi, servez.
Sers-tu ?
Je sers.
Il sert.
Servez-vous?
Servir quelqu'un.
FIFTIETH LESSON. (2.)
255
Has he been in your service?
Has he served you?
How long has he been in your ser-
vice?
The service.
To offer,
offered,
offer.
Do you offer? I do. I offer nothing.
Dost thou offer? He offers.
A-t-il été à votre service?
Vous a-t-il servi?
+ Combien y a-t-il qu'il vous sert ?
+ Combien y a-t-il qu'il est à votre
service ?
Le service.
Offrir,* 2, offert,
offrez.
Offrez-vous? J'offre. Je n'offre rien..
Offres-tu ?
Il offre.
CINQUANTIÈME THÊME. 2de Sec.
M'offrez-vous ce bouquet? Oui, Mlle.; je vous l'offre de tout
mon cœur.-Vous plaît-il? (473, Obs. 109.) Il me plaît beaucoup,
et je vous remercie de votre don, (for your present.) De rien.
(26¹.)—En avez-vous offert un à Sophie? Non, je ne lui en ai
pas offert. Lui en offrirez-vous un demain? Je n'y manquerai
pas. Ne l'oubliez pas, je vous prie. Non, je vous assure que je
n'y manquerai pas.—Avez-vous mon éventail Hollandais? Non, je
croyais que vous l'aviez vous-même. Je l'avais, il y a un moment,
et je croyais que vous l'aviez pris.-Non, je ne l'ai pas eu. Ah!
je le vois; il est derrière vous. Le voici. Merci. De rien.
Qu'est-il arrivé au neveu de M. Lenoir? Oh! pas grand' chose. Il
s'est fait un peu mal au doigt.-Ne vous est-il rien arrivé ? À moi?
Non, il ne m'est rien arrivé.—Qu'est-ce que vous apprenez? J'ap-
prends ceci, et ce n'est pas difficile. Qu'est-ce que vous avez
appris de nouveau? Je n'ai rien appris de nouveau. On parle du
cholera, de la Californie; mais ce n'est pas nouveau.
Of whom has your brother heard? He has heard of a man to
whom a misfortune has happened.-Why have your scholars not
done their exercises? I assure you that they have done them, and
you are mistaken if you believe that they have not done them.-
What have you done with my book? I assure you that I have not
seen it. Has your son had my knives? He assures me that he
has not had them.-Has your uncle arrived already? He has
not arrived yet.-Will you wait till he returns? I cannot wait, for
I have a good deal (beaucoup) to do.-Have you not heard anything
new? I have heard nothing new.-Has the king arrived? They
say that he has arrived.-What has happened to you?, A great
misfortune has happened to me.-What? (lequel?) I have met with
my greatest enemy, who has given me a blow with a stick.-Then
I pity you with all my heart.
Why do you pity that man? I pity him because you have broken
his neck. Why do you complain of my friend? I complain of
him because he has cut my finger-Does that man serve you well?
256
FIFTIETH LESSON. (3.)
He does serve me well, but he spends too much.-Are you willing
to take this servant? I am willing to take him, if he will serve
me.-Can I take that servant? You can take him, for he has
served me very well.-How long is it since he is out of (hors de)
your service? It is but two months since.-Has he served you
long? He has served me for (pendant) six years.-Do you offer me
anything? I have nothing to (a) offer you.-What does my friend
offer you! He offers me a book.-Have the Parisians offered you
anything? They have offered me wine, bread, and good beef.
VOCABULAIRE.
3me Sec.
Me confiez-vous votre argent?
To confide, intrust. Trust me with it. | Confier, 1,... à'... Confiez-le-moi.
Do you trust me with your money?
I do trust you with it.
I have intrusted that man with a
secret.
The secret.
To keep anything secret.
I have kept it secret.
To take care of something.
Do you take care of your clothes?
I do, I put them away.
Will you take care of my horse?
I will take care of it.
To leave, left.
Leave, let me.
To squander, to dissipate.
He has squandered all his wealth.
prevent, keep from.
You hinder me from sleeping.
To hinde
Do not keep me from sleeping.
To shop,
to purchase.
What have you purchased?
I have purchased two handkerchiefs
and a bag.
Have you purchased anything?
Most lovely, charming.
Admirably.
That hat fits you admirably.
That coat fits him very well.
It is charming.
Je vous le confie.
J'ai confié un secret à cet homme.
Le secret.
† Garder le secret de quelque chose.
+ J'en ai gardé le secret.
Avoir* soin,
Prendre soin,
*
} de quelque chose.
Avez-vous soin de vos habits?
J'en ai soin, je les serre.
Voulez-vous prendre soin de mon
cheval ?
Je veux en prendre soin.
Laisser, 1,
Dissiper, 1.
laissé.
Laissez-moi.
Il a dissipé tout son bien.
Empêcher, 1. (de av. l'infini.)
+ Vous m'empêchez de dormir.
Ne m'empêchez pas de dormir.
Faire emplette, (a feminine noun;
takes de before the substantive.)
Faire des emplettes.
† De quoi avez-vous fait emplette?
† J'ai fait emplette de deux mou-
choirs, et d'un sac.
Avez-vous fait des emplettes ?
Charmant, (an adjective,) très-bien,
extrêmement bien, (adverbs.)
À merveille, (an adverb.)
Ce chapeau vous va à merveille.
Cet habit lui va très-bien.
C'est charmant.
FIFTIETH LESSON. (3.)
257
CINQUANTIÈME THÊME. 3me Sec.
Quelqu'un vient de s'en aller, n'est-ce pas? Oui, quelqu'un vient
de sortir. Qui vient de s'en aller? C'est un Anglais qui a dissipé
tout son bien (all his fortune, wealth) en France. Est-ce un An-
glais? Oui, je vous assure. Je le croyais Allemand ou plutôt Hol-
landais. Vous vous êtes trompé, car il est de Bristol, en Angleterre.
-Pourquoi cet adolescent fuit-il? Il s'enfuit parce qu'il craint
d'être puni. Par qui craint-il d'être puni? Il craint de l'être par
un de ses parents, parce qu'il n'a pas pu faire son devoir.—À qui
confiez-vous votre argent? Je le confie à la banque, ou je le garde
moi-même. (§ 41.)-Ne confiez rien à ce garçon-là, car il ne peut
pas garder un secret. Je ne lui confierai rien.—Qui a soin de vos
oiseaux? J'en ai soin moi-même. Qui en aura soin lorsque vous
serez chez votre oncle? Thomas m'a promis d'en avoir soin.—
Laissez mes gants blancs, (leave my white gloves alone.) Vous les
salissez, vous les gâtez. Tenez! les voilà, (here! there they are.)
Why do you pity our neighbor? I pity him because he has
trusted a merchant of (de) Paris with his money, and the man (et
que celui-ci) will not return it to him.-Do not trust this man with
anything. I do not trust him with anything.-Has he already
cheated you? I have never trusted him with anything, so that he
has never cheated me; but it is said that he has cheated many
people.-Will you trust my father with your money? I will trust
him with it.—With what secret has my son intrusted you? I can-
not intrust you with that with which he has intrusted me, for he
has desired me (m'a prié de) to keep it secret.-Whom do you
intrust with your secrets? I intrust nobody with them, so that no-
body knows them.-Has your brother been rewarded? He has, on
the contrary, been punished; but I beg you (prier) to keep it
secret, for no one knows it.-What has happened to him? I will
tell you what has happened to him, if you promise me to keep it
secret. Do you promise me to keep it secret? I do promise you,
for I pity him with all my heart.-Will you take care of my clothes?
I will take care of them.-Are you taking care of the book which
I lent you? I am taking care of it; I have put it away in my
desk.-Who will take care of my servant? The landlord will
take care of him.-Do you throw away your hat? I do not throw
it away, for it fits me admirably.-Does your friend sell his coat?
He does not sell it, for it fits him most beautifully.-Who has spoiled
my book? No one has spoiled it, because no one has dared to
ouch it, (le toucher.)-Did not that little boy with black hair touch
22 *
258
FIFTIETH LESSON. (3.)
it? No, I prevented him from touching it, (his touching it.)—Pre-
vent his touching it; for if he does, he will soil and spoil it.
KÉSUMÉ POUR LA 50ME LEÇON.
Thême en Français.
Lequel va-t-il
Qui a mal au
au dos. Le joli petit mouton de
Non, il est dans son appartement
Le chien de l'étranger a-t-il mal au dos? Oui, il a mal au
dos. Le jeune cheval du boucher a-t-il mal au dos? Non, mais
son vieux mouton a mal au dos. Va-t-il tuer le mouton qui
a mal au dos? Non, il ne va pas tuer celui-là.
tuer ? Il va tuer celui qui a mal au pied.
dos? Je ne sais pas qui a mal
Mlle. Sara est-il dans le jardin ?
-Quel appartement allez-vous prendre? Je vais prendre celui que
vous n'avez plus. Aimez-vous cet appartement-là? Non, mais
j'aime celui-ci. Le trouvez-vous (do you think it) joli? Oui, assez
joli. Ne le trouvez-vous pas trop petit? Non, je le trouve assez
grand. Quel jour allez-vous prendre votre appartement? Nous
allons le prendre le 10 de ce mois. N'est-ce pas aujourd'hui le
huit? Si fait, c'est le huit. Alors (then) vous allez prendre votre
appartement dans deux jours? Oui, nous allons le prendre dans
deux jours.-Avec qui allez-vous jouer? Je vais jouer avec le fils
du dentiste. Où allez-vous jouer avec lui? Nous allons jouer dans
l'atelier de son père. Voulez-vous venir jouer avec nous? Avec
plaisir.—Qui est dans cet appartement-là? Le petit garçon qui a
mal au coude et au genou. Avec qui les médecins sont-ils? Ils sont
avec les enfants qui ont mal aux yeux.—Ne voulez-vous pas venir
avec nous voir le pont de fil de fer? Si fait, avec plaisir, (yes, ]
will.)-Ce bois de lit-là est-il assez grand pour l'appartement que
vous prenez? Celui que nous prenons n'est pas très-grand. Pour-
quoi vos petits amis vont-ils chez le consul? Ils y vont pour lire
les journaux de France. Quels papiers de France reçoit-il? Il en
reçoit plusieurs. En reçoit-il autant que le Président du conseil
municipal? (of council.) Il en reçoit plus que lui. En lit-il plus
de dix? Il en lit moins de dix. Il n'en lit que quatre ou cinq.
N'est-ce pas assez? Si fait. Je crois que c'est trop. Je ne peux
pas en lire autant. Combien en lisez-vous? Je n'ai le temps d'en
lire qu'un.-Le boucher vous apporte-t-il ce que vous achetez au
marché? Il ne me l'apporte pas; mais il m'envoie ce que j'achète.
Vous l'envoie-t-il tous les matins? Non, nous n'allons au marche
que tous les trois jours, le mercredi et le samedi.--Avez-vous deux
grands bois-de-lit? Non. J'ai un grand bois-de-lit pour moi et un
petit pour mon fils.
À qui est ce beau jardin ? C'est celui de... À qui sont ces
FIFTY-FIRST LESSON. (1.)
259
beaux chevaux et ce joli carrosse, (carriage.) Je ne sais pas à qui
ils sont.-Vous êtes grand; mais je crois que mon cousin est plus
grand que vous. Non, il est moins grand que moi. J'ai deux
pouces de plus que lui: (Obs. 71.)—Les Américains envoient-ils
plus de coton en France qu'en Angleterre (England)? Non, ils en
envoient beaucoup plus en Angleterre qu'en France.-Où les Bos-
toniens achètent-ils leur charbon? Ils l'achètent presque toujours
à Philadelphie. Combien le paient-ils à Philadelphie? Ils le
paient $4 le tonneau (§ 7) et ils le vendent $7 ou $8.-Votre oncle
lit-il beaucoup? Il aime beaucoup à lire les ouvrages Français,
Anglais, et Américains.-Vos cousins lisent-ils les journaux tous les
jours? Ils commencent tous les matins à les lire.-Que lit votre
père? Il ne lit rien à présent; il a mal aux yeux. Il fait lire notre
plus jeune frère pour lui.-Quels ouvrages les Américains lisent-ils?
Ils lisent les ouvrages de toutes les autres nations aussi bien que les
leurs. Ont-ils, eux-mêmes, beaucoup d'ouvrages? Ils en font tous
les jours quelques-uns.
L'ami du fils de son jardinier travaille-t-il autant que le cousin du
menuisier? Non, il ne travaille pas tant que lui.—Est-il plus jeune?
Non, au contraire, il est plus âgé.—Combien a-t-il de plus? (How
much older?) Il a 2 ans de plus. Il est donc paresseux? Oui, un
peu.-Vous avez de jolis souliers, qui vous les fait? Notre cordon-
nier.—Les fait-il toujours aussi bien? Oui, si vous les faites faire.-
Combien vendez-vous ces gants, Mlle.? Nous les vendons demi-
dollar.--En avez-vous à un quart de dollar? Oui, nous en avons;
mais ce ne sont pas les meilleurs.-Laissez-moi voir les uns et les
autres. Voici ceux que nous vendons cinquante sous; ils sont
superbes, comme vous voyez. Voilà ceux de 25 sous.-Ils sont
bons; mais ils sont moins bons que les autres.-Votre panier est-il
assez grand pour mettre votre marché (marketing) dedans? Je
crois que oui. Nous y mettons, du moins beaucoup de choses.—
Qu'a votre cheval? Il a mal au dos et à un pied.-Jules n'a-t-il pas
mal à l'œil? Si fait: il y a mal.
FIFTY-FIRST LESSON, 51st.-Cinquante et unième Leçon, 51me
VOCABULAIRE.
Will the people come soon?
Soon, very soon, too soon, soon
enough.
A violin.
1re Sec.
Le monde viendra-t-il bientôt ?
Bientôt, trop tôt, assez tôt.
A piano.
Un violon.
Un piano.
}
7 Jouer du violon.
To play upon the violin.
To play the violin.
260
FIFTY-FIRST LESSON. (1.)
Obs. 118. When a musical instrument is spoken of, the verb, jouer, t
play, takes de, but d, when a game is spoken of, As:
To play at cards, at chess.
To play the (upon the) piano.
What instrument do you play?
To touch. To play the piano.
Near me, near them, near the fire.
Near the trees, near the hotels.
Near going.
Near breaking it.
Where do you live?
I live near the castle.
What are you doing near the fire?
To dance.
To fall, fallen, do not fall.
Did you fall?
I did not.
To drop, (meaning to let fall.)
Has he dropped anything?
He has not drapped anything.
To retain, to hold, keep back.
To approach, to draw near.
Draw near the fire, (approach.)
Do. you approach the fire?
I do approach it.
To approach, to have access to one.
He is a man difficult of access.
I go away (withdraw) from the fire.
To withdraw (or go away) from.
I
go away from it.
Jouer aux cartes, jouer aux échecs.
† Jouer du piano.
+ De quel instrument jouez-vous ?
Toucher, 1. Toucher le piano.
Près de moi, près d'eux, près du feu.
Près des arbres, près des hotels. ($ 11.)
Près d'aller. Près de le casser.
Où demeurez-vous ?
Je demeure près du château.
Que faites-vous près du feu ?
Danser, 1.
Tomber, 1, tombé. Ne tombez point.
Êtes-vous tombé ? Je ne suis pas
tombé.
Laisser tomber.
A-t-il laissé tomber quelque chose?
Il n'a rien laissé tomber.
Retenir,* 2, (comme tenir, 243,
25¹, 34¹.)
S'approcher, 1, (de av. un nom.)
Approchez-vous du feu.
Vous approchez-vous du feu ?
Je m'en approche.
Approcher quelqu'un.
C'est un homme qu'on ne peut ap
procher.
Je m'éloigne du feu.
S'éloigner, 1, (de av. le nom.)
Je m'en éloigne.
Why does that man go away from Pourquoi cet homme s'éloigne-t-il du
the fire ?
feu?
He goes away from it because he is Il s'en éloigne parce qu'il n'a pas
not cold.
Se much, so many.
I have written so many notes that I
cannot write any more.
Do you fear to go out?
I do fear to go out.
froid.
Tant.
J'ai écrit tant de billets que je ne
puis plus en écrire.
Craignez-vous de sortir?
Je crains de sortir.
CINQUANTE ET UNIÈME THEME. 1re Sec.
J'ai entendu tomber quelque chose, avez-vous rien laissé tomber?
Non, je crois ne rien avoir laissé tomber. Voyez, cependant.—Ah!
voici un dé d'argent; est-ce vous qui l'avez laissé tomber? C'est le
dé de Louise. Je l'ai peut-être fait tomber. Je croyais l'avoir mis
dans son panier. Je l'ai trouvé près du pied du fauteuil. Merci.
De rien. Qui va au musée cet après-midi? George y va; mais je
crains de ne pas pouvoir y aller. Pourquoi donc? Mon oncle
FIFTY-FIRST LESSON. (2.)
261
vient de ine dire qu'il attend 100 sacs de café et qu'il faut les rece-
voir et les faire mettre dans le magasin. N'importe, si vous n'y
allez pas cet après-midi, vous irez une autre fois. Cela est vrai.
Jouez-vous du violon et du piano? Non, je ne joue que du violon.
En jouez-vous tous les jours? Un peu, pour ne pas oublier.
Do you play the violin? I do not play the violin, but the piano.—
Shall we have a ball to-night? We shall have one, in the large par-
lor. At what o'clock? At a quarter to eleven.--What o'clock is it
now? It is almost eleven, and the people will soon come.-What
instrument will you play? I shall play the violin. If you play the
violin, I shall play upon the piano.—Are there to be (doit-il y avoir,
472) a great many people at our ball? There is to be a great many.
Will you dance? I shall dance.-Will your children dance? They
will dance if they please, (si cela leur convient, or si cela leur plaît.)
-How do you spend your time in this country? I spend my time
in playing on the piano, and in reading-How does your cousin
divert himself? He diverts himself in playing upon the violin.-
Does any one dance when you play? A great many people dance
when I play. They never fail to do it. (On n'y manque jamais.)——
Who? At first (d'abord) our children, then our cousins, at last our
neighbors. Do you amuse yourselves? I assure you that we amuse
ourselves very much.
Whom, do you pity? I pity your friend.-Why do you pity him?
I pity him because he is ill.-Has anybody pitied you? Nobody
has pitied me, because I have not been ill.--Do you offer me any-
thing? I offer you a fine gun.—What has my father offered you?
He has offered me a fine book.-To whom have you offered your
fine horses? I have offered them to the English captain.-Dost thou
offer thy pretty little dog to these children? I offer it to them, for I
love them with all my heart.-Why have you given that boy a blow
with your fist? Because he hindered me from sleeping.—Has any-
body hindered you from writing? Nobody has hindered me from
writing, but I have hindered somebody from hurting your cousin and
nephew.
VOCABULAIRE.
To recollect, (no prep. in French.)
Do you recollect that?
I do recollect it.
Does your brother recollect that?
He recollects having seen it.
Do you recollect the words?
I do recollect them.
Have you recollected the words?
2de Sec.
Se rappeler, 1, (33³,) rappelez-vous
cela.
Vous rappelez-vous cela?
Je me le rappelle.
Votre frère se rappelle-t-il cela?
Il se rappelle l'avoir vu.
Vous rappelez-vous les mots ?
Je me les rappelle.
Vous êtes-vous rappelé les mots ?
262
FIFTY-FIRST LESSON. (2.)
I have recollected them.
I have not recollected them.
Have you recollected them?
You have recollected them.
Has he recollected them?
He has recollected them.
We have recollected them.
They have recollected them.
I recollect (remember) coming.
To remember, to recollect, (comme
venir,* 243, 25¹, &c.)
Do you remember that man?
I do remember him.
Do you remember seeing him?
I do not.
I do remember it.
What do you remember?
I remember nothing.
I do not remember falling down.
To sit down.
Sit down. (impera.)
Are you sitting down?
I am sitting, thou art sitting down.
Is he sitting down?
I shall or will sit down.
He sits near the fire.
He is sitting near the fire.
To run away, to fly.
Did you run away?
I did not run away.
He is not.
Why did that man run away?
He ran away because he was afraid.
Who has run away
He has.
?
They have.
}
Je me les suis rappelés.
Je ne me les suis pas rappelés.
Vous les êtes-vous rappelés?
Vous vous les êtes rappelés.
Se les est-il rappelés?
Il se les est rappelés.
Nous nous les sommes rappelés..
Ils se les sont rappelés.
Je me rappelle être venu.
Se souvenir,* 2, de. Souvenez-vous
de... Se ressouvenir,* 2, de.
Ressouvenez-vous-en, (de avant
le nom et av. l'auxiliaire.)
Vous souvenez-vous de cet homme ?
Je m'en souviens.
Vous souvenez-vous' de l'avoir vu ?
Je ne m'en souviens pas..
Je m'en souviens.
De quoi vous souvenez-vous?
Je ne me souviens de rien.
Je ne me souviens pas d'être tombé.
+ S'asseoir,* pres. part. s'asseyant ;
past part. assis. Asseyez-vous.
Vous asseyez-vous ?
Je m'assieds, tu t'assieds.
S'assied-il? Il ne s'assied point.
Je m'assiérai, or je m'asseierai. (462)
Il est assis près du feu.
Se sauver, 1, s'enfuir,* 2. (50¹.)
Vous êtes-vous sauvé ?
Je ne me suis pas sanvé.
Pourquoi cet homme s'est-il sauvé ?
Il s'est sauvé parce qu'il a eu peur.
Qui s'est enfui ?
Qui s'est sauvé ?
Il s'est enfui. Ils se sont sauvés,
CINQUANTE ET UNIÈME THEME. 2de Sec.
Vous avez l'air d'avoir froid, approchez-vous du feu. Je n'ose pas
m'en approcher. Pourquoi n'osez-vous pas? Je crains de me
prûler. Cela vous plaît à dire. (473.) Votre neveu s'éloigne-t-il du
feu parce qu'il craint de se brûler? Non, mais parce qu'il n'a plus
froid, je pense. No, ce n'est pas pour cela. Et pourquoi donc ?
Il a laissé tomber en quart de dollar, et il veut le ramasser. Tenez,
le voilà près du sofa. Ramassez-le pour lui. De quel côté du sofa?
De ce côté-ci; là, près de votre pied. Bon, je le vois à présent. Je
Iai, je vais le lui rendre. Tenez, voici votre quart de dollar. Merci.
De rien. Ah! M. I ucien, vous rappelez-vous le nom du médecin
FIFTY-FIRST LESSON. (3.)
263
du général? Non, je ne me le rappelle pas.-Qui s'assied sur ce
fauteuil? Personne ne s'assied dessus. Alors, je vais m'y asseoir.
Comme il vous plaira; il est à votre service.-Pourquoi le petit
Jules s'éloigne-t-il? Il a honte de ne pas s'être souvenu de vous
porter mon billet.
Do you remember anything pretty? I remember nothing at all;
I am too sleepy.-What does your uncle recollect? He recollects
what you have promised him.-What have I promised him? You
have promised him to go to France with him next winter. Have
you not? I intend to do so, if it is not too cold.-Why do you with.
draw from the fire? I have been sitting near the fire this hour and
a half, (il y a,) so that I am no longer cold.-Does your friend not
like to sit near the fire? He likes, on the contrary, much (beaucoup)
to sit ne the fire, but only (seulement,' adv.) when he is cold.-May
oneproach your uncle? One may approach him, for he receives
eve body.-Will you sit down? I will not sit down; I have to
Where does your father sit down? He sits down near me,
in that large red velvet arm-chair, (grand faut..... de v. n.)—Where
shall I sit down? You may sit near me.

W
}
Do you sit down near the fire, or on the sofa? I do not sit down
near the fire, for I am afraid of being too warm.-Do you recollect
my brother? I recollect having seen him and spoken to him once.—
Do your parents recollect their old friends? They do recollect them.
-Do you recollect these words? I do not recollect them.-Have
you recollected that? I have recollected it.-Has your uncle recol-
lected those words? He has recollected them.-Have I recollected
my exercise?
You have recollected it.-Have you recollected your
exercises? I have recollected them, for I have learned them by
heart; and my brothers have recollected theirs, because they have
learned them by heart.-Is it long since you saw your friend from
Paris? I saw him a fortnight ago. (Obs. 114.)
VOCABULAIRE.
To like better, to prefer.
Do
like to stay here better than
you
going out?
3me Sec.
Aimer mieux, (no prep. § 170-2.)
Aimez-vous mieux rester ici que de
sortir?
I like staying here better than going J'aime mieux rester ici que de sortir,
out.
He likes to play better than to study.
Do you like to write better than to
speak?
I like to spoak better than to write.
Better than.
(mieux comes directly after the verb.)
Il aime mieux jouer que d'étudier.
Aimez-vous mieux écrire que de
parler?
J'aime mieux parler que d'écrire.
Mieux... que de, (avant un infinitif.)
1 Only, when separated from the verb, is seulement.
264
FIFTY-FIRST LESSON. (3.)
He likes to do both.
I like beef better than mutton.
Do you like bread better than cheese?
Il aime à faire l'un et l'autre.
J'aime mieux le bœuf que le mouton.
Aimez-vous mieux le pain que le
fromage?
Je n'aime ni l'un ni l'autre.
J'aime tout autant le thé que le café
Tout autant, a peine tant.
Un veau, des veaux. Du veau.
Haut, à haute voix. Bas, trop bas
I like neither the one nor the other.
I like tea as much as coffee.
Just as much, hardly so much.
A calf, calves. Some, any veal.
Aloud. Low, too low.
Does your master speak aloud or low? Votre maître parle-t-il haut ou bas!
He speaks aloud and slowly.
Il parle haut et lentement.
In order to learn French, one must Pour apprendre le Français, il faut
speak aloud and quick.
Quicker, faster. As fast as you.
Not so quick, less quick.
He eats quicker than I.
Do you learn as fast as I?
I learn faster than you.
parler haut et vite.
Plus vite. Aussi vite que vous.
Pas si vite, moins vite.
Il mange plus vite que moi.
Apprenez-vous aussi vite que moi ?
J'apprends plus vite que vous.
I do not understand you, because you Je ne vous comprends pas, parce que
speak too fast.
To sell cheap.
To sell dear.
Does he sell cheap ?
He does not sell dear.
He has sold to me very dear.
This man sells everything so dear,
that one cannot buy anything of
him.
vous parlez trop vite.
Vendre à bon marché.
Vendre cher.
Vend-il à bon marché?
Il ne vend pas cher.
Il m'a vendu fort cher.
Cet homme vend tout si cher, qu'on
ne peut rien acheter chez lui.
You speak so fast that I cannot under- Vous parlez si vite que je ne puis
stand you.
To buy something of some one.
I have bought it of him.
vous comprendre.
Acheter quelque chose à quelqu'un.
Je le lui ai acheté.¹
CINQUANTE ET UNIÈME THÊME. 3me Sec.
Ramassez le gant de chamois de Mlle. Clara, qui vient de le laisser
tomber. (Obs. 115.) Adrien l'a déjà ramassé.-Votre neveu vient
de finir son devoir, n'est-ce pas ? Non, il ne l'a pas encore fait.
Moi, je croyais qu'il l'avait (he had) fait. Vous vous êtes trompé.
(432.)—Vous sortez? Passez-vous près du musée? Non, je passe
loin de-là. N'importe.-Charles, venez me voir ce soir, (come and
see me. § 150—12) voulez-vous? Je suis très-occupé, cependant
j'irai, si je m'en souviens.-Si vous avez tant à faire, vous tomberez
¹ Acheter à quelqu'un means to buy of or for some one. Ex. J'ai acheté
ce cheval à votre frère, I have bought that horse of your brother; i. e. Je
l'ai acheté de lui, I have bought it of him. J'ai acheté un gâteau à mon
enfant, I have bought a cake for my child: i. e. Je l'ai acheté pour lui, I
have bought it for him.
FIFTY-FIRST LESSON. (3.)
265
malade. Ne le craignez-vous pas ? Moi, je ne le crains pas, mais
mon père le craint. Pourquoi vous êtes-vous sauvé comme cela
hier soir? J'étais (I was, imperfect) très-pressé. Qu'aviez-vous à
faire? Vous le savez bien. J'avais à apprendre mes leçons. Etiez-
vous (were you, imperf.) pressé lorsque vous étiez chez le marchand
de gâteaux? Quand étais-je là? N'y étiez-vous pas à onze heures?
Je n'y étais pas. Il vend trop cher. Ses gâteaux sont à peine aussi
bons que ceux des autres marchands, et ils sont beaucoup plus petits.
Do your scholars like to learn by heart? They do not like to
learn by heart; they like reading and writing better than learning
by heart. Do you like cider better than wine? I like wine better
than cider.-Does your brother like to play? He likes to study
better than to play. Do you like veal better than mutton? I like
the latter better than the former for breakfast; but I like the former
better than the latter for dinner.-Do you like to drink better than to
eat? I like to eat better than to drink; but my uncle likes to drink
better than to eat.-Does the Frenchman like fowl better than fish?
He likes fish better than fowl.-Do you like to write better than to
speak? I like to do both.-Do you like honey (miel) better than
sugar? I like neither.-Does your father like coffee better than tea?
He likes neither.
Can you understand me? No, Sir, for you speak too fast.-Will
you be kind enough (avoir la bonté de ne pas, § 171-7) not to speak
so fast? I will not speak so fast, if you will listen to me. I am
ready to listen.-Can you understand what my brother tells you in
French? He speaks so fast that I cannot understand him.-Can
your pupils understand you? They understand me when I speak
slowly; for in order to be understood one must speak slowly.-Is it
necessary to speak aloud to learn French? It is necessary to speak
aloud. Does your master speak aloud? He does speak aloud and
slow. Why do you not buy anything of that merchant? He sells
so dear that I cannot buy anything of him.—Will you take me to
another? I will take you to the son of the one from whom you
bought last year, (l'année passée.)-Does he sell as dear as this one?
He sells cheaper.-Do your children like learning Italian better than
Spanish? They do not like to learn either; they only like to learn
French. Do you like mutton? I like beef better than mutton.-Do
your children like cake better than bread? They like both.-Has
he read all the books which he bought? He bought so many (tant)
that he cannot read them.-Do you wish to write some exercises?
I have written so many that I cannot write any more.-Why does
that lad run away so fast? Will any one touch him? hurt him?
28
266
FIFTY-SECOND LESSON. (1.)
No one will hurt him; but he will be punished by his master for not
having (pour ne pas avoir) done his task. (§ 171-7.)
FIFTY-SECOND LESSON, 52d.-Cinquante-deuxième Leçon, 52me
By the side of. By.
VOCABULAIRE.
To pass by the side of some one.
I have passed by the side of you.
Have you passed by the side of my
brother ?
I have passed by the side of him.
Obs. 119.
1re Sec.
À côté de.
Passer à côté de uelqu'un.
J'ai passé à côté de vous.
Avez-vous passé à côté de mon frère ?
'ai passé à côté de lui.
Prepositions formed with à, au, or aux, and a noun, require
the preposition de after them; almost all others require none.
To pass by a place.
I have passed by the theatre.
He has passed by the castle.
You have passed before my ware-
house. Which way did they pass?
To dare.
I dare not go thither.
He dares not do it.
I did not dare to tell him so.
To make use of, to use. Used, use it.
Do you use my copy-book?
I do use it.
Does your father use it?
He does use it.
Have you used my gun?
I have used it.
They have used your books.
They have used them.
To instruct, instructed, instruct.
I instruct, thou instructest, he in-
structs.
To teach.
To teach some one something.
He teaches me arithmetic.
I teach you French.
have taught him French.
To teach some one (how) to do some
thing.
He teaches me (how) to read.
You teach them (how) to write.
+ Passer auprès d'un endroit.
+ J'ai passé auprès du théâtre.
+ Il a passé auprès du château.
Vous avez passé devant mon maga-
sin. Par où ont-ils passé ?
Oser, 1, (point de préposition.)
Je n'ose pas y aller.
Il n'ose pas le faire.
Je n'ai pas osé le lui dire.
Se servir,* 2, de, (502) servi, servez-
vous-en.
Vous servez-vous de mon cahier ?
Je m'en sers.
Votre père s'en sert-il ?
Il s'en sert.
Vous êtes-vous servi de mon fusil ?
Je m'en suis servi.
Ils se sont servis de vos livres.
Ils s'en sont servis.
Instruire,* 4, instruit, instruisez.
J'instruis, tu instruis, il instruit.
Enseigner, 1.
Apprendre,* 4.
Enseigner quelque chose à quelqu un
Il m'enseigne le calcul.
Je vous enseigne le Français.
Je lui ai enseigné le Français.
Apprendre à quelqu'un à faire quel
que chose, ou Enseigner à....
Il m'apprend à lire.
Vous leur apprenez à écrire,
FIFTY-SECOND LESSON. (2.)
267
CINQUANTE-DEUXIÈME THÊME. 1re Sec.
Par où avez-vous passé pour venir chez nous? J'ai passe auprès
du pont de fer, du quai Buena Vista, et du musée. Vous avez donc
fait un grand tour, (taken a long walk.) Oui, j'aime à me promener,
et j'aime mieux me promener de bonne heure qu'à midi. Vous
avez raison; il ne fait pas si chaud alors. C'est pour cela que je le
fais. Vous servez-vous de votre parapluie? Non, je ne m'en sers
pas.-Prenez-le. Servez-vous en. Merci. De rien.-Avez-vous
rencontré le neveu de l'épicier? Non, mais j'ai passé à côté de
celui de l'apothicaire. Que vous a-t-il dit? Rien. Je l'ai aperçu;
mais il ne m'a pas aperçu, de sorte que nous avons passé à côté
l'un de l'autre sans nous parler.-Avez-vous dit à votre cousin ce
qu'on a dit de lui? Je n'ai pas osé. Pourquoi n'avez-vous pas osé ?
Je ne sais pas exactement pourquoi je n'ai pas osé; mais je ne le
lui ai pas dit. Ne le lui direz-vous pas ? Pourquoi lui dire? Cela
ne lui fera pas plaisir.
Have your new books been found? They have. been found.-
Where? Under the bed.—Is my coat on the bed? It is under it.
Are your brother's stockings under the bed? They are upon it.-
Have I been seen by anybody? You have been seen by nobody.-
Have you passed by anybody? I have passed by you, and you did
not see me. Has anybody passed by you? Nobody has passed by
me. Where has your son passed? He has passed by the theatre.
Shall you pass by the castle? I shall pass there.-Why have you
not cleaned my trunk? I was afraid to soil my fingers.-Has my
brother's servant cleaned his master's guns? He has cleaned them.
Has he not been afraid to soil his fingers? He has not been afraid
to soil them, because his fingers are never clean, (propre.)— Do you
use the books which I have lent you? I do use them.-May I
(puis-je) use your knife? Thou mayest use it, but thou must not
cut thyself, nor spoil the knife.-May my brothers use your books?
They may use them.-May we use your gun? You may use it,
but you must not spoil it.-What have you done with my wood?
I have used it to warm myself. Has your father used my horse?
He has used it.-Have our neighbors used our clothes? They have
not used them, because they did not want them.-Who has used
my hat? Nobody has used it, for nobody has dared use it.
VOCABULAIRE. 2de Sec.
The French master, (meaning the | Le maître de Français.
master of the French language.)
The French master, (a Frenchman, Le maître Français.
whatever he teaches.)
268
FIFTY-SECOND LESSON. (2.)
To shave, to shave one's self.
To get shaved.
To dress, to undress.
To dress one's self.
To undress one's self.
Have you dressed yourself?
I have not yet dressed myself.
Have you dressed the child?
I have dressed it.
To undo,
undone,
undo.
To get rid of.
Raser, 1, se raser, rasez-vous.
† Se faire raser.
Habiller, 1.
S'habiller, 1.
Se déshabiller, 1.
Déshabiller, 1.
Vous êtes-vous habillé ?
Je ne me suis pas encore habillé.
Avez-vous habillé l'enfant ?
+
Je l'ai habillé.
Défaire,* 4,
défait, défaiteu
(comme faire, 25¹, 27¹.)
Se défaire,* de.
Are you getting rid of your damaged Vous défaites-vous de votre sucre
sugar?
I am getting rid of it.
Did you get rid of your old ship?
I did get rid of it.
To part with.
The design, the intention.
To intend, to have the intention of.
I intend to go thither.
We have the intention to do it.
Do you intend to part with your
horses?
í have already parted with them.
He has parted with his
gun.
Have you parted with (discharged)
your servant?
I have parted with (discharged) him.
To get rid of some one.
I did get rid of him.
Did your father get rid of that man?
He did get rid of him.
avarié ?
Je m'en défais.
Vous êtes-vous défait de votre vieux
vaisseau ?
Je m'en suis défait.
† Se defaire* de.
Le dessein.
Avoir dessein, (de avant un infini.)
J'ai dessein d'y aller.
Nous avons dessein de le faire.
Avez-vous dessein de vous défaire
de vos chevaux ?
Je m'en suis déjà défait.
Il s'est défait de son fusil.
Vous êtes-vous défait de votre do
mestique ?
Je m'en suis défait.
Se débarrasser de quelqu'un.
Je me suis débarrassé de lui.
Votre père s'est-il débarrassé de cet
homme ?
Il s'en est débarrassé.
CINQUANTE-DEUXIÈME THEME. 2de Sec.
Vous êtes seul; vous vous êtes enfin débarrassé de ce vaurien. Je
m'en suis enfin débarrassé.-Pourquoi votre père s'est-il défait de ses
chevaux? S'en est-il défait? N'en savez-vous rien? Je n'en ai
pas entendu parler. Le maître de Français vient ce matin, n'est-ce
pas? C'est son jour, du moins, et je pense qu'il viendra. Serez-
vous prêt lorsqu'il arrivera? J'ai à me raser et à m'habiller, ca
vous voyez que je ne suis ni rasé ni habillé. Eh bien! rasez-vous
et habillez-vous. Qu'est-ce qui vous en empêche? Rien ne m'en
empêche, et je vais dans mon appartement pour cela. Appelez-
moi, s'il vient avant mon retour. Je n'y manquerai pas.-Guillaume,
FIFTY-SECOND LESSON. (3.) ·
269
qu'avez-vous dessein de faire de votre fusil Anglais? Le maître
Français m'a prié de (has asked me to) le lui prêter. Allez-vous
le lui porter? Pendant qu'il s'habille et se rase, il a envoyé ce petit
garçon, pour le chercher, (get it.) Allez-vous le confier à ce petit
garçon ?Croyez-vous qu'il le gâtera? J'en ai peur. Alors je ferai
mieux de le lui porter moi-même.
Have you shaved to-day? I have shaved.-Has your brother
shaved? He has not shaved himself, but he got shaved.-Do you
shave often? I shave every morning, and sometimes also in the
evening.—When do you shave in the evening? When I do not
dine at home.—How many times a day does your father shave?
He shaves only once a day, but my uncle shaves twice a day.-
Does your cousin shave often? He shaves only every other day,
(de deux jours l'un.)—At what o'clock do you dress in the morning?
I dress as soon as I have breakfasted, and I breakfast every day at
eight o'clock, or at a quarter past eight.-Does your neighbor dress
before he breakfasts? He breakfasts before he dresses.-At what
o'clock in the evening dost thou undress? I undress as soon as I
return from the theatre.
Dost thou go to the theatre every evening? I do not go every
evening, for it is better to study than to go to the theatre.-At what
o'clock dost thou undress when thou dost not go to the theatre ?
I then undress as soon as I have supped, and go to bed at ten
o'clock. Have you already dressed the child? I have not dressed
it yet, for it is still asleep, (dort encore.)—Did you at last get rid of
that man? I did get rid of him.-Why has your father parted with
his horses? Because he did not want them any more.—Has your
merchant succeeded at last in getting rid of his damaged sugar? He
has succeeded in getting rid of it.-Has he sold it on credit? He was
able to sell it for cash, so that he did not sell it on credit.-Who has
taught you how to read? I have learned it with (chez) a French
master. Has he taught you to write? He has taught me to read
and to write.
To wake.
To awake.
VOCABULAIRE.
3me Sec.
Eveiller, 1.
I generally awake at six o'clock in
the morning.
My servant generally wakes me at
six o'clock in the morning.
S'éveiller, 1.
Réveiller, 1.
Se réveiller,
Je m'éveille ordinairement à six
heures du matin.
Mon domestique m'éveille ordinaire-
ment à six heures du matin.
23 *
270
FIFTY-SECOND LESSON. (3.)
A slight noise wakes me.
A dream has waked me.
Un bruit leger me réveille
Un songe m'a réveillé.
I do not make a noise, in order not to Je ne fais pas de oruit, pour ne pas le
réveiller. (§ 171—7.)
wake him.
A dream.
Generally.
To come, or go down.
Un songe, un rêve.
Ordinairement.
Descendre, 4, descendu, descendez
Conduisez-vous
To alight from one's horse, to dis- Descendre de cheval.
mount.
To conduct one's self. Behave well.
To behave.
I conduct myself well.
How does he conduct himself?
Towards.
He behaves ill towards that man.
He has behaved ill towards me.
To be worth while to.
-Is it worth while to....?
It is worth while.
Is it worth while to do it?
It is not worth while.
Is it worth while to write to him?
It is worth nothing.
Is it better?
Will it be better?
It is better.
It will.
It is better to do this than that.
It is better to stay here than go a
walking.
Se conduire,* 4.
bien.
Se comporter, 1.
Je me conduis bien.
Comment se conduit-il ?
Envers or vers.
Il se comporte mal envers cet homme.
Il s'est mal comporté envers moi
+ Valoir la peine de.
• •
?
+ Vaut-il la peine de .
+ Cela en vaut la peine. (§ 50.)
+ Vaut-il la peine de le faire?
+ Cela n'en vaut pas la peine.
+ Cela vaut-il la peine de lui écrire ?
+ Est-ce la peine de lui écrire ?
† Cela ne vaut rien. (392.)
Vaut-il mieux? Il vaut mieux.
† Vaudra-t-il mieux ? Il vaudra
mieux.
† Il vaut mieux faire ceci que de faire
cela.
† Il vaut mieux rester ici que de se
promener.
CINQUANTE-DEUXIÈME THÊME. 3me Sec.
Vous êtes descendu seul. N'avez-vous pas dit à votre frère de
descendre? Non, je n'ai pas osé le lui dire. Pourquoi n'avez-
vous pas osé ? Parce qu'il dort. Ne l'avez-vous pas réveillé ? Non,
en vérité. Je n'ai pas osé. Et pourquoi donc? Il est temps de se
lever, n'est-ce pas ? Oui, sans doute; mais il m'a dit de ne jamais
(§ 171–7) l'éveiller quand il dort. Et si vous l'éveillez, qu'arri-
vera-t-il? Il me battra. Est-il assez méchant pour le faire? Il le
fait quand cela lui convient.—Qui a appris le calcul à votre petit
frère? Un maître Français le lui a enseigné.-M'appelez-vous?
Je vous appelle.-Que vous plaît-il? Pourquoi ne vous levez-vous
pas? Ne savez-vous pas qu'il est déjà tard? Que me demandez-
ous? (40) J'ai perdu tout mon argent, et je viens vous prier de
FIFTY-THIRD LESSON. (1.)
271
(e) m'en prêter.-Quelle heure est-il? Il est déjà six heures et
un quart, et vous avez assez dormi. Y a-t-il long-temps que vous
êtes levé? Il y a une heure et demie que je le suis.-Voulez-vous
faire un tour avec moi? Je ne peux pas aller faire un tour, car j'at-
tends mon maître de Français.
Do you rise as early as I? I do not know at what o'clock you
rise, but I rise as soon as I awake.-Will you tell my servant to
wake me to-morrow, at four o'clock? I will tell him.-Why have
you risen so early? My children have made such a (tant de) noise
that they wakened me, and hindered me from sleeping.-Have you
slept well? I have not slept well, for the dogs have made so much
noise, and barked so loud, that I have not been able to sleep.—At
what o'clock did the good captain awake? He awoke, as usual, at
a quarter past five in the morning.
How did my child behave? He behaved very well.-How did
my brother behave towards you? He behaved very well towards
me, for he behaves well towards everybody.-Is it worth while to
write to that man? It is not worth while to write to him.-Is it
worth while to dismount from my horse to buy a cake? It is not
worth while, for it is not long since you ate.-Is it worth while to
dismount from my horse to give something to that poor man? He
seems (paraît) to want it; but you can give him something without
dismounting from your horse.-Is it better to go to the theatre than
to study? It is better to do the latter than the former, (ceci que
cela.)¹—Is it better to learn to read French than to speak it? It is
not worth while to learn to read it without learning to speak it.—Is
it better to go to bed than to go a walking? It is better to do the
latter than the former.—Is it better to go to France than to Germany?
It is not worth while to go to France or to Germany when one has
no wish to travel.
FIFTY-THIRD LESSON, 53d.-Cinquante-troisième Leçon, 53me.
To hope, expect.
VOCABULAIRE. 1re Sec.
Hope ever.
Espérer. (§ 144—5.) Espérez toujours.
[hope, thou hopest, he hopes, one hopes., J'espère, tu espères, il espère, on
espère.
1 When latter and former apply to actions, translate by: ceci and cela;
not by: celui-ci and celui-là, which refer only to definite nouns or objects,
(§ 38, N. 5.)
272
FIFTY-THIRD LESSON. (1.)
:
Do you hope? We no longer hope.
To yield. To sell, (as a favor granted.)
I yield, thou yieldest, he yields, one
yields.
Espérez-vous ?
plus.
Céder, 1. (§ 144—5.)
Nous n'espérons
Je cède, tu cèdes, il cède, on cède.
Will you sell me your horse? (or, I Voulez-vous me céder votre cheval?
wish you would sell me, &c.)
I will, to oblige you.
Do you expect to find him there?
I do expect it.
To change, (meaning, to exchange.).
To change one thing for another.
I change my hat for his, or
We exchange seats.
Je vous le cédé rai pour vous obliger.
Espérez-vous l'y trouver ?
Je l'espère.
Changer, 1, (contre, pour, de.)
Changer quelque chose contre quel-
que chose.
Je change mon chapeau pour le sien.
Nous changeons de places, fém.)
To change, (meaning, to put on other Changer, 1, (takes de before a sub-
things.)
Do you change your hat?
I do change it.
He changes his linen.
They change their clothes.
To mix,
among, amongst.
I mix among the men.
He mixes among the soldiers.
To recognise or to acknowledge.
Do you recognise that man?
stantive.)
+ Changez-vous de chapeau?
† J'en change.
+ Il change de linge.
+ Ils changent d'habits.
+ Se mêler, 1,
parmi.
† Je me mêle parmi les hommes.
+ Il se mêle parmi les soldats.
Reconnaître,* 4. Reconnaissez,(impé.)
(comme Connaître, 25, 33¹.)
Reconnaissez-vous cet homme ?
It is so long since I saw him that I Il y a si long-temps que je ne l'ai vu
do not recollect him.
I have more bread than I can eat.
que je ne le reconnais plus.
J'ai plus de pain que je n'en puis
manger.
Obs. 120. When there is a comparison between two sentences, the verb
which follows plus or moins, requires the negative ne. (492, Obs. 114.)
Cet homme a plus d'argent qu'il
That man has more money than he
will spend.
There is more wine than is necessary.
You have more money than you
want.
n'en dépensera.
Il y a plus de vin qu'il n'en faut.
Vous avez plus d'argent qu'il ne vous
en faui.
CINQUANTE-TROISIÈME THEME. 1re Sec.
Pourquoi n'ôtez-vous pas votre chapeau lorsque vous êtes dans la
maison? Parce que je suis accoutumé à le garder. Si vous changez
de cheval avec Pierre, (Peter,) espérez-vous en avoir un meilleur? Je
ne sais pas si le sien vaut mieux que le mien; mais je sais qu'il est
plus joli, et c'est pour cela que je veux changer avec lui. Il ne vaut
¹ To give up, (as a favor, in order to oblige.)
FIFTY-THIRD LESSON. (2.)
273
pas la peine d'en changer, car le sien ne vaut rien.-Où est Pierre?
Il se mêle avec ces vauriens qui jouent tant aux cartes. (51) Est-il
changé? Il l'est beaucoup; de sorte que vous le reconnaîtrez à
peine quand vous le verrez.. J'espère qu'il se conduira mieux lors-
que son père sera revenu. Je l'espère aussi. Il a peur de son père.
Croyez-vous qu'il ne se mêlera plus avec ces vauriens? Il n'osera
pas tant se mêler avec eux. Si vous avez plus de miel qu'il ne vous
en faut, j'espère que vous m'en céderez un peu. Oui, volontiers; je
peux vous en céder autant que vous en voudrez.
Do you hope to receive a note to-day? I hope to receive one.-
From (de) whom? From a friend of mine.-What dost thou hope?
I hope to see my parents to-day, for my tutor has promised me to
take me to them.-Does your friend hope to receive anything? He
hopes to receive something, for he has worked well.—Do you hope
to arrive early in Paris? We hope to arrive there at a quarter past
eight, for our father is waiting for us this evening. Do you expect
to find him at home? We do expect it.-For what have you ex-
changed your (242, Obs. 55.) coach, of which you have just spoken to
me? I have exchanged it for a fine Arabian (26¹) horse.—Do you
wish to exchange your book for mine? I cannot, for I want it to
study French.-Why do you take your hat off? I take it off because
I see my old master coming, (je vois venir.)
Do you know why that man does not eat? I believe he is not
hungry, for he has more bread than he can eat.-Have you given
your son any money? I have given him more than he will spend.
Will you give me a glass of cider? You need not drink cider, for
there is more wine than is necessary.—Am I to sell my gun in order
to buy a new hat? You need not sell it, for you have more money
than you want.-Do you wish to speak to the shoemaker? I do not
wish to speak to him, for we have more shoes than we want.-Why
do the French rejoice? They rejoice because they flatter them-
selves they have many good friends.—Are they not right in rejoicing,
(de se réjouir?) They are wrong, for they have fewer friends than
they imagine. Did you recognise your cousin when you met him
at the wire bridge? No, he has changed so much that I did not
recognise him at all.-Did he recognise you? Instantly. He says
I have not changed at all.-How long has your nephew had this
prety little bird? He has had it long. It has been given to him by
a Greek merchant.
VOCABULAIRE. 2de Sec.
That man has fewer friends than he Cet homme a moins d'amis qu'il ne
imagines.
pense.
274
FIFTY-THIRD LESSON. (2.)
To fancy.
fo think.
To earn, to gain, to get.
Has your father already started?
He is ready to depart.
To make one's self ready.
To keep one's self ready.
To split.
To break somebody's heart.
You break that man's heart.
Whose heart do I break?
These fine eyes will break more than
one heart.
To spill, spread. To spread.
To expatiate, to lay stress upon._
That man is always expatiating upon
that subject.
The subject.
To stretch one's self along the floor.
To hang to, on or upon.
The wall. The garden wall.
I hang my coat on the wall.
He hangs his hat upon the tree.
We hang our shoes upon the nails.
The thief has been hanged.
Who hung the basket on the tree ?
The thief. The robber.
The highwayman. The robber.
S'imaginer, 1.
Penser, 1.
Gagner, 1.
Votre père est-il déjà parti? (192.)
Il est prêt à partir.
Se préparer, 1.
Se tenir* prêt.
Fendre, 4.
(192.)
Fendre le cœur à quelqu'un.
Vous fendez le cœur à cet homme.
À qui est-ce que je fends le cœur ?
Ces beaux yeux fendront plus d'un
cœur.
Répandre, 4.
S'étendre sur.
Etendre, 4.
Cet homme s'étend toujours sur ce
sujet.
Le sujet.
S'étendre sur le plancher.
Pendre, 4, à ou sur.
Le mur. Le mur du jardin.
Je pends mon habit au mur.
Il pend son chapeau à l'arbre.
Nous pendons nos souliers aux clous.
Le voleur a été pendu.
Qui a pendu le panier à l'arbre ?
Le voleur.
Le brigand, le voleur de grand che-
min.
You are always studious, and will Vous êtes toujours studieux, et vous
always be so.
le serez toujours.
Obs. 121. The personal pronouns are almost always repeated in French
before every verb of which they are the nominative case, whether they are
repeated in English or not; but when they are not in the nominative case
they must always be repeated. Ex.
Your brother is, and will always be | Votre frère est toujours'sage, et il le
good.
A well-educated son never causes
his father any grief; he loves, hon-
ors, and respects him.
Had he? He had. He had not got it.
Did you know? I did know. I did
not.
sera toujours.
Un fils bien élevé ne cause jamais
de chagrin à son père; il l'aime,
l'honore, et le respecte.
Avait-il? Il avait. Il ne l'avait pas.
Saviez-vous ? Je savais.
Je ne
savais pas.
CINQUANTE-TROISIÈME THÊME. 2de Sec.
Saviez-vous que votre oncle est ici? Je ne le savais pas. Ne le
Eaviez-vous pas vraiment? Non, je vous assure que je ne le savais
pas. Quand est-il arrivé? Hier soir. Je serai bien aise de le voir.
FIFTY-FOURTH LESSON. (1.).
275
A-t il encore les mêmes habits, ou en a-t-il changé? Il en a changé.
Il a un bel habit bleu au lieu du vieux brun qu'il avait.-Pourquoi
vous en allez-vous si tôt? Ne vous amusez-vous pas ici? Vous vous
trompez si vous pensez que je ne m'amuse pas ici; car, je vous
assure que je trouve beaucoup de plaisir à causer (converse) avec
vous. Pourquoi vous en allez-vous donc ? Je croyais que vous le
saviez. Qu'est-ce? On m'attend (I am expected) au concert d'un
de mes parents. Il doit commencer à neuf heures, et vous voyez
qu'il est neuf heures moins un quart. Je ne savais pas cela. Adieu.
Are you ready to depart with me? I am so.-Does your uncle
depart with us? He departs with us if he pleases, (s'il le veut.)—
Will you
tell him to be ready to start to-morrow at six o'clock in the
evening? I will tell him so.-Is this young man ready to go out?
Not yet, but he will soon be ready.-Why have they hanged that
man? They have hanged him because he has killed somebody.—
Have they hanged the man who stole (382) a horse from your
brother? They have punished him, but they have not hanged him ;
they hang only highwaymen in our country.-What have you done
with my coat? I have hanged it on the wall.-Will you hang my
hat upon the tree? I will hang it thereon.
Have you not seen my shoes? I found them under your bed, and
have hanged them upon the nails.-Has the thief who stole your
gun been hanged? He has been punished, but he has not been
hanged.—Why do you expatiate so much upon that subject? Be-
cause it is necessary to speak upon all subjects.—If it is necessary
to (s'il faut) listen to you, and to answer you when you expatiate
upon that subject, I will hang my hat upon the nail, (repeat the pro-
noun je before each verb,) stretch myself along the sofa, listen to
you, and answer you as well as I can. You will do well.-Your
ne hew learns French, does he not? To be sure.-How long has
he been learning it? These five months.-Does he know as much
as you? He knows more than I.-I thought you knew more than
he. You made a mistake. He has been learning it longer than I.
FIFTY-FOURTH LESSON, 54th.-Cinquante-quatrième Leçon, 54me.
To be well.
How do you do?
I am well.
VOCABULAIRE.
1re Sec.
+ Se porter bien.
+ Comment vous portez-vous ?
+ Je me porte bien.
Obs. 122. The verbs to be and to do, are both expressed in French by the
276
FIFTY-FOURTH LESSON. (1.)
reflective verb se porter, when they are used in English to inquire after, or
to speak of a person's health.
How is your father?
Comment se porte monsieur votre
père ?
Obs. 123. The qualifications of monsieur, Mr.; madame, Mrs.; made-
moiselle, Miss; usually precede the possessive pronouns in French, when
we speak to a person respecting his parents, relations, or friends, and wish
to pay them some respect.
He is ill.
Your brother.
Your cousin.
Your brothers.
Il se porte mal.
† Monsieur votre frère.
Monsieur votre cousin.
+ Messieurs vos frères.
Obs. 124. It may be seen that the plural of monsieu: s messieurs, mon
being changed into mes.
Your uncles.
† Messieurs vos oncles.
To doubt a thing.
To question anything.
Do you doubt that?
I do not doubt it.
I do.
Douter, 1, de quelque chose.
Doutez-vous de cela? J'en doute.
I make no question, have no doubt
of it.
What do you doubt ?
I doubt what that man has told me.
Je n'en doute pas.
De quoi doutez-vous ?
Je doute de ce que cet homme m'a
dit.
The doubt. Without doubt, no doubt. Le doute.
To agree to a thing.
Do you agree to that?
I do agree to it.
Sans doute.
Convenir,* 2, de quelque chose, (con-
jugated like its primitive, venir.*)
Convenez-vous de cela?
J'en conviens.
How much have you paid for that † Combien avez-vous payé ce cha-
hat?
I have paid three crowns for it.
peau ?
+ Je l'ai payé trois écus.
Obs. 125. When one of the prepositions, for, at, is used in English to
express 'he price of a thing, it is not rendered in French. (40¹, Obs. 93.)
J'ai acheté ce vin 6 dollars le pamer.
(ou à 6 dollars.)
I bought this wine at 6 dollars a bas-
ket. (§ 7.)
I bought some at $10 a basket.
J'en ai acheté à $10 le panier.
CINQUANTE-QUATRIÈME THEME. 1re Sec.
Où est M. votre oncle? Il voyage. Y a-t-il long-temps qu'il voy-
age? Il y a déjà quelques mois. Se porte-t-il bien? Oui, il se
porte beaucoup mieux depuis qu'il voyage. Que pense-t-il de l'Eu-
rope? Quelques pays lui plaisent, d'autres ne lui plaisent pas.-
A-t-il été en France? Oui, il y est passé; mais comme il ne parle
pas le Français, il ne l'aime pas beaucoup. Comment! M. votre
FIFTY-FOURTH LESSON. (2.)
277
oncle ne parle pas Français! Non, il ne l'a jamais appris.—Cɔm-
ment se porte-t-on chez vous? Tout le monde s'y porte bien.
Et
chez M. votre neveu? Le domestique dit qu'on y est malade. Qui
y est malade? Je ne sais pas. Comme j'ai l'intention d'y aller, je
n'ai rien demandé au domestique. Je doute de ce que ce valet dit.
Je ne le crois pas toujours.-Où avez-vous acheté ce joli bâton? Le
troavez-vous joli? Oui, charmant. Combien l'avez-vous payé? Je
n'en ai donné que trois quarts de gourdes, (dollars.) Ce n'est pas
cher. Êtes vous convenu d'aller demain à Burlington? J'en suis
convenu. Prenez de notre vin à $12 le panier. J'en prendrai.
How is your father? (Monsieur votre père?) He is (only) so so. (351)
-How is your patient? He is a little better to-day than yesterday.
Is it long since you saw your brothers? (Messieurs vos frères?) I
saw them two days ago.-How art thou? I am tolerably well.-
How long has your cousin been learning French? He has been
learning it only eight months.-Does he already speak it? He
already speaks, reads, and writes it better than your brother, who
has been learning it these two years.-Is it long since you heard of
my uncle? It is hardly a fortnight (quinze jours) since I heard of
him. Where is he staying now? He is staying at Berlin, but my
father is in London. Did you stay long at Vienna? I stayed there
a fortnight.-How long did your cousin stay at Paris? He stayed
there only a month.
1
Has your uncle at last bought the garden? He has not bought it,
for he could not agree about the price.-Have you at last agreed
about the price of that picture? We have agreed about it.-How
much have you paid for it? I have paid fifteen hundred francs for
it. What hast thou bought to-day? I have bought two fine horses,
three beautiful pictures, and a fine gun.-For how much hast thou
bought the pictures? I have bought them for seven hundred francs.
-Do you find them dear? I do not find them dear.-How much
nave you spent, then? I have spent and paid nearly four thousand
francs.-How many dollars (gourdes) is that? About 800. It is a
good deal of money.-Have you already heard of your cousin who
is gone to Hungary? He had agreed to write to me, but he has no
yet done it; however, I have written to him.
The price.
VOCABULAIRE. 2de Sec.
Have you agreed about the price?
We have agreed about it.
About what have you agreed?
About the price.
Le prix.
Êtes-vous convenus du prix ?
Nous en sommes convenus.
De quoi êtes-vous convenus?
Du prix.
24
278
FIFTY-FOURTH LESSON. (2.)
To agree, to compose a difference.
To feel, feeling. Felt, feel.
Do you feel? We do not.
I feel, thou feelest, he feels.
To consent, to agree to...
I consent to go thither.
To wear (garments.) The garment.
What garments does he wear?
He wears beautiful garments.
Against my custom.
As customary.
My partner.
To observe something.
To take notice of something.
Do you take notice of that?
I do take notice of it.
Did you observe that?
Did you notice what he did?
I did notice it.
To expect, (to hope for.)
What do you expect? (hope for?)
Do you expect to receive a note from
your uncle ?
I expect it.
He expects it..
We expect it.
I do not.
Have we expected it.
We have expected it?
To get, (meaning to procure.)
I cannot procure any money.
He cannot procure anything to eat.
S'accorder, 1.
Sentir,* 2, sentant. Senti, senvez.
Sentez-vous ? Nous ne sentons pas
Je sens, tu sens, il sent.
Consentir,* 2, (comme sentir,*) (d
ou de av. l'infin., à av. un nom.)
Je consens à (d'y) aller.
Porter, 1, (des habits.) Le vêtement.
Quels vêtements porte-t-il?
Il porte de beaux vêtements.
Contre mon ordinaire.
Comme à l'ordinaire.
Mon associé.
+ S'apercevoir, 3, de quelque chose.
Vous apercevez-vous de cela?
Je m'en aperçois.
Vous êtes-vous aperçu de cela ?
Vous êtes-vous aperçu de ce qu'il a
fait ?
Je m'en suis aperçu.
+ S'attendre, 4, (à av. l'infini.)
À quoi vous attendez-vous ?
Vous attendez-vous à recevoir un
billet de votre oncle ?
Je m'y attends.
Il s'y attend.
Nous nous y attendons.
Nous y sommes-nous attendus ?
Nous nous y sommes attendus.
+ Se procurer,
1.
Je ne peux pas me procurer d'argent
Je ne puis me procurer de l'argent.
Il ne peut se procurer de quoi manger.
CINQUANTE-QUATRIÈME THÊME. 2de Sec.
Quelque chose ne vous plaît pas. C'est vrai. Je m'attends à
recevoir un présent, et il ne vient pas. Ne soyez pas (412) impa-
tient, il viendra, si on vous l'a promis.-Qui vous fait ce don? Le
secrétaire du général m'en a promis un.-Le cousin de l'apothi-
caire a-t-il consenti à vous céder son dictionnaire Anglais et Français ?
Il n'y a pas encore consenti. Y consentira-t-il? J'espère qu'il y
consentira.-Qu'allez-vous porter ce printemps? Je n'ai pas encore
fait de choix. Je ne sais pas ce que je porterai. Moi, je porterai
des habits foncés au printemps, et quelque chose de clair en été.
N'aviez-vous pas un surtout clair l'hiver passé? Si fait. J'en ai
porté un tout l'hiver. Je le croyais. Moi, je ne les aime plus clairs.
FIFTY-FOURTH LESSON. (3.)
279
Je les ai aimes autre fois.-Avez-vous vendu votre grain à 75 cents
le boisseau? (a bushel. §7.) J'en ai eu 80 cents le boisseau.
Have you agreed with your partner? I have agreed with him.-
Does he consent to pay you the price of the ship? He consents to
pay me the price agreed upon, (convenu.)-Do you consent to go
to France? I do.-Do you too? I? No.-Have you seen your old
friend again? (revoir,* comme voir,* 25¹, 33³.) I have seen him
again. Did you recognise him? I could hardly recognise him;
for, contrary to his custom, he wears a large hat.-How is he? He
is very well-What garments does he wear? He weais beautiful
new garments.-Have you taken notice of what your boy has done?
I have taken notice of it.-Have you (l'en) punished nim for it? I
have punished him for it.-Has your father already written to you?
Not yet; but I expect (je m'attends) to receive a note from him
to-day.
Of what do you complain? I complain of not being able to
procure some money.-Why do these poor men complain? They
complain because they cannot procure anything to eat.-How are
your parents? They are, as usual, (comme à l'ordinaire,) very well.
-Is your uncle well? He is better than he usually is.-Have you
already heard of your friend who is in Germany? I have already
written to him several times; however, he has not answered me
yet. Why have you punished your boy? I did it because he broke
my best glass. I had given him some syrup and water, and instead
of drinking it, he spilt it on the new carpet, which we bought ten
days ago; and what do you think he did afterwards?-Did he
break the glass? Yes, he did, and then I gave him a few blows.
What did you pay for a yard of your new carpet? I paid dear for
it: $1.60.
VOCABULAIRE.
To make fun of some one or some-
thing.
To laugh at some one or something.
He laughs at everybody.
He criticises everybody.
Do you laugh at that man?
I do not laugh at him.
To stop, to stay. Stop, wait, hold on.
Have you stayed long at Berlin ?
1
stayed there only three days.
To sojourn. To stay.
Where does your brother stay at
present ?
At present, actually.
3me Sec.
Se moquer de quelqu'un ou de quel-
que chose.
Il se moque de tout le monde.
Vous moquez-vous de cet homme?
Je ne m'en moque pas.
S'arrêter, 1. Arrêtez-vous.
Vous êtes-vous arrêté long-temps à
Berlin ?
Je ne m'y suis arrêté que trois jours.
Séjourner, 1.
Où Monsieur votre frère séjourne-t-il
actuellement ?
Actuellement.
i
280
FIFTY-FOURTH LESSON. (3.)
The residence, stay, abode.
Paris is a fine place to live in.
After reading.
After cutting myself,
After dressing yourself.
After dressing himself.
After shaving ourselves.
After warming themselves.
I returned the book after reading it.
Le séjour.
+ C'est un beau séjour que Paris.
† Après avoir lu. (40¹.)
† Après m'être coupé.
† Après vous être habillé.
† Après s'être habillé.
† Après nous être rasés.
† Après s'être chauffés.
+ J'ai rendu le livre après l'avoir lu,
† J'ai jeté le couteau après m'être
coupé.
I threw the knife away after cutting
myself.
You went to the concert after dress-† Vous êtes allé au concert après
ing yourself.
vous être habillé.
He went to the theatre after dressing † Il est allé au théâtre après s'être
himself.
We breakfasted after shaving our-
selves.
habillé.
† Nous avons déjeuné après nous
être rasés.
They went out after warming them-† Ils sont sortis après s'être chauffés.
selves.
The sick person, (the patient.)
Tolerably well.
It is rather late. It is rather far.
Le malade.
Assez bien, passablement.
Il est bien tard. C'est bien loin.
CINQUANTE-QUATRIÈME THÊME.
8me Sec.
Tu arrives tard, mon cher Armand, t'es-tu arrêté en chemin? Je
suis parti un peu tard, et je me suis arrêté en chemin, (on the way.)
Pourquoi t'es-tu arrêté? Je me suis arrêté pour voir un voleur de
grand chemin qu'on a pris de bonne heure ce matin. Je crois que
tu as des vêtements neufs? Oui, j'ai mis a.,ourd'hui les vêtements
dont mon bon oncle m'a fait présent. Ils sont beaux; mais je crois
que l'habit est un peu trop grand: qu'en penses-tu? Je ne peux
pas bien voir derrière; devant, il va bien, n'est-ce pas ? A mer-
veille; mais ici et là, il est un peu trop large. Comment va le gilet?
Parfaitement bien. Et les pantalons (panaloons) comment vont-
ils? Ils vont bien aussi. Ne sont-ils ni top longs ni trop larges?
Non; ils sont juste ce qu'il faut.
Do you like to speak to my uncle? I live much to speak to him;
but sometimes he laughs at me, (se moque de.)—Why does he
laugh at you? He laughs at me because I speak badly.—Why has
your brother no friends? He has none, because he criticises every:
body. Why are you laughing at that man? I do not intend (je
n'ai pas dessein) to laugh at him. I beg you not (prier de, § 171—7)
to do it; for you will break his heart if you laugh at him.-Do
you doubt what I am telling you? I do not doubt it. Do you doubt
what that man has told you? I doubt it, for he has often told
stories, (mentir,* 443.)-Have you at last bought the horse which you
FIFTY-FIFTH LESSON. (1.)
281
wished to buy last month? I have not bought it, for I have not
been able to procure money.
What have you done with the books which the English captain has
lent you? I have returned them to him, after reading them.-Why
have you thrown away your knife? I have thrown it away after
cutting myself. When did I go to the concert? You went after
dressing yourself.-When did your brother go to the ball? He
went after dressing himself.—When did you breakfast? We break-
fasted after shaving ourselves.-When did our neighbors go out?
They went out after warming themselves.—What did you do this
morning? I shaved, after rising, and went out after breakfasting.-
What did your father do last night? (hier soir?) He supped after
going to the play, and went to bed after supping-Did he rise early?
He rose at sunrise.
A USEFUL HINT. Some of the observations have been given in French,
to show the pupil that it can easily be done. Let him now translate in
French all the English he finds in the book, as a part of his daily task.
FIFTY-FIFTH LESSON, 55th.-Cinquante-cinquième Leçon, 55me.
VOCABULAIRE. 1re Sec.
DEFINITE ARTICLE, FEMININE.-Article Défini, Féminin.
Sing, and plur. The,
Singulier.
Pluriel.
of, from the,
La, l',
Les,
de la, de l',
des,
to the,
à la, à l',
for the.
pour la, pour l'.
aux,
pour les.
Obs. 126. It will be observed that the plural of the definite article is alike
for both genders. (9¹.)
When the definite article stands before a vowel or an h mute, in the sin-
gular, it is also alike for both genders, viz. l.
Singulier.
La femme,
La mère,
La fille,
La sœur,
La chandelle,
Pluriel.
les femmes.
les mères.
les filles.
les sœurs.
les chandelles.
Sing.
Plur.
The woman,
women.
The mother.
The daughter or the girl.
The sister.
The candle.
The bottle.
La bouteille,
The key.
La clef,
les bouteilles.
les clefs.
She, it.
They, (nominatives.)
Her, it. To her, to it. Of, from her.
Of, from it.
Elles, (§ 38, 1 & 2.) Nominat.
D'elle, en.
En,
Them. To them. To them. Of, from Les. Leur, (211) Y, (21¹.) D'elles,
Elle.
La, l'.
Lui, y.
(8 47.)
them.
en. En.
Has she? She has. Has she not?
A-t-elle ? Elle a.
N'a-t-elle pas ?
24*
282
FIFTY-FIFTH LESSON. (1.)
Have they? They have, they have not. | Ont-elles? Elles ont, elles n'ont pas
With.
My, (féminin singulier.)
Thy.
His, her, its.
My, (plur. des deux genres.)
Of, from.
Ma,
de ma,
To.
à ma,
Ta,
de ta,
à ta,
avec ma.
avec ta.
Sa,
de sa,
à sa,
avec sa.
Mes,
de mes,
à mes,
avec mes.
Obs. 127. In the plural, the possessive pronouns are always alike for both
genders. (9¹.)
•
The father and his son or his daugh- | Le père et son fils ou sa fille.
ter. (§ 32.)
'The mother and her son or her daugh- La mère et son fils ou sa fille.
ter.
The child and its brother or its sister. L'enfant et son frère ou sa sœur.
Sing.
My pen,
Plur.
my pens.
thy forks.
Thy fork,
His or her nut,
his or her nuts.
Our hand,
our hands.
Your mouth,
Their door,
Singulier.
Ma plume,
Ta fourchette,
Sa noix,
Pluriel.
mes plumes.
tes fourchettes.
ses noix.
your mouths.
their doors.
Notre main,
Votre bouche,
nos mains.
vos bouches.
Leur porte,
leurs portes.
Obs. 128. The personal pronoun leur must not be mistaken for the pos-
sessive leur. The former never takes an s, while the latter does, when the
person or thing possessed is in the plural. Ex. Je leur parle, I speak to
them ; je vois leurs frères et leurs sœurs, I see their brothers and their sisters.
The pretty woman. (§ 200—4.)
The pretty women.
i
La jolie femme.
Les jolies femmes.
The small candle, the small candles. La petite chandelle,
The large bottle, the large bottles. La grande bouteille,
CINQUANTE-CINQUIÈME THÊME. 1re Sec.
les petites
chandelles,
les grandes
bouteilles.
Comment se porte Madame votre mère? Je vous remercie, elle
se porte passablement. Et Mesdemoiselles vos sœurs? Elles ne
se portent pas si bien qu'à l'ordinaire. Qu'ont-elles? Elles n'ont
pas grand' chose; mais elles se plaignent un peu. Les femmes
aiment à se plaindre, n'est-ce pas ? Elles ne se plaignent pas plus
que les hommes. La fille du ministre est-elle mieux? On dit
qu'elle est plus mal. Mange-t-elle quelque chose? Non, elle a
trop mal à la bouche pour manger.-Brûle-t-on des chandelles ou
du gaz chez votre sœur? On y brûle du gaz. On pense que ce
n'est pas si cher que les chandelles.—Où Sophie a-t-elle mis la clef?
La clef de quoi? La clef du pupitre Français. Je ne sais pas.
Mais voici ma clef; elle ouvre le pupitre. N'importe. Je n'ai pas
Desoin de l'ouvrir. A-t-on apporté les bouteilles? Les bouteilles de
FIFTY-FIFTH LESSON. (2.)
283
quoi? Les bouteilles de vin. Oui, les voici, (here they are,) derrière
la porte. Combien avez-vous payé la bouteille? J'ai payé presque
un demi-dollar la bouteille.-Avez-vous vu la jolie femme qui a
passé par ici? Quand a-t-elle passé? Il y a un moment. J'étais
alors occupé à casser mes noix, de sorte que je n'ai pas pu la voir.-
Ma plume d'acier est dans mon grand portefeuille, prenez-la, si vous
la voulez. Merci. De rien.
Has your sister my gold ribbon? She has it not.-What has she?
She has nothing.-Has your mother anything? She has a fine gold
fork.—Who has my large bottle? Your sister has it. Do you some-
times see my mother? I see her often.-When did you see your
sister? I saw her a fortnight ago.-Who has my fine nuts? Your
good sister has them.-Has she also my silver forks? She has them
not.-Who has them? Your mother has them.- What fork have
you? I have my iron fork.-Have your sisters had my pens? They
have not had them, but I believe that their children have had them.—
Why does your brother complain? He complains because his right
foot aches. Why do you complain? I complain because my left
eye aches.
Among you country people (parmi vous autres (§41) gens de
campagne) there are many fools; are there not? asked (demanda) a
philosopher, lately, (l'autre jour,) of a peasant, (à un paysan.) The
latter answered, (répondit :) “Sir, they are to be found (on en trouve)
in all stations, (l'état.") "Fools sometimes tell the truth, (la vérité,")
said (dit) the philosopher.-What did the philosopher ask of the
countryman? He asked if there were not (n'y avait pas) many
fools among country people ?-What did the countryman reply to
the philosopher? He answered that there were some in all stations.
-Was the philosopher pleased with the peasant's answer? (la ré-
ponse, fem.) I think he was pleased with the answer.- -What do
you think of the peasant's answer? I think it (L'écolier peut
finir la réponse.)—Do you not like that young lady's face? Yes, I
do; but not her hair, (plur.)-Has not that young woman too much
tongue? Yes, she has a little too much; at least, so they say, (on
le dit.)
VOCABULAIRE.
Which woman? Which women?
Which daughter? Which daughters?
Which, what one? Which ones?
This, that woman.
2de Sec.
Quelle femme ?
Quelle fille ? Quelles filles?
Laquelle ?
Cette femme.
Quelles femmes í
Lesquelles?
Ces femmes.
Cette dame-ci, ces dames-ci.
That young lady, those young ladies. Cette demoiselle-là,
ces demoi
solles-là.
These, those women.
This lady, these ladies..
284
FIFTY-FIFTH LESSON. (2.)
The hand,
the hands.
The right hand.
The left hand.
I have a sore hand.
La main,
les mains.
La main droite.
La main gauche.
J'ai mal à la main.~
Obs. 129. Avoir mal is used with the preposition à, to express that a
part of the body is affected with illness or pain. (23¹.)
The tooth,
the teeth.
Have you the toothache ?
I have the headache.
I feel a pain in my side.
His feet are sore.
The face. The mouth. The cheek.
The tongue. The language.
The door. The window. The street.
The town. The linen. The old woman.
La dent,
les dents.
Avez-vous mal aux dents ?
J'ai mal à la tête.
J'ai mal au côté.
Il a mal aux pieds.
La figure.
La langue.
La bouche.
La joue.
La porte. La fenêtre. La rue.
La ville. La toile. La vieille femme.
REMARK. From what precedes, this principle may be deduced The
characteristic ending of French feminine nouns and adjectives is the letter e.
There are, however, some adjectives which also have this ending in the
masculine, and then they are of both genders, as:
An amiable man.
An amiable woman.
The room.
The front room.
The back room.
The upper room.
INDEFINITE ADJECTIVE
Some,
Sing. (111,2)
Plur.
De la, l',
Des,
Un homme aimable.
Une femme aimable.
La chambre.
La chambre de devant, (ou du de
vant, ou sur le devant.)
La chambre de derrière, (ou du der-
rière, ou sur le derrière.)
La chambre d'en haut, (ou du haut.)
PRONOUN.-Article Partitif, Féminin.
Of, from some.
With some.
de,
de,
To some,
à de la, l', avec de la, l'.
à des,
avec des.
Obs. 130. For the plural of this article, and when it stands before an
adjective, (11¹, 2.)
Some light.
Some silk.
Some good soup.
Some good apples.
De la lumière. De la soie.
De bonne soupe.
De bonnes pommes.
Obs. 131. Most adjectives ending in el, eil, ien, on, and et, double their
final consonant before the mute of the feminine. Examples:
A cruel certitude.
Such a promise.
An old acquaintance.
A good truth.
A dumb woman.
Une cruelle certitude.
Une pareille promesse.
Une ancienne connaissance.
Une bonne vérité.
Une femme muette.
Obs. 132. In the masculine, the above adjectives would be cruel, pareil,
ancien, bon, muet.
FIFTY-FIFTH
285
LESSON. (2.)
INDEFINITE ARTICLE, FEMININE.-Article Indéfini, Féminin.
A or an, of, from a, to a, with a. Une, d'une, à une, avec une,
A virtuous woman.
Une femme vertueuse.
Obs. 123. Adjectives ending in the masculine in x become feminine by
changing a into se as, masc. vertueux; fem. vertueuse, virtuous.
Une demoiselle heureuse.¹
A happy young lady.
CINQUANTE-CINQUIÈME THEME. 2de Sec.
Sont-ce les Demoiselles Cavaignac? Oui, ce sont elles. Voulez.
vous me presenter à elles? (introduce me to them. §64.) Volontiers.
Venez. Attendons un moment, car vous voyez qu'elles parlent à
ces dames en bleu. Quelles sont ces deux dames en bleu, elles
sont jolies, n'est-ce pas ? Je ne les connais pas. Approchons à pré-
sent. Mesdemoiselles, voulez-vous me permettre de vous présenter
mon ami, M. de Montcalme? Nous sommes bien aises, M. de
Montcalme, de faire votre connaissance, (acquaintance.)-Mesde-
moiselles, tout le plaisir est de mon côté. Vous avez bien de la
bonté, (literally goodness, here, politeness.)-Mlle. Clara va-t-elle jouer
du piano? Non, elle n'en touchera pas (will not play) ce soir, parce
qu'elle a mal à la main droite. Comment s'est-elle fait du mal?
Elle s'est fait du mal avec ses ciseaux.-Quel bruit est cela? C'est
la porte de la rue (street door) qu'on vient de fermer.-Pourquoi
Mlle. Sophie tient-elle son mouchoir sur sa joue? y a-t-elle mal?
Elle n'a pas mal à la joue, mais aux dents. Cette femme muette
est-elle heureuse? Oui, elle est heureuse, parce qu'elle est bonne
et vertueuse.
Is your sister writing? No, Madam, she is not.-Why does she
not? Her right hand is sore.-Why does not the daughter of your
neighbor go out? She does not, because she has sore feet.-Why
does my sister not speak? Because she has a sore mouth.-Hast
thou not seen my silver pen? No, but I have seen your sister's steel
pen.-Hast thou a front room? I have a back one, (une de der-
rière,) but my brother has a front one.-Is it (est-ce) an upper room?
It is ore, (c'en est une.)-Does the wife (la femme) of our shoemaker
go out already? No, my lady, she does not go out yet, for she is
still very ill. Which bottle had your little sister? She had our
mother's, (celle de.)—Have you eaten of my soup or of my mother's?
I have eaten neither of yours (de la vôtre) nor your mother's, but
of that of my good sister.
Have you seen the lady who was with me this morning? No, but I
saw her amiable daughter.-Has your mother hurt herself? She
has not hurt herself.-Can you write with this steel pen? Which?
1 From the masculine heurEUI.
286
FIFTY-FIFTH LESSON. (3.)
(la quelle ?) Sophia's? Yes, Sophia's. No, but I shall write with
the golden one, (celle d'or.)-Each (chaque) woman thinks herself
amiable, and each (chacune) is conceited, (a de l'amour propre.)
The same as (de même que) men, my dear friend. Many a one
(tel) thinks himself (se croit) learned who is not so, (ne l'est pas,)
and many men (bien des hommes) surpass (surpasser) women in
vanity, (en vanité.)—What is the matter with you? Nothing is the
matter with me.-Why does your sister complain Because she
has a pain in her cheek.-Has your brother a sore cheek? No, båt
he feels a pain in his side.-Where is the silk? It has fallen from
the window in the street.-Did this old woman pick it up? Yes,
she did; but she did not pick up the linen.-Did the linen fall also
from the window? Yes, it did.
VOCABULAIRE.
An active young woman.
3me Sec.
Une jeune personnel active.
Obs. 134. Adjectives ending in the masculine in f, become feminine by
changing ƒ into ve, as, masc. actif; fem. active, active.
¡
A new gown.
An ingenuous proposal.
Have you my pen?
No, Madam, I have it not.
Which bottle have you broken?
Which door have you openea?
Une robe neuve.2
Une proposition naïve.3
Avez-vous ma plume?
Non, Madame, je ne l'ai pas.
Quelle bouteille avez-vous cassée ?
Quelle porte avez-vous ouverte ?
Obs. 135. The past participle agrees with its direct object, (régime direct,)
in gender as well as in number. (32¹, Obs. 75.)
Which windows have you opened? | Quelles fenêtres avez-vous ouvertes?
Which bottles has the woman broken?
Which young lady have you con-
ducted to the ball?
Which water have you drunk?
Which letters have you written?
This, this one.
These.
Those.
Have you this or that pen?
That, that one.
Quelles bouteilles la femme a-t-elle
cassées ?
Quelle demoiselle avez-vous con
duite au bal?
Quelle eau avez-vous bue?
Quelles lettres avez-vous écrites ?
Celle-ci.
Celle-là.
Celles-ci.
Celles-là.
I have neither this nor that.
Do you see that woman?
I see her.
Have you seen my sisters?
No, Miss, I have not seen them.
Avez-vous cette plume-ci ou celle
là ?
Je n'ai ni celle-ci ni celle-là.
Voyez-vous cette femme ?
Je la vois.
Avez-vous vu mes sœurs ?
Non, Mademoiselle, je ne les ai pas
vues.
¹ Personne, as a pronoun, is masculine; as a substantive, it is feminine.
From the masculine neuf
3 From the masculine nais.
FIFTY-FIFTH LESSON. (3.)
287
Has he spoken to her?
To her, to him, to them.
Do you speak to my sisters?
I speak to them.
Some coarse linen.
Some good water.
He has. Lui a-t-il parlé ? Il lui a parlé.
Lui, leur. (Obs. 128.)
Parlez-vous à mes sœurs ?
Je leur parle.
A napkin, a towel. A clean napkin.
The following double the letter 7:-
Handsome.
De grosse toile.
De bonne eau.
Une serviette. Une serviette propre,
before a consonant, | Beau,
before a vowel or
mute,
before a consonant, | Nouveau,
belle.
}}}
Bel,
New.
before a vowel or h
} Nouvel,
nouvelle.
mute,
Vieux,
Old.
Vieil,
} vieille.
S Fou,
Fol,¹
} fo
folle.
Mou,
Mol,2
} m
molle.
Crazy, foolish.
Soft.
Some fine silk stockings.
The Christian. (Obs. 132.)
The Jew. (Obs. 134.)
The negro.
A companion.
A friend. (Remark, p. 284.)
To celebrate, to feast.
De beaux bas de soie.
Le Chrétien, Fem. la Chrétienne.
Le Juif.
Le nègre.
Un compagnon.
Un ami.
la Juive.
la négresse.
une compagne.
une amie.
Célébrer, 1, fêter, 1.
CINQUANTE-CINQUIÈME THÊME. 3me Sec.
À quelle joue avez-vous mal? À la droite ou à la gauche? Je
n'ai mal ni à la joue droite ni à la gauche. Vraiment? Je croyais
que vous aviez mal à l'une ou à l'autre. À quoi cette dame s'amuse-
t-elle ? Elle s'amuse à toucher du piano.-Guillaume, apportez de
la lumière, nous voulons jouer aux échecs. Voulez-vous une chan-
delle, ou allumerai-je le gaz?-Apportez une chandelle, allumée.
N'avez-vous pas revu notre ancienne connaissance, Mme. Leroux ?
Non, je n'ai pas revu cette ancienne connaissance, mais j'en ai revu
une autre. Qui? Devinez, (guess.)—Vous a-t-elle fait une pareille
¹ Fol is used instead of fou before nouns beginning with a vowel. Fol
always precedes, and fou always follows its substantive. Ex. Un marché
fou, a foolish bargain; un fol espoir, a foolish hope. Substantively, fou
means a madman, and folle a mad woman.
2 Formerly, mol was more in use than mou.
The Academy writes:
"Un homme mou et efféminé," a weak and effeminate man. We read
however, in Buffon, "Les Chinois sont des peuples mols," the Chinese are
an effeminate people.
288
FIFTY-FIFTH LESSON. (3.)
promesse? Oui, elle en a fait une pareille, à ma sœur, à ma cousine,
et à moi. (§64-2.) Comment se portent Mesdemoiselles vos
sœurs? Elles se portent très-bien depuis quelques jours. Où demeu-
rent-elles? Elles demeurent à Wilmington.-Est-ce une petite ville?
Oui, c'est une petite ville dans l'état de Delaware, (the state of Dela-
ware.) Quel jour les Turcs célèbrent-ils? Ils célèbrent le vendredi;
les Juifs célèbrent le samedi, et les Chrétiens le dimanche. Quel
jour est-ce que les nègres célèbrent? Les nègres célèbrent le jour
de leur naissance, (their birth-day.)
Is your sister as old as my mother? She is not so old, but she is
taller. Has your brother purchased anything? (fait des emplettes?)
He has purchased something, (il en a fait.)—What has he bought²
He has bought fine linen, good pens, old candles, and napkins.—
Has he not bought some silk stockings? He has bought some.—
Have you a sore nose? I have not a sore nose, but I have the tooth-
ache.-Have you cut your finger? No, my lady, I have cut my
hand.-Will you give me a pen? I will give you one.-Will you
have this or that? I will have neither.-Which (laquelle) one do
you wish to have? I wish to have that which your sister has.-Do
you wish to have my mother's good black silk (bonne soie noire) or
my sister's? I wish to have neither your mother's nor your sister's,
but that which you have.
Do you open the back window? I open it, because it is too warm.
-Which windows has your sister opened? She has opened those
of the front room.-Have you been at the ball of my old acquaint-
ance? I have been there.-Which young ladies have you taken to
the ball? I took my sister's friends and companions (fém.) there.—
Did they dance? They danced a good deal.—Did they amuse them-
selves? They amused themselves.-Did they remain long at the
ball? They remained there two hours.-Is this young lady a Turk?
No, she is a Greek.-Does she speak French? She speaks it.-Does
she not speak English? She speaks it also, but she speaks French
better. Has your sister a companion? She has one. Does she like
her? She likes her very much, for she is very amiable.-That
active young woman is ingenuous, is she not? Yes, she is (both)
active and ingenuous.-What do you think of his sister's new silk
gown? Her new silk gown? Yes, the silk one. Her new silk
gown pleases me much.
FIFTY-SIXTH LESSON. (1.)
289
FIFTY-SIXTH LESSON, 56th.-Cinquante-sixième Leçon, 56me.
To go to the country.
VOCABULAIRE.
To be pleased in the country.
To go to the bank.
Po stop at the bank.
To or at the exchange.
To or at the river.
To or at the kitchen.
for at the cellar.
To or at church.
'lo or at school.
o or at the French school.
To or at the dancing school, singing
■hool.
The opera.
The play.
To go a hunting.
Is he a hunting?
To hunt.
To go a fishing.
To get tired of fishing.
To fish.
The whole day, all the day.
The whole morning.
The whole evening.
The whole night, all the night.
The whole year.
e whole week.
The whole society.
1re Sec.
Aller à la campagne.
Ş'amuser à la campagne,
Aller à la banque.
S'arrêter à la banque.
À la bourse.
À la rivière.
À la cuisine.
À la cave.
À l'église.
À l'école.
À l'école de Français.
À l'école de danse, à l'école de chant.
La comédie.
L'opéra, (a masculine noun.)¹
† Aller à la chasse.
† Est-il à la chasse ?
Chasser, 1.
Aller à la pêche.
Pêcher, 1.
S'ennuyer à la pêche.
Toute la journée.
Toute la matinée.
Toute la soirée.2
Toute la nuit.
Toute l'année.³
Toute la semaine.
Toute la société.
A nouns ending in a are of the masculine gender, except sépia, sepia;
anl talpa, a tumor, which are feminine.
* The words day, mo ning, and evening, are expressed by jour, matin, and
soir, when we speak of a part of them, and by journée, matinée, and soirée,
when their whole duration is to be expressed. Ex. Il vient me voir tous
les jours, he comes to see me every day; j'ai resté chez moi, toute la journée,
I stayed at home all the day long; je me promine tous les matins pendant
une heure, I take an hour's walk every morning; il a plu toute la matinée,
it has been raining all the morning; j'irui vous voir demain au soir, I shall
call upon you to-morrow evening; où passerez-vous la soirée ? where shall
you spend the evening?
3 Year is expressed by an when we wish to express one or more units of
a twelvemonth, and by année when it is considered as a twelvemonth in its
duration. Ex. Il y a six ans que mon frère ne m'a écrit, it is six years
since my brother wrote to me; une année heureuse est celle que l'on passe
sans ennur et sans infirmité, a happy year is that which is spent without
ediousness or infirmity.
25
290
FIFTY-SIXTH LESSON. (1.)
All at once.
Suddenly, all of a sudden.
This week.
This year.
Last week.
Next week.
Every woman.
Once, one time, every time.
Every week.
A table. This mahogany table.
Tout à la fois.
Tout à coup.
Soudainement.
Cette semaine.
Cette année.
La semaine passée,
La semaine prochaine.
Toutes les femmes.
Une fois, toutes les fois, chaque foia
Toutes les semaines.
Une table.
Cette table d'acajou.
CINQUANTE-SIXIÈME THÊME. 1re Sec.
L
Venez-vous de la campagne pour aller à la banque? Oui, j'ai
dessein de changer un billet de banque en argent.-Irez-vous à la
bourse avant de retourner à la campagne? Non, mais j'irai achete:
quelque chose pour aller à la pêche.
aller à la pêche. Aimez-vous la pêche? J'aime
assez à pêcher. Pêchez-vous toute la journée? Non, nous pêchons
toute la matinée ou toute la soirée.—Qui va à l'école de chez vous?
Jean va à l'école d'Anglais et de Français, Sophie à l'école de danse
et de chant, et Frédéric ne va à aucune.-Qu'allez-vous faire cette
semaine à la campagne? Nous allons couper notre grain.-Vos
cousins vont-ils en Californie la semaine prochaine? Ils n'iront que
dans deux semaines. Leurs femmes et leurs filles iront-elles avec
eux? Non, elles n'iront pas.-N'avez-vous pas nettoyé mes bas de
soie, mes pantalons, mon habit bleu, et mon gilet blanc? Non, pas
encore, je ne peux pas faire tout à la fois. On ne peut pas faire
tout à la fois, c'est vrai; mais je croyais que vous aviez eu assez de
temps pour faire chaque chose à son tour.
I hear a noise in the cellar; who is in it? The old dumb woman,
I suppose. What does she want from (dans) the cellar? She wants
some wood or coal.-I have your steel fork; have you mine? I
have not yours, but hers, and Henry's is on the table, in the other
room. Which table? The mahogany table.-Where is your mo-
ther? She is at church.-Is your sister gone to school? She is.-
Does your mother often go to church? She goes every morning
and every evening.-At what o'clock in the moming does she go to
church? She goes as soon as she gets up-At what o'clock does
she get up? She gets up at sunrise.-Dost thou go to school, to-
day? I do. What dost thou learn at school? I learn to read,
write, and speak there.-Where is your good mother? She is gone
to shop (50³) with my little sister.-Do your sisters go this evening
to the opera? No, Madam; they go to the dancing and singing
school.-Do they not go to the French school? They go in the
FIFTY-SIXTH LESSON. (2.)
291
morning, but not (mais non) in the evening.-Is your father gone a
hunting? He has not been able to go a hunting, for he has a cold.
-Do you like to go a hunting? I like to go a fishing better than a
hunting.—Is your father still in the country? Yes, Madam, he is
still there. What does he do there? He goes a hunting and a fish-
ing. Did you hunt in the country? I hunted the whole day. How
long did you stay with my mother? I stayed with her the whole
evening.—Is it long since you were at the castle? I was there last
week.—Did you find many people there? I found only three per-
sons there, the French teacher, his wife, and their daughter, who
dances so well.
Your aunt.
Your niece.
Your cousins.
Any person.
The earache.
The heartache.
VOCABULAIRE. 2de Sec.
His sister has a violent headache.
Madame votre tante.
Mademoiselle votre nièce.
Mesdemoiselles vos cousines.
Toute personne. (55³, N. 1.)
† Le mal d'oreille.
† Le mal de cœur.
+ Sa sœur a un violent mal de tête.
POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS.-Pronoms Possessifs Absolus, Féminin.
Singular.
Singulier.
thine, his, (hers, its.) | La mienne, la tienne, la sienne.
Mine,
Ours,
yours,
theirs.
Plural.
Mine,
Ours, (0. 9, 4.1) yours, theirs.
La nôtre,
la vôtre, la leur.
Pluriel.
thine, his, (hers, its.) Les miennes, les tiennes, les siennes.
Les nôtres, les vôtres, les leurs.
Faisiez-vous? (imparfait) Je faisais.
Que disiez-vous?
Were you doing? (imperfect.) I was.
What were you saying?
I was not
saying anything.
Have you my pen or hers?
I was saying that I had hers.
rien.
Je ne disais
Avez-vous ma plume ou la sienne ?
Je disais que j'avais la sienne.
What do you wish to send to your Que voulez-vous envoyer à votre
aunt?
I wish to send her a tart.
Will you send her some fruit also?
I will send her some.
Have you sent the books to my sis-
ters?
I have sent them to them.
la douleur.
tante ?
Je veux lui envoyer une tourte.
Voulez-vous lui envoyer aussi des
fruits?
Je veux lui en envoyer.
Avez-vous envoyé les livres à mes
sœurs?
Je les leur ai envoyés.
The aunt,
The female cousin,
The ache, pain,
The tart,
la tourte.
The peach,
la pêche.
The niece,
The strawberry,
la fraise.
The maid-servant,
The cherry,
la cerise.
The newspaper,
the gazette,
la gazette.
la tante.
la cousine.
la nièce.
la servante
The female relation, la parente.
The female neighbor, la voisine.
The female cook, la cuisinière.
292
FIFTY-SIXTH LESSON. (2.)
The merchandise,
(goods,)
la marchandise.
What was you doing? I was making
a cherry tart for my niece.
Were you telling the maid-servant to
fasten the windows?.
I was.
The brother-in-law, le beau-frère.
The sister-in-law.
Que faisiez-vous ?
la belle-sœur.
Je faisais une
tourte aux cerises pour ma nièce.
Disiez-vous à la servante de fermer
les fenêtres? Je le lui disais.
CINQUANTE-SIXIÈME THÊME. 2de Sec.
Mlle., votre nièce est-elle à la maison? Je ne sais pas. Je vais
envoyer la servante pour voir si elle est dans sa chambre. N'im-
porte; je n'ai pas le temps de m'arrêter à présent. Voulez-vous
avoir la bonté de lui présenter ces pêches, en mon nom? Oh!
elles sont superbes! Je vous remercie, en son nom.
Mais à pré-
sent que j'y pense, comment se porte Madame votre belle-sœur ?
J'étais chez elle hier soir. Elle se porte bien, merci. Présentez-lui
mes compliments quand vous la reverrez. Je n'y manquerai pas.
J'ai l'honneur de vous saluer. Adieu, M.-La parente du général
a-t-elle mal d'oreille? Mal d'oreille! Non, elle n'a pas mal
d'oreille. Pourquoi le croyiez-vous ?—La cuisinière de notre voisine
n'a-t-elle pas envoyé une tourte aux cerises à notre petite fille, cette
semaine? Si fait, elle lui en a envoyé une; non pas cette semaine,
mais la semaine passée.-Que faisiez-vous l'année passée? J'étais
marchand.—N'êtes-vous pas l'associé de votre beau-frère? Je n'ai
point de beau-frère, de sorte que je ne puis pas être son associé.---
On m'a dit que votre belle-sœur avait une excellente cuisinière,
est-ce vrai? On en trouve à peine une bonne, mais la sienne
l'est. En êtes-vous sûre? Oui, du moins ma belle-sœur le dit.
Are these girls as good (sage) as their brothers? They are better
than they.-Can your sisters speak German? They cannot, but
they are learning it.-Have you brought anything to your mother?
I brought her some good fruit and a fine tart.-—What has your niece
brought you? She has brought us good cherries, good strawberries,
and good peaches. Do you like peaches? I like them much.—
How many peaches has your neighbor (fem.) given you? She has
given me more than twenty.-Have you eaten many cherries, this
year? I have. Did you give any to your little niece? I gave her
so many that she cannot eat them all.--Why have you not given
any to your good neighbor? (fem.) I wished to give her some, but
she would not take any, because she does not like cherries.
Were there any pears (la poire) last year? There were not many,
-Has your cousin (fem.) any strawberries? She has so many that
she cannot eat them all.-Do you expect to see your niece, to-day?
I hope to see her, for she has promised me to dine with us.-)
admire (admirer) that family, (la famille,) for the father is the king
FIFTY-SIXTH LESSON. (3.)
293
and the mother is the queen of it. The children and the servants
are the subjects (le sujet) of the state, (l'état.) The tutors of the
children are the ministers, who share (partager) with the king and
queen the care (le soin) of the government, (le gouvernement.) The
good education (l'éducation, fem.) which is given to children (Obs.
101-2) is the crown, (la couronne) of monarchs, (le monarque.)
VOCABULAIRE. 3me Sec.
Obs. 136. The three substantives, auteur, author; peintre, painter; poète,
poet, are of the masculine gender only, and are used for both sexes.
She is a poetess.
Is she a painter?
She is an author.
To hire, to let.
Have you already hired a room?
To admit or grant a thing.
To confess a thing.
Do you grant that?
I do grant it.
Do you confess your fault?
I confess it.
I confess it to be a fault.
To confess, to avow, to own, to ac-
knowledge.
To confess.
So much, so many.
She has so many candles that she
cannot burn them all.
To catch a cold.
To make sick.
Elle est poète.
Est-elle peintre ?
Elle est auteur.
Louer, 1.
Avez-vous déjà loué une chan ḥre ?
Convenir de quelque chose.
Convenez-vous de cela?
J'en conviens.
Convenez-vous de votre faute?
J'en conviens.
Je conviens que c'est une faute.
Avouer, 1.
Confesser, 1.
Tant.
Elle a tant de chandelles qu'elle ne
peut pas les brûle toutes.
+ S'enrhumer, 1.
Rendre malade.
Obs. 137. To make, before an adjective, must be translated by: rendre
If you eat so much it will make you Si vous mangez tant, celu vous ren-
sick.
you!
dra malade.
Obs. 138. When the English pronoun it relates to a preceding ircum-
stance, it is translated by cela; when to a following circumstance, by il.
Does it suit you to lend your gun?
It does not suit me to lend it.
It does not suit me.
Where did you catch a cold?
Vous convient-il de prêter votre fusil!
Il ne me convient pas de le prêter
Cela ne me convient pas.
† Où vous êtes-vous enrhumé?
caught a cold in going from the † Je me suis enrhumé en sortant de
opera.
'o have a cold.
The cold, the cough.
f have a cold in my head.
You have a cold on your breast.
T'he brain, the chost.
l'opéra.
† Être enrhumé.
Le rhume, la toux.
† J'ai un rhume de cerveau.
† Vous avez un rhume de poitrine.
Le corveau, la poitrine.
25*
294
FIFTY-SIXTH LESSON. (3.)
Has she not a bad cough?
Yes, she has (one).
N'a-t-elle pas une mauvaise toux ?
Si fait, elle en a une mauvaise.
CINQUANTE-SIXIÈME THÊME. 3me Sec.
Avez-vous bien dormi la nuit passée? Non, je n'ai pas bien dormi
du tout. On a fait tant de bruit que cela m'a empêché de dormir.
Où avez-vous passé la soirée hier? Je l'ai passée chez mon beau-
frère. Y avez-vous vu votre belle-sœur? Je l'y ai vue. Comment
se porte-t-elle ? Elle se porte mieux qu'à l'ordinaire. Avez-vous
joué ? Nous n'avons pas joué, pas même aux échecs; mais nous
avons lu de bons livres; car ma belle-sœur aime mieux lire que de
jouer.-Avez-vous lu la gazette de ce matin? Je l'ai lue. Y a-t-il
quelque chose de nouveau dedans? Il y a toujours du nouveau; mais
rien de bien intéressant. Que dit-on du roi et de la reine? Celui-là
est occupé du soin du gouvernement, et celle-ci du soin de sa famille.
N'était-elle pas à la campagne quand vous y étiez? Non, elle n'y
était pas alors; mais elle y était la semaine dernière.-Sa fille est
intéressante, n'est-ce pas ? C'est ce que je disais. Le commis di-
sait-il ou faisait-il quelque chose? Il disait quelque chose, mais, il
ne faisait rien. Qui faisait quelque chose? Charlotte faisait une
couronne de cerises.
Why do your sisters not go to the play? They cannot go thither
because they have a cold, and that makes them very ill. -Where
did they catch a cold? They caught a cold in going from the opera
last night. Does it suit your sister to eat some peaches? It does
not suit her to eat any, for she has already eaten a good many, and
if she eats so much it will make her ill.-Have you already hired a
room? I have already hired one.-Where have you hired it? I
have hired it in William-street, (dans la rue or rue Guillaume,) num-
ber one hundred and fifty-two.-At whose house (chez qui) have you
hired it? At the house of the man whose son has sold you a horse.
-For whom has your father hired a room? He has hired one for
his son, who has just arrived from France.-Why have you not kept
your promise? (la promesse.) Which promise? I do not remember
what I promised you.-Had you not promised us to take us to the
concert last Thursday? I confess that I was wrong in promising
you; the concert, however, has not taken place.
Does your brother confess his fault? He confesses it.-What átes
your uncle say to (de) that note? He says that it is written very
well, but he admits that he has been wrong in sending it to the cap-
tain. Do you confess your fault now? I confess it to be a fault-
Where have you found my coat? I have found it in the blue room
up stairs. The front room or the back room? The back room. (Obs.
FIFTY-SEVENTH
295
LESSON. (1.)
61.)—Will you hang my hat on the tree? I will hang it thereon.—
How are you to-day? I am not very well.-What is the matter with
you? I have a violent headache and a cold.-Where did you catch
a cold? I caught it last night in going from the play.-How old is
your niece? She is about 10 years old.
FIFTY-SEVENTH LESSON, 57th.-Cinquante-septième Leçon, 57me.
To question,
The cravat,
the question.
house.
carriage,
promise.
the left.
Questionner, 1 (211), la question.
La cravate la voiture, la maison.
La lettre, la famille, la promesse.
La jambe, la jambe droite, la gauche.
Cette gorge.
Ce mal de gorge.
Nous avons tous mal à la gorge.
The letter,
family,
The leg,
the right leg,
This throat.
This sore throat.
We have all a sore throat,
The meat.
Salt meat.
La viande.
Fresh meat.
Fresh beef.
Cool water.
'The food.
The dish.
Salt meats.
Some good victuals.
The dainty dishes.
Milk-food.
Lo march, to walk, to step.
De la viande salée.
De la viande fraîche.
Du bœuf frais.
L'aliment.
Le mets.
Des mets salés.
Marcher, 1.
De l'eau fraîche.
De bons aliments.
Les entremets.
Du laitage.
to walk for pleasure.
Obs. 138. Marcher must not be mistaken for se promener. (441.) The
former means to walk, and the latter
I have walked a good deal to-day.
I have been walking in the garden
with my mother.
To walk or travel a mile.
To walk or travel a league.
To walk a step.
J'ai marché beaucoup aujourd'hui.
Je me suis promené dans le jardin
avec ma mère.
Faire un mille.
+ Faire une lieue.
† Faire un pas.
To take a step, (meaning to take † Faire une démarche.
measures.)
To go on a journey.
To make a speech.
A piece of business.
An affair.
To transact business.
To meddle with something.
What are you meddling with?
I am meddling with my own business.
I do not attend to it any longer.
That traveler always meddles with
other people's business.
I do not meddle with other people's
business.
Others, other people.
† Faire un voyage.
+ Faire un discours.
Une affaire.
Faire des affaires.
+ Se mêler de quelque chose.
De quoi vous mêlez-vous?
Je me mêle de mes propres affaires.
Je ne m'en mêle plus.
Ce voyageur se mêle toujours des
affaires des autres.
Je ne me mêle pas des affaires d'au
trui.
Autrui, (indefinite pronoun, without
gender or plural.)
296
FIFTY-SEVENTH LESSON. (1.)
Did you wish, want? I did, (imperf.) | Vouliez-vous? (147) Je voulais, (imp.
He employs himself in painting.
The art of painting.
Chemistry.
† Il se mêle de peindre.
+
Il s'occupe de peinture.
Le chimiste.
La peinture.
The chemist.
Ia chimie.
CINQUANTE-SEIWL THмr. Ire £9.
On m'a dit que vous vouliez mɛ questionren? ni, c'est vrai, j'ai
une question à vous faire. I e qui est la lettre que vous avez reque?
La lettre que j'ai reçue! Ah! c'est un secret.
Ah! c'est un recret. Que vous ne voulez
pas me confier, n'est-ce pas ? Oui, c'est un secret que j'aime
mieux garder. Eh, bien! gardez-le.—La voiture est devant la porte
de la maison, êtes-vous prêt à partir? Prêt; mais non, je ne savais
pas que la voiture allait venir sitôt.-Nous croyions que vous le
saviez. Qu'avez-vous encore à faire ? J'ai à mettre ma cravate
C'est l'affaire d'une minute. L'affaire d'une minute! pas avec moi
J'aime à avoir une cravate bien mise, bien arrangée. Alors ne
parlez plus et faites-le vite. Eh, bien! Laissez-moi; allez-vous-en,
(go away.) Je vais en bas, je descends, pour préparer votre chapeau,
vos gants, et votre parapluie. Non, non, laissez tout cela et mêlez-
vous de vos propres affaires. Si je me mêle des vôtres, c'est que je
Vous aime.
Will you dine with us to-day? With much pleasure. What have
you for dinner? (quels mets avez-vous?) We have good soup, some
fresh and salt meat, and some milk-food.-Do you like milk-food?
I like it better than (préférer à) all other food.-Are you ready to
dine? I am.-Do you intend to set out soon? I intend setting out
next week.-Do you travel alone? (seul?) No, Madam, I travel
with my uncle.-Do you travel on foot or in a carriage? (422) We
travel in a carriage. Did you meet any traveler in your last journey
(dans votre dernier voyage) to Berlin? We met many travelers.-
How do you intend to spend your time (493) this summer? I intend
to take a short (petit) journey.
Did you walk much in your last journey? I like much to walk,
but my uncle likes to go in a carriage. Did he not wish to walk?
He wished to walk at first, (d'abord,) but he wished to get into the
coach (monter en voiture) after having taken a few steps, so that I
did not walk much.-Does he no longer do any business? He no
longer does any, for he is too old to do it.-Why does he meddle
with your business? He does not generally (ordinairement) meddia
with other people's business, but he meddles with mine because be
loves me.-Has your master made vou recite your lesson to-day?
He has made me recite it.-Did you know it? I knew it pretty
well.-Have you also done some exercises? I have done some
but I have not quite finished my lesson.
FIFTY-SEVENTH LESSON. (2.)
297
VOCABULAIRE. 2de Sec.
That art is easy.
It is a pity.
The art.
Susage.
I: is strange.
To employ cne's seif in.
To concern some one.
To look at some one.
L'art.
Cet art-là est facile
Étrange, étonnant.
C'est étrange. C'est dommage.
S'occuper, 1, de or à.
Concerner, 1, or regarder, 1, quel-
qu'un.
Regarder, 1, quelqu'un.
I do not like to meddle with things † Je n'aime pas à me mêler de ce
that do not concern me.
qui ne me regarde pas.
Cela ne regarde personne.
To care about it.
†
Se soucier, 1. de.
That concerns nobody.
To care about.
Os. 139. Se soucier de, is not frequently used affirmatively.
Do you wish to go to Italy?
I have no great wish to go. I do not
care about it. I'd rather not.
She used to like dancing, but she
cares no more about it.
We'd rather not sing.
To attract.
Loadstone attracts iron.
Her singing attracts me.
To charm.
I am charmed with it.
The beauty.
To enchant.
The goodness.
S'en soucier.
| Avez-vous envie d'aller en Italie ?
† Je ne m'en soucie pas.
Elle aimait (§ 147) la danse, mais elle
ne s'en soucie plus.
Nous ne nous soucions pas de chanter.
Attirer, 1.
L'aimant attire le fer.
Son chant m'attire.
Charmer, 1.
Enchanter, 1.
J'en suis charmé, (fem. ée.)
La beauté.
La bonté.
Obs. 140. All nouns ending in té, and expressing properties or qualities,
are feminine.
The harmony, the voice, the power.
To repeat.
The repetition, the rehearsal.
The wisdom.
The lord.
Study.
Our Lord.
A memorandum, a bill. A nightingale.
All beginnings are difficult.
L'harmonie, la voix,
Répéter, 1.
le pouvoir.
La répétition.
L'étude.
Notre Seigneur.
La sagesse.
Le seigneur.
Un mémoire.
Un rossignol.
Tous les commencements sont diffi-
To create.
The Creator,
the creation.
ciles.
Créer, 1.
Le Créateur,
The fear of the Lord.
La crainte du Seigneur.
The benefit.
Solitude.
Heaven.
The earth.
Le bienfait.
The meeting.
La solitude.
Some wheat.
La farine.
la création,
Le ciel.
La terre.
L'assemblée.
Du froment.
Flour, meal.
The mill.
Marriage. Death.
Le moulin. Le mariage. La mort.
CINQUANTE-SEPTIÈME THÊME. 2de Sec.
N'admirez-vous pas la beauté de cette dame? Si fait, mais j'ad-
mire encore plus sa bonté.-Préférez-vous la bonté à la beauté
298
FIFTY-SEVENTH LESSON. (2.)
Sans doute. Qui ne la préfère pas? Beaucoup de personnes.-La
farine de votre boulanger est-elle bonne? Elle est quelque fois
bonne et quelque fois sure, (sour.)-Où se tenaient leurs accomblées?
Leurs assemblées se tenaient dans la solitude des bois. Madaras
de Beaumont va-t-elle au concert? Non, elle a cédé sa place à sa
nièce. Autrefois elle aimait le chant, à présent elle ne s'en soucie
plus.--N'iront-elles pas au bal? Non, elles n'iront pas, car elles ne
se soucient plus de la danse. De quoi te soucies-tu? Je ne me
soucie pas de grand' chose, (I am indifferent to almost everything,)-
Où est le maître de chant? Il est à la répétition.-Combien de répé
titions y a-t-il par semaine? Il y en a une tous les matins. L'art de peur
dre est-il facile? Demandez à Mlle. Caroline, qui s'occupe de la pein
ture.-La bonté est un bienfait du ciel, n'est-ce pas ? Qui. est un
bienfait que le Créateur a accordé à la terre. Avez-vcas appris le
mariage de votre cousin? Oui, il m'en a informé. C'est dommage,
n'est-ce pas ? Je ne dis rien; mais je n'en pense pas moins. La
mort du capitaine est étrange, n'est-ce pas? Oui, elle est très-
étrange.
What have you been doing (§ 145) at school, to-day? We have
been listening to our professor.-What did he say new and interest-
ing? He made a long (grand) speech on the goodness of God.
After saying (401) "Repetition is the mother of studies, and a good
memory is a great benefit of God," he said, "God is the Creator of
heaven and earth; the fear of the Lord is the beginning of all wis-
dom." What are you doing all day in this garden? I am walking
in it. What is there in it that attracts you? (qu'est-ce qui vous y
attire?) The singing of the birds attracts me, (m'y attire.)—Are
there any nightingales in it? There are some in it, and the har-
mony of their singing enchants me.-Have those nightingales more
power over (sur) you than the beauties of painting, or the voice of
your tender (tendre) mother, who loves you so much? I confess
the harmony of the singing of these little birds has more power
over me than the most tender words (que les paroles les plus tendres)
of my dearest friends.
How does your niece amuse herself (or pass her time) in her
solitude? She reads a good deal, she plays on the piano, she is
fond of painting, and she writes letters to her absent mother.-How
does your uncle amuse himself in his solitude? He used to find
(§ 147) much pleasure in society, in the world; but now he does not
care about it; he is only fond of fishing and chemistry. Why do
you not call on Frederick? What is that to you? (qu'est-ce que cela
vous fait) I beg, (je vous prie?) I do not generally meddle with
things that do not concern me; but I love you so much that I con-
&
FIFTY-EIGHTH LESSON. (1.)
299
cern myself much about (que je m'intéresse beaucoup à) what you are
doing. Does any one trouble his head about you? No one troubles
his head about me, for I am not worth the trouble, (je n'en vaux pas
la peine.)
FIFTY-EIGHTH LESSON, 58th.-Cinquante-huitième Leçon, 58me.
VOCABULAIRE.
1re Sec.
SECOND FUTURE.-Futur Passé ou Composé.
The Futur passé, like the second future, is formed from the future of the
auxiliary, and the past participle of the verb to be conjugated. Ex.
I shall have loved.
Thou wilt have loved.
He, she, or one will have loved.
We shall have loved.
You will have loved.
They will have loved.
I shall have come.
Thou wilt have come.
He will have come.
She will have come.
We shall have come.
You will have come.
They will have come.
They will have come, fem.
I shall have been praised.
Thou wilt have been praised.
He will have been praised.
She will have been praised.
We shall have been praised.
You will have been praised.
They will have been praised.
They (fem.) will have been praised.
I shall have risen.
Thou shalt have gone to bed.
Shall he have undressed himself?
She will not have dressed herself.
Will any one have praised one's self?
We shall have made a mistake.
Shall you have taken a walk?
Shall they not have sat down?
Shall they not have sat down?
J'aurai aimé.
Tu auras aimé.
Il, elle, ou on aura aimé.
Nous aurons aimé.
Vous aurez aimé.
Ils (fem. elles) auront aimé.
Je serai venu, Fem. venue.
Tu seras venu,
Il sera venu.
Elle sera venue.
venue.
Nous serons venus, Fem. venues.
Vous serez venus,
Ils seront venus.
Elles seront venues.
J'aurai été loué, Fem.
Tu auras été loué, “
Il aura été loué.
Elle aura été louée.
66
venues. I
On sera venu.
louée.
louée.
Nous aurons été loués, fem. louées.
Vous aurez été loués,
Ils auront été loués.
Elles auront été louées.
louées.
Je me serai levé, fem. levée.
Tu te seras couché, "
couchée.
Se sera-t-il déshabillé ?
Elle ne se sera pas habillée.
Se sera-t-on loué?
Nous nous serons trompés.
Vous serez-vous promené? (sing.)'
Ne se seront-ils pas assis?
Ne se seront-elles pas assises?
¹ It is hardly necessary to remark, that if one person only is spoken to,
1. e. when the second person plural, vous, is employed instead of the second
person singular tu, no s is put to the past particip
300
FIFTY-EIGHTH LESSON. (1.)
To have left.
+ Rester, 1.
When I have paid for the horse I shall Quand j'aurai payé le cheval il ne
have only ten crowns left.
How much money have you left?
I have one franc left.
I have only one franc left.
How much has your brother left?
He has one crown left.
How much has your sister left ?
She has only three sous left.
How much have your brothers left?
They have one louis left.
me restera que dix écus.
Combien d'argent vous reste-t-il f
Il me reste un franc.
Il ne me reste qu'un franc.
Combien reste-t-il à votre frère ?
Il lui reste un écu.
Combien reste-t-il à votre sœur ?
Il ne lui reste que trois sous.
Combien reste-t-il à vos frères ?
Il leur reste un louis.
Obs. 141. In English the present (Obs. 106, 463) or the perfect is used
after the conjunctions, when, as soon as, or after, when futurity is to be
expressed; but in French the future must in such instances always to
employed.
CINQUANTE-HUITIEME THEME. 1re Sec.
Lorsque vous serez venue nous voir, nous irons ous voir, car
vous savez que vous nous devez une visite. Comptez-vous les
visites de cette manière? Non, c'est seulement pour vous rappeler
qu'il y a long-temps que nous n'avons eu le plaisir de vous voir
chez nous.-Aussitôt qu'ils auront été apportés, envoyez-les-moi,
entendez-vous? Je n'y manquerai pas.-Quand irez-vous voir les
De Courci? (§ 140-5.) Nous passerons chez eux aussitôt que nous
serons informés de leur retour.-Charles ira-t-il se promener à cheval
après qu'il aura dîné? Non, il ira faire une visite à son oncle
dont la femme est morte, (is dead.) Sa femme est morte, et de
quoi? Elle est morte du cholera. C'est dommage. C'était une
très-bonne dame.-Le marchand a-t-il envoyé le baril de farine?
Non, il ne l'a pas encore envoyé. Quand il l'aura envoyé, faites du
pain. J'en ferai aussitôt que la farine sera venue.-Saviez-vous que
Thomas est marié? (married?) Non, je ne le savais pas; mais je
savais que Marthe est mariée, et bien mariée. Avec qui est-elle
mariée? Elle est mariée avec M. Dubois. Le marchand? Non,
l'avocat. J'en suis charmée.
Will your parents go into the country to-morrow? They will not
go, for it is too dusty.-Shall we take a walk, to-day? We will not
take a walk, for it is soon going to rain.-Will it rain before 12
o'clock? I believe it will.-Do you see the castle of my relation
behind (derrière) yonder mountain? (cette montagne-là?) I see it.-
Shall we go in? We will go in, if you like.—Will you go into that
room? I shall not go into it, for it is smoky.-I wish you a good
morning, Madam, (262.)-Will you not come in? Will you not sit
dawn? I will sit down upon that large arm-chair.-Will you tell
FIFTY-EIGHTH LESSON. (2.)
301
me what has become of your brother? I will tell you.-Where is
your sister? Do you not see her? She sits upon the bench.-Is
your father seated upon the bench? No, he sits upon the sofa of
mahogany.
n
Hast thou spent all the money I have not spent all.-How much
hast thou left? I have not much left; I have but five francs left.-
How much money have thy sisters left? They have but three
crowns left. Have you money enough left to pay your tailor? I
have enough left to pay him; but if I pay him I shall have but
little left.—How much money will your brothers have left? They
will have a hundred crowns left.-When will you go to Italy?. I
shall go as soon as (aussitôt que) I have learned Italian.—When will
your brothers go to France? They will go as soon as they know
French.-When will they learn it? They will learn it when they
have found a good master. How much money shall we have left
when we have paid for our horses? When we have paid for them,
we shall have only a hundred crowns left.
VOCABULAIRE. 2de Sec.
When they have paid the tailor, they | Quand ils auront payé le tailleur, il
will have a hundred francs left.
When I am at my aunt's, will you
come to see me?
leur restera cent francs.
Quand je serai chez ma tante, vien-
drez-vous me voir ? (Obs. 106, 463.)
After you have done writing, will you Après que vous aurez fini d'écrire
take a turn with me?
You will play when you have finished
your exercise.
viendrez-vous faire un tour avec
moi ?
Vous jouerez lorsque vous aurez fini
votre thême.
What will you do when you have Que ferez-vous quand vous aurez
dined ?
When I have spoken to your brother,
I shall know what I have to do.
Does it rain?
It rains.
Does it snow?
It snows.
Is it muddy?
It is muddy.
dîné ?
Quand j'aurai parlé à votre frère, je
saurai ce que j'ai à faire.
IDIOMS WITH FAIRE.
•
It does.
+ Fait-il de la pluie ?
Il en fait.
It does not.
Is it muddy out of doors?
It is very muddy.
Is it dusty?
It is very dusty.
Is it smoky?
It is too smoky
Out of doors.
+ Il fait de la pluie.
† Fait-il de la neige? Il n'en fait pas
† Il fait de la neige.
† Fait-il de la boue ?
Il fait de la boue.
† Fait-il sale dehors ?.
t Il fait très-sale.
† Fait-il de la poussière ?
+ Il fait beaucoup de poussière.
† Fait-il de la fumée ?
+ Il fait trop de fumée.
Out of the window. Dehors.
Par la fenêtre.
26
802
FIFTY-EIGHTH LESSON. (2.)
To enter, to go in, to come in.
Will you go into my room? I will
go in.
Will you go in ?
To sit down.
Tɔ sit, to be seated.
Entrer, 1, dans.
Voulez-vous entrer dans ma cham.
bre? Je veux y entrer.
I shall go in.
Y entrerez-vous ?
He is seated upon the large chair.
She is seated upon the bench.
To fill... with, fill up... with.
Fill this bottle with wine.
What do you fill up with water?
What does he fill his purse with?
He fills his purse with money.
The pocket.
My vest pocket.
S'asseoir,* 3. (512.)
J'y entrerai.
Etre assis; fem. assise.
Il est assis sur la grande chaise."
Elle est assise sur le banc.
| Remplir, 2...de, remplissez...de
Remplissez cette bouteille de vin.
Que remplissez-vous d'eau ?
De quoi remplit-il sa bourse?
Il remplit sa bourse d'argent.¹
La poche. La poche de mon giler.
CINQUANTE-HUITIÈME THÊME. 2de Sec.
Où est Mlle. Emilie? Elle est assise sur le banc sous le gros
abre dans le jardin. Il fait très-humide, n'a-t-elle pas peur de s'en-
rhumer? Elle craint plus la poussière que l'humidité, (dampness.)
Que fera-t-il aussitôt qu'il aura fini son thême ? jouera-t-il du violon?
Non, il n'en jouera pas; car l'humidité a cassé deux cordes (strings)
de son violon. Quelles cordes sont-ce? Ce sont les deux plus
petites. N'a-t-il pas d'autres cordes? Non; mais quand il aura
fini, il ira en acheter. Jouerez-vous du piano quand il jouera du
violon? Je ne me soucie pas de jouer aujourd'hui; mais nous jouons
très-souvent ensemble. Il fait de la pluie, appelez Mlle. Emilie, ou
elle sera mouillée. Vous vous trompez; ce n'est pas de la pluie,
mais de la neige. Je crois que vous avez raison, et j'en suis bien
fâché, car il fera très-sale dehors, il fera très-mauvais marcher. Je
commence à avoir froid; entrons dans mon bureau; il y fait plus
chaud.
Do you gain (gagner, 532) anything by (d) that business? I do
not gain much by it, (y,) but my brother gains a good deal by it.
He fills his purse with money.-How much money have you gained?
I have gained only a little, but my cousin has gained much by it
He has filled his. pocket with money.-Why does that gardener not
work? He is a good-for-nothing fellow, for he does nothing but eat
all the day long. He fills himself up with fresh and salt meat, so
that he will make himself (se rendre) ill if he continues to eat so
much.-With what (de quoi) have you filled that bottle? I have
filled it with wine.—Will this man take care of my horse? He will
The ambiguity conveyed by: 11 remplit sa bourse d'argent, might be
avoided by saying: Il remplit d'argent sa bourse; but the French have not
yet adopted the latter construction. Hence I have used the former.
FIFTY-EIGHTH LESSON. (3.)
303
take care of it.—Who will take care of my servant? The landlord
will take care of him.
Does your servant take care of your horses? He does take (are
of them, and my cousin's.-Is he taking care of your clothes? He
takes care of them, for he brushes them every morning.-Have you
ever drunk French wine? I have never drunk any.-Is it long since
you ate French bread? It is almost three years since I ate any.-
Ilave you hurt my brother-in-law? I have not hurt him, but he has
cut iny finger. What has he cut your finger with? With the knife
which you have lent him.-Is your father arrived at last? Every-
body says that he is arrived, but I have not seen him yet.--Has the
physician hurt your son? He has hurt him, for he has cut his finger.
*VOCABULAIRE. 3me Sec.
ཟ
Êtes-vous venu tout seul?
Have you come quite alone?
No, I have brought all my men along Non, j'ai amené tout mon monde.
with me.
To bring.
Amener, 1.
Obs. 142. Amener must, in French, not be mistaken for apporter. The
former is used when the object can walk, and the latter when it cannot. Ex.
He has brought all his men along | Il a amené tout son monde.
with him.
Have you brought your brother along
with you?
I have brought him along with me.
Have you told the groom to bring me
the horse ?
The groom, the ostler.
Are you bringing me my books?
I am bringing them to you.
To take, to carry.
វ
Avez-vous amené votre frère ?
Je l'ai amené.
Avez-vous dit au palefrenier de m'a
mener le cheval?
Le palefrenier, le valet d'écurie.
M'apportez-vous mes livres ?
Je vous les apporte.
Mener, 1.
Obs. 143. The same distinction must be observed with regard to mener
and porter, as with amener and apporter.
Will you take that dog to the stable? | Voulez-vous mener ce chien à l'é.
I will take it thither.
Are you carrying this gun to my
father?
The cane, stick.
I carry it to him.
The stable.
To come down, to go down.
To go down into the well.
To go or come down the hill.
To go down the river.
curie ?
Je veux l'y mener.
Portez-vous ce fusil à mon père?
Je le lui porte.
La canne.
Descendre, 4.
L'écurie
Descendre dans le puits.
Descendre la montagne.
Descendre la rivière.i
1 The verb descendre takes the auxiliary avoir in its compound tenses
when, as in these examples, it is construed with the accusative; otherwise,
304
FIFTY-EIGHTH LESSON. (3.)
To alight from one's horse, to dis- Descendre de cheval. (52³.)
mount.
To alight, to get out.
To go up, to mount, to ascend.
To go up the mountain.
Where is your brother gone to?
He has ascended the hill.
To mount the horse.
To get into the coach.
To get on board the ship.
To desire, to beg, to pray, to request.
Ask him to do it.
Ask your brother to come down. Do,
(I beg you would,) pray.
The river, (if it empties in a sea.)
The river, (empties in another river.)
The river Schuylkill empties in the
Delaware.
The beard. The stream, torrent.
To go or come up the river.
Descendre de voiture.
Monter, 1.
Monter la montagne.
Où votre frère est-il allé ?
Il a monté la colline.¹
Monter à cheval,
† Monter en voiture.
Monter sur un vaisseau.
Prier, 1, (de av. l'infin.)
Priez-le de le faire.
Priez votre frère de descendre, jo
vous en prie.
Le fleuve, (se jette dans une mer.)
La rivière, (se jette dans un fleuv .)
La rivière Schuylkill se jette dans le
fleuve Delaware.
La barbe.
Le torrent.
Remonter la rivière.
CINQUANTE-HUITIÈME THÊME. 3me Sec.
Le voyageur a-t-il descendu la montagne? Il a descendu la mon-
tagne, et il a remonté le fleuve. Votre neveu est-il descendu de
cheval pour ramasser le gant de sa compagne? Non, un voyageur
a eu la bonté de le ramasser et de le rendre à la demoiselle.—Jouez
Hail Columbia pour nous. Je ne me soucie pas de jouer à présent.
Ah! jouez-le, je vous en prie. (Oh! do, play it.) Je le ferai pour
vous obliger; mais je ne pourrai pas bien le jouer, je vous assure,
car je ne suis pas en train. (I do not feel like it; in the humor.)—Qui
est ce M. à la barbe bleue? C'est le ministre de notre église. Le
palefrenier a-t-il mené le nouveau cheval à la vieille écurie? Oui,
il l'y a mené. Voulez-vous amener votre sœur avec vous et apporter
son cahier de chant? Je l'amènerai, mais je n'apporterai pas son
cahier de chant.—J'ai oublié ma canne dans l'écurie; allez-l'y cher-
cher pour moi. Attendez-moi un instant, je reviendrai de suite.
Has the joiner's leg been cut off? (couper?) They have cut it off
to prevent his dying.-Are you pleased (content) with your servant?
I am much pleased with him, for he is fit for anything, (propre à
it takes être. Ex. Il a descendu la montagne, he has gone down the moun-
tain; elle est descendue d'une famille honorable, she is descended from an
honorable family.
¹ Monter also takes avoir when, as in these examples, it is construed with
the accusative, and être when otherwise. Ex. Il est monté par degrés aux
plus hautes charges militaires, he has ascended by degrees to the highes.
military employments.
FIFTY-NINTH LESSON. (1.)
305
tout.)-What does he know? He knows everything, (tout.)-Can
he ride? (monter à cheval?) He can. Has your brother returned at
last from England? He has returned thence, and has brought you
a fine horse. Has he told his groom to bring it to me? He has.-
What do you think (que dites-vous) of that horse? I think (je dis)
that it is a fine and good one, (qu'il est beau et bon,) and beg you to
leal it into the stable.-How did you spend your time yesterday?
I went to the concert, and afterwards (ensuite) to the play.
When did that laborer (ouvrier) go down into the well? He went
down into it this morning.-Has he come up again already? (remon-
ter?) He came up an hour ago. Where is your brother? He is in
his room. Tell him to come down, pray, do, (je vous en prie.) I
will tell him so, but he is not dressed (522) yet.-Is your friend still
(toujours) on the mountain? He has already come down.-Did you
go down or up (remonter) the river? We went down.-Did my
cousin speak to you before he started? He spoke to me before he
got into the coach.-Have you seen my brother? I saw him before
I went on board the ship.-Is it better to get into a coach than to go
on board the ship? It is not worth while to get into a coach or to
go on board the ship, when one has no wish to travel.
FIFTY-NINTH LESSON, 59th.-Cinquante-neuvième Leçon, 59me.
VOCABULAIRE.
1re Sec.
OF THE IMPERFECT.-De l'Imparfait, (§ 147.)
For its formation and use see (§ 147). "That paragraph must be carefully
studied.
When I was at Berlin I often went
to see my friends.
When you were in Paris you often
went to the Champs-Elysées.
At the death of Lucretia Rome was
governed by kings.
Washington was a great man.
Cicero was a great orator, (used to be.)
Our ancestors went a hunting every
day, (used to go.)
The Romans cultivated the arts and
sciences, and rewarded merit.
Were you walking?
I was not walking.
Quand j'étais à Berlin, j'allais sou-
vent voir mes amis.
Quand vous étiez à Paris, vous alliez
souvent aux Champs-Elysées.
À la mort de Lucrèce Rome était
gouvernée par des rois.
Washington était un grand homme.
Cicéron était un grand orateur.
Nos ancêtres allaient tous les jours
à la chasse.
Les Romains cultivaient les arts et
les sciences, et récompensaient le
mérite.
1
Vous promeniez-vous ?
Je ne me promenais pas.
26*
306
FIFTY-NINTH LESSON. (1.)
Were you in Paris when the king | Étiez-vous à Paris lorsque le roi y
was there ?
I was there when he was there.
Where were you when I was in Lon-
don?
était ?
J'y étais lorsqu'il y était.
Où étiez-vous lorsque j'étais à Lon-
dres?
At what time did you breakfast when Quand déjeuniez-vous lorsque vous
you were in Germany?
étiez en Allemagne ?
[ breakfasted when my father break- Je déjeunais lorsque mon père dé-
fasted.
Did you work when he was working?
I studied when he was working.
Some fish.
Some game.
When I lived (used to live) at my
father's, I rose (used to rise) earlier
than I do now. (§ 145-1.)
When we lived in that country, we
went a fishing often.
jeunait.
Travailliez-vous lorsqu'il travaillait ?
J'étudiais lorsqu'il travaillait.
Du poisson.
Du gibier.
Quand je demeurais chez mon père,
je me levais de meilleure heure
que je ne le fais à présent. (53¹,
Obs. 120.)
Quand nous demeurions dans ce
pays-là, nous allions souvent à la
pêche.
When I was ill, I kept in bed all day. Quand j'étais malade, je gardais le
Last summer, when I was in the
country, there was a great deal of
fruit.
lit toute la journée.
L'été passé, pendant que j'étais à la
campagne, il y avait beaucoup de
fruit.
CINQUANTE-NEUVIÈME THEME. 1re Sec.
Qui cherchiez-vous? Je cherchais mon petit frère, que je ne peux
trouver ni en haut ni en bas. Si vous le cherchez encore, il faut
aller près du fleuve. Que fait-il là? Il pêche, assis sur le banc que
vous y avez fait mettre, (had or got placed.) Il n'était pas très-bien
hier; l'humidité ne le rendra-t-elle pas malade? J'espère que non.—
Il y a à la porte un garçon qui vous demande. Faites-le entrer.
Que me voulez-vous? Je vous apporte vos habits. Pourquoi ne les
avez-vous pas apportés avant? Ils n'étaient pas faits, de sorte que
je ne pouvais pas les apporter; mais les voici. C'est bon. Mettez-
les sur cette chaise. Quand je les aurai essayés, je passerai chez le
tailleur. Très-bien, M.-Vous avez appris votre leçon, pourquoi
votre sœur ne savait-elle pas la sienne? Elle a fait une longue
(long, fém.) promenade avec notre chère mère, de sorte qu'elle n'a
pas pu l'étudier. Où ont-elles été? Elles ont d'abord été près de la
rivière qui est derrière notre jardin, ensuite elles ont passé devant la
grande maison neuve, dont elles ont fait le tour, et enfin, elles sont
montées sur la montagne. Et tout cela à pied? Oui; mais je vous
assure qu'elles étaient bien fatiguées. Je le crois.
Were you loved when you were at Dresden? (Dresde?)—I was
not hated.-Was your brother esteemed when he was in London?
FIFTY-NINTH LESSON. (2.)
307
He was loved and esteemed.-When were you in Spain? I was
there when you were there.-Who was loved and who was hated?
Those that were good, assiduous, and obedient, were loved, and those
who were naughty, (méchant,) idle, and disobedient, were punished,
hated, and despised.-Were you in Berlin when the king was there?
I was there when he was there.-Was your uncle in London when
I was there? He was there when you were there.-Where were
you when I was at Dresden? I was in Paris.-Where was your
father when you were in Vienna? He was in England.
At what time did you breakfast when you were in France? I
breakfasted when my uncle breakfasted. Did you work when he
was working? I studied when he was working. Did your brother
work when you were working? He played when I was working.—
On yhat (De quoi) lived our ancestors? They lived on nothing but
fish and game, for they went a hunting and a fishing every day.—
Were you ascending the river (fleuve) while it rained? Yes, we
were ascending it while it was raining very fast; and as we had no
umbrellas, we got very wet. Did you often go to see your friends
when you were at Berlin? I went to see them often; 5 or 6 times
a week. Were you writing to John? I was writing to him, his
cousin Julius, and his friend Alfred. (64—2.)—Did you sometimes
go to the Champs-Elysées when you were at Paris? I often went.
A thing.
The same violin.
VOCABULAIRE. 2de Sec.
The same thing. |
The same flute.
It is all one; it is the same; it makes
no difference; no matter, &c.
Such.
Such a man.
Such a woman.
Such.
Such men.
Such things.
Such men merit esteem.
Out.
Out of the city, (the town.)
Without or out of doors. Who is out?
The church stands outside the town.
I shall wait for you before the town
gate.
The town or city gate.
The barrier, the turnpike-gate.
Seldom, (rarely.) Some brandy.
The life. To get one's livelihood by.
I get my livelihood by working.
He gets his living by writing.
Une chose.
Le même violon.
La même chose.
La même flûte.
C'est égal; c'est la même chose;
ça ne fait rien; cela ne fait rien.
Mas. Un tel; fem. Une telle.
Un tel homme. De tels hommes.
Une telle femme. De telles choses.
Pareil; fem. pareille.
De pareils hommes méritent de
l'estime.
Hors de.
Hors de la ville.
Dehors.
Qui est dehors?
L'église est hors de la ville.
Je vous attendrai devant la porte de
la ville.
La porte de la ville.
La barrière.
Rarement.
La vie.
De l'eau de vie.
Gagner sa vie à.
Je gagne ma vie à travailler.
Il gagne sa vie à écrire.
305
FIFTY-NINTH LESSON. (2.)
I gain my money by working.
By what does that man get his live-
lihood?
To proceed, to go on, to continue.
He continues his speech.
A good appetite.
The narrative, the tale.
The edge, the border, the shore.
The edge of the brook.
The sea-shore.
On the sea-shore.
Je gagne mon argent à travailler.
À quoi cet homme gagne-t-il sa vie í
Continuer, 1, (de or à, av. l'inf.)
Il continue son discours.
Un bon appétit.
Le conte, (la narration.)
Le bord.
Le bord du ruisseau.
Le bord de la mer.
Au bord de la mer.
The shore, the water-side, the coast, Le rivage, la rive.
the bank.
People or folks.
They are good folks.
Gens.
† Ce sont de bonnes gens.
Obs. 144. The adjectives that precede gens must be feminine, those that
follow it, masculine.
Those people are despised.
Those wicked people are despised.
Ces gens-là sont méprisés.
Ces méchantes gens sont méprisés.
CINQUANTE-NEUVIÈME THÊME. 2de Sec.
Qui est dehors? Personne n'est dehors.-Thomas, fermez les
portes et les volets.—Le marchand de vin a-t-il envoyé l'eau-de-vie?
Non, il n'a pas encore pu l'envoyer, parce que son garçon est ma-
lade. A-t-il bu trop d'eau-de-vie? C'est cela même, (the very thing.)
-Où serez-vous obligé d'attendre votre neveu et votre nièce? Nous
les attendrons: elle, à la barrière, lui, à l'atelier.-Les attendiez-vous
au musée hier? Non, je les attendais au pont couvert.-Faisait-il
de l'orage alors? Oui, il en faisait. Le tonnèrre grondait, il pleuvait
et il grêlait. Sont-ils venus après l'orage? Ils ont cru que je n'étais
pas sorti.-Quel conte ce voyageur vous a-t-il fait? (did he relate?)—
Il m'a fait un conte auquel je n'ai rien compris ; il m'a dit des choses
étranges et extraordinaires.-C'est dommage que les voyageurs
exagèrent (exaggerate) comme ils le font. Y aura-t-il beaucoup de
fruit cette année-ci? Il y en aura beaucoup, des pommes, surtout,
(especially.)—Que faisiez-vous lorsque vous demeuriez dans ce pays
là? Quand nous y demeurions, nous allions souvent chasser sur le
bord de la mer.-Quel's gens aviez-vous là? Nous y avions de
bonnes gens, mais ils ne sont pas heureux.
Do you rise early? Not so early as you, but when I lived at my
uncle's I rose earlier than I do now. Did you sometimes keep in
bed when you lived at your uncle's? When I was ill I kept in bed
all day.—Is there much fruit this year? I do not know; but last
summer, when I was in the country, there was a great deal of fruit.
What do you get your livelihood by? I get my livelihood by work-
ing. Does your friend get his livelihood by writing? He gets it by
•
SIXTIETH LESSON. (1.)
309
speaking and writing.-Do these gentlemen get their livelihood by
working? They get it by doing nothing, (à ne rien faire,) for they
are too idle to work.-What has your nephew gained that money
by? He has gained it by working.
What did you get your livelihood by when you were in England?
I got it by writing.—Did your cousin get his appetite by writing?
He got it by working.—Have you ever seen such a person? I have
never seen such a one, (une pareille.)—Have you already seen our
church? I have not seen it yet.-Where does it stand? it stands
outside the town. If you wish to see it, I will go with you in order
to show it you.-What do the people live upon that live on the sea-
shore? They live on fish alone.-Why will you not go a hunting
any more?
While I was hunting yesterday, I killed nothing but an
ugly bird, so that I shall not go any more a hunting.-Why do you
not eat? Because I have not a good appetite.—Why did your bro-
ther eat so much? Because he had a good appetite.-Do you make
faults in your exercises? I do sometimes. You must not (il ne faut
pus en) make any, for you have all (§91) you want to prevent you
from making any.
SIXTIETH LESSON, 60th.-Soixantième Leçon, 60me.
VOCABULAIRE. 1re Sec.
IMPERFECT CONTINUED.-Imparfait Continué.
I forgot, thou forgottest, he or she | J'oubliais, tu oubliais, il ou elle ou-
forgot.
We forgot, you forgot, they forgot.
bliait.
Nous oubliions, vous oubliez, ils ou
elles oubliaient. ( 147-5.)
When we went to school we often. Quand nous allions à l'école nous
forgot our books.
When you went to church you often
prayed to the Lord for your chil-
dren.
I paid, thou paidest, he or she paid.
We paid, you paid, they paid.
When we received some money we
employed it in purchasing good
books.
When you bought of that merchant
you did not always pay in cash.
oubliions souvent nos livres.
Quand vous alliez à l'église vous
priiez souvent le Seigneur pour vos
enfants.
Je payais, tu payais, il ou elle payait.
Nous payions, vous payiez, ils ou
elles payaient. (§ 147—6.)
Quand nous recevions de l'argent
nous l'employions à acheter de
bons livres.
Quand vous achetiez chez ce mar
chand vous ne payiez pas toujours
comptant.
Has your sister succeeded in mend- Votre sœur est-elle parvenue à rac
ing your cravat?
She has succeeded in it.
commoder votre cravate?
Elle y est parvenue,
310
SIXTIETH LESSON. (1.)
Has the woman returned from the La femme est-elle revenue du ma
market?
She has not yet returned.
Did the women agree to that?
They did agree to it.
Where is your sister gone to?
She is gone to the church.
ché?
Elle n'en est pas encore revenue.
Les femmes sont-elles convenues de
cela ?
Elles en sont convenues.
Où votre sœur est-elle allée ?
Elle est allée à l'église.
POTENTIAL, IMPERFECT.-Conditionnel, Simple ou Présent.
For its formation and use see ($148.) That paragraph must be well
studied.
I would go if I had time.
J'irais si j'avais le temps.
If he knew what you have done he S'il savait ce que vous avez fait il
would scold you.
To scold. Do not scold if you can
prevent it.
vous gronderait.
Gronder, 1. Ne grondez pas si vous
pouvez l'empêcher.
If there were any wood he would S'il y avait du bois il ferait du feu.
make a fire.
Should the men come, it would be
necessary to give them something
to drink.
Should we receive our letters, we
would not read them until to-mor-
row.
Not until, (meaning not before.)
Must I go?
You must go.
You must not go.
To guess.
An acquaintance. An.... of mine.
Si les hommes venaient, il faudrait
leur donner quelque chose à boire.
Si nous recevions nos lettres, nous
ne les lirions pas avant demain.
Pas avant, (de av. l'infini.)
Faut-il que j'aille?
Il faut que vous alliez.
Il ne faut pas que vous alliez.
Deviner, 1.
Une connaissance. Une de mes... 8,
SOIXANTIÈME THÊME. 1re Sec.
Attendez-vous quelqu'un? À présent? Non. J'attendais u
ouvrier (workman) à six heures, et comme il n'est pas venu, je ne
l'attends plus. S'il venait, l'emploieriez-vous? (§ 144-3.) Non, si
cet ouvrier venait à cette heure-ci, je ne l'emploierais pas s'il
n'avait pas une excellente raison à me donner pour avoir manqué
de verir. Vous avez raison, il n'y a rien de tel (Obs. 7) que d'être
ponctuel.—Saviez-vous que M. N. D- était mort? Oui, je l'avais
appris avant d'arriver.-Était-ce une de vos connaissances? Oui,
c'était une de mes plus anciennes connaissances. Combien y avait-il
que vous le con- aissiez? Il y avait environ.... Devinez.-Deviner!
Je ne peux jamais deviner.-Dites-le moi. Eh bien, il y avait
quinze ans. Où faut-il que j'aille? Il faut que vous alliez chez le
marchand de bijoux.—Chez le bijoutier? Oui, chez le bijoutier.-
Et pourquoi faut-il que j'y aille? Je voulais faire faire (342) quelque
SIXTIETH LESSON. (2.)
311
ཉྭ་
She
chose; mais comme j'ai changé d'intention, il faut que vous alliez
le lui dire, tout de suite, pour l'empêcher de commencer l'ouvrage.
Did you use to forget anything when you went to school? We
often forgot our books.-Where did you forget them? We forgot
them at the school.—Did we forget anything? You forgot nothing.-
Did your mother pray for any one when she went to church?
prayed for her children.-For whom did we pray? You prayed
for your parents.-For whom did our parents pray? They prayed
for their children.-When you received your money, what did you
do with it? (qu'en faisiez-vous?) We employed it in purchasing
some good books. Did you employ yours also in purchasing books?
No, we employed it in assisting the poor, (à secourir les pauvres.)—
Did you not pay your tailor? We did
We did pay him.-Did you always
pay in cash, when you bought of that merchant? We always paid
in cash, for we never buy on credit.
Has your sister succeeded in mending your stockings? She has
succeeded in it.-Has your mother returned from church? She has
not yet returned.-She would return if it did not rain; would she
not? Yes, she would.-Where has your aunt gone? She has
gone to church. Where have our cousins (fem.) gone? They have
gone to the concert.-Have they not yet returned from it? They
have not yet returned, for the carriage will go for them only in a
quarter of an hour.-Would you give me something pretty if I
were (§ 148—3) good? If you were very good, and if you worked
well, without meddling in other people's business, I would give
you a fine book.-Would you have money if your father were
here? I should have enough if he should arrive.
VOCABULAIRE.
2de Sec.
POTENTIAL, PERFECT.-Conditionnel, Passé ou Composé.
For its formation and use, see ($ 149.) That paragraph must be well
studied.
If they had got rid of their old horse,
they would have procured a better
one.
S'ils s'étaient défaits de leur vieux
cheval, ils s'en seraient procuré un
meilleur.
serait essuyées.
If he had washed his hands, he would S'il s'était lavé les mains, il se les
have wiped them.
If I knew that, I would behave dif- Si je savais cela, je me comporterais
ferently.
différemment.
If I had known that, I would have Si j'avais su cela, je me serais com-
behaved differently.
If thou hadst taken notice of that,
thou wouldst not have been mis-
taken,
porté autrement.
Si tu t'étais aperçu de cela, tu ne te
serais pas trompé.
312
SIXTIETH LESSON. (2.)
Would you learn French if I learned | Apprendriez-vous le Français si je
it ?
I would learn it if you learned it.
Would you have learned German if
I had learned it?
l'apprenais ?
Je l'apprendrais si vous l'appreniez.
Auriez-vous appris l'Allemand si je
l'avais appris ?
I would have learned it if you had Je l'aurais appris si vous l'aviez ap
learned it.
Would you go to France, if I went
thither with you?
pris.
Iriez-vous en France, si j'y allais
avec vous ?
I would go thither, if you went thither J'irais, si vous y alliez avec moi.
with me.
Would you have gone to Germany,
if I had gone thither with you?
Would you go out if I remained at
home ?
I would remain at home if you went
out.
Seriez vous allé en Allemagne, si
j'y étais allé avec vous ?
Sortiriez-vous si je restais à la mai-
son ?
Je resterais à la maison si vous sor-
tiez.
Would you have written a letter if I Auriez-vous écrit une lettre si j'avais
had written a note ?
There is my book. Behold my book.
Here is my friend, my niece, my
book.
There he or it is. There she or it is.
There they are, we are, you are.
Here I am, here you are, thou art.
Here is some.
There are 2 or 3.
That is the reason why.
Therefore I say so.
A pair of gloves, of chickens.
écrit un billet?
Voilà mon livre.
Voici mon ami, ma nièce, mon livre.
Le voilà.
La voilà.
Les voilà, nous voilà, vous voilà.
Me voici, vous voici, te voici.
En voici. En voilà 2 ou 3.
Voilà pourquoi.
Voilà pourquoi je le dis.
Une paire de gants,
SOIXANTIÈME THÊME. 2de Sec.
de poulets.
Où sont mes gants de chamois? Les voici, derrière votre cha
peau. S'ils n'étaient pas ici, iriez-vous les chercher? S'ils n'a-
vaient pas été ici, j'aurais été les chercher. Je ne vous croyais pas si
complaisant. Vous vous trompiez.-Mes cousins sont-ils en haut?
Faut-il que j'aille voir? Non, les voilà. De qui parliez-vous?
Devinez. Je ne puis deviner. Nous parlions de MM. Ducomb,
(§ 140—5,) et les voilà.-Ai-je des souliers propres? Je ne sais pas.
Il faut que vous alliez voir. Oui, en voici. Donnez-m'en une paire
En voici deux. Si je vous en avais demandé deux paires, vous
ne m'en auriez montré qu'une. En voici deux, choisissez la paire
que vous voudrez.-Où est Thomas? Le voici. Où? je ne le
vois pas. Il était ici il y a un moment; mais il s'en est allé.—Faut-
que j'aille le chercher? N'importe. Parle-t-il espagnol? Il pour-
rait le parler, s'il voulait. Vous voulez dire qu'il le parlerait s'il
pouvait. Auriez-vous été à Baltimore si votre père et votre mère
y avaient été ? Oui, ils m'y auraient mené avec eux. Ne seriez-
SIXTIETH LESSON. (3.)
313
vous pas venue plus tôt, si vous aviez pu? Si fait, je serais venue
avant eux si j'avais pu le faire. Où faut-il que vous alliez? Nulle
*part.
Who is there? It is I, (c'est moi.)-Who are those men? They
are foreigners, who wish to speak to you.-Of what country are
they? They are Americans.-Where is my book? There it is.-
And y pen? Here it is.—Where is your sister? There she is.—
Where are our cousins? (fem.)-There they are.-Where are you,
John? (Jean.) Here I am.-Why do your children live in France?
They wish to learn French; that is the reason why they live in
France. Why do you sit near the fire? My hands and feet are
cold; that is the reason why I sit near the fire.-Are your sister's
hands cold? No, but her feet are cold.-What is the matter with
your aunt? Her arm hurts her.-Is anything the matter with you?
My head hurts me.-What is the matter with that woman? Her
tongue hurts her very much.
Why do you not eat? I shall not eat before I have (avant d'avoir)
a good appetite.-Has your sister a good appetite? She has a very
good appetite; that is the reason why she eats so much.-If you
have read the books which I lent you, why do you not return them
to me? I intend reading them once more, (encore une fois ;) that
is the reason why I have not yet returned them to you; but I will
return them to you as soon as I have read them a second time,
(pour la seconde fois.)-Why have you not brought my shoes?
They were not made; therefore I did not bring them; but I bring
them you now; here they are.—Why has your daughter not learned
her exercises? She has taken a walk with her companion, (fem.;)
that is the reason why she has not learned them; but she promises
to learn them to-morrow, if you do not scold her.-What ails her
horse? It has a sore leg; that is why she did not ride.
VOCABULAIRE.
I guess, I reckon, (so much used here.) |
I guess you have it.
An atmosphere. A dry atmosphere.
The temperature. A high...
A low temperature. A mean
A plate.
T'he son-in-law.
A soup-plate.
The husband.
The step-son.
The daughter-in-law.
The step-daughter.
The progress.
To profit.
To improve.
3me Sec.
Je présume, Je pense, Jose dire, que ..
Je suis presque sûr que vous l'avez.
Une atmosphère. Une.... sèche.
La température. Une.
....élevée.
Une température basse... moyenne,
Une assiette. Une assiette à soupe
Le beau-fils, le gendre.
Le beau-fils. Le mari.
La belle-fille, la bru.
La belle-fille.
Le progrès.
† Faire des progrès.
27
314
SIXTIETH LESSON. (3.)
To improve in learning.
The progress of a malady.
The father-in-law, the step-father.
The mother-in-law, the step-mother.
Must I be?
You must be.
Must I not be here at 9 o'clock ?
It is not necessary for you to be here.
Where must you be to-morrow?
I must be in Boston.
Why must you be there?
I must go and see Mr. Abbott.
+ Faire des progrès dans les études,
dans les sciences.
Le progrès or les progrès d'une mala
die.¹
Le beau-père.
La belle-mère.
Faut-il que je sois? Il faut que vous
soyez.
Ne faut-il pas que je sois ici à 9
heures ?
Il ne faut pas que vous y soyez.
Où faut-il que vous soyez demain ?
Il faut que je sois à Boston.
Pourquoi faut-il que vous y soyez ?
Il faut que j'aille voir M. Abbott.
SOIXANTIÈME THÊME. 3me Sec.
•
Où faut-il que vous soyez demain soir? Pour arriver à Boston,
après-demain matin, il faut que je sois à New York demain soir.
Votre gendre va-t-il avec vous? J'y vais seul; sans compagnie que
celle du petit Joseph, qui m'accompagne. Si votre fille n'était pas
malade, votre gendre, son mari, ne vous accompagnerait-il point?
Non; il ne le pourrait pas, parce que c'est la saison des affaires.-
Ce petit garçon n'a-t-il pas froid aux pieds? Pourquoi le croyez-
vous? Parce qu'il a de si mauvais souliers, (such bad.) Il aurait
froid s'il n'y était pas accoutumé.-Qui est parti pour le Canada?
Le beau-père le l'avocat et sa belle-mère, sa belle-sœur et son beau-
frère sont tous partis. N'était-il pas parti avant eux? Lui? Il n'est
pas encore parti. Je croyais qu'il l'était. N'auriez-vous point écrit
à votre chère petite cousine et à votre grand cousin, si vous aviez su
que le capitaine passerait à Newark? J'aurais écrit à l'une, mais
non pas à l'autre.
Would you be glad if I were to lend you an interesting book? To
be sure I would be glad. (Dir. 6.) You know very well that I am
fond of reading. But have you any interesting book? What do
you think of one of W's works? I should like very well
(beaucoup) to read his last work. Would you, indeed! (translate
merely indeed!) Then what will you give me if I lend it to you?
You are jesting; are you not? Why do you think so? Because I
think you say so only to plague me, (me tracasser, 1.) To plague
you! You know that I do not like to plague you. You! You do
not like to plague me? You plague me every day. I would like
1 ¹ All nouns ending in ie are feminine. This ending frequently answer
to the English termination y.
SIXTIETH LESSON.
315
(3.)
to plague you; but I cannot, you are so good.-Would the 1obber
have been punished, if he had been taken? He would have been
punished, if they had been able to prove (prouver) that he was
culpable, (coupable.)-Would your cousin progress so well, if she
did not study so much? She does not study so much as you think.
She does not study as much as I (do); and, notwithstanding, she
makes more progress, (or she improves more.) How is that? (Com-
ment cela se fait-il?) She learns more easily (aisément) than I.
RÉSUMÉ POUR LA 60ME LEÇON.
Avez-vous trouvé le bracelet (bracelet) que j'ai perdu? Avez-vous
perdu un bracelet? Oui, j'en ai perdu un d'or, comme celui-ci. Je
suis fâché de vous dire que je n'en ai pas trouvé. Y a-t-il long-
temps que vous l'avez perdu? Je les ai mis tous les deux, il y a à
peu près une heure, et à présent je n'ai que celui du bras gauche.
Êtes-vous sortie depuis que vous les avez mis? Non, j'ai cepen-
dant été à la porte de devant, pour y accompagner une demoiselle
de ma connaissance qui est venue me vofr. Avez-vous, depuis,
cherché votre bracelet-là? Oui, il n'y est pas. Si vous n'êtes pas
sortie, votre bracelet n'est pas perdu, il n'est qu'égaré (égarer, to
mislay.) Égaré ou perdu, c'est à peu près la même chose; il n'est
plus sur mon bras. Vous le retrouverez, ayez patience. Tenez, je
suis presque sûr (I guess) que vous avez cru mettre (282, Obs. 65)
les deux bracelets, et que vous n'en avez mis qu'un. Vous plai-
santez, (you jest,) n'est-ce pas ? Non, je ne plaisante pas. Je suis
presque sûr que vous le trouverez en haut sur votre table ou sur
votre toilette. Je vais voir.
M. Saint-Cir, fait-il froid dehors? Froid! Non, il fait un temps
charmant; plus frais que hier, mais agréable. Agréable, pour
ceux qui marchent ou qui se promènent, mais froid, pour ceux qui
restent long-temps assis pour écrire ou pour lire. Cela se peut.
Quant à moi, je le trouve très-agréable. Mais asseyez-vous donc.
Voici un fauteuil. Non, gardez le fauteuil, vous qui avez froid;
moi, je vais m'asseoir ici, sur ce siège. Se porte-t-on bien chez
vous ? Nous nous portons tous bien, excepté ma petite fille
Qu'a-t-elle ? Je ne sais; mais elle est malade; aujourd'hui, mal
aux dents; demain mal de tête, une autre fois un rhume....Mais
voici Louis. Quant à celui-là, il n'est pas malade, je vous assure
Bon jour, Louis, comment va? Très-bien, M., meri. Dormez-vous
bien? Oui, je dors bien. Mangez-vous, buvez-vous, jouez-vous
bien? Oui, il fait tout cela à merveille. Étudie-t-il bien? Oui,
c'est un bon écolier. Tenez, je crois qu'il est venu pour me mon-
trer quelque chose qu'il a traduit. N'est-ce pas, Louis?
316
SIXTY-FIRST LESSON. (1.)
C'est une petite anecdote, papa. Voulez-vous lui permettre de la
lire? Sans doute, je serai charmé de l'entendre.-Cette traduction.
(translation) n'a pas été corrigée, de sorte qu'il peut y avoir des
fautes. Que vous aurez la bonté d'excuser.-Sans doute. Qui ne
fait pas de fautes? Lis ta traduction. J'ai peur, papa. Quoi! Tu
as peur. Tiens, (come.) Ne fais pas l'enfant, (do not be childish ;
from: faire l'enfant, to be childish.) Lis.-Traduction. Un officer
Français étant arrivé à la cour (court) de Vienne, l'impératrice
Thérèse lui demanda, (asked, § 153—3,) s'il croyait que la princesse
de N― qu'il avait vue la veille, (the day before,) était vraiment,
comme on le disait, la plus belle femme du (in the) monde?
Madame, répliqua l'officier, je le croyais hier.-C'est bien, Louis.
Mais, dis-moi, comment as-tu épelé le participe passé: vu? Je l'ai
épelé, v, u, e, féminin. Pourquoi? Parce que son régime direct,
que, est avant. C'est la règle. Tu as raison. C'est bien.
La réponse de l'officier Français était ingénieuse, (ingenious.)
On la regarde cómme telle; car chaque nation la raconte, et change
le lieu. Oui, c'est vrai; les Anglais la placent à la cour d'Angle-
terre, sous le règne de leur reine favorite, Elizabeth; les Français
à la cour de France; les Espagnols à Madrid, &c. &c. Les bonnes
anecdotes appartiennent à tout le monde. Louis, peux-tu nous
raconter celle du vieux monsieur et du jeune homme à l'église ?
Je ne sais pas si je pourrai la dire, mais je pourrais la lire si je
l'avais ici. Non, non, essaie de nous la dire. Je vais essayer; mais
je crains de ne pas réussir. Commence, nous sommes prêts à
t'écoute'. —Un jeune homme étant dans une église, peu attentif au
service, et ne sachant que faire, (restless,) demanda (§ 153-3) à un
vieux monsieur qui était dans le banc voisin, (next pew,) Connais-
sez-vous, Monsieur, une règle sans exception? Oui, répondit-il, un
homme bien élevé, (a gentleman,) se conduit toujours bien, et par-
ticulièrement, (especially,) à l'église.
SIXTY-FIRST LESSON, 61st.-Soixante et unième Leçon, 61me.
VOCABULAIRE.
What has become of your aunt?
I do not know what has become of
her.
What has become of your sisters?
I cannot tell you what has become of
them.
1re Sec.
Qu'est devenue votre tante ?
Je ne sais pas ce qu'elle est devenue.
Que sont devenues vos sœurs?
Je ne peux pas vous dire ce qu'elles
sont devenues,
SIXTY-FIRST LESSON. (1.)
317
Shall or will you die?
To die (lose life), died, do not die. | Mourir,* 2, mort, ne mourez pas
I die, thou diest, he or she dies. Je meurs, tu meurs, il ou elle meurt.
Mourrez-vous? (463.) Je mourrai.
L'homme est mort ce matin, et sa
femme est morte aussi.
L'homme est mort.
I shall.
The man died this morning, and his
wife died also.
The man is dead.
The woman died this morning.
To be alive.
Wine sells well.
Wine will sell well next year.
That door shuts easily.
That window does not open easily.
That picture is seen far off.
Far off, from afar. From a great dis-
tance.
Winter clothes are not worn in sum-
mer.
That is not said.
That cannot be comprehended.
To conceive, to comprehend.
It is clear.
According to circumstances.
The circumstance.
That is according to circumstances.
It depends.
Glad of.....
Pleased with... (not plu, but
Sorry of or for.. displeased at, with..
Must I have?
You must.
Must you not have?
It is necessary.
It is not....
La femme est morte ce matin.
Être vivant-s, être vivante-s.
† Le vin se vend bien.
† Le vin se vendra bien l'année pro-
chaine.
+ Cette porte se ferme facilement.
† Cette fenêtre ne s'ouvre pas facile-
ment.
+ Ce tableau se voit de loin.
De loin.
De bien loit
+ Les vêtements d'hiver ne se por-
tent pas en été.
† Cela ne se dit pas.
+ Cela ne se conçoit pas.
Concevoir, 3.
C'est clair.
† Selon les circonstances.
La circonstance.
†
C'est selon.
Bien aise, (de, av. l'inf.)
Content (de). (473, Obs. 109.)
Fâché (de.) Mécontent (de.)
† Faut-il que j'aie? Il faut que vous
ayez.
+ Ne faut-il pas que vous ayez?
C'est nécessaire. Ce n'est pas .
SOIXANTE ET UNIÈME THÊME. 1re Sec.
Vous souciez-vous d'aller au musée? Oui, je voudrais bien y
aller; mais il faut que j'aille à la maison. Et pourquoi donc ? İl
faut que j'y sois avant 9 heures, et que j'aie fait mon devoir avant
10 heures. Vous êtes ponctuel, et vous faites bien. La femme qui
était si mal hier au soir, est-elle morte? Le médecin croyait qu'elle
ne passerait pas la nuit; mais je présume qu'elle n'est pas morte,
car nous n'en avons pas entendu parler. Les médecins se trompent
quelque fois aussi bien que les autres. Eh! pourquoi de se trom-
peraient-ils point? Ils sont sujets à se tromper comme les autres
personnes.-Le coton se vend-il bien cette année? Oui, le prix est
un peu plus haut à Liverpool. S'est-il bien vendu l'année passée ?
27*
318
SIXTY-FIRST LESSON. (2.)
Oui, il s'est très-bien vendu.-Êtes-vous contente de votre nouvelle
paire de souliers? J'en suis assez contente; mais je l'aurais été
davantage, si les souliers n'étaient pas tout-à-fait si grands.—Que
pensez-vous de Salomon, qui est sorti ce matin avec son manteau
d'hiver? Cela ne se conçoit pas. Il faut qu'il soit (he must be)
malade.—Lui? Non; ce n'est que pour avoir l'air singulier.
What has become of your uncle? I will tell you what has
become of him. Here is the chair (la chaise) upon which he often
sat, (être assis, 512.)-Is he dead? He is dead.-When did he die?
He died two years ago, (472.)-I am very sorry for it.
Why do
you not sit down? If you will stay with (auprès de) me I will sit
down; but if you go, I shall go (along) with you. What has
become of your aunt? I do not know what has become of her.-
Will you tell me what has become of your niece? I will tell you
what has become of her. Is she dead? She is not dead, but alive.
-What has become of her? I guess she is gone to Vienna.-What
has become of your sisters? I cannot tell you what has become of
them, for I have not seen them these two years.-Are your parents
still alive? They are not alive, but dead.
How long is it since your cousin (fem.) died? I guess it is six
months since she died.-Did wine sell well, last year? It did not
sell very well, (pas trop bien;) but it will sell better (mieux) next
year, for there will be a great deal, and it will not be dear.-Why
do you open the door? Do you not see how it smokes here? I see
it, but you must (il faut) open the window instead of opening the
door. The window does not open easily; that is the reason why I
open the door. When will you shut it? I will shut it as soon as
there is (582) no more smoke.-Did you often go a fishing when
you were in that country? We often went a fishing and a hunting.
-If you will go with us into the country, you will see my father's
castle. You are very good, Sir; if I had not seen that castle, I
would willingly accept, (accepter;) but I have already seen it.—
Never mind; you must go with us.-Can I? You know that I
must be at home this evening, and that I have 20 miles to go. (57¹.)
Are you rich?
VOCABULAIRE. 2de Sec.
I am.
Are the women handsome ?
Êtes-vous riche ? Je le suis.
Les femmes sont-elles bien?
They are, they are rich and hand- Elles le sont, elles sont riches et
belles.
Êtes-vous de France ? J'en suis.
some.
Are you from France ?
I am.
De quel pays est-elle ?
She is from France.
What countrywoman is she?
Elle est de France.
Would you be sorry if you were rich? Seriez-vous fâché si vous étiez riche ?
SIXTY-FIRST
319
LESSON. (2.)
I should not be sorry for it.
To be angry with somebody.
To be angry about something.
What are you angry about?
Are you sorry for having done it?
I am sorry for it.
Honest, polite. Impolite, dishonest.
Polite, courteous.
Unhappy, unlucky.
Uncivil.
Je n'en serais pas faché.
Être fâché contre quelqu'un.
Etre fâché de quelque chose.
De quoi êtes-vous fâché?
Êtes-vo
tes-vous fâché de l'avoir fait ?
J'en suis fâché.
Honnête.
Poli.
Heureux,
Malhonnête.
Impoli.
fem. heureuse.
Happy, lucky.
Malheureux,
malheureuse.
Easy, not hard.
Easy to do.
Facile, aisé.
Facile à faire.
Hard to say.
Difficile.
Difficile à dire.
Useful.
Useless.
'seful to know.
Utile.
Difficult, hard.
It is useless to repeat it.
Is it useful to write a great deal?
It is useful.
Utile à savoir.
Inutile. Il est inutile de le répéter
Est-il utile d'écrire beaucoup ?
C'est utile.
Is it well (right) to take the property Est-il bien de prendre le bien des
of others?
It is bad, (wrong.)
It is not well (right) or it is wrong.
Well, right. Bad, wrong.
Of what use is that?
That is of no use.
What is that?
I do not know what that is.
What is it?
I do not know what it is.
Does he wish me to come?
He wishes you to come alone.
He does not.
Must I come without her?
You must come without her.
autres ?
C'est mal.
Ce n'est pas bien.
Bien.
Mal.
† À quoi cela est-il bon ?
+ Cela n'est bon à rien.
+ Qu'est-ce que c'est que cela?
† Je ne sais pas ce que c'est que cela.
+ Qu'est-ce que c'est?
† Je ne sais pas ce que c'est.
Veut-il que je vienne? (§ 151.)
Il veut que vous veniez seul.
Il ne veut pas que vous veniez seul.
Faut-il que je vienne sans elle?
Il faut que vous veniez sans elle.
SOIXANTE ET UNIÈME THEME. 2de Sec.
Êtes-vous du même pays que cette dame-là? Non, je suis
Française, et elle est Suisse.-De quoi votre beau-fils se plaint-il ?
Il se plaint de son beau-frère.-Comment appelez-vous cette demoi-
selle-ci? Ceci est Madame de Balmont. Cette jeune personne est-
elle mariée? Sans doute. Elle semble (seem) être si jeune, que
je ne le croirais pas, si vous ne me le disiez pas. Elle n'est
pas si
jeune qu'elle semble l'être. Non! Quel âge a-t-elle donc ? De-
vinez, si vous pouvez. Si je devine, je dirai seize ans. Vous n'avez
pas réussi à deviner.-Le jeune commis n'est-il pas fâché contre
vous? Non, il n'est pas fâché contre moi, car je ne lui ai rien fait.
Contre qui est-il donc fâché? Il est mécontent de vous qui avez
cassé sa jolie petite canne. Ne l'ai-je pas payée?
Ne l'ai-je pas payée? Si fait; mais le
prix n'est pas la canne. C'est selon quelque fois l'un vaut mieux,
320
SIXTY-FIRST LESSON. (3.)
quelque fois l'autre.-Dit-on: remplissez d'eau la bouteille? Non,-
cela ne se dit pas. Que dit-on done? On dit: remplissez la bou-
teille d'eau.
Where did you take this book from? I took it out of (dans) the
room of your friend, (fem.)—Is it right to take the books of other
people? It is not right, I know; but I wanted it, and I hope nat
your friend will not be displeased, for I will return it to her as soon
as I have read it.-What is your name? My name is William.,
(Guillaume.)—What is your sister's name? Her name is Eleanor,
(Léonore.)—Are the ladies handsomer in Paris than in London?
Strangers say they are.—Are the women handsome here? Yes,
they are. Are they rich? Some are rich, others are poor.-Are
they industrious? They used to be.—You seem unhappy; are you
angry at any one? Yes, I am angry at my husband, wh› has not
been willing to (or would not) take me to Boston. He is not rich
enough, perhaps.
Avis aux LECTEURS.-Nous allons dès aujourd'hui, (from to-day,)
laisser une partie des questions sans réponses, pour accoutumer
l'écolier à les faire lui-même.
What country woman is she?—Are you, too?-Would you be
sorry if you could go travelling ?-Would you not have been pleased
if she had not died? What are you mad at?-That merchant is
honest; people can do business with him, can they not?-Whom
do you say is so polite ?-That man and his wife are happy, are
they not?—This young girl is very interesting; is she not happy!-
Are your gloves easy or difficult to put on?-Does that foreigner
bring good wines?—What do they sell cheap?-What is useless?-
What is impolite ?-Is the German hard (difficult) to translate?—ls
it, to pronounce ?—Is it not, to speak?—If this (ceci) is useful, why
do you not do it? If to get up early is useful and easy, why do
you not get up earlier than you do? (492, Obs. 114.)-Is it right to
speak ill of the absent?-Do not fill that bottle with wine.—W hat
would you fill with coffee, if you had any?-Would he have
drunk that brandy, if I had given it to him?—-What is that good
for?
What is your name?
My name is Charles.
VOCABULAIRE.
What do you call this in French?
How do you express this in French?
What is that called?
George the Third.
3me Sec.
+ Comment vous appelez-vous ?
+ Je m'appelle Charles.
+ Comment cela s'appelle-t-il en
Français ?
+ Comment dit-on cela en Français ?
Comment appelle-t-on cela?
George trois.
SIXTY-FIRST LESSON. (3.)
821
Obs. 145. After the Christian name of a sovereign, the French employ
the cardinal numbers without an article, while the English use the ordinal.
Lewis the Fourteenth.
Henry the Fourth.
Louis quatorze.
Henri quatre.
Obs. 146. First and second, however, are exceptions to this rule: for first,
the French use premier; and for second, either deux or second. Quint
instead of cinq is also used in speaking of the emperor Charles V., and of
the pope Sixtus V.
Henry the First.
Henry the Second.
Pope Sixtus the Fifth.
Charles the Fifth spoke several Eu-
ropean languages fluently.
Europe, European.
Fluently.
Rather.
Rather... than.
will keep it.
Henri premier.
Henri second or Henri deux.
Le pape Sixte-Quint.
Charles-Quint parlait couramment
plusieurs langues européennes.
L'Europe, européen.
Couramment.
Plutôt...que.
Plutôt...
que de.
Rather than squander my money, I Plutôt que de dissiper mon argent, je
I will rather pay him than go thither.
I will rather burn the coat than wear
it.
He has arrived sooner than I.
A half-worn coat.
To do things imperfectly, (by halves.)
To reign.
Does she reign?
A foolish discourse. Infernal.
His, her maiesty. Their majesties.
(57%. Obs 10.)
le garderai.
Je le paierai plutôt que d'y aller.
Je brûlerai plutôt l'habit que de le
porter.
Il est arrivé plus tôt que moi.
+ Un habit à demi-usé.
† Faire les choses à demi.
Régner, 1. (282.)
Un sot discours.
Règne-t-elle ?
Infernal.
Sa majesté, (nom fém.) Leurs ma-
jestés.
SOIXANTE ET UNIÈME THÊME. 3me Sec.
Qui règne en Angleterre? La reine Victoria première. Quel roi
règne en France? Aucun roi n'y règne. Quel en était le dernier?
Louis Philippe premier. Quel a été le dernier Charles d'Espagne ?
Etait-ce Charles trois ou quatre ? C'a été Charles quatre. Quel a
été son successeur, (successor?) C'a été Ferdinand sept. Combien
de George y a-t-il eu en Angleterre? Il y en a eu quatre. Y en
a-t-il eu en France? Non, il n'y en a eu aucun.
Y a-t-il en un
Henri quatre dans ce dernier pays? Oui, il y en a eu un, qu'on
nomme Henri le Grand. Sans réponse.-Pouvez-vous faire des
réponses en Français ?-Auriez-vous pu en faire à la première
leçon ?-Que faut-il que j'aie?-Veut-il que j'aille chez le bijoutier?
Si vous étiez riche comme Étienne Girard l'était, que feriez-vous?———
Ne portait-il pas toujours un habit à demi-usé ?-Qui fait les choses
ademi?-Que feriez-vous plutôt que d'être marchand ?-Quel roi
de France a été mis à mort, (put to death?)-Où voulez-vous que
j'aille?
322
SIXTY-SECOND LESSON. (1.)
What did Charles V. say of European languages? Charles V.,
who spoke fluently several European languages, used to say
(avait coutume de dire) that we should speak (qu'il fallait parler)
Spanish with the gods, Italian with our (son) friend, (fem.,) French
with our friend, (mas.,) German with soldiers, English with geese,
(une oie,) Hungarian (hongrois) with horses, and Bohemian (bohé-
mien) with the devil, (le diable.)-Do you admire what Charles V.
said of languages? I do not, I assure you. I think, on the con-
trary, that it is a very foolish speech.-Why do you think so? Be-
cause those languages must be spoken (il faut parler ces langues) to
the people who speak them, and not to geese, horses, and the
devil.-How did his majesty (sa majesté) the emperor, Charles V.,
know that the Bohemian suited his infernal majesty? (sa majesté
infernale.)-Are not all the majesties relations?
Questions sans réponses.-How is that called in French ?-What is
the French of: companion?-of: a female companion?-of: an
acquaintance of mine?-Do you know, or do you not know, that of.
a half-worn-out hat?-Is that young lady called Eleanor? Is her
brother called Stephen? (Étienne.)-Where did George III. reign?
-Was Charles the First put to death? (mettre à mort?)-Was Six-
tus V. a pope (pape) or a king?—Are all kings happy ?-Have there
been many popes ?-Is it correct to say: happy as a king or a pope
-Who would not rather be a farmer than a king?-What must I
have? Where must you go?-You wish me to be kind; be so
yourself. Does she wish me to come and play at her concert 2
SIXTY-SECOND LESSON, 62d.—Soixante-deuxième Leçon, 62me.
VOCABULAIRE. 1re Sec.
As to, as for. As to me; to them.
As to that, I know not what to say.
Obs. 147. Ne is used without pas
To cease, to dare, to be able or know how.
I do not know what to do.
Do you not know where to go?
She does not know what to answer.
We do not know what to purchase.
You do not cease importuning me.
She continually complains.
I dare not ask you for it.
She dares not tell you.
Quant à; quant à moi; à eux, à elles.
Quant à cela, je ne sais que dire.
with the four verbs:-
Cesser, oser, pouvoir,* savoir.*
Je ne sais que faire.
Ne savez-vous où aller ?
Elle ne sait que répondre.
Nous ne savons qu'acheter.
Vous ne cessez de m'importuner.
Elle ne cesse de se plaindre.
Je n'ose vous le demander.
Elle n'ose vous le dire.
SIXTY-SECOND LESSON. (1.)
323
I cannot go to the covered bridge.
I cannot tell you, (would not know
how.)
Can you not believe it?
J
To die of a disease, (malady.)
She died of the varioloid.
Did he not die of apoplexy?
They died with the cholera.
The, a, fever. The yellow fever. |
A chill. The intermittent fever.
An attack of a....
He has a fever.
The apoplexy.
He has a chill.
He has had a fever.
His fever has returned.
He was struck with apoplexy.
To strike, knock, rap, at the door.
What has happened to that priest?
What has happened to her?
She had a dreadful accident.
To shed, pour out.
drink.
A tear.
Pour me out a
To shed tears.
To pour out a drink-some water.
I pour out some drink for that man.
With tears in his, her, our, or my
eyes.
Sweet, mild.
Some sweet wine.
A mild zephyr.
Sour, acid.
A mild air.
A soft sleep.
Nothing makes life more agreeable
than the society of, and intercourse
with, our friends.
Je ne puis aller au pont couvert.
Je ne saurais vous le dire.
Ne sauriez-vous le croire ?
Mourir d'une maladie.
Elle est morte de la variole.
N'est-il pas mort d'apoplexie?
Ils sont morts du choléra.
La fièvre.
La fièvre jaune.
Un frisson. La fièvre intermittente.
L'apoplexie. Une attaque d'a
•
Il a un frisson. † La fièvre l'a pris.
† Il a eu la (un accès de) fièvre.
+ La fièvre l'a repris.
Il a été frappé d'apoplexie.
Frapper, 1, frapper à la porte.
Qu'est-il arrivé à cet ecclésiastique ?
Que lui est-il arrivé? (502.)
Il lui est arrivé un accident affreux.
Verser, 1. Versez-moi à boiro.
Une larme.
Verser des larmes.
Verser à boire-de l'eau.
† Je verse à boire à cet homme.
Les larmes aux yeux.
Doux; fem. douce. Sur.
Du vin doux.
Un air doux.
Un doux zéphir. Un doux sommeil.
Rien ne rend la vie si douce que ia
société et le commerce de nos
amis.
SOIXANTE-DEUXIÈME THÊME.
1re Sec.
Allez-vous vous verser à boire? Moi, non; mais quant à Henri. il
ne cesse de se verser à boire. Il faut qu'il ait soif. C'est très proba-
ole.—Versez à boire au jardinier. Que lui verserai-je? De l'eau,
de l'eau-de-vie, ou du vin doux? Comme il a eu la fièvre, versez-
lui un peu de vin doux. Est-ce bon pour la fièvre? On le
dit. Votre cidre est-il doux ou sur? Il n'est ni doux ni sur.-Aire-
t-il le café doux? Non, il le prend sans sucre.-Qu'est-ce qui rend
la vie do ice ?-Mlle. Clara a-t-elle encore la fièvre intermittente?
Sa fièvre est passée. Quel accident est arrivé à l'ecclésiastique?
Il est tombé de cheval, et il s'est fait beaucoup de mal à la jambe
gauche et au pied droit.
Sans réponses.-Vous êtes-vous associé avec le marchand qui
vend si bon marché?—A-t-on pu vous dire de quelle maladie a
324
SIXTY-SECOND LESSON. (2.)
vieil ecclésiastique est mort?-Ce vin n'est-il pas un peu sur?-Ces
cerises sont-elles douces?-Mon thé est trop doux, versez-y un peu
d'eau et de lait.-Votre fils ne craint-il pas la fièvre jaune à la
Nouvelle Orléans, ou l'a-t-il déjà eue?—Que dit le médecin? Croit-il
que cette attaque d'apoplexie tuera le vieil épicier ?—Ne faut-il pas
que vous veniez ?
Of what illness did your sister die? She died of (de la) fever.--
How is your brother? My brother is no longer living; he died
three months ago.—I am surprised (étonné) at it, for he was very
well last summer, when I was in the country.-Of what did he die?
He died of apoplexy.-How is the mother of your friend? She is
not well; she had an attack of ague, the day before yesterday, and
this morning the fever has returned. Has she an intermittent fever?
I do not know, but she often has chills.-What has become of
the woman whom I saw at your mother's? She died this morning,
of apoplexy. Do your scholars learn their exercises by heart?
They will rather tear them than learn them by heart.-What does
this man ask me for? He asks you for the money which you owe
him.
Sans réponses.-How do you like this wine?-Shall I pour you
out a glass of brandy and water?-Does she not prefer a glass of
mineral water, with syrup?-Do you not know what to eat?-—
Where must you be to-night?-How many of your cousins are
alive?-How much syrup shall I pour out for her? Did you not
hear a knock at the front door?-Why does she shed tears?-Has
an accident happened?-What has happened to them?-Does he
not quit (cease) speaking?-How does your mother like our food?
-Why does she not eat any more?
A case.
VOCABULAIRE. 2de Sec.
Ten cases of cholera.
The report. Is the report favorable ?
To augment, increase.
decrease.
To report.
Un čas.
Dix cas de choléra.
Le rapport. Le rapport est-il favor-
able?
Diminish, Augmmter, 1.
Do they report all the cases?
Does the cholera increase or not?
It seems to be dim-nishing now.
How many cases have they reported?
Only 7 for the last 24 hours.
To cry, to scream, to shriek.
Rapporter, 1.
Diminuer, 1.
Rapporte-t-on tous les cas?
Le choléra augmente-t-il ou non?
Il semble diminuer à présent.
Combien de cas a-t-on rapporté ?
Seulement 7 pour les dernières 24
heures.
Crier, 1.
To help, assist, some one to do a thing. Aider, 1, quelqu'un à faire une chose
I help him to do it.
Je l'aide à le faire.
SIXTY-SECOND LESSON. (2.)
325
I nelp you to write.
I will help you to work.
To cry out for help.
The help.
To inquire after some one.
Whom are you inquiring after?
Has he inquired after our residence?
Where, when you please.
Je vous aide à écrire.
Je veux vous aider à travailler.
Crier à l'aide.
Appeler du secours.
L'aide,' le secours.
S'informer, 1, de quelqu'un.
De qui vous informez-vous?
S'est-il informé de notre demeure?
Où, quand
As you please, you like; at your plea- Comme
sure.
As soon as you like it.
To trust some one.
I trust nobody.
Trust no one.
(463. Obs. 107.)
Aussitôt qu', dès qu'
il vous plaira.
† Se fier, 1, à quelqu'un. Ne vous
fiez à personne. ·§ 55.)
† Je ne me fie à personne.
Do you trust him? her? them, (fem.)? † Vous fiez-vous à lui, à elle, à elles?
1 do trust him, her, them.
He does not trust me, them, (mas.)
We must not trust everybody.
To distrust one, mistrust.
Do you distrust that lawyer?
She distrusts her maid-servant.
In your place, I would distrust him.
A seat, a place. A public square.
Make me a little room.
To laugh at something, laughed,
laugh.
I laugh, thou laughest, he, she, one
laughs.
Do you laugh at that? I do, with
all my heart, and he does also.
At what do they laugh?
† Je me fie à lui, à elle, à elles. $ 64.)
+ II ne se fie pas à moi, à eux.
† Il ne faut pas se fier à tout le monde.
+ Se défier de quelqu'un.
† Vous défiez-vous de cet avocat ?
† Elle se défie de sa domestique.
À votre place, je me défierais de lui.
Une place. Une place publique.
Faites-moi un peu de place.
Rire,* 4, de quelque chose, ri 、p. p ),
riez.
Je ris, tu ris, il rit, elle rit, on rit.
Riez-vous de cela? J'en ris de tout
mon cœur, et lui aussi.
De quoi rient-ils ? rient-elles ?
SOIXANTE-DEUXIÈME THÊME. 2de Sec.
Quel est le rapport du choléra? Il est moins favorable que hier.-
Combien de cas dans les 24 heures? Il y a eu 42 cas et 17 morts.
-C'est plus que hier; car il n'y avait que 35 cas et 14 morts.-Cela
augmente un jour et diminue l'autre.-Il faut être prudent et modéré,
(prudent and moderate.)-Combien de cas a-t-on rapporté à St.
Louis? Seulement 12.-Ce n'est pas autant que la dernière fois.-
Aidez-vous votre cousin à faire son devoir? Seulement lorsqu'il est
trop difficile. Quant à mon frère et à moi, nous ne nous aidons
jamais l'un l'autre.-Pourquoi cet enfant crie-t-il? Il s'est fait du
mal à la jambe gauche. À quoi sert de crier?
À quoi sert de crier? À rien; mais les
enfants crient.
¹ Aide, in the signification of help, is feminine; it is masculine when it
ineans an assistant.
28
326
SIXTY-SECOND LESSON. (2.)
Sans réponses.-Rit-elle parce que ce Monsieur est tombé ?- -
Riez-vous toujours quand vous voyez tomber quelqu'un ?Ne con-
naissez-vous personne qui crie alors ?-Vous fiez-vous à ce boucher?
-Ne se fie-t-elle pas à sa domestique ?-Nous pouvons nous fier à
celle-ci, n'est-ce pas ?-Ne nous trompera-t-elle point?-Savez-vous
le Français de: As you please?-N'avez-vous pas entendu frapper?
-Que vous verse-t-elle ?—N'appelle-t-on pas au secours? Sentez-
vous le doux zéphir?-Ne faut-il pas que j'ai un chapeau neuf?
Seriez-vous fâché si je m'en allais ?-Quel est le nom de votre nou-
velle connaissance?
Have you inquired after the merchant who sells so cheap? I
have; but nobody would¹ or could (personne n'a voulu ou n'a pu)
tell me what has become of him.-Never mind; you will easily
find another who sells as cheap.—I wish I could,² (Je voudrais
pouvoir;2) for I have but little money.-Did the general's nephew
die of a disease or of an accident? He died of the yellow fever.
-Has not a dreadful accident happened to the apothecary's old
clerk? He fell and broke his arms or legs. (Dir. 2—24², Obs. 55.)
-His arms and legs, did you say? No, only his arms or legs.-
Would she cry for help, if I should beat her? (§ 148-3.) If you
should hurt her, I guess she would cry.-Would they not laugh, if
I was to tell them that tale? No, I guess they would be angry.—
Must I not go for some cigars? Yes, you must go for some.-Must
I not have the money to pay for them? Yes, you must have it;
here it is. After you have paid for them, (46³, Obs. 107,) you will
have six cents left; you may keep them.
Sans réponses.-What dost thou ask me for?-Will you pass me
the bottle, if you please?-Have you not drunk enough ?-Shall I
give you (faut-il vous verser) some wine ?-Why do you not eat?-
Who knocks at the door?-Why does he cry?-What has happened
to you? Where will you go to, this evening?-Where will your
brothers go to ?-Why do you go to town?-Will you go with me?—
Must I sell to that man on credit? Has he already deceived (trom-
per) anybody?-Must I trust those ladies?-Do those merchants
trust you?-Whom do those gentlemen laugh at?-Why do those
1 Translate could, by: j'ai pu, il a pu, il pouvait, &c. Would, by: j'ai
voulu, il a voulu, je voulais, &c., when they refer to past actions instead of
future ones. (§ 148-4.)
2I wish, in such phrases as, I wish I could, I might, I had, &c., or any
other imperfect tense, where it means, I should like to, must be translated
by: Je voudrai pouvoir, avoir, &c. When I wish, does not mean, I should
like to, but merely, I want, translate it by: Je veux, &c., as: I wish to see you,
Je veux ou désire vous voir.
SIXTY-SECOND LESSON. (3:)
321
•
people laugh at us?-Ought we to laugh (faut-il se moquer) at
persons who speak badly?-What are you laughing at ?-How long
(depuis quand) have you been wearing it so large? (grand.)
To ring.
VOCABULAIRE.
A bell, a small bell.
To hear a ring. Heard a ring.
He must go.
Where must she go ?
Do you wish him to be good or not?
I wish him to be good, and I wish
her also to be good.
Must he not have a new coat?
He must come with me to the tailor's.
To laugh in a person's face.
We laughed in his face.
To laugh at, to deride some one.
I laugh at (deride) you.
Were you laughing at us?
you making fun of us?
We did not laugh at you.
Full.
A book full of errors.
To afford.
3me Sec.
Sonner, 1. Une cloche. Une clochette.
Entendre sonner. Entendu sonner.
Il faut qu'il aille.
Où faut-il qu'elle aille?
Voulez-vous qu'il soit bon ou non?
Je veux qu'il soit bon, et je veux
aussi qu'elle soit bonne. ($151.)
Ne faut-il pas qu'il ait un habit neuf?
Il faut qu'il vienne avec moi chez le
tailleur.
Rire au nez de quelqu'un.
Nous lui avons ri au nez.
Se rire ou se moquer de quelqu'un.
Je me ris (me moque) de vous. (543.)
Were Vous riiez-vous de nous ? Vous
Can you afford to buy that horse?
I can afford it.
I cannot afford it.
Who is there?
moquiez vous de nous? (§ 147—1.)
Nous ne nous riions pas de vous.
Plein, pleine.
Un livre plein de fautes.
† Avoir les moyens, (de before in-
finitive.)
+ Avez-vous les moyens d'acheter ce
cheval ? J'en ai les moyens.
† Je n'en ai pas les moyens.
Who is it? is that? Qui est-là ? Qui est-ce ? Qui est
It is I, he, she, we, you, thou.
Is it he? It is not he.
Are they your brothers? (473.)
It is they.
Is it she?
It is not she.
It is not they.
It is she.
Are they your sisters?
It is they, (feminine.)
It is not they.
เ
It is I who speak.
Is it they who laugh?
It is you who laugh.
It is thou who hast done it.
cela?
C'est moi, lui, elle, nous, vous, toi
Est-ce lui?
Ce n'est pas lui.
Sont-ce vos frères ? or,
Est-ce que ce sont vos frères ?
Ce sont eux. Ce ne sont pas eux.
Est-ce elle?
Ce n'est pas elle.
C'est elle.
Sont-ce vos sœurs? or,
Est-ce que ce sont vos sœurs ?
Ce sont elles.
Ce ne sont pas elles.
C'est moi qui parle.
Sont-ce eux (elles) qui rient? or,
Est-ce que ce sont eux (elles) qui
rient ?
C'est vous qui riez.
C'est toi qui l'as fait.
328
SIXTY-SECOND LESSON. (3.)
It is you, gentlemen, who have said
that.
We learn French, my brother and I.
C'est vous, Messieurs, qui avez dit
cela.
+ Mon frère et moi nous apprenons
le Français.
Obs. 148. The uniting pronoun nous or vous must be placed before a
verb, when it has two or more nominatives of different persons. (§ 38.)
You and I will go into the country.
You and he will stay at home.
1 utor, preceptor.
+ Vous et moi nous irons à la cam-
pagne.
+ Vous et lui vous resterez à la mai-
son.
Instituteur.
SOIXANTE-DEUXIÈME THEME. 3me Sec.
N'a-t-on pas sonné? Je crois que si, (si au lieu de oui: la ques-
tion est negative, 102, Obs. 26.)-La domestique est-elle allée à la
porte? Je ne l'ai pas entendue. Il faut qu'elle y aille plus vite.-
Elle n'a peut-être pas entendu la clochette. C'est possible. Est-ce
elle qui court? Je présume que oui. Oui, c'est elle. Qui était-ce?
On a apporté le bonnet de Madame. Portez-le-lui.--Qui va au
concert ce soir? Vous et moi nous irons si nous avons le temps.~
Votre instituteur vous gronderait-il, si vous ne faisiez pas votre
devoir? Non, mais il serait fâché. Quand faut-il que la voiture
soit prête? Il faut qu'elle le soit à 10 heures. À quelle heure
faut-il que Charles vienne? Il faut qu'il vienne un quart d'heure
avant. La voiture sera-t-elle pleine? Elle sera pleine. Ne pour-
rions-nous pas aussi prendre la petite Emilie? Non, il ne faut pas
qu'elle vienne; elle criera.-Est-ce vous qui riez comme cela?
Rit-elle au nez de cet étranger? De qui se moquent-ils ?-Votre
voisin ne se moque-t-il pas de vos enfants parce qu'ils se lèvent si
tard?—Cet auteur n'a-t-il pas fait un livre plein de fautes ?—Ce verre
de quoi est-il plein ?—On m'a dit que M. P————, voulait acheter la
grande maison de B― au coin de Broadway, en a-t-il les moyens?
Sont-ce vos amis qui viennent?
Is it our sister who is playing on the piano? It must be she,
(il faut que ce soit elle) for no other person plays. No, it is not
she, for here she is.-Who is it, then? It is our cousin Elise.-Are
they your sisters who are coming? It is they.-Are they your
neighbors (fem.) who were laughing at you? They are not ou
neighbors.—Who are they? They are the daughters of the countess
whose brother has bought your house. Are they the ladies you
nave spoken of to me? They are.—Shall you learn German? My
brother and I will learn it.-Shall we go to the country, to-morrow?
I shall go to the country, and you will remain in town.-Shall my
sister and I go to the opera? You and she will remain at home,
SIXTY-THIRD LESSON. (1.)
329
and your brother will go to the opera.-What did you say when
your tutor was scolding you? I said nothing, because I had nothing
to say; for I had not done my task, and he was in the right to scold
ine.
Sans réponses.-You must come to my house, to-morrow, to bring
me back the books which I have lent you; do you hear?-Who is
to play at the concert, to-night?—Is it thou who hast soiled my fan?
-Could he learn this by heart, before to-morrow?-Could she learu
it yesterday? (N. 2, 622.)-Would she not go to Baltimore, last
week?-Would her nieces go there next week, if ney could ?—
I wish I could travel; don't you? (et vous?)'-We wish we were
learned; does she not?-Does she not care about the piano?
SIXTY-THIRD LESSON, 63d.-Soixante-troisième Leçon, 63me.
VOCABULAIRE. 1re Sec.
To get into a bad scrape.
To get out of a bad scrape.
I got out of the scrape.
That man always gets into bad
scrapes, but he always gets out of
them again.
Between. Between them. Among us,
among acquaintances. Between
friends.
To make some one's acquaintance.
To become acquainted with one.
I have made his or her acquaintance.
† S'attirer, 1, (se faire,) de mauvai-
ses affaires.
† Se tirer, 1, d'affaire.
Je me suis tiré d'affaire.
Cet homme s'attire toujours de mau
vaises affaires, mais il s'en tire
toujours.
Entre. Entr'eux. Entr'elles. Entre
nous, entre connaissances. Entr'a-
mis.
Faire connaissance avec quelqu'un.
Faire la connaissance de quelqu'un.
I have become acquainted with him > J'ai fait sa connaissance.
or her.
Are you acquainted with him, her?
Do you know him, her?
} Le (la) connaissez-vous ??
1 We have seen, (18¹, Obs. 38,) that n'est-ce pas was used to ask a negative
interrogation in the same person as a preceding affirmation, but now, we say,
when the interrogation, whether negative or not, is in another person, use the
conjunction et with any required personal pronoun. Don't you? Et vous ?
Don't he? Et lui? Don't she? we? they? Et elle? nous? eux ? I know him:
lo
you ? Et vous?-Does he ? she? Peter, &c.: Et lui? et elle? et Pierre ?
But, does any one? must be translated by: Quelqu'un le connaît-il ?
2 The verb to know is always expressed by connaître* when it signifies to
be acquainted with, and by savoir* in all other cases. Ex. I know that man,
that lady, Je connais cet homme, cette dame; I know my lesson; Je sais ma
leçon; I know what you wish to say, Je sais ce que vous voulez dire.
28*
330
SIXTY-THIRD LESSON. (1.)
I am-I do.
I am not I do not.
Je le (la) connais.
point.
Je ne la connais
He is an acquaintance of mine.
She is my acquaintance.
Il est de ma connaissance.
Elle est de ma connaissance.
He is not a friend, he is but an ac- Ce n'est pas un ami, ce n'est qu'une
quaintance,
To enjoy.
Do you enjoy good health?
To be well.
She is well.
Does she enjoy a great fortune?
Does he enjoy a good reputation?
To imagine.
Our fellow creatures.
He has not his equal or his match.
To resemble some one, to look like
some one.
That man resembles my brother.
That beer looks like water.
We resemble each other.
They do not resemble each other.
Is it time that I... thou... he...
she...
we, &c.
Is it time for me…….
thee... him...
her... us, &c., to..?
connaissance.
Jouir, 2, de.
Jouissez-vous d'une bonne santé ?
Étre bien portant, portante.
Être en bonne santé.
+ Elle est bien portante.
+ Elle se porte bien.
† Elle est en bonne santé.
Jouit-elle d'une grande fortune?
Jouit-il d'une bonne réputation?
S'imaginer, 1.
Nos semblables.
Il n'a pas son semblable.
† Ressembler, 1, à quelqu'un. (Mind
the ss and the a.)
Cet homme ressemble à mon frère.
Cette bière ressemble à de l'eau.
Nous nous ressemblons.
Ils ou elles ne se ressemblent pas.
Est-il temps que je... tu... il..
elle... nous... Vous
elles..., (govern the subj. 151.)
...
ils...
Is it time for us to go, come, have, be? | Est-il temps que nous allions, veni-
It is time for us to go, come, have,
be.
ons, ayons, soyons? Il est temps
que nous allions, que nous veni
ons, ayons, soyons.
SOIXANTE-TROISIÈME THEME. 1re Sec.
Est-il temps que nous allions à Washington pour l'affaire de Fre-
déric? Oui, il faut que nous y soyons demain ou, au plus tard,
après-demain. Il y a une mauvaise affaire; je ne sais comment il
s'en tirera. Lui! il se fait souvent de mauvaises affaires, mais il s'en
tire toujours. C'est vrai, il est très-heureux.-Ne jouit-elle pas d'une
fortune considérable? Si fait, son père lui a laissé une grande for-
tune, dont elle jouit, et dont elle fait bon usage. Jouit-elle d'une
bonne santé? Oui, pour une personne riche, elle jouit d'une très-
bonne santé. Sa sœur est-elle bien portante? Non, il faut qu'elle
soit souvent malade, car elle n'a pas bon air.-Ce monsieur, n'est-il
pas une de vos connaissances? Lequel? Celui qui est entre les
deux dames en jaune? Non, celui qui est entre la table et la fenê-
tre.-Ressemblez-vous à votre sœur?-Vous ressemble-t-elle ?—À
qui ce commis ressemble-t-il ?-Mon frère et moi, nous ressemblons-
SIXTY-THIRD LESSON. (2.)
331
nous?-Ces deux sœurs ne se ressemblent-elles pas comme deux
gouttes d'eau, (2 drops of water?)-Pourquoi cet homine s'enfuit-il
comme ça? Il faut qu'il ait fait quelque chose de mal, ne le croyez-
vous pas?
What is the report of the health-office, to-day du comité de
smté?) The report has increased to-day.-How many cases are
there? 53, and only 11 deaths. We must hope that it will diminish
soon. A certain (certain) good-for-nothing fellow liked brandy
much, but he found in it (lui) two bad qualities, (une qualité :) "If
I put water to it," said he, "I spoil it; and if I do not put any to it,
it spoils me."-Does your cousin resemble you? He resembles me.
-Do your sisters resemble each other? They do not resemble
each other; for the elder (l'aînée) is idle and naughty, and the
younger (la cadette) assiduous and good-natured towards everybody.
-How is your aunt? She is very well.-Does your mother enjoy
good health? She imagines she enjoys (s'imagine jouir) good
health; but I believe she is mistaken, for she has, these six months,
had a cough, of which (dont) she cannot get rid.
Is it right to laugh thus at everybody? If I laugh at your coat, I
do not laugh at everybody.-Does your son resemble any one? He
resembles no one.-Why do you not drink? I do not know what
to drink, for I like good wine, and yours looks like vinegar.—If you
wish to have some other, I shall go down (descendre) into the cellar
to fetch you some.-You are too polite, Sir; I shall drink no more
to-day. Have you known my father long? I have known him
long, for I made his acquaintance when I was yet at school. We
often worked for one another, and we loved each other like
brothers. I believe it, for you resemble each other.-When I had
not done my exercises, he did them for me; and when he had not
done his, I did them for him.
VOCABULAIRE.
2de Sec.
l'autre.
Each other, one another. Of each | L'un l'autre l'une l'autre. L'un de
other. Without one another.
L'une sans l'autre.
The brother and the sister love each
other.
Are you pleased with each other?
We are.
As, as well as; as well as we; they.
The appearance, the countenance.
To show a disposition to.
That man whom you see shows a
desire to approach us.
To look pleased with some one.
Le frère et la sœur s'aiment l'un
l'autre.
Êtes-vous contents l'un de l'autre ?
Nous le sommes.
Ainsi que, ainsi que nous; qu'eux.
La mine.
Faire mine de.
Cette homme que vous voyez fait
mine de nous approcher.
Faire bonne mine à quelqu'un.
832
SIXTY-THIRD LESSON. (2.)
To look cross at some one.
When I go to see that man, instead
of receiving me with pleasure, he
looks displeased.
A good-looking man.
A bad-looking man.
Bad-looking people, or folks.
To go to see some one.
To pay some one a visit.
To frequent a place.
To frequent societies.
To associate with some one.
To look like, to appear.
How does he look ?
He looks gay, (sad, contented.)
You appear very well.
You look like a doctor.
Faire mauvaise mine à quelqu'un.
Quand je vais voir cet homme, au lieu
de me faire bonne mine, il me fait
mauvaise mine.
Un homme de bonne mine.
Un homme de mauvaise mine.
Des gens de mauvaise mine.
Aller voir quelqu'un.
Faire une visite
Rendre visite
} à quelqu'un.
Fréquenter un lieu, (endroit.)
Fréquenter des sociétés.
+ Fréquenter quelqu'un.
Avoir l'air.
Quelle mine a-t-il ? Quel air a-t-il 1
Il a l'air enjoué, (triste, content.)
Vous avez l'air bien portant.
Vous avez l'air d'un médecin.
She seems angry, to be in a bad Elle a l'air de mauvaise humeur.
humor.
They look pleased. They appear to
be in a good humor.
To look good, to appear to be good.
To drink to some one.
To drink some one's health.
I drink your health.
Ils ont l'air content.
Ils ont l'air
d'être de bonne humeur.
Avoir l'air bon.
+ Boire à quelqu'un.
Boire à la santé de quelqu un.
† Je bois à votre santé.
It is all over with me! her! them! † C'en est fait de moi! d'elle'
(fem.)
It is all over.
d'elles !
+ C'en est fait.
It is better for me, him, you, them,†
us, thee: or I, he, you, we, thou
hadst better....
It is better for me to do it, for us to
do it, for you to do it. (I had better
do it, &c.)
Il vaut mieux que je, il, vous, eties,
nous, tu, (must be followed by the
subjunctive.)
Il vaut mieux que je le fasse,
le fassions,
Nous
vous le fassiez.
SOIXANTE-TROISIÈME THÊME. 2de Sec.
Pourquoi fréque: tez-vous ces gens-là? Je les fréquente parce
qu'ils me sont utiles.-Si vous ne cessez de les fréquenter, vous
vous attirerez de mauvaises affaires, car ils ont beaucoup d'enne-
mis. Vous croyez? Alors je ne continuerai plus à les voir. Il
vaut mieux que vous fassiez ce que vous dites. Ces gens font mine
de nous approcher. Que nous veulent-ils? Le leur demanderai-je ?
Oui, faites-le. Que voulez-vous, mes amis? Ils ont l'air de ne pas
m'entendre. Il faut qu'ils soient étrangers.-Quels sont ces homines
de mauvaise mine qui viennent par ici? Si ce sont des voleurs,
c'en est fait de nous. N'avez-vous pas peur?-Le jeune docteur est
un homme de bonne mine, n'est-ce pas ?—Qui allez-vous voir?—Si
SIXTY-THIRD LESSON. (3.)
333
ous aviez le temps, iriez-vous rendre visite à vos cousines?-Fré
quentez-vous le théâtre ?-Quels endroits, quels lieux fréquentent-
ils?-Ce marchand a toujours l'air d'être de mauvaise humeur, est-il
malade?
Why did you not come to dinner? I have been hindered. I am
sorry I made you wait. (Je suis fâché de ....)-Until what time
did you wait? We waited for you till a quarter past four; and, as
you did not come, we dined without you.-You did right. I wish
I had (62², N. 2) sent you a boy to inform you that I could not come;
but I thought I could come.'-Never mind; did you drink my
health? We drank yours (à la vôtre) and that of your parents.—
How does your uncle look? (quelle mine a ....
.?) He looks (a l'air)
very gay, (enjoré,) for he is much pleased with his children.-Do
his friends look (ont-ils la mine) as gay as he? They, on the con-
trary, look sad, because they are discontented. My uncle has no
money, and is always contented, and his friends, who have a good
deal of it, are scarcely ever so.
Is that man angry with you? I think he is angry with me, be-
cause I (de ce que je) do not go to see him; but I do not like to go to
his house, for when I do, instead of receiving me with pleasure, he
looks displeased.-You must not believe that; he is not angry with
you, for he is not so bad (méchant) as he looks, (qu'il en a l'air.) He
is the best man in the (du) world; but one must know him in order
to appreciate him, (pour pouvoir l'apprécier.)-There is a great dif
ference (la différence) between you and him, (lui;) you look pleased
with all who come to see you, and he looks cross at those who call
on him, (go to see him.)
VOCABULAIRE.
To please (oblige) some one.
3me Sec.
+ Faire plaisir à quelqu'un.
+ Vous lui faites grand plaisir.
† Faire de la peine à quelqu'un.
You oblige (please) her much.
To hurt some one's feelings, to grieve.
Have you hurt that man's feelings?† Avez-vous fait de la peine à cet
I did not.
You grieve me, (hurt my feelings.)
If you know a good place to swim
in, oblige me by showing it to me.
homme? Je ne lui en ai pas fait.
+ Vous me faites de la peine.
Si vous connaissez un bon endroit
pour nager, faites-moi le plaisir de
me le montrer.
1 When the same nominative I, I, he, he, &c., is repeated in the second
member of a compound sentence, as: I am sorry I have made you wait;
the French, instead of the second nominative, use an infinitve, (with or
without preposition.) Thus, instead of saying: Je suis fâche que je vous
ai fait attendre; they say: Je suis fâché de vous avoir fait attendre. (R. 3.)
(28º, Obs. 65.)
334
SIXTY-THIRD LESSON. (3.)
To experience, to undergo.
Éprouver, 1.
I have experienced a great many J'ai éprouvé beaucoup de malheurs.
misfortunes.
To suffer, to bear, suffered, suffer.
Do not suffer it.
Dost thou suffer? I do. He suffers.
To feel a pain in one's head, foot.
I felt a pain in my eye.
To neglect.
Let us never neglect our duty.
We must yield to necessity.
To spring, dart forward.
The cat springs upon the rat.
To leap on horseback.
An increase, an augmentation.
For more bad luck.
For more good luck.
Souffrir,* 2,
souffert,
Ne le souffrez pas.
Souffres-tu?
souffrez.
Souffres-tu? Je souffre. Il souffre.
† Souffrir de la tête, du pied.
† J'ai souffert de l'œil.
Négliger, 1, (de, av. l'inf. § 144—2.)
Ne négligeons jamais notre devoir.
Il faut céder à la nécessité.
† S'élancer.
Le chat s'élance sur le rat.
S'élancer sur son cheval.
Un surcroît.
Pour surcroit de malheur.
Pour surcroît de bonheur.
For more bad luck I have lost ray Pour surcroît de malheur j'ai perdu
purse.
To lose one's wits.
That man has lost his wits, and he
does not know what to do..
Obstinately, by all means.
That man wishes by all means to
lend me his money.
To follow.
I follow, thou followest, he or she
follows, people follow.
To pursue.
To preserve to save.
ma bourse.
Perdre la tête.
Cet homme a perdu la tête, et il ne
sait que faire. (62¹, Obs. 147.)
À toute force.
Cet homme veut à toute force me
prêter son argent.
Suivre,* 4; pres. part. suivant; past
part. suivi.
Je suis, tu suis, il ou elle suit, on
suit.
Poursuivre,* 4. (Is conjugated like
suivre.)
Conserver, 1.
SOIXANTE-TR )ISIÈME THÊME. 3me Sec.
V. faut que nous nous en allions.-Pourquoi faut-il que nous nous
en allions? Je n'aime pas la mine de ces gens-là. Ils nous suivent,
je crois. Ils viennent par ici, tournons par-là. N'ayez pas peur
d'eux.-Quand irons-nous nager? Nous irions à présent même, si
nous pouvions trouver un bon endroit.-Qu'a-ce petit garçon? Il
souffre de la tête. N'a-t-elle pas souffert de la gorge ?-Ne faites-
vous pas de la peine à votre tante ?-Ne font-ils pas de la peine à
leurs parents?-À qui cherchez-vous à faire plaisir?-Si j'allais au
théâtre, cela ferait-il plaisir à mon oncle?-N'a-t-il pas fait de la
peine à sa belle sœur?-Si un voleur attaquait (attacked) M. Ran-
dolph, son gros chien ne s'élancerait-il pas sur le voleur?-Ne crie-
t-elle point, parce qu'il faut céder à la nécessité ?
What is the matter with you? It is all over with me.-Why do
SIXTY-FOURTH LESSON. (1.)
335
•
you cry thus? Why do I cry? I have been robbed of my gold
rings, (une bague d'or,) my best clothes, and all my money; that is
the reason why I cry.-Do not make (ne faites pas) so much noise,
for it is we who have taken them all, (tout cela,) in order to teach
you to take better care (avoir plus de soin, 50³) of your things,
(affaires,) and to shut the door of your room when you go out.—
Why do you look so sad? I have experienced great misfortunes.
After having lost all my money, I was beaten by bad-looking men;
and to my still greater ill-luck, I hear that my good uncle, whom I
love so much, has been struck with apoplexy.-You must not afflict
yourself (s'affliger) so much, for you know that we must yield to
necessity.
Do you know a good place to swim in? I know one, but it is
rather far. Where is it? If you will go with me, I will tell you.-
I will go if it is not too far.-On that side (38¹) of the river, behind
the wood, (la forêt,) near the high road, (le grand chemin.)—When
shall we go to swim? This evening, if you like.-Will you wait
for me before the city gate? I shall wait for you there; but I beg
of you not to forget it.-You know that I never forget my promises.
-Where did you become acquainted with that lady? I became
acquainted with her at the house of one of my relations.-Why
does your cousin ask me for (40') money and books? Because he
is a fool; of me, (car à moi,) who am his nearest relation, (son plus
proche parent,) and his best friend, he asks nothing.-Can you get
rid of that man? (522). I cannot get rid of him, for he will abso-
lutely (à toute force) follow me.-Has he not lost his wits? It may
be, (cela se peut.)-What does he ask you for? He wishes to sell
me a horse which I do not want.
SIXTY-FOURTH LESSON, 64th.-Soixante-quatrième Leçon, 64me.
Obs. 149.
VOCABULAIRE 1re Sec.
How, how much, how many, before an exclamation, are trans
lated by que. Ex.
How good you are!
How foolish he is, not to go!
S Que vous êtes bon!
Que de bonté vous avez!
Qu'il est sot, de ne pas y aller !
Obs. 149. The adjective which in English follows how, stands in French
after the verb; and when que is followed by a substantive, de must always
precede the latter.
336
SIXTY-FOURTH LESSON. (1.)
How foolish she is to believe him!
How rich that man is!
How handsome that woman is!
How much kindness you have for
me!
Qu'elle est sotte de le croire !
Que cet homme est riche !
Que cette femme est belle!
Que de bonté vous avez pour moi!
How many obligations I am under to † Que d'obligations je vous ai !
you!
To be under obligations to some one.
I am under many obligations to him.
How many people!
How happy you are!
How much wealth that man has!
How much money that man has
spent in his life!
To be obliged to some one for some-
thing.
To be indebted to some one for some-
thing.
I am indebted to him for it.
To thank.
To thank one for something.
I will thank you for that fan, or
Shall I thank you for that fan?
† Avoir des obligations à quelqu'un.
†
Je lui ai beaucoup d'obligations.
Que de monde !
Que vous êtes heureux !
Que de richesses cet homme a!
Que d'argent cet homme a dépensé
dans sa vie !
Être obligé a quelqu'un de quelque
chose.
Être redevable à quelqu'un de quel-
que chose.
Je lui en suis redevable.
Remercier, 1, (has no prepos. before
the pers. but de before the object.)
Remercier quelqu'un de quelque
chose.
Voulez-vous me passer cet éventail?
Ayez la bonté de me .....
Faites-moi le plaisir de me.....
Vous prierai-je de me....
Veuillez (impér.) me..
· •
Obs. 150. Never use remercier before the performance of the action, but
one of the opposite phrases, or any of similar import.
I thank you for the trouble you have Je vous remercie de la peine que
taken for me.
vous avez prise pour moi.
SOIXANTE-QUATRIÈME THEME. 1re Sec.
Que ce petit garçon est sot de crier comme cela! Que vous êtes
impoli de l'appeler sot! Et vous, que vous êtes impertinent de
m'appeler impoli!-Vous a-t-il répondu ainsi, lui qui vous a tant
d'obligations! Il est riche, et il a oublié toutes les obligations qu'il
m'a.-Qui n'a point d'obligations à ses semblables!-Nous nous
devous des secours les uns aux autres.-C'est vrai. Quel est ce
jeune homme en habit bleu? C'est le neveu d'un de nos premiers
marchands. Que d'argent ce neveu a dépensé! Que Madam.e
Lewis est belle! n'est-ce pas ? Et qu'elle est aimable! Quelqu'un
vous a-t-il remercié des dons que vous nous avez faits? Cela n'en
vaut pas la peine. Faites-moi le plaisir (I will thank you) de me
les montrer.-Volontiers. Montons dans la chambre de devant
BIXTY-FOURTH LESSON. (2.)
337
↓
nous les y trouverons.-Veuillez ramasser ma plume d'acier, (I'll
thank you to…...) La voici. Je vous remercie. De rien. A qui
cet officier est-il redevable de sa compagnie, (company.) Il en est
redevable à son oncle, le général.-A qui est-il redevable de sa
place? (situation?)
How many people there were at the ball! Then you enjoyed
yourself (s'amuser) a good deal, I presume? No, not at all. Why
so? There was there such a multitude, that one could hardly get
in How many invitations they must have sent!
Could you
dance? (N. 622.) No, there was not room (place) enough.—I
bring you a pretty present, with which you will be much pleased, I
hope. How good you are! What is it? A silk cravat. How
many obligations I owe you! Where is it? I have got it in my
coat-pocket. Here it is, in this paper. Shall I open it? Yes, open
it. Now I see the cravat. How beautiful it is! Does it please
you? It pleases me much, and I thank you for it, with all my
heart. I hope you will at last accept (accepter) something from
me. What do you intend to give me? I will not tell you, for if I
did, you would have no pleasure when I should give it to you.
Where do you wish me to go for you? Where do I want you to
go for me? It is rather far.-No matter, (n'importe,) I am so much
indebted to you, that I will go wherever (où) you please. (46³, Obs.
107.)-How kind you are! Not more than you, (pas plus.)—How
foolish Clarissa is, to stay at home when she could go travelling!
Now she is almost too old, but say how foolish she was not to go
15 years ago, when she could have gone! With whom could she
have gone 15 years ago? With her cousin's family, from Virginia,
(la Virginie.)-Had she lost her wits? Perhaps, or perhaps her
heart.-Make haste; you and I must be at home in a quarter of an
hour. Come, then; I am ready. I am not, (pas moi;) for, before
I go away, I must have my pencils.-Here they are. I am much
obliged, and under many obligations to you.
VOCABULAIRE. 2de Sec.
How large? Of what size is the dog? | De quelle grandeur est le chien?
How high? O. what height is the tree? De quelle hauteur... est l'arbre ?
How deep? Of what depth is the pond? De quelle profondeur... est l'étang ?
Obs. 150. When speaking of dimensions, the English use the verb
to be, while the French use avoir, with the preposition de before the noun
or adjective of dimensions. How thick is this? Combien ceci a-t-il d'épais-
seur ?1
¹ In general, the substantive is more elegantly used than the adjective
but deep cannot be expressed by de profond, nor thick by d'épais.
29
338
SIXTY-FOURTH LESSON. (2.)
How high is his or her house?
It is nearly fifty feet high.
Our house is thirty feet broad.
That table is six feet long.
That river is twenty feet deep.
+ Combien sa maison a-t-elle de
haut ou de hauteur ?
† Elle a environ cinquante pieds de
haut ou de hauteur.
† Notre maison a trente pieds de
large ou de largeur.
† Cette table a six pieds de long ou
de longueur.
† Cette rivière a vingt pieds de pro-
fondeur.1
The size. What is your size how La taille.
tall...
I am 5 feet 9 inches.
Of what size is that man?
He is but 5 feet 1 inch.
How was that child dressed?
It was dressed in green.
The man with the blue coat.
The woman with the red gown.
Is it true that his house is burnt?
It is true; it is but too true.
Is it not, (or is it not true ?)
I shall perhaps go there; but not he.
Obs. 151.
of: aller.
Quelle est votre taille ?
† J'ai 5 pieds 9 pouces.
De quelle taille cet homme est-il ?
+ Il n'a que 5 pieds 1 pouce.
Comment cet enfant était-il habillé ?
† Il était habillé de (ou en) vert.
+ L'homme à l'habit. bleu.
† La femme à la robe rouge.
Est-il vrai que sa maison est brûlée ?
C'est vrai, ce n'est que trop vrai.
N'est ce pas, (n'est-il pas vrai ?)
J'irai peut-être; mais il n'ira pas.
(there), must not be used before the future and conditional
To share, to divide.
Whose horse is this? It is mine. (292.)
It is my horse. It is mine. (§ 38, N. 3.)
It is mine, or it belongs to me.
Whose horses are these?
Are these gloves yours?
They are mine, or they belong to
me.
Whose house is that?
It is mine, or it belongs to me.
Whose houses are these?
They are mine, or they belong to
me.
It is not your purse: is it?
Il est à moi.
C'est le mien.
Partager, 1.
A qui est ce cheval?
C'est mon cheval.
C'est le mien, ou il est à moi.
À qui sont ces chevaux ?
Ces gants sont-ils à vous ?
Ce sont les miens, ou ils sont à moi
(473. Obs. 110.)
À qui est cette maison ?
C'est la mienne, ou elle est à moi.
À qui sont ces maisons?
Ce sont les miennes, ou elles sont à
moi.
Est-ce que c'est 2 votre bourse ?
These are not your notes: are they? Est-ce que ce sont vos billets?
No, they are not.
1 See note on page 337.
Non, ce ne les sont pas. (§ 39—3.)
• When a simple interrogation is used after a negation, as: You have not
my ring, have you? The French merely use the interrogative form: Est-ce
que... ´as: Est-ce que vous avez ma bague? You may use: Avez-vous ma
bague? but the other corresponds better with the doubt which the English
mode seems to con rey.
SIXTY-FOURTH LESSON. (2.)
330
SOIXANTE-QUATRIÈME THÊME. 2de Sec.
Avez-vous vu la nouvelle maison de l'avocat? Oui, je l'ai vue.
Et vous, ne l'avez-vous pas encore visitée? Non, il faut que j'aille
la voir bientôt. Il vaut mieux que vous alliez en voir la grandeur.
Combien a-t-elle de hauteur? Elle a au moins 56 pieds de hauteur.
-Combien de largeur a-t-elle ? Elle a, laissez-moi voir, les deux
salons ont chacun 18 pieds de largeur et le vestibule à peu près 8, ce
qui faït 44 pieds, et l'épaisseur (the thickness) des murs à peu près 4
autres pieds. Alors le tout fait de 48 à 50 pieds de largeur, n'est-ce-
pas? C'est une grande maison pour un petit homme. Quelle est
sa taille? Il a environ 5 pieds 3 pouces; car j'ai au moins 6 pouces
de plus que lui. Votre fils n'est-il pas grand? Si fait, il a plus de 6
pieds. À qui sont ces deux beaux chevaux noirs? Ah! qu'ils sont
beaux! Ce sont ceux du ministre Américain. N'est-ce pas le Mon-
sieur à l'habit noir, au gilet blanc, et à la cravate bleu mazarin ?—
Combien cette rivière a-t-elle de profondeur?-Combien cette table
d'acajou a-t-elle de hauteur? N'est-il pas temps que nous allions voir
le pont-neuf?
Whose houses are those? They are mine.-Do these pens belong
to you? No, they belong to my sister.—Are those (sont-ce la) the
pens with which she writes so well? They are the same.-Whose
gun is this? It is my father's.-Are these books your sister's? They
are hers.-Whose carriage is this? It is mine.-Which is the man
of whom you complain? It is he (celui) who wears a red coat.-
How were they dressed? Some were dressed in blue, some in
green, some in yellow, and several in red.-Who are those men?
The one who is dressed in gray is my neighbor, and the man with
the black coat the physician whose son has given my neighbor a
blow with a stick.-Who is the man with the green coat? He is one
of my relations.—Are there many philosophers in your country?
There are as many there as in yours.-How does this hat fit me? It
fits you very well.-How does that coat fit your brother? It fits him
admirably. Is your brother as tall (grand) as you? He is taller
than I, but I am older (âgé) than he. Of what size (de quelle taille)
is that man? He is five feet four inches (un pouce) high.-How high
is the house of our landlord? It is sixty feet high.-Is your well
deep? Yes, Sir, for it is fifty feet deep.-"There are many learned
men (un suvant) in Rome, are there not, (n'est-ce pas ?") Milton asked
a Roman. "Not so many as when you were there," answered
(répondit) the Roman.
VOCABULAIRE.
To run up, run up, p. p.,
quick.
run up
3me Sec.
Accourir,* 2, accouruª, accourez vite,
(conjugué comme Courir.) (46³, 48¹.)
340
SIXTY-FOURTH LESSON. (3.)
Many men had run up ; but instead of
extinguishing the fire, the wretches
set to plundering.
To run to the assistance of some one.
To save, to deliver from danger.
To save anybody's life.
To plunder, to rob.)
To set about something.
Beaucoup d'hommes étaient accou
rus, mais au lieu d'éteindre le feu
les misérables s'étaient mis à piller
Accourir,* 2, au secours (à l'assist
ance, à l'aide) de quelqu'un.
Sauver, 1, du danger.
Sauver la vie à quelqu'un.
Le pillage.
The pillage. Piller, 1.
Have they succeeded in extinguish-
ing the fire?
They have succeeded in it.
The watch indicates the hours.
To indicat, to mark.
To quarrel.
To quarrel with one.
To dispute (to contend) about some-
thing.
What are those officers disputing
about?
*
+ Se mettre à quelque chose.
Est-on parvenu à éteindre le feu?
On y est parvenu.
La montre marque les heures.
Marquer, 1; indiquer, 1.
Se quereller, 1.
† Quereller quelqu'un.
Disputer sur quelque chose.
Sur quoi ces officiers disputent-ils ?
They are disputing about who shall † Ils disputent à qui ira le premier à
go first to the attack.
To be ignorant of something, or
Not to know something.
The eve, the day before.
The day before that day was Satur-
day.
The day before Sunday is Saturday.
What day comes before Sunday?
Is it time for me to take? It is time
that you should take, we should take.
Although I can, thou canst, he can.
l'attaque.
} Ignorer, 1, quelque chose, (no prep.)
La veille, (de avant le nom qui suit.)
† La veille de ce jour-là etait un
samedi.
† La veille de dimanche est samedi.
Quelle est la veille de dimanche ?
Est-il temps que je prenne? Il est
temps que vous preniez-que nous
prenions.
Quoique je puisse,
puisse.
tu puisses, il
We can or may, you can or may, they Nous puissions, vous puissiez, ils
may.
puissent.
For the formation of the subjunctive present, see (§ 151.)
To cure, heal. To cure one's self. | Guérir, 2. Seguérir. Guérissez-vous.
SOIXANTE-QUATRIÈME THÊME. 3me Sec.
Est-il vrai que votre oncle soit arrivé? Quoiqu'on m'ait dit qu'il
est arrivé, je ne le crois pas, je vous assure.-Le ministre vous a-t-il
assuré de son assistance? Oui, je vous assure que c'est vrai.—N'est-il
pas temps que nous prenions le thé? Si fait, il est temps que nous
le prenions.—Irez-vous à l'assemblée? Quoique je puisse y aller,
je n'irai pas, parce que m'a mère ne désire pas que j'y aille.-Com-
ment se trouve Emma, aujourd'hui ? Quoiqu'elle soit mieux, elle
n'est pas encore bien. Sort-elle ? Qui, quoiqu'elle ne soit pas
SIXTY-FIFTH LESSON. (1.)
341
guérie, elle sort.-Se querellent-ils toujours? Ils se querel.ent,
mais il est temps qu'ils soient amis.-Sur quoi disputez-vous? Nous
disputons sur le rapport du comité de santé. Disputerez-vous tou-
jours? Pourquoi ne disputerions-nous pas ?-Ne vous a-t-elle pas
sauvé d'un grand danger?-L'attaque a-t-elle eu lieu ?-A-t-elle
réussi ?—Où étiez-vous la veille de ce jour-là?-Ignoriez-vous le
mariage de M. François ?-Quelle est la veille de lundi ?-Quelle
est la veille du douze? N'entendez-vous pas crier au feu! (fire!)
au feu !-A-t-on sauvé la maison ?-A-t-on pu sauver l'écurie?-Si
l'on avait eu plus d'eau, la maison aurait-elle brûlé?
“What is the difference (la différence) between a watch and me?"
inquired (demanda) a lady of a young officer.-" My lady," replied.
he, “a watch marks the hours, and, near (auprès de) you, one for-
gets them."-How many obligations I am under to you, my dear
friend! You have saved my life! without you I should have been
lost. Have those miserable men hurt you? They have beaten and
robbed me, and when you ran to my assistance they were about to
(ils allaient) strip (déshabiller) and kill me.-I am happy to have
delivered you from the (des) hands of those robbers.-How good
you are! I shall always be indebted to you for it!—It is not worth
mentioning, (speaking about it.)
Why are those officers quarreling? They are quarreling because
they do not know what to do.-Have they succeeded in extinguish-
ing the fire? They have at last succeeded in it; but it is said (on
dit) that several houses have been burnt.-Have they not been able
to save anything? They have not been able to save anything; for,
instead of extinguishing the fire, the miserable wretches (les misé-
rables) who had come up, set to plundering.—What has happened?
A great misfortune has happened.-Why did my friends set out
without me? They waited for you till twelve o'clock, and seeing
that you did not come, they set out.-What is the day before Mon-
day called? The day before Monday is Sunday.-Why did you not
run to the assistance of your neighbor whose house has been burnt?
I was quite (entièrement) ignorant of his house being on fire, (que le
feu fût â sa maison;) for, had I known it, I would have run to his
assistance.
SIXTY-FIFTH LESSON, 65th.-Soixante-cinquième Leçon, 65me.
VOCABULAIRE, 1re Sec.
To propose.
I propose going on that journey.
Se proposer, 1, (de before infin.)
Je me propose de faire ce voyage
29 *
342
SIXTY-FIFTH LESSON. (1.)
He proposes joining a hunting party. | Il se propose d'aller à une partie de
To play a game at chess.
A game at billiards.
A
game at cards.
chasse.
+ Faire une partie d'échecs.
Une partie de billard.
Une partie de cartes.
A party, a soirée; a musical party. Une partie, ou soirée; une soirée
To succeed.
Do you succeed in doing that?
I do succeed in it.
To endeavor.
I endeavor to do it.
I endeavor to succeed in it.
Endeavor to do better.
Since, seeing, considering that.
Since you are happy, why do you
complain ?
To be thoroughly acquainted with a
thing.
To make one's self thoroughly ac-
quainted with a thing.
musicale.
Réussir, 2, (à before infin.)
Réussissez-vous à faire cela?
J'y réussis.
Tâcher, 1, (de before infin.)
Je tâche de le faire.
Je tâche d'y réussir.
Tâchez de faire mieux.
Puisque.
Puisque vous êtes heureux, pourquoi
vous plaignez-vous ?
Être au fait de quelque chose.
Se mettre au fait de quelque chose.
That man understands that business Cet homme est au fait de cette af-
perfectly.
I understand that well.
Since or from.
faire.
Je suis au fait de cela.
From that time. Depuis.
Depuis ce moment-là.
Depuis ma jeunesse.
From my childhood.
From morning until evening.
From the beginning to the end.
From here to there.
To blow, tô blow out. Strongly, hard.
East, the east, to the east, east wind.
The north, to the north, the north
wind.
The west, to the west, the west wind
The south, to the south, the south
wind.
The north-west.
To encourage.
The south-east.
To unroot, pull.
|
Depuis le matin jusqu'au soir.
Depuis le commencement jusqu'à la
fin.
Depuis ici jusque là.
Souffler, 1.
Fort.
Est, l'est, à l'est, le vent d'est.
Le nord, au nord, le vent de nord.
L'ouest, à l'ouest, le vent d'ouest.
Le sud, au sud, le vent de sud.
Le nord-ouest.
Le sud-est.
Encourager, 1. (§ 144—2.) Déra
ciner, 1.
SOIXANTE-CINQUIÈME THEME. 1re Sec.
Vous proposez-vous de faire un petit voyage cet été ? Je me pro-
pose de faire un petit tour. N'est-il pas temps que vous partiez ?
(§151.) Je me propose de le faire dans quelques jours. Si vous
n'êtes pas occupé, allons faire une partie de billard. Il y a si long.
temps que je n'ai joué au billard, que vous n'auriez aucun plaisir à
faire une partie avec moi; mais si vous aimez les échecs, j'en ferai
une partie avec vous. J'aime les échecs le soir quand on est tran
SIXTY-FIFTH LESSON. (1.)
343
quille.-Mais ne faut-il pas que nous allions nous préparer pour la
soirée de Madame Rush? Quoiqu'elle m'ait fait l'honneur de m'in-
viter, (to invite me,) je ne pourrai pas y aller. Tâchez d'y venir.
Puisque vous le désirez, je tâcherai d'y aller. Y jouera-t-on aux
cartes? Il y a toujours une partie de cartes.-Ce jeune Irlandais est-
il au fait?-Votre servante est-elle au fait de son devoir ?-Ce com-
mis est au fait, n'est-ce pas ?-Vous dites que votre cousine est
toujours de bonne humeur, pourquoi donc se plaint-elle du matin
jusqu'au soir ?--Quant à la danse, il est au fait, n'est-ce pas ?-Est-
ce qu'il s'est bien conduit depuis sa jeunesse? (642, N. 2.)—Quel
bruit est cela? N'est-ce pas le vent qui souffle? Oh! Comme il
souffle fort! Est-ce que c'est un vent d'ouest ou de nord?
The wind has been blowing (§145) from the east these (depuis Į
three or four days, are you not astonished that we have no rain? (subj.
§151.) Yes, I am; for when the wind blows from the east, we
generally have rain.-Is your west wind warm or cold? The west
wind is not very cold, but the north and the north-west winds are
usually strong and very cold.-Are they not cool in summer? Yes,
they are. I presume your south wind is warm, is it not? It is our
warmest wind. And the south-west? That is pleasant.-Does the
wind blow hard here? It sometimes blows hard enough to unroot
trees, (déraciner des arbres.)-If Miss Clara is at Mrs. M.'s party,
will you present me to her? I will, with pleasure.-Have you been
long acquainted with her? I have known her these 2 years.-Does
she understand the figures of quadrilles? (Est-elle au fait des figures
des quadrilles ?) She knows them very well, or understands them
perfectly, do you? (64², N. 2.)
Who won the game of chess? I endeavored to do it, but I could
not (622, N. 1.)-Your cousins frequently play chess, do they not?
No, they more frequently play billiards or cards. I wish I could
translate my exercises without mistakes; but, although I try to do
it, I cannot succeed. Try again. It is the only means to succeed.
Since you encourage me, I will continue.—If she was not unhappy,
would she complain? There are people who always complain.-
Why are you without a light? The wind blew it out when you
came in.-What does your French master make you do? He
makes me read a lesson; afterwards he makes me translate English
exercises into French on the lesson which he made me read; and
from the beginning to the end of the lesson he speaks French to
me, and I have to answer him (il me faut lui répondre) in the very
language (dans la langue même) which he is teaching me.-Have
you already learned much in that manner? You see that I have
already learned something.
344
SIXTY-FIFTH LESSON. (2.)
VOCABULAIRE. 2de Sec.
To reduce, abate, reduced. Reduce. | Réduire,* 4,
réduit.
Réduisez
Réduis-tu ? Je réduis, elle réduit
Traduire,* 4. Traduit. Traduisez.
Dost thou reduce? I reduce, she
reduces.
Tc translate, translated. Translate.
Tc introduce,
#
to present.
To reduce the price.
Reduce the price a crown.
To translate into French.
Shall I translate French into English?
Translate from one language into
another.
I introduce him to you.
I introduce you to him, her.
He will present us to them.
He himself has told it me.
He has told it me, to myself, (not to
another person.)
One does not like to flatter one's self.
Introduire,* 4, (as réduire.) Pré.
senter, 1.
Réduire le prix.
Réduisez le prix d'un écu.
Traduire en Français.
Traduirai-je du Français en Anglais ?
Traduisez d'une langue dans une
autre.
Je l'introduis chez vous.
† Je vous le présente.
+ Je vous présente à lui, à elle.
+ Il nous présentera à eux, à elles.
Il me l'a dit lui-même. (414.)
Il me l'a dit à moi-même.
On n'aime pas à se flatter soi-même.
Obs. 152. Sometimes the word même is an adverb, and answers to the
English word even.
He has not even money enough to
buy some bread.
We must love everybody, even our
enemies.
Again, (anew.)
He speaks again.
To fall, to lower.
The price of the merchandise falls.
To deduct
Il n'a pas même assez d'argent pour
acheter du pain.
Il faut aimer tout le monde, même
nos ennemis.
De nouveau.
Il parle de nouveau.
Baisser, 1, (tomber, 1, 51¹.)
La marchandise baisse de prix.
Rabattre, 4, (see battre, 4, 36'.`
Hausser.
To raise, lift up, put up, rise, increase. Lever, 1. (§ 144-4.)
Is flour higher or lower?
She has lowered the window; raise
it up.
The provisions. Produce has risen.
To overcharge, to ask too much.
Not having overcharged you, I can-
not deduct anything.
An ell.
A metre, (measure.)
A yard.
To produce, 'to yield, to profit.)
How much does that employment
yield you a year?
An employment.
To permit,
permitted.
La farine a-t-elle haussé ou baissé ?
Elle a baissé la fenêtre, levez-la.
Les denrées. Les denrées ont haussé.
Surfaire,* (like faire.*)
Ne vous ayant pas surfait, je ne sau,
rais rien rabattre.
Une aune.
Un mètre.
Rapporter, 1.
Une yard ou verge.
Combien cet emploi (cette charge)
vous rapporte-t-il (elle) par an? ·
Un emploi,. une charge.
Permit. Permettre,*4 (de), permis. Permettez
(mettre.)
SIXTY-FIFTH LESSON. (3.)
345
SOIXANTE-CINQUIÈME THÊME. 2de Sec.
A-t-il réduit le prix de son velours de soie? Non, il dit qu'il ne
rabattra rien. Ce marchand surfait trop. Il assure qu'il ne surfait
pas du tout, mais que comme ses marchandises sont de la meilleure
qualité, il est obligé de vendre plus cher.-Voulez-vous m'introduire
à un autre? Je vous introduirai avec plaisir.-Qui a présenté ce
jeune avocat au président? Le ministre le lui a présenté. Le roi
a-t-il été présenté au ministre? Non, mais le ministre l'a été au
roi.-Puisque vous connaissez M. Martin, voulez-vous me le pré-
senter? Je vous le présenterai. Il vient par ici. Dr. Prudieu, per-
mettez moi (permit me) de vous présenter M. Martin, de Louisville.
Dr., je suis charmé d'avoir le plaisir de votre connaissance. C'est
avec beaucoup de plaisir, M., que je fais la vôtre.-Vous 'a-t-il dit
lui-même? Non, mais sa femme elle-même me l'a dit.-Votre père
vous a-t-il permis (from permettre, to permit) d'acheter 3 aunes de
ce drap? Il me l'a permis.-Leur permet-il de se servir de son
cheval?-Avez-vous levé la fenêtre ?—Le coton hausse-t-il ?
What is the price of this cloth? I sell it at three crowns and a
half the ell.-I think (trouver) it very dear. Has the price of cloth
not fallen? It has not fallen; the price of all goods (la marchandise)
has fallen, except that of cloth, (excepté celui du drap.)—I will give
you three crowns for it, (en.)—I cannot let you have (donner) it for
(a) that price, for it costs me (coûter, 1) more.-Will you have the
goodness to show me some pieces (la pièce) of English cloth? With
much pleasure.-Does this silk suit you? It does not suit me.—
Why does it not suit you? Because it is too dear; if you will lower
the price, (en rabattre quelque chose,) I shall buy twenty yards of it.
-Not having asked too much, I cannot take off anything.—You
learn French; does your master let you translate? He lets me
read, write, and translate.
Had cotton risen in England, by the last news? Yes, it had
risen of a penny.-Then it will rise here.-Probably, (proba-
blement.)—Is it true that produce and provisions are lower? I be-
lieve they are the same, (au même prix;) that they have neither
risen nor sunk, (lowered.)—What is the price of a yard of your
silk velvet? It is 4 dollars a yard. It is high. How beautiful it
is! See! Is flour high? Five dollars a barrel.-Will it not be
lower in the fall? It may lower, fall.-Will you permit me to use
your fan? If he would reduce the price of his house, would you
take it for your family?-Would he purchase 2 barrels of flour, if it
was 4 dollars a barrel? How do you do, to-day? I am very
unwell, (très-mal.).—How do you like that soup? I think (trouver)
it is very bad; but since I have lost my appetite, (l'appétit,) I do
346
SIXTY-SIXTH LESSON. (1.)
not like anything, (je ne trouve rien de bon.)-How much does
that employment yield to your father? It yields him more than
four thousand (mille has no s in the plural) crowns.
SIXTY-SIXTH LESSON, 66th.-Soixante-sixième Leçon, 66me.
VOCABULAIRE. 1re Sec.
A kind, sort, (a species.)
What kind of fruit is that?
A stone (of a fruit).
A plum stone.
Break these stones.
A stone of a peach, an apricot.
Stone-fruit.
Une espèce.
Quelle espèce de fruit est cela, (or
est-ce là ?)
Un noyau. Un noyau de prune.
Un noyau de pêche, d'abricot.
Fruits à noyau. Cassez ces noyaux.
(92.)
One must break the stone before one Il faut casser le noyau pour en avoir
comes at the kernel.
A kernel.
An almond.
Kernel-fruit.
A sweet almond.
A bitter almond.
It is a kernel-fruit.
To gather,
gathered. Gather.
I gather, thou gatherest, he gathers.
To gather fruit.
l'amande: (a proverb.)
Une amande, un pepin.
amère.
Une amande. Fruits à pepin.
Une amande douce,
C'est un fruit à pepin.
Cueillir,* 2, cueilli.
Je cueille, tu cueilles,
Cueillir du fruit.
To serve up the soup, the breakfast. Servir la soupe,
To bring in the dessert.
The fruit. An apricot.
A plum. An anecdote.
To cease, to leave off.
I leave off reading.
A peach.
Roast meat.
She does not leave off speaking.
To avoid.
To escape.
To escape a misfortune.
He ran away to avoid death.
Servir le dessert.
Cueillez.
il cueille.
le déjeuner.
Le fruit. Un abricot. Une pêche.
Une prune. Une anecdote. Du rôti.
Cesser, 1, de.
Je cesse de lire.
Elle ne cesse de parler. (62¹.)
Éviter, 1, (de before infin.)
Échapper, 1.
+ Échapper à un malheur.
Il a pris la fuite pour échapper à la
mort.
To flee, to take to flight, one's heels, &c. Prendre la fuite.
To do without a thing.
Can you do without bread?
I can do without it.
There are many things which we
must do without.
Se passer de quelque chose.
Pouvez-vous vous passer de pain?
Je puis (je peux) m'en passer.
Il y a bien des choses dont il faut se
passer.
To depend, belong to, be connected Dépendre, 4, de.
with.
This employment and the duties Cet emploi et les devoirs qui en dé,
connected with it.
That lesson and the exercises be-
longing to it.
pendent.
Cette leçon et les thêmes qui en dé.
pendent.
SIXTY-SIXTH LESSON. (1.)
347
SOIXANTE-SIXIÈME THÊME. 1re Sc.
Aimez-vous les amandes? Oui, je les aime douces.-L'épicier
du coin vend-il de bonnes pêches sèches? Non, les pêches sèches
qu'il vend sont sures, trop sures. C'est dommage.-N'est-il pas
bientôt temps que nous ayons des abricots ? Des abricots? Ce n'est
pas encore la saison (season.) Il faut que les cerises et les fraises
viennent (subj. § 151) avant. Nous n'avons pas encore eu ces fruits-là
Dans la saison des fruits j'aime beaucoup les desserts.-Jean, si vous
allez dans le jardin, ne cueillez pas les fruits. Non, je n'en cueillerai
pas; mais ne faut-il pas que je cueille un bouquet? Si fait, cueillez
en un pour votre cousine Marie.-Quelle espèce de fruit est cela?
Ce n'est pas un fruit. Qu'est-ce donc ? C'est une tomate (a tomato.)
Elle ressemble à un fruit, n'est-ce pas ? Dans la saison des tomates,
je ne peux pas m'en passer, et vous? (623, N. 1.)-Mon fils ne peut
pas se passer de pain, les vôtres s'en passent-ils ? Pourquoi évitez-
vous M. Charles ?-Mlle. Amanda a été bien heureuse d'échapper
à la mort.—Elle a échappé à un accident affreux, ne le saviez-vous
pas?
You must speak, (subj.) you must not be afraid.-I am too bashful
(timide) to speak. I should like to (je voudrais bien) know why I
am so bashful.-You would not be so bashful if you studied better.
Do you think so? To be sure, I do.-Have they already brought in
the dessert? They have brought it in.-Do you like fruit? I like
truit, but I have no more appetite.-Will you eat a little cheese? I
will eat a little.-Shall I help you to English or Dutch cheese? I
will eat a little Dutch cheese.-What kind of fruit is that? It is
one-fruit.—What is it called? It is called thus.-Will you wash
your hands? I should like to (je voudrais bien) wash them, but I
have no towel to (pour) wipe them with.-I will let you have ( faire
donner) a towel, some soap, and some water. I shall be much
obliged (fort obligé) to you.
May I ask you for (oserais-je vous demander) a little water? Here
is some, (en voici.) Can you do without soap? As for soap, I can
do without it, but I must have a towel to wipe my hands with.-Do
you often do without soap? There are many things which we must
do without. Why has that man run away? Because he had no
other means of escaping the punishment (la punition) which he had
deserved, (mériter.)—Why did your brothers not get (se procurer) a
better horse? If they had got rid of their old horse, they would
have got a better.-Has your father arrived already? Not yet, but
we hope that he will arrive this very day, (aujourd'hui même.)-Has
your friend set out in time, (à temps?) I do not know, but I hope
he has (qu'il sera, 58', Obs. 141) set out in time.
348
SIXTY-SIXTH LESSON. (2.)
To execute a commission.
VOCABULAIRE. 2de Sec.
}
To acquit one's self of a commis-S'acquitter, 1, d'une commission.
sion, to do an errand.
I have executed your commission.
Have you executed my commission?
I have executed it.
To do one's duty.
{
Je me suis acquitté de votre com
mission.
Vous êtes-vous acquitté de ma com.
mission ?
Avez-vous fait ma commission?
Je m'en suis acquitté.
Faire son devoir.
To discharge, to do, or to fulfil one's Remplir son devoir..
duty.
That man always does his duty.
That man always fulfils his duty.
To rely, to depend upon something.
He depends upon it.
1 rely upon you.
You may rely upon him.
That is to say, (i. e.) Et cætera, (etc.)
My pen (quill) is better than yours.
They will warm the soup.
Cet homme fait toujo.rs son devoir.
Cet homme s'acquitte toujours de
son devoir.
Compter, 1, sur quelque chose.
Il y compte.
Je compte sur vous.
Je me fie à vous.
Vous pouvez vous fier à lui.
Vous pouvez vous y fier.
Vous pouvez compter sur lui.
| C'est-à-dire. Savoir. Et cætéra, (etc.)
Ma plume est meilleure que la vôtre.
On fera chauffer la soupe.
Dinner (or supper) is on the table, (is On a servi.
served up.)
Do you choose any soup?
T
Shall help you to some soup?
I will trouble you for a little.
To serve up, to attend.
Not that I know of, you know of.
It is impossible that I should receive
it in time, (for me to receive it.)
I should like to know. I wonder why
he says it.
I wonder whether, (should like to
know if...)
|
† Vous servirai-je de la soupe?
† Je vous en demanderai un peu.
Servir.*
Pas que je sache, vous sachiez, (sub.
$151.)
1l est impossible que je le reçoive à
temps.
Je voudrais bien savoir. Je voudrais
bien savoir pourquoi il le dit.
Je voudrais bien savoir si...
SOIXANTE-SIXIÈME THÊME. 2de Sec.
Que faut-il que nous fassions aujourd'hui? Je vous donne à
étudier le vocabulaire de la soixante-sixième leçon, seconde section;
et à préparer les thêmes Français et Anglais qui en dépendent (belong
to it; connected with it.) Tâchez de ne point faire de fautes.
J'essaie toujours, mais je n'y réussis pas. Pierre (Peter) s'est-il ac-
quitté de ma commission? Pas que je suche.-Votre cousine parle-
SIXTY-SIXTH LESSON. (3.)
349
t-elle plus que votre sœur? Elle le fait; non parce qu'elle parle
mieux, mais parce qu'elle n'est pas si timide. J'ai une commission
importante à faire, pour laquelle je compte sur vous.-Vous pouvez
compter sur moi. Je m'en acquitterai de mon mieux. Je voudrais
bien savoir si l'on peut compter sur notre domestique !—Mlle. Emilie
n'est pas encore revenue, faut-il qu'on tienne (§ 151) la soupe chaude
pour elle?-Vous servirai-je un peu de soupe?-Pourquoi n'en
prenez-vous pas, si vous ne pouvez pas vous en passer ?-Que vous
servirai-je ?-Mon neveu va à Norristown, voulez-vous qu'il y fasse
quelque commission?
Have you executed my commission? I have executed it.-Has
your brother executed the commission which I gave him? He has
executed it.-Would you (voudriez-vous) execute a commission for
me? I am under so many obligations to you that I will always
execute your commissions, when it shall please you to give me
any.-Will you ask the merchant whether (si) he can let me have
(me donner) the horse at the price (au prix) which I have offered
him? I am sure that he would be satisfied if you would add a few
crowns more. If I were sure of that I would add a few crowns
more.-Good morning, my children! have you done your task?
You well know that we always do it; or else (ou bien) we must be
sick, or we must have a good excuse, (une excuse.)
I wonder whether you could tell me an anecdote? Will you try
to relate one to us? (nous en raconter une?)—In English or.in French?
Not in English; but in French. It is impossible for me to relate it
without making many mistakes. We think so; therefore we will
excuse them, (excuser, 1.)—One of the valets de chambre (un des
valets de chambre) of Louis XIV. (de Louis XIV.) requested that prince,
as he was going to bed, (comme il se mettait au lit,) to recommend
(de faire recommander) to the first president (à Monsieur le premier
président) a lawsuit (un procès) which he had against (contre) his
father-in-law, and said, in urging him, (en le pressant:) "Alas,
(Hélas,) Sire, (Sire,) you have but to say one word.”
"Well,"
(Eh!) said Louis XIV., "it is not that which embarrasses me, (ce
n'est pas de quoi je suis en peine ;) but tell me, (dis-moi,) if thou wert
in thy father-in-law's place, (à la place de…….. ) and thy father-in-law
in thine, wouldst thou be glad (bien aise) if I said that word?
VOCABULAIRE.
To suffice, be sufficient, answer.
Is that bread sufficient for you?
It is sufficient for me.
I suffice, thou dost suffice.
3me Sec.
Suffire,* 4, suffisant, suffit.
Ce pain vous suffit-il?
Il me suffit.
Je suffis, tu suffis.
30
350
→ESSON. (3.)
SIXTY-SIXTH
Will that money be sufficient for that, Cet argent suffira t-il à cet homme ?
(usually in the 3d pers. sing. &
plur.)
man ?
It will be sufficient for him.
Little wealth suffices for the wise.
Has that sum been sufficient for that
man ?
Was that man contented with that
sum ? With those three dollars ?
He was (satisfied with it, with them.)
He has been contented with it.
To be contented with something.
It would be sufficient for him if you
would only add a few crowns.
He would be contented if you would
only add a few crowns.
To add.
Add nothing to it.
To embark, to go on board.
A sail.
To set sail.
To set sail for.
To sail for America.
'To sail.
Under full sail.
To sail under full sail.
Il lui suffira.
Peu de bien suffit au sage.
Cette somme a-t-elle suffi à cet
homme ?
Cet homme s'est-il contenté de cette
somme? De ces 3 gourdes? (fém.)
Elle lui a suffi. Elles lui ont suffi.
Il s'en est contenté.
Se contenter de quelque chose.
Elle lui suffirait, si vous vouliez seule-
ment y ajouter quelques écus.
Il se contenterait, si vous vouliez
seulement y ajouter quelques écus.
Ajouter, 1. N'y ajoutez rien.
S'embarquer, 1.
Une voile.¹
† Mettre à la voile.
+ Faire voile pour.
Faire voile pour l'Amérique, (aller
en Amérique.)
Marcher.
A pleines voiles, (à toutes voiles.)
Marcher à pleines voiles, (cingler.)
He embarked on the sixteenth of last Il s'est embarqué le seize du mois
month.
He sailed on the third instant.
The instant, the present month.
The fourth or fifth instant.
The letter is dated the 6th instant.
To look at. Look at it, (him or her.)
dernier.
Il a mis à la voile le trois courant.
Le courant.
Le quatre ou le cinq du courant.
La lettre est du six du courant.
Regarder, 1. Regardez-le, (la.)
SOIXANTE-SIXIÈME THÊME. 3me Sec.
Je voudrais bien savoir quand le bâtiment mettra à la voile? Le
capitaine ne le dit-il pas dans sa lettre du quinze du courant? Je ne
in'en souviens pas. Regardez-la. Il dit seulement: Mon bâtiment
fera voile incessamment, ce qui veut dire: sans délai, bientôt, dans
quelques jours.-Quelle est la date aujourd'hui ? C'est le 20 du
courant.-Faut-il que vous sachiez le jour que le bâtiment fera voile ?
Il est important que je le sache. (§ 151.)-Ce que vous avez sur votre
liste de provisions suffira-t-il? La regarderai-je? Ne l'avez-vous
pas encore regardée? Non. Si je l'avais regardée, je saurais si
ce que vous avez suffirait. Eh bien! regardez-la. Du fromage,
¹ Voile, meaning a veil, a cover, is masculine. Ex. She has bought a veil
Elle s'est acheté un voile.
SIXTY-SEVENTH LESSON. (1.)
351
du vin, de l'eau de vie, du biscuit, du beurre, des amandes, des
pruneaux, (prunes,) des raisins secs, (raisins,) du bœuf. Si vous
n'avez pas de langues salées, (salt tongues,) il faut en ajouter. Com
bien en ajouterai-je ? Il faut que vous en ajoutiez au moins 5 ou 6.
Vous passerez-vous d'œufs? (eggs?) Non, ni de poulets; car j'aime
beaucoup les œufs et les poulets. Ajoutez-les à la liste.
What is that vessel coming under full sail? It is the packet
(paquebot) Susquehanna, from Liverpool. How fast it sails! It sailed
from Liverpool the 3d instant. It will soon come (arriver) to the wharf.
Let me finish looking at your list, and then we will go and see who is
in the packet. The last articles are chickens and eggs.-Will twelve
pair of chickens be sufficient? I would think so. And how many
eggs will you want? (vous faudra-t-il ?) About twelve dozen, (dou-
zaines,) or one hundred and fifty, will answer, (suffiront.)-Will you
not want two hundred? No, I guess twelve dozen will be enough.
You will do well to put them up in salt. I wish I had everything
arranged. I also.-On the list is there any tea, sugar, coffee, choco-
late, pepper, and vinegar? Yes, I see all those articles.-Have you
sent anything on board? (à bord?) I have already sent several chests.
full on board. We must, in going (en allant) to the Liverpool
packet, see if they have been received, and where they have been
put.
Have they served up the soup? They have served it up some
minutes ago. Then (alors) it must be cold; I like soup only when
it is hot. They will warm it for you. You will oblige me, (obliger.)
-Shall I help you to some of this roast meat? I will trouble you for
a little.—Will you eat some of this mutton? I thank you, I like fowl
better but a very small piece will suffice me.-May I offer you (vous
offrira-je) some wine? I will trouble you for a little.-Is this bread
sufficient for you? It would be sufficient for me if I was not very
hungry. When did your brother embark for America? He sailed
on the 30th of last month.-Do you promise me to speak to your
brother? I promise you, you may depend upon it. I rely upon
you.—Will you work harder (mieux) for next lesson than you have
done for this? (53', and §200.) I will work harder.-May I rely
upon it? You may.
SIXTY-SEVENTH LESSON, 67th.-Soixante-septième Leçon, 67me
VOCABULAIRE.
To be a judge of something.
Are you a judge of cloth?
1re Sec.
+ Se connaître en quelque chose.
+ Vous connaissez-vous en drap?
IN
$52
SIXTY-SEVENTH LESSON. (1.)
I am a judge of it.
I am not a judge of it.
I am a good judge of it.
I am not a good judge of it.
To draw.
To chalk, to trace, (to counterdraw.)
To draw a landscape.
To draw after life.
Je m'y connais.
Je ne m'y connais pas.
Je m'y connais très-bien.
Je ne m'y connais pas beaucoup.
Dessiner, 1.
Calquer, 1.
Dessiner un paysage.
Dessiner d'après nature.
'The drawing.
The drawer.
Le dessin.
Nature.
Natural.
La nature.
To manage, or to go about a thing.
How do you manage to make a fire
without tongs?
I go about it so.
You go about it the wrong way.
I go about it the right way.
How does your brother manage to do
that?
S'y prendre.
Le dessinateur.
Naturel, naturelle.
Comment vous y prenez-vous pour
faire du feu sans pincettes ?¹
Je m'y prends comme cela.
Vous vous y prenez mal.
Je m'y prends bien.
Comment votre frère s'y rend-il
pour faire cela ?
Skilfully, handily, dexterously, cle- Adroitement.
verly.
Awkwardly, unhandily, badly.
To forbid.
I forbid you to do that.
To lower.
To cast down one's eyes.
The curtain (of a theatre).
The curtain rises, falls.
The stocks have fallen-risen.
The day falls.
Night comes on.
Maladroitement.
Défendre, 4, (de av. l'inf.)
Je vous défends de faire cela.
Baisser, 1.
† Baisser les yeux.
La toile (d'un théâtre), le rideau.
† La toile (le rideau) se lève, se baisse.
Le change a baissé-haussé.
Le jour baisse.
It grows dark.
Il se fait nuit.
Il se fait tard.
•
It grows late, it is rather late.
To storyp.
Se baisser.
SOIXANTE-SEPTIÈME THÊME. 1re Sec.
Je voudrais bien savoir (I wonder) qui se connaît bien en che-
vaux? M. Lenoi: s'y connaît. Êtes-vous sûr qu'il s'y connaisse
bien? (§ 151.) Oui, j'en suis sûr; car je m'y connais moi-même,
nais il s'y connaît mieux que moi.-Vous dessinez, je sais. Des-
sinez-vous d'après nature, ou copiez-vous? Je copie, généralement.
-Voulez-vous que je dessine quelque chose pour vous? Je vou-
drais avoir une copie (a copy) de ce paysage. Jean peut vous en
dessiner une copie. Croyez-vous qu'il veuille le faire ? (§ 151.) En
¹All nouns ending in tte are feminine, except the two following: un amu-
lette, an amulet; un squelette, a skeleton; and some compounds, as: un
porte-mouchettes, a snuffer-stand; un tire-botte, a boot-jack; un casse-noisette,
put-crackers.
SIXTY-SEVENTH LESSON. (2.)
353
cas qu'il ne veuille pas, (In case he would not,) ne pouvez-vous pas
le calquer? Comment voulez-vous le calquer, lorsqu'il est sous
verre ? C'est vrai. Je n'y pensais pas. Ne peut-on pas l'ôter du
cadre? (frame.) Sans doute, on le peut. Comment vous y pren-
driez-vous pour l'ôter? Il faut d'abord ôter les clous qui tiennent
le dos du cadre. Mais pour cela il faut que nous ayons des pin-
cettes. J'ai une paire de pincettes. La voici. Voilà un clou d'ôté,
(3', Obs. 7.)¹ En voilà deux d'ôtés, en voilà trois. Ah! Il n'y en
a que trois. Alors ils sont tous ôtés. Mais attendez donc; ne nous
est-il pas défendu d'ôter les gravures (engravings) des cadres pour
calquer?
Are you a judge of cloth? I am a judge of it.-Will you buy
some yards for me? (m'en?) If you will give me the money, I
will buy you some, (vous en.)—You will oblige (obliger) me.-Is that
clerk a judge of cloth? He is not.-How do you manage to do
that? I manage it so.-Will you show me how you manage it? I
will, (je le veux bien.)-What must I do for my lesson of to-mor-
row? You will copy your exercises properly, learn the next voca-
bulary, (vocabulaire suivant,) and write the exercises belonging to
it. How do you manage to get goods (des marchandises) without
money? I buy on credit.-How does your sister manage to learn
French without (52¹) a dictionary? She manages it thus. She
manages it very dexterously.
But how does your brother manage it? (Mais M. votre frère com-
ment s'y prend-il?) He manages it very awkwardly; he reads and
looks for the words in the dictionary.-He may (peut) learn in this
manner twenty years without knowing how to make a single sen-
tence, (une seule phrase.)-Why does your sister cast down her eyes?
Is it because she is bashful? She casts them down because she is
ashamed of not having done her task.-Shall we breakfast in the
garden, to-day? The weather is so fine, that we should (qu'il faut)
take advantage of it, (en profiter.)-How do you like that coffee?
I like it very much, (excellent.)-I wonder why you stoop? I stoop
to pick up the handkerchief which I have dropped, and in which I
have put some money.
To smell, to feel.
VOCABULAIRE. 2de Sec.
He smells of garlic; she, of musk.
To feel some one's pulse.
Sentir.* (542.)
Il sent l'ail; elle, le musc.
+ Tâter le pouls à quelqu'un.
1 After a noun, the past participle (used as an adjective, that is, without
an auxiliary) must be preceded by de or d'. (3¹, Obs. 7.-30¹, Obs. 71.)
80*
354
SIXTY-SEVENTH LESSON. (2.)
To consent to a thing.
I consent to it.
To hide, to conceal. To hide one's self.
The wit, the mind. Indeed. In fact.
'The truth. The effect.
A true man.
·
Consentirà quelque chose. (542.)
J'y consens.
Cacher, 1. Se cacher. Cachez-vous.
L'esprit. En vérité. En effet.
L'effet.
True.
La vérité.
Un homme vrai.
Vrai.
This is the right place for that pic- Voilà la vraie place de ce tableau.
ture.
To think much of one, (to esteem one.) | Faire cas de quelqu'un. Estimer, 1,
To esteem some one.
do not think much of that man.
quelqu'un.
Je ne fais pas grand cas de cet
homme.
I think much of him, (I esteem him Je fais grand cas de lui, (je l'estime
much.)
the flower, the bloom, the blossom.
In a level with, even with.
That man has his eyes on a level
with his head, (prominent eyes.)
To blossom, (to flourish.)
To grow,
growing,
grown.
I grow, thou growest, he or she
grows, one grows, people grow.
To grow rapidly, (fast.)
To grow tall or big,
grown tall.
That child grows so fast that we
may even see it.
That child has grown very fast in a
short time.
That rain has made the corn grow.
Corn.
Indian corn.
What a fine carnation! What a
good odor!
Has mignonelte a fine scent, odor, or
smell? does it smell good, nice?
That heliotrope has a delightful scent.
To be witty, art, talented.
beaucoup.)
La fleur.
À fleur de.
Cet homme a les yeux à fleur de
tête.
Fleurir, 2.1
Croître,* 4,
croissant, crû.
Je crois, tu crois, il ou elle croît, on
croît.
Croître rapidement.
Grandir, 2,
grandi.
+ Cet enfant grandit à vue d'œil.
Cet enfant a bien grandi en peu de
temps.
Cette pluie a fait grandir les blés.
Du blé.
Du maïs.
Quel bel aillet !
odeur !
Quelle bonne
Le réséda sent-il bon ? ou a-t-il une
bonne odeur?
Cet héliotrope a une odeur délicieuse,
† Avoir de l'esprit.
SOIXANTE-SEPTIÈME THÊME. 2de Sec.
Quelle belle (what a fine) fleur vous avez-là! Sent-elle bon ?
Sentez-la et regardez-la. Elle est belle; mais elle ne sent pas bon.
Quelle espèce de fleur est-ce? Ne la connaissez-vous pas ? C'est
1 Fleurir, to blossom, is regular; but when it means to flourish, its pre-
sent participle is florissant, and its imperfect indicative florissait, florissaient.
Ex. Un empire florissant, a tourishing empire; une armée florissante, a
flourishing army; cet auteurivait sous son règne, that author flourished
under his reign; les arts et he ces florissaient alors, arts and sciences
were then flourishing.
SIXTY-SEVENTH LESSON. (2.)
355
un dahlie. Ce beurre sent l'ail. L'aimez-vous quand il a le goût
d'ail? Je ne l'aime ni quand il sent l'ail ni quand il en a le goût.
(24², Obs. 55.)—Que pensez-vous des ouvrages de W. Irving? J'en
fais grand cas. Et de ceux de C. D.? Je n'en fais pas grand cas.
II y a trop de mots dedans.-Votre cuisine est-elle à fleur de terre?
Oui, comme presque toutes les cuisines modernes, ou que l'on bâtit à
présent. Les anciennes cuisines n'étaient pas à fleur de terre ; ma's
au dessous.-Que cachez-vous? Quelque chose que je ne veux
pas que vous voyiez, (§ 151.) En vérité! Je suis fâché que vous le
cachiez; (§ 151) en avez-vous honte? N'importe, cela me concerne,
et ne vous concerne pas. En effet, cela ne me regarde pas; mais je
ne croyais pas que vous en auriez fait un secret.-Votre neveu grandit
beaucoup, n'est-ce pas ?-Sa sœur ne grandit-elle pas à vue d'œil ?—
Qui ne grandit plus?
Which is the most flourishing city of the United States? (des États-
Unis?) It is New York, I think; but there are many other flourish-
ing cities in the U. S., (E. U.)-Which are the other flourishing
places? (endroits?) Philadelphie, Baltimore, Boston, Cincinnati, La
Nouvelle-Orléans, Pittsbourg, &c. &c.-Does Indian corn grow well
this season? Yes, it looks very well. The last rain we had (have
had) has made it grow very fast. The mind always shows itself-
it cannot be hidden.-That lawyer is witty, is he not? Yes, indeed.
How witty (d'esprit) is that young lady!-Truth has always a good
effect, has it not? No, not always; truth sometimes make us ene-
mies. Is your portrait (portrait) in its right (true) place? No, the
light comes from the wrong (mauvais) side. Your portrait ought to
be on the other side of the parlor. Then it would be in its true
light, (jour.)—Had you not better change its place? The family will
not consent to it.
That engraving would be in its true place, there; and your portrait
in its, here: if I were you, I would change them. It is indifferent
to me, and as the rest of the family have arranged it so, I will not
meddle with it.-Do you like the smell of this little flower? It is
delightful. Is it not a piece of mignonette? No, it is a piece of
heliotrope. Why do your sisters hide themselves? They would
not hide themselves if they did not fear to be seen.-Whom are they
afraid of? They are afraid of their governess, (une institutrice,) who
scolded them yesterday because they had not done their tasks, (leur
devoir.)-Have you already seen my son? I have not seen him
yet; how is he? He is very well; you will not be able to recognise
him, for he has grown very tall in a short time.
856
SIXTY-SEVENTH LESSON. (3.)
VOCABULAIRE, 3me Sec.
A cover. A shelter. A cottage, a hut. | Un gîte. Un abri. Une chaumière
To shelter one's self from something. Se mettre à l'abri de quelque chose.
'To take shelter from something.
Let us shelter ourselves from the
rain, the wind.
Let us enter that cottage in order to
be sheltered from the storm, (the
tempest.)
Everywhere, all over, throughout.
All over (throughout) the town.
A shade.
Under the shade.
Let us sit down under the shade of
that tree.
To pretend.
That man pretends to sleep.
That young lady pretends to know
French.
They pretend to come near us.
Now.
Mettons-nous à l'abri de la pluie, du
vent.
Entrons dans cette chaumière, pour
être à couvert de la tempête, ou
pour être à l'abri des injures du
temps.
Partout.
Par toute la ville.
Une ombre.¹
À l'ombre.
Allons nous asseoir à l'ombre de cet
arbre.
Faire semblant de.
Cet homme fait semblant de dormir.
Cette demoiselle fait semblant de
savoir le Français.
Ils font semblant de s'approcher de
nous.
Maintenant.
From, since.
Dès le matin.
From the break of day.
From morning.
Dès:
From the cradle, from a child.
From this time forward.
As soon as. As soon as you please.
As soon as I see him I shall speak to
him.
For fear of.
To catch a cold.
Dès le point du jour.
Dès le berceau.
Dès à présent.
Dès que.
Dès que vous voudrez.
Dès que je le verrai je lui parlerai.
De crainte ou de peur de.
Prendre froid, s'enrhumer.
I win not go out for fear of catching Je ne veux pas sortir, de peur de
a cold.
He does not wish to go to town, for
fear of meeting with one of his
creditors.
He does not wish to open his purse,
for fear of losing his money.
To transcribe fairly.
A grammar.
A French grammar.
m'enrhumer.
Il ne veut pas aller à la ville, de peut
de rencontrer un de ses créanciers.
*
Il ne veut pas ouvrir sa bourse, de
peur de perdre son argent.
Mettre au net. (33¹.)
Une grammaire.
Française.
SOIXANTE-SEPTIÈME THÊME. 3me Sec.
Une grammaire
Le ciel est couvert, ne ferons-nous pas mieux de prendre chacun
un parapluie? Oh! non, cela n'en vaut pas la peine. S'il pleut,
1 Ombre, a shadow, is feminine; but ombre, a kind of fish, and l'ombre, a
game at cards, are masculine.
SIXTY-SEVENTH LESSON. (3.)
357
nous trouverons quelqu'abri. Sans doute, nous trouverons quelque
maison ou quelque chaumière. Allons, allons.-Tenez, mainte-
nant il fait du soleil, et un soleil bien chaud. Il faut que nous pre-
nions (§ 151) le côté de l'ombre. Oui, vous avez raison, allons à
l'ombre. Lorsque nous aurons passé par toute la ville, nous senti-
rons assez le soleil à la campagne. Passerons-nous à l'ombre.
Quant à moi, je ne m'en soucie pas. Je n'ai pas trop chaud de ce
côté-ci, mais je ne vous empêche pas d'aller à l'abri des maisons,
si vous avez trop chaud au soleil. Jacques (James) et moi, nous
allons à l'ombre, vous autres, (47, 1,) faites comme vous voudrez.
-Samuel fait semblant de ne pas (§ 171-7) avoir peur du chaud,
cependant, il le sent aussi bien que nous autres.-Tenez, (Obs. 94,)
voyez donc ! Thomas a sa grammaire Française! Eh bien! qu'y
trouvez vous d'extraordinaire? Si j'ai le temps j'étudierai. J'ai
déjà mis mes thêmes au net, et vous, avez-vous mis les vôtres au
net? Je les mettrai ce soir.
Why does that man give nothing to the poor? (aux pauvres?) He
is too avaricious, (avare;) he does not wish to open his purse, for
fear of losing his money.-What sort of weather is it?
It is very
warm; it is long since we had any rain; I believe we shall have a
storm, (un orage.)—It may be, (cela se peut bien.) The wind blows,
it thunders already; do you hear it? Yes, I hear it, but the storm
is still far off, (encore bien loin.)—Not so far as you think; see how
it lightens.—It rains, it pours; what a shower! (quelle averse!)—If
we go into some place (quelque part) we shall be sheltered from the
storm.-Let us go into that cottage, then, (donc ;) we shall be shel-
tered there from the wind and the rain.-The storm has ceased.
We must go.
Let us thank these good people for the shelter they have given
us. We are much obliged to you. Adieu! You are welcome.—
Where shall we go now? Which road shall we take? The
shortest court) will be the best.-We have too much sun, and I am
still very tired; let us sit down under the shade of that tree.-Who
is (quel est) that man who is sitting under the tree? I do not know
him. It seems he (il paraît qu'il) wishes to be alone, (seul;) for
when we offer (vouloir*) to approach him, he pretends to be
asleep. He is like your sister: she understands French very well,
(fort bien ;) but when I begin to speak to her, she pretends not to
understand me.-Has not your uncle given the clerk (Dir. 3) some-
thing to transcribe? Yes, he has.-I wonder whether it is important
that he should transcribe it (§ 151) immediately? Yes, it is, for
fear the gentleman should go without the copy, (§ 151.)
358
SIXTY-EIGHTH LESSON. 1.)
2
SIXTY-EIGHTH LESSON, 68th.-Soixante-huitième Leçon, 68me
VOCABULAIRE.
1re Sec.
SECOND IMPERFECT TENSE.-Prétérit.
For its formation and use, see (§ 153,) and study it carefully.
PRETERIT.
J'eus, tu eus, il eut, nous eûmes, vous eûtes, ils eurent.
INFINITIVE. IMPERFECT.
To have, Avoir, I had.
To be, Etre, I was.
Had you money enough?
Jefus, fus,
I had
enough.
(To de-
Had he the pleasure of seeing her?
No, he was deprived at it.
prive.)
Had they no soup on that day?
They had none, but we had some.
Had I less good luck than they?
You had as much as they. (fem.)
Wast thou happy in thy choice?
I was not at all.
Who was?
We were, they were;
they were; but you were
not.
To go,
Aller,
To find,
I went.
Trouver, I found.
To bring, Apporter, I brought.
J'allai,
fut, fûmes, fûtes, furent.
Eûtes-vous assez d'arge.it?
eus assez.
Eut-il le plaisir de la voir ?
Non, il en fut privé. (Priver, ..)
J'en
{
N'eurent-ils pas de soupe ce jour-là f
Ils n'en eurent pas, mais nous en
eûmes.
Eus-je moins de bonheur qu'eux?
Vous en eûtes autant qu'elles.
Fus-tu heureux dans ton choix?
Je ne le fus pas du tout. Qui le fut!
Nous le fûmes, ils le furent; mais
vous ne le fûtes pas.
allas, alla, allâmes, allâtes, allèrent.
vas, va, vâmes, vâtes, vèrent.
ta, tâmes, tâtes, tèrent.
Je trouvai,
J'apportai, tas,
($
Where did you go last night? (§ 153.) | Où allâtes-vous hier soir? (time
I went nowhere, I stayed at home.
Who went to the minister's ball?
None of the family went, but Sarah
and Fanny will go to the consul's
ball.
past.)
Je n'allai nulle part, je restai à la
maison.
Qui alla au bal du ministre ?
Personne (153-3,) de la famille
n'y alla, mais Sara et Fanny iront
au bal du consul.
Did not the consul give one 3 weeks Le consul n'en donna-t-il pas un il y
ago?
Not the consul, but the ambassador
and his wife gave one then.
And it was there that his wife wore
her beautiful wreath, was it not?
Di! you find what you were seeking?
I did, but after looking long for it.
Was the battle decisive?
It was completely so.
The year before last. The week...
This steamboat. A steamship.
a trois semaines ?
Pas le consul, ($ 153-3,) mais l'am-
bassadeur et son épouse en donnè-
rent un alors.
Et ce fut là que son épouse porta son
superbe bandeau, n'est-ce pas ?
Trouvâtes-vous ce que vous cher-
chiez ?
Je le trouvai, mais après l'avoir
cherché long-temps.
La bataille fut-elle décisive?
Elle le fut complètement.
L'avant dernière année.
Semaine
Ce bateau à vapeur. Un navire à
wapeur.
SIXTY-EIGHTH LESSON. (1.)
359
On board the steam packet.
Now and then, from time to time.
He gave it up on that account.
A bord du paquebot à vapeur.
De temps en temps.
Il l'abandonna à cause de cela.
1re Sec.
SOIXANTE-HUITIEME THÊME.
Que trouvâtes-vous dans le sac que vous ramassâtes? J'y trouvai
un mouchoir, une jolie bourse et un morceau de gâteau. Trouvâtes-
vous, sur le mouchoir, le nom de la personne à qui il appartient?
Je l'y trouvai. Allâtes-vous le lui rendre? Je l'y envoyai par la
domestique. L'ambassadeur eut-il beaucoup de monde hier? Il
n'eut presque personne; il faisait trop chaud. Restâtes-vous long-
temps à Saratoga? Je n'y restai que quelques jours; mais mes
frères y restèrent plus de 3 semaines. Eûtes-vous le temps d'y voir
le consul? Non, il n'était pas encore arrivé quand je quittai l'en-
droit; mais mes frères eurent le temps et le plaisir de l'y rencontrer
-Jackson était-il à la Nouvelle Orléans quand vous y arrivâtes? La
bataille du 8 Janvier fut-elle décisive? Le fut-elle aussi complète-
ment que celle de Waterloo? Eurent-elles de bonne musique à
leur concert? Ne fus-je pas complaisant? Ces petites filles ne
furent-elles pas obéissantes? Elles s'en allèrent, n'est-ce pas ?
Did you not go last week to see the great panorama? I was
unwell, so that I did not go; but almost all the family went.-Were
you obliged to transcribe that note more than once? I was obliged
to transcribe it three times.-Did not your cousin get (avoir) the
yellow fever when he was in Mobile the year before last? No, he
did not get it; but my nephew and my niece had it.-Had they a
light or a violent attack? The latter had a light attack of it, but the
former had a violent one, and he could hardly escape death, (ce fut
avec peine qu'il.)—Did you find your father at Burlington? I was
lucky enough to find him there, at the moment he was going on
board the steamboat. Did you both stay in Burlington then? No,
he took me on board the steamboat with him and brought me here.
What steamboat was it? (était-ce?) It was the John Stevens.-
Were there many persons on board? (y avait-il?) There were not
many.-Did the office (employment, la charge) which your uncle
had, produce much to him? The office and all the functions which
belonged to it, produced him between 1500 and 2000 dollars a year,
(15 cents et 2 mille gourdes.)—Had he much to do? (not past.) Yes,
he had a great deal to do.-Did his occupation (occupation) make
(use to make) him sick now and then? Yes, now and then he was
(used to be) sick.-Had he not, once, more to do than usual? (past.)
Yes, once he had a great deal more to do.-Was he sick then? (past.)
Yes, he was very sick that time.-Was he sick a long time? Did
he give up his office on that account? Where did we go on that
account? Did we give it up on that account?
960
SIXTY-EIGHTH LESSON. (2.).
VOCABULAIRE. 2de Sec.
IMPERFECT CONTINUED.-Prétérit Continué.
INFINITIVES.
To punish, punir,
To succeed, réussir,
To restore, rendre,
To owe,
devoir,
IMPERFECT.
I punished, Je punis,
I succeedel, Je réussis,
I restored,
Je rendis,
I owed,
Je dus,
I had done reading when he came
down.
PRETERIT.
nis, nit, nîmes, nîtes, n.rent.
sis, sit, sîmes, sîtes, sirent.
dis, dit, dîmes, dîtes, dirent.
dus, dut, dûmes, dûtes, durent.
J'avais fini de lire quand il descendit.
Had I found my purse when you lost Avais-je trouvé ma bourse quand
yours ?
vous perdites la vôtre ?
These examples, and some previously given, show that
THE PLUPERFECT.-Le Plusqueparfait. (§ 154.)
is formed in French as in English, with the imperfect of the auxiliary and
the past participle of the verb to be conjugated.
We had dined when he arrived.
The king had named an admiral when
he heard of you. (To name.)
After having spoken, you went away
with the colonel.
Nous avions dîné lorsqu'il arriva.
Le roi avait nommé un amiral, quand
on lui parla de vous. (Nommer, 1.)
Après avoir parlé, vous vous en al-
lûtes avec le colonel.
After shaving, I washed and wiped Après m'être rasé, je me lavai et
iny face.
After having warmed themselves,
they went into the garden.
As soon as the bell rung, you awoke
and you rose, (got up.)
As soon as they called me, I got up.
As soon as he was ready, he came to
see me, and so did the colonel.
As soon as we had our money, we
agreed to that.
As soon as he had his horse, he came
to show it me, and we tried it.
After trying several times, they suc-
ceeded in doing it.
m'essuyai la figure.
Après s'être chauffés, ils allèrent au
jardin.
Dès que la cloche sonna, vous vous
réveillâtes, et vous vous levâtes.
Dès qu'ils m'appelèrent, je me levai.
Aussitôt qu'il fut prêt, il vint me
voir, et le colonel vint aussi.
Aussitôt que nous eûmes notre ar-
gent, nous convînmes de cela.
Aussitôt qu'il eut son cheval, il vint
me le montrer, et nous l'essayâmes.
Après avoir essayé plusieurs fois, ils
parvinrent à le faire.
As soon as I saw him, I obtained Aussitôt que je le vis, j'obtins ce
what I wanted.
As soon as I spoke to him, he kept |
his word, and did what I told him.
'The business was soon over.
His word (meaning promise) of honor.
dont j'avais besoin.
Aussitôt que je lui parlai, il tint sa
parole, et fit ce que je lui dis.
L'affaire fut bientôt faite.
Sa parole (not mot) d'honneur.
SOIXANTE-HUITIEME THÊME. 2de Sec.
Que faisiez-vous quand il arriva? Nous nous préparions à sortir.-
Perdites-vous la partie d'échecs? Oui, je la perdis, mais je gaguai
la partie de billard.-Que demandâtes-vous au capitaine lorsque
vous le rencontrâtes au quai? Je lui demandai si son colonel avait
SIXTY-EIGHTH LESSON. (2.)
361
été voir l'ambassadeur Anglais ? Répondit-il que oui? Il ne me
répondit rien. C'était très poli, n'est-ce pas ? Je crois qu'il n'entendit
pas ma question. C'est différent. Vous aurait-il répondu s'il vous
avait entendu? Je n'en doute pas, car il est extrêmement poli et
affable:-Est-il important que vous passiez chez le marchand de
soie?-N'y passèrent-ils pas sans vous ?-Vous donna-t-elle des œufs
pour déjeuner?-Vous en donnera-t-elle de nouveau ?—Nous en
denneriez-vous si nous ne les aimions pas ?
Did not Mr. N. Biddle sell his beautiful black horse to his sister-in-
law? No, she did not buy it.—Why did she not buy it? Because
she was afraid of the price.-What did he ask her for it? I was
told that he had asked her 450 dollars for it.-When did Sarah finish
her task? She finished it at past 9.-Did
you finish yours before
that hour? I finished mine 1 hour before. Who arrived this morn-
ing by the steamboat? I do not know who arrived this morning,
but Julius arrived yesterday, (past,) by the steam packet.—What
news has the steamer brought? It brought favorable news.' Cotton
and provisions kept up (maintenir) their prices, and the continent of
Europe was a little more quiet.
At what time does your uncle William generally get up? He
rises generally early. I thought so.-Did he get up early to-day?
No, he did not, (not past.)—Did he get up early yesterday? (past.)
No, he did not.-Why did he not get up to-day and yesterday (mind
the distinction to be observed in French) as early as usual? Because
he was a little unwell (not has been), and is yet so. Do you not take
your drawing lessons (leçons de dessin) early every other day? Yes,
we take them pretty early. Did you receive the last as early as
usual? No, we received it only after breakfast.-Why did you
receive it only after breakfast? Because our teacher did not come
before. Did you buy your books at Appleton's, corner of Chestnut
and 7th? (de la 7me?) Yes, I did: it is there that I always buy
books.
¹ Although, speaking of Julius's arrival, the French may use the Prétérit,
and say: Il arriva hier, because, on his landing, there was a completion of
the action; yet they cannot, speaking of the steamer, translate: It brought
favorable news, by: Il apporta des nouvelles favorables, because we are not
yet fully acquainted with the news it brought, and, of course, there is no
completion of the action. This is a nice distinction, which the judicious
pupil must treasure up. But had the steamer been in port two or three
weeks, Il apporta des nouvelles favorables, might be used; because the
knowledge of the news it brought might be supposed complete, and we
must recollect that the Prétérit is used, only, when "the event or action i
past and finished."
81
362
SIXTY-EIGHTH LESSON. (3.)
VOCABULAIRE.
3me Sec.
SECOND PLUPERFECT.-Prétérit Antérieur.¹
For its formation and use see ($155.) That article must be carefully
learned.
To elucidate the two rules given in it, we here put a few examples.
On 1st Rule. The conjunctive adverb connected with the simple tense.
Had we not dined when he came ? N'avions-nous pas dîné quand il
vint ?
Ilad she finished when you called Avait-elle fai quand vous l'appelâtes,
her? ( 155-1.)
Had we not dined when he came, or
used to come?
ou l'avez appelée ?
N'avions-nous pas dîné quand il
venait ?
She had finished when you were call- Elle avait fini quand vous l'appeliez.
ing her, or used to call her.
Here, the Plusqueparfait is used, whether the simple tense is the Parfait,
the Preterit, or the Imparfait.
Rule 2d. The conjunctive adverb
When they had done playing, they be-
gan to sing. (§ 155-2.)
connected with the compound tense.
Quand ils eurent achevé de jouer, ils
se mirent à chanter. (Prét.)
When they had done playing, they Quand ils avaient fini de jouer, ils
usually began to sing.
When I had dined, it struck 12.
As soon as I had dined, it used to
strike 12.
se mettaient à chanter. (Imparf.)
Quand j'eus dîné, midi sonna.
Aussitôt que j'avais dîné, midi son
nait. (Imparf.)
He had done in a moment, (if only Il eut fini en un moment.
once.)
He had done in a moment, (if more
than once.)
Il avait fini en un moment
SOIXANTE-HUITIÈME THÊME. 3me Sec.
Que fîtes-vous quand vous eûtes fini votre lettre? J'allai chez
mon frère, qui me mena au paquebot à vapeur, où j'eus le plaisir de
trouver une de mes anciennes amies que je n'avais pas vue depuis.
plusieurs années.—Que faisait-elle dès qu'elle avait fini de prendre
sa leçon de chant? Elle allait chez son amie Jeanne, et toutes
deux se promenaient dans le jardin, où elles cueillaient, ou des
fleurs pour le salon, ou des fruits pour le déjeuner.-Qu'as-tu fait
après t'être levé ce matin? (not past.)—Après avoir lu les lettres du
comte polonais, j'ai été voir le théâtre du prince, que je n'avais pas
encore vu. Que fis-tu hier matin après t'être levé? J'allai au
marché pour y acheter nos provisions, et quand je fus revenu à la
maison, je lus mes lettres et j'y répondis.-Que faisaient vos amis
1 There is another Prétérit Antérieur, called the Prétérit Antérieur In-
défini, which is, however, seldom employed.
SIXTY-NINTH LESSON. (1.)
363
tous les matins à la campagne l'été dernier? Ils prenaient leurs
fusils et se rendaient (se rendre, 4, to repair, to go) à l'hotel du
village pour y prendre leurs papiers et leurs lettres.
What did the colonel do when he had breakfasted, this morning 2
He shaved and went out, (not past.)—Did he shave and go out yes-
terday, after breakfast, also? (past.) No, he shaved before creak-
fast, and went out after. Had he gone out when you came in?
He had gone out long before.-Did he read the gazette before he
went out? No, he read something else, (quelqu'autre chose.)— After
reading, did he do anything else before he went out? He smoke?
a cigar.-Did he use to smoke when he was in the woods? No
he did not, because he could not get good cigars, and rather thar
smoke bad tobacco, he would not smoke (622, N. 1) at all.-What did
your friend do after he had been walking? He went to the baron's
house.-Did the baron receive him well? Yes, he received him
as well as he had (avait) received him before.
When do you set out? I do not set out till (je ne pars que) to
morrow; for before I leave I will once more see my good friends.—
What did your children do when they had breakfasted? They
went a walking with their dear preceptor, (précepteur.)—Where did
your uncle go after he had warmed himself? He went nowhere.
After he had warmed himself he undressed and went to bed.-At
what o'clock did he get up? He got up at sunrise.--Did you wake
him? I had no need to wake him, for he had got up before me.-
What did your cousin do when he heard of the death (la mort) of
his best friend? He was much afflicted, (très-affligé,) and went to
bed without saying a word. Did you shave before you break-
fasted? I shaved when I had breakfasted. Did you go to bed
when you had eaten supper? When I had eaten supper I wrote
my letters, and when I had written them I went to bed.
SIXTY-NINTH LESSON, 69th.-Soixante-neuvième Leçon, 69me,
VOCABULAIRE.
To get beaten, (whipped.)
To get paid.
To get one's self invited to line.
At first.
Firstly, (§ 170.)
Secondly.
Thirdly, &c.
Is your mother at home?
1re Sec.
† Se faire battre.
+ Se faire payer.
† Se faire inviter à dîner.
D'abord.
Premièrement, en premier lieu.
Secondement, en second lieu.
Troisièmement, en troisième lieu.
Votre mère est-elle chez elle?
Votre mère est-elle à la maison ?
{ Votre est-elle chez maison?
364
SIXTY-NINTH LESSON. (1.)
She is.
She is not.
I am going to her house.
A cause, a reason.
A cause of complaint.
A cause of sadness.
She has reason to be sad.
Grief, sorrow, sadness.
Is that woman ready to go out?
She is. Is she not ?
Notwithstanding, in spite of.
Notwithstanding that-you.
In spite of him, her, them.
To contrive, to manage.
Elle y est.
Je vais chez elle.
Elle n'y est pas.
Un sujet, une raison, une cause.
Un sujet de chagrin.
Un sujet de tristesse.
Elle a un sujet de tristesse.
Le chagrin, la tristesse.
Cette femme est-elle prête à sortir :
Elle l'est.
Malgré,
Malgré cela.
Ne l'est-elle pas ?
en dépit de.
En dépit de vous.
Malgré lui, elle.
Faire en sorte de.
En dépit d'eux.
Do you manage to finish your work Faites-vous en sorte de finir votre
every Saturday night?
ouvrage tous les samedis soir?
Do you manage to have your work | Faites-vous en sorte d'avoir fini votre
done every Saturday night?
Try to do that to oblige me.
I will do everything to oblige you.
To command, look upon, overlook.
The window looks into the street.
The window looks out upon the river.
The back-door looks into the garden.
To fasten, to tie. To tie his shoes.
He was fastened to a tree.
Until you get home. (§ 151.)
ouvrage tous les samedis soir ?
Faites en sorte de faire cela pour
m'obliger.
Je ferai tout pour vous obliger.
Donner sur.
La fenêtre donne sur la rue.
La fenêtre donne sur la rivière.
La porte de derrière donne sur le
jardin.
Attacher, 1.
Attacher ses souliers.
On l'attacha à un arbre.
Jusqu'à ce que vous arriviez à la
maison.
SOIXANTE-NEUVIÈME THÊME. 1re Sec.
Comme M. Salomon vient tard pour nous faire visite ! Il vient
pour se faire inviter à dîner.-Allâtes-vous chez le colonel avant-
hier? Non, je n'y allai pas. Y êtes-vous allé ce matin? Non, et
je n'irai pas avant sa soirée musicale. Et pourquoi pas? D'abord,
parce que je ne lui dois point de visite, et secondement, parce qu'on
pourrait croire que je veux me faire inviter.-Ce garçon ne s'est-il
pas fait battre? Il est si méchant qu'il se fit battre deux fois la
semaine passée.-M. D-vous doit-il encore? Non, je me suis
fait payer.-Quel sujet de chagrin cette jeune dame a-t-elle ? A-t-
elle perdu son mari? Non, elle a perdu son oiseau favori. Est-ce
là ce qui cause son chagrin? Je crois que oui.-Ils ne veulent pas
que vous fassiez cela. N'importe, je le ferai en dépit d'eux.--Fera-
t-elle en sorte de venir?-Lorsqu'il sut qu'elle n'irait pas, il fit en
sorte de s'y rendre, n'est-ce pas ?
4
When had you finished your task? I had finished it when you
came in. (§ 155—1, 2.)-As soon as Cæsar (César) had crossed
SIXTY-NINTH LESSON. (2.)
365
(passer) the Rubicon, he had no longer to deliberate, (délibérer:) he
was obliged (devoir) to conquer (vaincre) or to die.-An emperor (un
empereur) who was irritated at (irrité contre) an astrologer, (un astro-
logue,) asked him: "Wretch! what death (de quelle) dost thou believe
thou wilt die?" "I shall die of a fever," replied the astrologer.
“Thou liest,” said the emperor, "thou wilt die this instant of a vio-
lent death." As soon as he was seized, (saisir,) he said to the em-
peror, ´´Sire, (Seigneur,) order some one to feel (ordonnez qu'on m²
tâte)' my pulse, (242, Obs. 55) and it will be found that I have a
fever." This sally (cette saillie) saved his life.
Do you perceive yonder house? (cette maison là-bas ?) I do.-Had
you perceived it before? I had not.—Would you nave perceived it
if I had not shown it to you? May be so, (peut être que oui,) may
be not. But now that you have shown it to me, what kind of a
house is it? It is an inn, (une auberge.)-If you agree, we will go
into it, to drink a glass of wine or cider, for I am very thirsty. Try
(faites en sorte) to keep your thirst until you get home. It does not
suit men like us to enter (dans) inns. I see that the inn overlooks
the river. And as the house is high, it commands a large portion
of the country.You appear sad; what cause of grief have you?
If you were as thirsty as I am, you would also have a cause for
grief.—Are you always thirsty when you see an inn? I once saw
a small black horse that managed to stop at every inn before which
he passed. Ah! ah! I guess he was thirsty too. Did the colonel
pay you last week? No, he could not. He might have done it, if
his nephew had not spent all his money; but he will manage to pay
me to-morrow.
To drown.
To drown a dog, a cat.
VOCABULAIRE.
To be drowned, to be drowning.
To drown one's self, to get drowned.
To leap through the window.
To throw out of the window.
I am drowning.
He jumped out of the window,
The cattle.
To keep warm. To keep cool.
To keep clean.
To keep one's self up, straight.
Keep yourself properly.
To keep on one's guard against some
one.
2de Sec.
Noyer, 1.
Noyer un chien, un chat.
Se noyer.
Sauter par la fenêtre.
Jeter par la fenêtre.
Je me noie. (144—3.)
Il sauta par la fenêtre.
Le bétail; plur. les bestiaux.
† Se tenir chaud. † Se tenir frais.
Se tenir propre.
Se tenir droit.
Tenez-vous comme il faut... bien.
† Se tenir en garde contre quelqu'un,
¹ Ordonner que... (order that. . .) requires the subjunctive after it.
81 *
366
SIXTY-NINTH LESSON. (2.)
Keep on your guard against that
man.
To take care (to beware) of somebody
or something.
If you do not take care of that horse,
it will kick you.
Take care that you do not fall.
To keep on one's guard against some
one.
+ Tenez-vous en garde contre cet
homme.
Prendre garde à quelqu'un ou à
quelque chose.
Si vous ne prenez pas garde à ce
cheval, il vous donnera un coup
de pied.
↑ Prenez garde de tomber.
† Se tenir (être) sur ses gardes avec
quelqu'un.
To beware of somebody or some † Se garder de quelqu'un ou quelque
thing.
chose.
Keep on your guard against that Tenez-vous sur vos gardes avec
man.
Take care.
A thought.
An idea.
A sally.
To be struck with a thought.
A thought strikes me.
That never crossed my mind.
To take it into one's head.
cet homme.
Prenez garde.
Une pensée. Une idée. Une saillie.
Venir en pensée, (à l'idée, à l'esprit.)
Il me vient une pensée.
Cela ne m'est jamais venu à l'esprit.
+ S'aviser, 1.
He took it into his head lately to rob t Il s'avisa l'autre jour de me voler
me.
What is in your head?
+ De quoi vous avisez-vous?
SOIXANTE-NEUVIÈME THÊME. 2de Sec.
Avez-vous vu ce méchant petit garçon attacher ce pauvre petit
chien, le jeter dans la rivière, et le noyer? Si je l'avais vu, j'aurais
fait en sorte de l'en empêcher. J'ai essayé de le faire; mais je n'ai
pu y réussir.-La petite fille qui tomba dans l'eau, de la fenêtre du
bateau à vapeur, se noya-t-elle ? Non, on la sauva, dans un petit
bateau. Le voleur fut-il pris? Non, il sauta par la fenêtre et fit en
sorte de se sauver.-Vous êtes sur un banc cassé; prenez garde de
tomber. J'y prendrai garde.—Voyez comme cette jeune demoiselle
aux cheveux noirs se tient bien! Oui, c'est un plaisir de voir comme
elle se tient!-Si vous vous approchez trop de ce cheval, il vous don-
nera un coup de pied. J'y prendrai garde.—Faites-vous des affaires
avec cet homme là-bas? Lequel? Celui au chapeau blanc. Non,
j'en faisais autrefois; mais à présent je me tiens sur mes gardes
contre lui.-Ne s'avisa-t-elle pas de revenir ici l'autre jour? Ne
craignez rien. Il ne s'avisera plus de le faire.
You appear very well satisfied; what thought struck you? Some-
thing which had never crossed my mind before.-What is it? Should
I tell you, (if I were,) you would be as wise as I.—Did William
jump out of the window? Yes, he did.-What did he do after
jumping out of the window? After he had jumped, he first ran to
the garden gate, opened it, and then ran towards the bridge.—Did he
SIXTY-NINTH LESSON. (3.)
867
go as far as the bridge? No, there were some cattle in the road, and
he was afraid of them, so that he stopped. Are the cattle as large here
as there? No, the cattle (bestiaux) are larger there than here.-How
can I keep myself warm? Put on a warmer coat.-Where must I
put the butter to keep it cool? You must put it in the cellar.-Who
is that little boy? He is the baker's son.-I admire him, for he
always keeps himself so clean.-Does your cook keep her kitchen
clean? Why do the cattle go in the shade?
Did Thomas dare (s'aviser) to ask you for money? Yes, he did.-
Did you lend him any? No, I was on my guard against him.
What was the cause of your quarrel with the gardener's boy? He
took it into his head (or he dared) to call me a fool.-Did you not
beat him after he had called you so? I did, soundly, (comme il faut.)
-Why do you laugh at me? I do not laugh at you, but at your
coat.—Does it not look like (63¹) yours? It does not look like it, for
mine is short (court) and yours is too long, (long ;) mine is black and
yours is green.-Why do you associate with (632) that man? I
would not associate with him if he had not rendered me great ser-
vices, (le service.) Do not trust him, (ne vous y fiez pas,) for if you
are not on your guard, he will cheat (tromper) you.
VOCABULAIRE.
In my, your, his or her place.
We must put everything in its place.
Around, round. All around.
We sailed around England.
They went about the town to look at
all the curiosities.
To go around the house.
To go about the house.
How much does that cost you?
How much does this book cost you?
It costs me three crowns and a half.
That table costs him twenty crowns.
Alone, by one's self.
I was alone. One woman only.
One God.
God alone can do that.
The very thought of it is criminal.
A single reading is not sufficient to
satisfy a mind that has a true taste.
To kill by shooting.
To blow out some one's brains.
3me Sec.
À ma, votre, sa place.
Il faut mettre chaque chose à sa place.
Autour. Tout autour.
Nous naviguâmes autour de l'Angle-
terre.
† Ils allèrent çà et là dans la ville,
pour en voir toutes les curiosités.
Aller autour de la maison.
Faire le tour de la maison.
Aller çà et là dans la maison.
Combien cela vous coûte-t-il ?
Combien ce livre vous coûte-t-il?
Il me coûte trois écus et demi.
Cette table lui coûte vingt écus.
Seul; fem. seule.
J'étais seul.
Un seul Dieu.
Une seule femme.
Dieu seul peut faire cela.
La seule pensée de cela est criminelle.
Une seule lecture ne suffit pas pour
contenter un homme qui a du goût.
Tuer d'un coup d'arme à feu.
Brûler la cervelle à quelqu'un.
368
LESSON. (3.)
SIXTY-NINTH
To shoot one's self with a pistol.
He has blown out his brains.
He has blown out his brains with a
pistol.
He served for a long time, acquired
honors, and died contented.
Se brûler la cervelle d'un coup de
pistolet.
Il s'est brûlé la cervelle.
Il s'est brûlé la cervelle d'un coup
de pistolet.
Il servit long-temps, parvint aux
honneurs, et mourut content.
Obs. 153. In narratives, when the verbs are in the same tense, the pro.
nouns of the third person are not repeated.
He arrived poor, grew rich in a short | Il arriva pauvre, devin, riche en peu
time, and lost all in a still shorter de temps, et perdit tout en moins
time.
de temps encore.
SOIXANTE-NEUVIÈME THÊME. 3me Sec.
À votre place je ne laisserais pas mes livres et mes papiers çà e
là, mais je mettrais chaque chose à sa place. Je tâche de tenir
chaque chose à sa place; mais je ne puis y réussir.-Pourquoi a-t-on
mis cela autour de ce jeune arbre? Pour empêcher le bétail de le
mordre et de le casser.-Le capitaine navigua-t-il autour de l'en-
droit? Il navigua tout au tour dans son bateau. Ne descendit-il
pas? Si fait, il descendit. N'attacha-t-il pas son bateau à un arbre?
Il l'y attacha. Lut-il le livre? Il le lut en un seul jour.-Était-elle
seule quand le voleur entra? Oui, elle était seule. Voulut-il lui
brûler la cervelle d'un coup de pistolet? Oui; mais comme elle
allait prendre une prise de tabac, elle jeta tout son tabac dans les
yeux du voleur, qui tira son coup sans la toucher. Il lui vint une
heureuse idée, n'est-ce pas ? Qui, elle eut vraiment une heureuse
pensée. Combien ce parapluie vous coûte-t-il?-Ce drap-là vous
a-t-il coûté 4 gourdes la verge ?-Cette maison lui coûtera au moins
15,000 gourdes, n'est-ce pas ?-Dieu seul connaît notre destinée, (fate,)
n'est-ce pas ?
What is the matter with you? Why do you look so melancholy?
(avoir l'air mélancolique ?)—I should not look so melancholy if I had
no reason to be sad. I have heard just now (492) that one of my
best friends has shot himself with a pistol, and that one of my wife's
best friends has drowned herself.-Where has she drowned herself?
She drowned herself in the river which is behind her house. Yes-
terday, at four o'clock in the morning, she rose without saying a
word to any one, (à personne,) leaped out of the window which
looks into the garden, and threw herself into the river, where she
was drowned.—I have a great mind (grar.de envie) to bathe (se
baigner) to-day.—-Where will you bathe? In the river.-Are you
not afraid of being drowned? Oh, no! I can swim.-Who taught
SEVENTIETH LESSON. (1.)
369
you? Last summer I took a few lessons in the swimming-school,
(à l'école de natation.)
Were you not afraid to go into the water before you could swim?
A little, but I could not have learned without going into the water.
-You did not think like the man who said: I will go into the water
only when I know how to swim. There are many who, like that
man, think that they will try to speak French only when they know
how. Do they not know that if they do not try to speak they can-
not learn? I guess they forget it. Why do you work so much?
I work in order to be one day useful to my cuntry.—Would you
copy your exercises if I copied mine? I would copy them if you
copied yours.-Would your sister have transcribed her letter if I had
transcribed mine? She would have transcribed it.-Would she have
set out if I had set out? I cannot tell you what she would have
done if you had set out.
· SEVENTIETH LESSON, 70th.-Soixante et dixième Leçin, 70me.
VOCABULAIRE, 1re Sec.
As we began to use the verb in the Imperative mood from the 8th lesson,
and referred to the article in the Synopsis in the (252), and all subsequent
lessons,
THE IMPERATIVE MOOD—L'Impératif
will be nothing new to the student. However, as that mood must be found
somewhere, we place it here. See, for its formation and use, ($150.) That
article must be carefully studied.
Have patience.
Be (you) attentive, patient, affable.
Go (ye) there. Do not go there.
Give it to me. Do not give it to me.
Send it to him.
Lend it to me.
Ayez patience.
Soyez attentif, patient, affable.
Allez-y. N'y allez pas. (§ 150—8.)
Donnez-le-moi. Ne me le donnez
pas.
Envoyez-lė-lui.
Prêtez-le-moi.
Have the goodness to hand me that Ayez la bonté de me passer ce plat.
plate.
To borrow.... of or from.
I will borrow some money of you.
I will borrow that money of you.
Borrow it of (or from) him.
Do not borrow it of him.
I borrow it from him.
Do not tell him or her.
Tell her.
Return it to them. ($ 150-8.)
Emprunter, 1... à.
Je veux vous emprunter de l'argent.
Je veux vous emprunter cet argent.
Empruntez-le-lui.
Ne le lui empruntez pas.
Je le lui emprunte.
Ne le lui dites pas.
Rendez-le, (-la-)-leur.
Dites-le-lui.
870
SEVENTIETH LESSON. (1.)
Do not return it to them.
Patience, impatience.
The neighbor.
The snuff-box.
The segar-box.
Be ye good. Be not (so). (§ 150-8.)
Know it.
Do not.
Ne le leur rendez pas.
La patience, l'impatience.
Le prochain.
La tabatière.
La boite à cigares.
Soyez bons.
Sachez-le.
Ne le soyez pas.
Ne le sachez pas.
Obey your masters, and never give Obéissez à vos maîtres, et ne leur
them any trouble.
Pay what you owe, comfort the af-
flicted, and do good to those that
have offended you.
Love God, and thy neighbor as thy-†
self.
To obey.
To comfort.
To offend.
Obey your father,
Comfort them.
Offend no one.
Let us always love and practise vir-
and we shall be happy both in
tue,
this life and in the next.
To practise.
donnez jamais de chagrin.
Payez ce que vous devez, consolez
les malheureux, et faites du bien à
ceux qui vous ont offenses.
Aimez le bon Dieu, et le prochain
comme vous-même.
Obéissez à votre père.
Consolez-les.
Obéir, 2, à.
Consoler, 1.
Offenser, 1.
N'offensez personne.
Aimons et pratiquons toujours la
vertu, et nous serons heureux dans
cette vie et dans l'autre.
Pratiquer, 1.
Let us see which of us can shoot best. Voyons qui tirera le mieux.
To express.
Express your wish to your friend.
To express one's self. Express your-
self.
To make one's self understood.
Make yourself understood.
To accustom.
Exprimer, 1.
Exprimez votre souhait à votre ami.
S'exprimer, 1.
Exprimez-vous.
Faites-vous
Se faire comprendre.
comprendre.
Accoutumer, 1, à (av. l'inf.)
Children must early be accustomed Il faut, de bonne heure, accoutumer
to labor.
To accustom one's self to something.
To be accustomed to a thing.
I am accustomed to it.
les enfants au travail.
S'accoutumer à quelque chose.
Être accoutumé à quelque chose.
J'y suis accoutumé.
SOIXANTE ET DIXIÈME THÊME. 1re Sec.
Ayez de la patience, soyez attentif, et vous réussirez. Je ferai en
sorte d'être patient et attentif.—Si vous avez ma Vie de Washington,
donnez-la-moi. Je vous l'aurais déjà donnée, si vous aviez été ici.
Hier dès que je l'eus finie, je la mis dans mon pupitre pour vous là
donner, mais vous ne vîntes pas.-Faites vos thêmes; pourquoi ne
les faites-vous pas? Mon frère n'est pas à la maison. Il ne faut pas
que vous les lui fassiez faire. Je ne les lui fait pas faire, mais il a
la clef du pupitre. Non, la voici. Ouvrez-le, prenez votre livre,
votre cahier, et tout ce qu'il vous faut, et commencez. Je vais m'y
mettre à l'instant.-Que fait Sara? Elle lit le livre que vous lui
avez prêté. Elle a tort d'être toujours à lire. Dites-lui de dessiner
ce paysage. (671.) Et lorsqu'elle l'aura fini, pourra-t-elle se mettre à
SEVENTIETH LESSON. (2.)
371
la lecture? (reading?) Non, alors faites-lui décliner (to decline) quel-
ques noms avec des adjectifs. Comment?
Comment? Comme ceci : La belle
pomme, de la belle pomme, à la belle pomme. Les poires mûres,
(ripe pears,) des poires mûres, aux poires mûres.
Have patience, my dear friend, and be not sad; for sadness alters
(changer) nothing, and impatience makes bad worse, (empirer le
mal.) Be not afraid of your creditors; be sure that they will do you
no ha in. They will wait, if you cannot pay them yet.-Pay me what
you owe me, will you? As soon as I have money, I will pay all
hat you have advanced (avancer) for me. Don't you forget! you
hear! I shall not forget, you may depend upon it, for I think of it
(j'y pense) every day. I am your debtor, ¡le débiteur,) and I shall
never deny (nier) it.—What a beautiful inkstand you have there!
pray lend it me.-What do you wish to do with it? I wish to show
it to my sister.-Take it, but take care of it, and do not break it.—
Do not fear, (Ne craignez rien.)
What do you want of my brother? I want to borrow some money
of him.-Borrow some of somebody else, (à un autre.)—If he will
not lend me any, I will borrow some of somebody else. You will
do well.-Do not wish for (souhaiter) what you cannot have, but be
contented with what Providence (la Providence) has given you, and
remember that there are many men who have not what you have.
As life is short, (court,) let us endeavor (65¹) to make it (56³, Obs.
137) as agreeable (agréable) as possible, (qu'il est possible.) But let
us also remember that the abuse (l'abus) of pleasure (in the plural
in French) makes it bitter, (amère, fem.)-What must we do in order
to be happy? Always (§ 170) love and practise virtue, and you will
be happy both in this life and in the next.
To have the habit of.
VOCABULAIRE. 2de Sec.
I cannot express myself in French,
for I am not in the habit of speak-
ing.
You speak properly.
To converse, to chatter, to prate.
A prattler.
A chatterer.
To practise.
I practise speaking.
To permit, to allow.
Permit me to go (there.)
I do.
Avoir l'habitude de ..
Je ne puis pas bien m'exprimer en
Français, parce que je n'ai pas l'ha-
bitude de parler.
Vous parlez comme il faut.
Causer, 1. Bavarder, 1. Jaser, 1.
Un causeur, fem. euse.¹
Un jaseur, fem. euse.
Exercer, 1. Je m'exerce à parler.
Permettre,* 2, de. (Comme mettre,
25¹, 33¹.)
Permettez-moi d'y aller.
le permets.
1 Une causeuse means also a small sofa for two persons.
Je vous
372
LESSON. (2.)
SEVENTIETH
I do not perinit her to go.
The permission, the permit.
Do good to the poor, have compassion
on the unfortunate, and God will
take care of the rest.
To do good to some one.
To have compassion on some one.
Compassion. Pity. The rest.
Je ne lui permets pas d'y aller.
La permission,
le permis.
Faites du bien aux pauvres, ayez
compassion des malheureux, et le
bon Dieu aura soin du reste.
Faire du bien à quelqu'un.
Avoir compassion de quelqu'un.
La compassion. La pitié. Le reste.
S'il vient, dites-lui que je suis au jar.
din, sous le berceau de jasmin.
suffers elision in the conjunction si, if, before the
ils, they; but not before elle or elles. (212 Obs. 47.)
If he comes, tell him I am in the gar-
den, under the jasmin bower,
Obs. 154. The letter
personal pronouns, il, he
Ask the merchant whether he can let | Demandez au marchand s'il peut me
donner le cheval au prix que je lui
ai offert.
me have the horse at the price
which I have offered him.
I read, and was told.
J
ai lu, et l'on m'a raconté.
Obs. 155. The indefinite pronoun on takes a euphonic l' after the words
et, ou, où, si, que, and qui.
There they laugh and weep by turns.
If they knew what you have done.
The country where diamonds are
found.
You have been, or will soon be told.
We say with precision what we un-
derstand well.
Whom do people love? Those to
whom they owe their happiness.
Can one be great without being just?
One can be great only inasmuch as
he is just.
On y rit et l'on y pleure tour à tour.
Si l'on savait ce que vous avez fait.
Le pays où l'on trouve le diamant.
On vous a dit, ou l'on vous dira
bientôt.
Ce que l'on conçoit bien s'énonce
clairement.
Qui aime-t-on ? On aime ceux à qui
l'on doit son bonheur.
Peut-on être grand sans être juste?
On ne peut être grand qu'autant
que l'on est juste.
Obs. 156. But the euphonic l' is omitted, when on is followed by le, la,
or les. Say: Je ne veux pas qu'on le tourmente, I do not wish him to be
molested, and not que l'on le, &c., which would be harsher than qu'on le.
SOIXANTE ET DIXIÈME THÊME. 2de Sec.
Bon jour, Mlle. N.... Ah! vous voilà enfin. Je vous ai attendue
avec impatience.-Vous êtes une causeuse, je crois. Vous me par-
donnerez, n'est-ce pas, ma chère? Je n'ai pas causé, je vous assure;
mais je n'ai pas pu venir (N. 622) plus tôt. Permettez-moi de voir
ce que vous avez apporté. Vous permettre de le regarder! Je l'ai
apporté exprès (on purpose) pour vous le montrer. Tenez, le voilà,
prenez-le. Je le tiens. Ah! que c'est joli! Vous exercez-vous à
peindre? Je pratique quelque fois. Mais comment se porte madame
votre mère? On dit qu'elle se porte mieux depuis qu'elle est aux eaux
SEVENTY-FIRST LESSON. (1.)
373
(at the springs) et l'on croit qu'elle sera bientôt guérie. Que je suis
cnarmée de l'apprendre !-Votre père vous permit-il d'aller au bal
avant-hier? Oui, dès que je lui eus demandé il m'en donna la per-
mission.-Salomon a-t-il compassion des pauvres? Lui! Il n'a
compassion de personne.-Parlons Français. Ayez la bonté de par-
ler, vous, et moi, je vous répondrai en Anglais. Vous parlez tout
aussi bien que moi. Vous plaisantez, (plaisantei, 1, to jest.) Non,
je ne plaisante pas. Vous me flattez pour me faire parler.
Since (puisque) we wish to be happy, let us do good to the poor,
and let us have compassion on the unfortunate; let us obey our mas-
ters, and never give them any trouble; let us comfort the unfortunate
(les infortunės,) love our neighbor as ourselves, and not hate those
(et ne haïssons pas ceux) that have offended us; in short, (en un mot,)
let us always fulfil our duty, and God will take care of the rest.--My
son, in order to be loved you must be laborious (laborieux) and good.
Thou art accused (on t'accuse) of having been idle and negligent
(négligent) in thy affairs. Thou knowest, however, (pourtant,) that
thy brother has been punished for having been naughty. Being
lately (l'autre jour) in town, I received a letter from thy tutor, in
which he strongly (fort) complained of thee.
Do not weep, (pleurer;) now go into thy room, learn thy lesson,
and be a good boy, (sage,) otherwise (autrement) thou wilt get nothing
for dinner, (à dîner.) I shall be so good, my dear father, that you
will certainly (certainement) be satisfied with me.-Has the little boy
kept his word? (tenir* parole?) Not quite; for after having said
that, he went into his room, took his books, sat down at the table,
(se mit à une table,) and fell asleep, (s'endormit.) "He is a very
good boy when he sleeps," said his father, seeing him some time
(quelque temps) after.-Do you understand all I am telling you? I
understand (entendre) and comprehend (comprendre *) it very well;
but I cannot express myself well in French, because I am not in the
habit of speaking it. That will come in (avec le) time. I wish (sou-
haiter) it with all my heart.
SEVENTY-FIRST LESSON, 71st.-Soixante-onzième Leçon, 71me.
1re Sec.
VOCABULAIRE.
To stand
up.
To remain up.
Être debout.
Rester debout.
Will you permit me to go to the Voulez-vous me permettre d'alir au
market?
To hasten, to make haste.
marché?
+ Se dépêcher, 1, de.
32
374
SEVENTY-FIRST LESSON. (1.).
Make haste, and return soon.
Dépêchez-vous, et revenez bientôt.
Go and tell him that I cannot come Allez lui dire que je ne puis venir
to-day.
aujourd'hui.
Obs. 157. In French the verbs aller,* to go, and venir,* to come, are
always followed by the infinitive instead of another tense used in English,
and the conjunction and is not rendered. (§ 150—12.)
He came and told us he could not
come.
Go and see your friends.
To weep, to cry.
The least blow makes him cry.
To frighten.
To be frightened, to startle.
Il vint nous dire qu'il ne pouvait pas
venir.
Allez voir vos amis.
Pleurer, 1.
Le moindre coup le fait pleuer.
Effrayer, 1.
S'effrayer, 1.
The least thing frightens him or her. La moindre chose l'effraie.
Be not frightened.
To be frightened at something.
What are you frightened at ?
At my expense.
At his, her, our expense.
At other people's expense.
That man lives at everybody's ex-
pense.
To depend.
That depends upon circumstances.
That does not depend upon me.
It depends upon him to do that.
O! yes, it depends upon him.
To astonish, to surprise.
To be astonished, to wonder.
To be surprised at something.
I am surprised at it.
An extraordinary thing happened
which surprised everybody.
To take place, to happen.
Ne vous effrayez pas.
S'effrayer de quelque chose.
De quoi vous effrayez-vous ?
À mes dépens.
À
ses, à nos dépens.
Aux dépens d'autrui.
Cet homme vit aux dépens de tout
le monde.
Dépendre de.
Cela dépend des circonstances.
Cela ne dépend pas de moi.
Il dépend de lui de faire cela.
Oh oui, cela dépend de lui.
Etonner, 1.
S'étonner, 1.
Être étonné de quelque chose.
J'en suis étonné.
Il arriva une chose extraordinaire qui
étonna tout le monde.
Se passer, 1.
Many things have passed which will Il s'est passé plusieurs choses qui
surprise you.
To surprise.
Many days will pass before that.
vous surprendront.
Surprendre,* (comme prendre.)
Il se passera plusieurs jours avant
cela.
A man came in who asked me how I Il entra un homme qui me demanda.
comment je me portais.
was.
SOIXANTE-ONZIÈME THÊME. 1re Sec.
Pleurez-vous, mon petit bon homme, (a familiar expression con-
stantly used for: my little boy,) parce que vous êtes obligé de rester
debout? Oui, il y a si long-temps que je suis debout que je suis
très-fatigué. Si l'on vous permettait de vous asseoir, seriez-vous plus
SEVENTY-FIRST LESSON. (2.)
375
sage une autre fois? Je tâcherais de l'être. Je compte sur votre
parole. Asseyez-vous là-bas, (yonder.)-Si vous aviez touché cette
petite fille, elle aurait pleuré, car elle pleure pour la moindre chose.
Je suis étonné qu'elle (§ 151) ne pleure pas, car je lui ai donné un
coup. Alors, il est vraiment étonnant qu'elle ne pleure pas. Aux
dépens de qui avez-vous fait ces belles emplettes? À mes propres
dépens; je n'en fais jamais aux dépens d'autrui.-Votre ami obtien-
dra-t-il l'emploi qu'il désire? C'est selon : cela dépendra des circon-
stances. Si cela dépendait de votre cousin, le secrétaire, l'obtien-
drait-il? Oui; mais cela ne depend pas de lui.-Lorsque la chose
fut arrivée, cela n'étonna-t-il pas tout le monde? Oui, chacun en
fut étonné. Vous surprenez tout le monde, mais votre neveu ne sur-
prend personne. Il me surprend.
Can you stand one hour on one foot without moving? I have
never tried, but I think I could. If you were to try (essayiez, imparf.)
you would find out your mistake (erreur, fem.) before an hour.-
Is your letter written? No, not quite. Make haste to finish it.—And
why should I make haste to finish it? You must make haste, (§ 151,)
if you wish it to go by the steamship. I thought it went only (ne
mettait à la voile, que) on Wednesday next. (N. p. 167.) That is true;
but from Boston, not New York. And my letter must go (§ 151) from
here to Boston by the mail, (le courrier.) So that I must make haste,
as you say. Go then and tell William to get ready, so as to carry it
to the post office (la poste) as soon as I finish it. Do not be afraid,
you have yet time enough. Do not speak to me, or else I shall not
be able to finish it in time.
Do you wonder at (de) what takes place? No; now, nothing
astonishes me. Everything is now so astonishing, so wonderful, that
nothing appears extraordinary.-Why does that woman weep? Has
her child been dead long?—This little girl weeps because she has
lost a five cent piece; have you not one to give her?-Does that
man live at his own expense, or at that of other people ?-Does it
depend on him to do that?-Does not that marriage depend on his
brother-in-law ?-On whom does it depend then ?-I wonder whether
(662) the general will be elected? (élire,* 4, like lire.)-Shall I go
and tell them to make less noise?-Shall I go and buy you a bottle
of cologne ?
Then, thus, consequently.
Therefore.
The other day.
In a short time.
VOCABULAIRE. 2de Sec.
Ennui.
Lately.
In.
Donc.
C'est pourquoi. Ennui, l'ennui.
L'autre jour.
Dernièrement.
Dans peu de temps. Dans, en.
Obs. 158. When speaking of time, dans expresses the epoch, and en the
duration.
976.
SEVENTY-FIRST LESSON. (2.)
He will arrive in a week, (when a
week is elapsed.)
Il arrivera dans huit jours.
It took him a week to make this Il a fait ce voyage en huit jours.
journey.
He will have finished his studies in
three months.
He finished his studies in a year.
He has applied himself particularly
to geometry and mathematics.
He has a good many friends.
Il aura fini ses études dans trois
mois.
Il a fini ses études en un an.
Il a fait une étude particulière de la
géométrie et des mathématiques.
Il a bien des amis.
Il a beaucoup d'amis.
Obs. 159. The word bien is always followed by the article, and beaucoup
by the preposition de.
You have a great deal of patience.
They have a great deal of money.
You have a great deal of courage.
To make a present of something to
some one.
Mr. Lambert wrote to me lately,
that his sisters would be here in a
short time, and requested me to
tell you so; you will then be able
to see them, and to give them the
books which you have bought.
They hope that you will make
them a present of them. Their
brother has assured me that they
esteem you, without knowing you
personally.
To want amusement.
To get or be tired.
How could I get tired in your com-
pany?
He gets tired everywhere.
Agreeable, (pleasing.) Tiresome.
To be welcome.
You are welcome everywhere.
}+
Vous avez bien le la patience.
Vous avez beaucoup de patience.
Ils ont bien de l'argent.
Vous avez bien du courage.
Faire présent de quelque chose à
quelqu'un.
Monsieur Lambert m'écrivit l'autre
jour que mesdemoiselles ses sœurs
viendraient ici dans peu de temps.
et me pria de vous le dire. Vous
pourrez donc les voir, et leur donner
les livres que vous avez achetés.
Elles espèrent que vous leur en
ferez présent. Leur frère m'a as-
suré qu'elles vous estiment, sans
vous connaître personnellement.
+ S'ennuyer, 1.
† Comment pourrais-je m'ennuyer
auprès de vous ?
Il s'ennuie partout.
Agréable. Ennuyeux-euse, fém
+ Être le bienvenu.
+ Vous êtes partout le bienvenu.
SOIXANTE-ONZIÈME THÊME. 2de Sec.
Voudriez-vous n'avoir rien à faire? Non, je vous assure, car je
m'ennuierais comme tous ceux qui n'ont pas d'occupations. Vous
avez bien raison. Cependant il y a bien des jeunes gens qui vou-
draient ne point avoir d'occupation. Ils ne savent pas ce qu'ils dési-
rent. Ils s'ennuieraient s'ils n'en avaient point.-Que faisait-il der-
nièrement? Rien, c'est pourquoi il mourait d'ennui.-Le colonel
n'arrivera-i-il pas dans peu de temps? Au contraire, il va joindre
SEVENTY-SECOND LESSON. (1.)
377
son régiment, (to join his regiment.À quel régiment appartient-il?
I appartient au cinquième régiment. Que dessina-t-elle l'autre
jour? Quand je la vis, elle dessinait le nouveau paquebot.-J'en-
tends toujours Mme. G.... gronder sa demoiselle parce qu'elle ne
se tient pas droit, la voilà, ne trouvez-vous pas qu'elle se tient comme
il faut? Elle se tient aussi droit qu'il le faut.—Quand le capitaine
- joindra-t-il sa compagnie? Il la joindra dans 3 jours.-Combien de
jours lui faut-il pour faire le voyage? Il lui en faut 8, et comme i
est en chemin depuis 5 jours, il lui en faut encore 3 pour le finir.
Will you drink a cup (une tasse) of tea? I thank you; I do not
like tea.-Do you like coffee? I like it, but I have just (492, Obs.
115) drunk some. Do you not get tired here? How could I get
tired in this agreeable society? As to me, I always want amuse-
ment. If you did as I do, you would not want amusement, for I
listen to all those who tell me anything. In this manner I learn
many anecdotes, a thousand agreeable things, and I have no time
to get tired; but you do nothing of that kind, (de tout cela,) that is
the reason why you want amusement. I would do everything like
(comme) you, if I had no reason to be sad.-Have you seen Mr.
Lambert? I have seen him; he told me that his sisters would be
here in a short time, and desired (prier) me to tell you so.
When they have arrived (463, Obs. 106) you may give them the
gold rings (la bague) which you have bought to make them a present
of. Will they receive them? Oh! yes, for they love you without
knowing you personally.-Has my sister already written to you?
She has written to me many times, and I am going to answer her,
for her letters are always agreeable and welcome, (bienvenues.)—
Shall I (faut-il) tell her that you are here? Tell her; but do not tell
her that I am waiting for her impatiently.-Why have you not
brought (58³, Obs. 142) your sister along with you? Which one?
The one you always bring, the youngest. She did not wish to go out,
because she has the toothache.-I am very sorry for it, for she is a
very good girl.-How old is she? She is nearly fifteen years old.
She is very tall (grande) for her age, (l'âge.)—How old are you? I
am twenty-two. Is it possible! I thought you were not yet twenty.
SEVENTY-SECOND LESSON, 72d.-Soixante-douzième Leçon, 72me.
1re Sec.
VOCABULAIRE.
OF NEGATIONS.-Des Négations.
See (§ 171) for the manner of using them, and consult the article when
necessary.
82*
378
SEVENTY-ECOND LESSON. (1.)
Have you none of my copybooks?
I have none, and I have seen none.
Have you neither seen nor heard the
great lady singer? (§ 171—4.)
No, and I shall neither see nor hear
her.
N'avez-vous aucun de mes cahiers?
Je n'en ai aucun, et je n'en ai vu
aucun.
N'avez-vous ni vu ni entendu la
grande cantatrice?
Non, et je ne la verrai ni ne l'en-
tendrai.
I neither care about seeing nor hear- Je ne me soucie ni de la voir ni de
ing her.
l'entendre.
What did he do as soon as he had Que fit-il aussitôt qu'il eut reconnu
recognised his sister?
No sooner had he recognised her
than he threw himself in her arms.
Touch neither the flowers nor the
fruits.
I shall touch neither these nor those.
Does that seamstress earn but two
dollars a week?
That seamstress earns but two.
Would she not gain more if she was
a mantua-maker ?
sa sœur ?
Il ne l'eut pas plutôt reconnue qu'il
se jeta dans ses bras.
Ne touchez ni les fleurs ni les fruits.
Je ne toucherai ni ceux-ci ni celles-
là.
Cette couturière ne gagne-t-elle que
deux gourdes par semaine?
Cette couturière n'en gagne que
deux.
N'en gagnerait-elle pas davantage si
elle était faiseuse de robes ?
simples ne se place toujours avant,
verbe.
Ainsi nous voyons qu'avec les temps
et le complément, toujours après le
Moreover, besides. Besides that.
Besides what I have just said.
There are no means of finding money
now.
To push, shove, jog. Do not... me.
Along the road. Along the street.
Ail along..
All the year round.
To enable to.
To enable John to...
That enabled me to go.
To be able to.
He is able to do it.
To the right.
hand.
En outre, d'ailleurs. Outre cela.
Outre ce que je viens de dire.
Il n'y a pas moyen de trouver de
l'argent à présent.
Pousser, 1.
Ne me poussez pas.
Le long de la
Le long du chemin.
rue.
Tout le long de ...
+ Tout le long de l'année.
Mettre à même de.
Mettre Jean à même de...
Çela me mit à même d'y aller.
Être en état ou être à même de.
Il est en état (à même) de le faire.
Sur la droite.
On the right side or
Straight on.
|
À droite.
To the left. On the left side or hand.
Could you not tell me which is the
nearest way to the city gate ?-to
the bridge?
Follow (or go along) this street, and
when you are at the end of it,
droit.
A gauche.
Towl
Sur la gauche.
Ne pourriez-vous pas me dire quel
est le chemin le plus court pour
arriver à la porte de la ville ?-au
pont ?
Suivez (allez tout le long de) conte
rue, et quand vous serez au bout,
SEVENTY-SECOND LESSON. (1.)
379
turn to the right, and you will find
a cross-way, which you must go
through.
And then, where shall I go?
You will then enter a broad street,
which will bring you to a public
square, on the right you will see a
blind alley or court.
You must leave the blind alley on
your left, and pass under the arcade
that is near it.
Then you must ask again.
An arcade.
The cross-way.
A court.
A blind alley.
To cross, to cross over. Let us cross.
tournez à droite, vous trouverez un
carrefour, que vous traverserez.
Et puis, où irai-je ?
Puis vous entrerez dans une rue as-
sez large, qui vous mènera sur une
grande place publique, à droite
vous verrez un cul-de-sac ou une
impasse.
Vous laisserez le cul-de-sac à main
gauche, et vous passerez sous les
arcades qui sont à côté.
+ Ensuite vous demanderez.
Une arcade. Le carrefour.
Un cul-de-sac. Une impasse.
Traverser, 1. Traversons.
SOIXANTE-DOUZIÈME THEME. 1re Sec.
Est-elle en état d'aller à pied jusqu'à la promenade publique?
Non, elle n'est pas en état de s'y rendre à pied. D'ailleurs, ie mé-
decin n'a-t-il pas défendu qu'elle aille (§ 151) à pied? Oui, il l'a
défendu; d'ailleurs, elle ne peut plus mettre ses souliers. Il faut que
nous ayons une voiture. Par où passerons-nous? Nous irons tout
le long de notre rue, jusqu'au jardin public, là nous nous arrêterons
quelques instants. Pour la laisser reposer, n'est-ce pas ? Oui, et en
outre, pour la laisser jouir du frais, (de la fraicheur, cool, coolness.)-
Après cela, ne traverserons-nous pas le jardin public? Non. Per-
sonne n'y passe en voiture.—Où irons-nous donc ? Nous tournerons
à gauche, et nous passerons sous l'arcade du coin, où elle pourra
prendre le verre d'eau minérale ordonnée par le médecin. N'en
prendrons-nous pas aussi? Si fait; quoique le docteur ne l'ait pas
ordonnée. De quel côté tournerons-nous ensuite? A droite, jusqu'à
l'impasse du voleur. Nous laisserons cette impasse à gauche, et
nous irons tout droit jusqu'à la promenade publique. Là, nous
descendrons.-La couturière est-elle venue ?-La faiseuse de robes
a-t-elle envoyé les robes neuves?-Qui est votre faiseuse de robes?
Who pushes me so? I cannot write, if you do it any more.
body pusnes you. No, nobody pushes me now, but somebody did
push me a little while ago. Nobody has pushed you. You write
badly, and you will blame us for it.-Why does that officer push that
man all along the street? Because he is a good-for-nothing fellow,
who will do nothing.-What is the gardener going to put all along
this wall? He is going to put some trees there. Fruit-trees? (Des
arbres fruitiers?) Plum-trees here, pear-trees there, further on
No-
¹ Pêche, pêcher, peach-tree; pomme, pommier, apple-tree; abricot, abri.
cotier. apricot-tree: hence, prunier, cerisier, amandier, rosier, (rose-bush.)
380
SEVENTY-SECOND LESSON. (2.)
peach-trees. Is he not going to put cherry-trees there? No, because
they grow too big, (ils viennent trop gros,) and so do apple-trees-
Is it difficult to get money now? No, it is not difficult to find, but
as usual you must give a good security, (bonne sécurité.)—Can you
procure me any?-What security have you to give? Is not my
name sufficient? A single name is not sufficient for capitalists, (un
capitaliste ou rentier.)
What did you do for him? I lent him a horse, and that has
enabled him to join his regiment in time.-Why did he not start on
horseback? He did not, because he depended on the steamboats.
-What has become of them? One has been burned, so that he
could not have continued his journey (voyage) if I had not lent him
a horse. Has he sent him back? (renvoyer, 1.) I suppose the horse
is on the way; but as it requires four days for the journey, he will
arrive only the day after to-morrow.-Did the colonel write to you by
mail, or did he send a message by the electric telegraph? We have no
electric telegraph along our roads, so that he wrote me by mail.—In
the forests there must be (il doit y avoir) many cross-ways, (bien des,)
how can the mail-riders (lés courriers) recognise them? They are
ased to them.
VOCABULAIRE. 2de Sec.
Dans les temps composés. (§ 171—4, 5.)
Were any of the workmen called?
Not one of them was called.
Nobody has been called.
Would she have done but that?
She would have done but little more,
or, she would not have done much
more.
Has she left my book anywhere?
She left it nowhere.
To get (or be) married. Do not get m.
To marry somebody.
To marry, (to give in marriage.)
My cousin, having given his sister in
marriage, married Miss Delby.
Is your cousin married?
No, he is still a bachelor.
Is your niece married?
No, but she is going to be married
To be a bachelor. An old bachelor.
An old girl, maid.
Embarrassed, puzzled, at a loss.
An embarrassment, a puzzle
A-t-on appelé aucun des ouvriers ?
On n'en a appelé aucun.
On n'a appelé personne.
N'aurait-elle fait que cela?
Elle n'en aurait fait guère plus, ou
elle n'en aurait guère plus fait.
A-t-elle laissé mon livre quelque
part ?
Elle ne l'a laissé nulle part.
+ Se marier, 1. Ne vous mariez pas.
Epouser, 1, quelqu'un.
Marier, (donner en mariage.)
Mon cousin, ayant marié sa sœur,
épousa Mademoiselle Delby.
M. votre cousin est-il marié ?
Non, il est encore garçon.
Votre nièce est-elle mariée ?
Non, mais elle va se marier.
Être garçon. Un vieux garçon.
Une vieille fille.
Embarrassé.
Un embarras.
SEVENTY-SECOND LESSON. (2.)
381
You embarrass (puzzle) me.
You puzzle (perplex) me.
He asks my sister in marriage.
The measure.
T'o take measures.
I shall take other measures.
Vous m'embarrassez.
Vous me mettez dans l'embarras.
Il demande ma sœur en mariage.
La mesure.
Prendre des mesures.
Je prendrai d'autres mesures.
Goodness! how rapidly time passes Mon Dieu! que le temps passe vite
in your society!
The compliment.
dans votre société! (en votre com-
pagnie.)
Le compliment.
You make me a compliment which I Vous me faites un compliment au-
do not know how to answer.
It is not my fault.
1
Do not lay it to my charge.
To lay the fault to one's charge.
Who can help it? Whose fault is it?
I cannot help it.
The delay. He does it without delay.
I must go, (must be off.) I am off.
Go away!
Begone!
To jest, joke, be in fun. Do not trifle.
The jest, joke.
You are jesting.
|
quel je ne sais que répondre.
Ce n'est pas ma faute.
Ne me l'imputez pas.
Imputer, 1, la faute à quelqu'un.
À qui est la faute ?
Je ne sais qu'y faire.
Je ne saurais qu'y faire.
Le délai. Il le fait sans délai.
Je me sauve.
Sauvez-vous!
Je vais me sauver.
Allez-vous-en!
Plaisanter, 1.
Ne plaisantez point.
La plaisanterie, le badinage.
Vous badinez. Vous vous moquez.
Si la négation forme le nominatif, il y a un changement dans la manière
de l'employer. (§ 151—6.)
Does anything please them?
No, since their return nothing pleases
them.
Nobody cares to have them.
Neither suit me.
Quelque chose leur plaît-il?
Non, depuis leur retour rien ne leur
plaît.
Personne ne se soucie de les avoir.
Nil'un ni l'autre ne me conviennent.
Neither these nor those houses will Ni ces maisons-ci ni celles-là ne se
sell dear.
None of my friends is going.
No one knows it.
vendront cher.
Aucun de mes amis n'y va.
Nul, (pas un) ne le sait.
SOIXANTE-DOUZIÈME THÊME. 2de Sec.
Votre sœur, m'a-t-on dit, se marie bientôt.-Oui, elle se mariera
la semaine prochaine. Ne devait-elle pas se marier le mois passé ?
Si fait, mais le colonel qu'elle va épouser n'a pas pu quitter son
régiment alors. Est-il ici pour long-temps? Non, il n'y restera
que quelques semaines. C'est dommage (572) qu'il soit obligé
(§ 151) de partir si tôt, n'est-ce pas? Je presume qu'il aura le temps
de passer la lune de miel (honey-moon) ici. En outre, s'il ne reste
pas, ce n'est pas sa faute. Il prendra, peut-être, des mesures pour
ne pas partir si tôt. Mlle. S-, ne va-t-elle pas se marier? Nɔn,
elle a tant d'admirateurs (admirers) qu'elle est embarrassée dans
382
SEVENTY-SECOND LESSON. (2.)
son choix.-Qui vous blâme? Mon oncle me blâme, mais je ne
saurais qu'y faire. Est-ce ma faute, si j'ai mauvaise mémoire? II
me faut si long-temps pour apprendre mes leçons, que je m'ennuie,
que je m'endors, et que je n'apprends rien.-Votre oncle Jacques est
un vieux garçon, n'est-ce pas ? Non, il est marié, mais il n'a pas
d'enfants.-Votre cousine est presque vieille fille, n'est-ce pas ? Oui,
c'est tout-à-fait une vieille fille.
Bless me! how rapidly time passes in your society!-You make
me a compliment which I do not know how to answer.-Have you
bought your watch in Paris? I have not bought it; my uncle has
made me a present of it, (en.)-What has that woman intrusted
you with? She has intrusted me with a secret about a (d'un) great
count who is in great embarrassment about the (à cause du) marriage
of one of his daughters.-Does any one ask her in marriage? The
man who demands her in marriage is a nobleman of the neighbor-
hood, (le voisinage.)-Is he rich? No, he is a poor devil, (diable,)'
who has not a sou, (le sou,) and who, besides, is old and disagreea-
ble. You say you have no friends among your schoolfellows, (le
condisciple;) but is it not your fault? You have spoken ill (mal parlé)
of them, and they have not offended you.
What are you astonished at? I am astonished to find you still in
bed. If you knew how (combien) sick I am, you would not be
astonished (fem.) at it.-John, (Jean !)—What is your pleasure, Sir?
Bring some wine. Presently, Sir.-Henry! Madam? Make the
fire, (du feu.) The maid-servant has made it already.-Bring me
some paper, pens, and ink. Bring me also some sand (du sable) or
blotting-paper, (du papier brouillard,) sealing-wax, (de la cire à
cacheter,) and a light, (de la lumière.)-I am going for the blotting-
paper, the sealing-wax, and the light; but we have no sand.-Never
mind the sand. Afterwards you will go to my sister's, to tell her
not to wait for me. Be back again before 12 o'clock, to carry my
letters to the post-office. Very well, Madam.-Do not fail, for you
know that the mail closes (se ferme) at 12, and the letters must be
(il faut que, §151) in the post office before (avant que, § 151) the
hour strikes. I will not fail, Madam; you may depend upon it.
1 Those two expressions: Mon Dieu! and Diable, are constantly used
by the French. The first is their only interjection for a host of English
ones, such as: Bless me! Oh dear! Dear me ! Gracious! Goodness! &c. &c.
The second is connected with every sort of epithets; such as: bon diable,
(good or clever fellow); mauvais diable, (bad fellow,) vilain, vieux, petit,
grand, gros, beau, &c. &c. Whoever wishes to speak French with French
people, ought to become familiar with the terms, if not to use them himself,
at least to understand those who do. Hence, however reluctantly, we fol
low the text of Ollendorff.
SEVENTY-SECOND LESSON. (3.)
383
VOCABULAIRE.
3me Sec.
Avec l'infinitif. (§ 171-7.) That article must be carefully studied.
He likes to do nothing.
Has she ever promised not to touch
No, never.
your watch?
What are they afraid of?
Il aime à ne rien faire.
A-t-elle jamais promis de ne pas
toucher votre montre ?
jamais.
Not to De quoi ont-ils peur ?
have done their task in time.
.Does your cousin expect many people
to her soirée ?
She is afraid she will have but few.
He cannot take a joke, is no joker.
To beg some one's pardon.
To pardon.
I beg your pardon.
Pardon me.
The pardon. The time-piece, house
clock.
To advance, go too fast. Is it too fast?
The watch goes too fast, (gains.)
To retard, go too slow. Is it too
slow?
!
Non,
De ne pas
avoir fait leur tâche à temps.
Votre cousine attend-elle beaucoup
de monde à sa soirée ?
Elle craint de n'en avoir que peu
(282, Obs. 65.)
+ Il n'entend pas raillerie.
Demander pardon à quelqu'un.
Pardonner, 1.
Je vous demande pardon.
Le pardon.
Pardonnez-moi.
Cette pendule.
Avancer, 1.
Avance-t-elle ?
La montre avance.
Retarder, 1.
Retarde-t-elle ?
The time-piece goes too slow, (loses.) La pendule retarde.
My watch has stopped.
To go right, to stop, to go wrong.
Where did we stop?
We left off at the fortieth lesson, page
one hundred and thirty-six.
To wind up a (town clock,) a watch.
To regulate a watch, a time-piece, a
clock.
Your watch is twenty minutes too
fast, and mine a quarter of an hour
too slow.
It will soon strike twelve.
Has it already struck twelve?
To strike. Make the clock strike.
What hour is striking?
On condition, or provided.
It is one.
I will lend you money, provided you
will henceforth be more economi-
cal than you have hitherto been.
Hereafter, for the future, henceforth.
The future. My prospect, fate.
Economical.
Ma montre s'est arrêtée.
Aller bien, s'arrêter, 1, aller mal.
† Où en étions-nous ?
† Nous étions à la leçon quarante,
page cent-trente-six.
Monter une horloge, une montre.
Régler une montre, une pendule, une
horloge.
Votre montre avance de vingt mi-
nutes, et la mienne retarde d'un
quart d'heure.
Il va sonner midi.
Midi est-il déjà sonné?
Sonner, 1. Faites sonner la pendule.
Quelle heure sonne-t-il ? C'est une
heure.
À condition.
Sous condition.
Je vous prêterai de l'argent, à con-
dition que vous serez désormais
plus économe que vous n'avez été
jusqu'ici.
Désormais, dorénavant, à l'avenir.
L'avenir.
Mon avenir.
Économe, économique, ménager.
384
SEVENTY-SECOND LESSON. (3.)
To renounce gambling. Renounce it.
To follow advice (counsel). Follow the
good.
You look so melancholy.
Adieu, farewell.
God be with you, good-by.
Till I see you again.
I hope to see you again soon.
Renoncer au jeu.
Renoncez-y.
Suivre un conseil. Suivez les bons
Vous avez l'air si mélancolique.
Adieu.
Au plaisir de vous revoir.
Sans adieu, au revoir.
Quand le verbe est omis (omettre,* 4, to omit.) ($ 151-8.) Study it
carefully.
What is he afraid of?
Nothing.
De quoi a-t-il peur ?
De rien.
Whom is she afraid of?
Whom does she fear?
Do you want five ?
Nobody.
No one.
Not more than
De qui a-t-elle peur?
Qui craint-elle ?
De personne.
Personne.
two.
Vous en faut-il cinq?
deux.
Pas plus de
SOIXANTE-DOUZIÈME THÊME. 3me Sec.
:
Quelle heure est-il? Il est plus d'une heure et demie.-Vous
dites qu'il est une heure et demie, et à ma montre, il n'est que midi
et demi. En moins de vingt-cinq minutes deux heures sonneront.
Pardonnez-moi, une heure n'est pas encore sonnée. Je vous assure
qu'il est deux heures moins vingt-quatre minutes, car ma montre va
très-bien.—Va-t-elle aussi bien qu'un chronomètre? Je crois qu'elle
va mieux que bien des chronomètres. Elle va mieux que notre
horloge, qu'on est obligé de régler toutes les semaines.-Comment
va votre pendule? Elle va supérieurement aussi. Ni ma montre ni
notre pendule ne varient (varier, 1, to vary) d'une minute dans six
mois. Elles vont toujours ensemble. Votre montre doit être arrêtée
ou dérangée, (out of order.) Est-elle montée? Je l'ai montée hier
soir en me couchant.—À quelle condition le feriez-vous ?-Suivez
son conseil à condition qu'il suive (§ 151) le vôtre.-Son avenir ne
serait-il pas moins incertain s'il était plus économe? Ne le serait-il
pas encore moins s'il renonçait au jeu? Donnez-lui en le conseil.
Je n'y manquerai pas. Adieu, au plaisir. Sans adieu.
Your schoolfellows have done you good, and nevertheless you
have quarrelled with them; why did you? Was it my fault? I
think it was theirs. Never mind. You must, without delay, make
your peace with them.-Dialogue (le dialogue) between a tailor and
his journeyman, (le garçon.)-Charles, have you taken the clothes to
the Count Narissi? Yes, Sir, I have taken them to him.-What did
he say? He said nothing but (sinon) that he had a great mind to
give me a box on the ear, (des soufflets, plur.,) because I had not
brought them sooner.-What did you answer him? Sir, said I, I do
not understand that joke: pay me what you owe me; and if you do
SEVENTY-THIRD LESSON. (1.)
385
not do so instantly, I shall take other measures. Scarcely had I said
that, when he put his hand to his sword, (porter la main à son épée,)
and I ran away.
Has it already struck twelve? Yes, madam, t is already half-
past twelve. Is it so late? Is it possible? That is not late, it is
still early.-Does your watch go well? (bien?) No, Miss N., it is a
quarter of an hour too fast. And mine is half an hour too slow.
Perhaps it has stopped. In fact, you are right.—Is it wound up?—
It is wound up, and yet (pourtant) it does not go.-Do you hear? it
Is striking one o'clock. Then I will regulate my watch and go
home.-Pray (de grâce) stay a little longer, (encore un peu!) I can-
not, for we dine precisely at one o'clock, (à une heure précise.) Adieu,
then, till I see you again.-You say you want fifty dollars; I will
lend them to you with all my heart, but on condition that you will
renounce gambling, (renoncer au jeu,) and be more economical thau
you have hitherto been. I see now that you are my friend, and I
love you too much not to follow your advice.
SEVENTY-THIRD LESSON, 73d.—Soixante-treizième Leçon, 73me
VOCABULAIRE. 1re Sec.
To last, (to wear well,) stand.
short time.
That cloth will wear well.
How long has that coat lasted you?
It lasted me a year.
That color is not a standing one.
A Durer, 1.
To my, his, her, their, our liking.
To everybody's liking.
Nobody can do anything to his liking.
A boarding-house. A boarding-school.
To keep house, (a boarding-house.)
To board with any one or anywhere.
To be a boarder.
To exclaim.
To make uneasy.
To get or grow uneasy.
'To be uneasy.
Why do yo fret, (are you uneasy?)
I do not fret, (am not uneasy.)
That news niakes me uneasy.
Peu de temps
Ce drap durera bien.
Combien de temps cet habit vous
a-t-il duré ? Il m'a duré un an.
Cette couleur n'est pas de durée.
(11¹, Obs. 27.)
A mon, son, leur, notre, gré.
Au gré de tout le monde.
On ne peut rien faire à son gré.
Une pension.
Tenir maison.
Etre en pension.
pension.
S'écrier, 1.
Inquiéter, 1.
S'inquiéter.
Tenir pension.
Se mettre en
Être pensionnaire.
Être inquiet, fem. inquiète.
Pourquoi vous inquiétez-vous ?
Je ne m'inquiète pas.
Cette nouvelle m'inquiète.
I am uneasy at not receiving any Je suis inquiet de ne point recevoirs
news.
de nouvelles.
38
386
SEVENTY-THIRD LESSON. (1.)
She is uneasy about that affair.
Do not be uneasy.
The uneasiness, trouble.
Quiet.
To quiet.
Be quiet, just wait, stop.
Compose yourself.
To change, alter, fade, pass away.
That man has altered a great deal
since I saw him.
To be of use.
Of what use is that to you?
That is of no use to me.
Of what use is that to your brother?
It is of no use to him.
Of what use is that stick to you?
I use it to beat my dogs.
Of what use are those baskets to
your brother?
Elle est inquiète sur cette affaire.
Ne vous inquiétez pas.
L'inquiétude.
Tranquille. Soyez tranquille.
Tranquilliser, 1. Tranquiflisez-vous
Changer, 1. La couleur change.
Cet homme a beaucoup changé de
puis que je ne l'ai vu.
+ Servir,* 2, à quelque chose.
† À quoi cela vous sert-il?
† Cela ne me sert à rien.
† À quoi cela sert-il à votre frère ”
† Cela ne lui sert à rien.
† À quoi ce bâton vous sert-il?
† Il me sert à battre mes chiens.
+ À quoi ces paniers servent-ils à
votre frère ?
He uses them to carry his vegetables † Ils lui servent à porter ses légumes
to market.
au marché.
Il s'en sert pour
porter ses légumes au marché.
SOIXANTE-TREIZIÈME THÊME. 1re Sec.
De quel drap ferez-vous emplette? Je veux du drap vert; mais
je veux qu'il dure et que la couleur tienne (§ 151), qu'elle ne passe
pas. Si vous voulez de bon drap, il faut aller chez les Messieurs
Ne demeurent-ils pas au coin de cette rue-ci? Si fait, c'est
là qu'ils ont leur magasin. Au dessus du (above the) magasin n'y
a-t-il pas une pension bien tenue? Si fait, il y a ce qu'on appelle
une pension à la mode, (a fashionable boarding-house.)-Vous con
naissez-vous en drap? Oui, assez bien.-Voulez-vous venir m'aider
à en choisir? Volontiers.- Mais ne vous inquiétez pas, soyez
tranquille; car si vous achetez le drap chez ces MM.
,
il sera
bon et la couleur tiendra, elle ne changera pas, je vous assure.—
Votre cousin a beaucoup changé dernièrement, a-t-il été malade ?
Son épouse est encore plus changée.-Sont-ils dans une bonne pen-
sion? Combien de pensionnaires y a-t-il ?-Quel est le prix de la
pension ?-Si votre associé reste dans une mauvaise pension, à quoi
lui sert son argent?-Est-il avare ?-S'il est marié, pourquoi ne tient-il
pas maison ?-La pension leur convient-elle ?
Sir, may (oser) I ask where General B- lives? He lives near
the arsenal, (arsenal, mas.,) on the other side of the river.—Could you
tell me which road I must (je dois) take to go there? You must go
(§ 151) along the shore, and at the end take a little street (quand
vous serez au bout, prenez une petite rue) on the right, which will
lead you straight to his house. It is a fine house; you will find it
easily. I thank you, Sir.-Does Captain N-live here? Yes,
SEVENTY-THIRD LESSON. (2.)
387
Sii; walk in, (donnez-vous la peine d'entrer,) if you please.Is the
captain at home? I wish to have the honor (l'honneur) to speak
to him. Yes, Sir, he is at home.-Whom shall I have the honor to
announce? (annoncer?) I am from B, and my name is F.
-Who keeps this fashionable boarding-house? Miss P, an
old maid.
Last summer, when we were a hunting together, (ensemble,)
night grew upon us (la nuit nous surprit) at ten leagues (une lieue) at
least from our country seat, (la maison de campagne.)-Well, (Eh
bien,) where did you pass the night? I was very uneasy at first,
but your brother, not in the least, (pas le moins du monde ;) on the
contrary, in his opinion (gré) it was an agreeable incident; he tran-
quillized me so that I lost my uneasiness. After some time we
found a peasant's hut, where we passed the night. Here I had an
opportunity to see how clever your brother is. A few benches and
a truss of straw (une botte de paille) served him to make a comforta·
ble (commode) bed; he used a bottle as a candlestick, another bundle
of straw served us as a pillow, and our cravats as nightcaps. When
we awoke in the morning, we were as fresh and healthy (bien por-
tant) as if we had slept in our own beds.
VOCABULAIRE.
Of what use are these bottles to your
landlord?
They serve him to put his wine in.
To stand instead, to be as.
1
use my gun as a stick.
This hole serves him for a house.
He used his cravat as a nightcap.
To avail.
What avails it to you to cry?
It avails me nothing.
Opposite to.
Opposite that house.
Opposite the garden.
Opposite to me.
Right opposite.
He lives opposite the arsenal.
I live opposite the king's library.
To get hold of...
To take possession of.
To witness.
2de Sec.
† A quoi ces bouteilles servent-elles
à votre hôte ?
+ Elles lui servent à mettre son vin.
+ Servir,* de.
+ Mon fusil me sert de bâton.
† Ce trou lui sert de maison.
† Sa cravate lui a servi de bonnet de
nuit.
+ Servir,* (de before inf.)
† À quoi vous sert-il de pleurer?
† Cela ne me sert à rien.
Vis-à-vis de.
Vis-à-vis de cette maison.
Vis-à-vis du jardin.
Vis-à-vis de moi.
Tout vis-à-vis.
Il demeure vis-à-vis de l'arsenal.
Je demeure vis-à-vis de la biblio.
thèque royale.
Seizé upon it. S'emparer de... Emparez-vous-en
To show.
"To give evidence against some one.
Témoigner, 1.
Témoigner contre quelqu'un.
388
SEVENTY-THIRD LESSON. (2.)
He has shown a great deal of friend-, Il m'a témoigné beaucoup d'amitié
ship to me.
To turn some one into ridicule.
To become ridiculous.
To make one's self ridiculous.
To be born.
Where were you born?
I was born in this country.
Where was your sister born?
Tourner quelqu'un en ridicule.
Tomber dans le ridicule.
Se rendre ridicule.
Etre né.
† Où êtes-vous né?
† Je suis né dans ce pays-ci.
† Où votre sœur est-elle née ?
She was born in the United States of † Elle est née aux États Unis de
North America.
Where were your brothers born?
They were born in France.
The game. The game-bag, pouch.
The feathers.
A horse-hair.
A pillow.
A hair cushion.
A cushion, down.
A down pillow.
The boarder.
The pensioner.
l'Amérique du Nord.
† Où vos frères sont-ils nés ?
† Ils sont nés en France.
Le gibier.
Un crin.
La gibecière.
Les plumes.
Un oreiller. Un coussin, le duvet.
Un coussin de crin. Un oreiller de
duvet.
Le pensionnaire... du gouverne-
ment.
SOIXANTE-TREIZIÈME THÊME. 2de Sec.
À quoi lui sert de savoir le Français, si elle ne le parle, ni ne le
lit, ni ne le pratique ? (§ 171-3.) Il lui servira quand elle voyagera
en Europe. Se sert-il de sa gibecière pour oreiller? Oui, lorsqu'il
se couche sous les arbres à la campagne.-A quoi vous sert de vous
affliger? Je ne peux m'empêcher d'être affligé du malheur arrivé
à mon ami.-Son cheval lui sert-il à quelque chose? Il se promène
à cheval tous les jours.-Où son fils est-il né? Il est né à Philadel-
phie. Sa fille y est-elle née aussi? Oui, elle est née dans la
maison vis-à-vis.—Si vous étiez né en Écosse, mon petit bon homme,
que seriez-vous? Je serais écossais, n'est-ce pas ? C'est vrai. Et
votre sœur que serait-elle, si elle y était née? Elle serait écossais
aussi. Non pas écossais, mais écossaise.-De quoi le voleur s'est-il
emparé? Il s'est emparé de tout ce qu'il a pu.-Qui a témoigné
contre lui? Le bijoutier qui demeurait vis-à-vis de la poste, et
l'aubergiste qui demeure au coin de la place où se trouve la bibli-
othèque de la ville.-Ne tournez personne en ridicule. Aimeriez-
vous à être tourné en ridicule ?—Ne ferai-je pas bien de le battre, s'il
me tourne en ridicule?
Which is the shortest (court) way to the arsenal? (un arsenal?)
Go down (suivez) this street, and when you come to the end (au
bout,) turn to the left, and take the cross-way, (vous trouverez un—
que vous traverserez ;) you will then enter into a rather narrow (étroit)
street, which will lead you to a great square, (la place,) where you
will see a blind alley.-Through (par) which I must pass? No, for
SEVENTY-FOURTH LESSON. (1.)
389
there is no outlet, (une issue.) You must leave it on the right, and
pass under the arcade which is near it.-And then? And then you
must inquire, (further.)—I am very much obliged to you.-Do not
mention it, (il n'y a pas de quoi.)—Are you able to translate an
English letter into French? I am.-Who has taught you? My
French master has enabled me to do it.--Was your French teacher
born in France? No, he was not.
Your mother is wrong to fret about her eldest son; for, although
he is (§ 151) in the army, (à l'armée,) he knows how to get out of a
bad scrape.—A candidate (un candidat) petitioned (demander à) the
king of Prussia (de Prusse) for an employment, (un emploi.) This
prince asked him where he was born. "I was born at Berlin,"
answered he. "Begone!" said the monarch, (le monarque,) "all
the men of Berlin (un Berlinois) are good for nothing." "I beg
your majesty's pardon,” replied the candidate ; "there are some good
ones, and I know two." "Which are those two ?" asked the king.
'The first," replied the candidate, "is your majesty, and I am the
second." The king could not help laughing (ne put s'empêcher de
rire) at this answer, and granted (accorder) the request, (la de-
mande.)
SEVENTY-FOURTH LESSON.-Soixante-quatorzième Leçon, 74me.
VOCABULAIRE. 1re Sec.
To lose sight of.
The sight. My sight is good.
have good sigh.t.)
Perdre de vue.
(I La vue.
I wear spectacles because my sight
is bad, (or I have a bad sight.) (242,
Obs. 55.)
† J'ai bonne vue.
Je porte des lunettes parce que j'ai
la vue mauvaise, (ou mauvaise vue.)
Are you near-sighted, or long-sighted? † Avez-vous la vue courte ou longue?
I am near-sighted.
† J'ai la vue courte.
The ship is so far off, that we shall Le bâtiment est si loin, que nous le
soon lose sight of it.
I have lost sight o that.
•
As it is long since was in England,
I have lost sight of your brother.
As it is long since I have read any
French, I have lost sight of it.
perdrons bientôt de vue.
J'ai perdu cela de vue.
Comme il y a long-temps que je n'ai
été en Angleterre, j'ai perdu votre
frère de vue.
Comme il y a long-temps que je n'ai
lu de Français, je l'ai perdu de vue.
Obs. 160. Ought and should (when it means ought) are rendered into
French by the conditionnel (148) of the verb devoir, to owe. Ought to
have, should have, by the conditionnel passé. (§ 149.)
33*
390
SEVENTY-FOURTH LESSON. (1.)
You ought to or should do that.
Vous devriez faire cela.
He ought not to speak thus to his Il ne devrait pas parler ainsi a son
father.
We ought to go thither earlier.
They should listen to what you say.
You should pay more attention to
what I say.
You ought to have done that.
He should have managed the thing
better than he has done.
You should have managed the thing
differently.
They ought to have managed the thing
as I did.
We ought to have managed it differ-
ently from what they did.
You ought to have played on the flute
while I was playing on the violin.
I wished to do it, but my flute was
out of order.
He ought to have wished it to you.
A stay, a sojourn. To make a stay.
Do you intend to make a long stay in
the town?
père.
Nous devrions y aller de meilleure
heure.
Ils devraient écouter ce que vous
dites.
Vous devriez faire plus d'attention à
ce que je dis.
Vous auriez dû faire cela.
Il aurait dû s'y prendre mieux qu'il
n'a fait.
Vous auriez dû vous y prendre d'une
manière différente.
Ils auraient dû s'y prendre commo
je m'y suis pris.
Nous aurions dû nous y prendre
d'une autre manière qu'ils ne s'y
sont pris.
Vous auriez dû jouer de la flûte pen
dant que je jouais du violon..
Je souhaitais le faire, mais ma flûte
était dérangée.
Il aurait dû vous le souhaiter.
Un séjour. Faire un séjour.
Comptez-vous faire un long séjour
dans la ville ?
I do not intend to make a long stay Je ne compte pas y faire un long sé-
in it.
jour.
SOIXANTE-QUATORZIÈME THÊME. 1re Sec.
Y a-t-il long-temps que vous n'avez vu l'avocat? Oui, je l'ai
perdu de vue.-Voyez cet oiseau, comme il est haut! Il est presque
à perte de vue, (out of sight.)—Pourquoi, lui qui a la vue courte, ne
porte-t-il pas de lunettes? Il ne s'en soucie pas.-Vous devriez
faire ce que votre mère désire. Je l'aurais fait, si j'avais pu; mais
quoique j'aie essayé trois fois, je n'ai pas pu réussir.-Vous voilà
déjà de retour! Vous auriez dû faire un plus long séjour auprès de
votre vieille tante. J'y en ai fait un assez long, ne vous déplaise,
(please your honor.)—Quel séjour y avez-vous fait? Vous croirez à
peine que j'y ai fait un séjour de six semaines et demie.-Ce n'est
pas possible! Si fait, c'est très-possible. J'étais auprès d'elle le 14
Juin, et je ne l'ai quittée que hier; et vous savez que c'est aujour-
d'hui le 4 d'aôut; ainsi comptez. Je ne me le serais pas inaginé
Vous m'avez perdu de vue sans chagrin.
A peasant, (paysan,) having seen that old men, (le vicillard,)
whose sight was bad, used spectacles to read, went to an optician
SEVENTY-FOURTH LESSON. (2.)
391
(un opticien) and asked for a pair. The peasant then took a book,
and, having opened it, said the spectacles were not good, (fem.}
The optician put another pair of the best which he could find in his
shop (la boutique) upon his nose; but the peasant being still unable
to read, the merchant said to him: "My friend, perhaps you cannot
read at all?” “If I could," said the peasant, "I should not want
your spectacles."-I thought that you would be thirsty; that is the
reason I brought you to the apothecary's shop to take a glass of
mineral water and syrup. Give us two glasses of mineral water.—
What syrup, Miss? No matter which, (n'importe le quel;) I like
ihem all.
4
I have seen six players (le joueur) to-day, who were all winning
(gagner) at the same time, (en même temps.)—That cannot be, for a
player can only win when another loses.-You would be right if 1
were speaking of people who play at cards or billiards, (Obs. 118,
51¹;) but I am speaking of flute and violin players, (de joueurs de
flûte et de violon.)—Do you sometimes practise (fai: *) music? (de
la musique?) Very often, for I like it much.-What instrument
(Obs. 118, 51¹) do you play? I play the violin, and my sister plays
the piano. My brother, who plays the bass, (la basse,) accompanies
(accompagner) us, and Miss Stolz sometimes applauds (applaudir) us.
-Does she not also play some musical instrument? (un instrument
de musique?) She plays the harp, (la harpe,) but she is too proud
(fière) to practise music with us.
To suspect, to guess.
VOCABULAIRE.
I suspect what he has done.
He does not suspect what is going to
happen to him.
2de Sec.
Se douter, 1, (de, av. l'inf.)
Je me doute de ce qu'il a fait.
Il ne se doute pas de ce qui va lui
arriver.
To think of some one or of something. Penser à quelqu'un ou à quelque
Of whom do you think?
I think of my friend.
Do you think often of him-her?
I do, very often.
Of what do you think?
To turn upon. To be the question.
It is questioned, it turns upon.
The question is not your pleasure,
but your improvement.
You play, Sir, but playing is not the
thing, but studying.
What is going on?
|
chose.
À qui pensez-vous?
Je pense à mon ami—amie.
Y pensez-vous souvent? (§ 50, 2.)
J'y pense très-souvent.
À quoi pensez-vous ?
+ S'agir de.
Il s'agit de.
Il ne s'agit pas de votre plaisir, mais
de vos progrès.
Vous jouez, Monsieur, mais il ne
s'agit pas de jouer, il s'agit d'étu-
dier.
De quoi s'agit-il ?
392
SEVENTY-FOURTH LESSON. (2.)
The question is to know what we Il s'agit de savoir ce que nous ferons
shall do to pass the time agreeably.
On purpose.
pour passer notre temps agréable
ment.
Exprès.
6
I beg your pardon, I have not done Je vous demande pardon, je ne 'ai
it on purpose,
To be silent, being silent, been silent.
Be silent, quit talking. Hush, I say.
Are you silent? Do you cease talking?
I am. I do. He is never silent.
After speaking half an hour he was
silent, he ceased speaking, &c.
+
pas fait exprès.
Se taire,* 4.
+ Taisez-vous.
Se taisant-tu.
Taisez-vous donc.
† Vous taisez-vous?
† Je me tais. Il ne se tait jamais.
Après avoir parlé pendant une demi-
heure, il se tut.
Obs. 161. Could (149) is rendered by the conditionnel of pouvoir, (to
be able.) Might, by the conditionnel modified by peut-être, perhaps. Could
have, might have, by the conditionnel passé.
Could you speak if you tried?
I might, but I am sure he could.
Pourriez-vous parler si vous es
sayiez?
Je pourrais peut-être, mais je suis
sûr qu'il pourrait.
Could you sing before a large audi- Pourriez-vous chanter devant (493,
ence ?
I could not, but Miss B., (could,) |
might.
Could they have danced the Polka?
They might, but I know she could
(have danced it.)
Could you have played before those
great musicians ?
Obs. 116) une grande audience?
Je ne pourrais pas, mais Mlle. B.
(pourrait,) pourrait peut-être.
Auraient-ils ри danser le Polka?
Ils auraient peut-être pu, mais je sais
qu'elle l'aurait pu.
Auriez-vous pu jouer devant ces
grands musiciens ?
We could not, but Henry might have| Nous n'aurions pas pu, mais Henri
played before them.
aurait peut-être pu jouer devant
eux.
SOIXANTE-QUATORZIÈME THÊME. 2de Sec.
Savez-vous ce qu'il aurait fait si je n'avais pas été ici? Je me
doute de ce qu'il aurait voulu faire.-Aurait-il pu réussir? Il y serait
peut-être parvenu.-À qui pensez-vous quand vous ne pensez à
rien? Je pense à la personne qui fait cette belle question.-DG
quoi s'agit-i? Il s'agit du musicien, de l'honneur de la famille.—
De quoi s'agissait-il? De savoir s'il avait cassé le chandelier
exprès ou non. Moi, je crois qu'il l'avait fait exprès. S'il l'avait
fait exprès, il ne pleurerait pas de cette manière. Ce n'est que pour
nous faire croire qu'il ne l'a pas fait exprès.-Taisez-vous, vous lui
imputez toujours des torts. Je ne me tairai pas pour vous. Laissons
cela, et racontez-nous une anecdote.-Une ville assez pauvre fit une
dépense considérable en fêtes et en illuminations, à l'occasion du
passage le son prince. Celui-ci en paraissant étonné, un courtisan
SEVENTY-FIFTH LESSON. (1.)
39
(a courtier) dit, “Elle n'a fait que ce qu'elle devait à votre majesté.”
"C'est vrai," reprit un autre, "mais elle doit tout ce qu'elle a fait.”-
C'est très-bien, je ne me doutais pas que vous auriez si bien réussi.
Je vous remercie du compliment.
A thief having one day entered a boarding-house, stole three
cloaks, (le manteau.)-In going away he was met by one of the
boarders, who had a fine laced (galonné) cloak. Seeing so many
cloaks, he asked the man where he had taken them. The thief
answered boldly (froidement) that they belonged to three gentlemen
of the house, who had given them to be cleaned, (à dégraisser.)
"Then you must also clean (dégraissez donc aussi) mine, for it is
very much in need of it, (en avoir grand besoin,") said the boarder;
"but,” added he, "you must return it to me at three 'clock." “I
shall not fail, (y manquer,) Sir," answered the thief, as he carried
off (emporter) the four cloaks, with which he (qu'il) is still to return,
(n'a pas encore rapportés.)
You are singing, (chanter,) gentlemen, but it is not a time for (il
ne s'agit pas de) singing; you ought to be silent, and to listen to what
you are told. We are at a loss.-What are you at a loss about? I
am going to tell you: the question is with us how we shall pass our
time agreeably. Play a game at billiards or at chess. (51¹.)—We
have proposed joining a hunting-party; do you go with us? (êtes-vous
des nôtres ?) I cannot, for I have not done my task yet; and if I
neglect it, my master will scold me. Every one according to his
liking; if you like staying at home better than going a hunting, we
cannot hinder you.-Does Mr. B go with us? Perhaps.-I
should not like to go with him, for he is too great a talker, (trop
bavard,) excepting that, (à cela près,) he is a clever man, a fine fellow,
(un excellent hom me.)
SEVENTY-FIFTH LESSON, 75th.-Soixante-quinzième Leçon, 75me
VOCABULAIRE.
Towards, (physically,) (morally.)
He comes towards me-us.
He has behaved very well towards me.
1re Sec.
Vers.
Envers.
Il vient vers moi-nous.
Il s'est très-bien comporté envers
moi.
We must always behave well towards Il faut toujours nous bien comporter
everybody.
The behavior of others is but an
echo of our own. If we behave
well towards them, they will also
envers tout le monde.
La conduite des autres n'est qu'un
écho de la nôtre. Si nous nous
comportons bien envers eux, ils se
394
SEVENTY-FIFTH LESSON (1)
behave well towards us; but if we
use them ill, we must not expect
better from them.
To treat or to use somebody well.
To use somebody ill.
comporteront bien aussi envers
nous; mais si nous en usons mal
avec eux, nous ne devons pas at-
tendre mieux de leur part.
En user bien avec quelqu'un.
En user mal avec quelqu'un.
As you have always used me well, I Comme vous en avez usé toujours
will not use you ill.
As he has always used me well, I
have always used him in the same
manner.
To delay, (to tarry.)
Do not be long before you return.
I shall not be long before I return.
I long to or for.
Obs. 162. The subject of the verb
the indirect object, me, te, lui, nous,
I long to see my brother.
He longs to receive his money.
We long for dinner, because we are
very hungry.
bien avec moi, je n'en userai pas
mal avec vous.
Comme il en a toujours bien use avec
moi, j'en ai toujours usé de la
même manière avec lui.
Tarder, 1, (takes à av. l'inf.
Ne tardez pas à revenir.
Je ne tarderai pas à revenir.
+ Il me tarde... (unipersonnel.)
long, must be rendered in French by
vous, or leur. (39¹, Obs. 90.)
† Il me tarde de voir mon frère.
+ Il lui tarde de recevoir son argent.
+ Il nous tarde de dîner, parce que
nous avons bien faim.
They long to sleep, because they are † Il leur tarde de dormir, parce qu'ils
tired.
To postpone, to put off.
Let us put that off until to-morrow.
Let us put off that lesson until another
time.
sont fatigués.
Remettre,* à.
Remettons cela à demain.
Remettons cette leçon à une autre
fois.
SOIXANTE-QUINZIÈME THÊME. 1re Sec.
Comment Jacques se conduit-il envers ses parents? Il ne se con-
duit pas bien envers eux.-A-t-il des amis ici? Il n'en a pas, car
il se comporte mal envers tout le monde-Qu'aurait-il dû faire lors-
qu'il me vit? Il aurait dû s'avancer vers moi et me souhaiter une
bonne année, (a happy new year.)-Ne leur tarde-t-il pas de se baigner?
(to bathe?) Si fait, il leur tarde beaucoup: mais l'eau de la rivière
est encore trop froide.-Ne vous tarde-t-il pas que le courrier arrive?
(§ 151.) Si fait; mais il me tarderait beaucoup plus si je n'avais pas
entendu parler de mon ami.-Ne tardez pas à revenir, entendez-
vous? Je ne tarderai pas car il me tarde de partir.-Remettrons-
nous l'affaire à demain? Non, ne la remettons pas; car il nous
tarde qu'elle soit finie. (§ 151.)—Que voudriez-vous savoir? Il nous
tarde de connaître le résultat (the result) de l'élection.-Comment
s'est il comporté envers sa femme? Pendant la lune de miel, il
s'est comporté comme il faut. Et ensuite? Mal, comme il le fait
envers toutes ses connaissances.
SEVENTY-FIFTH LESSON. (2.)
393
As you have always used me well, I will use you in the same
manner. I will lend you the money you want, but on condition that
you will return it to me next week.-You may depend upon it.—
How has my son behaved towards you? He has behaved well
towards me, for he behaves well towards everybody. His father
told him often: The behavior of others is but an echo of our own.
If we behave well towards them, they will also behave well towards
us; but if we use them ill, we must not expect better from them.-
May I see your brothers? You will see them to-morrow.
As they
have just arrived from a long journey, (le voyage,) they long for sleep,
for they are very tired.-What has my sister said? She said that
she longed for dinner, because she was very hungry.
I have the honor to wish you a good morning. How do you do?
Very well, at you: service.-And how are all at home? Tolerably
well, thank God! My sister was a little indisposed, (indisposée,) but
she is well, (rétablie ;) she told (charger de) me to give you her best
compliments. I am glad (charmé) to hear that she is well. As for
you, you are health itself, (la santé même;) you cannot look better,
(vous avez la meilleure mine du monde.)—I have no time to be ill:
my business (mes affaires) would not permit me. Please (donnez-
vous la peine) to sit down; here is a chair. I will not detain (dis-
traire) you from your business, (les occupations ;) I know that a mer-
chant's time is precious, (que le temps est précieux à un négociant.)
VOCABULAIRE. 2de Sec.
To be at one's case. To be comfortable. | Etre à son aise.
To be uncomfortable.
I am very much at my ease upon
this chair.
You are uncomfortable upon your
chair.
What can that be?
We are uncomfortable in that board-
ing-house.
That man is well off, for he has
plenty of money.
That man is badly off, for he is poor.
To make one's self comfortable.
Make yourself comfortable.
To be uncomfortable.
To inconvenience one's self.
To put one's self out of the way.
Do not put yourself out of the way.
That man never inconveniences him-
self; he never does it for anybody.
Être mal à son aise.
Je suis bien à mon aise sur cette
chaise.
Vous êtes mal à votre aise sur votre
chaise.
+ Qu'est-ce que cela peut être ?
Nous sommes mal à notre aise dang
cette pension.
Cet homme est à son aise, car il a
beaucoup d'argent.
Cet homme est mal à son aise, parce
qu'il est pauvre.
Se mettre à son aise.
Mettez-vous à votre aise.
Être gêné.
Se gêner, 1.
Ne vous gênez pas.
Cet homme ne se gêne jamais; il ne
se gêne jamais pour personne.
396
LESSON. (2.)
SEVENTY-FIFTH
Can you, without putting yourself to |
inconvenience. lend me ten dollars
?
and your gun
To make entreaties.
To beg with entreaty.
I employed every kind of entreaty
to engage him to it.
To solicit, to press, to sue, to cntreat.
Here and there, up and down, all
about.
Now and then. From time to time.
Indifferently, (as good as bad.)
I have done my composition tolerably
well.
Pouvez-vous, sans vous gêner, me
prêter dix gourdes, et sans incon
vénient me prêter votre fusil ?
Faire des instances.
Prier avec instances.
Je l'en ai sollicité avec toutes les in
stances possibles.
Solliciter, 1.
Par-ci, par-là ;
ici et là.
De loin en loin. De temps en temps.
Tant bien que mal.
J'ai fait ma composition tant bien
que mal.
SOIXANTE-QUINZIÈME THÊME. 2de Sec.
J'ai perdu de vue les enfants de Madame R Sont-ils chez
elle? Ils sont en pension.-Comment s'y trouvent-ils? Le fils se
trouve mal dans sa pension, il s'en plaint, il n'y est pas à son aise.—
Et les filles, sont-elles à leur aise dans la leur? Elles s'en plain-
draient si elles ne s'y trouvaient pas bien, si elles n'y étaient pas à
leur aise. Si vous avez chaud, levez le chassis, (the sash,) mettez-vous
à votre aise. Ce médecin est-il à son aise? Il n'irait pas à pied s'il
etait à son aise.-Où allez-vous vous promener? Je vais par-ci, par-
là. Quelque fois je monte la rue, d'autre fois je la descends.-
Voyez-vous M. le général? De temps en temps, de loin en loin.
Comment avez-vous fait votre thême? Tant bien que mal.-Le
commis du négociant fait-il son devoir? Il le fait tant bien que mal;
mais le négociant n'en est pas content.-Où sont nos messieurs? Ils
ne se gênent pas; ils sont à fumer dans le salon.-Les avez-vous
priés d'aller fumer dehors? Je les ai priés avec instances de le
faire, mais ils n'ont pas envie de se gêner.
Have you made your French composition? I have made it.-
Was your tutor pleased with it? He was not; for it was difficult, and
I made it but indifferently, (tant bien que mal.)—Are you comfortable
in your fashionable boarding-house? I am.-Is there not too much
etiquette there for you? A little etiquette is necessary. I do not like to
be always with people who put themselves too much at their ease,
who use no ceremony, (sont sans cérémonie.)—When the dog was
attacking you, did you not entreat them (prier avec instances de) to
come to your assistance? I did earnestly beg them to come, but
hey would not, (time expired.)—Did the dog bite and hurt you much?
He bit me a little here and there.-At what o'clock were they to
(36¹, Obs. 84) play off that game of billiards, before they (282, Obs. 65)
put it off? They were to play it at 6 o'clock in the morning.-Why
SEVENTY-FIFTH LESSON. (3.)
397
did they postpone it? They did so, because one of them was obliged
to go to New York, but he will return in a day or two.
Who got you that situation? Cousin James did.-How do you
like to be a clerk? I like it pretty well.-What does it bring you ?
Not much now, because I am not thoroughly acquainted with the
business, but when (46³) I am I shall earn more.-Why are you going
away so soon? Stay. I have nothing pressing (de pressé à) to do
now, my courier is already despatched, (mon courrier est déjà cxpédié.)
I shall not stay any longer. I only wished in passing (en passant par
ici) to inquire about your health. You do me much honor.-It is
very fine weather to-day. If you will allow me, I shall have the
pleasure of seeing you again (revoir *) this afternoon, (cette après
dînée,) and if you have time we will take a little turn together.
With the greatest pleasure. In that case I shall wait for you. I will
come for you (venir prendre) about (vers) seven o'clock. Adieu, then,
till I see you again. I have the honor to bid you adieu.
VOCABULAIRE.
To impart something to somebody.
Have you imparted that to your
father?
I have imparted it to him.
To look.... to speak in vain.
In vain I looked all around, I saw
neither man nor house: not the
least sign of settlement.
A dwelling, habitation, settlement.
In vain I speak, for you do not listen
to me.
3me Sec.
Faire part de quelque chose à quel-
qu'un.
Avez-vous fait part de cela à votre
père ?
Je lui en ai fait part.
† Avoir beau regarder . . . avoir beau
parler.
J'avais beau regarder tout autour de
moi, je ne voyais ni homme, ni
maison: pas la moindre apparence
d'habitation.
Une habitation.
J'ai beau parler, vous ne m'écoutez
pas.
In vain I do my best, I cannot do J'ai beau faire de mon mieux, je ne
anything to his liking.
You may say what you please, no-
body will believe you.
peux rien faire à son gré.
Vous avez beau dire, personne ne
vous croira.
It is in vain that they earn money, Ils ont beau gagner de l'argent, ils
they will never be rich.
ne seront jamais riches.
We search in vain, for what we have Nous avons beau chercher, nous ne
lost we cannot find.
To salute, bid adieu, good day, bow.
I have the honor to bid you adieu.
Present my compliments to him, (to
her.)
Remember me to him, (to her.)
pourrons pas trouver ce que nous
avons perdu.
Saluer, 1.
J'ai l'honneur de vous saluer.
Dites-lui bien des choses de ma part.
}
34
898
SEVENTY-FIFTH LESSON. (3.)
Pray present my compliments to Je vous prie de faire mes compH.
your sister.
ments à Mademoiselle votre sœur.
Remember me (present my compli- Présentez-lui mes civilités, (mes
ments) to him, (to her.)
I shall not fail.
The present, (the present time or
tense.)
The past.
The loss of time.
The future.
très-humbles respects.)
Je n'y manquerai pas.
Le présent.
Le passé.
L'avenir, le futur.
La perte du temps.
Enjoy all the pleasures that virtue Jouissez de tous les plaisirs que la
permits.
vertu permet.
SOIXANTE-QUINZIÈME THÊME. 3me Sec.
Bon jour, Mlle., j'espère que vous vous portez bien! J'ai l'hon-
neur de vous saluer, M. Je suis bien portante, je vous remercie.-
En effect, vous avez très-bonne mine. Et vous, vous êtes la sai.té
même. Vous voulez-vous moquer de moi! car, je suis à demi-
mort. Non, vraiment, je trouve que vous avez très-bonne mine.
Vous avez beau dire, Mlle., je sens que je ne suis pas la santé
même. Vous, M., vous avez beau dire, vous ne me ferez pas croire
que je n'y vois pas. -Avez-vous fait part à quelqu'un de la nouvelle
dont je vous ai fait part hier? Oui, j'en ai fait part à mon cousin, et
je me proposais d'en faire part à quelqu'autre personne. Etait-ce
un secret? Non pas exactement.-M. F. est riche, est-il de la
bonne société ? Non, il a beau être riche, on ne veut pas l'y
admettre.-Le fils du consul a perdu beaucoup de temps; mais il
peut le réparer s'il s'applique. Vous avez beau dire, la perte du
temps est irréparable. On a dit avec vérité: Il n'est permis d'être
avare que du temps.
That old woman is always scolding, (est toujours à gronder,j in
vain I do my best. No one can do anything to her liking.-You
may say what you please; no one will believe you. It is true,
nevertheless.-Can you, without putting yourself to inconvenience,
lend me one hundred dollars? As you have always used me well, I
will treat you in the same manner, and will lend you that sum.—
Have you imparted to your brother what I told you to tell him? As
he was very tired, he longed to go to sleep; so that I have postponed
imparting it to him till to-morrow.-Will that do? Yes, it will.
The loss of time is an irreparable loss. A single minute cannot
be recovered (se recouvrer) for all the gold in the (du) world. It is,
then, of the greatest importance to employ well the time, which
consists (consister) only of (en) minutes, of which we must make
good use. We have but the present; the past is no longer anything,
¡n'est plus rien,) and the future is uncertain, (incertain.)—A great
many people ruin themselves (se ruiner) because they wish to
SEVENTY-SIXTH LESSON. (1.)
399
indulge themselves too much, (à force de vouloir se faire du bien.)
If most men (la plupart des hommes) knew how to content them-
selves (se contenter de) with what they have, they would be happy ·
but their greediness (leur avidité) very often makes (rendre) them
unhappy.-In order to be happy we must forget the past, not trouble
ourselves about (ne pas s'inquiéter de) the future, and enjoy the
present. I was very much dejected (triste) when my cousin came
to me, (vint me trouver.) "What is the matter with you?" he asked
me. "Oh, (ah!) my dear cousin,” replied I, "in losing that money
I have lost everything." "Do not fret," said he to me; "for I
I
have found your money."
SEVENTY-SIXTH LESSON, 76th.-Soixante-seizième Leçon, 76me.
Do you read?
VOCABULAIRE. 1re Sec.
I do.
I am.
Are you reading?
Are they making a noise?
Lisez-vous?
Je lis.
Êtes-vous à lire ($ 144-6.) Je suis
à lire.
They Sont-ils à faire du bruit? Ils sont à
are (making one).
Is she coming?
She is.
Were you scolding?
I was so.
en faire.
Est-elle à venir? Elle est à venir.
Étiez-vous à gronder? J'étais à le
faire.
Will he not be dressing himself? Ne sera-t-il pas à s'habiller?
Yes, he will.
To mean.
What do you mean?
I mean what I was saying.
What does that man mean? Nothing.
He means nothing.
What does that mean?
What does: "Je suis à lire," mean?
That means I am reading.
That does not mean anything.
I do not know what that means.
To be close. To be particular.
I do not like to deal with that man,
for he is too particular.
To grow impatient, to fret.
Do not fret about that.
fait.
Vouloir dire.
† Que voulez-vous dire ?
Si
† Je veux dire ce que j'étais à dire.
† Que veut dire cet homme? Rien.
+ Il ne veut rien dire.
+ Que veut dire cela?
que cela veut dire ?
Qu'est-ce
† Que veut dire : Je suis à lire ?
+ Cela veut dire : I am reading.
† Cela ne veut rien dire.
† Je ne sais pas ce que cela veut dire.
+ Y regarder de pres.
† Je n'aime pas à faire des affaires
avec cet homme, car il y regarde
de trop près.
+ S'impatienter de.
Ne vous impatientez pas de cela.
To sit up, to watch. I am sitting up. Veiller, 1. Je suis à veiller.
I have sat up all night.
J'ai veillé toute la nuit.
400
SEVENTY-SIXTH LESSON. (1.)
To advise. He is advising him to... Conseiller, 1, de... Il est à le con
seiller de...
The dress, the costume. An elegant | La mise.
dress.
To dress one's self.
That man always dresses well.
To find fault with something.
Une mise élégante.
Se mettre,* 4.
Cet homme se met toujours bien.
+ Trouver à redire à quelque chose.
That man always finds fault with † Cet homme trouve toujours à redire
everything he sees,
Do you find fault with that?
à tout ce qu'il voit.
† Trouvez-vous à redire à cela?
† Je n'y trouve rien à redire.
I do not find fault with it.
To play Un tour.
A trick, (a turn, a round.)
a trick.
To play a trick upon some one.
To take a turn.
I have taken a turn round the garden.
He has taken a couple of turns round
the garden.
To take a little turn.
To travel through Europe.
More (meaning) besides.
Jouer un tour.
Jouer un tour à quelqu'un.
+ Faire un tour.
† J'ai fait un tour de jardin.
+ Il a fait deux tours de jardin.
+ Faire un petit tour.
† Faire le tour de l'Europe.
De plus. (30¹, Obs. 71.) (Après un
nom ou nombre.)
You have given me three books, but Vous m'avez donné trois livres, mais
I want three besides.
Less.
Many less.
Three less.
Three too many.
j'en veux trois de plus.
De moins. Beaucoup de moins.
Trois de moins. Trois de trop.
SOIXANTE-SEIZIÈME THÊME. 1re Sec.
Ah! vous voilà. Oui, c'est moi-même. Venez-vous de faire un
petit tour? Non, je viens du magasin de M. D., où je voulais acheter
des gants de peau (kid) mais je n'ai pas pu. Et pourquoi donc ?
n'en a-t-il pas ? Si fait, il en a de superbes; mais il y regarde de
trop près. Que voulez-vous dire par cela? Ce que je veux dire?
C'est tout simple, (it is plain.) Je veux dire qu'il vend cher et qu'il
ne veut rien rabattre. Je sais qu'il n'a qu'un prix; mais je ne crois
pas qu'il y regarde de trop près. N'avez-vous pas trouvé à redire à
son prix? Si fait, et je lui ai dit qu'il demandait 12 sous et demi de
plus que les autres marchands. Et vous lui avez peut-être offert 25
sous de moins que son prix? Non, mais 12 sous et demi. Alors,
ne vous plaignez pas: ne trouvez pas à redire à sa conduite, car
n'y regardez-vous pas d'aussi près que lui? Moi! y regarder d'aussi
près que lui!-Jean, qu'es-tu à faire? Je suis à nettoyer mon fusil.—
Que fait Anne? Ne l'entendez-vous pas? Elle est à pratiquer son
piano et à chanter. Est-ce elle qui est à pratiquer? Je croyais que
'était Julie qui était à le faire. Anne a fait beaucoup de progrès
dopuis que je ne l'ai entendue.
SEVENTY-SIXTH LESSON. (2.)
401
•
Dia you mean to say that you and your cousin Henry are going
(62³, Obs. 148) to make the tour of Europe? No, I meant to say
that he and I are going to make the tour of the United States of
North America. De l'Amérique du nord, are four words too many,
United States is enough.-You like to find fault; but who is that
young lady so elegantly dressed? (mise si élégamment?) Is it not the
one who was drinking a glass of mineral water at the corner? Oh!
it is not the same. She looks like her. At any rate (après tout) she
has on an elegant dress. She is walking, (à marcher.) How well
she walks! Now she is laughing. How pretty are her teeth! Hush!
hush! you make me mad (vous m'impatientez) with your exclama-
tions! Hush yourself. You have no taste.
What does that mean,
Sir? That means that although you dress (§ 151) well yourself, you
are too particular about other people's dress.-Do not play a trick
upon me.
I will not play one upon you.
Why have you played a trick upon that man? Because he always
finds fault with everything he sees.-What does that mean, Sir?
That means that I do not like to deal with you, because you are too
particular. I wonder why your brother has not done his task. It
was too difficult. He has sat up all night, and has not been able to
do it, because it was too difficult.-Why are you so sad? You do
not know what makes me uneasy, my dear friend, (fem.) Tell me,
for I assure you that I share (partager) your sufferings (la peine) as
well as your pleasures.—I am sure that you feel for me, (prendre*
part à mes peines,) but I cannot tell you now (en ce moment) what
makes me uneasy. I will, however, tell you when an opportunity
offers, (à l'occasion.)
VOCABULAIRE. 2de Sec.
My, his, her reach. The child's reach. | Ma, sa portée.
Within my reach. Out of my reach.
Those things are not within the reach
of everybody.
Within gun-shot.
A gun-shot, (meaning distance.)
Two gun-shots, (
.)
How many shots have you fired?
l'enfant.
À ma portée.
À la portée de
Hors de ma portée.
Ces choses ne sont pas à la portée
de tout le monde.
À la portée du fusil.
Une portée de fusil.
Deux portées de fusil.
Combien de coups de fusil avez-vous
tirés ? (482.)
I wonder why that man makes such Je voudrais bien savoir pourquoi cet
a noise ?
So long as.
homme fait un tel bruit ?
Tant que.
So long as you behave well, people Tant que vous vous comporterez
will love you.
To carry off.
bien, on vous aimera.
Enlever, 1.
84*
102
SEVENTY-SIXTH LESSON. (2.)
A mouthful. A sweet mouthful.
To overwhelm, to heap, to load.
To overwhelm some one with joy.
Generous.
Charitable, beneficent.
You have heaped benefits upon me.
Sincere.
Sincerely.
An advantage.
The disadvantage, prejudice.
shall never say anything to your
disadvantage.
To surrender.
he enemies have surrendered.
o prefer.
prefer the useful to the agreeable.
Une bouchée. Une bonne bouchée.
Combler, 1.
Combler quelqu'un de joie.
Généreux, généreuse, généreuses
Bienfaisant, charitable.
Vous m'avez comblé de bienfaits
Sincère. Sincèrement.
Un avantage.
Le désavantage.
Je ne dirai jamais rien à votre dé
savantage.
Se rendre, 4.
Les ennemis se sor.t rendus.
Préférer.
Je préfère l'utile à l'agréable.
Obs. 163. All adjectives and verbs used substantively are masculino. Ex.
The drinking.
The eating.
To behold.
Behold those beautiful flowers with
their colors so fresh and bright.
The color, the complexion. The lily.
The violet. The forget-me-not.
The rose.
An emblem.
Fresh verdure is salutary to our eyes.
What was he doing when he was told
of his cousin's arrival?
He was taking his music lesson.
Le boire.
Le manger.
Regarder, 1.
Regardez ces superbes fleurs au teint
si frais et si éclatant.
La couleur, le teint.
La violette.
La rose.
Le lis.
La germandrée.
Un emblème.
La verdure fraiche fait du bien à nos
yeux.
Qu'était-il à faire quand on vient lui
annoncer l'arrivée de son cousin?
Il était à prendre sa leçon de musique.
SOIXANTE-SEIZIÈME THÊME. 2de Sec.
Je voudrais bien savoir pourquoi cette petite fille fait tant de bruit ?
Elle crie de cette manière parce qu'elle veut cette tasse verte et
jaune, qui est hors de sa portée. Je suis presque sûr que c'est une
enfant très-gâtée; car, si elle ne l'était pas tant, elle aimerait mieux
attendre que de crier. Mais comme la tasse est à votre portée,
donnez-la-lui, pour combler ses souhaits, (satisfy.) Voyez, regardez,
vous l'avez comblée de joie. Vous m'avez fait faire une action
charitable. Pourquoi ce petit garçon ne tire-t-il pas à l'oiseau qui
est sur l'arbre? Ne le voit-il pas? Il sait que l'oiseau est hors de
la portée de son fusil; mais il est à le veiller, il s'approche peu à peu,
(little by little.) à présent, regardez, il va tirer. Il a touché l'oiseau,
mais il ne l'a pas tué.-L'amie de Sophie est-elle sincère? Je la
crois très-charitable et très-sincère.-Qui est généreux et bienfaisant?
-Parle-t-il sincèrement?—A-t-il trouvé quelque chose à redire à la
conduite de l'avocat -- A -t-il parlé à son désavantage?—Marie vou-
SEVENTY-SEVENTH LESSON. (1.)
403
drait bien savoir qui a enlevé son portefeuille Français.-Le teint de
cette dernoiselle est superbe, n'est-ce pas ?
What do you think of the man who spoke to us at the concert?
He is a man of much understanding, (de beaucoup d'esprit,) and not
at all proud (fier) of his merit.—As soon as Mr. Flausen sees me,
he begins to speak English, in order to practise, and overwhelms
me with politeness, (d'honnêteté,) so that I often do not know what
to answer. His brothers do the same, (en font autant.) However,
they are very good people; they are not only (non seulement) rich
and amiable, but they are also generous and charitable. They love
me sincerely, therefore I love them also, and consequently (par
conséquent) shall never say anything to their disadvantage. I should
love them still more, if they did not make so much ceremony,
(tant de cérémonies;) but every one has his faults, (le défaut,) and
mine is to speak too much of their ceremonies.
Behold, ladies, (Mesdames,) those beautiful flowers, with their
colors so fresh and bright; they drink nothing but water. The white
lily has the color of innocence, (l'innocence;) the violet indicates
gentleness, (marque la douceur ;) you may see it in Louisa's eyes.
The forget-me-not has the color of heaven, our future dwelling, and
the rose, the queen of flowers, is the emblem of beauty and of joy.
You see all that personified (personnifié) in seeing the beautiful Ame-
lia, (Amélie.) How beautiful is the fresh verdure! It is salutary to
our eyes, and has the color of hope, (de l'espérance,) our most faith-
ful (fidèle) friend, (fem.,) who never deserts (quitter) us, not even in
death, (♣ la mort.)-One word more, my dear friend. What is your
pleasure? I forgot to tell you to present my compliments to your
mother. I thank you for her, (de sa part;) I shall not fail. Fare-
well, then.
SE VENTY-SEVENTH LESSON.—Soixante-dix-septième Leçon,77me.
A silk gown.
A kitchen table.
A mahogany table.
A brick house.
A stone house.
A windmill.
A coffee-mill.
VOCABULAIRE. 1re Sec.
Une robe de soie.
Une table de cuisine.
Une table d'acajou.
Une maison de brique.
Une maison de pierre.
Un moulin à vent.
Un moulin à café.
Obs. 1631. We have seen (2) that the preposition de is put between two
substantives, the latter of which expresses the substance of which the former
s made; but the preposition à is made use of when the latter expresses the
494
SEVENTY-SEVENTH LESSON. (1.)
use of the former. In both cases the order of the two substantives in
inverted in French when they make a compound in English.
A velvet bonnet.
Un chapeau de velours.
Un pot d'argent.
A silver tankard.
A water-mi.l.
A steam-mill.
Gunpowder.
Fire-arms.
A one-horse wagon.
A four-horse carriage.
A two-wheeled wagon.
A four-wheeled carriage.
A one-story house.
A two-story house.
A three-story house.
To exaggera.e, amplify, heighten.
That man exaggerates all that he
says and does.
Un moulin à eau.
Un moulin à vapeur.
De la poudre à canon.
Des armes à feu.
Une voiture à un cheval.
Une voiture à quatre chevaux.
Une voiture à deux roues.
Une voiture à quatre roues.
Une maison à un étage.
Une maison à deux étages.
Une maison à trois étages.
Outrer, 1.
Exagérer, 1.
Cet homme outre tout ce qu'il Jit s..
tout ce qu'il fait.
To take the place of, to be in stead of. Tenir lieu de .... Servir de. (732.)
That man is a father to me.
That umbrella serves him as a stick.
Ɔn a small scale. On a large scale.
Thereabouts, nearly.
Alternately, turn by turn.
To endeavor, to strive.
To give one's self up to grief.
To melt.
To shake.
+ Cet homme me tient lieu de père.
+ Cet homme me sert de père.
+ Ce parapluie lui tient lieu de canno.
+ Ce parapluie lui sert de canne.
En petit.
En grand.
À peu près.
Tour à tour.
+ S'efforcer, 1, (de av. l'inf.)
S'abandonner à la douleur.
To melt in tears.
Fondre, 4.
Secouer, 1.
Fondre en larmes.
Shake that tree, and the fruit will Secouez cet arbre, et les fruits en
fall down.
tomberont.
SOIXANTE-DIX-SEPTIÈME THÊME. 1re Sec.
Demeurez-vous dans une maison de pierre ou de bois? Nous
occupons une maison de brique. Presque toutes les maisons se
pâtissent en brique dans ce quartier-ci, (quarter, district.)—Voulez-
vous faire emplețte d'un moulin à eau ou à vent? Je préfère les
moulins à eau, et je présume que j'en achèterai un.-Madame, le
moulin à café vient de se casser. Ah! c'est un malheur ! Avez-
vous moulu (to grind, moudre,* 4) assez de café? Non, Madame,
pas encore. Envoyez la petite Marguerite emprunter (R. 2) le
moulin du voisin.-Les voitures à deux roues ne sont plus à la
mode. On a partout des voitures à 4 roues.-Est-il à voyager en
voiture? Non, il est à voyager par la route de fer, (the railroad.)—
Comment préférez-vous voyager? Par le bateau à vapeur. Sophie
n'est-elle pas à coudre (coudre,* to sew) sa robe de soie? Elle était
SEVENTY-SEVENTH LESSON. (1.)
405
à la coudre hier, mais maintenant elle doit être à coudre¹ (she must
be sewing sa robe de satin.-Voulez-vous qu'elle couse quelque
chose pour vous?
Has your sister been out to-day? She has been out to buy seve
ral things.--What has she bought? She has bought (s'est acheté) a
silk gown, a velvet bonnet, and a lace veil, (un voile de dentelle.)—
What have you done with (de) my silver tankard? It is on the
kitchen-table, together with (avec) the oil-bottle, the milk-pot, the
pitcher, the mustard-pot, and the coffee-mill.-Do you ask for a
wine-bottle? No, I ask for a bottle of wine, and not for a wine-
bottle. If you will have the goodness to give me the key of the,
wine-cellar, (la cave au vin,) I shall go for one.-What does that
man want of me? He exacts nothing; but he will accept what you
will give him, for he is in want of everything.—I will tell you that
I am not fond of him, for his behavior raises suspicions in my mind.
He exaggerates all that he says and does.
You are wrong in having such a bad opinion (une opinion) of him,
for he has been a father to you.-I know what I say. He has cheated
me on a small and on a large scale, and whenever he calls he asks
me for something. In this manner he has alternately asked me for
all I had my fowling-piece, my fishing-line, my repeater, and my
golden candlesticks.-Do not give yourself up so much to grief,
else (sinon) you will make me melt in tears. Democritus and
Heraclitus were two philosophers of a very different character, (d'un
caractère bien différent :) the first laughed at the follies (la folie) of
men, and the other wept at them.-They were both right, for the
follies of men dese re to be laughed and wept at, (méritent qu'on en
rie et qu'on en pleure.j²
I We have seen (Obs. 90, 391,) that faut (must) can have no other nomi-
native but il. If any other nominative is used, the English verb must is
not to be translated by faut, but by some other verb, usually by devoir.
Practice must, before this, have taught the student that: il faut, faut-il,
que faut-il, &c., always stand at the head of the sentence, and that, of
course, if any other nominative has been employed, the preceding direction
is to be complied with. She must be sewing, the sentence above, might,
beginning with il faut, have been correctly rendered by: il faut qu'elle
soit à coudre, but, if elle is taken for subject, you are compelled to say as
above: elle doit être à coudre.
2 The follies deserve to be laughed and wept at. Les folies méritent qu'on
en rie, et qu'on en pleure. N. B. The infinitive of a passive verb coming
after another verb, is rendered by qu'on as nominative indefinite of the fol-
lowing verb, which must be put in its proper tense. He hopes not to be
laughed at, Il espère qu'on ne se moquera pas de lui. It is very frequently
followed by the subjunctive, as in the exercise.
406
SEVENTY-SEVENTH LESSON. (2.)
VOCABULAIRE. 2de Sec.
To give birth to, (meaning to raise, to
cause.)
To raise difficulties.
To cause quarrels.
To cause suspicions.
The behavior of that man raised sus-
picions in my mind.
To be in want of. To be short of.
To want.
That man is in want of everything.
I am in want of nothing.
To set the table, to lay the cloth.
A cover.
a
A table fo four persons.
A table for ten persons.
A writing-table or desk.
A dining-room.
A sleeping or bed-room.
A repeater.
An oil-bottle.
A mustard-pot.
A pitcher.
A fowling-piece.
A fishing-line.
To exact, to want of, to require.
What do you want of me?
What do you exact of me?
I exact nothing of you.
A milk-pot.
} Faire naître.
† Faire naître des difficultés.
† Faire naître des querelles.
+ Faire naître des soupçons.
† La conduite de cet homme a fait
naître des soupçons dans mon
esprit.
Manquer de.
Cet homme manque de tout.
Je ne manque de rien.
+ Mettre le couvert.
Un couvert.¹
Une table de quatre couverts.
Une table de dix couverts.
Une table à écrire.
Une salle à manger.
Une chambre à coucher.
Une montre à répétition.
Une bouteille à l'huile.
Un pot à moutarde.
Un pot à l'eau.
Un fusil de chasse.
Une ligne à pêcher.
Exiger, 1.
} Qu'exigez-vous de moi?
Je n'exige rien de vous.
Un pot au lait.
Obs. 163. When the second noun is used to determine the first more pre-
cisely, or to show that the first contains a portion of the second, it is pre-
ceded by au or à la for the singular, and aux for the plural.
The rabbit-man.
The oyster-woman.
L'homme aux lapins.
La femme aux huîtres.
The bottle with vinegar in, (not full.) La bouteille au vinaigre.
The bottle of wine, (full of.
The bottle with wine in.
The wine-bottle, (none in.)
La bouteille de vin.
La bouteille au vin.
La bouteille à vin.
These last three sentences express the precise distinction to be conveyed.
1 Couvert. Cover (Webster) means everything usually wanted to eat a
meal with. Un couvert for dinner is not the same as un couvert for break
fast or tea. Cups and saucers being used at the latter, and not at the former
meal.
SEVENTY-SEVENTH LESSON. (2.)
407
Dainties.
He is fond of dainties.
At broad daylight.
To sit down to a meal.
Les bons morceaux.
Il aime les bons morceaux.
En plein jour.
Se mettre à table.
SOIXANTE-DIX-SEPTIÈME THÊME. 2de Sec.
Restez à dîner avec nous. Nous avons quelques bons morceaux.
Vous voulez que nous dînions (§ 151) avec vous, puisque vous nous
parlez de bons morceaux. Sans doute que (Dir. 6) je le veux,
autrement je ne vous prierais pas de rester. Mais dînerez-vous
bientôt; car, j'ai bien des choses à acheter cet après-midi. Laissez-
moi voir l'heure. Il est une heure moins un quart. La fille doit
être à mettre (must be setting, 772, N.) le couvert; ainsi vous voyez
que vous aurez après dîner, assez de temps pour faire vos em-
plettes. Qu'avez-vous à acheter? Des bois de lit, des oreillers de
plume, des tables, et des toilettes d'acajou, des armoires (walnut
wardrobes) de noyer? Non, non, je suis à faire faire tout cela.
Mais nous sommes à chercher un poêle pour la cuisine, un moulin
à café, des pots à l'eau de différentes grandeurs, des cuvettes, (bowls,)
des cafetières (coffee-pots) des tasses à café. Ne vous faut-il pas
aussi des tasses à thé ? Non, je crois que nous ne prendrons pas de
thé, nous ne l'aimons point. Messieurs, le dîner est servi. Allons,
ne faites point de difficultés. Venez vous mettre à table et goûter
aos bons morceaux.
Have you seen your niece? Yes; she is a very good girl, who
writes well, and speaks French still better; therefore, she is loved
and honored by everybody.—And her brother; what is he doing?
Do not speak to me of him; he is a naughty boy, who writes always
badly, and speaks French still worse; he is therefore (aussi n'est-il)
loved by nobody. He is very fond of dainties, but he does not like
books. Sometimes he goes to bed at broad daylight, and pretends
to be ill; but when we sit down to dinner he is generally well
again, (rétabli.) He is to study physic, (la médecine,) but he has not
the slightest inclination for it, (aucune envie.) He is almost always
talking of his dogs, which he loves passionately, (passzonnément.)
His father is extremely sorry for it. The young simpleton (un
imbécile) said lately to his sister, "I shall enlist as soon as a peace
(la paix) is proclaimed, ( publier.") My dear father and my dear
mother dined yesterday with some friends at the King of Spain,
(l'Espagne.)—Why do you always speak English and never French?
Because I am too bashful, (timide.) You are joking: is an English-
man ever bashful?—I have a keen appetite, (grand appétit ;) gwE
me something good to eat.-Have you any money? No, Sir.-
408
SEVENTY-EIGHTH LESSON. (1.)
Then I have nothing to give you.-Will you not let me have some
(ne me donnez-vous pas) on credit? I pledge (engager) my honor.
That is too little.—What, (comment,) Sir! What do you mean? I
mean what I say.
SEVENTY-EIGHTH LESSON.--Soixante-dix-huitième Leçon, 78me
VOCABULAIRE. 1re Sec.
PRESENT OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE.
Présent du Subjonctif.
For its use and formation see ($151.) That article is to be carefully
studied.
They Ils, elles Il faut qu'ils Je
Speak.
parlent.
Finish. finissent.
Receive. reçoivent.
Restore. rendent.
parlent.
finissent.
reçoivent.
rendent.
tu
il
nous
Vous
parliez.
finissiez.
parle, parles, parle, parlions,
finisse, finisses, finisse, finissions,
reçoive, reçoives, reçoive, recevions, recevioz.
rende, rendes, rende, rendions, rendiez.
As the student is already acquainted with some of the persons of the
irregular ones, (8 in all, by our rule, as may be seen at $151,) we will at
once introduce them, with some of the known antecedents. In going over
the following, let the antecedent be repeated with every new person. As:
Il faut qu'il ait la bonté, &c. Il faut qu'ils aient la, &c.
You must have the goodness to do
that-he, they.
Must I be here early?
Is it necessary for him to be here?
You must be here early.
It is not necessary that he should
come.
Is it the only one you know?
knows? they know?
Il faut que vous ayez la bonté de
faire cela, qu'il ait, qu'ils aient.
Faut-il que je sois ici de bonne
heure ?
Faut-il qu'il soit ici ?
Il faut que vous soyez ici de bonne
heure.
Il n'est pas nécessaire qu'il vienne.
he Est-ce le seul que vous sachiez? qu'il
sache? qu'ils sachent?
It is the only one I know, he knows, C'est le seul que je sache, qu'il
they know.
When will it be time for us to come?
for her for thee?
sache, qu'ils sachent.
Quand sera-t-il temps que nous
venions? qu'elle vienne ?
viennes ?
tu
It will be time for you, for her, for me Il sera temps que vous veniez, qu'elle
to come at 6 o'clock.
Do you wish me to do that?
do you wish me to do it?
How
vienne, je vienne à 6 heures.
Voulez-vous que je fasse cela? Com-
ment voulez-vous que je le fasse ?
{wish you to do it this way; him, Je veux que vous le fassiez comme
her to do it.
ceci, qu'il le fasse, qu'elle le fasse.
SEVENTY-EIGHTH LESSON. (1.)
409
Although you can do it, I'd rather Quoique vous puissiez le faire, je
you would not do it.
ne me soucie pas que vous le
fassiez.
Ta it not time for us to go to school? | N'est-il pas temps que nous allions
for them? for thee?
I is high time for us, for them, for
thee to go.
Is he sorry I can ? we can ? she
can? thou canst ?
à l'école ? qu'ils aillent ? tu ailles ?
Il est grand temps que nous y allions,
qu'ils y aillent, que tu y ailles.
Est-il fâché que je puisse ?
Nous
puissions? qu'elle puisse ? que
tu puisses?
He is not sorry you can, we can, she Il n'est pas fâché que vous puissiez,
can, I can.
She is.
nous puissions, qu'elle puisse, je
puisse.
Est-elle contente rue nous valions
autant qu'eux ? Elle l'est.
Is she glad we are worth as much as
they?
Will he do it without our wishing it? Le fera-t-il sans que nous le voulions?
your, my wishing it?
vous le vouliez ? je le veuille ?
He will not do it except you wish it, | Il ne le fera pas sans que vous le
we, they wish it.
vouliez, nous le voulions, qu'ils le
veuillent.
SOIXANTE-DIX-HUITIÈME THÊME.
1re Sec.
Où voulez-vous que j'aille? Allez chez le bijoutier.-Où voulez-
vous qu'il aille? Je désire qu'il aille chez le menuisier.-Et, elle?
Je désire qu'elle aille chez la faiseuse de robes.-Où faut-il que je
sois à huit heures? Il faut que vous soyez au magasin. Où faut-ils
qu'ils soient? Il faut que Jean, Frédéric, et Marie, soient à l'école.
-Est-ce à dix heures où à dix heures et demie qu'il faut que nous
soyons au bateau à vapeur? Il faut que nous y soyons à dix heures
et demie; mais il vaut mieux que nous y allions de meilleure heure.
Sans doute.-Est-il nécessaire que le cuisinier achète plus d'une
livre (a pound) de beurre? Oui, il faut qu'il en achète au moins
trois livres. Trois livres! y pensez-vous? (are you thinking of what
you say? are you in earnest ?)-Faut-il dire au boulanger d'apporter
des petits-pains? (rolls?) Oui, il faut le lui dire, car il n'en appor-
tera pas sans que nous le lui disions.-Est-ce le seul médecin que
vous connaissiez ?-N'est-il pas temps que je traduise, que j'écrive,
et que je lise mon thême ?-Convient-il (is it suitable) qu'elle reçoive
ce billet, qu'elle le lise, et qu'elle y réponde?
Will you relate (raconter) something to me? What do you wish
me to relate to you? A little anecdote, if you like. A little boy
one day at table (à table) asked for some meat; his father said that
it was not polite to ask for any, and added: "You must wait till ( jus-
qu'à ce que, § 151) some is given to you." After a little while, the
poor boy, seeing every one eat, and that nothing was given to him,
85
410
SEVENTY-EIGHTH LESSON. (2.)
said to his father: "My dear father, give me a little salt, if you
please." "What will you do with it?" asked the father. "I wish
to eat it with the meat which you will give me," replied (répliquer)
the child. Everybody admired (admirer) the little boy's wit; and
his father, perceiving that he had forgotten him, gave him a piece
of meat, some salt, and vegetables.
Who was that little boy that asked for meat at table? He was the
son of one of my friends.-Why did he ask for some meat? He
asked for some because he had a good appetite.-Why did his father
not give him some immediately? Because he had forgotten it.—
Was the little boy wrong in asking for some? He was wrong, for
he ought to have waited. If it was impolite to ask for meat, was it
not impolite also to ask for salt, or anything else? And to be con-
sistent, ought not the father to have told him again: "You must wait
until some is given to you?" That may be; but although the
father's conduct may be called inconsistent, the child's request was
not the less witty, (n'en était pas moins spirituelle.)-It is a pity
(§ 151) the cook did not go to market, for I am afraid that the best
fruit is sold by this time, (ne soit vendu (§ 151—6) à certe heure-ci.)¹
VOCABULAIRE. 2de Sec.
Is it extraordinary that we do not | Est-il extraordinaire que nous ne le
wish it ?-they do not wish it? voulions pas ?-qu'ils ne le veuill-
ent pas ?
It is (extraordinary that you do not
wish it that they do not wish it).
Is it not vexing (sad) that she loses
them? I lose them? You lose
some ?
It is very sad for her to lose them;
for you to lose them; for me to
lose some.
Il est extraordinaire que vous ne le
vouliez pas qu'ils ne le veuillent
pas.
N'est-il pas facheux qu'elle les
perde? que je les perde? vous en
perdiez ?
Il est très-fâcheux qu'elle les perde;
que vous les perdiez; que j'en
perde.
Is it right that I should get up and Est-il juste que je me lève et que
that you should not?
It is right for us both to get up.
Is it not wrong that we should have
some, and that they should not
have any?
Yes, it is wrong that you should re-
ceive some and they none.
vous ne vous leviez pas ?
Il est juste que nous nous levions
tous deux.
N'est-il pas injuste que nous en
ayons, et qu'ils n'en aient pas ?
Si fait, il est injuste que vous en
receviez et qu'ils n'en reçoivent
pas.
As the student knows the subjunctive present of the auxiliaries (avoir,
ŝtre), he can easily form the compound tenses, Although I have been;
Quoique j'aie été.
SEVENTY-EIGHTH LESSON. (2.)
411
:
Is it not surprising that they go to
bed? we go to bed, so soon?
No, it is not surprising that they go
to bed, that you go to bed so soon.
N'est-il pas surprenant qu'ils se cou
chent? que nous nous couchions,
si tôt ?
Non, il n'est pas étonnant qu'ils se
couchent, que vous vous couchiez
si tôt.
Is it not better for her to start when Ne vaut-il pas mieux qu'elle parte
her uncles start?
quand ses oncles partiront ?
It is better she should not start at all. Il vaut mieux qu'elle ne parte pas du
tout.
Will it do for us to say it, or for Convient-il que nous le disions, ou
them ?
qu'ils le disent?
It will not do for you to say it; but Il ne convient pas que vous le disiez,
for them, it will do.
Is it possible that his horses should
be worth more than his brother's?
It is not possible they should be |
worth more.
mais il convient qu'ils le disent.
Est-il possible que ses chevaux vaill-
ent mieux que ceux de son frère?
Il n'est pas possible qu'ils vaillent
mieux.
Est-il à désirer qu'il prenne pen-
sion ?
Is it desirable that he should take
board ?
It is desirable that he, that you, that Il est à désirer qu'il prenne, que vous
we should take board.
preniez, que nous prenions pension.
SOIXANTE-DIX-HUITIÈME THÊME. 2de Sec.
Est-il surprenant qu'il sache si bien l'allemand? Non, il n'est pas
surprenant qu'il le sache si bien, puisque sa mère est allemande.
Aime-t-il qu'on le loue? Il aime qu'on le loue, mais il n'aime pas
que nous soyons loués. Suppose-t-il que nous l'approuvions (§ 151—5)
que vous l'approuviez? Il suppose que vous l'approuvez, que nous
l'approuvons, (indicat.)—Que diriez-vous si je vous racontais une
petite anecdote en Français? Je dirais que vous êtes aussi aimable
qu'à l'ordinaire. Un jeune prince, de sept ans, était admiré par tout
le monde à cause de son esprit. Il entendit un jour un officier, qui
parlait de lui, dire: “Quand les enfants ont tant d'esprit dans leur
enfance, ils en ont ordinairement fort peu quand ils sont avancés en
âge." “S'il en est ainsi,” dit le jeune prince, "vous devez avoir eu
infiniment d'esprit dans votre enfance!"-Y a-t-il long-temps que
vous savez cette anecdote? Il a fallu que je la traduise hier, (I had
..)—Désire-t-on qu'elle réussisse ou que vous réussissiez? On
ne désire pas que nous réussissions; mais qu'elle réussisse.
10.
•
Do you wish me to relate to you another anecdote? You will
greatly (beaucoup) oblige me.-Some one purchasing some goods of
a shopkeeper, (un marchand,) said to him: "You ask too much.
you must (§ 151) not sell so dear to me as to another, because I am
a friend, (puisque je suis des amis de la maison.") The merchant
replied: "Sir, we must gain something by (avec) our friends, for our
را
412
SEVENTY-EIGHTH LESSON. (3.)
enemies will never come to the shop."-An Englishman, on first
visiting France, met with a very young child in the streets of Calais,
who spoke the French language with fluency and elegance, (cou-
ramment et avec élégance.) "Good heaven, (Mon Dieu!) is it possi-
ble?" exclaimed he, "that even children here speak the French
language with purity, (la pureté.")
Let us seek (rechercher) the friendship of the good, and avoid
(éviter) the society of the wicked (le méchant ;) for bad company
corrupts (les mauvaises sociétés corrompent) good manners, (les bonnes
maurs.)—What sort of weather is it to-day? It snows continually,
(toujours,) as it snowed yesterday, and according to all appearances,
will also snow to-morrow.-Do you think it will snow (§ 151-5) to-
morrow also? I hope it will, for I am always very well when it is
very cold. And I am (et moi, je me porte) always very well when it is
neither cold nor warm.-It is too windy to-day, and we should do
better if we stayed at home. Whatever weather it may be, (Quel-
que temps qu'il fasse, § 151-11,) I must go out; for I promised to be
with my sister at a quarter past eleven, and I must keep my word,
(tenir parole.)
*
VOCABULAIRE. 3me Sec.
See (151) and study it carefully, and make a list of the antecedents as
they occur.
It seems you are angry, (you appear.) | Il semble¹ que vous soyez fâché (R. 4.)
You appear angry, (to be angry.) Vous semblez fâché, (être fâché.)
The subjunctive is employed in the first sentence because il semble is used
unipersonally; but not being used so in the second, the indicative is employed.
Is it sufficient that you and I should |
complain of it?
Yes, it is sufficient that we complain |
of it (for us to complain.) So that
neither she nor they must complain.
Let him come if he wishes.
Let them wait if they have a mind.
Let Julius write the letter, and you
will carry it.
Suffit-il que vous vous en plaigniez
et que je m'en plaigne ?
Oui, il suffit que nous nous en plai-
gnions. Ainsi ni lui ni eux ne
doivent s'en plaindre. (77¹, N.)
Qu'il vienne s'il veut. (§ 150-7.)
Qu'ils attendent s'ils en ont envie.
Que Jules écrive la lettre, et vous la
porterez.
Obs. 164. We saw (§ 150—7) that the 3d pers. sing. and plur. of the impera-
tive were like the same persons of the present of the subjunctive, conse
quently, we can now use those persons of the imperative without difficulty.
¹ Il semble, it seems, is also construed with the indicative when it has an
indirect object, as: It seems to me that you are angry; il me semble que vous
êtes fâché. It seems to thee, il te semble, il lui semble, &c., to him or
her, &c.
SEVENTY-EIGHTH LESSON. (3.)
413
Let him have the goodness to hold it. | Qu'il ait la bonté de le tenir.
Let Sophia receive her reward.
Where do you prefer him to buy the
candy?
grocer's.
Let him buy it at the
Watch the bird.
not run or fly away.
Let them mind it.
Que Sophie reçoive sa récompense.
Où préférez-vous qu'il achète le
candi?
Qu'il l'achète chez
l'épicier.
Take care it does Veillez l'oiseau. Prenez garde qu'il
ne s'enfuie, (ne s'en aille, s'envole.)
Qu'ils y prennent garde.
Ask Betsy to tell the cook to cook Priez Lisette de dire à la cuisinière
the salt fish.
I doubt her being able to cook it, for
her coal fire is almost out. (§ 151-2.)
I wish you may succeed.
I doubt that he is arrived. (R. 2.)
I wish to be obeyed.
I wish him to be told so.
He wishes me to have patience.
I doubt his being at home. (R. 2.)
I fear we shall have a storm.
He denies having done it.
de faire cuire le poisson salé.
Je doute qu'elle puisse le faire cuire,
car son feu de charbon est presque
éteint.
Je désire que vous réussissiez.
Je doute qu'il soit arrivé.
Je veux qu'on m'obéisse.
Je souhaite qu'on le lui dise.
Il veut que j'aie patience.
Je doute qu'il soit à la maison.
Je crains que nous n'ayons un orage.
Il nie qu'il l'ait fait.
He complains of your having ill- Il se plaint que vous l'ayez mal-
treated him.
I am very sorry for your having done
it.
I regret that you should have been
obliged to wait.
traité.
Je suis au désespoir que vous l'ayez
fait.
Je regrette que vous ayez été obligé
d'attendre.
You will approve of my not going Vous trouverez bon que je n'y aille
thither.
pas.
He disapproved of your having said it. Il a trouvé mauvais que vous l'ayez
dit.
Wha do you wish these men to buy? Que voulez-vous que ces hommes
What do you wish him to answer?
Do you expect him to give you his
goods for nothing?
What do you want me to drink?
achètent ?
Que voulez-vous qu'il réponde?
Vous attendez-vous à ce qu'il vous
donne ses marchandises pour rien?
Que voulez-vous que je boive?
SOIXANTE-DIX-HUITIÈME THÊME. 3me Sec.
Suffit-il que vous le disiez pour qu'on le croie? N'est-il pas suffi-
sant que je le dise pour qu'on le croie?-Mérite-t-il qu'on l'attende?
(§ 151—2.) S'il mérite qu'on l'attende! Sans doute qu'il le mérite!
—S'il a perdu le feuillet, qu'il le retrouve,¹ (find it again.) Qu'il le
1 The syllable re prefixed to a French verb, corresponds in English to:
back, again, anew, or re. Venir, revenir, to come back, porter, reporter, to
carry back or again; trouver, retrouver, to find again; voir, revoir, to see
again; renouveler, to renew; doubler, redoubler, to redouble, &c.; con.
sidérer, reconsidérer, to consider again or anew.
35*
414
SEVENTY-EIGHTH LESSON. (4.)
•
retrouve! c'est plus aisé à dire qu'à faire. Qu'il essaie.-Tenez.
vous bien la flûte? Prenez garde qu'elle ne tombe. Je la tiens
bien. Je prendrai garde qu'elle ne tombe.-Il est impossible que le
courrier ne soit pas encore arrivé! Pourquoi Salomon reste-t-il si
long-temps? Il est possible que la neige ait empêché le courrier
d'arriver à l'heure ordinaire. Il est possible que cela soit; mais
j'espère qu'il n'en est pas ainsi. (§ 151-2.) Je l'espère aussi, mais
ayons patience jusqu'à ce que Salomon revienne. Quelque désir
que vous ayez d'avoir vos lettres, et quelqu'importantes que les nou-
velles puissent être, il faut que nous attendions avec patience. Vous
en parlez bien à votre aise. J'attends sans m'impatienter.
Have you corrected Louisa's exercise? Yes, I have.-How many
mistakes had she? She had but three or four. But three or four!
That is a good deal for her.-The exercise must have been very.
hard, (difficult.) (77¹, N.) It was. She is the most attentive and
studious pupil I have.-Are you not afraid we shall have (§ 151—6)
a storm? I am afraid we shall have a violent one. See, how black
the sky is at the west!-Are you glad that I did it, and that he could
not do it? (622, N. 1.) I am glad you did it; but I am sorry that he
could not do it. Let the girl go (Obs. 164) to the apothecary's. What
do you wish her to purchase? I want her to buy some perfumed
soap, and to (§ 151—9) put it in
in my desk.
What must we bring you from the country? Is it necessary that
you should go? We have promised to go.-Would you not be
astonished if we did not keep our promise? (§ 148, N. 3.)—You
come late; you have made us wait a long time. We regret that
you have been obliged to wait.-How long have you been waiting?
Never mind the time we have already lost, let us lose no more; but
.et us finish our affair quickly, so that (afin que, § 151) we may go
home. It seems you are a little cross, (un peu de mauvaise humeur.)
It does not suit you, Sir, to find fault with me, when the fault is
yours. Come. Let us have done.
VOCABULAIRE.
4me Sec.
Ind. Je crois qu'il a raison.
believe he is in the right.
Do you believe that horse is worth a Subj. Croyez-vous que ce cheval
hundred crowns?
vaille cent écus? (§ 151-5.)
I do not believe that it is worth a Subj. Je ne crois pas qu'il vaille cent
hundred crowns.
I hope he will come.
Do you hope he will come?
I think he has done it.
Do you think he has done it?
If you think it will be fine weather,
let us set out for the country.
écus.
Ind. J'espère qu'il viendra.
Subj. Espérez-vous qu'il vienne?
Ind. Je pense qu'il l'a fait.
Subj. Pensez-vous qu'il l'ait fait ?
Si vous pensez qu'il fasse beau
temps, partons pour la campagne.
SEVENTY-FIGHTH LESSON. (4.)
415
I fear that they will come. (§ 151-6.) | Je crains qu'ils ne viennent.
I am afraid you will speak of me.
Does he not fear that you might speak
of it?
Do you fear to offend him?
(282. Obs. 65.)
If I apprehended you would do it.
1 am not afraid that the man will
come. (151-7.)
Do not doubt my being always your
friend. ($151-8.)
He does not deny your having done it.
J'ai peur que vous ne parliez de moi.
Ne craint-il pas que vous n'en par·
liez ?
Craignez-vous de l'offenser?
Si j'apprehendais que vous le fissiez.
Je n'ai pas peur que l'homme vienne.
Ne doutez pas que je ne sois toujours
votre ami.
Il ne nie pas que vous ne l'ayez fait.
REMARK. The subjunctive is further governed by an adjective or parti.
iple preceded by one of the verbs, être,* to be; paraître,* to appear;
sembler, to seem. Some of such adjectives or participles arc :
Affligé,
Bien aise,
Charmé,
Content,
afflicted.
glad.
charmed.
satisfied.
I am sorry that she is ill.
I am charmed that you are here.
I am glad that he has received his
money.
She is angry that you are my friend.
I am surprised that you are not more
attentive.
Enchanté,
Étonné,
Fâché,
Surpris,
enchanted.
astonished.
sorry.
surprised, &c.
Je suis fâché qu'elle soit malade.
Je suis charmé que vous soyez ici.
Je suis bien aise qu'il ait eu son ar-
gent.
Elle est fâchée que vous soyez mon
ami.
Je suis étonné que vous ne soyez pas
plus attentif.
I am extremely glad that your sister Je suis enchanté que votre sœur soit
has recovered.
Your father is afflicted that you miss
your lessons.
I am surprised that you have not done
your task.
rétablie.
Votre père est affligé que vous man-
quiez vos leçons.
Je suis surpris que vous n'ayez pas
fait votre devoir.
Obs. 165. In all these instances, if de ce should be placed before que or
qui, the indicative follows. But the subjunctive, as above, is preferable.
I am charmed at your being here.
Je suis charmé de ce que vous êtes
ici.
He is glad that you have received Il est bien aise de ce que vous avez
your money.
It is certain that you are in the wrong.
It is not certain that you are in the
right. (151-4.)
It is probable that he will do it.
Is it probable that he will do it?
It is true that he is capable of it.
If it be true that he is capable of it.
eu votre argent.
Ind. Il est certain que vous avez tort.
Subj. Il n'est pas certain que vous
ayez raison.
Ind. Il est probable qu'il le fera.
Subj. Est-il probable qu'il le fasse !
Ind. Il est vrai qu'il en est capable.
Subj. S'il est vrai qu'il en soit capable.
416
SEVENTY-NINTH LESSON. (1.)
SOIXANTE-DIX-HUITIÈME THÊME. 4me Sec.
Croyez-vous qu'il ait raison ou qu'elle ait raison? Nous croyons
qu'ils ont tort, tous deux.-Si le colonel est en ville, je crains bien
qu'il ne vienne nous voir. Et moi, je crains qu'il ne vienne pas.—Croi-
ent-ils que leur maison vaille dix mille gourdes? Qu'ils le croient
ou non, ils en demandent ce prix-là.-Elle a peur que nous ne par-
lions d'elle, n'est-ce pas ? Peu lui importe, (it is of little importance
to her; she does not care,) que nous parlions d'elle ou que nous n'en
parlions pas.-M. Da promis de venir, n'est-ce pas ? Espérez-
vous qu'il vienne malgré le mauvais temps? J'espère qu'il viendra
malgré le mauvais temps, car je ne doute pas qu'il ne tienne parole.
Nous craignons beaucoup que cet homme ne revienne pendant votre
absence. Je n'ai pas peur qu'il revienne, ainsi ne craignez rien.
You have forbidden him to go to the wharf, (vous lui avez défende
de ;) do you think he went there? (§ 151.) I do not think he went;
but his sister thinks he did go.-Is he not afraid that you will busy
yourself with it? I care very little whether he is afraid or not. (Per
m'importe que, § 151.)—If you think that we can go to Burlington and
come back in two hours, let us start. I do not think we can go and
return in so short a time. (§ 200.)—As it is important that we should
see the lawyer before Tuesday, suppose we go, (should go.) Very
well, let us go.-Let John take care of the store during my absence.
John or William? No matter which, (n'importe lequel,) provided
the store is taken (§ 151-2) care of.
•
Are you not glad we have received the invitation we so much
desired? I am very glad, on your account, that we have received
at. On my account! How? don't you wish to go? I care very little
about i' That is something new. I thought that you were as anxious
to go (vous aviez autant envie d'y aller) as I. I was as anxious to go
as you at first; but now I think I would rather not go. It is asto-
nishing that you change so!-Sarah, I am glad you are here. Are
you, indeed? I, for my part, am glad I am here. (282, Obs. 65.)—
Is not that clerk's uncle much afflicted that his nephew behaves so
badly? No, he cares very little now, whether he behaves well or
not at first, he was very much afflicted at it. I believe he was.
SEVENTY-NINTH LESSON.-Soixante-dix-neuvième Leçon, 79me
VOCABULAIRE.
1re Sec.
SUBJUNCTIVE IMPERFECT.-Subjonctif Imparfait.
For its formation see ($152.) That article is to be carefully studied.
After the following conjunctions use the subjunctive:
SEVENTY-NINTH LESSON. (1.)
417
Afin que,
that, in order that, | Nonobstant que, for all that, not-
to the end that.
À moins que .. ne, unless.
Au cas que,
Avant que,
Bien que,
De peur que,
En cas que,
if.
Posé que,
Pour que,
though. [-6.)
Pour peu que,
before.
withstanding that.
suppose that.
that, in order that.
if ever so little, how
little soever.
provided, save that.
though...
without...
De crainte que.ne, for fear, lest. ($151)
Encore que,
Jusqu'à ce que,
Loin que,
Non que,
Non pas que,
lest.
in case, if.
though.
till, until.
far from.
}
not that.
Will you stay here until I can go
out with you?
I will go out before he comes back.
If you had what you have not, you
would be rich.
I sent you my book, that you might
read it.
Unless you accompany her, she will
not go out.
Pourvu que,
Quoique,
Sans que,
Si peu que,
Soit que,
Supposé que,
however little.
whether.
suppose tha.
Voulez-vous rester ici jusqu'à ce que
je puisse sortir avec vous ?
Je sortirai avant qu'il ne revienne.
En cas que vous éussiez ce que vous
n'avez pas, vous seriez riche.
Je vous envoyai mon livre, afin que
vous le lussiez.
A moins que vous ne l'accompagniez,
elle ne sortira pas.
Though your children were idle, yet Bien que vos enfants fussent pares.
they improved.
If a man had ever so little acquaint-
ance with another, he was bound
to take a part in the dispute, and
venture his person as much as if
he had himself been angry.
Be it as it may, they will not go.
Though she was little and bad-look- |
ing, she was nevertheless amiable.
I would not have her for a wife,
though she is rich, and has a great
deal of wit, because she is not
good-hearted.
Provided you are my friend, I am
satisfied.
Whether you are right or wrong.
seux, ils faisaient des progrès.
Pour peu qu'un homme fût connu
d'un autre, il fallait qu'il entrât
dans la dispute, et qu'il payât de
sa personne, comme s'il avait été
lui-même en colère.
Quoiqu'il en soit, ils n'iront pas.
Quoiqu'elle fût petite et qu'elle eût
mauvaise mine, elle ne laissait pas
d'être aimable.
Je ne la voudrais pas pour femme,
quoiqu'elle soit richo, et qu'elle ait
beaucoup d'esprit, parce qu'elle
n'a pas bon cœur.
Pourvu que vous soyez de mes amis,.
je suis content.
Soit que vous ayez raison ou tort.
SOIXANTE-DIX-NEUVIÈME THÊME. 1re Sec.
Préférai.-il que je le fisse? Non, il ne préférait pas que vous le
fissiez.-Ne préfèrerait-il pas que vous y allassiez? Non, mais il
préfèrerait que ses neveux y allassent. Jérome n'était-il pas un
assez bon domestique? Si, quoiqu'il oubliât quelque fois de fermer
les portes.-Niait-il qu'il ne l'eût fait? Non, il ne le niait pas.-
Se plaignit-il que vous, lui, et moi, nous eussions tout mangé? Non,
418
LESSON. (2.)
SEVENTY-NINTH
il ne se plaignit pas que nous eussions tout mangé, mais il s'en
étonna.-Ne se souciait-il pas que vous vinssiez? Il aurait, au
contraire, beaucoup désiré que je vinsse, mais il ne se souciait pas
que ces enfants-là vinssent.-N'exigeâtes-vous pas (require) que
nous le promissions sur le champ? Je ne m'en souviens pas. Est-ce
que j'exigeai que vous le promissiez?-Était-il à écrire quand
vous l'appelâtes ?-Pourquoi votre ami ne vient-il pas à cette heure-
ci? Il faut qu'il soit à étudier.
M. de Turenne would never buy any thing on credit of tradesmen,
(le marchand,) for fear, he said, they should lose a great part of their
money, if he happened to be killed. All the workmen who were
employed about his house had orders (avait ordre) to bring in their
hills (un mémoire) before he set out (§ 152) for the campaign, (se
mettre en campagne,) and they were regularly paid.-You will
never be respected (respecter) unless you forsake (abandonner) the
bad company you keep.-You cannot finish your work to-night,
unless I help you.-I will explain to you (expliquer) every difficulty,
that you may not be disheartened (décourager) in your undertaking,
(une enterprise.)
Suppose you should lose your friends, what would become of
you? In case you want my assistance, call me; I shall help you.-
A wise and prudent man (un homme sage et prudent) lives with eco-
nomy when yonng, in order that he may enjoy the fruit of his
labour when he is old.-Carry this money to Mr. N., in order that
he may be able to pay his debts, (une dette.)—Will you lend me
that money? I will not lend it you unless you promise to return
(rendre) it to me as soon as you can.—Did the general arrive? He
arrived yesterday morning at the camp, (le camp,) weary, (las,) and
tired, (harassé,) but very seasonably, (très-à propos;) he immediately
gave his orders to begin the action, though he had not yet all his
troops. Are your sisters happy? They are not, though they are
rich, because they are not contented.
VOCABULAIRE. 2de Sec.
THE PERFECT OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE (Parfait du Subjonctif) is formed
by the present of the auxiliary and the past participle. It requires an ante-
Ledent.
I must have sent them there.
She must have come early.
Although he has not dressed himself.
Don't you hope the thief has been
taken?
Il faut que je les y ai envoyés.
Il faut qu'elle soit venue de bonne
heure.
Quoiqu'il ne se soit pas habillé.
N'espérez-vous pas que le voleur cit
été pris ?
It combines with the present and the future of the Indicative. (§ 151-12.
SEVENTY-NINTH LESSON. (2.)
419
fie will not come although I have | Il ne viendra pas quoique je l'aie
invited him.
invité.
Shall (should) we go without being Irons-nous (irions-nous) sans que
invited?
She always looks (looked) well, how-
ever little she may (might) be
dressed.
nous soyons (fussions) invités ?
Elle a (avait) toujours bonne mine,.
si peu qu'elle soit (fût) habillée.
I do not think he rejoiced at the good Je ne crois pas qu'il se soit réjoui do
nows we have received.
la bonne nouvelle que nous avons
reçue.
THE PLUPERFECT OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE (Plus que purfait du Subjonctif)
is formed from the imperfect of the auxiliary and the past participle of ano-
ther verb. (§ 151-12.) It combines with the past tenses and conditionnels.
Before I had loved.
Before she had departed.
Avant que j'eusse aimé.
Avant qu'elle fut partie.
Avant qu'ils s'en fussent allés.
Quoique vous eussiez été vus.
Il méritait qu'on l'eût puni.
Il remplissait les fonctions de consul,
quoique sa nomination n'eût pas
été sanctionnée par le sénat.
Before they had gone away.
Although you had been seen.
He deserved to have been punished.
He was exercising the functions of
consul,although his nomination had
not been ratified by the senate.
Obs. 166. Some conjunctions govern the indicative when the sentence
affirms positively that the thing in question is or will be, and the subjunc-
tive when it is not certain, or only wished for. They are the following:
De façon que.
De sorte que.
Tellement que.
Sinon que.
De manière que.
En sorte que.
You behave in such a manner that
you are loved by everybody.
Behave in such a manner that you
may be loved.
}
So that, in so much that.
Except that.
Ind. Vous vous conduisez de façon
que vous êtes aimé de tout le monde.
Subj. Conduisez-vous de façon que
vous soyez aimě.
SOIXANTE-DIX-NEUVIÈME THÊME. 2de Sec.
Guillaume est-il à lire dans sa chambre? Non, il était à jouer de
la flûte dans le jardin avant que vous entrassiez.-Qu'est-il à faire
maintenant? Il faut qu'il soit à se promener dans le bosquet, (grove.)
-Faut-il que j'aille l'appeler? Non, qu'il s'y promène; mais en
cas qu'il revienne bientôt, vous lui direz que je désirerais qu'il
s'habillât pour sortir avec moi. S'il eût su (had he known) que vous
désiriez qu'il sortît avec vous, il se serait déjà habillé. Cela ne presse
pas, (there is no hurry.) Il aura le temps de se préparer avant que
je sois prête moi-même.-Pour peu que vous eussiez attendu ce
matin, vous auriez pu voir le général, car vous étiez à peine sorti
qu'il est rentré. Puis-je avoir le plaisir de le voir? Non, il est
420
SEVENTY-NINTH LESSON. (3.)
encore sorti. Ne vaut-il pas mieux que vous attendiez? Si fait
pourvu que vous soyez sûr qu'il rentrera bientôt.
Although they have a good memory, that is not enough to learn
any language whatever, (quelque langue que ce soit ;) they must make
use of their judgment, (le jugement.)-Behold how amiable that lady
is; for all that she (quoiqu'elle) has no fortune, I do not love her the
less.-Will you lend me your violin? I will lend it you, provided
you return it to me to-night.-Would your mother call upon me?
She would, provided you would promise to take her to the concert.
I shall not cease to importune (importuner) her, till she has forgiven
me.-Give me that penknife. I will give it you, provided you will
not make a bad use of it.-Shall you go to London? I will go, pro-
vided you accompany (accompagner) me; and I will write again
trécrire*) to your brother, lest he should not have received my letter.
Where were you during the engagement? I was m bed to have
my wounds (une blessure) dressed, (panser.) Would to God (Plût à
Dieu) I had been there! I would have conquered (vaincre) or per-
ished, (périr.) We avoided an engagement for fear we should be
taken, their force being superior (supérieure) to ours.-God forbid (ď
Dieu ne plaise, with the subjunctive,) I should blame your conduc.
but your business will never be done properly unless you do it your-
self. Will you set out soon? I shall not set out till I have dined.-
Why did you tell me that my father was arrived, though you knew
the contrary? You are so hasty, (prompt,) that however little you
are contradicted (contrarié) you fly into a passion (s'emporter) in an
instant.
VOCABULAIRE.
3me Sec.
Since you know him and are respon- | Ind. Dès que vous le connaissez et
sible for him. (§ 151-9.)
Unless you are attentive, and do
your task regularly, you will not
learn.
If your friend were here, and would
call upon me. (§ 151-10.)
If he loved me, and sincerely wished
my welfare.
If anybody come, and I should not
be at home, send for me.
If your brother writes to you, and
you are satisfied with his letter, I
beg of you to let me know it.
Be industrious, that your parents
may be satisfied. (§ 151-10.)
|
que vous répondez de lui.
Subj. À moins que vous ne soyez
attentif, et que vous ne fassiez ré-
gulièrement votre devoir, vous
n'apprendrez pas.
Si votre ami était ici, et qu'il voulût
venir me voir.
S'il m'aimait, et qu'il désirât sincère-
ment mon bonheur.
Si quelqu'un venait, et que je nẹ
fusse pas à la maison, envoyez-moi
chercher.
Si votre frère vous écrit, et que vous
soyez content de sa lettre, je vous
prie de m'en faire part.
Appliquez-vous, que vos parents
soient contents, (afin que.)
SEVENTY-NINTH LESSON. (3.)
421
Whether I read or write, it is always Que je lise ou que j'écrire, on y trouve
found fault with.
toujours à redire, (soit que.)
I can say nothing without your know. Je ne puis rien dire que tu ne le
ing it.
Do not begin before I give you no-
tice.
saches, (sans que.)
Ne commencez pas que je ne vous
avertisse, (avant que.)
He is never punished unless he has Jamais on ne le punit qu'il ne l'ait
deserved it.
Wait till your father returns.
mérité, (à moins que.)
Attendez que votre père revIENRE,
(jusqu'à ce que.)
SOIXANTE-DIX-NEUVIÈME THÊME. 3me Sec.
Puisque vous allez de ce côté-là, et que vous passez devant la
boutique de l'apothicaire, arrêtez-vous-y et dites-lui de nous envoyer
une boite de poudre minérale. Je le ferai avec plaisir. À quelle
heure faut-il qu'il l'envoie? N'importe à quelle heure, pourvu que
ce soit avant l'heure du coucher, (bed-time.) Quoiqu'il n'apprît pas
facilement, et qu'il n'eut guère de temps, il faisait des progrès. Oui,
parce qu'il était attentif et studieux. Si vous eussiez été aussi indus-
trieux que votre cousine, et que vous vous fussiez mieux appliqué,
n'eussiez-vous pas appris davantage? Quoiqu'il fût à faire une
partie d'échecs, et qu'il eût presque gagné, il la quitta dès qu'il apprit
que sa sœur désirait qu'il l'accompagnât.-Ne commencez pas que
je ne vous en avertisse, et que je ne vous envoie un autre crayon.
Je n'y manquerai pas.
Should your father not arrive to-day, and if you want money, I will
lend you some. I am much obliged to you.-Have you done your
task? Not quite; if I had had time, and if I had not been so uneasy
about (de) the arrival (l'arrivée) of my father, I should have done.
it.—If you would study and be attentive, I assure you that you might
learn the French language in a very short time.-He who wishes to
teach an art, must know it thoroughly, (à fond ;) he must give none
but clear (précise) and well-digested (digérer) notions (la notion) of
it; he must instil (faire entrer) them one by one into the minds
(dans l'esprit) of his pupils, and above all, (surtout,) he must not
overburden (surcharger) their memory with useless or unimportant,
(insignifiant) rules.
My dear friend, lend me a louis. Here are (en voici) two instead
of one.-How much obliged I am to you, (que d'obligations je vous
ai!) I am always glad when I see you, and I find my happiness in
yours. Is this house to be sold? Do you wish to buy it?—Why
not? Do you think it is a good house, and that it is worth 7000
dollars? I do not think it is.-Why was not your sister studying?
à étudier?) She would have been studying if she were not always
36
422
EIGHTIETH LESSON. (1.)
so absent, (distrait.)-I like pretty anecdotes; they season (assaison.
ner) conversation, (la conversation,) and amuse everybody. Pray
relate me some. Look, if you please, at page 148 of the book which
I lent you, and you will find some.
EIGHTIETH LESSON, 80th-Quatre-vingtième Leçon, 80me.
VOCABULAIRE. Ire Sec.
SUBJONCTIF Continué.
Quelque, whatever, whatsoever, however, is connected in three ways,
(§ 151-11.)
However good you are or may be, | Quelque bon que vous soyez.
(1st way.)
However cross (peevish) she may Quelqu'acariâtre qu'elle ait été.
have been.
However rich they were, (might be.)
However rich she might have been.
However elegant they thought them-
selves.
Whatsoever courage you may have,
he has more than you. (§ 151—11.)
Whatsoever patience we may have,
we will never have enough.
Whatsoever riches he may have, he
will soon see the end of them.
Whatsoever kindness I have had for
him, I never shall have as much
as he merits.
Quelque riches qu'ils fussent.
Quelque riche qu'elle eût pu être.
Quelqu'élégants qu'ils se crussent.
Quelque courage que vous ayez, il
en a plus que vous.
Quelque patience que nous ayons,
nous n'en aurons jamais assez.
Quelques richesses qu'il ait, il en
verra bientôt la fin.
Quelque bonté que j'aie eue pour lui,
je n'en aurai jamais autant qu'il le
mérite.
Whatsoever faults you may make, I Quelques fautes que vous fassiez,
will take care to correct them.
Whatever may be the
be the happiness
which you enjoy, I am happier
than you. ($151-11.)
Whatsoever may be the fortune
which you enjoy, you may lose it
⚫in an instant.
Whatsoever may be the efforts which
you make, you never can succeed.
Whatsoever may be the pains which
you take, no one will be under
obligations to you for them.
j'aurai soin de les corriger.
Quel que soit le bonheur dont vous
jouissiez, je suis plus heureux que
vous.
Quelle que soit la fortune dont vous
jouissiez, vous pouvez la perdre en
un instant.
Quels que soient les efforts que vous
fassiez, vous ne pouvez jamais
réussir.
Quelles que soient les peines que vous
prenicz, on ne vous en aura aucune
obligation.
Whatever, whatsoever, (meaning all Quelque chose que, or quoi que ce soit.
things soever.)
EIGHTIETH LESSON. (1.)
423
Whatsoever you may do for my fa-
fa- | Quelque chose que (or quoi que) vous
ther, he will reward you for it.
(§ 151-13.)
I complain of nothing whatsoever.
Of whomsoever you may speak, avoid
slander. ($ 151-13.)
fassiez pour mon père, il vous ré,
compensera.
Je ne me plains de quoi que ce soit.
De qui que ce soit que vous parliez,
évitez la médisance.
I know nobody who is so good as you Je ne connais personne qui soit aussi
are. ( 151-5.)
bon que vous.
I have seen nothing that could be Je n'ai rien vu qu'on puisse blâmer
blamed in his conduct.
Whatever his projects might be, they
did not succeed. (§ 151-11,)
dans sa conduite.
Quels que fussent ses projets, ils
n'ont pas réussi.
QUATRE-VINGTIÈME THÊME. 1re Sec.
Qu'est il à faire sécher? Il est à faire sécher ses souliers; mais
quelque soin qu'il prenne à le faire, il ne réussira pas de long-temps.-
De combien de manières peut-on exprimer en Français: Whatever
riches you possess? De deux manières, je crois. Quelles sont-
elles? Quelque richesse que vous, ne faut-il pas employer le sub-
jonctif après quelque? Si fait, il faut l'employer. Alors on doit
dire: Quelque richesse que vous possédiez. Quelle est la seconde
manière? Quelle que soit la richesse que vous possédiez. N'y a-t-il
pas une autre manière? Pas que je sache. Comment peut-on
exprimer en Français, However rich you may be? Oh! mais ce n'est
pas la même chose que: whatever riches you possess? Non, ce
ne sont pas les mêmes mots; mais n'est-ce pas la même significa-
tion? Alors, on peut dire: Quelque riche que vous soyez, n'est-ce
pas ?
Sans doute. Un peu de jugement est la seule chose qui soit
nécessaire.
You must have patience, though you have no desire to have it ;
for I must also wait till I receive my money. Should I (en cas que)
receive it to-day, I will pay you all that I owe you. Do not believe
that I have forgotten it; for I think of it every day. Or did you be-
lieve, perhaps, that I had already received it? I did not believe
that you have already received it; but I feared that your other credit-
ors (le créancier) had already received it.-You wish you had more
time to study, and your brothers wish they did not need to learn.-
Would to God you had what I wish you, and that I had what I
wish.-Though we have not had what we wish, yet we have almost
always been contented; and Messieurs B. have almost always been
discontented, though they have had everything a reasonable man
(un homme raisonnable) can be contented with.-Do not believe,
Madam, that I have had your fan, (un éventail.) Who tells you that
I believe it?-My brother-in-law wishes he had not had what he
424
EIGHTIETH LESSON. (2.)
has had. Wherefore? He has always had inany creditors, and no
money. I wish you would always speak French to me; and you
must obey, if you wish to learn, and if you do not wish to lose your
time uselessly, (inutilement.) I wish you were more industrious
(assidu) and more attentive when I speak to you.
VOCABULAIRE. 2de Sec.
The superlative followed by qui or que, (§ 151-3.)
You are the most amiable lady I,
know. (§ 151-3.)
He is the most extraordinary man
that I have ever seen.
Vous êtes la dame la plus aimable
que je connaisse.
C'est l'homme le plus extraordinaire
que j'aie jamais vu.
que j'aie jamais eus.
You are the most studious pupils I Vous êtes les élèves les plus studieux
have ever had.
The best guard a king can have is La meilleure garde qu'un roi puisse
the heart of his subjects.
An ordinal number followed
He is the first man who has dared to
tell me so.
You are the second amiable lady that
I have met with in this town.
The words le seul, l'unique,
You are the only one upon whom I
can rely.
I want an office the duties of which
may be easy to fulfil. (§ 151-14.)
I have an office of which it is easy to
fulfil the duties.
avoir, c'est le cœur de ses sujets.
by qui or que. (§ 151—3.)
C'est le premier homme qui ait osé
me le dire.
Vous êtes la deuxième dame aimable
que j'aie rencontrée dans cette
ville.
the only one, &c. (§ 151-3.)
Vous êtes le seul sur qui je puisse
compter.
Je désire une place dont les fonctions
soient aisées à remplir.
J'ai un emploi dont il est aisé de
remplir les fonctions.
I aim at a situation that may be J'aspire à une place qui soit agré
agreeable and lucrative.
able et lucrative.
I aim at a situation that is an agree. J'aspire à un emploi qui est agré-
able and lucrative one.
She is the handsomest woman of
those that were at the opera.
I do not know any of the persons
who called on you this morning.
able et lucratif.
C'est la plus belle des femmes qui
étaient à Topéra. (§ 151–14.)
Je ne connais aucune des personnes
qui sont venues chez vous ce
matin.
I hope you will say nothing of what J'espère que vous ne direz rien de ce
I have intrusted you with.
I have read the second volume of the
work which you have lent me.
May heaven ever preserve you from
such a misfortune. (§ 151-15.)
Would to God.
que je vous ai confié.
J'ai lu le second volume de l'ouvrage
que vous m'avez prêté.
Fasse le Ciel que pareil malheur no
vous arrive jamais.
S Plût à Dieu.
Plût au Ciel.
LIGHTIETH LESSON. (3.)
425
Would to God it were so !
Would to God he had done it!
Plût à Dieu qu'il en fût ainsi !
Plût à Dieu qu'il l'eût fait !
QUATRE-VINGTIÈME THÊME. 2de Sec.
M. J. B. m'a écrit un billet, dans lequel il me dit: Quoique l'ar-
gent soit rare et qu'on n'en obtienne que difficilement, je vous
envoie un bon (check) sur la banque, pour la somme dont vous avez
besoin. Puisqu'il en agit ainsi, il s'ensuit qu'il est mon ami.
(§ 151-4.)-Quel est le plus beau don que Dieu ait fait à l'homme?
L'Évangile est le plus beau présent que l'homme ait reçu de Dieu.
Si la vie et la mort de Socrate sont d'un sage, que peut-on dire de
la vie et de la mort de Jésus-Christ? Que ce sont celles d'un
dieu.-Arrive-t-il souvent qu'on soit trompé par ses amis? Il n'ar-
rive pas souvent qu'on soit trompé par eux.
On est souvent trompé
par de faux amis; mais il est rare qu'on le soit par de vrais amis.
If I were not your friend, and if you were not mine, I should not
speak thus to you.-Do not trust (méfiez-vous de) Mr. N., for he
flatters you: do you think a flatterer (un flatteur) can be a friend?
-You do not know him as well as I, though you see him every
day. Do not think that I am angry with him, because his father
has offended me.-Oh! here he is coming, (le voilà qui vient,) you
may tell him all yourself.—What do you think of our king? I say
he is a great man, but I add, that though kings be ever so powerful,
(puissant,) they die as well as the meanest (vil) of their subjects.-
Have you been pleased with my sisters? I have; for however
plain (laide) they may be, they are still very amiable; and however
learned (savant) our neighbor's daughters may be, they are still
sometimes mistaken.-Is not their father rich? However rich he
may be, he may lose all in an instant.—Whoever the enemy may
be whose malice (la malice) you dread, (appréhender,) you ought to
rely (se reposer) upon your innocence; but the laws (la loi) condemn
(condamner) all criminals, (un criminel), whatever they may be.—
Whatever your intentions (une intention) might be, you should have
acted differently, (différemment.)-Whatever the reasons (la raison)
be which you may allege, (alléguer,) they will not excuse your
action, blameable in itself.
VOCABULAIRE. 3me Sec.
Would to God that all great lords | Plût à Dieu que tous les grands
loved peace! (§ 151-15.)
seigneurs aimassent la paix!
Would to God we may never be Plût au Ciel que nous ne fussima
more unhapy!
May you be happy!
jamais plus malheureux!
Puissiez-vous être heureux!
Though it cost me all I have, I shall | Dût-il m'en coûter tout ce que ie
86 *
26
LESSON. (3.)
EIGHTIETH
know how to preserve myself from
such a misfortune. (§ 151.-15.)
Should they be a hundred leagues
hence, I would go for them.
possède, je saurai me préserver
d'un semblable malheur.¹
Fussent-ils à cent lieues d'ici, j'irais
les chercher.2
Obs. 166. It is essential for foreigners to observe, that in the French lan-
guage the construction with the infinitive is preferable to that with the sub-
junctive, whenever the former may be employed without ambiguity, that
is, when the same English subject is repeated. (282, Obs. 65.) Say, there-
fore:
I come (in order) to see you; not:
I come that I may see you.
1
I do not think I shall be able to go
out to-morrow.
Je viens pour vous voir; and not:
Je viens pour que je vous voie.
Je ne crois pas pouvoir sortit demain ;
and not:
Je ne crois pas que je puisse sortir
demain.
I shall marry a woman who will | Ind. J'épouserai une femme qui me
please me. (§ 151-14.)
I shall marry a woman who must
please me: or, the woman I shall
marry must please me.
Subj. J'épouserai une femme qui me
plaira.
plaise.
Here is a book for you which you Ind. Voilà un livre que vous pourrez
may consult occasionally.
consulter au besoin.
Give me a book that I may be able Subj. Donnez-moi un livre que je
to consult occasionally.
puisse consulter au besoin.
Lend me that book, which you do Ind. Prêtez-moi ce livre, dont vous
not want.
n'avez pas besoin.
Lend me a book which you may not | Subj. Prêtez-moi un livre dont vous
be in want of.
Do not leave a place where you are
comfortable, and whence you hear
well.
Choose a place where you may be
comfortable, and whence you may
hear well.
n'ayez pas besoin.
Ind. Ne quittez pas une place où
vous êtes commodément, et d'où
vous entendez bien.
Subj. Choisissez une place où vous
soyez commodément, et d'où vous
entendiez bien.
QUATRE-VINGTIÈME THÊME. 3me Sec.
L'homme, en général, peut-il lever un fardeau (burden) de 300
livres? Quelques hommes peuvent lever des fardeaux beaucoup plus
pesants (heavy); mais il y a peu d'hommes qui puissent en lever
un de 300 livres.--Avons-nous du riz? Nous en avons un peu, mais
je ne crois pas que nous en ayons assez.-Faut-il que j'en achète un
sac? Non, un boisseau (bushel) sera assez. Pensez-vous qu'un
boisseau dure jusqu'à ce que le riz nouveau paraisse? Je pense que
oui. La récolte de riz (crop) peut être mauvaise; ne vaudrait-il pas
' Instead of Quand même il devrait m'en coûter tout ce que je possède,
&c. Si même il devait m'en coûter, &c.
2 Quand même ils seraient à cent lieues d'ici, &c. S'ils étaient.
EIGHTY-FIRST LESSON. (1.)
427
mieux que nous en achetassions plus d'un boisseau ?-Comme la
récolte de blé et celle de maïs ont été bonnes, la différence de prix
ne pourrait pas être considérable, en cas (§ 151) même que la
récolte de riz vînt à manquer. Cependant, faites comme vous
voudrez. Non, je ferai comme il vous plaira, pourvu que vous me
le disiez.
Whatever may happen to you in this world, never murmur (mur-
murer) against Divine Providence, (la divine providence ;) for what-
ever we may suffer, we deserve it. Whatever I may do, you are
never satisfied. Whatever you may say, your sisters shall be
punished, if they deserve it, and if they do not endeavor to amend,
(s'amender.)—Who has taken my gold watch? I do not know. Do
not believe that I have had it, or that Miss C: has had your silver
snuff-box, (la tabatière,) for I saw both in the hands of your sister
when we were playing at forfeits, (au gage touché.)—To morrow I
shall set out for Dover; but in a fortnight I shall be back again,
(revenir,*) and then I shall come and see you and your family.—
Where is your sister at present? She is at Paris, and my brother is
at Berlin. That little woman is said (on dit) to be going to marry
General (le général) K., your friend; is it true? I have not heard of
it.—What news is there of our great army? It is said to be lying
(être) between the Weser (le Véser) and the Rhine, (le Rhin.)—All
that the courier told me seeming (paraître) very probable, (vraisem-
blable,) I went home immediately, wrote some letters, and departed
for London.
EIGHTY-FIRST LESSON, 81st.-Quatre-vingt-unième Leçon, 81me.
VOCABULAIRE, 1re Sec.
Just a little, ever so little.
Tant soit peu.
Will you do me the favor of giving | Voulez-vous me faire le plaisir de me
me a piece of bread?
Do you wish a great deal?
No, just a little.
To turn to account.
To make the best of.
That man does not know how to
make the most of his talents.
donner un morceau de pain?
En voulez-vous beaucoup ?
Non, tant soit peu.
} + Faire valoir.·
† Cet homme ne sait pas faire valoir
ses talents.
That man turns his money to account † Cet homme fait valoir son argent
in trade.
How do you employ your money?
I employ it in the stocks.
I turn it to account in the stocks.
dans le commerce.
† Comment faites-vous valoir votre
argent !
† Je le fais valoir dans les fonds pub
lics.
.
2
428
EIGHTY-FIRST LESSON. (1.)
Is it not proper that he should claim |
his rights? Let him claim them.
To boast, to brag.
"
1 do not like that man, because he
boasts too much.
Notwithstanding that.
For all that, although.
That man is a little bit of a rogue,
but notwithstanding he passes for
an honest man.
Although that man is not very well,
he notwithstanding works a great
deal.
Although that woman is not very
pretty, still she is very amiable.
Although that man has not the least
talent, yet for all that he boasts a
great deal.
Although that tavern-keeper's wife is
rather swarthy, yet for all that she
turns the business to good account.
Provided you write on the 3d, and
put your letter in the post-office
before 11 o'clock, I will receive it
on the 5th.
To go back, to return.
The top, the upper part.
Upper Canada.
The bottom, the lower part.
Lower Canada.
Up to the top. To the very bottom.
The eldest brother. The eldest sister.
He is the eldest. She was the eldest.
}
'est-il pas à propos qu'il fasse valoir
ses droits? Qu'il les fasse valoir.
† Se faire valoir.
† Je n'aime pas cet homme, parce
qu'il se fait trop valoir.
Ne laisser pas de.
Cet homme est tant soit peu fripon,
mais il ne laisse pas de passer pour
honnête homme.
Quoique cet homme ne soit pas bien
portant, il ne laisse pas de tra-
vailler beaucoup.
Quoique cette femme ne soit pas bien
jolie, elle ne laisse pas d'être fort
aimable.
Quoique cet homme n'ait aucun ta-
lent, il ne laisse pas de se faire
beaucoup valoir.
Quoique la femme de cet aubergiste
soit tant soit peu basanée, elle ne
laisse pas de faire valoir le bouchon.
Pourvu que vous écriviez le 3, et
que vous mettiez votre lettre à la
poste avant 11 heures, je la re.
cevrai le 5.
Retourner, 1.
Le haut.
Le Haut Canada.
Le bas.
Jusqu'en bas.
La sœur aînée.
Le Bas Canada.
Jusqu'en haut.
Le frère aîné.
C'est l'aîné.
C'était l'aînée.
QUATRE-VINGT-UNIÈME THÊME. 1re Sec.
►
Mon café n'est pas assez sucré, veuillez me donner tant soit peu
plus de sucre. Avec plaisir. Il faut que vous aimiez votre café
bien sucré, car je crois y avoir mis deux cueillérées (spoonfuls) de
sucre. Que vous y⚫ayez mis (§ 151-10) deux cueillérées ou non,
le café n'était pas assez sucré. Il est possible que je n'y en aie mis
qu'une. Serait-il étonnant que vous n'y en eussiez pas mis du tout?
Oчi, vraiment; il serait très étonnant que j'eusse oublié d'y en met-
tre. Cela ne vous arrive-t-il jamais? Pas très-souvent, je vous
assure. Je le crois. Je peux dire, sans me faire valoir, que je suis
au fait de ma besogne, (business.) Ce n'est pas d'aujourd'hui que je
m'en aperçois.-Vous connaissez Mlle. Eloïse, n'est-ce pas ? N'est
EIGHTY-FIRST LESSON. (2.)
429
elle pas aimable? Quoiqu'elle ne soit ni jolie ni spirituelle, (witty,)
elle ne laisse pas d'être très-aimable.
Where are the two Misses Vignette? They have not yet returned
from Europe. You are acquainted with them, are you not? I know
the eldest only.-Is it possible that you do not know both of them?
When are they to return? They will not return before their com-
pany has visited Italy and the upper and the lower Rhine.—Although
Theodore B― is younger than his brother Henry, for all that he is
as talented (a autant de talents) as his elder brother, (son frère aîné,
· or simply son aîné.)—Whither shall you go next year? I shall go
to England, for it is a fine kingdom, (le royaume,) where I intend
spending the summer on (a) my return from France.-Whither shall
you go in the winter? I shall go to Italy, and thence (de là) to the
West Indies, (aux Indes occidentales, ou aux colonies,)' but before that
I must go to Holland to take leave of my friends.-What country do
these people inhabit? (habiter?). They inhabit the south (le midi)
of Europe; their countries are called Italy, Spain, and Portugal, and
they themselves are Italians, Spaniards, or Portuguese; but the poople
called Russians, Swedes, Poles, and Hungarians (Hongrois) inhabit
the north and east of Europe; and the names of their countries are
Russia, Sweden, Poland, (la Pologne,) and Hungary. France is
separated (séparer) from Italy by (par) the Alps, (les Alpes,) and
from Spain by the Pyrenees, (les Pyrénées.)
VOCABULAIRE.
To appear, to seem, seeming, seemed,|
appear. Let him appear.
I appear, thou appearest, he appears.
To keep, to maintain.
My keeping or maintenance.
My keeping costs me six hundred
francs a year.
To drive in, to sink.
To converse with.
A conversation.
2de Sec.
Paraître,* 4, paraissant, paru, par-
aissez. Qu'il paraisse.
Je parais, tu parais, il paraît.
Entretenir,* 2.
Mon entretien.
Mon entretien me coûte six cents
francs par an.
Enfoncer, 1.
S'entretenir avec.
Un entretien, une conversation.
To spare, save, lay up, put by 1000f. Epargner, 1. Sauver mille francs.
Spare your money.
To get tired.
To be tired.
To handle.
To lean against.
Épargnez votre argent.
Se lasser, (de bef. inf.)
Être las; fem. lasse, (de bef. inf.)
Manier, 1. S'appuyer, 1.
1 The word Colonies, is more used by the French than, Indes occidentales,
(West Indies,) which is the book-word; just as in New York they say the
North instead of the Hudson river, &c. East Indies, (book-word) Indes
orientales; (colloquial) Les Indes ou les Grandes Indes,
430
EIGHTY-FIRST LESSON. (2.)
Lean against me.
Lean against the wall.
To aim at.
Short.
To stop short.
Virtue is amiable. (§ 15.)
Vice is odious.
Men are mortal.
Gold is precious.
Corn is sold at a crown a bushel.
Beef costs four pence a pound.
The horror of vice. and the love of
virtue, are the delights of the wise
man.
England is a fine country.
Appuyez-vous sur moi.
Appuyez-vous contre la muraille.
Coucher en joue.
Court.
S'arrêter tout court.
La vertu est aimable.
Le vice est odieux.
Les hommes sont mortels.
L'or est précieux.
Le blé se vend, un écu le boisseau.
Le bœuf coûte quatre sous la livre.
L'horreur du vice, et l'amour de la
vertu, sont les délices du sage.
L'Angleterre est un beau pays.
Obs. 167. The definite article is also used before the names of kingdoms,
countries, and provinces. ($ 15.)
Italy is the garden of Europe.
The dog is the friend and companion
of man.
L'Italie est le jardin de l'Europe.
Le chien est l'ami et le compagnon
de l'homme.
Obs. 168. The articles are repeated in
and agree with it in gender and number.
Thessaly produces wine, oranges,
lemons, olives, and all sorts of
fruit.
He ate the bread, meat, apples, and
cakes; he drank the wine, beer,
and cider.
Beauty, gracefulness, and wit, are.
valuable endowments when heigh-
tened by modesty.
'The longer the days the shorter the
nights, and the longer the nights
the shorter the days. ($200-12.)
+
French before every substantive,
(Dir. 2.)
La Thessalie produit du vin, des
oranges, des citrons, des olives, et
toutes sortes de fruits.
I a mangé le pain, la viande, les
pommes, et les gâteaux; il a bu le
vin, la bière, et le cidre.
La beauté, les grâces, et l'esprit, sont
des avantages bien précieux, quand
ils sont relevés par la modestie.
Plus les jours sont longs plus les
nuits sont courtes, et plus les nuits
sont longues plus les jours sont
courts.
QUATRE-VINGT-UNIÈME THEME. 2de Sec.
Plus vous paraissez vous amuser, plus il paraît s'amuser aussi.
(§ 200—12.)—Le vaisseau a touché, (grounded,) n'est-ce pas dom
mage? Il est dommage qu'il ait échoué, (échouer, 1, to ground,)
mais je ne crois pas que nous courions aucun danger. Oh! voyez
comme il s'enfonce! N'ayez aucune peur. Plus il s'enfoncera
dans le sable moins nous courrons danger de chavirer, (upset.) C'est
vra, puis il entrera dans le sable moins il y aura de danger qu'il
i
Except when preceded by en or de. Ex. J'irai en Allemagne à mos
retour de France, I shall go to Germany on my return from France.
EIGHTY-SECOND LESSON. (1.)
481
chavire, à moins qu'il ne s'enfonce entièrement. Ne craignez pas
cela. J'ai grand' peur. Appuyez-vous sur moi. Je vous lasserai,
je vous fatiguerai.-Qu'est-ce qui est aimable, la vertu ou le vice?—
Qu'est-ce qui est odieux ?-Qu'est-ce qui est précieux ?—Qu'est-ce
qui se vend un écu le boisseau ?-Vous avez visité l'Angleterre; c'est
un beau royaume, n'est-ce pas ?
Though the Mahometans (le Mahométan) are forbidden the use of
wine, (défendre quelque chose à quelqu'un,) yet for all that some of
them drink it.-Has your brother eaten anything this morning?. He
has eaten a great deal; though he said he had no appetite, yet for
all that he ate all the meat, bread, and vegetables, (les légumes,) and
drank all the wine, beer, and cider.-Are eggs (un auf) dear at pre-
sent? They are sold at six francs a hundred. In case they are
cheaper to-morrow, buy a hundred.-Do you like grapes? (ie rai-
sin?) I do not only (non seulement) like grapes, but also plums,
(une prune,) almonds, nuts, and all sorts of fruit.-Though modesty,
candor, and an amiable disposition (l'amabilité) are valuable endow-
ments, yet for all that there are some ladies that are neither modest,
nor candid, (candide,) nor amiable.-The fear of death and the love
of life being natural to men, they ought to shun (fuir*) vice, (le vice,)
and adhere to (s'attacher à) virtue.-What does your living cost you
a year? Do you spend less than your eldest brother?-The less
you will spend the more you will save; are you not of my opinion?
-Are you taking aim at that small bird? Is it worth killing ?--
Was not the last scholar who recited obliged to stop several times,
and finally to stop short?—Was it not a pity?—Did he not appear
very modest, although he was talented? The more I sang the less
embarrassed I felt, (étais, ou je me sentais.) Is it so with you?
EIGHTY-SECOND LESSON.-Quatre-vingt-deuxième Leçon, 82me.
VOCABULAIRE. 1re Sec.
To give occasion.
Do not give him cause to complain.
To leave it to one.
I leave it to you.
A good bargain.
To stick or to abide by a thing.
I abide by the offer you have made
me:
Donner lieu, (de before infin.)
Ne lui donnez pas lieu de se plaindre.
+ S'en rapporter à quelqu'un.
+ Je m'en rapporte à vous.
Un bon marché.
† S'en tenir à.
† Je m'en tiens à l'offre que vous
m'avez faite.
I do not doubt but you are my friend. Je ne doute pas que vous ne soyez
mon ami.
432
EIGHTY-SECOND LESSON. (1.).
Obs. 169. When the verb douter is negatively used, it requires ne before
the subjunctive.
I do not doubt but he will do it.
To suffer, to bear.
Je ne doute pas qu'il ne le fasse.
Essuyer, 1.
They were exposed to the whole fire Ils essuyèrent tout le feu de la place.
of the place.
To examine one artfully, or to draw Tirer les vers du nez à quelqu'un.
a secret from one.
I examined him artfully, and by that
means I have made myself ac-
quainted with all his affairs.
To bear, or to put up with.
Je lui ai tiré les vers du nez, et par
ce moyen je me suis mis au fait de
toutes ses affaires.
En passer par.
You will be obliged to put up with Vous serez obligé d'en passer par
all he wishes.
Thick.
A thick cloud.
A burst.
A thick beard.
A burst of laughter.
To burst out laughing. To burst out.
To burst out a laughing.
Splendor, brightness.
To make a great show. To light.
To suffer one's self to be beaten.
To let or to suffer one's self to fall.
To suffer one's self to be insulted.
To suffer one's self to die.
To let one's self be struck.
To send back, to send away.
To extol, to praise up.
tout ce qu'il voudra.
Épais; fem. épaisse.
Un nuage épais. Une barbe épaisse.
Un éclat. Un éclat de rire.
Faire un éclat de rire.
Éclater de rire.
L'éclat.
† Faire de l'éclat.
Se laisser battre.
Se laisser tomber.
Se laisser insulter.
Se laisser mourir.
Se laisser frapper.
Renvoyer, 1.
Vanter, 1.
To boast, to praise one's self, to brag. Se vanter.
QUATRE-VINGT-DEUXIÈME THÊME. 1re Sec.
Éclater, 1.
Éclairer, 1.
Il se plaint que nous le grondions, n'est-ce pas ? Oui, il s'en
plaint. Il dit que quelque chose qu'il fasse, on y trouve toujours à
redire. Quoi que ce soit qu'il fasse mal, on y trouve à redire. Mais
que fait-il de bien ?-Est-il possible que vous ayez fait un si bon
marché ?—Ne vous donnent-ils pas lieu de se plaindre d'eux?-
qui vous en rapportez-vous ?-Doutez-vous encore que je sois votre
ami ?-Doutez-vous de leur arrivée ?-Doutent-ils que leur cousin
soit arrivé ?—Les Russes n'ont-ils pas essuyé une perte considérable ?
-S'il ne vous l'a pas promis, vous serez obligé d'en passer par tout
ce qu'il voudra, et je crains qu'il soit impossible que vous receviez
vos fonds. Comme les nuages sont épais! Ne va-t-il pas neiger?
--Qui a fait cet éclat de rire? Qui? Cela peut-il être quelqu'autre
qu'Étienne ? Ce jeune homme se vante toujours de pouvoir tout
faire; il est vrai qu'il fait bien des choses. Il se laisse tomber de
cheval. Il se laisse insulter, même frapper. Enfin, l'autre jour il
EIGHTY-SECOND LESSON. (2.)
433
s'est laissé battre.-Les Russes ne se sont-ils pas laissé battre ?-Cet
homme n'est-il pas ivre ? (drunk?)
Will you drink a cup of coffee? I thank you, I do not like cof-
fee.-Then you will drink a glass of wine? I have just drunk some.
—Let us take a walk. Willingly, (je le veux bien ;) but where shall
we go to? Come with me into my aunt's garden; we shall there find
very agreeable society. I believe it, (je le crois bien ;) but the ques-
tion is (c'est à savoir) whether this agreeable society will adınit me,
voudra de moi.) You are welcome everywhere.-What ails you,
(qu'avez-vous,) my friend? How do you like that wine? I like it
very well, (excellent ;) but I have drunk enough of it, (suffisamment.)
-Drink once more, (encore un coup.) No, too much is unwhole-
some, (malsain;) I know my constitution, (le tempérament.)—Do not
fall. What is the matter with you? I do not know; but my head
is giddy, (la tête me tourne;) I think I am fainting, (tomber en dé-
faillance.) I think so also, for you look almost like a dead person,
{un mort.)—What countryman are you? I am an Englishman.-You
speak French so well that I took you for a Frenchman by birth,
(Français de nation.) You are jesting. Pardon me; I do not jest at
all.-How long have you been in France? A few days. In earnest?
(Sérieusement?) You doubt it, perhaps, because I speak French; I
knew it before I came to France.-How did you learn it so well ?
I did like the prudent starling.
Go thither.
Go thou.
Go away.
VOCABULAIRE.
Let us go thither.
Go there.
Do not go away.
Let him go thither.
Let them go thither.
Go away, begone.
Let us begone.
Let him go away, let him begone.
Give me.
Give it to me.
2de Sec.
Allez-y.
Allons-y.
Va. Vas-y. ($ 150-5.)
Va-t'en.
Qu'il y aille.
Qu'ils y aillent.
Allez-vous en.
Qu'il s'en aille.
Donnez-moi.
Ne t'en va pas.
Donnez-le-moi.
Allons-nous en
Give it to him.
Donnez-le-lui.
Give him some.
Get paid.
Let us set out.
Let us breakfast.
Let him give it me.
Let us not.
Let me dine.
Let him be here at twelve o'clock.
Let him send it me.
He may believe it.
Make an end of it.
Let him take it.
Let him finish.
Let her say so.
Donnez-lui-en.
Faites-vous payer.
Partons.
Déjeunons.
Ne partons pas.
Laissez moi dîner.
Qu'il me le donne.
Qu'il soit ici à midi.
Qu'il me l'envoie.
Qu'il le croie.
Finissez.
Qu'il finisse.
Qu'il le prenne. Qu'elle le dise.
87
434
EIGHTY-SECOND LESSON. (2.)
The starling.
If I were to question you as I used
to do at the beginning of our les-
sons, what would you answer?
We found these questions at first
rather ridiculous; but full of con-
fidence in your method, we an-
swered as well as the small quan-
tity of words and rules we then
possessed allowed us.
We were not long in finding out that
those questions were calculated to
ground us in the rules and to ex-
ercise us in conversation, by the
contradictory answers we were
obliged to make.
Le sansonnet.
Si je vous posais maintenant des
questions comme je vous en ai
posé au commencement de nos
leçons, (comme j'avais d'abord
l'habitude de le faire,) que répon-
driez-vous ?
Nous avons d'abord trouvé ces ques-
tions tant soit peu ridicules; mais
pleins de confiance en votre mé-
thode, nous y avons répondu aussi
bien que la petite provision de mots
et de principes que nous avions
alors pouvait nous le permettre.
Nous n'avons pas tardé à nous aper-
cevoir que ces questions étaient
calculées pour nous inculquer les
principes et nous exercer à la con-
versation, par les réponses contra-
dictoires que nous étions forcés
d'y faire.
We can now almost keep up a con- Maintenant nous savons presque sou-
versation in French.
This phrase does not seem to us
logically correct.
We should be ungrateful if we al-
lowed such an opportunity to es-
cape without expressing our live-
liest gratitude to you.
In all cases, at all events.
The native.
The insurmountable difficulty.
tenir une conversation en Français.
Cette phrase ne nous paraît pas
logiquement correcte.
Nous serions des ingrats si nous lais-
sions échapper une si belle occa-
sion, sans vous témoigner la recon-
naissance la plus vive.
En tout cas.
L'homme né dans le pays.
La difficulté insurmontable.
QUATRE-VINGT-DEUXIÈME THÊME. 2de Sec.
Jean veut s'en aller? Je croyais qu'il s'en était déjà allé.—Non,
il est encore dans l'autre chambre. Qu'est-il à faire? Il est à
regarder les nuages. Occupation très-instructive, vraiment! Il a
peur qu'il pleuve, et comme il demeure loin, il voudrait savoir s'il
peut s'en aller.-Qu'il s'en aille, s'il craint qu'il pleuve. Si vous le
craignez aussi, prêtez-lui un parapluie. Je n'en ai pas à lui prêter.
Faut-il que je prenne le vôtre? Il ne faut pas que vous preniez le
neuf, parce que vous savez que Jean est un étourdi, (giddy boy ;)
et il pourrait le perdre, mais prenez le vieux, et qu'il s'en aille bien
vite, ou plutôt qu'il attende, car la pluie a commencé. Est-il
probable que ce ne soit qu'une ondée ? (shower?) Il me paraît que
ce ne sera qu'une ondée-À quelle heure faut-il qu'il soit ici?-
Ne faut-il pas que je finisse le paysage avant de m'en aller?..
EIGHTY THIRD LESSON. (1.)
435
Qu'elle le dise ou non, je n'en crois rien, et vous ? N'est-il pas à
déjeuner ?—N'étaient-elles pas à coudre ?-Si vous ne venez qu'à
cinq heures au lieu de trois, ils ne pourront pas sortir avec nous, parce
qu'à cette heure-là ils seront à réciter leurs leçons.
DIALOGUE.
The Master.—If I were now to ask you such questions as I did in
the beginning of our lessons, viz. (telles que :) Have you the hat
which my brother has? am I hungry? has he the tree of my brother's
garden? &c. What would you answer?
The Pupils.-We are obliged (être forcé) to confess that we found
these questions at first rather ridiculous; but full of confidence in
the method you follow, we answered as well as the small quantity
of words and rules we then possessed allowed us. We were, in
fact, not long in finding out that these questions were calculated to
ground us in the rules, and to exercise us in conversation, by the
contradictory answers we were obliged to make. But now that we
can almost keep up a conversation in the beautiful language which
you teach us, we should answer: It is impossible that we should
have the same hat which your brother has, for two persons cannot
have one and the same thing. To the second question we should
answer, that it is impossible for us to know whether you are hungry
or not. As to the last, we should say: that there is more than one
tree in a garden; and in asking us whether he has the tree of the
garden, the phrase does not seem to us logically correct. At all
events we should be ungrateful (ingrat) if we allowed such an op-
portunity to escape, without expressing (témoigner) our liveliest gra-
titude to you for the trouble you have taken. In arranging those
wise combinations, (la combinaison,) you have succeeded in ground-
ing us almost imperceptibly (imperceptiblement) in the rules, and
exercising us in the conversation, of a language which, taught in
any other way, presents to foreigners, and even to natives, almost
insurmountable difficulties.
6
EIGHTY-THIRD LESSON.-Quatre-vingt-troisième Leçon, 83me
It lacks a quarter.
It lacks a half.
VOCABULAIRE.
How much does it want?
It does not want much.
It wants but a trifle.
1re Sec.
+ Il s'en faut d'un quart.
+ Il s'en faut de la moitié.
Combien s'en faut-il !
Il ne s'en faut pas beaucoup.
Il s'en faut de peu de chose.
436
EIGHTY-THIRD LESSON. (1.)
It lacks but an inch of my being as
tall as you.
It lacked a great deal of my being as
rich as you.
In a foolish manner, at random.
Ile alks at random like a crazy man,
a fool, or a drunkard.
To resort to violence.
A fact.
Else, or else.
It is a fact.
To make fun of.
To contradict, to give one the lie.
Should he say so, I would give him
the lie.
His actions belie his words.
To scratch,
To escape.
I fell from the top of the tree to the
bottom, but I did not hurt myself
much.
I escaped with a scratch.
The thief has been taken, but he
will escape with a few months'
imprisonment.
By dint of.
By dint of labor.
By too much weeping.
You will cry your eyes
out.
Il s'en faut d'un pouce que je sois
aussi grand que vous.
Il s'en fallait de beaucoup que je
fusse aussi riche que vous.
† À tort et à travers.
Il parle à tort et à travers comme un
fou, un sot, ou un ivrogne.
En venir aux voies de fait.
C'est un fait.
Un fait.
Ou bien. Se moquer de.
Démentir quelqu'un.
S'il disait cela, je le démentirais.
Ses actions démentent ses paroles.
Égratigner, 1.
+ En être quitte pour.
J'ai tombé du haut de l'arbre en bas,
mais je ne me suis pas fait beau-
coup de mal.
:
J'en ai été quitte pour une égra-
tignure.
Le voleur a été pris, mais il en sera
quitte pour quelques mois de pri-
son.
† A force de.
† A force de travail.
+ À force de pleurer.
น
+ A force de pleurer, vous perdrez
les yeux.
I obtained of him that favor by dint † J'obtins de lui cette faveur à force
of entreaty.
That excepted.
de prières.
+ A cela près.
That fault excepted, he is a good † À ce défaut près, c'est un bon
man.
homme.
QUATRE-VINGT-TROISIÈME THÊME. 1re Sec.
Avez-vous toute la somme? Il s'en faut d'un quart que je ne
l'aie. D'un quart, avez-vous dit ?—Il s'en faut presque de la moitié.
Seriez-vous satisfait de la de ce que je possède? Ce que j'ai et la
de ce que vous possédez, me rendraient riche.-Vous ne pensez
pas à ce que vous dites, y pensez-vous? Est-ce que je parle
comme un fou, un sot, ou un ivrogne? Pour peu que vous soyez
ivre, vous parlez comme un sot ou comme un fou. Je vous remercie
du compliment. Vous êtes le bienvenu, car vous le méritez autant
que qui que ce soit.-Croyiez-vous être aussi grand que Rochamp
Oui, je le croyais, mais l'autre jour, quand je me tins debout auprès
de lui, je vis que j'étais de beaucoup plus petit. De combien de
EIGHTY-THIRD LESSON. (2.)
437
pouces êtes-vous plus petit? Il s'en faut de trois pouces au moins
que je ne sois aussi grand que lui. Ne querellez plus avec lui,
autrement vous en viendrez aux voies de fait. Si vous ne voulez pas
que je me querelle avec lui, il faut l'empêcher de se moquer de moi.
Je tâcherai de le faire.
Do you not often contradict Henry when he relates something?
I do only when he says incredible, (incroyable,) inconsistent, (incon-
sistant,) or false things. (§ 200-7.) What do you think of Mrs. A—?
Her company, her conversation, is agreeable enough; only, she
exaggerates too much; that excepted, she is a pleasant lady.-Your
uncle will not grant what you want. I hope he will, by dint of
entreaty. You will entreat in vain, (beau prier ;) you will not obtain
it. Never mind, I will ask whether I obtain it or not.
Will you be my guest? (manger avec quelqu'un.) I thank you; a
friend of mine has invited me to dinner: he has ordered (faire pré-
parer) my favorite dish, (un mets favori.)—What is it? It is a dish
of milk, (du laitage.)—As for me, I do not like milk-meat: there is
nothing like (il n'y a rien tel qu') a good piece of roast beef or veal.
-What has become of your younger brother? He has suffered
shipwreck (faire naufrage) in going to America.-You must give me
an account of that, (raconter quelque chose.) Very willingly, (volon-
tiers.) Being on the open sea, (en pleine mer,) a great storm arose.
The lightning struck the ship and set it on fire, (le mit en feu.) The
crew (l'équipage) jumped into the sea to save themselves by swim-
ming. My brother knew not what to do, having never learned to
swim.
To vie with each other.
VOCABULAIRE.
2de Sec.
† À l'envie, (l'un de l'autre.)
Those men are trying to rival each † Ces hommes travaillent à l'envie,
other.
Clean.
Clean linen.
The more-as.
The less-as.
I am the more discontented with his
conduct, as he is under many obli-
gations to me.
I am the less pleased with his con-
duct, as I had more right to his
friendship.
I wish that, I should like...
I wish that house belonged to me.
I should like to own that house.
(l'un de l'autre.)
Propre.
Du linge propre ou blanc.
D'autant plus-que.
D'autant moins-que.
Je suis d'autant plus mécontent de
sa conduite, qu'il m'a beaucoup
d'obligations.
Je suis d'autant moins satisfait de sa
conduite, que j'avais plus de droits
à son amitié
Je voudrais que ... ($ 151-12.)
† Je voudrais que cette maison tu!
à moi.
37*
438
EIGHTY-THIRD LESSON. (2.)
To muse,
to think.
I thought a long time on that affair.
To be naked.
To have the head uncovered.
To have the feet uncovered.
Rêver, 1, (à before noun.)
J'ai rêvé long-temps à cette affairo.
Etre nu-nue.
† Avoir la tête nue.
† Avoir les pieds nus.
Obs. 1691. The adjective nu, like demi, (192, N. 3) is indeclinable before
the noun, but declinable after.
To be barefooted.
'T'o be bareheaded.
To ride barebacked.
To have like to, or to think to have.
Obs. 1694. Manquer takes de before
I had like to have lost my money.
I thought I had lost my life.
We had like to have cut our fingers.
He was very near falling.
He was within a hair's breadth of
being killed.
He had liked to have died.
At, on, or upon your heels.
The enemy is at our heels.
To strike, (in speaking of lightning.)
The lightning has struck.
The lightning struck the ship.
Etre nu-pieds.
Etre nu-tête.
† Aller à poil.
† Manquer ou penser.
the infinitive, but penser does not.
J'ai pensé perdre mon argent.
SJ'ai manqué de perdre mon argent.
Je pensai perdre la vie.
Nous avons manqué de nous couper
les doigts.
Il a manqué de tomber.
Il a manqué d'être tué.
Il a pensé être tué.
Peu s'en est fallu qu'il n'ait été tué.
Il a pensé mourir.
À vos trousses.
L'ennemi est à nos trousses.
+ Tomber.
La foudre est tombée.
La foudre tomba sur le vaisseau.
QUATRE-VINGT-TROISIÈME THÊME. 2de Sec.
J'ai plusieurs bons écoliers dans cette classe. Est-ce qu'ils étudient
à l'envie l'un de l'autre? Oui, ils étudient à l'envie. N'avez-vous
pas aussi des écolières qui étudient à l'envie l'une de l'autre ? Si
fait, j'en ai qui étudient à l'envie les unes des autres.—Êtes-vous
satisfait (are you pleased) de la manière dont Léopold se conduit?
Non, j'en suis d'autant moins satisfait qu'il avait promis davantage.-
Ne sont-ils pas étonnés qu'elle ait agi de cette manière? Si fait,
ils en sont très-étonnés, et ils sont d'autant plus mécontents, (so much
the more displeased,) qu'elle connaissait parfaitement leur opinion.-
Que pensez-vous de mon procès? Je ne m'en suis pas encore
occupé. Je voudrais que vous y rêvassiez un peu. Je suis à
rêver. Mais vous voyez que je suis nu-pieds; il faut que je me
chausse, (chausser, 1,to dress one's feet, to put on what is to go on the
feet as a part of dress,) que je finisse de m'habiller, et j'y rêverai. Je
vous en avertis, je serai à vos trousses jusqu'à ce que vous vous en
Occupiez sérieusement. -Savez-vous que Montcalme a manqué
y
EIGHTY-THIRD LESSON. (3.)
439
d'être tué? Non, je n'en savais rien. Quel accident lui est-il
arrivé? Comment a-t-il manqué d'être tué? Il est tombé de cheval.
I wish that umbrella was mine. Have you none? No, I wish
had one. (622.) Can you not afford to buy one? No, I cannot; for
I was robbed, and was near being killed.-How so? The robbers
upset our carriage, and we were all very near being killed. (Peu
s'en est fallu que nous n'ayons tous été tués.) When were you so near
being killed? It was last week that we were so nearly killed.
Were you all robbed? Yes, but I was the only one who had much
money. My companions had only a few dollars each. I entreated
very hard, but it was in vain. (J'ai eu beau prier, ç'a été en vain.)
My brother reflected in vain; he found no means to save his life.
He was struck with fright when he saw that the fire was gaining on
all sides. He hesitated no longer, and jumped into the sea.- -Well,
(eh bien,) what has become of him? I do not know, having not
heard from him yet. But who told you all that? My nephew, who
was there, and who saved himself.-As you are talking of your
nephew, à propos de —,) where is he at present? He is in Italy.—
Is it long since you heard from him? I have received a letter from
him to-day.-What does he write to you? I will tell you by and by.
VOCABULAIRE. 3me Sec.
The half, the third, the fourth.
La moitié, le tiers, le quart.
C'est 3.
Obs. 170. These are irregularly formed, but from le cinquième, the fifth,
all others are regular.
What is the half of ?
It is 3.
What is the of 7? It is 3 and 4.
What is the third of 9? It is 3.
What is the of 10? It is 3 and .
It is 3 and 4.
of 12?
That of 11 ?
What is is the
That of 13?
That of 14 ?
That of 15?
It is 3 and 1.
It is 3 and 1.
It is 3 and 4.
Quelle est la moitié de 6?
Celle de 7?
C'est 3 et demi.
Quelle est le tiers de 9 ?
Quel est le de 10?
C'est 3.
C'est 3 et un
tiers.
Celui de 11? C'est 3 et deux tiers (.)
It is 3. Quel est le quart de 12? C'est 3.
The of 12 are 8. The of 12 are 9.
While my brother was on the open
sea, a violent storm arose unexpect-
edly; the lightning struck the ship,
which it set on fire, and the whole
crew jumped into the sea to save
themselves by swimming.
He was struck with fright when he
saw that the fire was gaining on
all sides.
Celui de 13?
Celui de 14?
Celui de 15 ?
quarts (4.)
C'est 3 et un quart (4.)
C'est 3 et demi (4.)
C'est 3 et trois
Les & de 12
il sur-
Les & de 12 sont 8.
sont 9.
Mon frère étant en pleine mer,
vint une grande tempête; la foudre
tomba sur le vaisseau, qu'elle mit
en feu, et tout l'équipage se jeta
dans la mer, pour se sauver à la
nage.
Il fut saisi de frayeur, voyant que le
feu gagnait de tous les côtés.
440
EIGHTY-THIRD LESSON. (3.)
He did not know what to do.
He nesitated no longer.
I have not heard of him yet.
An angel.
A masterpiece.
Masterpieces.
| † Il ne savait quel parti prendre.
Il ne balança plus.
† Je n'ai pas encore eu de ses nou
velles.
Un ange.
Un chef-d'œuvre.
Des chefs-d'œuvre.
Obs. 171. Of a word compounded by means of a preposition, expressed
or understood, the first word only takes the mark of the plural.
Four o'clock flowers.
His or her physiognomy.
His or her shape.
The expression.
Contentment.
Admiration.
Delightfully.
The look.
Respect.
Grace, charm.
Fascinating.
Thin, (slender.) Uncommonly well.
His or her look inspires respect and
admiration.
Des belles-de-nuit.
Sa physionomie.
Sa taille.
L'expression.
L'aspect.
Le contentement.
Le respect.
L'admiration.
Les grâces.
À ravir.
Engageant.
Svelte.
Supérieurement bien.
Son aspect inspire du respect et de
l'admiration.
QUATRE-VINGT-TROISIÈME THÊME. 3me Sec.
Avez-vous eu des nouvelles de votre ami, l'avocat, depuis qu'il
est parti pour la Californie? Oui, j'en ai eu. Sa lettre doit être
intéressante! que dit-il? Il dit que l'or y est abondant; que ceux
qui ont du bonheur, le ramassent en quantité; que ceux qui ont du
malheur, travaillent beacoup et ramassent peu. Du nombre des quels
est-il? De ceux des heureux ou des malheureux? Des heureux, je
présume, quoiqu'il se plaigne un peu.-Avez-vous vu le chef-d'œuvre
de Power, le sculpteur? Son esclave Grecque? Oui, cela même.
Oui, je l'ai vu ce chef-d'œuvre. Cette esclave ressemble à un ange.
Cette statue moderne sera placée parmi les chefs-d'œuvre des sculp-
teurs anciens. Quand les belles-de-nuit s'ouvrent-elles? Elles
s'ouvrent à quatre heures, quand le soleil commence à baisser.
Quelle odeur aimez-vous le mieux, celle des fleurs d'orange ou des
tubéreuses? Je n'ai pas de choix. Plus je sens la fleur d'orange plus
j'en aime l'odeur; et plus l'odeur de la tubéreuse frappe mon odorat,
(sense of smell,) plus je voudrais la sentir. Quelle physionomie
agréable et quelle taillé admirable cette demoiselle a!
My nephew, in his letter, which is an interesting one, writes to
me that he is going to marry a young woman who brings him (qui
lui apporte) a hundred thousand crowns.-Is she handsome? Hand-
some as an angel; she is a master-piece of nature. Her physiog
nomy is mild and full of expression; her eyes are the finest in the
(du) world, and her mouth is charming, (et sa bouche est mignonne.}
She is neither too tall nor too short; her shape is slender; all her
EIGHTY-FOURTH LESSON. (1.)
441
actions are full of grace, and her manners are engaging. Her look
inspiles respect and admiration. She has also a great deal of wit
she speaks several languages, dances uncommonly well, and sings
delightfully. My nephew finds in her (lui trouve) but one defect,
(un défaut.)—And what is that defect? She is affected, (avoir des
prétentions.)—There is nothing perfect in the world:-How happy
you are! you are rich, you have a good wife, pretty children, a fine
house, and all you wish. Not all, my friend.-What do you desire
more? Contentment; for you know that he only is happy who is
contented.
EIGHTY-FOURTH LESSON.-Quatre-vingt-quatrième eçon, 84me.
VOCABULAIRE. 1re Sec.
To unriddle, to disentangle.
To find out.
To disentangle the hair.
To unravel difficulties.
} Démêler, 1.
Démêler les cheveux.
A
Démêler des difficultés.
I have not been able to find out the Je n'ai pas pu démêler le sens de
sense of that phrase.
A quarrel.
cette phrase.
Un démêlé.
To have differences (a quarrel) with Avoir des démêlés avec quelqu'un
somebody.
To take good care, to shun, to be-
ware.
I will take good care not to do it.
Mind you do not lend that man
money.
He takes good care not to answer
the question which I asked him.
To ask a question.
Se garder de.
Je me garderai bien de le faire.
Gardez-vous bien de prêter votre
argent à cet homme.
Il se garde bien de répondre à la
question que je lui ai faite.
+ Faire une question.
If you take it into your head to do Si vous vous avisez de le faire, je
that, I will punish you.
To become, to fit well. Fitting well.
Obs. 172. This verb is used only in
Does that become, me ?
That does not become you.
It does not become you to do that.
That fits you wonderfully well.
Her head-dress did not become her.
It does not become you to reproach
me with it!
To fast. To be fasting.
vous punirai.
Seoir,* 3. Seyant or séant.
the third person, singular and plural
Cela me sied-il ?.
Cela ne vous sied pas.
Il ne vous sied pas de faire cela.
Cela vous sied à merveille. -
Sa coiffure lui seyait mal.
Il vous sied bien de me le reprocher !
(an ironical expression.)
Jeûner, 1.
Etre à jeun.
442
EIGHTY-FOURTH LESSON. (1.)
To give notice to.
To let anybody know.
To warn some one of something.
Give notice to that man of his bro-
ther's return.
Avertir quelqu'un de quelque chose.
Avertissez cet homme du retour de
son frere.
QUATRE-VINGT-QUATRIÈME THÊME. 1re Sec.
Un certain roi devant, un jour, faire son entrée dans une ville à
deux heures de l'après-midi, le sénat envoya quelques députés
(deputies) pour le complimenter. Celui qui devait porter la parole,
n'étant pas accoutumé à parler en public, commença ainsi: "Alex-
andre le Grand, le Grand Alexandre," et s'arrêta tout court. Le
roi, qui avait grand'faim, (32²,) dit: "Ah! mon ami, Alexandre le
Grand avait dîné, et moi, je suis encore à jeûn." Ayant dit ces
paroles, il continua son chemin vers l'hotel de ville, où on lui avait
préparé un dîner magnifique.
Savez-vous deviner les énigmes (enigmas?) Je ne les devine pas
très-aisément, cependant, il m'arrive quelque fois de le faire. Vou-
lez-vous que je vous en dise une courte? Voyons, dites-la.-La
voici. Plus il y en a moins ça pèse.—Plus il y en a moins ça pèse.
Qu'est-ce que cela peut être? Je ne peux m'imaginer ce que c'est.
-Vous rendez-vous? (do you give it up?) Oui, je me rends. Et
moi aussi.
The emperor Charles the Fifth (Charles-Quint) being one day out
a hunting lost his way in the forest, and, having come to a house,
entered it to refresh himself. There were in it four men, who pre-
tended to sleep. One of them rose, and approaching the emperor,
told him he had dreamed he should take his watch, and took
it. Then another rose and said he had dreamed that his sur-
tout fitted him wonderfully, and took it. The third took his
purse. At last the fourth came up, and said he hoped he would
not take it ill if he searched him, and in doing it perceived around
the emperor's neck a small gold chain to which a whistle (un
sifflet) was attached, which he wished to rob him of. But the em-
peror said: "My good friend, before depriving me (priver quelqu'un
de quelque chose) of this trinket, (le bijou,) I must teach you its virtue.”
Saying this he whistled, (siffler, 1.) His attendants, (ses gens,) who
were seeking him, hastened to the house, and were thunderstruck
(frappé d'étonnement) to behold his majesty in such a state. But the
emperor, seeing himself out of danger, (hors de danger,) said: "These
men (voici des hommes qui) have dreamed all that they liked. I
wish in my turn also to dream." And after having mused a
few seconds, he said: "I have dreamed that you all four deserve
EIGHTY-FOURTH LESSON. (2.)
443
to be hanged:" which was no sooner spoken than executed before
the house.
To follow from it.
VOCABULAIRE. 2de Sec.
It follows from it that you should not
do that.
How is it that you have come so late?
I do not know how it is.
How is it that he had not his gun?
I do not know how it happened.
To clear, to elucidate, to clear up.
The weather is clearing up.
To refresh.
Refresh yourself, and return to me
immediately.
To whiten, to bleach. To blacken.
To turn pale, to grow pale.
To blush, to redden.
To grow old. To grow young.
To make merry. Gay, merry. Mirth.
To make one's self merry. Cheer up.
He makes merry at my expense.
To feign, counterfeit, dissemble,
pretend. Never pretend.
I feign, thou feignest, he feigns.
ile knows the art of dissembling.
To procrastinate, to go slow about.
I do not like to transact business
with that man, for he always goes
very slow about it.
A proof.
This is a proof.
To stray, to get lost, to lose one's
self, to lose one's way.
Through.
S'ensuivre,* 4.
Il s'ensuit que vous ne devriez pas
faire cela.
† Comment se fait-il que vous soyez
venu si tard ?
+ Je ne sais pas con.nient cela se fait.
† Comment se faisait-il qu'il n'eût
pas son fusil ?
Je ne sais pas comment cela se
faisait
Éclaircir, 2.
Le temps s'éclaircit.
Rafraîchir, 2.
Rafraîchissez-vous, et revenez tout
de suite.
Blanchir, 2.
Noircir, 2.
Pâlir, 2.
Rougir.
Vieillir, 2.
Égayer.
S'égayer, 1.
Gai.
Rajeunir, 2.
La gaieté.
Égayez-vous.
Il s'égaie à mes dépens.
Feindre,* 4, feignant, feint.
feignez jamais.
Je feins, tu feins, il feint.
Il possède l'art de feindre.
No
+ Traîner les choses en longueur.
Je n'aime pas à faire des affaires avec
cet homme, parce qu'il traîne tou
jours les choses en longueur.
Une preuve.
C'est une preuve.
one's}
S'égarer, 1.
À travers le, or Au travers de.
The cannon-ball went through the Le boulet a passé à travers la mu
wall.
I ran him through the body.
raille.
Je lui ai passé mon épée au travers
du corps.
QUATRE-VINGT-QUATRIÈME THÊME. 2de Sec.
Un bon vieillard, étant fort malade, fit appeler son épouse, qui
était encore fort jeune, et lui dit: "Ma chère, vous voyez que ma
dernière heure s'approche, et que je suis forcé de vous quitter. C'est
pourquoi, si vous voulez que je meure en paix, il faut que vous me
444
EIGHTY-FIFTH LESSON. (1.)
fassiez une grâce. Vous êtes encore jeune, et sans doute vous voul
remarierez, je le sais ; mais je vous prie de ne pas prendre M. Louis,
car j'avoue que j'ai toujours été très-jaloux de lui, et que je le suis
encore. Je mourrais donc désespéré, si vous ne me promettiez pas
cela." La femme répondit: "Mon cœur, je vous supplie, que cela
ne vous empêche pas de mourir en paix; car je vous assure que
quand même je voudrais l'épouser, je ne le pourrais pas, étant déjà
promise à un autre.”
It was customary with Frederick the Great, whenever a new
soldier appeared in his guards, to ask him three questions; viz. "How
old are you? How long have you been in my service? Are you
satisfied with your pay and treatment?" It happened that a young
soldier, born in France, who had served in his own country, desired
to enlist in the Prussian service. His figure caused him to be im-
mediately accepted; but he was totally ignorant of the German dia-
lect; and his captain giving him notice that the king would question-
him in that tongue the first time he should see him, advised him
at the same time to learn by heart the three answers that he was to
make to the king. Accordingly he learned them by the next day;
and as soon as he appeared in the ranks Frederick came up to inter-
rogate him: but he happened to begin with him by the second ques-
tion, and asked him, "How long have you been in my service?"
"Twenty-one years," answered the soldier. The king, struck with
his youth, which plainly indicated that he had not borne a musket
so long as that, said to him, much astonished, "How old are you?”
"One year, an't please your majesty, (n'en déplaise à Votre Majes-
té.") Frederick, more astonished still, cried, "You or I must cer-
tainly be bereft of our senses." The soldier, who took this for the
third question, replied firmly, (avec aplomb,) "Both, an't please your
majesty."
EIGHTY-FIFTH LESSON.-Quatre-vingt-cinquième Leçon, 85me.
To double.
VOCABULAIRE. 1re Sec.
The double.
Doubler, 1.
Votre part, (fem.)
Le double.
Your share, your part.
That merchant asks twice as much † Ce marchand surfait du double.
as he ought.
You must bargain with him; he will† Il faut que vous marchan:liez avec
give it you for the helf.
You have twice your share.
lui; il vous rabattra la moitié.
Vous avez double part.
EIGHTY-FIFTH LESSON. (1.)
445
Vous avez triple part.
You have three times your share.
To renew.
To stun.
Wild, giddy.
Open, frank, real.
To shake somebody's hand.
I told him yes.
I told him no.
To squeeze, press.
To lay up, to put by.
Put your money by.
Renouveler, 1.
Étourdi-e.
Étourdir, 2.
Franc-franche.
Serrer la main à quelqu'un.
+ Je lui dis qu'oui.
† Je lui dis que non.
} Serrer.
Serrez votre argent.
As soon as I have read my book I Aussitôt que j'ai lu mon livre, je la
put it by.
I do not care much about going to
the play to-night.
To satisfy one's self with a thing.
I have been eating an hour, and I
cannot satisfy my hunger.
To be satisfied.
To quench one's thirst.
I have been drinking this half hour,
but I cannot quench my thirst.
To have one's thirst quenched.
To thirst for, to be thirsty or dry.
That is a blood-thirsty fellow.
serre.
Je ne me soucie pas beaucoup d'aller
à la comédie ce soir.
† Se rassasier, 1.
t Il y a une heure que je mange, et
je ne puis me rassasier; or,
† Je mange depuis une heure, et je
ne peux pas me rassasier.
Être rassasié.
† Se désaltérer, 1.
Il y a une demi-heure que je bois,
mais je ne puis me désaltérer.
Être désaltéré.
Être altéré.
† C'est un homme altéré de sang.
QUATRE-VINGT-CINQUIÈME THÊME. 1re Sec.
Un homme avait deux fils: l'un aimait à dormir la grasse ma-
tinée, et l'autre était très-laborieux, et se levait toujours de très-bonne
heure. Celui-ci étant un jour sorti de grand matin, trouva une
bourse remplie d'argent. Il courut à son frère, lui faire part de sa
bonne fortune, et lui dit: "Voyez-vous, Louis, ce qu'on gagne à se
lever de bonne heure?" "Ma foi," répondit son frère, "si celui à
qui elle appartient ne s'était pas levé de meilleure heure que moi,
il ne l'aurait pas perdue."
On demandait à un jeune fainéant, ce qui le faisait rester au lit si
long-temps. "Je suis occupé," dit-il, "à tenir conseil tous les
matins. Le travail me conseille de me lever, la paresse de rester
couché et ils me donnent ainsi vingt raisons pour et contre. C'est
à moi d'entendre ce qu'on dit des deux parts; et à peine la cause
est-elle entendue que le dîner est prêt."
It was a beautiful turn given by a great lady, who, being (on ra-
conte un beau trait d'-) asked where her husband was, when he lay
concealed (être caché) for having been deeply concerned in a con-
spiracy, (pour avoir trempé dans une conspiration,) resolutely (coura-
geusement) answered, she had hid him. This confession (un aveu)
38
446
EIGHTY-FIFTH LESSON. (2.)
drew her before the king, who told her, nothing but her discovering
where her lord was concealed could save her from the torture,
(qu'elle ne pouvait échapper à la torture qu'en découvrant la retraite
de son époux.) "And will that do?" (suffire,*) said the lady. "Yes,"
says the king, “I will give you my word for it." "Then," says
she, “I have hid him in my heart, where you will find him.”
Which surprising answer (cette réponse admirable) charmed her
enemies.
VOCABULAIRE. 2de Sec.
On both sides, on every side.
On all sides.
Allow me, my lady, to introduce to
you Mr. G., an old friend of our
family.
De part et d'autre.
De toutes parts.
Permettez, Madame, que je vous pré-
sente Monsieur de G., comme an-
cien ami de notre famille.
I am delighted to become acquainted Je suis charmée, Monsieur, de faire
with you.
votre connaissance.
I shall do all in my power to deserve Je ferai tout ce qui sera en mon pou-
your good opinion.
Allow me to introduce to you Mr. B.,
whose brother has rendered such
eminent services to your cousin.
How happy we are to see you at our
house!
It is the prerogative of great men to
conquer envy; merit gives it birth,
and merit destroys it.
It is the finest country in Europe.
voir, pour me rendre digne de vos
bonnes grâces.
Mesdames, permettez que je vous
présente M. de B., dont le frère a
rendu de si éminents services à vo-
tre cousin.
Ah! Monsieur, que nous sommes en-
chantées de vous recevoir chez
nous!
C'est le privilège des grands hommes
de vaincre l'envie; le mérite la
fait naître, le mérite la fait mou-
rir.
C'est le plus beau pays de l'Europe.
Obs. 173. The preposition in, connected with a relative superlative, is
rendered in French by: de.
Candia is one of the most agreeable | Candie est une des îles les plus agréa
islands in the Mediterranean.
He lives in his retreat like a real
philosopher.
bles de la Méditerranée.
Il vit dans sa retraite en vrai philo
sophe.
Obs. 174. Like is rendered by en when it means equal to. Ex. 、*
You live like a king.
He acts like a madman.
To behave like a blunderbuss.
Vous vivez en roi.
Il agit en furieux.
Se conduire en étourdi.
Who, where I am, knocks as if he Qui frappe en maître où je suis?
were master?
EIGHTY-FIFTH LESSON. (2.)
447
QUATRE-VINGT-CINQUIÈME THEME. 2de Sec.
Quel est le pays le plus étendu, dans lequel, exactement le même
langage est employé par la masse de la nation? Ce sont les États-
Unis. Y parle-t-on le même langage depuis le Nord jusqu'au sud,
et de l'est à l'ouest? Oui, la masse de la langue est la même, ce-
pendant il y a des mots caractéristiques de presque toutes les locali-
tés. Les habitants du Nord peuvent-ils comprendre sans difficulté,
le langage de ceux du midi, qui demeurent quelque fois à 2500
milles? Oui, ils le comprennent tout de suite; mais ils ne laissent
pas de reconnaître immédiatement la partie des États-Unis où l'in-
dividu qui leur parle, a reçu son éducation. En est-il de même en
Europe? Non, pas à beaucoup près, (far from it.) Chaque pro-
vince, chaque comté, chaque district presque, a son langage parti-
culier, que les voisins n'entendent pas plus que nos indiens améri-
cains ne s'entendent les uns les autres. Nos indiens ne s'entendent-
ils pas tous? Non, chaque tribu a sa langue exclusive, et ces tribus
diffèrent autant par le langage que par le costume, (dress.)
Cornelia, the illustrious (illustre) mother of the Gracchi, (des Grac-
ques,) after the death of her husband, who left her with twelve
children, applied herself to (se vouer à) the care of her family, with
a wisdom (la sagesse) and prudence that acquired for (acquérir*)
her universal esteem, (l'estime universelle.) Only three out of
(d'entre) the twelve lived to years of maturity, (l'âge mûr;) one
daughter, Sempronia, whom she married to the second Scipio Afri-
canus; and two sons, Tiberius and Caïus, whom she brought up
(élever) with so much care, that, though they were generally ac-
knowledged (savoir généralement) to have been born with the most
happy dispositions, (la disposition,) it was judged that they were still
more indebted (être redevable) to education than nature. The answer
she gave (faire*) a Campanian lady (une dame de Campanie) con-
erning them (à leur sujet) is very famous, (fameux-se,) and includes
in it (renfermer) great instruction for ladies and mothers.
That lady, who was very rich, and fond of pomp and show,
(étre passionné pour le faste et l'éclat,) having displayed (étaler) her
diamonds, (le diamant,) pearls, (la perle,) and richest jewels, earnestly
desired Cornelia to let her see her jewels also. Cornelia dexterously
(adroitement) turned the conversation to another subject, to wait the
return of her sons, who were gone to the public schools. When
they returned, and entered their mother's apartment, she said to the
Campanian lady, pointing to them, (monirer :) "These are my
jewels, and the only ornaments (la parure) I prize, (priser.”) And
such ornaments, which are the strength (la force) and support (Jo
448
EIGHTY-SIXTH LESSON. (1.)
soutien) of society, add a brighter lustre (un plus grand lustre) to the
fair (la beauté) than all the jewels of the East, (de l'Orient.)
EIGHTY-SIXTH LESSON, 86th.-Quatre-vingt-sixième Leçon, 86me.
PRESENT OR ACTIVE PARTICIPLE.
Participe présent.
For its use and formation, see (§ 1561). Study it carefully.
VOCABULAIRE. 1re Sec.
The house being built, we occu-
pied it.
Having studied, I recited well.
La maison étant bâtie, nous l'occu-
pâmes.
Ayant étudié, je récitai bien.
Not having studied, my cousin did N'ayant pas étudié, mon cousin ne
not recite as well as I did.
Not knowing the name of the gentle-
man, I could not write it.
The note becoming due on Sunday,
it must be paid on Saturday.
His brother-in-law's coat fitting him,
he put it on.
Understanding the language they
spoke, I learned their secret.
How did you find it out?
By listening to their conversation.
Where did you find her purse?
récita pas aussi bien que moi.
Ne sachant pas le nom du M., je ne
pus pas l'écrire.
Le billet échéant dimanche, il faut
le payer samedi.
L'habit de son beau-frère lui séant,
il le mit.
Comprenant la langue qu'ils par-
laient, j'appris leur secret.
Comment le découvrîtes-vous ?
En écoutant leur conversation.
Où trouvâtes-vous sa bourse ?
In the bushes, while looking for birds' | Dans les buissons, en cherchant des
eggs.
We saw the fire while crossing.
How is the plural of nouns and of
adjectives formed?
By adding an s to the singular.
How is the present participle formed?
By changing the ons of the first per-
son plural into ant.
How can they improve their writing?
By copying good copper-plate
models.
How does it happen that...?
How does it happen that he is so
small, his parents being so tall?
It is one of those facts we see, but
for which we cannot account.
As mesmerism, I suppose.
œufs d'oiseaux.
Nous vîmes le feu en traversant:
Comment forme-t-on le pluriel des
noms et des adjectifs ?
En ajoutant s au singulier.
Comment forme-t-on le participe
présent ?
En changeant le ons de la première
personne du pluriel en ant.
Comment peuvent-ils bonnifier leur
écriture? En copiant de bons
modèles gravés.
Comment se fait-il que...? (§ 151.)
Comment se fait-il qu'il soit si
petit, son père et sa mère étant si
grands?
C'est un de ces faits qu'on voit,
mais qu'on ne peut expliquer.
Comme le mesmérisme, je suppose
EIGHTY-SIXTH LESSON. (1.)
449
The more you study the more you | Plus vous étudiez plus vous apprenez
learn.
Do not people learn by studying?
Yes, the more one studies the more.
one learns.
N'apprend-on pas en étudiant?
Si fait, plus on étudie plus on ap-
prend.
Go up stairs and get me a silk hand- Allez en haut me chercher un
kerchief.
mouchoir de soie.
Will you choose a good steel pen and Voulez-vous choisir une bonne plume
write a letter to Julia?
d'acier pour écrire à Julie ?
QUATRE-VINGT-SIXIÈME THÊME. 1re Sec.
La voiture étant cassée, que nous faut-il faire? Il nous faut
attendre qu'elle soit raccommodée. Plus nous attendrons plus nous
nous reposerons, et je vous assure que j'ai grand besoin de repos,
car je suis très-fatiguée; ne l'êtes-vous pas? Non, je ne le suis pas
du tout. Comment se fait-il que vous ne le soyez pas? Je ne sais
pas comment cela se fait; mais, je ne me sens pas fatiguée, pas le
moins du monde. Il paraît que plus vous voyagez, moins vous
souffrez, et moi, au contraire, plus je voyage, plus je souffre. C'est
peut-être, parce que vous aviez peur des derniers chevaux que nous
avons.eus. C'est vrai, j'en ai eu peur; ils étaient vigoureux et
fringants, (frisky,) et je craignais qu'ils ne prissent le mors aux dents,
(would run away.) Moi, je les ai trouvés beaux, et voilà tout. J'ai
trouvé qu'ils allaient vite, mais je n'ai pas eu la moindre peur. Quoi!
N'avez-vous pas eu peur quand ils ont pris le galop? (began to
gallop.) Non; ce n'était que le petit galop (hand-gallop or canter.)
-Votre peur vous a plus fatiguée que le voyage.
The more I look at her, the more I admire her, don't you? (62³,
N. 1.) No, on the contrary, the more I look at her, the less I admire
her face, her manners and voice; but whose handsome carriage is
this? Which one do you mean? for I see several. That dark
green carriage, with the driver's seat (le siège du çocher) in white
cloth.-I see it now, you are right, it is elegant; but I do not know
whose it is.-Do you see it, Theodore? Yes, I do. Whose is it?
I do not know. Do you, Aletta? I neither. (§ 171-9.) Does your
cousin Eloise? She neither.-Does any one? (62³, N. 1.) No, no-
body here knows it. It looks like a new carriage, and is very tasty,
(d'un goût exquis.)—I came down without my parasol; I must go
back for it.-No, no, cousin, I will go up and get it for you, (monter
le chercher.) Where shall I find it? I had it in my hand, so that I
must have left it either on the bed, the bureau, the toilet, or a chair;
you will certainly find it somewhere in the room. I shall be back
in a minute.
I cannot play that new polka. You will learn it by practising-
38*
450
EIGHTY-SIXTH LESSON. (2.)
Can you speak while playing on the piano? Yes, I can speak while
playing a tune I know. Could you not speak while playing on the
violin? No, I cannot; but I have seen a good many persons that
could. Ladies can generally talk while playing the piano, can they
not? Yes, as they frequently sing while playing; they do not find
it more difficult to speak than to sing.
QUATRE-VINGT-SIXIÈME THÊME. 2de Sec.
POLITENESS.
When the Earl of Stair was at the court of Louis XIV. his man-
ners, address, and conversation, gained much on the esteem and
friendship of that monarch. One day, in a circle of his courtiers,
talking of the advantage of good breeding and easy manners, the
king offered to lay a wager he would name an English nobleman
that should excel in those particulars any Frenchman of his court.
The wager was jocularly accepted, and his majesty was to choose
his own time and place for the experiment.
To avoid suspicion, the king let the subject drop for some months,
till the courtiers thought he had forgotten it; he then chose the fol-
lowing stratagem: he appointed Lord Stair, and two of the most
polished noblemen of his court, to take an airing with him after the
breaking up of the levee; the king accordingly came down the
great staircase at Versailles, attended by those three lords, and corn-
ing up to the side of the coach, instead of going in first, as usual, he
pointed to the French lords to enter; they, upon this unusual
ceremony, shrunk back, and submissively declined the honor; he
then pointed to Lord Stair, who made his bow, and instantly sprang
into the coach: the king and the French lords followed.
When they were seated, the king exclaimed: "Well, gentlemen,
I believe you will acknowledge I have won my wager."
"How
so, sire ?"
"Why," continued the king, "when I desired you both
to go into the coach, you declined it: but this polite foreigner (point-
ing to Lord Stair) no sooner received the commands of a king, though
not his sovereign, than he instantly obeyed." The courtiers hung
lown their heads in confusion, and acknowledged the justness of
his majesty's claim..
I cannot see the justness of that decision. The French lords, by
refusing the honor proffered by the king, (que le roi leur offrait,) dis-
played (montrèrent) less obedience, but more politeness.
MILDNESS.
The mildness of Sir Isaac Newton's temper through the course of
nis life, commanded admiration from all who knew him; but in no
EIGHTY-SIXTH LESSON. (2.)
451
one instance, perhaps, more than the following. Sir Isaac had a
favorite dog, which he called Diamond; and being one day called
out of his study into the next room, Diamond was left behind. When
Sir Isaac returned, having been absent but a few minutes, he had
the mortification to find that Diamond having thrown down a lighted
candle among some papers, the nearly finished labor of many years
was in flames, and almost consumed to ashes. This loss, as Sir
Isaac Newton was then very far advanced in years, was irretrieva-
ble; yet, without once striking the dog, he only rebuked him with
this exclamation: "O! Diamond! Diamond! thou little knowest the
mischief thou hast done."
Zeuxis entered into a contest of art with Parrhasius. The former
painte grapes so truly, that birds came and pecked at them. The
latter delineated a curtain so exactly, that Zeuxis, coming in, said:
"Take away the curtain, that we may see this piece." And finding
his error, said: "Parrhasius, thou hast conquered: I only deceived
birds, thou an artist."
Zeuxis painted a boy carrying grapes; the birds came again and
pecked. Some applauding, Zeuxis flew to the picture in a passion,
and saying, “My boy must be very badly painted," daubed his face,
(lui barbouilla la figure.)
The inhabitants of a great town offered to Marshal de Turenne
a hundred thousand crowns upon condition that he should take
another road, and not march his troops their way. He answered
them: "As your town is not on the road I intend to march, I cannot
accept the money you offer me.”
A corporal of the life-guard of Frederick the Great, who had a
great deal of vanity, but at the same time was a brave fellow, wore
a watch-chain, to which he affixed a musket-bullet instead of a watch,
which he was unable to buy. The king, being inclined one day to
rally him, said: "Apropos, corporal, you must have been very frugal
to buy a watch: it is six o'clock by mine; tell me what it is by
yours?" The soldier, who guessed the king's intention, instantly
drew out the bullet from his fob, and said: "My watch neither
marks five nor six o'clock; but it tells me every moment, that it is
my duty to die for your majesty." "Here, my friend," said the king,
quite affected, “take this watch, that you may be able to tell the
hour also." And he gave him his watch, which was adorned with
brilliants.
AN AFFECTING NARRATIVE OF THE RECOVERY OF EYESIGHT.
The operator, Mr. Grant, having observed the eyes of his blind
patient, and convinced his friends and relations, among others the
452
EIGHTY-SIXTH LESSON. (2.)
Rev. Mr. Kerswell, that it was highly probable he should be able to
remove the obstacle which prevented the use of his sight; all who
knew and had any regard for the young man, or curiosity to be pre-
sent when one of full age and understanding received a new sense,
assembled themselves on this ocasion. Mr. Kerswell, being particu-
larly interested, desired the whole company, in case the blindness
should be cured, to let the patient make his own observations, with-
out enabling him to discover his friends by their voices. Among
several others, the mother, brother, sisters, and a young lady for
whom he had a passion, were present. The work was performed
with great skill and dexterity. When the patient first received the
dawn of light, there appeared such an ecstasy in his action, that he
seemed ready to swoon away in the surprise of joy and wonder.
The surgeon stood before him with his instruments in his hands.
The young man observed him from head to foot, after which he
surveyed himself as carefully, and seemed to compare himself, and
think they were exactly alike, except the instruments, which he
took for part of his hands. When he had continued in this amaze-
ment some time, his mother could no longer bear the agitations of
so many passions, but fell upon his neck, crying out, "My son, my
The young man knew her voice, and could speak no more
than, "Oh! me, are you my mother?"-and fainted.
son."
"The whole room were, you will easily conceive, busily employed
in recovering him, except the young lady who was attached to him,
whose agitation was so great that she shrieked in the loudest man-
ner;—that voice seemed to have had a sudden effect upon him, as he
recovered; and he showed a double curiosity in observing her, as
she spoke and called to him, till at last he exclaimed: "What has
been done to me?-Whither am I carried?-Is all this about me?
-The thing I have so often heard of, is this the light? Is this see-
ing?-Were you always thus happy, when you said you were glad
to see each other?-Where is Tom who used to lead me? But I
could ow, methinks, go anywhere without him." He offered to
move, but seemed afraid of everything around him. He was told
hat for some time he must suffer his eyes to be covered, and Tom
¹o lead him as usual, which he consented to with great reluctance.
He was at last prevailed on to have his eyes bound, in which
situation they kept him in a dark room, until it was judged proper
to let the organ receive its objects without further precaution. During
the time of this darkness, he bewailed himself in the most distress-
ful manner, and accused all his friends, complaining that some
incantation had been wrought on him, and some strange magic used
to deceive him into an opinion that he had enjoyed what they called
EIGHTY-SIXTH LESSON. (2.)
453
-
sight. He added, that the impression then let in upon his soul,
would certainly distract him, if he were not so at that present time.
After some days, it was thought proper to take the bandage from
his eyes, and the young lady whom he loved was instructed to do it,
as well to endear herself to him by such a circumstance, as to
moderate his ecstasies, by the persuasion of a voice which had so
much power over him as hers ever had.
When this beloved object began to take off the binding from his
eyes, she spoke to him as follows:
"My dear William, I am now taking the binding off, though,
when I consider what I am doing, I tremble with the apprehension,
that though I have from my very childhood loved you dark as you
were, and though you have conceived so strong a love for me, yet
you will find there is such a thing as beauty, which may ensnare you
into a thousand passion's of which you are innocent, and take you
from me for ever: but before I hazard this, tell me in what manner
the love you always professed to me entered into your heart, for
its usual admission is at the eyes."
The young man answered-"Dear Lydia-If I am to lose by sight
the soft emotions which I have always felt when I have heard your
voice; if I am no more to distinguish the step of her I love when
she approaches me, but to change that sweet and frequent pleasure
for such an amazement as I knew the little time I lately saw; or, if
I am to have anything besides which may take from me the sense
I have, of what appeared most pleasing to me at that time, the sight
of you, pull out these eyes, before they lead me to be ungrateful to
you, or undo myself. I wished for sight only to behold you; pull
them out if they are to make me forget you."
With these assurances, Lydia was well satisfied. In all his con-
versation with her he showed but very faint ideas of anything which
had not been received at the ears.
INTERESTING NARRATIVE.
The following is an extract from a letter written by a young mar-
ried lady in India, to her mother in England, and must be consi-
dered as a beautiful specimen of affection, fortitude, and piety.
"About three o'clock we left Rose farm, and at half past five saw
the ship coming towards us with many sails set; but before I pro-
ceed to say another syllable, I must caution you strongly, and par-
ticularly, my dear mamma, against giving way to your feelings, but
continually bear in mind that all is past, and I am, thank God, now
safe and well, as is my dear brother Frank. The story I must relate
is certainly disastrous, and might have been dreadful; but for the
-454
EIGHTY-SIXTH LESSON. (2.)
mercy of Providence, who in this instance appears to have stretched
forth his omnipotent arm to rescue us from a precipitate and shock-
ing end (namely, a watery grave), almost miraculously. The cir
cumstances were nearly, as the terrible agitation I underwent would
permit my memory its exercise, as follows:-The ship was going with
a fine breeze at the rate of four miles an hour over (or against) a
strong ebb tide running nearly at the same rate; and, as it was in
our favour, we soon came close to the ship, and the officer, keeping
watch on deck, seeing who it was, ordered a rope to be thrown,
which our boatman caught and fastened to a part of the boat, in
order that the men in the ship (as is customary) might pull us to the
side; but Frank, when they began to do so, finding the tide too
strong, and the progress the ship was making against it, too great
for it to be accomplished with facility, called to his chief officer, Mr.
G., to request the pilot to let fly some particular sail, which request,
after a little hesitation, was complied with; but Frank, perceiving
the difficulty of our coming along side continuing to exist, ordered
Mr. G. again to tell the pilot to back the topsails; Mr. G. returned
for answer,
"The pilot won't, Sir." Brother then called out to the
pilot, John, to whom he personally repeated his request, adding, "For
God's sake comply, for there is a lady in the boat, and you will
certainly pull us under water." I, through the venetian, saw the pilot
shake his head, and heard Frank call out to let go the rope, which had
been thrown from the ship to us; but the men not executing imme-
diately their order, what he had foretold actually occurred; we were
dragged under water. Oh! what a dreadful moment; no words
can express the feelings such a moment creates, and no one, except
those who have been placed in a similar situation, can conceive the
agony, the horror of it. The boat we were in is called a boleah; it
is a large boat with a thing like a house on the top of it; therefore,
instead of the cabin being below, as in English pleasure yachts, it
is on the deck. When the accident happened I was alone in the
cabin with all the baggage, beds, &c.; my maid was sitting near
the door, and brother was at the further extremity of the boat. He,
whey under water, let go the rope which fastened us to the ship,
and by this means saved every soul but one from perishing, for the
boat, instead of sinking, upset and floated with the bottom upwards.
Poor Frank with great difficulty (he cannot swim), from the in-
cumbrance of a great coat, got above water, and held on to the
bottom of the boat. My proceedings inside were attended with more
difficulty. I possessed during the whole time entire presence of
mind, which, though it saved me, added trebly to the dreadfulness
EIGHTY-SIXTH LESSON. (2.)
455
of my situation. I was as composed as I am at this moment. I
felt death to be inevitable, and resigned myself to the mercy of
God. I saw my poor servant sink (1 thought for ever), and heard
with firmness, though with agonized despair, her last faint exclama-
tion of Oh Mà, Oh Mà, the funeral or death cry of the natives. The
boxes, &c., in the cabin had fallen to the ceiling, which had of
course, from the situation of the boat, become the undermost part;
they fell fortunately without injuring me; and I stood on the same
floor with them, and made an effort to open the door, but, from the
unusual position, it resisted my attempt. The water now began to
rush through the venetians all round into the cabin, and I felt that
I was consuming fast the air of which any further supply was totally
impossible; therefore, two dreadful deaths presented themselves —
drowning and suffocation. Perfectly sensible and collected, I made
another more violent attempt to open the door, in which I succeeded,
and the prospect before me made my fate appear more certain even
than before, and undoubtedly more dreadful; for the ceiling the
boat made over my head, rendered it only sufficiently light for me
to behold the dismally dark green of the water all round. Even in
this horrible state my recollection never failed me for an instant;
indeed, the effect was contrary, for my memory was almost cruelly
retentive; and actually while I was deliberating which course to
take, or rather which death to die, I thought of you all, of my home,
my country, my husband; and indeed every circumstance of my
life passed in review before me. Beginning to gasp a little, I found
the horrors of drowning diminish, and being perfectly aware that
either way my sufferings would soon be over, I again commended
myself to the Almighty, and placing my hands close down to my
sides (not a drop of water had yet touched me), I resigned myself
to that element, knowing that the tide would soon carry me from
underneath the boat, and that there was a possibility of my being
able to get at the top of it. From my perfect composure, even
when immersed, I was convinced that any action of my body would
counteract the buoyant effect of the water, therefore I remained per-
fectly still; my eyes were open, and I soon perceived, from the color
of the water becoming lighter, that I was rising. When my head
came above, I saw I was only a few yards from the boat, to which
the tide carried me; and, with an effort so natural to a drowning
wretch, endeavored to seize it: but the bottom was coppered, and
so perfectly smooth that I only could hold by pressing my extended
hands, arms, and cheek, to its slippery surface; this was no hold, and
the next wave carried me off again with my head the second time
456
EIGHTY-SIXTH LESSON. (2.)
under water. Though nearly exhausted, my presence of mind never
forsook me; I was buoyed up again, and reached the boat as before;
and as I now saw Frank's head above water, with some of the dan-
dies (boatmen), I increased my efforts to hold on, for the desire of
life was become stronger, though struggling with the water. I
called out, “Frank, I am safe, do not be alarmed." At this moment
he got on the top of the boat, and, crawling to the place where I
was holding on, entreated me to give him my hands that he might
pull me up; but I knew the impossibility of his doing so, and felt
that even to quit my precarious hold would be ruin, for my strength
was too much exhausted to permit me to use any further exertion
of body: my mind was as vigorous as at first. Danger levels all
distinction. A poor dandy rose near me; and, partly to support
myself and save him, I grasped his hand, and at the same time got
a finger through a small hole which was bored for the purpose of
letting the water off the deck of the boat; these holds were better,
and I kept them for a considerable time, though up to my throat in
water. In short, my woman was saved, and, with the boatman,
like brother, got on the top. The ship meanwhile was going on,
and, the tide drifting us in a contrary direction, we were soon three
or four miles apart. Frank's officers were much concerned, as were
his men, of whom all the best, headed by the Syrang, jumped over-
board, and swam on shore. Shame to say, the ship was not pro-
vided with one boat fit for use; that which they lowered down'
sunk immediately, and the second officer, who had got into her, was
saved by a rope thrown to him from the ship. The men who swam
on shore had three or four miles to run before they came to the spot
where we were, therefore imagine our situation. Brother, when I
could hold no longer, seized my hands, and with herculean strength
pulled me up, and seated me near him. We now began the mourn-
ful task of numbering our people, and found only one man missing;
all the remainder (twelve souls, including ourselves) being seated at
the top of the boat. Night was fast approaching, and the melancholy
cry of the poor creatures, in this perilous situation, of "Oh Mà, Oh
Mà," uttered at regular intervals, increased the wretchedness of the
scene. Frank, in a state of distraction on my account, hallooed
repeatedly for assistance, but none came till quite night, and
for more than three hours were we in this miserable condition,
when boats came, and brother's ship's crew appeared on the shore."
V. VALUE'S
GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS.
GRAMMAIRE SYNOPTIQUE.
DIRECTIONS.
DIRECTION 1.-The pupil must be informed that, in English, is the ques
tion: Have you read the book? he may answer, Yes, Sir, I have; No,
Miss, I have not. To the question: Would they buy the paper? he may
answer: Yes, they would, or No, they would not. But the same liberty is
not allowed in French, and he must then either stop after Yes, or Yes, Sir,
Oui, or Oui, M., or Non, or Non, Mlle.; otherwise he must give an answer
containing the subject, the verb, and the objective. To the first question: I
have it, or I have not got it; to the second, They would buy it, or they would
not buy it.
Do you see the fans?
Has he taken them?
I do.
He has not.
I
Would you have bought them?
would.
Voyez-vous les éventails?
vois.
Je les
Les a-t-il pris? Il ne les a pas pris.
Les auriez-vous achetés?
l'aurais fait.
Je
DIR. 2.-Every attending word, whether article or pronoun, showing the
gender and number of nouns, must be repeated before every noun in the
same sentence.
He received a hat, a sword, pistols, &c.
We saw the man, woman, children,
and servants.
Il reçut un chapeau, une épée, des
pistolets, &c.
•
Nous vîmes l'homme, la femme, les
enfants, et les domestiques.
This grammar, this inkstand, and Cette grammaire, cet encrier, et ces
these pencils are mine.
crayons sont à moi.
And likewise the preposition governing several nouns or verbs must be
repeated before every one of them, although it is not in English.
He speaks of his brother, sister, and
cousins.
He likes to write, read, and play.
Tell the cook to go to market, to buy
eggs, to bring them here, and to
make an omelet with them.
39
Il parle de son frère, de sa sœur, et de
ses cousins.
Il aime à écrire, à lire, et à jouer.
Dites au cuisinier d'aller au marché,
d'y acheter des œufs, de les ap-
porter ici, et d'en faire une omelette.
(§ 4, 20, 25.)
(457)
458
GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSI 3.
DIR. 3.-On Objective Pronouns. The French word LUI, translating,
sometimes, to him, to her, and sometimes merely him or her, is a source of
constant difficulty. Should to him or to her be always used, when implied,
in English, the difficulty would, in a great measure, be removed; for, it
would be easy to remember that, send an apple TO HIM, and send an apple
гo HER, are both translated by, envoyez-LUI une pomme. But, instead of
using the preposition to, the Americans usually suppress it, and say: Send
AIм an apple; send HER an apple. Hence arises the diff culty. As HIM,
unconnected with the preposition, is translated by LE, and HER, by LA, the
learner is induced, whenever the preposition is omitted, (as in the last two
Ex.) to use LE or LA instead of LUI, and very naturally too.
One way
to overcome this difficulty, is to examine mentally whether the preposition
could be used in English; for instance, if, instead of send HIM an apple,
it would be correct to say: send an apple TO HIM. If so, then LUI must
be used.
But a still better dependence is to be placed on the French verb tself.
If it requires the preposition à to govern its indirect object, lui must be used,
not otherwise. How is this to be ascertained? By consulting the list of
verbs, ( 156-5.)
N. B. The same direction applies to the indirect pronoun LEUR, which
translates both THEM, and TO THEM.
The other objective pronouns do not present the same difficulty, because
they are the same, whether direct or indirect, (me, te, nous, vous, $47.)
DIR. 4.-On Objective Nouns. The preposition connected with an objec-
tive pronoun, is sometimes suppressed, or at least connected with the pro-
noun so as to form a single word. Ex. Me, is used for à moi, to me. Lui,
for à lui, à elle, to him, to her, &c.-and then both in English and French
there is an inversion or change in the position of the pronoun; which, in
English, is placed before the objective case; while, in French, it is put still
nearer the beginning of the sentence, viz: before the verb. Will you give
a pencil to me? is the grammatical construction, which, by the suppression
of the preposition to, and the inversion it necessitates, becomes will you
give me a pencil? in which me and pencil appear in an inverted order.
Voulez-vous me donner un crayon, is the only way the French have to trans-
late both the grammatical and inverted construction; because the sup-
pression of the preposition à, which necessarily takes place, (there being
only one object, 51,) forces the pronoun me to be placed before the infinitive
donner. But mark this carefully. The preposition connected with the
object've noun is never suppressed in French, although it is frequently
done in English by means of an inversion. ($51.) The phrase: Give Mary
an apple, in which there is an inversion, is more used than give an apple
to Mary, although the latter is the true grammatical construction. But in
French it is only the last order that is to be translated, and never the former.
Donnez une pomme à Marie; and never: donnez Marie une pomme.
I will send John the knife, (the knife | J'enverrai le couteau à Jean.
to John.)
She wrote her mother a letter, (a let- Elle écrivit une lettre à sa mère
ter to her mother.)
GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS.
459
Show Sarah the present I made you. |
Montrez à Sara le présent que je
vous ai fait.
Dites à André le Français de: His
horse.
Tell Andrew the French of: His
horse.
Whenever you meet with a similarly constructed sentence, give it its full
grammatical extent and translate it.
DIR. 5.-When you do not know the infinitive of a verb, find it in a dic-
tionary, and any of its persons may be formed by the rules given for the for-
mation of the different tenses.
DIR. 6. A simple sentence consists of a verb and its nominative; I ad-
mire, is a simple sentence. You do so well, is another. A compound sentence
consists of two or more simple sentences, connected by a conjunction or a
relative pronoun. I admire what you do so well; I suppose that you know it.
He speaks and writes eloquently. In English, the conjunction that, and the
relative pronouns whom, which, that, are usually omitted, as: 1. I believe
you know it, (that omitted.) 2. I know the person you call, (whom left out.)
3. I read the book he has written, (which.) 4. He learns the lesson you
gave him, (that.) In French, neither the relative pronoun nor the conjunc-
tion is omitted. Hence, translate the four sentences above by: 1. Je crois
QUE vous le savez. 2. Je connais la personne QUE vous appelez. 3. Je lis
le livre qu'il a écrit. 4. Il apprend la leçon que vous lui avez donnée.
Avez-vous mon couteau? Je crois QUE oui; que is used because oui is
equivalent to: j'ai votre couteau; which, being a simple sentence, must be
connected by que with the former, je crois, to form the compound sentence.
Je crois que j'ai votre couteau, or je crois que oui. (21¹.)
DIR. 7.—Much, many, enough, little, &c., are called adjectives in English,
when connected with nouns. In French, combien, beaucoup, assez, peu,
trop, autant, plus, moins, guère, un peu, &c., are considered as adverbs of
quantity; and as such, having no affinity with nouns, they require a con-
necting link, which is the preposition de. Hence, always use de after beau-
coup, combien, &c., before the following noun, and repeat it before every
When the noun is left out, the partitive pronoun en, placed before
the verb, and repeated before every one, takes its place and that of the pre-
position de. ($ 47, N. 4. 121, 2 &c.)
one.
DIR. 8.-In English, to form an interrogation with the verbs to be and to
have, the pronoun nominative is placed after the verb; for instance, I have,
affirmation; by transposition becomes have I? interrogation. You have;
have you?—I am; am I?-You are; are you? &c.
This way of forming the interrogation tallies with the general rule in
French, which is to put the pronoun nominative after the verb, not only
with the two verbs avoir, to have, and être, to be; but with every other
verb. So: J'ai, becomes ai-je? Je suis, suis-je ? Je dois, dois-je? Je
reçois, reçois-je? &c.
Should the Americans use the same mode of interrogation with other
verbs as they do with to have and to be, students would meet with no diffi-
culty; but instead of transposing the pronouns, they retain the affirmative
forn and use auxiliaries, such as do, did, shall, &c. For instance: I owe,
does not become interrogative by saying: owe I? but by putting do before
460
GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS.
I owe, as, do I owe? do I receive? &c., for the present tense. Did I owe t
did I receive? for the imperfect. Shall and will, for the future tense
should, would, &c., for the potential, &c. So that when the student wishes
to form an interrogation, in French, he naturally looks out for a word cor-
responding to the auxiliary, do, or did, or shall, &c., and feels much disap-
pointed when told there is none. It is for a long time with him a source of
perplexity. When he discovers that do is sometimes translated by fait, he
is constantly using fait wherever does occurs; when told it is wrong, he
naturally feels dispirited. It is hoped that the full explanation, here given,
will convince the learner that the principal use of do, did, &c. is to form
interrogations and negations in English,' and that since he can, with the
verbs to have and to be, interrogate without using do, did, &c., so he can in
all French verbs. If he is once convinced of this idea, a great cause of per-
plexity will be removed.
The French, however, have another mode of interrogating, which consists
in putting: EST-CE QUE (28¹) before the affirmative form of every person,
which can be used interrogatively. Ex. J'ai, I have. Est-ce que j'ai?
have I? Tu es, thou art. Est-ce que tu es? art thou? Il lit, he reads.
Est-ce qu'il lit? does he read? Nous devons, we owe. Est-ce que nous
devons? do we owe? Vous savez, you know. Est-ce que vous savez?
do you know? Ils aiment, they love. Est-ce qu'ils aiment? do they love?
From these examples it is evident that this mode of interrogation may be
used in every case, but it must be employed in the first person singular of
some verbs in which the transposition of the pronoun would produce a diffi-
cult or an unpleasant sound. 1st. When that first person is a monosyllable,
aş: je sens, je prends, je tends, je fonds. 2d. When the last syllable sounds
like je, such as: je mange, je range, &c.; and others, such as: j'unis, je
permets, j'offre, &c.
DIR. 9. The student may easily notice that the parfait is formed by
merely adding the past participle to the well known expressions j'ai, je
l'ai, je ne l'ai pas, je n'ai rien, j'en ai, je les ai, &c. As je l'ai eu, (312)
je ne l'ai pas eu, je n'ai rien eu, j'en ai eu, je les ai eus, &c., and so of any
other past participle. Je l'ai vu, je les ai donnés, j'en ai envoyé, &c.
RULES.
RULE 1.-Every preposition governs the infinitive mood, except the pre-
position en (in) which governs the present participle. (20¹.)
Note 1. Après, (after) like every other preposition, (except en,) must be
followed by the infinitive mood in French, but there is this peculiarity
respecting après, that it can be followed only by the infinitive of the auxi-
liaries avoir or étre; as, Après avoir parlé, after having spoken. Après
itre parti, after having departed. Après vous être levé, after having
1 To form a negative, do, did, &c., are invariably used, for instance; I go, does
not become negative by saying: I go not; but by : I do not go. I went is not I went
not, but I did not go, &c., &c. As the French form their negations in a different
way, the student must not look for anything corresponding to do, did, &c., in the
French negatives.
GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS.
461
risen. Now, although in English you may omit the auxiliary having, and
say: after speaking; after departing; after rising; it cannot be done in
French. (40¹.)
R. 2.-When two verbs come together, the second is in the infinitive mood,
voulez-vous faire, (18¹,) if the first is neither to have (avoir) or to be (être)
used as auxiliary of a past tense. Of course, if the two verbs are connected
by a preposition, such as: à, to, de, of, from, &c., it governs the second verb in
the infinitive, according to R. 1., and the preposition must be repeated before
every verb. (20¹.)
R. 3.-Do you speak before you listen? There are in this sentence two
verbs, speak and listen, connected by a preposition and having the same nomi-
native, you. Whenever that is the case, the French dispense with the second
nominative by using the infinitive mood after the preposition, (R. 1,) and
say: Parlez-vous avant d'écouter? which corresponds to: Do you speak before
listening? (282, Obs. 65.)
R. 4.-When the nominatives are different, as: He writes after you have
spoken, the French use the English construction, and say: Il écrit après que
vous avez parlé. They, of course, insert the conjunction que, left out in
English, but never omitted in French.
Note.-After that conjunction que the verb is frequently in the subjunc-
tive mood. (§ 151.)
R. 5.-When two or more nouns, two or more adjectives, or two or more
verbs govern a noun or a verb, they must govern it without any preposition,
or with the same.
If they require different prepositions, see (§ 140—9.)
R. 6. Every French preposition precedes the word it governs, is never
separated from it, and is repeated before every word. (§ 117, 163, &c.)
ARTICLES.
1.-ARTICLES are used in French to show the gender and number of
nouns. Although French grammarians admit of but one article, viz: the
definite, le, la, les, (the), two others are usually introduced in English-
French grammars, i. e. the indefinite, un or une, a, an,¹ and the partitive,
du, de la, des, some.
It seems to me that the name of Article might appropriately be given to
all the words which point out the gender or number of nouns. Accordingly,
we might call:
1. Mon, ma, mes, my, ($29,) &c., possessive articles, (because, besides
1 And likewise the following:
Tout homme } peut le faire.
Toute femme
Aucun, tout, any, &c. Indefinite Articles.
Avez-vous aucun ami (aucune connaissance,) à Paris?
39 *
462
GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS.
showing the gender and number, they indicate possession,) instead of naming
them possessive adjective pronouns.
2. Ce, cet, cette, ces, this, these, &c., demonstrative articles or adjectives,
instead of demonstrative adjective pronouns. (§ 36.)
3. Quel? quels ? quelle ? quelles? which? interrogative articles, instead
of interrogative adjective pronouns.
4. Deux, trois, &c., numeral articles.!
§ 2. In English, articles are not, as in French, used to show the gender
and number, but to limit the signification of the noun. From this funda-
mental distinction arises the great difference in the use of the articles in
the two languages.
INDEFINITE ARTICLE.-Article Indéfini.
§3.-Singular. A or an, (12³, 81, &c.), Singulier.-Un, masculin.
Une,
féminin.
Pour un, avec une, d'un, à une.
Pluriel.-Des.
Quelques (14¹.)
For a few.
Pour des. -
Pour quelques.
To a few.
Avec des.
À quelques.
Plural. Some, any, a few.
For a, with a, of a, to a.
For some.
With some.
Of, or from some, or a few.
De quelques.
And so it unites with every other preposition, both in the singular and
plural.
$4.-Some, any, a few, are frequently understood or left out in English,
but never in French. Ex.
He admires some modern authors.
We have friends in town.
Have you received letters?
Il admire quelques auteurs modernes.
Nous avons des amis en ville.
Avez-vous reçu quelques lettres ?
$5. In the singular it is generally used alike in both languages, and re-
peated before every noun, so as to mark its gender. As:
He has a pencil, a ruler, and a book. | Il a un crayon, une règle, et un livre.
§6.-1st Exception. Cent, (142,) a hundred; mille, a thousand; long-temps
362,) a long time; beaucoup, (13¹,) a great deal, a great many, in French have
no article.
$7.-2d Exception. Before a noun of weight, measure, and number,
connected with its price, use the definite le, la, les, not the indefinite
article.
Butter sells at twenty cents a pound. | Le beurre se vend vingt cents la
This cloth is worth three dollars a
yard; the metre (652.)
Coal sells at five dollars a ton.
livre.
Ce drap vaut trois dollars la verge;
le mètre.
Le charbon se vend cinq dollars le
tonneau.
1 This classification may be new in an English-French grammar, although long ago
thought of by some of the test French grammarians. See Gram. des Gram. on
Articles. Note 234.
RAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS.
463
ARTICLE DEFINITE.
$8.-The. Singular masculine before a consonant:
Singular feminine before a consonant:
le.
la.
Singular mas. or fem. before a vowel or h mute: 7.
Plural mas. or fem. before vowels or consonants: les.
Pour le, pour la, pour l', pour les.
Avant le, la, l' or les.
For the,
Before the,
And so on with every preposition, except de, (of or from,) and à, (to, at,
&c.; and every preposition ending with de and a. These two prepositions,
in their connexion with the definite article, present an exception which is
easily explained and understood, but which much practice alone can enable
the student to use with accuracy.
Of the, from the, sing. fem., is de la, (the preposition and article remain-
ing separated before a consonant.)
Of, from the, sing. mas. or fem., before a vowel or h mute it: de l'
Thus far the connexion is formed regularly, as in English, that is, the pre-
position de and the article la or l' remain separate: de la, de l'. But it is
different with the masculine singular.
Of, from the, sing. mas., regularly, would be de le, but those two words
are, before a consonant, always contracted into du.¹
Of, from the plur, mas. or fem., instead of de les, is contracted into
des.1
To the, fem. sing., remains in two words: (regular) à la.
mas. or fem. before a vowel or h mute, is (regular) à l'.
mas. sing. instead of: à le in two words, contracts irregularly into au.²
plur. mas. and fem. instead of à les, contracts irregularly into aux.2
$ 9.-The contraction du, being the union of the preposition de and the
article le, ought never to be used when that article is not required. Then,
translate of my friend, by de mon ami, and never by du mon ami, which
would be equivalent to de le mon ami, of the my friend, in which the
article le is unnecessarily introduced. But, translate of yours, by du vôtre,
because, yours without article in English, being le vôtre, with the article,
in French, of yours becomes de le vôtre, or its contraction, du vôtre. And
so it must be, whenever the article le is admitted by the French construc-
tion, although it may be rejected from the English.
Near being près de near the becomes près de le, or, contracted, près du.
Near the castle, is then près du château.
The very same process applies t: des, which is the contraction of de
When in French you meet with: de le, de les, it is as a preposition and a pro-
Boun objective: Il parle de le faire, he speaks of doing it il parle de les faire, he
speaks of doing them; and not a preposition and article. In the latter case, de le,
singular, before a consonant, de les, plural, are never used, but their contractions,
du, des. Il parle du capitaine, des capitaines. He speaks of the captain, of the
captains.
2 When you meet with à le, à les, it is as a preposition and pronoun objective: Il
pense à le faire, à les faire; he thinks of doing it, of doing them; and not as a pre-
position and article. Instead of à le, use au. Instead of à les, use aux. Il parle
zu capitaine, aux capitaines; he speaks to the captain, to the captains.
464
GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS.
les. Then, of my friends, (plur.,) must not be des mes amis, which would
be equivalent to of the my friends; but de mes amis.
$10.-Des (contraction of de les, preposition and article plural) is not,
[and mind it carefully] the plural of de, which, being a preposition, is inva-
riable; but that of du (contraction of de le, preposition and article masculine
singular.)
§ 11.—Near the, près du, près de la, près de l', près des. Let this be the
model for every preposition ending with de, when it is to be connected with
the definite article, but not otherwise. (51¹.)
12.-To the, for the masculine, should be à le, but it is always con-
tracted into au, before a consonant. To the dictionary, au dictionnaire. To
my dictionary, is not au mon dictionnaire, which would be equivalent to
à le mon dictionnaire, to the my dictionary; but à mon dictionnaire,
leaving out the article. To mine, must be au mien; because mine, is le
mien, &c.
§ 13.—As far as, being: jusqu'à; as far as the, will be jusqu'au, jusqu'à
la, jusqu'à l', jusqu'aux. As far as the castle, literally jusqu'à le château,
which, contracted, becomes JUSQU'AU château. Take jusqu'au, &c., as the
model of every preposition ending with à, in its connexion with the definite
article, but not otherwise. (38¹.)
To the, in the plural, should be à les, but it is always contracted into aux.
To the children; aux enfants. To my children, should be à mes enfants,
and not aux mes enfants, which would be equivalent to à les mes enfants,
(to the my children.)
§ 14.—The function of the article being to show the gender and number
of French nouns, and not merely to limit their signification, (§ 2,) we deduce
from it these general principles.
◊ 15.-The definite article must be placed before every noun, if that noun
is not determined by some other qualifying, determining, or limiting word.
(141, Ex) See (§ 140-6) for an exception.
§ 16.-Proper names of countries require a French gender or number;
hence the article that accompanies each one. Le Brésil. La France. Les
Etats-Unis. Those ending in e mute are mostly feminine, all others mas-
culine. (§ 140-8.) Exceptions among nouns.
$17.-Proper names of individuals, pointing out their own gender, require
no article. Alexandre, Jeanne, Philadelphie.
§ 18.-When two or more adjectives qualify the same noun, the article
is not repeated before each. The old and brave soldier. Le vieux et brave
soldat. Le vieux et le brave soldat, would indicate that there are two; one
old and one brave.
PARTITIVE ARTICLE.
Although there is in English grammars no article so called, yet, as the
English-French grammars have it, and as it has some or any for correspond-
ent in English, we insert it here.
GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS.
465
$19.-FIRST PARTITIVE, before a noun.
Some or any, before sing. mas. beginning with a consonant: du.
"
"
sing. fem.
sing. m. or f.
the plural
66
de la.
66
a vowel:
de l'.
"
เ
des.
20.-It has exactly the same form as the definite article connected with
the preposition de. And it is repeated before every noun.
§ 21.-For some or any. Pour du.
Before some or any.
Avant de l'.
◊ 22.—When connected with of or
Of, or from some, it is (not de du,
Of some authors.
23.-Some or any.
For some.
Of, from some.
24.-Near some.
Dictionaries.
With some.
To some.
(Model for the prepositions with de.)
|
With some or any.
To some or any.
Avec de la.
A du, à des.
from, as:
de de la, de des, but) simply de.
D'auteurs.
Quelque, sing.
Pour quelque.
De quelques.
Près du (sing.)
Près de (plur.)
De dictionnaires.
Quelques, plur.
Avec quelques.
À quelque.
Près de quelque.
Près de quelques.
$25.-Obs. Some or any, is frequently omitted in English, but never
in French.
We have soup and beef for dinner.
We have California gold.
Nous avons de la soupe et du bœuf
pour dîner.
Nous avons de l'or de Californie.
Have you eaten chestnuts, apples, and Avez-vous mangé des chataîgnes,
nuts?
◊ 26.—Second PARTITIVE ARTICLE,
Some or any: Mas. fem. sing. plur.
We have some bread.
des pommes, et des noix?
before an adjective, or after a negation.
De or d', (not des, mind it.)
Nous avons du pain, (1st partitive.)
We have some good bread, good Nous avons de bon pain, de bonne
meat, good chickens. (11.)
He has bread, he has no butter. (11'.)
He has amiable children, (some, a
few.)
viande, de bons poulets. (2d partit.)
Il a du pain, il n'a pas de beurre.
Il a d'aimables enfants.
◊ 27.-N. B. If the adjective is placed after the noun, instead of the 2d,
use the 1st partitive article.
French by:
Il a d'aimables enfants.
Il a des enfants aimables.
He has amiable children, may be translated in
2d partitive, the adjective being before.
1st partitive, the noun being before.
◊ 28.—I have some more, or others. | J'en ai d'autre, ou d'autres;
not des autres, because the partitive comes immediately before the adjective.
◊ 29.—POSSESSIVE ARTICLES, OR ADJECTIVES, USUALLY
CALLED POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. ($1.)
30.-The following words are usually classed among pronouns, but as,
in English as well as in French, they merely refer to nouns; as they are
466
GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS.
always prefixed to them, and never take their place; the term Possessive
Articles, instead of Possessive Pronouns, does not seem inappropriate.
$31.
Before a consonant.
Before a vowel
or h mute.
Before all.
Sing. Mas.
Sing. Fem.
M. & F.
Plur. M. & F.
My
mon
ma
mon
mes.
Thy
ton
ta
ton
tes.
His, her, its ¹
son
sa
son
ses.
Our
notre
notre
notre
nos.
Your
Their 2
votre
leur
votre
votre
VOS.
leur
leur
.eurs.
As its function is to show the gender and number:
$32.-RULE. The Possessive Article, in French, agrees with the object
possessed, and not with the possessor, as it does in English. Or else:
It agrees with the noun to which it is prefixed, not that it refers to; and
it must be repeated before every noun.
The father, his son, and daughter.
The mother, her son, her daughter,
and friends.
Le père, son fils, et sa fille.
La mère, son fils, sa fille, et ses
amies.
1 What is ITs infinitive? is translated by: Quel EN est L'infinitif? because the
words, ITs infinitive, can be changed to: THE infinitive OF IT, corresponding to the
French: EN est L'infinitif. Hence this rule. (302.)
• • +
Irs is not translated by son, sa, ses, but by LE, LA, OU LES EN, when it can be
changed to: THE...OF IT.
Ex. 1. I like Philadelphia; ITS markets
ses.
are excellent.
J'aime Philadelphie; LES marchés EN
sont excellents.
When that inversion cannot be made without destroying the sense, use: son, sa,
Ex. 2. The country has ITS delights, must be translated by: La campagne a
SES agréments, because the sentence does not admit of the inversion: the country has
the delights of it.
2 THEIR, is not translated by leur or leurs, but by le, la, les
can be changed to: the... of them.
·
en, when their
Ces langues sont copieuses; j'EN admire
LES beautés.
These languages are copious; I admire
THEIR beauties (the... of them).
But use leur or leurs, when the inversion is inadmissible.
Those languages have THEIR beauties. As we cannot say have the beauties of
them, we must use leurs, and say: Ces langues ont LEURS beautés.
The above rule being derived from the English construction, will be found more
practical than the rule of French Grammarians, which is: When the possessor is
nominative of the sentence in which ITs or THEIR is used, translate by: son, sa, ses,
or leur, leurs. If the possessor is not the nominative, translate by: le, la, les ..
en. (See examples above.)
Exception.-When the thing possessed is governed by a preposition, use: son, sa,
Bes, leur, leurs.
The Philadelphia water-works are admi- | Les machines hydrauliques de Philadel-
rable; everybody wonders at their sim- phie sont admirables; tout le monde
s'étonne de leur simplicité.
plicity.
But if you employ a verb that requires no preposition, the rule must be used. As:
tout le monde en admire la simplicité. This form an exception to both rules.
•
GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS.
467
My cousin's brother and sister."
My cousin's sister and brother.
Le frère de mon cousin et sa sœur.¹
La sœur de mon cousin et son frère.
§ 33.-DEMONSTRATIVE ARTICLES OR ADJECTIVES.
◊ 34.-Always prefixed to a noun, and repeated before every one. (See ◊ 30.)
{
This, that.
These, those.
Before a consonant.
Before h aspirated.
Before a vowel.
Before a silent h.
Before all letters.
(4¹, 8¹, 92, 10¹.)
Masculine.
Singular.
Ce, before a consonant, or h aspirated.
Cet, before a vowel or h mute.
Feminine.
} Cette.
Ces, for the Plur. Mas. and Fem. before all letters.
This hat, that hat.
This hero, that hero.
This, that child.
This, that man.
This, that table.
This, that needle.
These, those men.
These, those women.
Ce chapeau. Mas. Sing.
Ce héros.
Cet enfant.
Cet homme.
Cette table. Fer. Sing.
Cette aiguille.
Ces hommes. Mas. Plur,
Ces femmes. Fem. Plur.
But when much precision is required, -ci and -là are added; as:
This hat. (8¹.)
Ce chapeau-ci.
Ce chapeau-là.
This child.
This table.
These men.
Cet enfant-ci.
Cette table-ci.
Ces hommes-ci.
That hat.
That child.
Cet enfant-là.
That table.
Cette table-là.
Those women.
Ces femmes-là.
$35.-When one says: If you read this book, I will read that or that one,
it is evident that the word this connected with book, takes the place of no
other word previously expressed, and that, consequently, it is not a pronoun,
but a mere attendant on the noun book, to limit its signification, in the same
manner as the article does; and that it may then be considered as a demon-
strative article or adjective, but not a pronoun. In every similar case, it
must be translated by: ce, or cet, cette, ces.
It is also evident that the word that, or that one, takes the place of a
noun previously named, viz: book, and that, of course, it is not an article or
adjective, but a true pronoun demonstrative, (§ 36,) to be translated by: celui-
la, &c.
PRONOUNS.
§ 36.-DEMONSTRATIVE ADJECTIVE PRONOUNS.
This, this one.
Masc. Sing.
Celui-ci.
Masc. Plur.
These.
Ceux-ci.
The latter.
That, that one.
The former.
} Celui-là.
Those.
Ceux-là.
1 My cousin's brother and sister, is an ellipsis for my cousin's brother and my cou
sin's sister; which in French would be: Le frère de mon cousin et la sœur de mon cou-
sin; but instead of putting the second noun in the possessive case, use a possessive
article (31), and say: Le frère de mon cousin et sa sœur. (§ 140.)
469
GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS.
-
Obs. -Ci and -là are omitted when other words (such as: de, of; qui, ou
que, which ;) are added to complete the sense.
Henry's, that of H.
The one which I
Celui de Henri.
Celui que j'ai.
have.
Fem. Sing.
This, this one,
Celle-ci.
The latter.
That, that one.
The former.
}
} Celle-là.
Henrietta's, those Ceux de Henriette.
of H.
Those which are.. Ceux qui sont...
Fem. Plur.
These.
Those.
Those of....
Celles-ci.
Celles-là.
Celles de...
That of, the one of. Celle de ....
That, the one Celle qui...
which....
Those which.... Celles que .
$37.-Obs. As these are pronouns, they always come after antecedent
noun to which they refer and with which they agree. And therefore when
you have an English sentence like: this or that book, the noun, in French,
must be put in the first part of the sentence, to serve as an antecedent to the
pronoun (that) which follows. This book or that... Ce livre-ci ou celui-là.
Celui-là referring to: book; whilst ce, cet, cette, (this or that, same Eng-
lish as above), ces (these or those), are always placed before the noun of which
they point out the gender and number, without referring to anything pre-
viously mentioned.
$38. PERSONAL PRONOUNS. NOMINATIVES.
Pronoms Personnels. Nominatifs.
1st CLASS.
1re CLASSE.
Connected with the verb, in French.1
I.
Thou.
He, she, it.
Singular.
Je, j'.
2d CLASS.
2de CLASSE.
Separated from the verb, in French.'
I.
Tu.
Thou.
Il, elle-il, elle.
He, she.
Singulier.
Moi.2
Toi.
Lui, elle.
One, some or any one. On. (Always connected with a verb of the 3d
pers. sing., although the English pronoun may be plur. See below, 3d plur.)
1 The negative ne, n', and any objective pronouns, le, me, &c., (§ 47,) may intervenc
between a nominative of the 1st class and the verb, without destroying the connex-
ion; but no other word. As: il donne, il me donne, il ne donne pas, il ne me le
donne pas, donne-t-il? But to translate: he who gives, do not say: il qui donne ;
hut: lui qui donne, because who separates he, and gives: He! Can he do it? Lui!
peut-il le faire? Can he do it? He! Peut-il le faire? Lui!
2 The separated nominative is frequently left out in English, or, if expressed, it is
by as for me, as to me, &c. The French moi, toi, &c., is evidently an abridgment
of as to me, and, consequently, is nothing but the objective case used as a
nominative:
As for me, I do not know anything about | Quant à moi, or simply moi! je n'en
it.
sais rien. (Je n'en sais rien, moi!)
Lui! il ne l'a pas fait.
He! He did not do it. (As to him.)
Didst thou go?
We believe it. (As to us.)
Y as-tu été, toi!
Nous! nous le croyons. Nous le croy
ons, nous.
GRAMMATICAL SYNOPS13.
469
We.
You or ye.
They.
Plural.
Nous.¹
Vous.'
Ils, m. elles, ƒ.
Pluriel.
We.
Nous.
Ye or you.
They.
Vous.
Eux, m. Elles, ƒ.
People, they, we, you. On. People seek happiness. On cherche le bonheur.
In the 3d pers. sing. and plur. may be classed the following expressions,
which remain the same, whether connected with, or separated from the
verb.
He, she, it.
This, that, it.4
6
c'.6
Singulier.
Ce, c'.2
Ceci, cela, çà, ce, These, those,
they.
Pluriel.
They, (it).4
Ce.2
Ce.3
Ces choses-ci. Ces
choses-là.
1 The uniting pronoun nous or vous, must be placed before a verb, when it has
two or more nominatives of different persons. Ex. at (171 Exercise.)
2 Instead of: il, elle, ils, elles, use ce or c' with the verb to be, when it has a nomi-
native predicate, as some grammarians say, or two nominatives according to others.
As: He is an Englishman; c'est un Anglais : because Englishman, un Anglais, is
used as a predicate noun to he. But you must translate he is English, by il est
Anglais, and not: c'est Anglais; because, English is then used as an adjective, and
not as a second nominative or a noun predicate. (261, Obs. 59.)
She is an English girl.
She is English.
They are Frenchmen.
They are French.
C'est une Anglaise.
Elle est Anglaise.
Ce sont des Français
Ils sont Français.
3 (39.—It is, is translated by ce sont; is it? by sont-ce? (261, Obs. 59.) only
when followed by a 3d person plural. As: Is it they who sell those beautiful shawls?
Sont-ce eux qui vendent ces beaux châles? Yes, it is they. Oui, ce sont eux. But
it is we who have that; is rendered by C'est nous qui avons cela; not ce sont nous,
because, we, although plural, is not a 3d person, (473, Obs. 110.)
4 When you say: take this, pointing to an object without naming it, or without
applying the word this to a noun previously mentioned, it is evident that, in such a case,
the word this means this thing, or this object, or this article, and that, of course, it
is used as the name of the object itself, or as a noun, (although usually called a
demonstrative adjective pronoun.) In every similar case, translate as above.
Hence, ceci, cela, ceux-ci, ceux-là, should never be connected with nouns, although
this, that, these, those, in English, can be used with or without a noun. This admi-
nistration, is, Cette administration, not ceci ou cela administration. (243, 392.)
5 When former and latter apply to actions, translate by cela and ceci, not by celui-
là and celui-ci, which refer only to definite nouns or objects. As: Have you my book
ani his? I have the former, but not the latter, (here former and latter apply to the
noun book,) then say: J'ai celui-là, mais non pas celui-ci. Have you taken my book
and torn his? I did the former, but not the latter, (they here apply to actions,) then
say: J'ai fait cela, mais non pas ceci. (N. pa. 271.)
6 Ce, cannot be used immediately before an objective pronoun. It is not correct
to translate it pleases me, by ce me plaît, but by cela me plaît, çà ou ceci me
plaît. Ce is mostly used with the verb to be, seldom with others. It is suitable,
c'est convenable; but, it suits, must be cela convient, not ce convient. It is suffi.
cient, c'est suffisant, or else, cela suffit, and not ce suffit. (473, 663 )
This is good, that is, or it is good.
That's it, it is that.
C'est cela.
Ça is a contraction of cela.
Ceci est bon, cela ou c'est bon.
That's not it, 'tis not so. Ce n'est pas
cela.
36 *
470
GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS.
Singulier.
This one, that one. Celui-ci, celui-là.m | These, those, some.
The latter, the for- Celle-ci, celle-là. f.
mer.
This one.. That one. Celui-ci.. cet autre
The one who, that, Celui qui, celle qui.
which.
Some one, any one. Quelqu'un.
Nobody, not anyone. Personne ne.
No one, not anyone. Nul ne, nulle ne.
None, no one. Aucun ne, aucune
ne.
Each one,every one. Chacun, chacune.
The one or the other. L'un ou l'autre.
The one.. the other. L'un... l'autre.
Ni l'un ni l'autre,
Ne.ther.
Pluriel.
The latter, the for- [ Ceux-ci, ceux-là. m.
mer, (some do, [ Celles-ci, celles-là..
some do not.)
Some... others.
Those who, that,
which.
Some, a few.
All.
Ceux-ci.. d'autres.
Ceux qui, celles qui
Que-ques uns.
Tous.
The one and the L'un et l'autre.
other, both.
Some... others.
Both.
Neither of them.
Les uns . les autres.
•
Tous deux, toutes
les deux.
Ni les uns, ni leg
autres.
Noither this one nor Ni celui-ci ni celui-| Neither these nor Ni ceux-ci ni ceux
that one.
Nothing, not any.
...
là.
Rien ne
Who (pour les pers.) Qui. Qui est-ce qui?
What? (pour les Qu'est-ce qui?
choses.)
those.
All.
là.
Tous.
(the i of qui is never cut off.)
A few,some.. others. Quelques uns....
d'autres.
N. B. The nominative case and the verb are frequently left out in
English. As: This, when followed by..., Those, where preceded by..., That,
on the side-board; My gloves, in my pocket, &c. In all similar sentences,
the pronoun and verb must be expressed in French: Ceci, quand il est ...
PERSONAL PRONOUNS.-Pronoms Personnels.
Separated from the verb.
$40. NOMINATIVES. NOMINATIFS.
I who, I that.
Thou who, thou that. Toi qui.
He who, he that.
Moi qui.
41. OBJECTIVES.
I whom, I that.
RÉGIMES.
Moi que.
Thou whom.
Toi que.
Lui qui.¹
Celui qui,2
the one who
He whom, he that,
the one whom
Lui que.¹
Celui que.2
Celle que.2
She who, she that.
Elle qui,¹
Celle qui,2
Shewhom,she that Elle que.¹
1 Lui, elle, apply not to people in general, but to particular persons, and require
no complement.
Who is called the Father of his Country? | Qui est appelé le Père de sa Patrie?
He (pointing to Washington).
She (Miss D.) who writes so well.
Lui (montrant Washington).
Elle (Mlle. D.) qui écrit si bien.
persons.
The plurals, eux, elles, apply to particular
They (the kings) who had promised so
much.
Eux (les rois) qui avaient tant promis.
They (the Misses R.) who speak French Elles (les Demoiselles R.) qui parlent si
so prettily.
joliment le Français
Lui, elle, eux, &c., apply only to persons, not to things.
2 Celui, celle. ceux, celles, apply to nouns having a general sense, or to nouns that
require complements
GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS.
471
NOMINATIVES.
The person who.
OBJECTIVES.
|
La personne qui. The person whom.
La personns
Plural.
We who, we that.
Pluriel.
Plural.
que.
Pluriel.
Nous qui.
We whom, that.
Nous que.
You who, you that.
Vous qui.
You whom.
Vous que.
They who, they
Eux qui.¹
They whom, that.
Eux que.¹
that.
Those who, that.
Ceux qui.2
Those whom, that.
Ceux que.2
They who, that.
Elles qui.¹
They whom, that.
Elles que.¹
Those who, that.
Celles qui.2
Those whom, that.
Celles que.
John and Louis
Jean et Louis
J. and L., whom.
Jean et Louis
who.
qui.
que.
$ 41.-COMPOUND PERSONAL PRONOUNS.
NOMINATIVES AND OBJECTIVES.
Myself,
moi-même.
Oneself,
soi-même.
Thyself,
toi-même.
Ourselves,
nous-mêmes.
Himself,
lui-même.
Yourself,
vous-même.
Herself,
elle-même.
Yourselves,
vous-mêmes.
Itself,
lui, elle, soi-même.
Themselves,
eux-mêmes.
elles-mêmes.
Among compound pronouns may be included:
We, (nom.,) among us, (obj.)
Nous autres.
You, (nom.,) among you, (obj.)
Vous autres.
When objectives, they unite with every preposition.
The French use them frequently in familiar discourse; but only in the
1st and 2d per. plur.
We citizens like country air.
Among you merchants are there no
rogues?
Nous autres citoyens nous aimons
l'air de la campagne.
Parmi vous autres marchands n'y
a-t-il pas de fripons?
◊ 42.-OBJECTIVE PRONOUNS.
◊ 43.-The French have two kinds. 1st. Those which are immediately
governed by the verb, and called DIRECT OBJECTIVES, or RÉGIMES
DIRECTS. They correspond to the objective case of an English verb.
$ 44.-2d. Those which are governed by a preposition, and called INDI-
RECT OBJECTIVES, or RÉGIMES INDIRECTS. These correspond to the objec
tive case of an English preposition. The latter are subdivided into two
classes.
}
He (any one) who practises virtue is | Celui qui pratique la vertu est heureux.
happy.
They (all ladies) who study French
have the book of him who is sick.
1 See note 1, preceding page.
2 See note 2, preceding page.
•
Celles qui étudient le Français.
•
J'ai le livre de celui qui est malade.
472
GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS.
45.-The 1st class includes those which, in a single word, express both
the preposition and the pronoun. Ex.: To him, is expressed in French by
the single word lui, (Dir. 2); to her, by the same word, lui; to them, by
the single word leur; of it, of them, by (§ 47) en, &c.
$ 46.-The 2d class includes those that are attended by a preposition
expressed. Ex.: For her, pour elle; with them, avec eux, avec elles; with-
out me, sans moi; to me, à moi; of me, de moi.
§ 47.—OBJECTIVE PRONOUNS.-Pronoms Objectifs ou Régimes.
MONOSYLLABLES.
Before the verB, except with the Imperative commanding.
Direct objectives. Régimes directs. Indirect objectives. Régimes indirects.
To me,
To thee,
1. Me,
me, m'.
2. Thee,
te, t'.
3.m. Him,
le, l'.
f. Her,
la, l'.
n. It,
le, la, l'.
1.
Us,
nous.
2.
You,
vous.
3. m. Them,
les.
f. Them,
n. Them,
les.
les.
To him, f. of, from him,
me, m'.
te, t'.
m. lui, en.
To you,
To her, of, from her (persons),
To it,there,of it, from it (things), n.
To us,
To them, of them,
ƒ. lui,
en.
y; en.
nous.
vous.
m. leur, en.
To them, from them,
f. leur, en.
To them, of them (things),
n. Y, en.
$47. Pronouns having, by themselves, a definite signification, ought
never to represent a noun taken in an indefinite sense, that is, a noun used
without article or without some limiting word.
When, then, the question, Parlez-vous Français ? is answered by, je le
parle, that le relates to a word used without any limiting article; hence, the
answer seems incorrect. It is correct, however; but the question ought to
be, Parlez-vous le Français ? using the article after parlez-vous, in the same
manner as it is used after étudiez-vous, apprenez-vous, lisez-vous, &c.
Custom, nevertheless. rejects le after the verb parler. (26¹.)
$48.-AFTER THE VERB.
In the Imperative commanding.
Direct objectives. Régimes directs.
APRÈS LE VERBE.
À l'Impératif commandant.
Indirect objectives. Régimes indirects.
1.
Me,
moi.
To me,
2.
Thee,
toi.
To thee,
moi.
toi.
3. m. Him,
le.
To him,
of him, lui,
en.
f. Her,
la,
n. It,
le, la.
To her,
To it,
of her,
lui,
en.
of it,
y,
en.
1.
2.
mi ci
Us,
nous.
To us,
nous.
You,
vous.
To you,
vous.
3. m. Them,
les.
To them, of them, leur,
en.
f. Them,
les.
n. Them,
les.
To them, of them, leur,
To them, of them, y,
en.
en.
$49. Any objective pronoun followed by a verb in the infinitive mood,
Ex.: I wish you to come, must be turned to I wish that you would come,
requiring, in French, the subjunctive nood: Je désire que vous veniez.
GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS.
473
$ 50. When the English objective pronoun it or them, alone, or governed
by in, with, of, or any other English preposition, is to be translated by a
French verb requiring the preposition a, use y. Il y répond; he answers
à,
it il y réussit; he succeeds in it: il y pense; he thinks of it. The
verbs répondre, réussir, penser, requiring à, the English pronoun it, by
itself, or with any English preposition, must be translated by y. (§ 48.)
And by en, if the French verb requires the preposition de. Il en est
fâché; he is sorry for it on l'en blâme; he is blamed for it; on en
doute; they doubt it. (§ 48.)
We have seen (1¹, &c.) nouns connected with the definite article; to
replace them, when used in the objective case, they require a definite pro-
noun; in English it or them; in French, le, la, les. I have it; je l'ai: I
have them; je les ai. (§ 48.)
We have seen (12¹, 2, § 4, &c.) nouns connected with the indefinite or par-
titive article; to replace them, when used in the objective case, they require
an indefinite or partitive pronoun; in English, some, or any of it, of them,
in French, en, meaning, of the thing or things, person or persons spoken of.
As, in French, the article is never left out, neither is the pronoun en ever
omitted.
PLACE OF THE OBJECTIVES. PRONOUNS.
The direct and indirect of a single word, or monosyllable.
◊ 51.-RULE 1st. When the verb has but one régime direct, or indirect
($47,) or else one double régime, (§ 57,) that régime goes before the verb
except in one mood, ($$ 54, 64.)
When it has several objectives, (§ 56.)
I give.
I see my friend.
I give you.
I see him.
I have given an apple away.
I have given an apple to her.
He is devoted to her.
Je donne.
Je vois mon ami.
Je vous donne.
Je le vois.
J'ai donné une pomme.
Je lui ai donné une pomme.
Il lui est dévoué.
§ 51. The objective noun is always placed after the verb, as in Eng-
lish; but not the pronoun. And the preposition which governs the noun is
never understood in French, although it is frequently left out in English.
As: Give John an apple; for, Give an apple to John. Donnez une pomme
à Jean. Follow this last construction. (Dir. 4.)
◊ 52.-When the verb to have, or to be, is used as auxiliary, the objec-
tive pronoun is always placed before it; never after: that is, not imme-
diately before the past participle. Ex.: translate I have seen you, by: Je
vous ai vu (1 you have seen), placing vous before ai, and not by j'ai vous vu,
vous being wrongly placed after ai, and immediately before the past part.
I have had it; Je l'ai eu; not J'ai l'eu.
vu.
He spoke to them, (he to them spoke.) | Il leur parla.
He has spoken to them, (he to them
has.)
Il leur a parlé, (not il a leur parlé.)
§ 53.-HINT. He spoke to them (English imperfect tense), may be trans
40*
474
GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS.
lated by il leur parla, the French prétérit, (§ 153,) or else by il leur a parle,
French parfait, (§ 145,) corresponding to the perfect tense of the English con-
jugation. The latter is the tense generally used in colloquial intercourse,
by the French.
Did he lend it to you? (you it did
he? &c.)
He lent it to me, (he to me, &c.)
I will not speak to them, (I not to
them, &c.)
If you want the book, I must not
keep it any longer.
He was afraid I would not lend it to
him, (I not it to him, &c.)
He amuses himself.
It is impossible for me to go, (it to me.)
Vous le prêta-t-il ? ou mieux,
Vous l'a-t-il prêté ?
Il me le prêta; ou il me l'a prêté.
Je ne leur parlera pas.
Si vous voulez le livre, il ne faut pas
que je le garde plus long-temps.
Il avait peur que je ne le lui prê.
tasse pas.
Il se divertit.
Il m'est impossible d'y aller.
◊ 54.-2d. The objective pronouns are placed after the imperative mood,
commanding or used affirmatively, except in the 3d person sing. and plur.
Give it to me. Ex.: Donnez-moi. Donnez-le-moi.
Ex.: Give me.
Let me speak. Let me see.
Let us send them one.
Dress thyself. Boast of it.
But, in the 3d person, place it before:
Let him give it to me.
Let them speak to them.
Laissez-moi parler. Laissez-
moi voir.
Envoyons-leur-en un.
Habille-toi. Vante-t'en
Qu'il me le donne.
Qu'ils leur parlent.
Exception. When two imperatives are joined by the conjunction and,
the objective pronoun connected with the second verb is frequently
placed before it, although the mood is affirmative; as: Cherchez ma canne,
et me l'apportez, instead of: et apportez-la-moi. Look for my cane, and
bring it to me. Both ways are correct, ($150-12.)
§ 55. But when the imperative mood forbids or is used negatively, they
are placed before, according to Rule 1st.
Do not give me.
Do not give it to
me.
Let us not send them away.
Let me not speak.
Ne me donnez pas. Ne me le don-
nez pas.
Ne les envoyons pas.
Ne me laissez pas parler.
Do not dress thyself. Do not boast Ne t'habille pas. Ne t'en vante pas.
of it.
Do not take them.
Do not (thou) disturb me.
Send her but two.
Send them nothing.
Do not trust to it.
Ne les prenez pas.
Ne me dérange pas.
Ne leur envoyez rien
Ne lui en envoyez que deux.
Ne vous y fiez pas.
Ne vous en vantez pas.
Do not boast of it.
Do not deceive yourself.
Ne vous trompez point.
GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS.
475
And in the 3d person, also before.
Let him not give it to me.
Let them not speak to her.
Qu'il ne me le donne pas.
Qu'ils ne lui parlent pas.
§ 56.-3d. When the French objective pronoun is attended with a preposi-
tion expressed, they both (that is, the preposition and the pronoun) go after
the verb, and the preposition must be repeated before every pronoun. Ex.:
Venez (or viens) avec moi.
Come with me.
I cannot go without you.
He speaks of him, you, and them.
We speak of her and her sister.
Does he not speak of them too?
Yes, he speaks of him, her, them, you,
and of me also.
Do you think of me or him?
Do not apply o her nor to him, but to
me. ($64-2.)
Je ne peux y aller sans vous.
Il parle de lui, de vous, et d'eux.
Nous parlons d'elle et de sa sœur.
Ne parle-t-il pas d'eux aussi ?
Si fait, il parle de lui, d'elle, d'eux,
de vous, et de moi aussi.
Pensez-vous à moi ou à lui ?
Ne vous adressez ni à elle, ni à lut,
mais à moi.
I will apply neither to her, nor to him, Je ne m'adresserai ni à elle, ni à lui,
but to you.
mais à vous.
DOUBLE OBJECTIVE PRONOUNS.-Doubles Régimes.
$57.-MONOSYLLABLES. AVANT LE VERBE.
It to me, me it, them to me.
It to thee, thee it, them to
thee.
It to him,
It to her,
them to him.
them to her.
It to us,
them to us.
Régimes directs et indirects.
§ 58.-APRES L'IMPÉRATIf.
Me le, me la, me l', me les. [ -le-moi, -la-moi, -les-moi
Te le, te la, te l', te les.
-te-le, -te-la, -te-les.
-le-lui, -la-lui, -les-lui.
| Le lui, la lui, les lui.
Le lui, la lui, les lui.
Nous le, nous la, l', nous-le-nous, -la-nous, -les-
les.
It to you,you it, them to you.lt Vous le, vous la, l', vous
It to them,
les.
them to them. Le leur, la leur, les leur.
hem.
BEFORE THE VERB.
Singular.
Me to it, there,
AVANT LE VERBE.
Singulier.
m'y.
t'y.
-le-lui, -la-lui, -les-lui.
nous.
-le-leur, -la-leur, -les-leur.
AFTER THE VERB.
Singular.
Me to it, there,
APRES LE VERBE.
Singulier.
y moi.
It to it, there,
Thee to it, there,
Him to it, there,
l'y.
Him to it, there,
l'y.
Her to it, there,
l'y.
Her to it, there,
l'y.
l'y.
It to it, there,
l'y.
y.
. Jean.
Pluriel.
John there, to it,
Plural.
y Jean.
Pluriel.
nous y.
Joan there, to it,
Plural.
Us to it, there,
You to it, there,
Them to it, there,
My friends there,
vous y.
les y.
y.... mes amis.
nous y.
vous y.
les y.
y mes amis.
N. B. When the pronouns are both of the 3d person, as: It to him, them
to him, it to them, them to them, they have the same order in French, viz:
le lui, les lui, le leur, les leur; but when the pronouns are of different
persons, 1st and 3d, or 2d and 3d, reverse the English order, and instead of:
it to me, it to you, &c., say: to me it, to you it, &c., me le, vous le, &c.
1
476
GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS.
LE VERBE.
Singulier.
}
t'en.
lui en.
§ 59.-PERSONAL AND PARTITIVE.-Personnels et Partitifs.
$60.-AVANT $61.-APRÈS
BEFORE AND AFTER AVANI ET APRÈS
THE VERB.
Singular.
Me, some, or any, (§ 62,)
Some to me, or any to m'en.
me,
Thee some, some to thee,
Some to him, him some,
LE VERBE.
Sing.
Sing.
Me some there, m'y en,
Some to me,
y-en-moi.
Thee some there,
t'y en.
Him some there,
lui y en,
y en lui
Seme to her, her some,
lui en.
Her some there,
lui y en,
John
some, some to John,
en (the verb) à Some to J. there,
y en ....
y en lui.
à Jean.
Jean.
Plural.
Pluriel.
Plural.
Pluriel.
Seme to us, us some.
nous-en.
Us some there,
nous-y-en,
y-en-
some to us,
nous.
vous-en.
You some there,
vous-y-en.
You some, some to you,
Them some, some to them, leur-en.
Them some there, leur-y-en, y-en-leur.
§ 62.-Some, in English, is used for the affirmation, and any for the
interrogation and negation; and consequently en corresponds both to some
and any.
Ex.: I have some, (of a thing referred | Ex.: J'en ai.
to.)
Have you any? He has not
given me any.
En avez-vous? Il ne m'en a
pas donné.
◊ 63.-OBJECTIVE PRONOUNS;
With a preposition always placed after the verb, as in English
Singular.
Singulier.
A moi, (§ 611,)de moi, (§ 641,)près de moi.
To me,
To thee,
To him,
of him, from him, without him.
To her,
of, from her, for her.
To one's self, of one's self, towards one.
from me, of me, near me.
from or of thee, far from thee.
A toi,
de toi,
A lui,
de lui,
A elle,
d'elle,
A soi,
de soi,
translated
loin de toi.
sans lui.
pour e le.
envers soi
To it, of it, from it, with it, are not
Plural.
from or of us,
A nous,
with us.
before you.
after them.
A vous,
To us,
To you,
of, from you,
To them, from, of them,
To them, from, of them, in the midst of
them.
after the verb.
Pluriel.
de nous, avec nous.
de vous, avant vous.
après eux.
A eux, (§ 642,) d'eux,
A elles, (§ 642,) d'elles, au milieu d'elles.
À eux, à elles, &c., apply to persons, not to things.
§ 64.-1. Moi, toi, lui, elle, &c., connected with the two prepositions d
and de, are only used after some verbs, such as:
Présenter à,
Penser à, (742)
Accourir à, (64³,)
Se fier à, (622,)
Se souvenir de, (512,)
To introduce to.
He thinks of me.
She hastened to us.
Do you trust them?
He remembers you.
Quand me présenterez
vous à lui?
Il pense à moi.
Elle accourut à nous.
Vous fiez-vous à eux ?
Il se souvient de vous.
GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS
477
In other instances, to me, to him, &c.: of me, of them, &c., must be trans
lated as directed (54).
Renoncer à....
Compter sur.
Se souvenir de
• ►
Se ressouvenir de...
Penser à ....
Accourir à .
Se fier à .
•
S'en tenir à ...
S'en rapporter à ...
Se méfier de ...
•
Se défier de
S'adresser à.
Se plaindre de
2. When there are two or more objective cases connected with the same
verb. Do you speak to me? Me parlez-vous? Me is placed before,
because there is but one objective case; but, as in the following answer,
there are more than one object, say: I speak to you, to him, and his brother;
je parle à vous, à lui, et à son frère. The three objective cases coming
after the verb, the preposition à must be used and repeated before each,
($56.)
§ 65.—But when the preposition is expressed in French, whether it be d,
de, sans, avec, &c., both the preposition and pronoun come after the verb,
($ 56.)
§ 66.-REFLECTIVE PRONOUNS. (43¹.)
Fully to explain this subject, we will give it a new form. The French
Reflective Verbs, Verbes Réfléchis, may be divided into three classes.
$67.-1st CLASS. Those that admit of one direct, but of no indirect
objective. Ex.: I dress myself.
◊ 68.-2d CLASS. Those which, beside the direct, admit also of an indi-
rect objective, governed by the preposition à. Ex.: I apply myself to
study.
◊ 69.-3d CLASS. Those in which the indirect objective is governed by
the preposition de. Ex.: I blame myself for that action.
§ 70.-Observe that when the indirect objective is a noun, it goes after
the verb, as in English; but, when the indirect objective is the pronoun
it or them, that pronoun is incorporated with the French preposition à or
de, and both are expressed by a single word, placed as directed (§ 50, $ 54,
and following.) Hence there are three classes of
§ 71.-REFLECTIVE PRONOUNS.-Pronoms Réfléchis.
1st CLASS. No indirect objective.
Myself,
Thyself,
Himself,
me, m'. To cure myself,
te, t'.
me guérir.
To cure thyself,
te guérir.
Herself,
se, s'.
se, s'
To cure himself,
se guérir,
To cure herself,
se guérir.
Ourselves,
nous.
To cure ourselves,
nous guérir.
Yourselves, vous.
Themselves, se, s'.
One's self,
se, y³,
To dress mys., m'habiller
To dress thys., t'habiller.
To dress hims., s'habiller
To dress hersf. s'habiller.
To dress ours., nous habi.
ler.
To cure yourselves, vous guérir. To dress yours., vcus habıl-
To cure themselves, se guérir,
To cure one's self, xe guérir,
ier.
To dress thems..s'habiller.
To dress one's, s'nabiller.
1
478
GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS.
72.-2d CLASS. With the preposition à. When the objective pronoun
it, or them, alone, or governed by any English preposition, is to be trans-
lated by a French reflective verb, requiring the preposition à, translate as
follows:-
Myself to it,
m'y.
(Thyself) into it, t'y.
(Himself) to it,them, s'y.
it
with them,
I apply myself to it.
Thou glidest into it.
He opposes it, them.
She understands it.
She is acquainted with
them.
s'y.
it,
nous y.
We expect it.
to them,
vousy.
Go to them.
to it,
nous y.
Let us submit to it.
to it,
} s'y.
in them.
They retired to it.
They withdrew in them.
◊ 73.-3d CLASS. With the preposition de.
}
Je m'y applique.
Tu t'y glisses.
Il s'y oppose.
Elle s'y connait.
Nous nous y attendons
Rendez-vous-y.
Soumettons-nous-y.
Ils s'y retirèrent.
When the objective pro-
noun it, or them, alone, or governed by any English preposition, is to be
translated by a French reflective verb, requiring the preposition de, trans-
late as follows:-
Myself of it,
m'en.
at it,
at it,
with them,}
t'en.
s'en.
it, them, s'en.
upon it, nous en.
I assured myself of it.
Thou wilt wonder at it.
He takes offence at it.
He is displeased with
them.
She remembers it, them.
We can seize upon it.
vous en.
Do you laugh at it?
at it,
about it, s'en.
to it,
s'en.
}
Je m'en assurai.
Tu t'en étonneras.
Il s'en offense.
Elle s'on souvient.
Nous pouvons nous en
saisir.
Vous en moquez-vous ?
They do not care about it. Ils ne s'en soucient pas.
They attend to it.
Elles s'en occupent.
74. It is evident, from the examples above, that the use of the French
pronouns m'y, t'y, &c., m'en, t'en, &c., does not depend on the English pre-
position used, but on the French one, which is incorporated with the pronoun.
When the French verb requires à, you must use, m'y, t'y, &c. When it
requires de, use m'en, t'en, &c. But no such incorporation takes place, if
the French preposition is avec, pour, sans, &c., instead of de or à.
RELATIVE PRONOUNS.-Pronoms Relatifs.
75.-NOMINATIVES,
Who, that,
which, whoever.
The man who speaks.
The lady that smiles.
The hat which becomes you.
Whoever (who) studies, improves.
NOMINATIF. Qui,
L'homme qui parle.
La dame qui sourit.
Le chapeau qui vous convient.
Qui étudio, fait des progrès.
$76.-The nominative relative pronoun is never understood in English
aor in French.
§ 77.—OBJECTIVE. Without a pre-
position.
Whom, that, which, (§ 81.)
RÉGIME. Sans préposition.
Que, qu'.
GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS.
479
78.-The objective relative pronoun is frequently left out in English,
but never in French.
The gentleman (whom) you call.
The girl (that) he admires.
The history (which) you relate.
§ 79.-OBJECTIVE. With a prepo-
sition.
Of whom,
whom,
Le monsieur que vous appelez.
La fille qu'il admire.
L'histoire que vous racontez.
RÉGIME. Avec une préposition.
Sing. De qui, dont, duquel, de laquelle,
desquels, desquelles.
auquel,
à laquelle.
auxquels, auxquelles.
Pour qui, pour lequel, pour laquelle.
of which.
Plur.
To whom,
to which.
S.
À qui,
whom,
to which.
P.
For whom,
for which.
S.
P.
From whom, from which.
S.
P.
With whom,
with which.
S.
P.
desquels, desquelles.
Avec qui, avec lequel, avec laquelle.
avec lesquels, avec lesquelles.
6.6
pour lesquels, pour lesquelles.
De qui, dont, duquel, de laquelle.
$ 80.-Although the pronoun can be omitted, and the preposition trans-
posed, in English, it cannot be in French.
The man of whom we speak, or
the man whom we speak of, or
the man we speak of.
The woman we speak of.
The employer she works for.
L'homme de qui nous parlons, ou
l'homme dont nous parlons, ou
l'homme du quel nous parlons.
La femme de qui, ou dont, ou de
laquelle nous parlons.
Le patron pour qui (ou lequel) elle
travaille.
$81.-When the relative whom, or that, or which, is immediately pre-
ceded by its antecedent, it is never translated by lequel, laquelle, &c., but
by que. In this case, it may be omitted in English, but never in French.
The cases (which) you have men-
tioned.
The ideas he has suggested.
Les cas que vous avez mentionnés.
Les idées qu'il a suggérées.
The statesmen (whom) he employed. | Les hommes d'état qu'il employa.
§ 82.-But, when which is separated from its antecedent, translate by
lequel, laquelle, &c.; not by que.
He told me which he wanted.
I know which will suit him.
I know whom she prefers.
This is a plant found in America,
which is worthy of attention.
§
Il me dit lequel il voulait.
Je sais laquelle lui conviendra.
Je sais lequel elle préfère.
C'est une plante trouvée en Amé
rique, laquelle mérite attention.
83.-In this case, which means which one, and cannot be omitted, even
In English.
$84.-Except in similar sentences, the French words lequel, laquelle,
&c., which, which one, are interrogative, and not relative pronouns, if
smployed without a preposition.
430
GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS.
$ 85.-Qui, nominative, relates to persons and things.
A qui, de qui, pour qui, &c., (or qui, with any preposition,) relates to
persons only.
The man (the book) which suits him.
Without whom are you going?
L'homme (le livre) qui lui convient.
Sans qui allez-vous ?
§ 86.-Dont, duquel, de laquelle, &c., relate to persons and things.
The child (the dog) whose name you | L'enfant (le chien) dont (duquel) vous
know.
The grammar you spoke to me of.
WHICH, meaning which one, or the
Celui qui, (nom.)
Celle qui,
celui que, (obj.)
celle que.
I know which one he speaks of.
I spoke to her he admires.
He sees the one you speak to.
savez le nom.
La grammaire dont (de laquelle) vouя
avez parlé.
one which, is translated by:
Ceux qui, (nom.)
Celles qui,
celles que, (obj.)
celles que.
Je sais celle dont il parle.
Je parlai à celle qu'il admire.
Il voit celui auquel vous parlez.
$87.-1. The one in the garden: which is is evidently understood, but it
must be expressed in French. Then say, Celui qui est dans le jardin, never
Celui dans, &c.
I know which is first, (that is, which Je sais celui qui est premier.
one, or the one which.)
Je sais celle qui est première..
Je sais celui que
I know which (which one, or the one)
you will choose.
Je sais celle que
Je sais ceux que
vous choisirez.
Speaking of a house:
Can you guess which will suit me?
Can you guess which I have taken ?
Je sais celles que
Pouvez-vous deviner celle qui me
conviendra ?
Pouvez-vous deviner celle que j'ai
prise ?
2. The one, or those, followed by a preposition or present participle, generally
means, that which is, (sing.,) those which are, (plur.) The one on the table.
Here, the one evidently means that which is, and must be translated by:
Those in the vessel,
celui qui est.
ceux qui sont.
The one coming,
Those speaking,
celui qui vient.
ceux qui parlent.
3. When a nominative case is immediately followed by a preposition or par-
ticiple, as the relative pronoun and verb are then understood in English, they
must be supplied in French. (§ 39, N. B.)
The broom on the floor. The man Le balai qui est sur le plancher.
sweeping.
L'homme qui balaie.
The boy caught is innocent (who has Le garçon qui a été pris est innocent.
been.)
4. What is, (that which is,) as relative, when followed by a preposition, is
translated by, ce qu'il y a, (472, Obs. 108,) or any other tense of the same
verb.
GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS.
481
I know what is in that trunk.
Where is what was in my desk?
Je sais ce qu'il y a dans cette malle.
Où est ce qu'il y avait dans mon
pupitre ?
$88.-DONT. French relative, indirect object, is followed by a nomina-
tive case in French, whether it is so in English or not.
The country whose government Le pays dont le gouvernement vous
pleases you.
plaît.
The country whose government you Le pays dont vous admirez le gou-
admire.
I know her (the one) he speaks of.
I do not trust the man whose horse
you have borrowed.
vernement.
Je connais celle dont il parle.
Je ne me fie pas à l'homme dont vous
avez emprunté le cheval.
And not, dont le cheval vous avez emprunté.
The construction would be the same, if, in English, of whom was used
stead of whose. As: The man of whom you have borrowed the horse.
$89.-The compound relative pronoun WHAT, without a preposition.
What is called a compound relative pronoun when it means that which,
and is translated by, ce qui, when nominative, and ce que, when objec-
tive.
Ex.:
I know what will suit.
I know what you say.
Je sais ce qui conviendra.
ce
Je sais ce que vous dites.
$ 90.— Which has sometimes a clause of a sentence for its antecedent; in
such a case the French consider it as equivalent to the compound relative
what, and translate it as above, by ce qui or ce que. Ex.:
He went away, which grieved us.
The law is such, which you know.
Il s'en alla, ce qui nous chagrina.
La loi est telle, ce que vous savez.
$91.—All that, or the single word all, meaning all that which, is often used
as a relative pronoun, and translated all that by tout ce qui, (nom.,) and
generally all by tout ce que, (obj.)
You know all that which is wanted.
I know all that will suit.
I know all you say.
Vous savez tout ce qui est nécessaire.
Je sais tout ce qui conviendra.
Je sais tout ce que vous dites.
After all, the word which, or that which, may be omitted in English, as
shown above, but ce qui or ce que must always be expressed in French.
(92.-WHAT, governed by a preposition, when that preposition can be
transposed.
For what or what.
•
fcr.
•
Of what or what (is he speaking) of.
To what or what
From what or what
In what or what.
•
•
<
to.
from.
•
•
•
•
•
•
in.
with.
Pour quoi
De quoi.
À quoi
De quoi.
Dans quoi
•
+
... ce pour quoi.
... ce dont. (§ 93.)
• • · •
ce à quoi.
... ce dont. (§ 93.)
... ce dans quoi.
With what or what.
Avec quoi. ce avec quoi.
•
$33.-When the preposition of, governing what, is rendered in French by
de, ce dont is more generally used than de quoi.
41
482
GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS.
I know what he speaks of.
Je sais de quoi, (mieux) ce dont il
parle.
Il sait ce dont j'ai besoin.
Dites-moi ce à quoi vous pensez.
Sait-il pourquoi je n'y vais pas ?
Je vais vous dire ce avec quoi je vais
le faire.
He knows what I have need of.
Tell me what you are thinking of.
Does he know why I do not go there?
I will tell you what I am going to do
it with.
$94.-In the third example, the preposition of, connected with the parti-
ciple thinking, is not translated by the French preposition de, but by à;
because the verb penser requires à and not de, (and, as we have already
noticed, ($ 50,) it is the French preposition that must be attended to, and not
the English.) Accordingly, ce dont cannot be used, but ce à quoi, as in the
example.
It will easily be noticed that when what is governed by any other prep
sition than de, that preposition is placed between ce and quoi. Ex.:
This is what he applies to.
C'est ce à quoi il s'applique.
We know what he is running after. Nous savons ce après quoi il court.
$95.—English grammarians say that the preposition ought not to be sepa
rated from the pronoun it governs, and that in, I know what he speaks of,
the preposition of ought to be placed before what, instead of being placed at
the end of the sentence, and that the correct expression is, I know of what
he speaks.
Yet general custom disregards that rule, and the preposition usually ends
the sentence as exemplified here. In French, however, the preposition
cannot be transposed: it must always precede the pronoun, as shown in the
above examples.
§ 96.—WHAT, connected with the preposition of or to, changes its meaning
according to the place of the preposition.
$97.—Of what, meaning of that which, de ce qui, (nominatif,) de ce que,
(rég.). (The English preposition cannot be transposed.)
He speaks of what was found.
| Il parle de ce qui fut trouvé.
It would not be correct to say, what was found of.
He speaks of what I know.
| Il parle de ce que je sais.
§ 98.—To what, meaning, to that which, à ce qui, (nom.,) à ce que, (rég.
No transposition in English.
You apply to what is useful.
Attend to what I tell you.
§ 99.— What ... of, meaning that
What you speak of is not just.
You do not know what I informed
him of.
Vous vous appliquez à ce qui est utile.
Faites attention à ce que je vous dis.
of which, ce dont ... ce de quoi.
Ce dont vous parlez n'est pas juste,
(ce de quoi.)
Vous ne savez pas ce dont je l'in.
formai.
§ 100.-What... to, meaning that to which, ce à quoi, à quoi.
I see what he pretends to.
Je vois ce à quoi il prétend, (cu, à
quoi.)
Who knows what he applies himself Qui sait à quoi (ou ce à quoi) il s'ap-
to.
plique.
GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS.
483
$101..-What of it? is an irregular expression, translated by Qu'en
résulte-t-il ?
What of his opinion!
Qu'importe son opinion!
$ 102.- PERSONAL PRONOUNS CONNECTED WITH THE
RELATIVES, governed by prepositions.
I to whom, I whose.
Thou of whom, thou whose.
He of whom, he whose.
She from whom.
He or the one without whom.
She or the one without whom.
The person of whom, (from whom.)
The thing of which.
The object for which.
Julius after whom.
Clara after whom.
We to whom.
You of whom, or whose.
They from whom. (m.)
They from whom. (f.)
They for whom. (m.)
They near whom. (f.)
Moi à qui, moi auquel, moi à laqueìle.
Toi de qui, toi dont, toi duquel, toi de
laquelle.
Lui de qui, lui dont, lui duquel.
Elle de qui, elle dont, elle de laquelle.
Celui sans qui, celui sans lequel.
Celle sans qui, celle sans laquelle.
La personne de qui, dont, de laquelle.
La chose de laquelle.
L'objet pour lequel.
Jules après qui, après lequel.
Clara après qui, après laquelle.
Nous à qui, nous auxquels, auxquelles.
Vous de qui, vous dont, desquels, &c.
Eux de qui, eux dont, eux desquels.
Elles de qui, elles dont, elles desquelles.
Ceux pour qui, ceux pour lesquels.
Celles près de qui, près desquelles.
Those in the midst of which. (m.) Ceux au milieu de qui, desquels.
Those, far from which. (f.)
Celles loin de qui, loin desquelles.
$103.-POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS.
They are generally divided into two classes: 1st. Those which are always
connected with nouns, viz: my, thy, his, her, its, our, your, their. As these
never take the place of nouns, they will be found under the head of Posses-
sive Articles. (§ 30, 31, 32.)
$ 104.-2d. Those which, taking the place of nouns, are properly called
pronouns.
Whose thimble is this?
À qui est ce dé?
les miens,
C'est le mien.
les miennes.
It is mine.
Mine,
le mien,
la mienne,
Thine,
le tien,
la tienne,
les tiens,
les tiennes.
His,
le sien,
la sienne,
les siens,
les siennes.
Hers,
le sien,
la sienne,
les siens,
les siennes.
Its,
le sien,
la sienne,
les siens,
les siennes.
le nôtre,
la nôtre,
le vôtre,
la vôtre,
le leur,
Ours,
Yours,
Theirs,
The priest's, celui du prêtre,
The friend's, celui de l'ami,
Mr. Petit's, celui de M. P.,
To mine,
au mien,
la leur,
celle du prêtre,
celle de l'ami,
celle de M. P.,
à la mienne, aux miens,
ceux du prêtre, celles du p.
ceux de l'ami, celles de l'ami.
ceux de M. P., celles de M. P.
aux miennes.
les nôtres,
les nôtres.
les vôtres,
les vôtres.
·les leurs,
les leurs.
404
GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS.
Of,from mine, du mien,
de la mienne, des miens, des miennes.
With mine, avec le mien, avec la mienne, avec les miens, avec les miennes
Near mine, près du mien, près de la m., près des miens, près des m.
As to mine, quant au mien, quant à la m., aux miens, aux miennes.
$105. The above pronouns are used as objectives and nominatives with
every verb, and even after the verb être, to be, when the personal frɔnoun
ce is nominative before,
Give me mine.
Yours looks well.
Where is his, theirs, ours?
Ours are here, and his also.
It is theirs, (ce being nom. before.)
It was not mine, but thine.
Is it hers, yours, mine, or theirs?
Are they yours or ours? ($ 39.)
Donnez-moi le mien.
Le vôtre a bonne mine.
Où est le sien, le leur, le nôtre ?
Le nôtre est ici, et le sien aussi.
C'est le leur. (§ 39.)
Ce n'était pas le mien, mais le tien.
Est-ce le sien, le vôtre, le mien, le
leur ?
Sont-ce les vôtres ou les nôtres ?
◊ 106.-But when être, to be, has for its nominative either a noun or the
pronoun il, elle, ils, elles, the French do not use the above pronouns, but
the following:
/
Plural.
Yours, à vous.
Theirs, à eux. (m.) Theirs, à elles. (ƒ.)
Singular.
Mine, à moi.
Thine, à toi.
Ours, a nous.
His, à lui.
Hers, à elle.
John's, à Jean.
Whose, à qui.
My brothers'.
Whose book is this?
It is mine.
Whose pen is that?
It is thine.
Whose gloves are these?
They are hers.
Whose boots are those?
They are his.
Are they Mr. Lebon's?
No, they are not his.
Whose are they?
I do not know whose they are.
Is this yours?
That is mine.
À mes frères.
À qui est ce livre ?
Il est à moi.
À qui est cette plume-là ?
Elle est à toi.
À qui sont ces gants?
Ils sont à elle.
À qui sont ces bottes-là ?
Elles sont à lui.
Sont-elles à M. Lebon?
Elles ne sont pas à lui.
À qui sont-elles?
Je ne sais pas à qui elles sont.
Ceci est-il à vous? Est-ce à vous?
Cela est à moi.
C'est a moi.
₫ 107.-The expression a book of mine, a friend of hers, &c., is frequently
used in English.
The French do not use this phraseology, but say,
One of her friends. Une de ses amies.
A
One of my books.
Un de mes livres.
A book of mine.
Un de mes livres.
A pen of ours.
A book of thine.
Un de tes livres.
A book of his, hers. Un de ses livres.
A friend of John's, is expressed by
A... of yours.
A... of theirs.
Une de nos plumes,
Une de vos....
Une de leurs..
Un des amis de Jean, or
Une des amies de Jean.
108.-When, instead of a book of mine, the English use, this, that
..
GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS.
485
these, or those, saying, this book of mine, those gloves of hers, &c., nc
regular French can be given of them, except using the possessive article. ($31.)
This book of mine is spoiled.
I'hase pills of his cure the headache.
Mon livre est gâté.
{Ce
Ce livre, qui m'appartient, est gâté.
Ces pilules, de son invention, guéris-
{S sent le mal de tête, sa cont de fête.
Ses pilules guérissent le mal de tête.
109.-WHOSE, possessive pronoun, requires a particular explanation.
It is used in English in two different ways. 1st. When it means to whom,
translate by à qui.
1. I, whose horse this is, means, I, to
whom this horse belongs.
Whose book is this? or, to whom does
this book belong?
2. I, whose horse you have.
Here, whose means not I, to whom, but
I, of whom you have the horse.
Whose opinion do you adopt?
|
Moi, à qui ce cheval est ou appar.
tient.
à qui est ce livre ? ou à qui oe livre
appartient-il?
Moi, dont vous avez le cheval.
Moi, de qui vous avez le cheval.
De qui adoptez-vous l'opinion?
$110.-2d. WHOSE, governed by a preposition.
Of whose title, or the title of whom. | Du titre de qui, duquel, de la-
To whose name, to the name of
whom.
quelle, &c.
Au nom de qui, duquel, desquels,
&c.
From whose race, from the race of De la race de qui, duquel, des-
whom.
In whose states.
For whose daughter.
Through whose hands.
Under whose protection.
quelles.
Dans les états de qui,de laquelle, &c.
Pour la fille de qui, &c.
Par la main de qui.
Sous la protection duquel, de la
quelle, &c.
INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS.
1
$111.—Who? (nom.) Whom? (obj.) | Qui? (nom.) Qui? (régime.) (21¹.)
Who is good?
Whom do you see? Qui est bon ?
Qui voyez-vous ?
Qui never loses its i, say then, qui y va? not Qu'y va? Who goes there?
Qui aimez-vous ? Whom do you like? and not Qu'aimez-vous, which means
What do you like?
$112.-WHAT or WHICH? 1st. When connected with a noun ex-
pressed, is translated by the interrogative articles or adjectives, ($ 1,) quel,
quels, quelle, quelles.
What government do you prefer?
What is the authority of the mayor'?
What or which articles has he sent ?
What or which plants do you prefer?
Quel gouvernement préférez-vous ?
Quelle est l'autorité du maire ?
Quels articles a-t-il envoyés ?
Quelles plantes préférez-vous ?
$113.-2d. WHAT, interrogative, meaning what thing, when not con
41*
486
GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS.
nected with a noun, but with a verb, (21,) is translated by que, qu', ou quella
chose. 114.) It is then objective to the verb, and placed before it. ($ 115.)
What (what thing) do you prefer?
What does the mayor?
What (what things) has he sent ?
$ 114.-Or else by qu'est-ce que ?
What do you prefer?
What does the mayor?
What has he sent ?
Que préférez-vous ?
Que fait le maire ?
Qu'a-t-il envoyé ?
(28¹.)
Qu'est-ce que vous préférez ?
Qu'est-ce que le maire fait ?
Qu'est-ce qu'il a envoyé ?
Then the verb retains the affirmative form, because the interrogation is
found in Qu'est-ce que...?
§ 115.-When placed after the verb, it is translated, not by que, but
by quoi, (21¹,) and the verb retains, as in English, the affirmative form.
What does the mayor ?
The mayor does what?
What does he say?
What has he sent ?
what?
say? He says what?
He has sent
Que fait le maire ?
Le maire fait quoi ?
Que dit-il?
Il dit quor?
Qu'a-t-il envoyé ?
Il a envoyé
quoi?
§ 116.-3d. WHAT, when nominative to a verb, is translated by:
Qu'est-ce qui ?
What pleases you?
What is agreeable?
What makes you laugh?
What grieves that child?
Qu'est-ce qui vous plaît ?
Qu'est-ce qui est agréable?
Qu'est-ce qui vous fait rire ?
Qu'est-ce qui chagrine cet enfant ?
$117.-4th. What, unconnected with a noun, and governed by a prepo-
sition, is expressed by quoi. (R. 6.)
What is he speaking of? That is:
Of what is he speaking? (211.)
What is she going to draw with?
What does the child cry for? (for
what?)
What is she thinking of? (of what?)
To what does he apply? He applies
to reading, writing, and arithmetic.
There is in it something pleasing.
I have enough (wherewith) to live upon,
It is sufficient (enough) to frighten
him.
|
De quoi parle-t-il ?
Avec quoi va-t-elle dessiner?
Pourquoi l'enfant crie-t-il ?
À quoi pense-t-elle ?
À quoi s'applique-t-il? Il s'appli, "10
à la lecture, à l'écriture et au calcul.
Il y a un je ne sais quoi qui plaît.
J'ai de quoi vivre.
Il y a de quoi l'effrayer.
§ 118.-5th. WHAT, in the collocations, (472,) what is, what was, whist
will be, &c., followed by in, on, or any other preposition, is expressed by:
Qu'y a-t-il dans....? Qu'y avait-il dans....? Qu'y aura-t-il dans.
What is on the table?
What may be (may there be) for me?
What was under it?
Qu'y a-t-il sur la table?
Que peut-il y avoir pour moi ?
Qu'y avait-il dessous ?
• • ·
GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS,
487
§ 119.—WHAT, expressing admiration; as: What can be more agreeable!
What can there be more agreeable! or, What more agreeable! is trans
lated by que, with the verb; as: Que peut-il y avoir de plus agréable.
by quoi de! without the verb; as: Quoi de plus agréable!
What can be (there be) sweeter! (64¹.) | Que peut-il y avoir de plus doux !
What sweeter!
Quoi de plus doux !
120.-6th. WHAT, when a compound relative pronoun, is translated by
se qui, (nom.,) ce que, (obj.)
121.—WHAT, interjection, is: Quoi! Comment!
What he is not here!
| Quoi! (Comment!) il n'est pas ici!
§ 122.—WHICH, in the same manner as what, when connected with a
noun, is used as an adjective, or an article, and translated by quel, quelle,
quels, quelles.
Which dictionary
Which grammar
Quel dictionnaire
do you prefer
Which dictionaries
Which grammars
And likewise when it is governed
To which dictionary do you give the
preference ?
For which grammar did you give a
dollar?
Which pencil did you write with?
Which mountains do you come from?
Near which street do you live?
Which candidate will you vote for?
Quelle grammaire
Quels dictionnaires
Quelles grammaires_
by a preposition. (R. 6.)
|
préférez-vous?
À quel dictionnaire donnez-vous la
préférence ?
Pour quelle grammaire avez-vous
donné un dollar?
Avec quel crayon avez-vous écrit ?
De quelles montagnes venez-vous ?
Près de quelle rue demeurez-vous ?
Pour quel candidat voterez-vous ?
$123,-When which becomes a pronoun, and takes the place of the noun,
or, in other words, when which means which one, which of them, it must be
translated not by quel, &c., alone, but by lequel, laquelle, lesquels, les-
quelles, the article le, la, les, being used, in French, before the pronoun, to
translate the word one, or of them, placed after, in English, or understood.
So, in French, the expression is, the which, instead of which one, which of
them.
There are several candidates; WHICH
(ur which one, or which of them,) do
you prefer.
Il y a plusieurs candidats; LEQUEI
(not quel un) préférez-vous ?
Which of these ladies is your cousin? Laquelle de ces dames est votre cou-
sine ?
Among these young men, which learn Parmi ces jeunes gens, lesquels ap-
French? (which ones?)
Among these young ladies, which
learn French? (which ones?)
prennent le Français ?
Parmi ces demoiselles, lesquelles ap-
prennent le Français ?
§ 124.-N. B. Although one, or of them, may not be expressed after
which, as is usually the case, translate as above, whenever it is implied.
488
GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS.
Which is the first? (that is, which | Lequel est pren jer? (6%.)
one ?)
Which is the las' ?
Which are the best? (speaking of
boys.)
Laquelle est dernière ?
Lesquels sont les meilleurs?
Which are the best? (speaking of Lesquelles sont les meilleures?
girls.)
§ 125.—To which, meaning to which one, to which of them, is expressed by
auquel, à laquelle, auxquels, auxquelles.
Of these three hotels, to which (one) | De ces trois hotels, auquel irez-
will you go? (or which will you go vous ?
to ?)
Of the four seasons, to which (one)
does he give the preference? (or
which.... to?)
Of all those gentlemen, to which
(ones) shall we send invitations?
To which of them (ladies) will you
send presents? (or which.... to?)
Des quatre saisons, à laquelle don-
ne-t-il la préférence ?
De tous ces messieurs, auxquels en-
verrons-nous des invitations?
Auxquelles enverrez-vous des pré-
sents ?
§ 126.—OF WHICH one, or ones, OF WHICH of them, duquel, de laquelle,
desquels, desquelles.
Which do you speak of? (which | Duquel parlez-vous ?
one ?)
• • • •
Which do you speak of? (one lady?)
Which do you speak of? (boys.)
Which ones do you speak of? (girls.)
De laquelle parlez-vous?
Desquels parlez-vous ?
Desquelles parlez-vous ?
§ 127.—WITH WHICH of them, is avec lequel, avec laquelle, &c.
Which of these young ladies are you Avec laquelle de ces demoiselles al-
going to sing with?
And so,
of every other preposition.
lez-vous chanter ?
§ 129.-N. B. Forget not that the preposition, in French, must always
precede the word it governs, although it may be separated from it in Eng-
lish. (95.)
|
Which are you going to apply to? Auquel allez-vous vous adresser ?
Which did you come through? (road.) | Par laquelle êtes-vous venu? (route.)
130.-When WHICH is a relative, not an interrogative pronoun, it is
sometimes translated by lequel, laquelle, &c., ($82,) when anything inter-
venes between the antecedent and pronoun.
1 can see which (one) you prefer.
This is the history of W. S., which
contains so many fictions.
Je peux voir lequel vous préférez.
"'est l'histoire de W. S., laquelle
contient tant de fictions.
OF THE FRENCH PRONOUN ON.
§ 131.-The pronoun ON (372) invariably governs the 3d person singular,
whatever may be the English by which it is represented. (§ 38.)
GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS.
489
$132.-1. That pronoun corresponds to any English pronoun taken in an
indefinite sense, as one, any one, some one, we, they, people, men, &c.,
whether singular or plural. (442.)
§ 133.-2. It corresponds also to the passive verb, expressing an idea. in
an indefinite manner. (442.)
Silver is found everywhere, is general in its acceptation, and translated by
n trouve l'argent partout, for it means one finds, or people find, or men
find silver everywhere. But when we say: Silver is found by the Peruvians,
there is evidently a restriction, which causes the rejection of on, and the
French is, L'argent est trouvé par les Péruviens, or still better, Les Péru-
viens trouvent l'argent. A naval asylum is to be established. As it is not
said by whom, on becomes the nominative of the active phrase. People
will establish, &c., translated by on établira un hopital de marine. But
if the sentence is, A naval asylum is to be established by government, then,
government becoming nominative of the active phrase Government will
establish, &c., on is rejected, and the translation is: Le gouvernement
établira un hopital de marine.
§ 134.-By the above examples, it will be seen that whenever on is used,
the sentence must assume the active form. It is said that a comet is seen.
Now, instead of translating literally, by il est dit qu'une comète est vue, the
French change the construction, and say:
People say they see a comet.
Gold is found; turn, one finds gold.
He was told to come: One told him..
What is said? What do people say?
A bridge is to be made over the river.
They are to make a bridge ...
}
$ 135.-L'on is used instead of on
words ce que, si, où, ou, et, que, qui.
and is not to be translated.
What you were told is not true.
If I am wanted, call me. (702.)
It is a place where everybody is seen.
We do not like to see those to whom
we owe so much.
You are seen and heard.
On dit qu'on voit un comète.
On trouve l'or.
On lui a dit de venir.
Que dit-on ?
On doit faire un pont sur la rivière.
for the sake of euphony, after the
That I has no particular meaning,
Ce que l'on vous a dit, n'est pas vrai.
Si l'on me veut, appelez-moi.
C'est un lieu où l'on voit tout le
monde.
On n'aime pas à voir ceux à qui l'on
doit tant.
On vous voit et l'on vous entend.
136.-The student should be exercised to turning the English passive
phrase into the active before he translates.
ADJECTIVES.
$137.-1. Adjectives have a plural like nouns, (9¹,2,) and form it in the
same manner.
The fine horse.
My new friend.
The fine horses.
My new friends.
Le beau cheval. Les beaux chevaux,
Mon nouvel ami. Mes nouveaux amis.
490
GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS.
2 Much, many, more, less, little, too much, how much, how many, &c.,
considered as adjectives in English, are adverbs in French, and require a
connecting link when they are united to a noun; that connecting link is the
preposition de. (13¹.)
More than, not separated by a noun, is expressed by plus que, except before
a number, it is then plus de. More than you, plus que vous; More than
two, plus de deux. (162.)
3. Cardinal numbers are used for dates and the designation of sovereigns:
Charles quatre; Le 31 Mai.
4. Adjectives agree in number with the noun or pronoun they qualify.
(182, 222,) and also in genders. (552.)
5. All adjectives, without exception, end in e mute in the feminine sin
gular, and in es in the feminine plural. Young, sing. jeune, plur. jeunes.
Small, petit, petite, petites.
6. Two or more masculine nouns, require the adjective to be masculine
plural.
The father and son are polite.
| Le père et le fils sont pulis.
7. Two or more feminine nouns require the adjective to be feminine plural
The mother and daughter are polite. | La mère et la fille sont polies.
8. Two or more nouns of different genders, require the adjective to be
masculine plural.
The preceding lessons and exercises. | Les leçons et les exercices précédents.
His mouth and eyes open.
Sa bouche et ses yeux ouverts.
As the adjective must be masculine, the ear requires the substantive
masculine to be put last, as above, instead of: Ses yeux et sa bouche ouverts.
9. The adjective cannot be separated by an article from the noun it quali
fies; therefore the article placed after the adjective in English, comes before it
in French. Except tout, which admits the article after it.
Such a man, (592,)
Such a woman,
All his time,
such men.
such women.
all the day (a day.)
Un tel homme (not tel un), de tels
hommes.
Une telle femme, de telles femmes.
Tout son temps,tout le jour (un jour.)
10. If with such there is another adjective, as, such a good book, the French
do not use tel, but say, un si bon livre, the same as so good a book. So kind
a friend, such a kind friend. Un si bon ami (never un tel bon ami.)
REMARK 1. Adjectives form their feminine in various ways, viz:
1. The following double the last consonant:
Low.
Thick.
Masculin.
Bas,
Féminin.
basse.
Épais,
épaisse.
Express.
Exprès,
expresse.
Genteel, gentle, pretty.
Gentil,
gentille.
Fat.
Gras,
grasse.
Big.
Gros,
grosse.
Weary.
Las,
lasse.
No, none.
Nul,
nulle.
Initiated.
Profès,
professe.
Silly, foolish.
Sot,
sotte.
GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS.
491
Deceitful,
(eureuse.)
Fémin m.
trompeuse.
Masculin.
Trompeur,
Lying,
Menteur,
menteuse.
Talkative,
Parleur,
parleuse.
Executing,
(eur-rice.)
Exécuteur,
exécutrice.
Persecuting,
"
Persécuteur,
persécutrice.
Enchanting,
(eur-eresse.)
Enchanteur,
enchanteresse.
Sinning,
Pécheur,
pécheresse.
Avenging,
"
Vengeur.
vengeresse.
Absolved.
Benign.
The following form their feminine quite irregularly:
absoute.
bénigne.
Absous,
Bénin,
Declining.
Caduc,
caduque,
Dry.
Sec,
sèche.
False.
Faux,
fausse.
Favorite.
Favori,
favorite.
Free.
Franc,
franche.
Fresh.
Frais,
fraîche.
Greek.
Grec,
grecque.
Long.
Long,
longue.
Public.
Public,
publique.
Red.
Roux,
rousse.
Sweet.
Doux,
douce.
Third.
Tiers,
tierce.
Traitorous.
Traître,
traîtresse.
Turkish.
Turc,
Turque.
White.
Blanc,
blanche.
Wicked.
Malin,
maligne.
2. The plural of adjectives is formed like that of the substantives, (91, 10.)
Of the following twenty-eight adjectives, the first eighteen have no plural
for the masculine, the last ten may form it by adding an s, but it is better
to avoid using them in the plural for the masculine gender.
Austral,
southern.
Bénéficial,
beneficiary.
Sentimental,
Vocal,
Bréal,
northern.
Zodiacal,
sentimental.
vocal.
zodiacal.
Brumal,
brumal.
Canonial,
canonical.
Diamétral,
diametrical.
Amical,
friendly.
Expérimental,
experimental.
Fatal,
fatal.
Labial,
labial.
Filial,
filial.
Lingual,
lingual.
Final,
final.
Lustral,
lustral.
Frugal,
frugal.
Matinal,
early.
Glacial,
frozen.
Médical,
medical.
Jovial,
jovial.
Mental,
mental.
Naval,
naval.
Natal,
natal.
Pascal,
pascal.
Patronal,
patronal.
Virginal,
virginal
492
GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS
•
•
,.with adjec
que, more...
§ 138.-1. The comparative of equality is formed by autant de... que
..., as much... as..., with nouns; aussi... que..., as... as . . .,.
tives and adverbs, (16¹, 272.) That of inequality, by plus
than; moins . que.. less... than..., with adjectives and adverbs, (29¹,2,)
and plus de ...
moins de ...
que de
with nouns. Not so
with nouns, is expressed by ne... pas tant de... que de; not
much as,
...
• • •
que... de..
90... as...; with adjectives and adverbs, by ne... pas si... que.
I have not so much pride as he.
I am not so proud as he.
Je n'ai pas tant d'orgueil que lui.
Je ne suis pas si orgueilleux que lui.
2. The more... the less is expressed by: plus ... moins without the
article, although it is used in English; because the addition of the article
LE to plus, would make it a superlative, while more remains a comparative,
even when it is preceded by the.
The more you study, the more you
learn.
Plus vous étudiez, plus vous appre-
nez.
Plus il joue, moins il apprend.
Plus le fruit est vert, moins il est
sain.
The more he plays, the less he learns.
The greener the fruit, the less healthy
it is.
The nominative, in French, follows plus or moins. Then you must not
say: Plus vert est le fruit moins sain il est; but as it is above.
3. In comparisons of inequality, formed by plus, more; moins, less;
autre, autrement, otherwise, differently, &c., if the part of the sentence
which precedes que (than) is affirmative, NE must be used before the verb
coming after que. ($53¹, Obs. 120.)
I have more bread than I can eat.
He studies less than I do. (492.)
Louis writes better than he speaks.
They behave otherwise than you
think.
J'ai plus de pain que je n'en peux
manger.
Il étudie moins que je ne le fais.
Louis écrit mieux qu'il ne parle.
Ils se comportent autrement que
vous ne pensez.
4. But do not use NE after que, than, if the first part of the sentence is
negative or interrogative.
He does not study less than I do.
Louis does not write better than he
speaks.
They do not behave otherwise than
you think.
Can I eat more bread than I have?
Il n'étudie pas moins que j'étudie.
Louis n'écrit pas mieux qu'il parle.
Ils ne se comportent pas autrement
que vous croyez.
Puis-je manger plus de pain que j'en
ai?
In comparisons of equality, expressed by autant, as much; tant, so
much; aussi, as; si, so, &c.: NE is never used after que, (as.)
I have as much bread as I can eat.
He does not study so much as I do.
Louis writes as well as he speaks.
They do not behave so well as you
think.
J'ai autant de pain que je peux en
manger.
Il n'étudie pas tant que j'étudie.
Louis écrit aussi bien qu'il parle.
Ils ne se comportent pas si bien que
vous croyez.
GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS.
493
$139.-PLACE OF THE ADJECTIVES.
1. The following are placed before the noun. Note that when the posi
tive goes before, so do the comparative and superlative. Premier, first:
second, second; and other adjectives of number.
Beau, bel, m.
fine.
Belle, f.
handsome.
Meilleur,
Même,
better.
same.
Bon, bonne,
good.
Moindre,
less.
Grand,
great, tall.
Petit,
Gros, grosse,
big, bulky.
Plusieurs,
Jeune,
young.
Saint,
little, small.
several.
holy.
Joli,
pretty.
Tout,
all.
Mauvais,
bad.
Vieux, vieil, m.
Méchant,
wicked.
m.}
} old.¹
A pretty little dog.
Vieille, f.
Un joli petit chien,
2. But if any of these adjectives is connected with another that cannot
be placed before the noun, both go after, joined by a conjunction.
A handsome, amiable woman.2
A good, complaisant husband.
A young, rich, and virtuous woman.
Une femme aimable et belle.
Un mari bon et complaisant.
Une demoiselle, jeune, riche, et ver•
tueuse.
3. Adjectives of nations, color, and shape, follow the noun. (26², Obs. 61.)
NOUNS.
$140.-1. NOUNS in French not being, as in English, used as an adjective
to another noun, as, a cloth coat, a preposition is used to show the relation
between the two nouns, the second of which in English becomes the first
in French.
De is used between the name of the thing and that of the substance of
which it is made: Un habit de drap; un chandelier d'argent. If several
nouns are used as adjectives, the French construction is the same; the last
in English becomes first in French. Silver, gold, and steel jewels; des
bijoux d'argent, d'or, et d'acier.
2. De shows also the possession marked in English by 's. John's book.
The French construction remains the same: Le livre de Jean.
The boy. has a stick: is it the gene- Le garçon a un bâton: est-ce celui du
ral's, the lawyer's, or the doctor's? général, de l'avocat, ou du docteur ?
1 The adjective cher, dear, also stands before the noun, except when it denotes the
price of a thing. Ex. Mon cher ami, my dear friend; ma chère sœur, my dear sis-
ter; but un fusil cher, a dear gun; une table chère, a dear table.
2 In the following examples, the peculiarity with respect to the place of the adjec-
tive should be observed: Un grand homme means a great man, and un homme grand,
a tall man; une grosse femme, a fat woman, and une femme grosse, a woman with
child; une sage-femme, a midwife, and une femme sage, a wise or modest woman:
un galant komme, a man of honor, and un homme galant, a courtier.
43
494
GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS.
The child's and the baker's dog.
The grocer's butter, biscuits, and cof-
fee,
The grocer's butter, his biscuits and
coffee.
Le chien du garçon et du boulanger.
Le beurre, les biscuits, et le café de
l'épicier.
Le beurre de l'épicier, ses biscuits,
et son café, (§ 32, N., at page 467.)
To translate a double possessive case, take the last noun in English for
the first in French, and then retrograde regularly.
My brother's friend's book.
The grocer's clerk's father's horse.
Le livre de l'ami de mon frère.
Le cheval du père du commis de
l'épicier.
3. De is also used in French to translate of, placed in a like situation in
English.
A barrel of flour.
A bag of rice.
Un baril de farine.
Un sac de riz.
4. A is used when the last French noun expresses the use of the first.
A coffee-mill.
Gunpowder.
·
A flour-barrel.
Un moulin à café. (77¹.)
De la poudre à canon.
Un baril à farine.
À la, à l', au, aux, are used, when the first French noun contains a por
tion of the second..
The barrel with flour in (but not full.) | Le baril à la farine. (772.)
The bottle with vinegar in.
The bag with apples.
La bouteille au vinaigre.
Le sac aux pommes.
5. Proper names, used as such, have no plural.
Your friends, the Clintons, are here. | Vos amis, les Clinton, sont icì.
But if used as common nouns, they take an s.
Washingtons are rare.
| Les Washingtons sont rares.
6. In an enumeration, nouns are frequently used without articles.
You have what you want to eat with, | Vous avez ce qu'il vous faut pour
a knife, fork, plate, napkin, &c.
manger, couteau, fourchette, &c.
|
You may likewise say, un couteau, une fourchette, une assiette, &c.,
repeating the article before every noun, if placed before the first; but it is
better not to use it.
Men, women, children, were out.
Hommes, femmes, enfants, étaient
dehors.
7. Compound nouns are formed by connecting:
A noun with a noun: as, un chou-fleur, a cauliflower; des choux-fleurs.
A noun with an adjective: as, une basse-taille, a bass-voice; des basses-
tailles.
In such nouns, both the substantive and adjective become plural.
A noun with a verb: as, un porte-crayon, a pencil-case; des porte-crayons.
In such nouns, the substantive alone becomes plural, if the idea admits
of plurality. The case may have one or two pencils in.
A noun with a noun by a preposition : as, un chef-d'œuvre, a master-piece;
des chefs-d'œuvre.
Here, the first substantive alone becomes plural, if the idea admits of
plurality.
GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS.
495
A compound noun, formed from a verb, preposition, or adverb, is invariable,
because its component parts are themselves invariable. Un passe-partout,
a dead-latch key; des passe-partout.
8. The feminine of substantives ending in er is regularly formed, by add-
ing an e to the masculine, and changing the e mute into è grave. As:
A inilkman.
A baker.
A merchant.
A milk woman.
A bakerwoman.
Un laitier.
Un boulanger.
A female merchant. Un marchand.
Une laitière.
Une boulangère.
Une marchande.
As there are many nouns and adjectives, ($ 200,) which, although incor-
porated in the Vocabularies, are not used in the Exercises, contrary to our
fundamental principle, viz: to make an immediate and continued use of
expressions introduced, I place in the Synopsis an English alphabetical list
of them, which may be consulted when necessary.
The following substantives have a distinct form for individuals of the
female sex:-
An abbot,
An accuser,
An actor,
An ambassador,
An apprentice,
A baron,
A shepherd,
A benefactor,
A canon,
A singer,
A hunter,
(in poetry,)
A count,
A dancer,
A god,
A duke,
An elector,
An emperor,
A founder,
A lad,
A lion,
A heathen,
A peacock,
A peasant,
A prior,
A prince,
•
A protector,
A king,
Masculine.
un abbé,
un accusateur,
un acteur,
un ambassadeur,
un apprenti,
un baron,
un berger,
un bienfaiteur,
un chanoine,
un chanteur,
un chasseur,
un chasseur,
un comte,
un danseur,
un dieu,
un duc,
un électeur,
un empereur,
un fondateur,
un jouvenceau,
un lion,
un païen,
un paon,
un paysan,
un prieur,
un prince,
un protecteur,
un roi,
Feminine.
une abbesse.
une accusatrice.
une actrice.
une ambassadrice.
une apprentie.
une baronne.
une bergère.
une bienfaitrice.
une chanoinesse.
une chanteuse.
une chasseuse.
une chasseresse.
une comtesse.
une danseuse.
une déesse.
une duchesse.
une électrice.
une impératrice.
une fondatrice.
une jouvencelle.
une lionne.
une païenne.
une paonne.
une paysanne.
une prieure.
une princesse.
une protectrice.
une reine.
9. When a noun is the object of two or more verbs, those verbs mus
govern that noun, without preposition, or with the same preposition.
496
GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS.
He buys and sells cloth, (no prep.)
We promise and give to the people, (a.)
She speaks and boasts of her beauty.
Il achète et vend du drap.
Nous promettons et donnons auz
gens.
Elle parle et se vante de sa beauté.
But in French the sense cannot be suspended after a preposition as in
English; for instance, you must not say, Rien n'est plus agréable que de
converser avec et que de jouir de la société de nos amis, Nothing is more
agreeable than to converse with and to enjoy the company of our friends.
The sense cannot be suspended after the French preposition avec, as it can
be after the English preposition with. Hence we have this rule: When the
two verbs require different prepositions, do not suspend the sense, but make
the noun the régime (§ 44) of the first preposition (or régime indirect of the
first verb), and place an objective pronoun ($48) with the second verb.
The above sentence is translated thus: Rien n'est plus agréable que de
converser avec nos amis et que de jouir de leur société.
10. The nouns of multitude, in French, noms collectifs, are divided by
them into two classes. 1st CLASS. Collectif général, when it represents the
entire collection. La foule des hommes est vouée au malheur, the bulk
of mankind is doomed to misfortune. The following verb is in the singular,
and agrees with the collective. 2d CLASS. Collectif partitif, when it repre-
sents only a part of the collection. Une foule de pauvres reçoivent nos
secours, a crowd of poor receive our assistance. A crowd of poor, contains
but a portion of all the poor. The verb is in the plural, and agrees with the
noun that follows the collective.
1st CL. The army of the Americans.
The multitude of the stars.
2d CL. A troop of robbers.
A multitude of stars.
L'armée des Américains est.
La multitude des étoiles est...
Une troupe de voleurs sont
Une multitude d'étoiles sont
•
•
• •
11. Of the farmer's hay, cabbages, | Du foin du fermier, de ses choux, de
butter, and cheese.
son beurre, et de son fromage.
This is an elliptical expression for the hay of the farmer, the cabbage of the
farmer, the butter of the farmer, &c.; but instead of using the noun in the
possessive case a second time, the French use a possessive pronoun. (§ 32, N.
page 367.)
12. OBSERVATIONS ON THE PROPER NAMES OF PERSONS,
TAKEN FROM THE LATIN AND GREEK.
1. Proper names of men ending in English in a are the same in both lan-
guages; but those of women and goddesses having that ending become
French by changing the final a into e mute.
Caligula.
Cleopatra.
Dolabella.
Diana. Julia.
Caligula.
Cléopatre.
Dolabella.
Diane. Julie.
2. Most proper names ending in English in as or es become French by
changing these finals into e mute.
Eneas.
Ulysses.
Pythagoras.
Socrates.
Enée.
Ulysse.
Pythagore.
Socrate.
GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS.
497
3. Proper names ending in ọ change it in French into on.
. Cicero.
Dido.
| Cicéron.
Didon.
4. Most proper names ending in us are the same in both languages when
they have but two syllables; but when they are composed of three or more
syllables, they become French by changing it into e mute.
Cyrus.
Camillus.
Venus.
Orpheus.
Cyrus.
Camille.
Vénus.
Orphée.
5. Most of those ending in al or is are the same in both languages.
Juvenal.
Sesostris.
| Juvénal.
Sésostris.
6. Those ending in English in ander change it in French into andre.
Alexander.
Lysander.
| Alexandre.
Lysandre.
REMARK. The proper names of kingdoms, provinces, and towns, ending
in English in a, become French by changing the ending a into e mute, and
those of towns ending in burg, change it into bourg.¹
Arabia.
Friburg.
Norn bres
Asia.
Hamburg.
L'Arabie.
Fribourg.
L'Asie.
Hambourg.
$141.-CARDINAL AND ORDINAL NUMBERS.
Cardinaux.
Un, m. une, ƒ……….
Deux (2)
Trois
Quatre.
Cinq
Six...
Sept
Huit
..
•
...
Neuf..
Dix.
Onze...
Douze.
Treize
•
•
Quatorze
Quinze
...
...
Cardinal Nombres
Numbers.
Ordinaux.
1.
Premier, m. première, f.
Ordinal
Numbers
1st.
2.
Deuxième, second, seconde....... 2d.
3. Troisième.
•
4.
Quatrième
5.
Cinquième
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Sixième.....
Septième..
Huitième
Neuvième
Dixième
Onzième...
...
12.
Douzième...
13.
Treizième..
•
•
14.
Quatorzième...
15.
Quinzième.
3d.
4th.
5th.
6th.
7th.
• • •
•
Sth.
9th.
10th
11th
12th
13th
14th.
15th
...
1 Such proper names as deviate from this rule are either separately noted, or are
the same in both languages.
2 From 2 to 10 there is an irregularity in the pronunciation of the numbers, which
it is well to notice.
At the end of a sentence.
Deux is pronounced deu, x silent.
Before a vowel.
deu-z amis.
Before a consonant.
deu.
Trois
''
troi, s silent.
troi.
Cinq
cinq, q sounded.
cin.
troi-z amis.
cin-q amis.
Six
sis, a like s.
si.
si-z amis.
Sept
<
sept, t sounded.
sè.
sè-t amis.
Huit
<<
huit, t sounded.
hui.
hui-t amis.
Neuf
(C
neuf, ƒ sounded.
neu.
neu-v amis.
Dix
((
dis, x like s.
di.
di-z amis.
And in the same manner wherever they occur.
42*
498
GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS.
Nombres
Cardinaux.
Cardinal
Nomires
Numbers.
Ordinaux.
Seize
16.
Seizième
....
Dix-sept
Dix-huit
Dix-neuf
Vingt (1)
Vingt et un
Vingt-deux
Vingt-trois..
Vingt-quatre
Vingt-cinq
Vingt-six..
Vingt-sept
Vingt-huit
Vingt-neuf
Trente
• •
• •
.. •
Trente et un
Trente-deux.
Trente-trois.
Quarante
..
Quɛrante et un.
Quarante-deux..
Quarante-trois
Cinquante..
•
Cinquante et u
Cinquante-deux
Soixante...
Soixante et un....
17.
Dix-septième.
18.
Dix-huitième
19.
Dix-neuvième.....
20.
· •
Vingtième
21.
•
Vingt et unième.
·
22.
Vingt-deuxième
23.
Vingt-troisième
24.
Vingt-quatrième
25.
Vingt-cinquième
26.
Vingt-sixième..
27.
Vingt-septième
28.
•
Vingt-huitième
29.
Vingt-neuvième
30.
Trentième....
31.
Trente et unième.
32.
Trente-deuxième..
33.
Trente-troisième
40.
Quarantième..
41.
Quarante et unième
42.
...
Quarante-deuxième
43.
50.
51.
Quarante-troisième
Cinquantième ...
Cinquante et unième.
• •
52.
Cinquante-deuxième
60.
Soixantième
61.
Soixante et unième.
Soixante-deux
62.
•
Soixante-deuxième.
Soixante et dix.
70.
Soixante et dixième
Soixante-onze..
71.
Soixante-onzième
Soixante-douze
72.
Soixante-douzième
··
Soixante-treize
Soixante-quatorze..
Soixante-quinze....
Soixante se!ze....
·
Soixante-dix-sept
Soixante-dix-huit
Soixante-dix-neuf..
Quatre-vingts (2)
Quatre-vingt-un
Quatre-vingt-deux
Quatre-vingt-dix
73.
Soixante-treizième
74.
Soixante-quatorzième
... 75.
76.
•
777.
78.
Soixante-quinzième.
Soixante-seizième.
Soixante-dix-septième.
Soixante-dix-huitième..
79.
Soixante-dix-neuvième
80.
Quatre-vingtième
...
81.
Quatre-vingt-unième
82.
Ordinal
NuDibora
16th.
17th.
18th.
19th.
20th.
21st.
22d.
•
23d.
24th.
25th.
26th.
27th.
28th.
29th,
•
30th.
31st.
32d.
33d.
40th
41st.
--
·
•
42d.
43d.
50th
51st
•
52d.
60th.
61st.
62d.
70th.
•
•
71st.
72d.
73d.
74 tla.
75th.
76th.
• • •
·
77th.
78th.
79th.
•
•
80th.
•
•
• •
81st.
82d.
•
90th.
...
91st.
92d.
93d.
•
94th.
•
95th.
•
96th.
•
•
+
97th.
98th.
•
99th.
•
• • ..
Quatre-vingt-onze
Quatre-vingt-douze
Quatre-vingt-treize
..
Quatre-vingt-quatorze.
Quatre-vingt-quinze..
Quatre-vingt-seize
Quatre-vingt-dix-sept.
Quatre-vingt-dix-huit
Quatre-vingt-dix-neuf
...
•
Quatre-vingt-deuxième.
90. Quatre-vingt-dixième
91.
Quatre-vingt-onzième..
92. Quatre-vingt-douzième
93. Quatre-vingt-treizième
94.
Quatro-vingt-quatorzième
95. Quatre-vingt-quinzième
96.
97.
...
·
98.
99.
Quatre-vingt-seizième..
Quatre-vingt-dix-septième
Quatre-vingt-dix-huitième..
Quatre-vingt-dix-neuvième.
1 In vingt the t is silent, but sounded in vingt et un, vingt-deux, &c.
2 In uatre-vingts the t is never sounded.
GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS.
499
Nom brea
Jardinaux.
Cent.
•
Cent un (not cent et un)
Cent deux...
Cent trois..
Cent dix
• •
Cent onze
Cent vingt
•
•
Cent vingt et un
Deux cents..
•
Cardinal
Nombres
Numbers,
Ordinaux.
Ordinal
Numbers.
100.
Centième
101.
Cent-unième
102.
•
Cent-deuxième.
103.
Cent-troisième
110.
Cent-dixième
.....
111.
120.
121.
Cent-onzième
Cent-vingtième.
Cent vingt et unième
200.
Deux centième .
Deux cent un..
201.
Deux cent-unième.
Mille (not dix cents)
Mille un...
..
Mille deux. &c...
1000.
• •
• +
•
Millième..
1001.
Mille-unième..
1002.
Mille cent (onze cents)..
•
·
•
1100.
Mille neuf cents (dix-neuf cents) 1900.
}
·
Mille-centième, (onze-centième 1100th.
Mille-neuf-centième, (dix-neuf-
centième
1900th.
After which the French do not count any more by hundreds, as the English
do. They do not say: Vingt, vingt et un, vingt-deux, &c., cents; twenty,
twenty-one, twenty-two, &c., hundred, but:
Deux mille
Deux mille cinq cents
Un million
·
•
2000. Deux millième
2500. Deux mille cinq-centième
1,000,000. Millionième...
•
2000th.
2500th.
Mille-deuxième, &c...
100th.
101st.
102d.
103d.
110th.
•
•
111th.
12a.
121st.
200th.
201st.
1000th.
1001st.
•
1002d.
millionth.
In dates, Mille is spelt Mil. Mil sept cent soixante-seize, 1776.
Mil huit cent quarante-neuf, ou Dix-huit cent quarante-neuf, 1849.
The whole.
The half.
A part.
The third, .
The two-thirds, . The three-thirds.
The fourth part, the . The .
The fifth part, the 1-5. The 4-5.
The sixth part, the 1-6, and so forth,
by adding ième to the cardinal.
What is the half of 4? It is 2.
What is that of 5? It is 2 and a half.
What is the of 8? It is 5 and
, 5.
Which is the fourth of 11? It is 24.
The are 84.
Le tout, l'unité.
La moitié, la demie.
Les deux-tiers, .
Une partie.
Le tiers, }.
Les trois-tiers.
Le quart, le . Les trois quarts, .
Le cinquième, le 1-5.
1-5. Les 4 cin-
quièmes.
Le sixième, le 1-6, et ainsi de suite,
en ajoutant ième au cardinal.
Quelle est la moitié de 4? C'est 2.
Quelle est celle de 5? C'est 2 et
demi.
Quels sont les & de 8?
un tiers, 5.
C'est 5 et
Quel est le quart de 11? C'est 2 et
. Les sont 84.
142.-The seasons of the year are: | Les saisons de l'année, sont :
The spring.
The summer.
The autumn, or fall. The winter.
Le printemps, (382.) L'été, (36º.)
L'automne.
L'hiver.
$143.-Names of the months of the Noms des mois de l'année.
year.
The first month is January.
Is not the second month February?
The third is March..
Le premier mois est Janvier.
Le second n'est-il pas Février?
Le troisième est Mars.
500
GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS.
April.
May.
Jul
June.
Avril.
•
Mai.
August. September. Juillet. Août.
October. November.. December.
Next January.
Last January.
The coming February. Last March.
In April.
On the first of May.
On the 4th of July, 1776.
New Year's day.
On New Year.
I wish you a happy New Year.
Christmas day.
On Christmas.
Is not June the 6th month?
Yes, it is; and September is the 9th.
How many days are there in July?
There are 31.
How many are there in August?
Are there as many in October?
There are just as many.
Has September as many?
No, it has but 30, the same as April,
June, and November.
The shortest month is February,
which, in common years, has but
28 days, and 29 in leap (bissextile)
years.
|
Octobre.
Juin.
Septembre.
Novembre. Décembre.
Janvier prochain. Janvier dernier.
Février qui vient.
En Avril.
Mars dernier.
Le premier de Mai.
Le quatre de Juillet, 1776.
Le jour de l'an. Le premier de l'an
Je vous souhaite une bonne année.
Le jour de Noël.
Juin n'est-il pas le 6me mois? [9me.
Si fait, ce l'est; et Septembre est le
Combien de jours y a-t-il dans
Juillet? Il y en a 31.
Combien y en a-t-il en Août {
Y en a-t-il autant en Octobre ?
Il y en a tout autant.
Septembre en a-t-il autant ?
Non, il n'en a que 30, de même que
Avril, Juin, et Novembre.
Le mois le plus court est Février, qui,
dans les années communes, n'a
que 28 jours, et 29 dans les années
bissextiles.
VERBS.
§ 144.-INDICATIVE PRESENT.-Indicatif Présent.
To find the present tense of a verb, its present participle must be known,
as it serves to form the three persons plural. It always ends in ant: and,
as all grammars and dictionaries give it, it is easily learned. The first,
second, and third persons plural, of the present tense, are formed by
changing the termination ant, of the present participle, into ons, for the
first person; into ez, for the second, and into ent, for the third. Ex.:-
I The formation of the indicative present from the infin. tive, although it would be
preferable, presents too many exceptions, and is consequently too difficult for
beginners.
2 The second person singular always ends in s.* In the first conjugation, the
third person singular ends in e, and is the same as the first person; in the second and
third conjugations, it ends in t; first and second have s. In the fourth conjugation,
it adds nothing to the root.f
* Except in the imperative of the first conjugation, and of some verbs of the
second, where the s is dropped. Ex.: Parle, speak, (thou.) When the imperative,
however, is followed by one of the pronouns, en, y, the letter s is not dropped; as:
donnes-en à ton frère, give some to thy brother; portes-y tes livres, take thy books
thither.
† By root we understand that part of the verb which precedes the terminations er,
ir, oir, re, of the infinitive: for example, in the verb finir, to finish, fin is the root
GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS.
501
FIRST CONJUGATION.
Infinitive.
PREMIERE CONJUGAISON.
To speak.
Present participle.
Speaking.
Infinitif.
Parler.
Present tense.
Participe présent,
Parlant.
We speak, you speak, they speak.
I speak, thou speakest, he speaks.
SECOND CONJUGATION.
Finishing.
To finish.
We finish, you finish, they finish.
I finish, thou finishest, he finishes.
THIRD CONJUGATION.
Receiving.
To receive.
We receive, you receive, they receive.
I receive, thou receivest, he receives.
To sell.
FOURTH CONJUGATION.
Selling.
We sell, you sell, they sell.
I sell, thou sellest, he sells.
Présent.
Nous parlons, vous parlez, ils parlent,
Je parle, tu parles, il parle.
Finir.
SECONDE CONJUGAISON.
Finissant.
Nous finissons, vous finissez, ils fi
Je finis, tu finis, il finit.
[nissent.
TROISIÈME CONJUGAISON.
Recevant.
Recevoir.
Nous recevons, vous recevez, ils re-
Je reçois, tu reçois, il reçoit. [çoivent.
QUATRIÈME CONJUGAISON.
Vendant.
Vendre.
Nous vendons, vous vendez, ils ven-
Je vends, tu vends, il vend. [ dent.
HINT. From the third person plural, the scholar can easily learn the
singular.
For the first conjugation, change the pronouns, but pronounce the verb
just like the third person plural: Ils parlent, je parle, tu parle, il parle.
For the second, third, and fourth conjugations, drop the last mute sylla-
ble of the third person plural; then the remainder will be the sound of the
singular.
Ils finissent,
je fini,
je reçoi,
tu fini,
tu reçoi,
tu ven,
il fini.
il reçoi.
Ils reçoivent,
Ils vendent,
je ven,
il ven.
The scholar has only the sounds here; the correct spelling is to be
learned by the written directions in (§ 144, N. 2), and by translating the
exercises. This answers for the regular conjugations, and many of the irre-
gular ones.
Exceptions to the general rule at (§ 144.)
To be,
being.
We are, you are, they are.
having.
To have,
We have, you have, they have.
To know,
knowing.
We know, you know, they know.
To do, make, doing.
You do, they do.
Être,*
étant.
Nous sommes, vous êtes, ils sont.
Avoir,*
ayant.
Nous avons, vous avez,
Savoir,*
ils ont.
sachant.
Nous savons, vous savez, ils savent.
Faire,*
To say, tell, saying, telling.
1re rég.
Dire,*
You say, tell.
.1re rég.
faisant.
vous faites, ls font.
disant.
vous dites.
3me rég
▲ The third person plural of the third conjugation offers, as may be seen, an excep
tion; as the present participle is changed to reçoivent.
502
GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS.
1st. Aller,
to go;
2d. Venir,
to come;
Tenir,
to keep, hold;
tenant:
In ($144, N. 1,) it was observed, that the third person plural of the 3d
conjugation was irregularly formed; so it is with the following conjugations:
Acquérir, to acquire ;
allant:
venant :
ils vont,
they go.
ils viennent, they come.
ils tiennent,
they hold.
ils acquièrent, they acquire.
acquérant:
Mourir,
to die (lose life); mourant :
ils meurent,
they die.
3d. Recevoir,¹ to receive;
recevant :
Devoir,
to owe;
devant :
us reçoivent,
ils doivent,
they receive.
they owe.
Mouvoir, to move;
mouvant :
ils meuvent,
they move.
Pouvoir,
to be able;
pouvant :
ils peuvent,
they can.
Vouloir,
to be willing;
voulant :
ils veulent,
they will.
4th, Boire,
to drink;
buvant :
ils boivent,
they drink.
Prendre,
to take;
prenant:
ils
prennent,
they take.
1. In recevoir, or any other verb in which the c is soft in the infinitive, the
c must remain so throughout, hence, it takes a cedilla (ç), when followed
by a, o, u. Ex. Je reçois, I receive; reçu, received; forcer, to force;
forçant, forcing, &c. (24¹.)
2. In verbs ending in ger, the letter e, for the softening of the sound, is
retained in all those persons where g is followed by a or o. (242.)
3. In verbs ending in ayer, oyer, uyer, the letter y is changed into i, in
all persons where it is followed by e mute. (242.)
4. In verbs having e (mute) in the last syllable but one of the infinitive,
the letter e has the grave accent (è) in all persons, where the consonant
immediately after it, is followed by e mute, as in mener, to guide, to take;
promener, to walk; achever, to finish, &c. As:
I buy, thou buyest, he buys.
I lead, thou leadest, he leads.
Do you take him to the play?
I do take him thither.
J'achète, tu achètes, il achète.
Je mène, tu mènes, il mène.
Le menez-vous au spectacle?
Je l'y mène. (25¹.)
N. B. Except with the terminations eler, eter, in which the consonant
is doubled. (333.)
5. In verbs having é (acute) in the last syllable but one of the infinitive,
that becomes è (grave) when followed by a mute syllable. As, sécher, to
dry; je sèche, I dry; ils sèchent, they dry. Céder, to yield; il cède, he
yields, &c. (282.)
6. The English present tense, expressed (241) in three ways, I love, I do
love, I am loving, is translated by only one French expression: j'aime.
Hence, je lis, corresponds to, I read, I do read, I am reading. The French
have, however, another way much used by them, although unnoticed in
grammars. The true, the real present in English is I am reading; the
corresponding French is je suis à lire. It consists of two parts. The 1st,
as in English, is the verb to be, (être,) in all its persons; the 2d is, not the pre-
1 And all in evoir, as apercevoir, to perceive; concevoir, to conceive, &o.
GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS.
503
Bent participle, (reading,) but the preposition à, followed, of course, by the
infinitive, (lie ;) for recollect RULE 1st. Every preposition, except en,
governs the infinitive. Then je suis à lire corresponds exactly to I am
reading, although, if translated literally, it would mean, I am to read, which
signifies a very different thing. But never mind the literal sense, take only
the common acceptation attached to the expression, (76¹,) viz :
I am reading.
We are reading.
I read.
We read.
Je suis à lire.
Nous sommes à lire.
The component parts of this expression are quite familiar to
and but little practice will enable him to use them with ease.
of forming the present applies to every other tense.
Je lis.
N. lisons.
the student,
This mode
Were you reading?
Was he writing?
I was.
He was.
When they will be eating.
Étiez-vous à lire ?
Était-il à écrire ? Il était à écrire.
Quand ils seront à manger.
J'étais à lire.
Call us, even if we were taking tea, Appelez-nous quand même nous
(even should we be, &c.)
serions à prendre le thé.
Will they not be playing? Yes, they Ne seront-ils pas à jouer? Si fait,
will.
She is travelling, is she not?
They are not travelling, are they?
Thou art listening, art thou not?
ils seront à jouer.
Elle est à voyager, n'est-ce pas ?
Est-ce qu'ils sont à voyager?
(642, N. 2.)
Tu es à écouter, n'est-ce pas ?
PARFAIT¹ ou PRÉSENT COMPOSÉ.
Study carefully the article, and the example at (33¹, $53.)
$145.-The English Perfect invariably conveys an allusion to the present;
the Parfait not only conveys an allusion to the present, but also refers to
actions past at a time wholly expired, or to actions expressed by the English
imperfect. Hence, it corresponds to the English perfect and imperfect tenses.
The French use it to express the daily occurrences of life.
1. How long is it since you tasted coffee? It is three months since I tasted
any. Since I wrote to him, France has become a republic. (§ 492.) In
these sentences, and all similarly formed, although no negative is used, one
is evidently implied, or, at least, a negative turn may be given to them, for
the first means, You have NOT tasted coffee for how long a time? The second
means, I have NOT tasted any these three months. And the third, I have NOT
written to him for some time, during which France has become a republic
It is evident that the same negative turn cannot be given to, How long
is it since your cousin set out? since you dined? you cannot say, has not set
vut, you did not dine. Consequently, as no negative is implied, say, without
the NE, Combien
Combien y a-t-il que votre cousin est parti? que vous avez dîné?
In translating the sentences in which a negative is implied, but not ex
1 Frequently called Prétérit Indéfini. But as the word is foreign to the English
conjugation, it has no definite sense for the American pupil, while the word Parfait,
corresponding to his cwn Perfect, offers at once a clear idea.
504
GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS.
pressed, the French use NE, but suppress PAS (that is, they suppress only a
part of the negative, instead of suppressing it altogether as the English do.
Hence, the first is translated by Combien y a-t-il que vous n'avez goûté de
café? The second, by Il y a trois mois que je n'en ai goûté. The third, by
Depuis que je NE lui ai écrit, la France est devenue république. This con-
struction takes place only after il y a and depuis que, followed by a definite
period of time, and when the French verb is in the parfait, (English perfect
tense.) *In the present tense, PAS is used: as, Il y a trois mois que je ne
goûte PAS de café, It is three months since I taste no coffee, or, I have tasted
no coffee these three months. Depuis que je ne lui écris PAS, la France est,
&c. Since I do not write to him, France has, &c. (492, Obs. 114.)
2. The English perfect, formed from the present of the auxiliary and the
past participle, as, I have spoken; We have written letters; He has exa-
mined your cloth; is the only one usually given. in grammars; but there is
another, formed by the verbs to have and to be, prefixed to the present par
ticiple; as, I have been speaking; we have been writing letters; he has beer.
examining your cloth; which, although not commonly found in grammars
and not quite synonymous with the other perfect, is, nevertheless, constantly
used in conversation. Some grammarians have introduced it, and call it
the compound form of the perfect. As the French have no tense similarly
constructed, they use the parfait, and say: J'ai parlé ; nous avons écrit des
lettres; il a examiné votre drap.
3. The English say, I come from my store, to express that the action of
coming has just taken place. But, when any other verb is used, such as,
to speak, to write, &c., instead of saying, I come from speaking, from
writing, &c., they change it to, I have just spoken, written, &c. The French
say: Je viens de mon magasin, to signify that the action of coming has just
been performed, and they apply the same mode of expression for any other
action. Hence, they say: Je viens de parler, d'écrire, &c. (492, Obs. 115.)
It is hoped that this brief explanation will remove a difficulty, which, in
this case, the great difference of construction presents to many pupils.
FIRST FUTURE.-Futur.
◊ 146.-1. The Future Tense, in all French verbs, ends as follows: rai,
ras, ra, rons, rez, ront. Therefore, as soon as we know one person, we also
know the others. (46¹.)
2. The first person singular is formed from the infinitive by changing the
final r of the first and second conjugations; the oir, of the third, and the
re of the fourth, into rai. Ex.:
Infinitive.
Future.
To love,
I shall or will love.
To finish,
I shall or will finish.
To receive,
1st Conj.
2d
3d "
Infinitif.
Aimer,
Finir,
Futur.
j'aimerai.
je finirai.
To restore,
I shall or will receive.
I shall or will restore. 4th ""
Recevoir, je recevrai,
Rendre,
je rendrai.
GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS.
505
Thou shalt or wilt love, thou shalt or | Tu aimeras.
wilt finish.
He shall or will love, he shall or will Il aimera.
finish.
Futurs.
Tu finiras.
We shall or will love, we shall or will Nous aimerons.
finish.
You shall or will love, you shall or Vous aimerez.
will finish.
They shall or will love, they shall or Ils aimeront.
will finish.
Thou shalt or wilt receive, thou shalt Tu recevras.
or wilt restore.
He shall or will receive, he shall or Il recevra.
will restore.
We shall or will receive, we shall or Nous recevrons.
will restore.
You shall or will receive, you shall Vous recevrez.
or will restore.
Il finira.
Nous finirons.
Vous finirez.
Ils finiront.
Tu rendras.
Il rendra.
Nous rendrons.
Vous rendrez.
They shall or will receive, they shall Ils recevront. (46¹.) Ils rendront.
or will restore.
The future tense is sometimes connected with if; sometimes with when.
3. In English, you may say: I will go, if he lends me his horse; or, If he
will lend me his horse. In the first: if he lends me, &c., lends is in the
present. In the second: If he will lend me, &c., will lend, appears to be
in the first future tense, although it is actually in the present; for, will lend,
in that case, does not mean shall lend, but is willing to lend, or agrees to
lend. Scholars are very apt, in similar sentences, to take the word will as
a sign of the future, and to use that tense in French, while they should use
the present. I will go if he lends me his horse, is readily and correctly
translated by: J'irai s'il me prête son cheval. But, I will go if he will
lend me his horse, is as readily but incorrectly translated by: J'irai s'il me
prêtera son cheval. It ought to be: J'irai s'il veut me prêter son cheval;
using the present tense of vouloir. Si, in all similar phrases, must be fol-
lowed in French by the present tense, never by the future. (462, Obs. 105,
and N.)
N. B. Translate if he, if they, by s'il and s'ils. In no other case is the
i of si cut off by an apostroph>.
4. On the contrary, the verb following quand, when, must be in the future
tense, although the English present is then used; as, I will go when you
do, (or when you go.) J'irai quand vous irez, (not vous allez.)
He will write it if you do.
He will write it when you do.
I will tell you of it, if you are here.
I will tell you of it, when you are
here.
Il l'écrira si vous l'écrivez.
Il l'écrira quand vous l'écrirez.
Je vous le dirai, si vous êtes ici.
Je vous le dirai, quand vous serez
ici. (46, Obs. 106.)
5. If, instead of when, quand, the words what, ce qui, ce que, as soon as,
42
506
GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS.
aussitôt que, dès que, after après que; as, comme, where, où, are used, the
French future must be employed.
She will sing what you please. (463,
Obs. 107.)
He will return as soon as you start.
Elle chantera ce qui vous plaira.
Elle chantera ce que vous voudrez.
Il reviendra aussitôt que vous par.
tirez.
We will do it after you have done it. Nous le ferons après que vous l'au
Ho will put it where you please.
He will do it as you wish.
rez fait.
Il le mettra où vous voudrez.
Il le fera comme vous le souhaiterez.
$147.-OF THE IMPERFECT.-De l'Imparfait.
1. The Imperfect of the Indícative, in all French verbs, ends as follows:
ais,
ais,
ait,
ions,
żex
aient. (59¹.)
Hence, as soon as one person is known, all the others may be formed.
2. The first person singular is formed from the present indicative by
changing the final ons of the first person plural to ais. As:
Nous
j', je
Avons,
avais,
tu
avais,
il, elle, on
avait,
nous
vous
avions,
aviez,
ils, elles
avaient.(1)
Croyons,
croyais,
croyais, croyait,
croyions,
croyiez,
croyaient.
Disons, disais,
disais, disait,
disions,
disiez,
disaient.
Faisons, (2) faisais, (2)
faisais,
faisait,
faisions,
faisiez,
faisaient.
from:
Fesons, (2) fesais,(2)
fesais,
fesait,
fesions, fesiez, fesaient.
We have begun with those verbs, because the scholar already knows some
of their persons; the four regular conjugations are as follows:-
PRESENTS.
We
nous
speak, parlons
finish,
finissons {
recei, recevons
Bell,
vendons
IMPERFECTS.
I was speaking,
used to speak.
I was finishing,
used to finish.
I was receiving,
used to receive.
I was selling,
used to sell.
IMPARFAITS.
Je parlais,
parlions,
Je finissais,
parlais,
parlait.
parliez,
finissais,
parlaient.
finissait.
finissuient.
finissions, finissiez,
Je recevais, recevais,
recevions, receviez,
Je vendais,
S vendions,
recevait.
recevaient.
vendais,
vendait.
vendiez,
vendaient.
We are.
I was, or
Nous sommes.
use to be.
}
J'étais,
étions,
étais,
était.
étiez,
étaient.
3 The only exception to this rule is:
1 The orthography of the first and second persons singular, and of the third person
singular and plural, of the imperfect, was formerly je parlois, tu parlois, il parloit,
ils parloient. Some authors still persist in this way of spelling, but they ought not
to be imitated. The orthography we follow was first proposed in 1675, by a lawyer
of the name of Bérain, and has since been adopted by the generality of French au-
thors. According to the ancient orthography, the conditionals, and other words, as
j'aimerais, paraître, disparaitre, faible, monnaie, Anglais, Français, Hollandais,
Irlandais, &c., were written: j'aimerois, paroître, disparoître, foible, monnoie,
Anglois, François, Hollandois, Irlandois, &c.
2 Faisais, fesais, whether spelt fai or fe, the first syllable in the plural of the
present, in all the imperfect future, nad conditionnel, is pronounced fe, the e being
muta,
GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS.
507
4. The imperfect expresses an action begun, but not ended at the past
time spoken of-or else as yet going on. I was writing at noon, means, 1
had begun to write, but I had not finished at noon. I used to ride when I was
in the country, means, I continued to ride, &c. The English given above,
corresponds to the French imperfect, and if it were always employed, there
would be no difficulty in the use of the French tense; but the other form
of the English imperfect, viz: 1 spoke, I finished, I received, I sold, is fre-
quently used; and thence the difficulty arises; for, I spoke, I finished, &c.,
must be translated by the French imperfect, only when they mean I was
speaking, or used to speak; was finishing, or used to finish, &c. (59¹, &c.)
5. When the first person plural of the present indicative ends in ions, as
nous oublions, we forget; nous rions, we laugh; nous prions, we pray;
the first and second persons plural of the imperfect of the indicative, have
double i. (60¹.) Ex. Nous oubliions, nous riions, &c.
6. When the same person plural ends in yons, put an i after the y. As,
Nous croyons, we think; nous croyions, we were thinking; nous employons,
use; nous employions, were using. And likewise, nous nous asseyions,
nous envoyions, essayions, and fuyions, voyions, &c. (60¹.)
§ 148.—POTENTIAL, IMPERFECT.-Conditionnel.
1. In every French verb it ends in: rais, rais, rait, rions, riez, raient.
2. Its first person singular is formed by adding s to the first person singular
of the French futur. (See 46¹, 2, &c.- 146.) Futur, rai; conditionnel, rais.
J'aurai, j'aurais. Consequently the conditionnel is irregular when the
future is. ( 146.)
I should have, thou wouldst have, he | J'aurais, tu aurais, il ou elle aurait.
or she would have.
We should have, you would have, Nous aurions, vous auriez, ils ou
they would have.
elles auraient.
I should be, thou wouldst be, he or
she would be.
Je serais, tu serais, il ou elle serait.
We should be, you would be, they Nous serions, vous seriez, ils ou elles
would be.
seraient.
parlerait.
I should speak, thou wouldst speak, Je parlerais, tu parlerais, il ou elle
he or she would speak.
We should speak, you would speak, Nous parlerions, vous parleriez, ils
they would speak.
ou elles parleraient.
3. As its name implies, the conditionnel is always connected with a con-
dition either expressed or understood. When si (if) accompanies it, that
si must be followed by the French imperfect,' regardless of the English
tense.
We have already seen (462, Obs. 105) that si, (if, meaning granting, that, &c.)
connects the futur and présent. Now, we add, that si connects the conditionnel
and imparfait. When si, however, means whether, it is followed by the condi-
tionnel. I do not know if (whether) I would go, even if (supposing that) I were
invited, Je ne sais pas si j'irais (cond.) même si j'étais (imparf.) invité.
503
GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS.
If I had money I would have a new Si j'avais de l'argent j'aurais un
habit neuf.
coat.
If thou couldst do this thou wouldst Si tu savais faire ceci tu voudrais
do that.
If he could he would.
If he would he could.
faire cela.
S'il pouvait il voudrait.
S'il voulait il pourrait.
4. COULD and wOULD, connected with the potential, always allude to a
future action, and are then translated by the conditionnel or by the imper-
fect after si. But COULD and WOULD, alluding to a past, instead of a future
action, are not to be rendered by the conditionnel, but by a past tense. I
COULD, by j'ai pu-je pouvais, &c. I WOULD, by j'ai voulu-je vou-
lais, &c.
I would go if I could.
Did John and his sister go to the
party last night? No; John could
not go, consequently she would
not go. (622, N. at page 326.)
J'irais, (cond:) si je pouvais. (impa.)
Jean et sa sœur sont-ils allés à la
partie hier soir? Non; Jean ne
pouvait pas y aller, conséquem-
ment elle n'a pas voulu y aller.
5. When I wish is followed by the English imperfect, it usually means:
I should like to, and must be translated by je voudrais, (622, N. 2.)
I wish I knew it-I had it.
(282, Obs. 65.)
I wish he knew it. (§ 151-12.)
Je voudrais le savoir-l'avoir. (R. 3.)
Je voudrais qu'il le sût.
{
§ 149.-POTENTIAL MOOD, PERFECT TENSE.-Conditionnel »
Composé.
1. This is formed from the present of the conditional of the auxiliary, and
the past participle of the verb to be conjugated. (60².)
I should, thou wouldst, he or she | J'aurais, tu aurais, il ou elle aurait
would have spoken.
parlé.
We should, you would, they would | Nous aurions, vous auriez, ils ou
have spoken.
I should, thou wouldst,
he or she would departed.
have
We should, you
would, they would departed.
have
elles auraient parlé.
Je serais, tu serais,
il ou elle serait
parti;
fem. partie.
Nous serions, vous
pl. mas. partis;
seriez, ils ou elles
seraient
pl. fem. par-
ties.
If I had received my money, I would | Si j'avais reçu mon argent, j'aurais
have bought new shoes.
acheté des souliers neufs.
If you had risen early, you would Si vous vous étiez levé de bonne
not have caught a cold.
heure, vous ne vous seriez pas en-
rhumé.
If she had come, would you have Si elle était venue, seriez-vous parti?
gone?
Had he been seen, he would have S'il avait été vu, il aurait été pris.
been zaken.
GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS.
509
2. With the conditionnel composé, si, (if,) is generally followed by the
pluperfect, as seen above.
3. Although grammarians usually give the imperfect of the potential
with its four signs, would, could, should, might, as a translation of the con-
ditionnel, students must not infer that the single French expression corre-
sponds accurately to the four English ones. Would usually stands for the
conditionnel, and so does should, when it does not mean ought to; but
could and might ought always to be expressed by the French verb pouvoir.
I would or should go, if I could.
I should or ought to go, if I could.
I could go, if I would.
I might go, if I would.
I ought to write, if I could. (§ 146.)
J'irais si je pouvais.
Je devrais y aller si je pouvais.
Je pourrais y aller si je voulais.
Je pourrais peut-être y aller, &c.
Je devrais écrire si je pouvais.
Let these be models of those different acceptations, and for the composé:
I would or should have gone, if I had | J'y serais allé si j'avais pu.
been able.
I should (ought to) have gone, had I J'aurais dû y aller si j'avais pu.
been able.
I could have gone, if I had wished.
I might have gone, if I had wished.
J'aurait pu y aller si j'avais voulu.
J'aurais peut-être pu y aller si j'avais
voulu.
4. When I wish is followed by the English pluperfect, it means I should
have liked, and must be translated by j'aurais voulu...
I wish I had been able to go.
I wish I had known it. (282, Obs. 65.)
We wish she had been able to go.
You wish we had known it sooner.
J'aurais voulu pouvoir y aller.
| J'aurais voulu le savoir. (R. 3.)
Nous aurions voulu qu'elle peut y
aller.
Vous auriez voulu que nous le
sussions plus tôt (que nous l'eus-
sions su.)
$150.-OF THE IMPERATIVE.-De l'Impératif.
1. In English, by omitting the nominative you of the second person
of the indicative mood, present tense, you obtain the second person plural
of the Imperative. As: Indicative present, you come, imperative, come;
you go, go; you write, write, &c. It is the same in French. Hence,
from vous venez, by omitting the nominative, vous, you obtain venez for the
imperative, second person plural. From vous allez, allez; from vous
Ecrivez, écrivez, &c.
1
How do you obtain the 2d person plu- | Comment obtenez-vous la 2de per-
ral of the imperative ?
sonne plur. de l'impératif?
By omitting, as in English, the nomi-
native, you, of the present indi-
cative.
En omettant, comme en Anglais,
le nominatif vous de l'indicatif
présent.
Are there any exceptions to this rule? Y a-t-il des exceptions à cette règle
43*
510
GRAMMATICAL SINOPSIS.
Yes, there are four in French, viz: | Oui, il y en a quatre en Français,
INDICATIF.
IMPÉRATIF.
Vous avez, you have. Ayez, have.
Vous savez, you know. Sachez, know.
know. Suchez, know.
savoir:
INDICATIF.
IMPÉRATIF.
Vous êles, you are.
Vous voulez, you will.
Soyez, be.
Veuillez, be
willing.
N. B. In reflective verbs there are two pronouns, vous, of the same per-
son, a nominative and objective one; Vous vous habillez, you dress your-
self. When, to form the imperative, you omit the nominative vous, you,
the objective vous, yourself, remains with the verb, viz: habillez-vous,
dress yourself; amusez-vous, enjoy yourself. (43)
HINT.-We have in this article put a few questions and answers in
French, to show the teacher and student how easily it can be done, and to
induce them to attempt it.
2. The first person plural is in French obtained by dropping the nori-
native nous, we. Hence, nous venons, we come, becomes venons, let us
come; nous allons, we go: allons, let us go; nous écrivons, we write;
écrivons, let us write, &c.
Comment obtenez-vous la 1re per- En omettant le nominatif nous du
sonne pluriel de l'impératif?
présent de l'indicatif.
3. Ayons, let us have; soyons, let us be; sachons, let us know; veuillons,
let us be willing, are the four exceptions to this rule.
4. Let me, laissez-moi, followed both in English and French by an infini-
te, as, Let me see, laissez-moi voir; let me go, laissez-moi aller; let me
be, laissez-moi être; let me have, laissez-moi avoir; let me read, laissez-
moi lire, &c., may be considered as the first person singular of the impera-
tive. This is an innovation, I know, therefore I merely suggest its adoption.
If introduced in the imperative of every verb, the expression, let me, laissez-
moi, so frequently used in both languages, will soon become perfectly
familiar. But if not placed there, as it has no other appropriate situation,
it is usually overlooked and not learned.
What can be considered as the first | Que peut-on considérer comme la
person singular of the imperative ?
Let me, followed by the infinitive of
the verb to be conjugated.
Let me do it-tell it to them.
Ire pers. sing. de l'impératif ?
Laissez-moi, suivi par l'infinitif du
verbe qu'on conjugue.
Laissez-moi le faire-le leur dire.
5. The second person singular is obtained, in all French verbs, from the
first person singular of the indicative, by omitting the pronoun je, I.
Present.
I speak,
Imperative.
speak thou.
Present.
Je parle,
Imperat. 2d pers. sing.
parle.¹
1 When the second person singular of the imperative ends in e, it takes s after it,
before the relative pronouns en, y. Ex. Offres en a la sœur, offer some to thy sister,
portcs-y tes livres, carry thy books thither. But when en is a preposition, the impe-
rative takes no s. Ex. Donne, en cette occasion, des preuves de ton zèle; Give, on
this occasion, proofs of thy zeal.
GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS.
511
Present.
I come,
I perceive,
I take,
Imperat. 2d pers. sing.
Imperative.
Present.
come thou.
Je viens,
perceive thou.
J'aperçois,
take thou.
Je prends,
viens.
aperçois.
prends.
The five following verbs must be excepted from this rule : j'ai, I have
imperat. aie, have thou; je suis, I am; sois, be thou; je vais, I go; va, gc
thou; je sais, I know; sache, know thou; je veux, I am willing; veuille,
be thou willing.
The imperative va takes s, when it is followed by the relative pronoun y.
Ex. Vas-y, go thou thither; but when there is another verb after the pro-
noun y, va must be written without an s. Ex. Va y donner l'ordre, go
thither to give the order; va y faire un tour, go thither to take a turn. In
the expression va-t'en, go away, an apostrophe must be placed after the
letter t, and not a hyphen, as it is not here the euphonic t, but te, an apos
trophe supplying the place of e before a vowel.
6. The third persons singular and plural are like the same persons of the
subjunctive present, (§ 151-1,) omitting the antecedent which governs that
mood, but retaining the que, and the pronouns il, ils, elle, elles, on. The
other persons admit of no pronouns before them. Let him go, qu'il aille;
let them come, qu'ils viennent; let any one speak, qu'on parle; come,
viens; let us see, voyons; know, sachez.
7. Imperative of the five irregular verbs :-
Let me have,have (thou), let him have. | Laissez-moi avoir,aie,
Let us have, have (ye),
qu'il ait.
let them h.
let him be.
Ayons.
Laissez-moi être, sois,
ayez,
qu'ils aient.
qu'il soit.
let them be.
Soyons,
soyez,
qu'ils soient.
Laissez-moi aller, va,
qu'elle aille.
allez,
qu'elles aillent.
Let me be, be (thou),
Let us be,
be (ye),
Let me go,
Let us go,
Let me
know,
Let us k.,
Let me be
willing,
go (thou),
lot her go.
go (ye),
let them go.
know (thou), let one know.
know (ye), let all know.
be willing, let him will.
Let us be w.,be willing, let them will.
8. Examples for the regular verbs:
Present.
Allons,
L.-moi savoir,
Sachons,
Laissez-moi
vouloir,
Veuillons,
Imperative.
sache, qu'on sache.
sachez, que tous sachent.
veuille, qu'il veuille.
veuillez,qu'ils veuillent
You
Vous
Let me
thou
speak,
parlez,
Laissez-m i parler,
parle,
finish, finissez,
receive, recevez,
finir,
finis,
recevoir,
reçois,
lose,
perdez,
NEGATIVELY.
perdre,
perds,
Let us
parlons,
you
parlez.
finissons, finissez.
recevons,
recevez.
perdons,
NÉGATIVEMENT.
perdez.
•
1
Let us not……….
Do (you) not...
Let me not Ne me laissez pas Do (thou) not.
no casse pas,
ne bâtis pas,
ne dois pas,
broak,
casser,
build,
bâtir,
owe,
devoir,
restore,
rendre,
ne rends pas,
ne cassons pas, ne cassez pas.
ne bâtissons pas, ne bâtissez pas
ne devons pas, ne devez pas.
ne rendons pas, ne rendez pas.
512
GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS.
Affirmatively, the objective pronouns are placed after: (0§ 54, 55, &c.)
Let me
look for it,
punish them,
perceive some,
sell it to you,
Laissez-moi Do (thou).....
le chercher,
les punir,
cherche-le,
punis-moi,
en apercevoir, aperçois-en,
Let us....
cherchons-le,
punissons-les,
Do....
cherchez-l'y.
punissez-nous,
apercevons-on, apercevez-en-un
vous le vendre, vends-le-lui, vendons-la-leur, vendez-nous-en.
y aller,
go there, to it,
take him there, l'y mener,
vas-y, (Ob.at) allons-y,
mènes-y-moi, menons-y-en,
Negatively, the objective pronouns are placed before.
Let me not Ne me laissez pas
Let us not....
allez-y.
menez-nous-y.
bring it,
l'apporter,
Do not....
ne les apporte
pas,
go there, to it,
y aller,
lend him any,
lui en prêter,
n'y va pas,
ne m'en prête
pas,
ne leur appor-
tons rien,
n'y allons pas,
ne le lui prêtons
plus,
owe them, to les leur devoir, ne lui dois rien, ne leur en de-
them,
vons pas,
Impératif des Verbes Réfléchis.
Do not....
n'en apportez
plus.
n'y allez plus.
ne .a leur prêtez
pas.
ne la lui devoz
pas.
Let me
dress myself,
cure myself,
sit down,
put myself,
go away,
Laissez-moi thyself,
m'habiller,
habille-toi,
me guérir,
guéris-toi,
m'asseoir,
assieds-toi,
mets-toi,
me mettre,
m'en aller,
ourselves,
yourself-ves.
habillons-nous, habillez-vous.
guérissons-nous, guérissez-vouз.
asseyons-nous, asseyez-vouɛ.
mettons-nous,
mettez-vous.
va-t'en,(N. B. at 1.) allons-nous-en,
allez-vous-en
NEGATIVEMENT.
Let me not
go to bed,
Ne me laissez pas
me coucher,
Do not....
ne te couche
pas,
ne nous cou-
chons pas,
run away,
m'enfuir,
Do not....
ne v. couchez p
ne t'enfuis pas, ne nous enfuyons ne v. enfuyez p.
Let us not....
laugh at,
go away,
me rire de....
m'en aller,
pas,
ne te ris pas de, ne n. rions p. de, ne v. riez p.
de
ne t'en va pas, ne n. en allons p. ne v. en allez pas.
9. Let him have, qu'il ait, Let us have, ayons, having always been used in
English-French grammars, is it not strange, that let me have, should not
have been introdu :ed?
10. Let me may also be translated by the second person singular, viz :
laisse-moi aller, let (thou) me go; laisse-moi prendre, let (thou) me
take, &c.
11. Let him have it, may be translated in two ways: first, by qu'il l'ait,
as it is generally in grammars, or, secondly, by laissez-le l'avoir. Let us
write them; may be rendered, first, by écrivons-les, or laissez-nous les écrire.
These expressions, however, are not synonymous. The first, meaning,
we must set about writing them, the second, requesting leave to do it.
12. Come and see me, do. Take your pencil and write, are expressions
frequently used in English. The French sometimes translate them literally,
and say: prenez votre crayon et écrivez; but they more frequently put the
second verb in the infinitive mood instead of the imperative, as: Prenez
votre crayon pour écrire; venez me voir, je vous en prie, &c. (§ 54, Except.
GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS.
513
◊ 151.-SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.-Mode Subjonctif.
PRESENT TENSE.-Présent.
1. In all French verbs, it ends in e, es, e, ions, iez, ent.
To form it, attend to this Rule:-1.
1st part.-The THIRD person plural is exactly like that of the PRESENT
INDICATIVE; from which, by dropping the nt, you obtain the first and third
persons singular. An s added to either, gives the second.
2d part. The first and second persons plural are exactly like those of the
imperfect.
The following are regularly formed :-
They
come,
drink,
ils quoiqu'ils je
viennent, viennent,
boivent, boivent,
vienne,
boive,
tu
viennes, vienne,
boives, boive,
il
nous
Vous
venion. veniez.
buvions, ruviez.
me to go,
thee to go, him to go,
tu ailles, il ailles,
us to go,
you to go
Exceptions, eight in all:
1. It is time for them to go;
Il est temps qu'ils aillent;
2. Although they can;
Quoiqu'ils puissent;
3. In case they are worth;
En cas qu'ils vaillent;1
4. He wishes them to have
Il veut qu'ils aient;
5. On condition they will;
A condition qu'ils veuillent;
6. Not that they know of;
Pas qu'ils sachent;
7. Without their boing so ;
Sans qu'ils le soient;
8. They had better do it;
j'aille,
I cun,
puisse,
thou canst, he,
\vailles,
ait,
n. allions, v. alliez.
we,
puissions, puissiez.
we are,
you can.
you are.
valiez.1
you to.
ayez.
you.
voulions, vouliez.
puisses,
puisse,
I am,
thou art,
he is,
vaille,
vaille,
valions,
;
me to,
thee to,
her to,
aie,
aies,
us to,
ayons,
I,
thou,
he, her,
we,
veuille,
I know of,
veuilles,
sache,
iny,
le sois,
thou,
saches,
thy,
le sois,
veuille,
he, she,
we,
sache,
his, her,
our,
le soit,
I had,
thou,
hé,
we,
le fasse,
Il vaut mieux qu'ils le fassent; le fasse, le fasses,
you.
sachions, sachiez.
your.
le soyons, le soyez.
you.
fassions fassiez.
2. The use of the subjunctive mood (as its name implies) depends in
French, on some antecedent, ending with que or qui, which antecedent
governs that mood. The antecedent may be a verb or a conjunction.2 As
the indicative is the mood of affirmation, the subjunctive is the mood of
indecision, of doubt. If then the verbal antecedent affirms with precision, with
positiveness, the indicative must be used after que or qui; but if the verbal
antecedent expresses indecisio doubt, then the subjunctive is to be used
after the connecting word que or qui. For instance, when we say: I know
he is here, I am certain that he is here, a positive affirmation is expressed, by
the antecedent, and on that account no other turn could be given to the
second verb, is; it would be contradictory to say: I am certain he may be
here. Hence, the indicative is used after; and we must say: Je sais, je
¹ Prévaloir,* to prevail, is regular in the present of the subjunctive, and formed
from prévalent, they prevail.
2 The conjunction if (si) is the most frequent attendant of the English subjunc-
tive; but in French that mood is seldom governed by si, which is, we know, usually
connected with the present and imperfect indicative, (462, Obs. 105-§ 148, N. 1.)
514
GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS.
suis certain qu'il est ici. But when you say: It is possible, it is doubtful
that he is here, indecision, doubt, is expressed by the antecedent, and another
turn may be given to the second verb, such as: It is possible he may be
here, for him to be here-It is doubtful whether he is here or not; his being
here is doubtful, and consequently the subjunctive must be used after it.
Il est possible, il est douteux, qu'il soit ici. Certainty or uncertainty is then
the great theoretical criterion by which the use of the subjunctive is deter-
mined or ascertained. This, however, does not apply to the antecedents
that always require the subjunctive, but merely to some particular cases
that will be further explained.
Grammarians have given rules based on the signification of verbs, saying
that the subjunctive is to be used if the antecedent expresses surprise, de-
spair, complaint, admiration, will, wish, consent, forbidding, hindrance,
doubt, fear, ignorance, apprehension, order, command, and they generally
wind up this comprehensive enumeration by the very definite expression, or
any affection of the mind. To find the true sense of a verb, requires a gram-
matical acumen, not generally possessed by pupils; therefore, as something
more practical is desirable, let pupils attend to the following Rule, as calcu-
lated, in most cases, to direct them accurately.
RULE 2. When the verb in the second part is connected with
1. May, 2. should, 3. whether,
4. for me to be, thee to be, or any other infinitive,
5. my being, thy being, or any other present par-
ticiple or noun;
or, if not connected, can
be turned to any of them,
as shown above, then
that second part must be
in the subjunctive mood in French; but in the indicative, if no such alteration
can be made. As a further illustration, let us examine the following sen-
tences.
1. I deserve to be laughed at.
2. I hope to be laughed at.
The second part, to be laughed at,
may be altered, but mark the differ-
ence in the alteration.
1. I deserve that people should laugh at me.
2. I hope that people will (not should) laugh at me.
The word will gives to the second sentence a decisive, a precise meaning,
which is not conveyed by the word should in the first. Hence the second
is translated in French by the future of the indicative, the first by the sub-
junctive present.
1. Je mérite qu'on se moque de moi. (sub.)Į Do the two verbs, I deserve
2. J'éspère qu'on se moquera de moi. (ind.) and I hope, express affections
of the soul or not? How inadequate are those wholesale rules! And how
perplexed must the student be when he has no other guide!
As a first corollary to Rule 2, we say that, after a French verb, filowed
by que or qui, if the fourth or fifth English form above is to be translated, it
must be by the French subjunctive. He wishes me to laugh, il veut que je
rie. He is pleased at our speaking, il est content que nous parlions.
As a second corollary, that, after a French verb followed by que or qui,
the infinitive of a passive verb, that can be changed to should, must be trans.
lated by the French subjunctive, with the indefinite pronoun on as a nomi-
native, as in the example, I deserve to be laughed at. (77¹, Note.)
GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS.
515
3. When the antecedent is a superlative, or a word having a superlative
meaning; such as le seul, l'unique, the only one; le premier, the first;
le dernier, the last, and any ordinal number, deuxième, &c., the subjunctive
follows.
God has made to man.
The gospel is the finest present that | L'Évangile est le plus beau présent
que Dieu ait fait aux hommes.
It is the first, the last, the only C'est le premier, le dernier, le seul
vo ume that we have.
volume que nous ayons.
4. When the antecedent is a unipersonal verb, or used unipersonally :-
He must come,
It is suitable ho should do it.
It is right for him to know it.
Il faut qu'il vienne.
Il convient qu'il le fasse.
Il est juste qu'il le sache.
Except: Il s'ensuit, it follows; il résulte, it results; il arrive, there
happens, and il est, accompanied by an adjective denoting evidence, certainty,
probability; such as; clair, clear: certain, certain; évident, evident; vras,
true; probable, pr bable, &c., which govern the indicative, when affirma-
tively used, but follow, when interrogative, negative, or conditional.
It follows from it that you are my | Il s'ensuit, il résulte, que vous êtes
friend.
mon ami.
It often happens that one is deceived. Il arrive souvent qu'on est trompé.
5. When the antecedent is interrogative, negative, or conditional. (The
words peu, little; à peine, hardly, having a negative meaning, come under
this rule.)
I believe we have some.
Do you believe we have any?
I do not think that we have any.
We have but few men who can
do it.
Je crois que nous en avons.
Croyez-vous que nous en ayons ?
Je ne crois pas que nous en ayons.
Nous avons peu d'hommes qui puis-
sent le faire.
He has hardly a scholar who can Il a à peine un écolier qui puisse le
translate it.
traduire.
If it be true that you have it,
If it is true that you have it,
is:
is:
S'il est vrai que vous l'ayez; while
S'il est vrai que vous l'avez; the in-
dicative is used because there is no supposition, no condition implied, the
meaning being positive, Since you have it, and not conditional, as in the
first sentence, which means: Should you have it.
vous soyez mon ami.
It is not certain, true, sure, that you | Il n'est pas certain, vrai, sûr que
be my friend.
One is not frequently deceived by Il n'arrive pas souvent qu'on soit
one's friends.
trompé par ses amis.
6. Any verb expressing fear, such as craindre, to fear; avoir peur, to
be afraid; when used affirmatively, governs the subjunctive with ne before
it. But ne is not used if the phrase is interrogative, negative, or condi
tional. (78¹.)
7. When the verbs mentioned at 6 are used negatively, they govern the
subjunctive without ne. (784.)
516
GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS.
8. The verbs douter, to doubt, and nier, to deny, when negative, require
ne before the subjunctive. (784.)
9. The conjunction que employed in the second member of a sentence
to avoid the repetition of a conjunction used in the first, governs the same
mood as the word it stands for. (783.)
10. The word que, used to avoid the repetition of ai and of other con-
junctions such as afin que, soit que, sans que, avant que, &c., governs the
sub'inctive. (783.)
1. Quelque, whatever, whatsoever, however, is connected in three ways
and always governs the subjunctive.
1st WAY. Quelque (before an adjective, used without a noun) is indecli
nable. (80¹.)
2d WAY. Quelque before a noun (accompanied or not by an adjective;
agrees with that noun. (801)
3d WAY. Immediately before a verb, whatever, whatsoever, is rendered, in
French, by two words, quel and que. And then, quel, alone, agrees with
the subject of the verb-que is invariable. (80¹.)
12. As the antecedent belongs to the indicative mood, it is necessary to
give rules for the correspondence of the tenses of the indicative and sub
junctive.
1. If the antecedent is present or future, it governs the present or perfect
of the subjunctive.
You must come.
Il faut que vous veniez.
You will have to come, (be necessary Il faudra que vous veniez.
for you.)
You must have come when I was out.
Il faut (il faudra) que vous soyez,
venu quand j'étais dehors.
If a condition is annexed, then use the imperfect and pluperfect.
I do not think you would do it if you | Je ne crois pas que vous le fissiez
were not compelled.
si l'on ne vous y contraignait.
I do not think you would have done it Je ne crois pas que vous l'eussiez
had you not been compelled.
2. The imperfect, the past tenses,
and the conditionnels require
I was not certain you would come.
I was not sure you would have come.
I wish you had more fortitude.
(622, N. 2.)
}
fait si l'on ne vous y eût contraint.
The imperfect and pluperfect. (792.)
Je n'étais pas sûr que vous vinssiez.
Je n'étais pas sûr que vous fussiez
venu.
Je voudrais que vous eussiez plus da
fermeté.
13. Whatever or whatsoever (meaning all things soever) is generally ex-
pressed by quelque chose que ou quoi que, quoi que ce soit que, when at the
beginning of a sentence, and only by quoi que ce soit ou fût, after a verb.
The subjunctive follows that French antecedent. (80¹.)
Whoever, whomsoever, qui que ce soit, qui que ce fût, also governs the
subjunctive. (80¹.)
เ
GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS.
517
14. If the verb which follows qui, que, dont, de ce, où, expresses doubt,
uncertainty, &c., use the subjunctive. If not, the indicative. (802.)
15. The subjunctive is employed at the beginning of a sentence, to
express surprise, a desire, or an imprecation; and also ingad of quand
même, though, or si, if, suppressed. (802.)
IMPERFECT.-Imparfait. (79¹.)
◊ 152.-The Imperfect of the subjunctive is formed from the prétérit,
(68¹, § 153,) by changing the final ai into asse, for the verbs of the first con-
jugation, and by adding se to those of the other three conjugations. As
the prétérit has four sets of terminations: 1st, ai; 2d, is; 3d, us; 4th,
ins; this imperfect has also four. The first set, as with the prétérit,
belongs exclusively to the first conjugation. Those sets are :-
Connecting them with verbs, we will have
1st set,
2d
asse,
isse,
asses,
isses,
ât,
ît,
assions,
assiez,
assent.
issions,
issiez,
issent.
3d <<
4th "
usse,
usses,
ût,
ussions,
ussiez,
ussent.
insse, insses, înt,
inssions,
inssiez,
inssent.
1st. Although I spoke,
quoique jo parlasse,
(from parlai.)
(from dis.)
Tu disses, il dît,
(from j'eus.)
(from tins.)
Tu parlasses, il parlât, nous parlassions, vous parlassiez, ils parlassent.
2d. I had to say, to tell,
3d. Whether I had,
Tu eusses,
nous dissions,
il eût, nous eusssions,
4th. Provided I held, I kept,
Tu tinsses, il tint, nous tinssions,
il fallait que je disse,
vous dissiez, ils dissent.
soit que j'eusse,
vous eussiez, ils eussent.
pourvu que je tinsse,
vous tinssiez, ils tinssent.
No exception. Attend to your list of antécédents.
This imperfect is used after the indicative imperfect, all past tenses, and
the conditionnels. (§ 151-2.)
Perfect, (page 418.)
Pluperfect, (p. 419.)
Parfait.
Plusqueparfait.
$153.-INDICATIVE, SECOND IMPERFECT.-Prétérit.2
The Prétérit of the indicative mood has, for regular verbs, three sets of
1 Lindley Murray defines it thus: "The imperfect tense represents the action or
event, either as past and finished, or as remaining unfinished at a certain time past:
as, "I loved her for her modesty and virtue," "They were travelling post when he
met them." The French Prétérit corresponds only to the first clause, viz: to the
action or event past and finished, or to R. C. Smith's definition, which is: The im-
perfect tense expresses what took place in time past, however distant: as, "John.
died."
2 I merely use the word Pretérit without the adjective défini (usually added) be-
cause the pupil will more easily distinguish the two tenses; one being the Prétérit,
another the Prétérit antérieur, (683). If those terms, definite and indefinite, were
applied to the English tenses, it would be advisable, perhaps necessary to retain
them in French, but as they are new to the American student, they are more per-
plexing than useful. The French themselves, in speaking of that tense, call it more
frequently Frétérit, than Pretérit défini. After all, as the adjective défini would
convey but an indefinite idea to the pupil, its use may be indefinitely postponed.
44
518
GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS.
terminations, formed from their past participles. By changing, for the first
conjugation, é to
ai, as,
a, âmes, âtes, erent, you have the first set.
For the second and fourth conjugations, i and u to
is, is, it, îmes, îtes, irent, you have the second set.
For the third conjugation, u to
us, us, ut, ûmes, ûtes, urent, you have the third set.
The prétérit of all regular verbs, without exception, may be formed by
the rules given above. The first set belongs exclusively to the first conju-
gation. There is a fourth set, viz: ins, ins, int, înmes, întes, inrent,
which belongs exclusively to the irregular verbs tenir, venir, and their
compounds.
EXAMPLES FOR THE REGULAR VERBS.
Infin.
Part.
Prétérits.
Passés.
Je
tu
il, on
nous
Parler,
parlé.
parlai,
parlas,
parla,
Finir, fini.
finis,
finis,
finit,
Recevoir, reçu.
recus,
reçus,
reçut,
Vendre, vendu. vendis, vendis, vendit,
VO: 3 ils, elles
parlames, parla tes, parlèrent,
finîmes, finites, finirent,
reçûmes, reçutes, reçurent,
vendîmes, vendites, vendirent.
1. These rules even apply to many of the irregular verbs, by premising
that their past participles in i, is, it, take the second set, viz: is, is, it, &c.,
while those ending in u take the third set, viz: us, us, ut, &c., if not
found in the list we will give of irregular formations.
EXAMPLES FOR IRREGULAR VERBS FORMED BY THE RULES.
Infin. Part.
Pretérits of the second set, (de la 2de série.)
Passés.
Je
tu
il, on
nous
Vous ils, elles
Sentir,*
senti.
sentis,
sentis,
sentit,
sentîmes, sentîtes, sentirent.
Mettre,* mis.
mis,
mis,
mit,
&c.
Prendre,* pris.
pris,
pris,
prit,
&c.
Dire,*
dit.
dis,
dis,
dit,
&c.
tins,
vins,
tins,
vins,
The following irregular verbs are
Courir,* couru. courus,
Connaître,* connu.
connus,
vécus,
Vivre,* vécu.
Tenir,* tenu.
Venir,* venu.
Prétérits de la 3me série.
courus, courut, courûmes, courûtes, coururent.
connus, connut, &c.
&c.
Fourth set, exclusively for tenir, venir, and their compounds.
tinrent.
vînmes, vîntes, vinrent.
exceptions to the rules:-
tint, tînmes, tîntes,
vint,
Infinitive.
Past Part.
Preterit Definite.
Couvrir,*
to cover,
Offrir,*
to offer,
Ouvrir,
to open,
couvert.
offert.
ouvert.
Je couvris,
is, it, îmes, îtes, irent.
J'offris,
(C
((
CC
J'ouvris,
66
(6
(C
((
<<
Souffrir,*
to suffer,
Mourir,*
to die,
Vêtir,*
to clothe,
souffert.
mort.
vêtu.
Je mourus,
Je vêtis,
Je souffris, (C ((
us, ut, ûmes, Otes, uzent
is, it, îmes, îtes, irent
((
((
Voir,*
to see,
vu
Je vis,
"C
(C
(C
"(
((
Prévoir,
to foresee,
Ceindre,*
to gird,
prévu.
ceint.
Je prévis,
((
(C
Astreindre, to restrain,
astreint.
Je ceignis, (( ((
J'astreignis,
((
((
((
(( (C
(6
((
(6
Craindre,*
to fear,
craint.
Je craignis,
((
""
((
((
GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS.
619
Infinitive.
Empreindre,* to imprint,
Enfriendre,* to infringe,
Past Part.
empreint.
Preterit Definite.
J'empreignis, is, it, îmes, îtes, irent
enfreint.
J'enfreignis,
(C
}
Epreindre,* to squeeze,
épreint.
J'épreignis,
((
((
((
Feindre,*
to feign,
feint.
Je feignis,
(C
(C
(C
(C
Joindre,*
to join,
joint.
Je joignis,
tr
((
(C
Oindre,*
to anoint,
oint.
J'oignis,
((
"C
("
(6
lein re,*
to paint,
peint.
Je peignis,
(6
(C
((
(<
Plaindre,*
to lament,
plaint.
Je plaignis,
((
((
((
"
Restreindre,* to restrain,
restreint.
Je restreignis,
(( "
(C
((
((
Teindre,*
to dye,
teint.
Je teignis,
(C
"(
(L.
(1
в 6
Caire,*
to cook,
cuit.
Je cuisis,
((
Conduire,*
to conduct,
conduit.
Je conduisis,
<<
(C
(6
*
*
Construire,* to construct, construit.
Détruire,"
to destroy,
détruit.
Je construisis, "
Je détruisis,
((
(C
((.
(C
Enduire,*
to lay over,
enduit.
J'enduisis, ((
((
(
Ir uire,*
to induce,
induit.
J'induisis,
tr
((
(
(C
Instruire,*
to instruct,
instruit.
J'instruisis,
<<
((
Introduire,*
to introduce, introduit.
J'introduisis,
((
(6
((
(C
Réduire,*
to reduce,
réduit.
Je réduisis,
((
((
((
66
Séduire,*
to seduce,
séduit.
Je séduisis,
<<
((
((
((
(C
Traduire,*
to translate, traduit.
Je traduisis,
((
Luire,*
to shine,
lui.
Je luisis,
((
(
،،
((
Nuire,*
to hurt,
nui.
Je nuisis,
((
(C
((
66
Coudre,*
to sew,
cousu.
Je cousis,
(<
((
८८
Ecrire,*
to write,
écrit.
J'écrivis,
(C
(1
((
،،
Etre,*
to be,
été.
Je fus,
Faire,*
to do,
fait.
Je fis,
Naître,*
to be born,
né.
Je naquis,
fus, fut, âmes, ates, urent.
fis, fit, fîmes, fîtes, firent.
is, it, îmes, îtes, irent.
Vaincre,*
to vanquish, vaincu.
Je vainquis,
#
(C
<<
REMARK.
The learner will remark, that in the above list some irregular verbs follow
the conjugation of others; thus we see three verbs conjugated exactly like
couvrir, to cover, viz: offrir, to offer; ouvrir, to open; souffrir, to suffer:
venir, to come, we see conjugated like tenir, to hold; twelve verbs after
ceindre, to gird; ten after cuire, to bake, to cook; and one after luire, to
shine, viz: nuire, to hurt. Now this is not only the case with respect to the
prétérit défini of these verbs, but for all the other tenses. It would therefore
be of essential importance to the learner to commit them to memory in the
order we have given them, as by their help the greatest difficulties of the
irregular verbs are almost overcome.
USE OF THE PRÉTÉRIT.
2. We saw (33¹) that the parfait not only conveys an allusion to the pre-
sent, but also refers to actions past at a time wholly expired. Now the
student must be informed that the prétérit has no connexion with the
présent, but only refers to "actions and events past and finished:" (Murr)
It cannot be used in connexion with this century, this year, this month, this
day or to-day, this morning, because the time is not wholly expired; but it
may be used in connexion with last century, last year, &c. and with yester.
day, because the time is then wholly past. Hence, yesterday, limits its
approach to the present. Accordingly we may say: JE LE VIS l'année der
520
GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS.
nière, I SAW HIM last year; le mois dernier, last month; il y a quinze jours,
a fortnight ago; hier, yesterday; and there stops the use of the prétérit.
To express I saw him to-day, this morning, this week, &c., say: Je l'ai
vu aujourd'hui, ce matin, cette semaine, &c., and not je le vis; because
the time is not fully past.
In colloquial intercourse, when the time is wholly past, the prétérit and
parfait may be used the one for the other, that is: I saw him last week-
Cæsar conquered Gaul; may be translated either by: Je le vis ou je l'ar
vu la semaine passée-César conquit ou a conquis la Gaule. But when the
time is unexpired, the prétérit cannot replace the parfait. So, I sold my
house this year, must be rendered by j'ai vendu ($145) ma maison cette
année-ci, (time unexpired,) and not by je vendis ($153) ma maison cette
année-ci.
3. On the other hand, in narrating events long past, or historical facts,
the prétérit is the tense to be used, to the exclusion of the parfait. As
soon as he saw his enemy, he drew his sword and began with him, c.
Dès qu'il vit (not a vu) son ennemi, il tira son épée et commença avec lui,
&c. ($153.)
N. B. The French, to give more animation to the narration, frequen
use the present tense instead of the prétérit, and say: Dès qu'il voit son
ennemi, il tire son épée et commence avec lui, &c. It is in English usually
translated by the imperfect, although they, themselves, use the present
tense for the same purpose.
§ 154.-PLUPERFECT (682)-Plusqueparfait.
is formed from the imperfect of the auxiliary with the past participle, and
used pretty much like the English pluperfect.
Had you not spent your money when | N'aviez-vous pas dépensé votre ar-
you asked me for some?
gent quand vous m'en demandátes?
Besides the plusqueparfait (682) formed by the French imparfait and past
participle, there is another tense formed by the prétérit and past participle,
called Prétérit Antérieur, (anterior,) viz: J'eus fini, I had finished; Nous
eûmes dîné, we had dined. As the English have no tense corresponding to
it, they have to translate both this tense and the plusqueparfait exactly
in the same way; consequently, the American student is frequently at a
loss, to know which of the French tenses he is to select. We will try, by
explanations and examples, to lessen the difficulty.
The imparfait (591) expresses an action begun but not ended, or, as going
on at the past time spoken of. The prétérit, (68¹,) on the contrary, refers
to an action or event past and finished, or of which the time is fully expired.
It is this distinction of the simple tenses, which, passing into the compound,
must be kept in view, and which, in many instances, will enable the learner
to choose the proper French tense.
As there is no English tense corresponding to the French, I offer
155.-The 2d PLUPERFECT.-Prétérit Antérieur.
The Prétérit Antérieur (683) is formed by the prétérit of the auxiliary and
the past participle of the verb to be conjugated.
GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS.
521
It expresses an action quickly or instantaneously done, and is seldom
used, except after the adverbial conjunctions,
Aussitôt, or sitôt que, dès que,
As soon as,
After.
No sooner.
When.
Scarcely.
d'abord que.
Après que.
Pas plutôt.
Lorsque, quand.
À peine.
EXAMPLES.
He has done in a moment.
Il eut fini en un moment (instanter.)
As soon as I had done my work, I Aussitôt que j'eus fini mon ouvrage,
carried it to him.
When I had dressed myself, I went out.
je le lui portai.
Quand je me fus habillé, je sortis.
For its practical use, the student may be governed by the following plain
directions. In similar sentences, there are usually two tenses, one simple
and one compound.
RULE 1.—If the adverbial conjunction, when, as soon as, &c., is before
the simple tense, the compound tense is necessarily the plusqueparfait. (68%.
RULE 2.-If the conjunctive adverb is before the compound tense, tha
compound tense must again be the plusqueparfait, provided the simple tense
is an imparfait, but should the simple tense be a prétérit, then the compound
tense must be the prétérit antérieur. (683.)
§ 156.-INFINITIVE.-Infinitif.
1. Prepositions, in English, govern the present participle, except to,
which governs the infinitive. On the contrary, the infinitive is governed by
every French preposition, except the preposition en, which governs the
present participle.
He speaks of coming.
We like to walk, after we have done
our duty.
After coming, he rested.
After dressing, we went out.
Il parle de venir.
Nous aimons à promener, après avoir
fait notre devoir.
Après être arrivé, il se reposa.
Après nous être habillés, nous sor-
tîmes.
Remark that the French preposition après is always followed by the infi-
nitive of the auxiliary avoir or être; while in English the present participle
of those auxiliaries having and being, are usually left out and replaced by
the present participle of the following verb. For instance, instead of
After having drunk his tea, he felt | Après avoir bu son thé, il se trouva
better;
mieux; (40¹), (R. 1, N. 1.)
You may say: After drinking his tea, &c.; but the French cannot be con-
tracted.
2. When two verbs come together, without being joined by a conjunction,
the latter is governed by the former in the infinitive, sometimes with and
sometimes without a preposition.
IMPORTANT REMARK.-If the verb has no preposition, it may receive any
one the sense requires; but, if it has a particular one, that particular one
rejects every other, and must invariably attend the verb. It is so in English
44*
522
GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS.
as well as in French. For instance, as the verbs will, dure, let, &c., have
no preposition, we must say without preposition, I will say, I dare say, 1
"et
go; and not with the preposition to, or any other, I will to say, &c. On
the contrary, to like, to have, &c., requiring the preposition to, we must
say, I like to see, I have to write, &c., and not, without any, I like see, I¨
have write, &c. It is the same in French. The verbs vouloir, oser, laisser,
&c., requiring no preposition, we must say, je veux dire, j'ose dire, je
laisse aller; and not je veux à dire, j'ose pour dire, &c. On the contrary,
cimer, avoir, &c., taking à, we must say, j'aime à voir, j'ai à écrire, &c.,
and not j'aime voir, j'ai écrire, &c.
3. Sometimes the English verb requires no preposition, while the French
has one-To answer, répondre à, (21¹.) Sometimes the English has one, and
the French none-To listen to, écouter, (253.) At other times the English.
has of, and the French à-To think of, penser à, (532.) Then the English
has to, and the French de-To permit to, permettre de, (652.) But in every
case each English and each French verb retains its own particular struc-
ture. ($50.)
4. French VERBS that govern others without a preposition:—
Aimer mieux;
Aller;
Apercevoir;
Assurer;
Croire ;
Compter;
Daigner;
Déclarer;
Devoir;
Entendre;
Envoyer;
Espérer;
Faillir;
Faire;
Fall ir;
s' Imaginer;
Laisser ;
Nier ;
Oser;
Paraître ;
Penser;
Prétendre;
Pouvoir;
Reconnaître ;
Regarder ;
Retourner;
Savoir ;
•
Sembler;
Souhaiter;
J'aime mieux le faire.1
Allons nous promener.
Je l'aperçois mouvoir
Il assure l'avoir fait.
Il croit me tromper.
Il compte partir sous peu.
Daignez me dire quand.
Il déclare le savoir.
Il doit me l'envoyer.
Je l'entends parler.
Envoyez-le chercher.
J'espère le rencontrer.
Il a failli me voir.
Qu'avez-vous fait venir?
Il faut lui aider.
Je m'imagine y être.
Laissez-le dire et faire.
Il nie l'avoir.
Il n'ose l'avouer.
Il paraît l'entendre.
Il a pensé tomber.
Prétend-il le faire?
Il n'a pas pu me le dire.
Je reconnais l'avoir dit.
Je vous regarde faire.
Elle retourna la voir.
Il sait où la trouver.
Elle semble avoir peur.
Je souhaite la voir.2
I would rather do it.
Let us go to take a walk.
I perceive it move.
•
He asserts to have done it.
He thinks to deceive me.
He purposes to go soon.
Deign to tell me when.
He declares he knows it.
He is to send it to me.
I hear him speak.
Send for it, or to fetch it.
I expect to meet him.
He missed seeing me.
What did you send for?
It is necessary to help him.
I fancy myself to be there.
Let him say and do.
He denies having it.
He dares not confess it.
He seems to understand it.
He had like to have fallen.
Does he pretend to do it?
He could not tell it me.
I acknowledge to have said it
I am looking at you doing it.
She returned to see him.
He knows where to find her.
She seems to be afraid.
I wish to see her.
¹ Aimer mieux, valo'r mieux, followed by another verb in the infinitive, requiro d
before the second infinitive; as,
I would rather stay than go.
It is better to go than stay alone.
J'aimerais mieux rester que d'y aller.
Il vaut mieux y aller que de rester seul.
2 Souhaiter may also be used with de; as, Je souhaite de voir, or de le voir,
wish to see him.
GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS.
523
Soutenir;
Valoir mieux;
Venir;
Voir;
Vouloir;
Il soutient l'avoir vu.
Il vaut mieux lui écrire.1
Viendrez-vous me voir:2
Je vois venir votre sœur.
Elle ne veut pas rester.
He maintains he has seen it.
It is better to write to her.
Will you come to see me?
I see your sister coming.
She will not stay.
5. FRENCH VERBS and ADJECTIVES that govern the following infinitive
by means of the preposition à.
N. B. This usually takes place after nouns, used in a partitive sense; as:
He has pleasure in seeing her.
Is there vanity in thinking so?
'Abaisser à,
Accoutumer à,
Admettre à,
Stoop to.
Il a du plaisir à la voir. (212, 252.)
Y a-t-il de la vanité à le penser ?
Désagréable à, de,3 Disagreeable to.
Admirable à, de,3
Accustom to.'
Admit to.
Wonderful to.
Destiner à,
Destine to.
Déterminer à,
Resolve upon.
Difficile à, de,3
Difficult to.
Affreux à, de,3
Dreadful to.
Diligent à,
Diligent to.
Agréable à, de,3
Agreeable to.
Disposer à,
Aider à,
Help to.
Donner à,
Dispose to.
Give to.
Aimer à,
Like to.
s'Echauffer à,
Heat to.
Aisé a,
s'Efforcer à,
Spend one's self t‹n.
Amuse to, with.
Effroyable à, de,3
Frightful to.
Amuser à.
Animer à,
#'Appliquer à,
Apprendre à,
s Apprêter à,
Aspirer à,
Assidu à,
s'Attacher à,
Autoriser à,
A voir à,
Beau à, de,3
Bon à, de, 3
Charmant à,
Chercher à,
Condamner à,
Condescendre à,
Easy to.
Animate to.
Apply to.
Learn to.
Get ready to.
Aspire to.
Assiduous to.
Stick to.
Authorise to.
Have to.
Fine to.
Good to.
Charming to.
Seek to.
Condemn to.
Condescend to,
Consist to, in.
Employer à,
Encourager à,
Enclin à,
Engager à,
Enhardir à,
Enseigner à,
s'Etudier à,
Etre à,
Exact à,
Exercer à
Exciter à,
Exposer à,
Facile, à, de,3
se Fatiguer à,
Forcer à, de,4
Gagner à,
Habile à,
Employ to, Use lo.
Encourage to.
Inclined to.
Induce to.
Embolden to.
Teach to.
Study to.
Be to.
Exact to.
Exercise to.
Excite to.
Expose to.
Easy to.
Get tired with.
Force to.
Gain to.
Clever to.
Accustom to.
Consister à,
Contraindre à, de,4
Compel to,
Contribute to.
Ask to.
Habituer à,
Hésiter à,
Hesitate to.
Spend to, in.
Horrible à, de,3
Horrid to.
Last to.
Inciter à,
Incite to.
•
Contribuer à,4
Demander à,
Dépenser à,
Dernier à,
1 See Note 2, page 522.
2 Venir used for to be just, to have just, requires de before the following infinitivo;
and in the sense of to happen, it requires à; as:
I have just seen her.
If she should happen to know it.
Je viens DE la voir.
Si elle venait à le savoir.
3 These adjectives require à, when the verb which precedes them has a personal
nominative; they require de, when the nominative is impersonal Ex.
•
Cela est agréable, bon, beau, à voir, à dire, à faire. That is agreeable, fine to see, &c
Il est agréable, bon, beau, de voir, de dire, de faire. It is agreeab'e, fine to see, &o
4 De or à, as it sounds best, in the active sense; always de in the passive; as,
On m'a obligé de or à le faire.
J'ai été obligé de le faire.
They have obliged me to do it.
I have been obliged to do it.
524
GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS.
Ingénieux à,
Ingenious to.
Préparer à,
Prepare to.
Inviter à,
Laid à,
Invite to.
Prêt à,
Ready to.
Ugly to.
Prompt à,
Quick to.
Lent à,
Manquer à,
se Mettre à,
Montrer à,
Obliger à, de,1
s'Obs. ner à,
Occupé à,
s'Opiniâtrer à,
Slow to.
Omit to.
Set about to.
Show to.
Oblige to.
Obstinate to.
Rester à,
Réussir à,
Servir à,
Propre à,
Fit to.
Recommencer d, Begin again to.
Renoncer à,
Renounce to.
Résoudre à,
Resolve to.
Stay to.
Succeed to, in.
Busy to.
Obstinate to.
Soigneux à,
Parvenir à,
Passer à,
Arrive to.
Songer à,
Serve to.
Careful to.
Think of.
Spend in.
Sujet à,
Subject to, Apt ₺
Penser à,
Perdre à,
Persister à,
Think of.
Lose in.
Persist in.
Tâcher à,
Aim at.
Tarder à,
Delay to.
Tendre à,
se Plaire à,
Porter à,
Premier à
Delight in.
Terrible à, de,2
Tend to.
Terrible to
Induce to.
Travailler à,
Work to.
First to.
Venir à,
Come to.
6. FRENCH VERBS and ADJECTIVES which govern the following infinitive
by means of the preposition de.
N. B. This usually happens after nouns used in a definite sense.
He has the pleasure of seeing her.
She has the vanity to think so.
s'Abstenir de,
Abstain from.
Accuser de,
Achever de,
Accuse of.
Finish to.
Affecter de,
Affect to.
Affligé de,
Aise de,
Appréhender de,
s'Attendre, de, à‚³
Avertir de,
Afflicted to.
Glad to.
Fear to.
Expect to.
Warn to.
Bethink to.
Blame to.
Il a le plaisir de la voir.
Elle a la vanité de le croire.
Décourager de,
Défendre de,
se Dépêcher de,
Désespérer de,
Désirer de,
Déterminer de,
Détourner de,
Différer de,
Dire de,
Discontinuer de,
Disconvenir de,
Discourage with.
Forbid to.
Make haste to.
Despair io.
Wish to.
Determine to.
Divert from.
Defer to, Delay to
Tell to.
Discontinue to.
Charmé de, Ravi de, Delighted with.
Ecrire de,
s'Efforcer de,
Pleasant to,
Write to.
Endeavor to.
Enjoin to.
B'Aviser de,
Blâmer de,
Disown to.
Capable de,
Capable of, to.
Dispenser de,
Dispense with.
Cesser de,
Cease to.
Dissuader de,
Dissuade from.
Charg er de,
Charge to.
Doux de,
Commander de,
Command to.
Commencer de, à,3
Begin to.
Conjurer de,
Entreat to.
Conseiller de,
Advise to.
Consoler de,
Content de,
Continuer de, à,3
Convaincre de,
Convenir de,
Console for.
Content to.
Continue to.
Convince of.
Agree to.
Craindre de,
Fear to.
Eviter de,
Curieux de,
Curious to.
1 See Note 4, page 523.
Enjoindre de,
Empêcher de,
s'Empresser de,
Ennuyé de,
Enragé de,
Entreprendre de,
Essayer de, à‚³
Etonné de,
Excuser de,
Prevent to.
Eager to.
Tired of.
Enraged at.
Undertake to.
Try to.
Astonished at.
Avoid to.
Excuse to.
2 See Note 3, page 523.
3 As it sounds best, i. e., de to avoid the sound of several à, and à to a’mid the
sound of several de
GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS.
525
Exempter de,
Exhorter de, à,1
Fâché de,
Feindre de,
Finir de,
e Flatter de,
se Garder de,
Gronder de,
se Hâter de,
Heureux de,
Sorry to.
Feign to.
Finish to.
Prier de,
Exempt from.
Plaindre de,
Exhort to,
Possible de,
Prescrire de,
Pity to, for.
Possible to.
Prescribe to.
Presser de,
Press to.
Request to.
Promettre de,
Promise to.
Proposer de,
Propose to.
Refuser de,
Refuse to.
Regret to.
Flatter to.
Take care to.
Scold for.
Haste to.
Happy to.
Impossible de,
Impossible to.
Incapable de,
Incapable of.
Inspirer de,
Inspire to.
Juger à propos de, Think proper to.
Nécessaire de,
Swear to.
Just to.
Tired of, with.
At liberty to.
Send word to.
Fail to.
Threaten to.
Deserve to.
Necessary to.
Neglect to.
Recommander de, Recommend to.
Regretter de,
se Réjouir de,
Remercier de,
se Repentir de,
Reprocher de,
Résoudre de,
Risquer de,
Rougir de,
Satisfait de,
Solliciter de,
Sommer de,
se Soucier de,
Souhaiter de,
Soupçonner de,
se Souvenir de,
Suffire de,
Suggérer de,
Supplier de,
Sûr de,
Rejoice to
Thank for.
Repent of, to.
Reproach for.
Resolve to.
Risk to.
Blush to.
Satisfied to, with.
Solicit to.
Summon tc.
Care to.
Wish to.
Suspect to.
Remember to.
Jurer de,
Justo je,
Lassé de,
Libre de,
Mander de,
Manquer de,
Menacer de,
Mériter de,
Négliger de,
Offrir de,
Offer to.
Omettre de,
Omit to.
Ordonner de,
Order to.
Oublier de,
Pardonner de,
Permettre de,
Persuader de,
Forget to.
Forgive for.
Permit to.
Surpris de,
Tâcher de,
so Piquer de,
Persuade to.
Pretend to.
Tarder de,
Long to.
Ise Vanter de,
Beast of.
Sufficient to.
Suggest to.
Entreat to.
Sure to.
Surprised to.
Endeavor to.
7. The French infinitive preceded by à, is used to translate the English
present participle after the verb to be.
Am I writing? You were reading. |
Wilt thou be working?
We would be walking.
Who can be ringing?
They may be sleeping.
People might be fishing.
Let her be doing no matter what,
she must come.
She must be practising.
(76¹, § 144—6.)
Suis-je à écrire ?
Seras-tu à travailler?
Nous serions à nous promener.
Qui peut être à sonner?
Ils peuvent être à dormir.
Vous étiez à lire.
On pourrait être à pêcher.
Qu'elle soit à faire n'importe quoi,
il faut qu'elle vienne.
Il faut qu'elle soit à pratiquer.
§ 157.-PAST PARTICIPLE.-Participe Passé.
1. At (311) we saw that the Past Participle, (Participe Passé,) was usually
placed after the auxiliaries AVOIR, to have, ETRE, to be, to form the past
or compound tenses. [Young pupils, attend carefully to this direction.]
I have seen.
He shall have written. (58¹.)
J'ai vu.
Il aura écrit.
Hadst thou given ?
1 See Note 3, page 524,
As-tu donné?
526
GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS
She may have left.
We would have gone out. (602.)
They would have arrived sooner.
Would you have dressed yourselves?
Elle peut avoir laissé,
Nous serions sortis.
Ils seraient arrivés plus tôt.
Vous seriez-vous habillés? (441
$ 160-2.)
Those young ladies would have ap- Ces demoiselles se
plied themselves to music.
Although she made a mistake.
'T'hou must have been afraid.
He did not think you would have
spoken so well and so long.
seraient ap.
pliquées à la musique.
Quoiqu'elle se soit trompée.
Il faut que tu aies eu peur. (792.)
Il ne croyait pas que vous eussiez
parlé si bien et si long-temps. (79ª.)
2. Since the past participle is connected sometimes with être, sometimes
with avoir, we must give rules on the subject.
When connected with être, the participe passé is considered as an adjec-
tive, and agrees with the nominative or subject of the verb être, to be. That
takes place in passive verbs, (42¹,) and in the neuter verbs that take être for
an auxiliary, (341.) In passive verbs,
A gentleman must translate
A lady must translate
Boys must translate
I am known,
by
Je suis connu.
I am known,
by
Je suis connue.
We are praised,
by
Nous sommes loués.
Girls must translate
With neuter verbs having être for auxiliary, say:
We are praised,
by
Nous sommes louées.
He was born.
They were born, (m.) These ladies
She was born.
Il est né.
Elle est née.
Ils sont nés.
Ces dames sont nées.
were born.
John, wilt thou have returned by 9 Jean, seras-tu revenu à 9 heures?
o'clock ?
She would not have died so soon.
Elle ne serait pas morte si tôt.
3. Connected with avoir, the participe passé agrees, not with the nomi
native or subject, but with the direct object (régime direct, $43) of the par.
ticipe, when that régime precedes the participe, but not when it comes after.
The régime indirect ($ 44) has no influence on the participe.
Have you received my letters? | Avez-vous reçu mes lettres? The
régjme, mes lettres, coming after reçu, the participe does not change. But,
in: The letters which you have received, the régime, which, preceding the
participe, the latter must agree with the former, and be feminine plural.
Hence the French phrase is: Les lettres que vous avez reçues.
We have corrected the exercises | Nous avons corrigé les thêmes que
that you have written and sent.
How many shots did you fire?
Combien de coups, the régime, being
I have fired six.
vous avez écrits et envoyés.
Combien de coups avez-vous tirés ?
before, the participe is declinable.
J'en ai tiré six.
Here the régime is six; and as it comes after the participe, the latter in
indeclinable. (31¹.)
4. The objective pronoun en may be régime direct (43) or indirect,
GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS.
527
(344,) but the participe is never declinable after it; because en has neither
gender nor number, and consequently, when régime direct, it cannot
change the participe. As régime indirect, it has no influence on it.
Have you gathered any flowers?
I have gathered some.
Ile has not answered the two letters
he has received from thein.
Avez-vous cueilli des fleurs?
J'en ai cueilli. (43.)
Il n'a pas répondu aux deux lettres
qu'il en a reçues. ($ 41.)
Here the participe is reçues, fem. plur., not on account of en, régime indi.
rect, but of que,. its régime direct, which precedes, and with which it must
agree, independently of en.
5. The rule given at 3 is easily observed in plain and ordinary cases in
which the régime direct is easily distinguished; but there are sentences, in
which even grammarians can hardly decide. Without presenting those
knotty points to the student, I will give him the principle by which he is to
be guided, and leave the rest to his judgment.
Sometimes after the participle, preceded by an object, there is a verb in
the infinitive; then it is necessary to consider whether the object is governed
by the participle, or by the infinitive which follows it.
If the object is governed by the participle, the participle must be of the
same gender and number as that object. Ex.:
The letter I have given him to copy. ] La lettre que je lui ai donnée à copier.
If the object is governed by the infinitive which follows the participle, the
participle has no agreement with the object. As:
The letter I have told him to copy. | La lettre que je lui ai dit de copier.¹
The participles plu, pleased; dû, owed, ought; pu, been able, and voulu,
been willing; do not agree with the object that precedes them, because the
infinitive of the foregoing verb is understood after them. Ex. :
I have done him all the services that Je lui ai rendu tous les services que
I have been able, (to do understood.) que j'ai pu, (lui rendre understood.)
$ 157}.—PRESENT PARTICIPLE.-Participe Présent.
The Present Participle in English is used after every preposition except
the preposition to, and it enters in the formation of every tense of almost
every verb, as: I am speaking, I was, have been, had been, shall be, shall
have been, &c. &c., speaking; while in French, it is excluded from those
tenses, and is much used only in connexion with the preposition en, the
If you are uncertain whether the object is governed by the participle, or by the
infinitive which follows it, transpose the words, and see after which the object may
more properly be placed.
If the object can be placed after the participle, as in the first instance, The letter
I have given him to copy, which may be turned, I have given him the letter to copy;
the participle given governs the object letter, and it must agree with it.
If the object comes more properly after the infinitive, as in the second instance,
The letter I have told him to copy, which might be turned, I have told him to copy
the letter, (not, the letter to copy,) the object letter is governed by the infinitive to
copy, and the participle has no agreement with it,
528
GRAMMATICAL SYNOPS18.
only one which in that language governs the present participle. In conse
quence of that radical difference, it was thought inexpedient to direct the
attention of the pupil to that part of the verb, for fear that its knowledge
should lead him into constant errors, whilst a want of it could not be felt,
since the French construction does not require it. But now that he has gone
through the various portions of the verb, and that the same danger is not to
be apprehended, we proceed to its introduction. As the present participle
always ends in ant, and is invariable, it is attended with no difficulty.
1. It is formed from the first person plural of the present indicative, by
changing its termination ons into ant.
1re Conj. We speak,
Nous parlons.
Speaking,
2de Conj. We finish,
Nous finissons.
Finishing,
3me Conj. We receive,
Nous recevons.
Receiving,
4me Conj. We sell,
Nous vendons.
Selling,
2. The five following verbs form exceptions to this rule :—
To have,
having.
To be,
being.
A voir,
Être,
To become due,
becoming due.
Echoir,
To know,
knowing.
Savoir,
To become,
becoming.
Seoir,
Parlant.
Finissant.
Recevant.
Vendant.
ayant.
étant.
échéant.
sachant.
séant.
3. It is used when an agent performs two actions at the same time, as in
the following examples:
The man eats while running.
I correct while reading.
I question while speaking.
You speak while answering me.
I improve by reading.
Take exercise by walking, (walk for
exercise.)
Let us go leisurely to the store.
When must he do it? In going, (as
he goes.)
Call there as you come.
Do they sing while dancing?
People ruin themselves by gambling.
L'homme mange en courant.
Je corrige en lisant.
Je questionne en parlant.
Vous parlez en me répondant.
Je m'instruis en lisant.
Prends de l'exercice en marchant.
Allons au magasin en promenant.
Quand faut-il qu'il le fasse ? En
s'en allant.
Passez-y en venant.
Chantent-ils en dansant?
On se ruine en jouant.
4. En being the only French preposition which governs the present par-
ticiple, as we have said, (R. 1,) it follows that, whatever may be the Eng-
lish preposition connected with the present participle, it can be translated
only by EN, if the French participle is used.
While digging the foundation, they | En creusant les fondements, on trouva
found a skeleton.
un squelette. (67¹, N. 1.)
The house being built, we occupied La maison étant bâtie, nous l'occu
it.
Having studied, I recited well.
pâmes.
Ayant étudié, je récitai bien.
1 In speaking of a lease, or a given portion of time.
•
GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS.
529
5. The present participle qualifying a noun, is considered as an adjective,
English, participial adjective; French, adjectif verbal,) and agrees with the
noun in gender and number.
A charming man.
A charming woman..
Charming men.
Charming women.
Un homme charmant.
Une femme charmante.
Des hommes charmants.
Des femmes charmantes.
6. The English present participle, showing the action of a nominative
case, is translated in French by the present participle, which is of course
invariable..
This actor, dancing gracefully, is | Cet acteur, dansant avec grâces, est
much admired.
très-admiré.
Those actresses, dancing gracefully, Ces actrices, dansant avec grâces,
are much admired.
sont très-admirées.
7. The English present participle, relating to an objective case, may be
translated by the French present participle, but the indicative is preferable.
I found her coming here.
Je la trouvai qui venait ici.
See those children playing in the Vois ces enfants se jouant (ou qui
shade.
jouent) sous l'ombrage.
8. The English present participle, governed by a verb or a preposition, (en
excepted,) is translated by a French infinitive.
I see her reading, and I am tired of | Je la vois lire, et je suis fatigué de
waiting for her.
l'attendre.
9. The English present participle, used as a nominative in a general sense,
is never translated by the French present participle, but by an infinitive, or
if there is one synonymous to the verb.
a noun,
Playing is the delight of children.
Jouer est le délice des enfants; or,
Le jeu est le délice des enfants.
10. If not taken in a general sense, use a noun; or, if no synonymous
noun can be found, give the sentence another turn.
He gives all his time to studying.
Their singing was much admired.
Is that the cause of his being poor?
What is the reason of your coming so
late?
Il donne tout son temps à l'étude,
Leur chant fut fort admiré.
Est-ce la cause de sa pauvreté ?
Pourquoi venez-vous si tard?
11. The present participle, after to be, is translated by the infinitive. (See
156-7.)
158.-NEUTER VERBS.-Verbes Neutres.
1. In neuter verbs the action is intransitive, that is, it remains in the
agent. They are conjugated like the active. The latter, however, always
form their past tenses with the auxiliary avoir,* to have; on the contrary,
some neuter verbs take être,* to be, and others avoir,* for their auxiliary,
others again take sometimes avoir,* and sometimes être,* according as action
or state is more particularly meant.
i
45
530
GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS.
2. When conjugated with être, their past participles agree with the nomi
native of that verb. But, when conjugated with avoir, their past participles
are invariable, for they have no régime direct with which they can agree.
3. Verbs which without being reflective, take être, to be, as auxili-
ary. (341)
Το
To
arrive, happen,
arriver.
die,
décéder.
attain,
parvenir.
disagree,
disconvenir.
be born,
naître.
fall,
tomber.
become,
devenir.
go,
aller.
come,
venir.
go out,
sortir.
come back,
revenir.
happen, come to
come in,
decay,
entrer.
pass,
survenir.
déchoir.
intervene,
intervenir.
die,
mourir.
set out,
partir.
$159. PASSIVE VERBS.-Verbes Passifs.
1. Those verbs, although extensively used in English, are not so in
French. In both languages they are formed, as taught (421), by means of
the auxiliary verb to be, être, joined to the past participle of any active verb.
2. The past participle being then used as an adjective, agrees with the
nominative or subject of the verb to be.
The boy is praised by his friends.
The girl is praised by them.
The boys are all blamed.
Are not these girls admired?
Le garçon est loué par ses amis.
La fille est louée par eux.
Les garçons sont tous blâmés.
Ces filles ne sont-elles pas admirees?
3. The French, instead of the passive voice, use the active form with on
for nominative, or else the reflective verb. The student should then be able
to change any one form to another with ease.
Active voice. I shut the door.
Je ferme la porte.
Passive voice. The door is shut by La porte est fermée par moi.
me.
The preposition by and the pronoun it governs are frequently left out; for
example, the passive voice of, people say, is, it is said, without adding by
the people.-People know, it is known.-They believe, it is believed.
It is advisable to exercise the scholar on these alterations, principally from
the English passive to the French active form with the pronoun on; as:
Is it expected? Is it believed?
We are told. On nous dit.
And to the reflective form. As:
The church will be opened soon.
Their house was sold yesterday.
Water is carried everywhere.
4. The infinitive of a passive verb
Le croit-on ?
It will be seen. On verra.
L'église s'ouvrira bientôt.
Leur maison se vendit hier.
L'eau se conduit partout.
coming after another verb, is rendered
by on, as nominative indefinite of the following verb, which must be put in
its proper tense. (77¹, N. B.)
I fear to be laughed at. (Subj.)
He is certain to be laughed at. (Ind.)
Je crains qu'on ne se moque de moi.
Il est certain qu'on se moquera de luk
GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS.
531
$160.- REFLECTED VERBS.-Verbes Réfléchis.
1. When the action falls upon the agent, and the objective case refers to
the same person as the nominative, the verb is called Reflective. The
French use nearly all their active verbs under a reflective form. They are
as fond of that kind of verbs as the English are of the passive form, ($ 159,)
and frequently translate the latter by it.
2. In reflective verbs, the pronoun of the object is of the same person as
that of the subject. Each person is therefore conjugated with a double
personal pronoun. One is nominative; the other objective, or reflective.
(§ 71, &c.)
I... myself,
Thou... thyself,
We...ourselves.
You... yourselves.
They... themselves.
Nous nous.
Vous vous.
Ils se...
Je me ..
Tu te...
He... himself,
II
She... herself,
Elle
se...
It.... itself,
Il, elle
The men.. themselves.
Les hommes
One... one's self, On
They... themselves.
Elles se. [se.
The girls.. themselves. Les filles se.
N. B. The third person reflective is always se for both genders and numbers.
3. In the imperative there is but one pronoun, the reflective or objective
one. (§ 150, N. B.) Habillez-vous, dress yourself. Ne te trompe pas, do
not make a mistake. Allons-nous-en, let us go away. (En, there, means
from here, from there.)
4. In French, all reflective verbs form their compound tenses with the
auxiliary verb être, while, in English, they take to have. As, in this case,
the verb to be is used in place of to have, the past participle of a reflective
verb does not, as in neuter verbs, (34¹, § 158,) and passive verbs, (421, § 159,)
agree with the subject, but with the direct object, when that object is before,
in the same manner as when to have (avoir) is the auxiliary. (32¹, Obs. 75.)
Hence the French write, Nous nous sommes coupés; the past participle
taking an s, because nous, its direct object, is before; but in Nous nous
sommes coupé les doigts, the participle coupé has no s, because its object (les
doigts) comes after.
5. Most passive verbs having an inanimate object for their nominatives
are reflected in French; as, Les mauvaises nouvelles se répandent plus
promptement que les bonnes, Bad news is sooner spread than good. On
s'étonne de l'accroissement rapide des États-Unis, People are astonished at
the rapid increase of the United States. (§ 159—3.)
ADVERBS.
§ 161.-1. ADVERBS qualifying verbs, are on that account placed as near the
verb as possible. The French say: J'aime mieux le bœuf que le mouton; not
j'aime le bœuf mieux, because the adverb mieux qualifies the verb j'aime,
and not the noun, bœuf. (513.)
2. Adverbs, expressed in a single word, are usually placed after the verb,
in a simple tense, and between the auxiliary and the participle, in a com
pound one; as:
532
GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS.
He writes well.
He has written well
Il écrit bien.
Il a bien écrit.
He has written badly.
Il a mal écrit.
3. If the adverb is expressed in two or more words, it goes after the
verb, whether the tense is simple or compound.
He writes properly.
He will write tolerably well.
She sang well, as usual.
Il écrit comme il faut.
Il écrira passablement bien.
Elle a bien chanté, comme à l'ordi
naire.
4. Combien, how much, many? ne….. que, only, but; trop, too much, &c.;
beaucoup, much, many; assez, enough; ne... guère, but little, are called
by the French adverbs of quantity. (Dir. 7-13¹)
In English, to form adverbs from adjectives, he final ly is added; as,
wise, wisely. In French, that final is ment.
5. Adjectives which end in a vowel, become adverbs by adding ment to
it; as, sage, poli, ingénu, adjectives; sagement, poliment, ingénument,
adverbs.
6. Adjectives ending in nt, change that final to mment ; as, constant, pru-
dent, patient, adjectives; constamment, prudemment, patiemment, adverbs.
7. Adjectives which end neither in a vowel, nor in nt, become abverbs
by adding ment to their feminine termination; as, grand, doux, heureux,
adjectives masculine; grande, douce, heureuse, adjectives feminine; grande-
ment, greatly; doucement, softly, slowly, sweetly; heureusement, happily,
luckily, adverbs.
NEGATIONS.
§ 162.-La connaissance que nous avons déjà de la négation nous met à
même de déduire les neuf articles suivants :-
ART. 1. La négation est généralement en deux mots, dont l'un est inva-
riablement ne ou n', et l'autre un complément, qui change selon les circon-
stances.¹
2. Ne se place toujours avant le verbe, et avant les pronoms objectifs,
s'il y en a.
3. Dans les temps simples, ne est avant, et le complément après le verbe.
4. Dans les temps composés, le complément se place quelque fois avant le
participe passé: Je ne l'ai pas vu.
5. Quelque fois après. Je n'ai vu personne.
6. Le complément se met avant ne et tous deux avant le verbe dans les
temps simples et avant l'auxiliaire dans les composés, quand la négation
forme le nominatif. Rien ne le décourage, nothing discourages him.
1 The word complement means here completing the sense.
GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS.
533
7. Avant l'infinitif ne et son complément sont joints, et se placent géné-
ralement avant: Ne rien gvoir.
8. Quand le verbe est omis, le complément seul exprime la négation: Pas
lui, not he.
9. Neither, non plus.
ART. 3. Ne, avant, le complément après.-Liste alphabétique des néga-
tions avec les temps simples:
But, only. (13¹.)
But little, only a little. (131.)
Neither... nor.. (before nouns. (5¹.)
Neither.
... nor
ple tenses.)
Never. (311.)
Never any more.
Never anything.
(before verbs, sim-
No, not..... any. (2¹.)
Nobody, no one, no person, not any-
body.
Ne....que
que...
Ne.. guère, pas beaucoup, qu'un
peu.
Ne.... ni.... ni.
Ne.... ni ne....
ni ne.
Je n'écris, ne lis, ni ne traduis
l'Allemand.
Ne.... jamais.
Ne.... jamais plus, or plus jamais.
Ne jamais rien.
....
Ne.... pas de, point de.¹
Ne.
Ne.
... ·
...
pas un, pas une.
aucun, aucune.
Ne. nul, nulle.
•
Ne....
personne. (72.)
No longer, no more, not any longer, Ne.. plus. (362)
more.
No longer, anything, nothing more, Ne.... plus rien.
&c.
N'en.. pas, point—aucun, ne,
Ne.... d'aucune manière.
None, not any.
In no manner, no wise, by no means.
No sooner. (682, § 155.)
Ne.
Not.
Ne.
Not anything, nothing. (3¹.)
Not anywhere, nowhere. (462.)
Not at all, not in the least.
Not in the least.
Ne.
•
....
•
Ne..
pas plutôt.
pas ou point.¹
rien.
nulle part.
Ne.... pas du tout, point du tout.
Ne.... pas le moins du monde.
Not much more, not many more, only Ne.... guère plus-plus guère.
a little more.
Nothing but.
Only a little, not much. (13¹.)
Only a little more, a few more.
Ne.... que rien que.
Ne.... qu'un peu, guère, pas beau.
coup.
Ne.... guère, pas beaucoup, qu'un
peu, plus.
1 Purists find out some difference between pas and point. There is some, but it is
nly one well acquainted with the language that could find use for the distinction.
Ure at pleasure, the one or the other, merely consulting euphony. (412.)
45*
3
เ
534
GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS.
NÉGATIONS AVEC LES TEMPS COMPOSÉS.
4. Liste des négations, dont le complément est placé avant le participe
passé :
But a little, only a little.
Je n'en ai guère vu. (31¹)
Je n'en ai pas beaucoup vu.
Je n'en ai pas vu beaucoup.
nor.. nor.. (before verbs.) | Je ne l'ai ni vu, ni entendu.
Neitner.. nor.. nor..
Never.
Never... more or any more.
Never... anything.
No.
Je ne l'ai jamais vu.
Je ne l'ai jamais plus (ou plus jamais)
vu.
Je ne lui ai jamais rien dit.
Je ne lui ai pas donné d'argent.
No longer, no more, not any longer, Je ne lui en ai plus donné.
&c.
No longer, anything, &c.
None, not any.
No sooner.
Not.
Nothing, not... anything.
Not much more.
None at all, not... the least bit.
{
Je ne lui ai plus rien donné.
Ne lui en ai-je pas donné ?
Il ne l'eut pas plutôt dit qu'il...
Ne le lui avez-vous pas donné ?
Ne leur avez-vous rien dit?
Je ne lui en ai guère plus donné.
Je ne lui en ai pas donné beaucoup
plus.
Je ne lui en ai pas du tout donné.
Je ne lui en ai point donné du tout.
5. Liste des négations dont le complément est placé après le participe.
But, only.
But a little, only a little.
Neither... nor... nor、、、
No, not any.
Nobody, no one, not.. any one, &c.
In no manner, nowise, by no means.
Nowhere, not... anywhere.
Nothing but.
Only a little more.
Not... in the least... not... a bit.
Je n'ai vu que cela.
N'en a-t-il pris qu'un peu ?
N'a-t-il vu ni l'un ni l'autre ?
N'en avez-vous appris aucun ?
Qui n'a vu personne?
Je ne l'ai fait d'aucune manière.
Ne l'avons-nous laissé nulle part?
Il n'a fait que chanter, (rien que.j
Je n'en ai apporté qu'un peu plus.
Il ne l'a point changé le moins du
monde.
6. Negations employées comme nominatifs ou sujets.
Le complément se met avant ne et tous deux avant le verbe dans les
temps simples et avant l'auxiliaire dans les composés.
Neither:
Nobody:
Neither suit him.
Neither could suit her.
(past.)
No one will do it.
Nobody did it.
None, not one: None will go.
Not one went.
Ni l'un ni l'autre ne lui conviennent.
Ni l'un ni l'autre n'ont pu lui con-
venir.
Personne ne le fera.
Personne ne l'a fait.
Aucun n'ira.
Nulle n'ira.
Nul n'y a été. Aucune n'y est allée.
GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS.
535
Nothing:
Nothing
him.
displeases Rien ne lui déplaît.
displeases
Nothing disturbed her.
Nothing ever: Nothing ever pleases
him.
Rien ne l'a dérangée.
Jamais rien ne lui plaît.
Nothing ever pleased | Rien jamais ne lui a plu.
her.
Nobody ever pleased Jamais personne ne lui a plu.
her.
7. Avec l'infinitif. Ne et son complément son joints et placés avant.
He likes to do nothing.
He fears he shall have none.
Il aime à ne rien faire. (432.)
Il craint de ne pas en avoir.
Il a quelques exceptions, que nous allons présenter.
He has a mind to take but one.
He is afraid to have none.
Tell him to invite nobody.
He has a mind to go nowhere.
Il a envie de n'en prendre qu'un.
Il a peur de n'en avoir aucun.
Dites-lui de n'inviter personne.
Il a envie de n'aller nulle part.
Les autres suivent la 7me règle générale. Il est essentiel cependant
d'ajouter que très-souvent l'infinitif peut se mettre entre ne et le complé-
ment.
He fears he can never get it.
1
Il craint de ne jamais l'avoir.
Il craint de ne l'avoir jamais.
8. Quand le verbe est omis, (omitted or understood,) ne, se trouvant avant
l'est aussi; conséquemment le complément seul exprime la négation.
Veut-il du pain et du fromage? Il veut du pain, mais pas de fromage,
(no cheese.) Le verbe veut étant omis; il ne, qui sont avant, le sont aussi.
Qu'a-t-il? Rien. Quand viendra-t-il? Jamais? Qui aimez-vous? Personne.
Que leur faut-il? Rien de plus.
9. "Ve have seen that neither. nor, was translated by ne...
ni...ni,
(5¹, $ ¡62—3, 4, 6.) When neither is unconnected with nor, translate it by
non plus, which means no more, not any more. (Page 169.)
I neither.
Neither do I.
Moi non plus.
Nous non plus.
Thou neither.
Neither do you.
Toi non plus.
Vous non plus.
Lui non plus.
Elle non plus.
Eux non plus.
Elles non plus.
Ceci non plus.
Cela non plus.
Ceux-ci non plus. Celles-là non plus.
Le général non plus.
Les généraux non plus.
PREPOSITIONS.
§ 163.-1. French prepositions, except en, govern the infinitive of verbs,
while in English they govern the present participle. (Rule 1.)
They speak of coming without wri- | Ils parlent de venir sans vous écrire
ting to you, and before sending the et avant d'envoyer le présent.
present.
We improve by reading and medita-
ting.
On s'instruit en lisant et en médi
tant. (§ 1574.)
536
GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS.
2. In French the preposition is always placed before the word it governs,
and must be repeated before every one. In English, on the contrary, the
preposition is placed either before or after, and need not be repeated.
With whom were you speaking?
Whom were you speaking with?
I come from France, Italy, and
Spain.
Avec qui parliez-vous? never
Qui parliez-vous avec ?
Je viens de France, d'Italie, et
d'Espagne.
3. The preposition, and the verb it governs, may be separated by any
negation or objective pronoun.
I am sorry I did not know it.
Has he sold the house without telling
you of it?
Je suis fâché de ne pas l'avoir su.
| A-t-il vendu la maison sans vous en
avertir?
REMARKS ON SOME PREPOSITIONS.
4. OF, FROM; DE. We have noticed ($8, &c.) the contraction of de
with the definite article le, les, into du, des; and refer to those paragraphs.
5. To, AT, IN; À. We have seen (§§ 8, 12, &c.) how à, connected with
le, les, contracts into au, aux, and refer to those paragraphs.
6. AS FAR AS. Jusqu'à. ($ 13.)
7. AT, IN, To, relating to a person's residence, is CHEZ. (18¹.)
I must go to my sister's.
They live at or in our house.
Il faut que j'aille chez ma sœur.
Ils demeurent chez nous.
CHEZ, means to, in or at the house of, consequently, its complement must
be an objective personal pronoun, instead of the English possessive, and the
word maison, house, is not used.
At my house, (turn, to the house of me.)
To his, our, your, thy, her, their, one's
house.
From a person's house, my house.
To live, stay with somebody.
Chez moi.
Chez lui, nous, vous, toi, elle, eux,
elles, soi.
De chez quelqu'un, de chez moi.
Rester chez or avec quelqu'un.
CHEZ Sometimes relates to the character of a person, and means in.
This virtue is a vice in you.
Cette vertu est chez vous un vice.
CHEZ, applied to nations, is translated by among.
Among the Greeks and Romans. | Chez les Grecs et chez les Romains.
8. FROM; DE LA PART. From, with the verbs to go, to come, not from.
the house, but from a person, is de la part, de la part de.
Go from me to my friend's.
ol
Allez de ma part chez mon ami.
Whom do you come from? Who De la part de qui venez-vous?
sent you?
9. BEFORE; AVANT, DEVANT.
Avant relates to time or order, and is the
opposite of après, after. Devant relates to situation, and is the opposite of
derrière, behind. (493.)
If you arrive before me, I will arrive
after you.
I will arrive
Walk before, he will walk behind.
Si vous arrivez avant moi, j'arriverai
après vous.
Marchez devant, il marchera derrière.
GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS.
537
N. B. Without an object, before is auparavant.
I had bought it before.
10. BY; PRÈS DE, À CÔTÉ DE.
the, Près de l', près de la, près du.
He was sitting by me.
We passed by them.
| Je l'avais acheté auparavant.
In the sense of near, by is près de By
(§§ 9, 11.)
Il était assis à côté de moi, (près de.)
Nous passâmes près d'eux, (à côté ď.)
N. B. By, joined to myself, thyself, &c., is equivalent to alone, and is
expressed by the adjective seul.
Was she by herself?
| Etait-elle seule ? (312.)
11. IN, INTO; DANS, EN. Dans is usually followed by a definite noun.
I have read that in the Bible.
We saw that in Racine.
En is followed by an indefinite noun.
There are many in France.
J'ai lu cela dans la Bible.
Nous avons vu cela dans Racine.
| Il y en a beaucoup en France.
12. IN; DANS, EN. Speaking of time, in is expressed by dans, to denote
the time after which an action will be performed. I will answer you in
three days, that is, after three days, Je vous répondrai dans trois jours. (712.)
EN, the time that will be employed in performing it.
We shall be at Washington in 6
hours, (shall be 6 hours going.)
Nous serons à Washington en 6
heures.
13. AT, IN, TO; À, EN. Before a city, à; before a country, en. (38¹.)
He goes to Madrid, in Spain.
She resides in Ireland, at Dublin.
Il va à Madrid, en Espagne.
Elle réside en Irlande, à Dublin.
nouns denoting any part of the day, or
14. IN, ON, not translated before
before the names of the days, or before dates.
Le matin.-Le soir. (222.)
In the morning. In the evening. Mardi soir. (328.)
On Tuesday in the evening.
CONJUNCTIONS.
$164.-1. We have seen that the subjunctive mood (§ 151-2) required
an antecedent which was frequently a conjunction. See at (79¹) a list of
those which govern the subjunctive mood. Of course the others govern the
indicative.
À moins que, de crainte que, de peur que, require NE before the verb
which they govern. (§ 151–6).
Jusqu'à, being a preposition, is used before a noun or pronoun, but not be-
fore a verb. Until to morrow, jusqu'à demain, (37¹.)
Before a verb, jusqu'à ce que, the conjunction, is to be used.
Until he come, (should come.)
| Jusqu'à ce qu'il vienne, (79¹.)
2. When a conjunction governs several verbs, it is placed before the first
verb only, and que is used before the other verbs, and governs the same
mood as the conjunction does.
538
GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS.
W
As he is diligent and takes pains.
Unless he be diligent and take pains.
Comme il est diligent et qu'il prend
de la peine.
A moins qu'il ne soit diligent et qu'il
ne prenne de la peine.
3. When si, if, governs two verbs, instead of repeating si before the
second verb, use que, and after it the subjunctive, although the verb which
follows si, may govern the indicative.
1
You will learn if you are diligent and | Vous apprendrez si vous êtes diligent
take pains.
et que vous preniez de la peine.
4. In (Dir. 6) we have seen that the conjunction THAT is frequently used
to form two simple sentences into one, and that, although frequently omit-
ted in English, it was always expressed in French. We here repeat it.
I know he intends writing one. | Je sais qu'il compte en écrire un.
5. WHETHER, used in the sense of if, is translated by si with the following
verb in the indicative. As:
Does she know whether he will go? | Sait-elle s'il ira ?
WHETHER, in the sense of let, is translated by que, or soit que, with the
following verb in the subjunctive. As:
1
Whether she comes or not, or let her | Soit qu'elle vienne ou non, nous
come or not, we will go.
irons. Qu'elle vienne ou non, &c.
6. BUT FOR, WERE IT NOT FOR, correspond to sans, and so does if it had
not been.
As:
But for his friends.
Had it not been for his friends, he Sans ses amis, il aurait été renvoyé.
would have been dismissed.
§ 170.—See (§ 161, &c.)
171.-See (§ 162, &c.)
$ 180.-See ($ 160, &c.)
◊ 200 -See ($ 137, &c.)
$
CONJUGATION OF VERBS.
539
CONJUGATION OF THE AUXILIARY VERB AVOIR, TO HAVE
INFINITIVE MOOD.
PRESENT.
PAST.
Avoir,
to have.
Avoir eu,
to have had
PARTICIPLES.
PRESENT.
Ayant,
kaving.
PAST.
PAST.
Ayant eu,
raving has.
Eu, m.; oue, f.
had.
INDICATIVE Mood.
PLUPERFECT.
he has had.
we have had.
you have had.
they have had.
I had had.
thou hadst had,
he had had.
we had had.
you had had.
they had had.
PRETERIT INDEFINITE.
PRESENT.
J'al.
I have.
J'ai eu,
I have had.
Tu as,
thou hast.
Tu as eu,
thou hast had,
he has.
Il a.
Il a ell,
Nous avors,
we have.
Nous avons eu,
Vous avez,
you have.
Vous avez eu,
Ils ont,
they have.
Ils ont eu,
IMPERFECT.
J'avais,
I had.
Tu avais.
Il avait,
Nous avions,
thou hadst.
he had.
we had.
J'avais eu,
Tu avais eu,
Il avait eu,
Nous avions eu,
Vous aviez,
you had.
Vous aviez eu,
Ils avaient,
they had.
PRETERIT DEFINITE.
J'eus,
I had.
Tu eus,
Il eut,
Nous eûmes,
thou hadst.
he had.
we had.
Il eut eu,
Nous eûmes ell,
Vous eûtes,
Vons eûtes ell,
Ils eurent eu,
Ils eurent,
FUTURE.
J'aurai,
Tu uuras,
Il aura,
Nous aurons,
Vous aurez,
Ils auront,
J'aurais,
you had.
they had.
I shall have.
thou shalt have.
he shall have.
we shall have.
you shall have.
they shall have.
CONDITIONAL PRESENT.
Tu surais,
Il aurait,
Nous aurions,
Vous auriez,
Il auraient,
I should have.
thou shouldst have,
he should have.
we should have.
you should have.
they should have.
Ils avaient eu,
J'eus eu,
Tu eus eu,
PRETERIT ANTERIOR.
I had had.
thou hadst had.
PAST FUTURE.
J'aurai eu,
Tu auras eu,
Il aura eu,
Nous aurons ell,
Vous aurez eu,
Ils auront eu,
he had had.
we had had.
you had had.
they had had.
I shall have had.
thou shalt have had.
he shall have had.
we shall have had.
you shall have had.
they shall have had.
CONDITIONAL PAST.
J'aurais eu,
Tu aurais eul,
Il aurait eu,
Nous aurions eu,
Vous auriez eu,
Ils auraient eu,
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
I should have had.
thou shouldst have had.
he should have had.
we should have had,
you should have had.
they should have had.
Aie,
Ayons,
Ayez,
have (thou.)
let us have.
have (you.)
Quo j'ale,
Que un aies,
Qu'il ait,
Que nous ayons,
Que vous ayez,
Qu'ils aient,
Que j'eusse,
Que tu eusses,
Qu'il eût,
PRESENT.
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
that I may have.
that thou mayst have.
that he may have.
that we may have.
that you may have.
that they may have.
IMPERFECT.
Que nous eussions,
Que vous eussiez,
Qu'ils eussent,
that I might have.
that thou mightst have.
that he might have.
that we might have.
that you might have.
that they might have.
PRETERIT.
Que j'aie eu,
Que tu aies eu,
Qu'il ait eu,
Que nous ayons
Que vous ayez eu,
Qu'ils aient eu,
that I may have had.
that thou mayst have had.
eu,
that he may have had.
that we may have had.
that you may have had.
that they may have had.
PLUPERFECT.
Que j'eusse eu,
Que tu eusses ell,
Qu'il eût eu,
Que nous eussions eu,
Que vous eussiez eu,
Qu'ils eussent eu,
that I might
that thou mightst
that he might
that we might
that you might
that they might
540
CONJUGATION OF ETRE.
CONJUGATION OF THE AUXILIARY VERB ETRE, TO BE
INFINITIVE Mood.
PRESENT.
PAST.
Êtro,
to be.
Avoir été,
to have been
PARTICIPLES.
PRESENT.
Etant,
being.
FAST.
PAST.
Ayant été,
having been,
Eté,
been.
INDICATIVE Mood.
PRETERIT INDEFINITE.
PRESENT.
I am.
thou art.
he is.
J'ai été,
Tu as été,
Il a été,
Nous avons été,
we are.
Vous avez été,
J'avais été,
Tu avais été,
Il avait été,
PLUPERFECT.
Nous avions été
Je suis,
Tu es,
Il est,
Nous sommes,
Vous êtes,
Ils sont,
you are.
they are.
Ils ont été,
IMPERFECT.
J'étais,
Tu étais,
Il était,
Nous étions,
Vous étiez,
Ils étaient,
I was.
thou wast.
he was.
we were.
you were.
they were.
PRETERIT DEFINITE.
Je fus,
Tu fus,
II fut,
Nous fumes,
Vous fûtes,
Ils furent,
FUTURE.
Je serai,
Tu seras,
Il sera,
Nous serons,
Vous serez,
Ils seront,
Je serais,
Tu serais,
Il serait,
Nous serions,
I was.
thou wast.
he was.
we were.
you were.
they were.
I shall be.
thou shalt be.
he shall be.
we shall be.
you shall be,
they shall be.
7ONDITIONAL PRESENT.
Vous seriez,
Ils seraient,
I should be.
thou shouldst be.
he should be.
we should be.
you should be.
they should be.
Vous aviez été,
Ils avaient été,
J'ous été,
Tu eus été,
Il eut été,
I have been,
thou hast been.
he has been.
we have been.
you have been.
they have been.
I had been.
thou hadst been.
he had been.
we had been.
you had been.
they had been.
PRETERIT ANTERIOR.
Nous eûmes été,
Vous eûtes été,
Ils eurent été,
I had been.
thou hadst becn.
PAST FUTURE,
J'aurai été,
Tu auras été,
Il aura été,
Nous aurons été,
Vous aurez été,
Ils auront été,
he had been.
we had been.
you had been.
they had been.
I shall have been.
thou shalt have been.
he shall have been.
we shall have been.
you shall have been.
they shall have been.
CONDITIONAL PAST.
J'aurais été,
Tu aurais été,
Il aurait eté,
Nous aurions été,
Vous auriez été,
Ils auraient été,
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
I should have been.
thou shouldst have been.
he should have been.
we should have been.
you should have beon.
they should have been.
be (thou.)
let us be.
be (you.)
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
Sois,
Soyons,
Soyez,
PRESENT.
Que je sois,
Que tu sois,
Qu'il soit,
Que nous soyons,
Que vous soyez,
Qu'ils soient,
that I may be.
that thou mayst be.
that he may be.
that we may be.
that you may be.
that they may be.
IMPERFECT.
Que je fusse,
Que tu fusses,
Qu'il fût,
Que nous fussions,
Que vous fussiez,
Qu'ils fussent,
that I might be.
that thou mightst be.
that he might be.
that we might be.
that you might be.
that they might be.
PRETERIT.
that
Que j'aie été,
Que tu aies été,
Qu'il ait été,
Que nous ayons été,
Que vous ayez été,
Qu'ils aient été,
that I may have been.
thou mayst have been.
that he may have been.
that we may have been.
that you may have been.
that they may have beon.
PLUPERFECT.
that I might
that thou mightst
that he might
that we might
that you might
that they might
Que j'eusse été,
Que tu eusses été,
Qu'il eût été,
Que nous eussions été,
Que vous eussiez été,
Qu'ils eussent été,
FIRST CONJUGATION-ER.
541
FIRST CONJUGATION-IN ER.
INFINITIVE MOOD.
IMPERFECT.
they speak.
Nous avons parlé,
Vous avez parlé,
Ils ont parlé,
he has spoken.
we have spoken.
you have spoken.
they have spoken.
PLUPERFECT.
PAST.
PRESENT.
Parler,
to speak.
Avoir parlé,
to have spoken
PARTICIPLES.
PRESENT,
Parlant,
speaking.
PAST.
PAST.
Ayant parlé,
having spoken
Parlé,
spoken.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
PRETERIT INDEFINITE.
PRESENT.
Je parle,
I speak.
Tu parles,
thou speakest.
J'ai parlé,
Tu as parlé,
I have spoken.
thou hast spoken.
Il parle,
he speaks.
Il a parlé,
Nous parlons,
we speak.
Vous parlen,
you speak.
Пls parlent,
Je parlais,
Tu parlais,
Il parlait,
Nous parlions,
Vous parliez,
Ils parlaient,
Je parlai,
Tu parlas,
11 parla,
Nous parlames,
thou spokest.
he spoke.
we spoke.
Vous parlâtes,
Ils parlèrent,
Je parlerai,
Tu parleras,
Il parlera,
I was speaking.
thou wast speaking.
he was speaking.
we were speaking.
you were speaking.
they were speaking.
PRETERIT DEFINITE.
Nous parlerons,
Vous parlerez,
Ils parleront,
FUTURE.
I spoke.
you spoke.
they spoke.
I shall speak.
thou shalt speak.
he shall speak.
we shall speak.
you shall speak.
they shall speak.
CONDITIONAL PRESENT.
Je parlerais,
Tu parlerais,
Il parlerait,
Nous parlerions,
Vous parleriez,
Ils parleraient,
I should speak.
thou shouldst speak.
he should speak.
we should speak.
you should speak.
they should speak.
Parle,
Parlons,
Parlez,
PRESENT.
Que je parle,
Que tu parles,
Qu'il parle,
Que nous parlions,
Que vous parliez,
Qu'ils parlent,
Que jo parlasse,
J'avais parlé,
Tu avais parlé,
Il avait parlé,
Nous avions parlé,
Vous aviez parlé,
Ils avaient parlé,
I had spoken.
thou hadst spoken.
he had spoken.
we had spoken.
you had spoken.
they had spoken.
Preterit anterior.
J'eus parlé,
Tu eus parlé,
Il eut parlé,
Nous eûmes parlé,
Vous eûtes parlé,
Ils eurent parlé,
I had spoken.
thou hadst spoken.
he had spoken.
we had spoken.
you had spoken.
they had spoken.
PAST FUTURE.
J'aurai parlé,
Tu auras parlé,
Il aura parlé,
Nous aurons parlé,
Vous aurez purlė,
Ils auront parlé,
I shall have spoken.
thou shalt have spoken.
he shall have spoken.
we shall have spoken.
you shall have spoken,
they shall have spoken.
CONDITIONAL PAST.
J'aurais parlé, I should have spoken
Tu aurais parlé, thou shouldst have spoken
Il aurait parlé,
he should have spoken
Nous aurions parlé, we should have spoken.
Vous auriez parlé, you should have spoken.
Is auraient parle, they should have spoken.
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
speak or do speak (thou.)
let us speak.
speak or do speak (you.)
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
that I may speak.
that thou mayst speak.
that he may speak.
that we may speak.
that you may speak.
that they may speak.
IMPERFECT.
Que tu parlasses,
Qu'il parlât,
Que nous parlassions,
Que vous parlassiez,
Qu'ils parlassent,
that I
that thou
that he
that we
that you
that they
PRETERIT.
Que j'aie parlé,
Que tu aies parlé,
Qu'il ait parlé,
Que nous ayons parlé,
Que vous ayez parlé,
Qu'ils aient parlé,
that I may
that thou mayst
that he may
that we may
that you may
that they may
PLUPERFECT.
that I might
Que j'eusse parlé,
Que tu eusses parlé, that thou mightst
Qu'il eût parlé,
that he might
Que nous eussions parlé, that we might
Que vous eussiez parlé, that you might
Qu'ils eussent parlé, that they might
have spoken.
46
542
SECOND CONJUGATION-IK.
PRESENT.
Finir,
SECOND CONJUGATION IN IR.
INFINITIVE Mood.
to finish. Avoir fini,
PAST.
to have finished
PARTICIPLES.
PRESENT.
Finissant,
finishing.
PAST.
PAST.
Ayant fini,
having finished.
Fini,
finished.
INDICATIVE Mood.
Je finis,
Tu finis,
Il finit,
Nous finissons,
PRESENT.
PRETERIT INDEFINITE.
I finish.
thou finishest.
J'ai fini,
Tu as fini,
he finishes.
Il a fini,
we finish.
Vous finissez,
Ils finissent,
Ils ont fini,
Je finissais,
Tu finissais,
Il finissait,
Nous finissions,
Vous finissiez,
IMPERFECT.
you finish.
they finish.
I was finishing.
thou wast finishing.
he was finishing.
we were finishing.
you were finishing.
they were finishing.
PRETERIT DEFINITE.
Ils finissaient,
Je finis,
Tu finis,
Il finit,
Nous finimes,
Vous finîtes,
Ils finirent,
JTURE.
Je finirai,
Tu finiras,
Il finira,
Nous finirons,
Vous finirez,
Ils finiront,
I finished.
thou finishedst.
he finished.
we finished.
you finished.
they finished.
I shall finish.
thou shalt finish.
he shall finish.
we shall finish.
you shall finish.
they shall finish.
CONDITIONAL PRESENT.
Je finirais,
Tu finirais,
Nous finirions,
Il finirait,
Vous finiriez,
Ils finiraien'.
I should finish.
thou shouldst finish.
he should finish.
we should finish.
you should finish.
they should finish.
PRESENT.
Que je finisse,
Que tu finisses,
Qu'il finisse,
Que nous finissions,
Que vous finissiez,
Qu'ils finissent,
Que je finisse,
Que tu finisses,
Qu'il finît,
Nous avons fini,
Vous avez fini,
I have finished.
thou hast finished.
he has finished.
we have finished,
you have finished.
they have finished.
PLUPERFECT.
J'avais fini,
Tu avais fini,
Il avait fini,
Nous avions fini,
Vous aviez fini,
Ils avaient fini,
J'eus fini,
Tu eus fini,
Il eut fini,
I had finished.
thou hadst finished.
he had finished.
we had finished.
you had finished.
they had finished.
PRETERIT ANTERIOR.
Nous eûmes fini,
Vous eûtes fini,
Ils eurent fini,
I had finished.
thou hadst finished.
he had finished.
we had finished.
you had finished.
they had finished.
PAST FUTURE.
J'aurai fini,
Tu auras fini,
Il aura fini,
Nous aurons fini,
Vous aurez fini,
Ils auront fini,
I shall have finished.
thou shalt have finished
he shall have finished:
we shall have finished.
you shall have finished.
they shall have finished.
CONDITIONAL PAST.
J'aurais fini,
Tu aurais fini,
Il aurait fini,
Nous aurions fini,
Vous auriez fini,
Ils auraient fini,
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
Finis,
Finissons,
Finissez,
finish (thou.)
let us finish.
finish (you.)
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
that I may finish.
that thou mayst finish.
that he may finish.
that we may finish.
that you may finish.
that they may finish.
IMPERFECT.
Que nous finissions,
Que vous finissiez,
Qu'ils finissent,
that I might finish.
that thou mightst finish.
that he might finish.
that we might finish.
that you might finish.
that they might finish.
PRETERIT
Que j'aie fini,
Que tu aies fini,
Qu'il ait fini,
Que nous ayons fini,
Que vous ayez fini,
Qu'ils aient fini,
I should
thou shouldst
he should
we should
you should
they should
that I may
that thou mayst
that he may
that we may
that you may
that they may
PLUPERFECT.
Que j'eusse fini,
Que tu eusses fini,
Qu'il eût fini,
Que nous eussions fini,
Que vous eussiez fini,
Qu'ils eussent fini,
that I might
that thou mightst
that he might
that we might
that you might
that they might
have finished.
kave finished.
have finished.
THIRD CONJUGATION-OIR.
543
PRESENT.
Recevoir,
THIRD CONJUGATION-IN OIR.
INFINITIVE MOOD.
to receive. Avoir reçu,
PAST.
to have received.
PARTICIPLES.
PRESENT.
Recevant,
receiving.
PAST
PAST.
Ayant reçu,
having received.
Reçu,
received.
PRESENT.
ie reçois,
Tu reçois,
J'ai reçu,
Tu as reçu,
Il reçoit,
Nous recevons,
Vous recevez,
Ils reçoivent,
Je recevais,
Tu recevais,
Il recevait,
Nous recevions,
Vous receviez,
Ils recevaient,
Je reçus,
Tu reçus,
Il reçut,
IMPERFECT.
INDICATIVE Mood.
I receive.
thou receivest.
he receives.
we receive.
you receive.
they receive.
I was receiving.
thou wast receiving.
he was receiving.
we were receiving.
you were receiving.
they were receiving.
PRETERIT DEFINITE.
Nous reçûmes,
Vous reçûtes,
Ils recurent,
Je recevrai,
Tu recevras,
Il recevra,
Nous recevrons,
Vous recevrez, .
Ils recevront,
FUTURE.
CONDITIONAL
Je recevrais,
Tu recevrais,
li recevrait,
Nous recevrions,
Vous recevriez,
Ils recevraient,
I received.
thou receivedst.
he received.
we received.
you received.
they received.
I shall receive.
thou shalt receive.
he shall receive.
we shall receive.
you shall receive.
they shall receive.
PRESENT.
I should receive.
thou shouldst receive.
he should recrive.
we should receive.
you should receive.
they should receive.
PRESENT.
Il a reçu,
PRETERIT INDEFINITE.
Nous avons reçu,
Vous avez reçu,
Ils ont reçu,
I have received.
thou hast received.
he has received.
we have received.
you have received.
they have received.
PLUPERFECT.
J'avais reçu,
Tu avais reçu,
Il avait reçu,
Nous avions reçu,
Vous aviez reçu,
Ils avaient reçu,
PRETERIT
J'eus reçu,
Tu eus reçu.
Il eut reçu,
Nous eûmnes reçu,
Vous eûtes reçu,
Ils eurent reçu,
I had received
thou hadst received.
he had received.
wc had received.
you had received.
they had received.
ANTERIOR.
I had received
thou hadst received
he had received
we had received
you had received
they had received
PAST FUTURE.
J'aurai reçu,
Tu auras reçu,
Il aura reçu,
Nous aurons reçu,
Vous aurez reçu,
Ils auront reçu,
I shall have received
thou shalt have received
he shall have received
we shall have received
you shall have received
they shall have received
CONDITIONAL PAST.
J'aurais reçu,
I should have received.
Tu aurais reçu, thou shouldst have received
Il aurait reçu,
he should have received
Nous aurions reçu, we should have received.
Vous auriez reçu, you should have received
Ils auraient reçu, they should have received
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
Reçois,
Recevons,
Recevez,
receive (thou.)
let us receive.
receive (you.)
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
that I may receive.
that thou mayst receive.
Que je reçoive,
Que tu reçoives,
Qu'il reçoive,
Que nous recevions,
Que vous receviez,
Qu'ils recoivent,
Que je reçusse,
that he may receive.
that we may receive.
that you may receive.
that they may receive.
IMPERFECT.
that I
that thou
that he
that roe
Que tu reçusses,
Qu'il reçût,
Que nous reçussions,
that you
that they
Que vous reçussiez,
Qu'ils reçussent,
PRETERIT.
Que j'aie recu,
Que tu aies reçu,
Qu'il ait reçu,
Que nous avons reçu,
Que vous ayez reçu,
Qu'ils aient reçu,
that I may
that thou mayst
that he may
that we may
that you may
that they may
PLUPERFECT.
Que j'eusse reçu,
that I might
Que tu eusses reçu, that thou mightst
Qu'il eut reçu,
Que nous eussions reçu,
that he might
that we might
that they might
Que vous eussiez reçu, that you might
Qu'ils eussent reçu,
have receined,
have received,
544
FOURTH CONJUGATION-RE.
FOURTH CONJUGATION-IN RE.
INFINITIVE MOOD.
PRESENT.
PAST.
Vendre,
to sell.
Avoir vendu,
to have sold.
PARTICIPLES.
PRESENT.
Vendant,
selling.
PAST.
PAST.
Ayant vendu,
Vendu,
sold.
INDICATIVE Mood.
having sold.
1
Nous avons vendu,
Vous avez vendu,
thou hast sold.
he has sold.
we have sold.
you have sold.
they have sold.
PRESENT.
PRETERIT INDEFINITE.
Je vends,
Tu vends,
Il vend,
Nous vendons,
I sell.
thou sellest.
he sells.
we sell.
J'ai vendu,
Tu as vendu,
I have sold.
Il a vendu,
Vous vendez,
Ils vendent,
IMPERFECT.
Je vendais,
l'u vendais,
Il vendait,
Nous vendions,
Vous vendiez,
you sell.
they sell.
I was selling.
thou wast selling.
he was selling.
we were selling.
you were selling.
they were selling.
Ils vendaient,
PRETERIT DEFINITE.
Je vendis,
I sold.
Tu vendis,
Il vendit,
Nous vendîmes,
Vous vendîtes,
Ils vendirent,
thou soldest.
he sold.
toe sold.
you sold.
they sold.
FUTURE.
Je vendrai,
Tu vendras,
Il vendra,
Nous vendrons,
Vous vendrez,
Ils vendront,
I shall sell.
thou shalt sell.
he shall sell.
we shall sell.
you shall sell.
they shall sell.
CONDITIONAL PRESENT.
Je vendrais,
Tu vendrais,
Il vendrait,
Nous vendrions,
Vous vendriez,
lls vendraient,
I should sell.
thou shouldst sell.
he should sell.
we should sell.
you should sell.
they should sell.
Ils ont vendu,
PLUPERFECT.
J'avais vendu,
Tu avais vendu,
Il avait vendu,
Nous avions vendu,
Vous aviez vendu,
Ils avaient vendu,
PRETERIT
J'eus vendu,
Tu eus vendu,
Il eut vendu,
Nous eûmes vendu,
Vous eûtes vendu,
Ils eurent vendu,
I had sold.
thou hadst sold.
he had sold.
we had sold.
you had sold.
they had sold.
ANTERIOR.
I had sold.
thou hadst sold.
PAST FUTURE.
J'aurai vendu,
Tu auras vendu,
Il aura vendu,
Nous aurons vendu,
Vous aurez vendu,
Ils auront vendu,
he had sold,
we had sold.
you had sold.
they had sold.
I shall have sold.
thou shalt have sold.
he shall have sold.
we shall have sold.
you shall have sold.
they shall have sold.
CONDITIONAL PAST.
I should have sold.
thou shouldst have sold.
he should have sold.
we should have sold.
you should have sold.
they should have sold.
J'aurais vendu,
Tu aurais vendu,
Il aurait vendu,
Nous aurions vendu,
Vous auriez vendu,
Ils auraient vendu,
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
Vends,
Vendons,
Vendez,
sell (thou.)
let us sell.
sell (you.)
PRESENT.
Que jo vende,
Que tu vendes,
Qu'il vonde,
Que nous vendions,
Que vous vendiez,
Qu'ils vendent,
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
that I may sell.
that thou mayst sell.
that he may sell.
that we may sell.
that you may sell.
that they may sell.
IMPERFECT.
Que je vendisse,
Que tu vendisses,
Qu'il vendît,
Que nous vendissions,
Que vous vendissiez,
Qu'ils vendissent,
that I might sell.
that thou mightst sell.
that he might sell.
that we might sell.
that you might sell.
that they might sell.
PRETERIT.
Que j'aie vendu,
Que tu aies vendu,
Qu'il ait vendu,
Que nous ayuns vendu,
Que vous ayez vendu,
Qu'ils aient vendu,
that I may
that thou mayst
that he may
that we may
that you may
that they may j
PLUPERFECT.
Que j'eusse vendu, that I might
Que tu eusses vendu, that thou mightst
Qu'il eût vendu,
that he might
Que nous eussions vendu, that we might
Que vous eussiez vendu, that you might
Qu'ils eussent vendu, that they might
have sold.
REFLECTED VERB.
544
CONJUGATION OF A REFLECTED VERB.
INFINITIVE MOOD.
PRESENT,
PAST.
Se lever,
to rise.
S'être levé,
to have risen
PARTICIPLES.
PRESENT.
Se levant,
Love,
PAST..
rising.
risen.
INDICATIVE Mood.
PAST.
S'étant levé,
having risen.
you rise.
they rise.
Il s'est le
Nous nous sommes levės,
Vous vous êtes levés,
thou hast risen.
he has risen.
we have risen.
you have risen.
they have risen.
PRESENT,
PRETERIT INDEFINITE.
Je me lève,
Tu te lèves,
Il se lève,
Nous nous levons,
I rise.
thou risest.
he rises.
we rise.
Je me suis levé,
Tu t'es levé,
I have risen.
Vous vous levez,
Ils se lèvent,
IMPERFECT.
Je me levais,
Tu te levais,
Il se levail,
Nous nous levions,
Vous vous leviez,
Ils se levaient,
I was rising.
thou wast rising.
he was rising.
we were rising.
you were rising.
they were rising.
PRETERIT DEFINITE.
Je me levai,
Tu te levas,
Il se leva,
Nous nous levâmes,
Vous vous levâtes,
Ils se levèrent,
FUTURE.
Je me lèverai,
Tu te lèveras,
Il se lèvera,
Nous nous lèverons,
Vous vous lèverez,
Ils se lèveront,
CONDITIONAL
Je me lèverais,
Tu te lèverais,
Il se lèverait,
Nous nous lè verions,
Vous vous lèveriez,
Ils se lèveraient,
I rose.
thou rosest.
he rose.
We rose.
you rose.
they rose.
I shall rise.
thou shalt rise.
he shall rise.
we shall rise.
you shall rise.
they shall rise.
PRESENT.
I should rise.
hou shouldst rise.
he should rise.
we should rise.
you should rise.
they should rise.
PRESENT.
Que je me lève,
Que tu te lèves,
Qu'il se lève,
Que nous nous levions,
Que vous vous leviez,
Vils se lèvent,
Ils se sont levės,
PLUPERFect.
Je m'étais levé,
Tu t'étais levé,
Il s'était levé,
Nous nous étions levés,
Vous vous étiez levés,
Ils s'étaient levés,
I had risen.
thou hadst risen.
he had risen.
we had risen.
you had risen.
they had risen.
PRETERIT ANTERIOR.
Je me fus levé,
Tu te fus levé,
Il se fut levé,
Nous nous fûmes levés,
Vous vous fûtes levés,
Ils se furent levés,
I had risen.
thou hadst risen.
PAST FUTURE,
Je me serai levé,
Tu te seras levé,
Il se sera levé,
he had risen.
we had risen.
you had risen.
they had risen.
I shall have risen.
thou shalt have risen,
he shall have risen.
Nous nous serons levės, we shall have risen.
Vous vous serez levés, you shall have risen.
Ils se seront levés, they shall have risen.
CONDITIONAL PAST.
Je me serais levé,
Tu te serais levé,
Il se serait levé,
Nous nous serions levés,
Vous vous seriez levés,
Ils se seraient levés,
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
Lève-toi,
Levons-nous,
Levez-vous,
rise (thou.)
let us rise.
rise (you.)
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
that I may risc.
that thou mayst rise.
that he may rise.
that we may rise.
that you may rise.
that they may rise.
IMPERFECT.
Que je me levasse,
Que tu te levasses,
Qu'il se levât,
Que nous nous levassions,
Que vous vous levassiez,
Qu'ils se levassent,
that I
that thou
that he
that we
that you
that they.
might rise.
I should
thou shouldst
he should
Que je me sois levé,
Que tu te sois levé,
Qu'il se soit levé,
Que nous nous soyons levés,
Que vous vous soyez levės,
Qu'ils se soient levés,
we should
you should
they should
PRETERIT.
that I'
that thou
that he
that we
that you
that they
PLUPERFECT.
that I
that thou
that he
Que je me fusse levé,
Que tu te fusses levé,
Qu'il se fût levé,
Que nous nous fussions levés, that we
Que vous vous fussiez levés, that you
Qu'ils se fussent levés, that they
have risen.
may have
risen.
might have
risen.
46*
546
IRREGULAR VERBS.
PRESENT OF THE
INFINITIVE.
PRIMITIVE TENSES.
PRESENT
PARTICIPLE
PRESENT.
PARTICIPLE
PAST
OF THE
INDICATIVE.
IRREGULAR
PRETERIT
DEFINITE.
FIRST
Aller,
to go.
Allant.
Allé.
Je vaís.
J'allai.
Envoyer, to send.
Envoyant. Envoyé.
-J'envoie.
J'envoyai.
SECOND
Acquérir, to acquire.
Acquérant. Acquis.
J'acquiers
J'acquis.
Bouillir, to boil.
Bouillant.
Courir,
to run.
Courant.
Bouilli.
Couru.
Je bous.
Je cours.
Je bouillis.
Je courus.
Cueillir,
to gather.
Cueillant.
Cueilli.
Je cueille..
Je cueillis.
Dormir,
to sleep.
Dormant.
Dormi.
Je dors.
Je dormis.
Faillir,
to fail.
Faillant.
Failli.
Je faux.
Fuir,
to flec.
Fuyant.
Fui.
Je fuis.
Mentir,
to lie.
Mentant.
Menti.
Je mens.
Je faillis.
Je fuis.
Je mentis,
Mourir,
to die.
Mourant.
Mort.
Je meurs.
Je mourus.
Offrir,
to offer.
Offrant.
Offert.
J'offre.
Ouvrir,
to open.
Ouvrant.
Ouvert.
J'ouvre.
Partir,
to set out.
Partant.
Parti.
Je pars.
Sentir,
to feel.
Sentant.
Senti.
Je sens.
J'offris.
J'ouvris.
Je partis.
Je sentis.
Sortir,
to go out.
Sortant.
Sorti.
Je sors.
Je sortis.
Tenir,
to hold.
Tenant.
Tenu.
Je tiens.
Je tins.
Tressaillir, to start.
Tressaillant. Tressailli.
Je tressaille. Je tressaillis.
qaille.
Venir
to come.
Venant.
Venu.
Je viens.
Je vins.
Vêtir
to clothe.
Vêtant.
vêtu.
Je vêts.
To vêtis.
THIRD
Falloir, to be nccessary.
Fallu.
Il faut.
Il fallut.
Mouvant.
Mû.
Je Meus.
Je mus.
Il pleut.
Il plut.
Mouvoir, to move.
Pleuvoir, to rain.
Pourvoir, to provide.
Pouvoir, to be able.
Pouvant.
Prévaloir, to prevail.
S'asseoir, to sit down.
Prévalant.
Prévalu.
Pleuvant. Plu.
Pourvoyant. Pourvu.
Pu.
Je pourvois. Je pourv is
Je
peux or je Je pus.
puis.
Je prévaux. Je prévalus.
S'asseyant. Assis.
Je m'assieds. Je m'assis.
Savoir,
to know,
Sachant.
Su.
Je sais.
Je sus.
IRREGULAR VERBS.
547
VERBS.
DERIVED TENSES.
NOTE.—Persons regularly formed are in Italics.
CONJUGATION.
Pres. indicative. Je vais, tu vas, il va, nous allons, vous allez, ils vont.-Fut. J'iral,
tu iras, etc.-Cond. J'irais, tu irais, etc.-Imper. Va, allons, allez.-Pres. subj. Que
j'aille, que tu ailles, qu'il aille, que nous allions, que vous alliez, qu'ils aillent.
Fut. J'enverrai, tu enverras, etc.-Cond. J'enverrais, tu enverrais, etc.
CONJUGATION.
Pres. ind. J'acquiers, tu acquiers, il acquiert, nous acquérons, vous acquérez, ils ac-
quièrent.-Fut. J'acquérrai, tu acquerras, etc.-Cond. J'acquerrais, tu acquerrais, etc.
-Pres. subj. Que j'acquière, que tù acquières, qu'il acquière, que nous acquérions, quo
vous acquéricz, qu'ils acquièrent.
Fut. Je courrai, tu courras, etc.-Cond. Je courrais, tu courrais, etc.
Fut. Je cueillerai, tu cueilleras, etc.-Cond. Je cueillera is, tu cueillerais, etc.-
Fut. Je mourrai, tu mourras, etc.-Cond. Je mourrais, tu mourrais, etc.--Pres. subj.
Que je meure, que tu meures, qu'il meure, que nous mourions, que vous mouriez, qu'ils
meurent.
Pres. ind. Je tiens, tu tiens, il tient, nous tenons, vous tenez, ils tiennent.-Fut. Je
tiendrai, tu tiendras, etc.--Cond. Je tiendrais, tu tiendrais, etc.-Pres. subj. Que je
tienne, que tu tiennes, qu'il tienne, que nous tenions, que vous teniez, qu'ils tiennent.
Fut. Je tressaillerai, etc.-Cond. Je tressaillerais, etc.
Pres. ind. Je viens, tu viens, il vient, nous venons, vous venez, ils viennent.-Fut.
Je viendrai, tu viendras, etc.-Cond. Je viendrais, tu viendrais, etc.-Pres. subj. Que
je vienne, que tu viennes, qu'il vienne, que nous venions, que vous veniez, qu'ils
viennent.
CONJUGATION.
Fut. Il faudra.-Cond. I faudrait.—Pres. subj. Qu'il faille, (no participle present.)
Pres. ind. Je meus, tu meus, il meut, nous mouvons, vous mouvez, ils meuvent.-
Pres. subj. Que je neuve, que tu meuves, qu'il meuve, que nous mouvions, que vous
mouviez, qu'ils meuvent.
Pres. ind. Je peux or je puis, tu peux, il peut, nous pouvons, vous pouvez, il peuvent.
-Fut. Je pourrai, tu pourras, etc.-Cond. Je pourrais, tu pourrais, etc.-Pres. subj,
Que je puisse, que tu puisses, etc.
Like valoir, except the pres. subj., which is regular.
Pres. ind. Je m'assieds, tu t'assieds, il s'assied, nous nous asseyons, vous vous as
seyez, ils s'asseient.-Fut. Je m'assiérai, tu t'assièras, etc. They say also: Je m'asseio-
rai, tu t'asseieras, etc.-Cond. Je m'assiérais, tu t'assiérais, etc.; or, je m'usseierais, etc.
Pres. ind. Je sais, tu sais, il sait, nous savons, vous savez, ils savent.-Imp. ind. Ja
savais, tu savais, etc.-Fut. Je saurai, tu sauras, etc.-Cond. Je saurais, tu saurais, etc.
-Imp. Sache, sachons, sachez.
548
IRREGULAR VERBS.
IRREGULAR
PRIMITIVE TENSES.
PRESENT
PRESENT OF THE
INFINITIVE.
PARTICIPLE PARTICIPLE
PRESENT.
PAST.
OF THE
INDICATIVE.
PRETERIT.
DEFINITE.
Valoir,
to be worth.
Valant.
Valu.
Je vaux.
Jo valus.
Voir,
to see.
Voyant.
Vu.
Je vois.
Je vis.
Vouloir,
to be willing.
Voulant.
Voulu.
Je veux.
Je voulus.
FOURTH
Absoudre, to absolve.
Baltre,
to strike.
Absolvant.
Battant.
Absous.
Battu.
J'absous.
Je bats.
Je battis.
Boire,
to drink.
Buvant.
Bu.
Je bois.
Je bus.
Braire,
to bray.
Il brait.
Circoncire, to circumcise.
Clore,
Conclure, to conclude.
to shut.
Circoncisant. Circoncis.
Clos.
Je circoncis. Je circoncis.
Je clos.
Concluant.
Conclu.
Je conclus.
Je conclus.
Coudre,
to sew.
Cousunt.
Cousu,
Je cords.
Je cousis.
Croire,
to believe.
Croyant.
Cru.
Je crois.
Je crus.
Croître,
to grow up.
Croissant.
Crû.
Je crois.
Je crus.
Dire,
to say.
Disant.
Dit.
Je dis.
Je dis.
Éclore,
Écrire,
to hatch.
Éclos.
to write.
Écrivant. Écrit.
Exclure.
to exclude.
Faire,
to make, to do.
Excluant.
Faisant.
Exclu.
Il éclot.
J'écris.
J'exclus.
J'écrivis.
J'exclus.
Fait.
Je fais.
Je fis.
Joindre,
to join.
Joignant.
Joint.
Lire,
to read.
Lisant.
Lu.
Je joins.
Je lis.
Je joignis.
Je lus.
Luire,
to shine.
Luisant,
Lui.
Je luis.
Mettre,
to put.
Mettant.
Mis.
Je mets.
Je mis.
Moudre,
to grind.
Moulant.
Moulu.
Je mouds.
Je moulus.
Naître,
to be born.
Naissant.
Nẻ.
Je nais.
Nuire,
to harm.
Nuisant.
Nui.
Je nuis.
Je naquis.
Je nuisis.
Prendre,
to take.
Prenant.
Pris.
Je prends.
Je pris.
Répondre, to answer
Résolvant.
Rire,
to laugh.
Rompre,
to break.
Suffire,
Suivre,
to suffice.
Résoudre, to resolve.
Se taire,
Traire,
Vaincre,
Vivre,
to follow.
to be silent,
to milk.
to vanquish,
to live.
Répondant. Répondu.
Riant.
Rompant.
Suffisant.
Suivant.
Se taisant.
Trayant.
Vair quant,
Vivant,
Je réponds. Je répondis
Résous, résolu. Je résous.
Ri.
Je ris.
Rompu.
Je romps.
Suffi.
Je suffis.
Suivi.
Tu.
Trait.
Je suis.
Vaincu.
Vécu.
Je me tais,
Je trais.
Je vaincs.
Je vis.
Je rompis.
Je suffis.
Je suivis.
Je me tus.
Je vainquis,
Je vécus.
Je résolus.
Je ris.
1
IRREGULAR VERBS.
549
VERBS.
DERIVED TENSES.
NOTE.-Persons regularly formed are in italics.
Pres. ind. Je vaux, tu vaux, il vaut, nous valons, vous valez, ils valent.-Fut. Je
vaudrai, tu vaudras, etc.-Cond. Je vaudrais, tu vaudrais, etc.-No imper.-Pres. subj,
Que je vaille, que tu vailles, qu'il vaille, que nous valions, que vous valiez, qu'ils vaillent.
Fut. Je verrai, tu verras, etc.—Cond. je verrais, tu verrais, etc.
Pres. ind. Je veux, tu veux, il veut, nous voulons, vous voulez, ils veulent.-Fut. Je
voudrai, tu voudras, etc.—Cond. Je voudrais, tu voudrais, etc.—No imper.—Pres. subj.
Que je veuille, que tu veuilles, qu'il veuille, que nous voulions, que vous vouliez, qu'ils
veuillent.
CONJUGATION.
Pres. ind. Je bois, tu bois, il boit, nous buvons, vous buvez, ils boivent.-Pres. subj.
Que je boive, que tu boives, qu'il boive, que nous buvions, que vous buviez, qu'ils
boiyent.
Pres. ind. Je dis, tu dis, il dit, nous disons, vous dites, ils disent.-Dedire, contro-
dire, interdire, médire, prédire, make vous dédisez, vous contredisez, vous médisez, vous
prédisez. Other persons and tenses like dire.
Pres. ind. Je fais, tu fais, il fait, nous faisons, vous faites, ils font.-Fut. Je ferai,
tu feras, etc.-Cond Je ferais, tu ferais, etc.-Pres. subj. Qué je fasse, que tu fasses,
ets
Pres. ind. Je prends, tu prends, il prend, nous prenons, vous prenez, ils prennent.-
Fros, subj. Que je prenne, que tu prennes, qu'il prenne, que nous prenions, que vous
preniez, qu'ils prennent.
Pres. ind. Je vaines, tu vaines, il vainc, nous vainquens, vous vainquez, ils vainquenz
Compound verbs are conjugated in all moods and tenses like the verbs from which
they are derived. Renvoyer, repartir, convaincre, promettre, &c., are conjugated like
envoyer, partir, vaincre, mettre, &c.
With the aid of these tables, and the rules given in § 144 and following, there is no
French vorb which the learner will not be able to conjugate with facility.
RECUEIL EPISTOLAIRE.
Du Style Epistolaire.
Les lettres ont pour objet de communiquer ses pensées et ses senti
ments à des personnes absentes; elles sont dictées par l'amitié, la con-
fiance, la politesse, ou l'intérêt. C'est une conversation par écrit:
aussi le ton des lettres ne doit différer de celui de la conversation ordi-
naire, que par un peu plus de choix dans les objets, de correction dans
le style, et une plus grande précision. Le naturel et l'aisance forment
donc le caractère essentiel du style épistolaire; la prétention à l'esprit
et l'afféterie y sont insupportables.
La philosophie, la politique, les arts, les anecdotes, les bons-mots,
tout peut entrer dans les lettres; mais avec l'air d'abandon, d'aisance,
et de premier mouvement qui distingue la conversation des gens
d'esprit.
Puisqu'une lettre et sa réponse ne sont qu'une conversation entre
absents, écrivez, comme vous leur parleriez s'ils étaient là, c'est-à-dire
avec ce naturel, cette facilité, cet agrément même que demande un en-
tretien familier. Quelle doit être une conversation? claire et simple;
ce sont-là aussi les deux qualités du style épistolaire.
DU CÉRÉMONIAL DES LETTRES.
Madame, Monsieur, Mademoiselle, se placent au-dessus de la première
ligne d'une lettre lorsqu'on écrit à quelqu'un que l'on veut traiter avec
beaucoup d'égards ou de politesse. La distance se mesure ordinaire-
ment sur le degré de respect qu'on lui porte. Dans les lettres plus
familières ces qualifications viennent dans la ligne après les premiers
mots: J'ai reçu, monsieur ; je suis bien reconnaissant, madame; permet-
tez, mademoiselle, &c.
Lorsque la personne est décorée d'un titre, d'une dignité, ou remplit
une charge honorable, &c., il est d'usage de les répéter une ou plusieurs
fois suivant l'étendue de la lettre, monseigneur (en parlant à un évêque,
à un ministre, &c.,) monsieur le maréchal, madame la duchesse, monsieur le
président, &c.
Dans les lettres d'affaires, d'égal à égal, entre amis, la date se place
au haut de la page. La placer au bas est une marque de déférence ou
do respect
539
>
552
RECUEIL EPISTOLAIRE.
Les lettres se terminent ordinairement par l'expression d'un senti-
ment de respect, de reconnaissance, d'attachement, dont voici quelques
exemples:
Recevez, madame, avec bonté l'assurance de mon respectueux attache-
ment.
Agréez, madame, l'hommage de mon respect.
Les sentimens que vous m'avez inspirés, monsieur, sont aussi sincères
que durables.
Comptez à jamais, monsieur, sur la reconnaissance et l'attachement de,
&c.
Mon tendre et respectueux attachement ne finira qu'avec ma vie.
Adieu, je vous embrasse comme je vous aime, et c'est de tout mon cœur.
Agréez, monsieur, l'hommage des sentiments distingués que je vous ai
voués et que vous méritez si bien, &c.
J'ai l'honneur d'être, monsieur, avec un respect infini.
Agréez, je vous prie, mademoiselle, mes sentiments les plus respectueux.
J'ai l'honneur d'être, monsieur, avec des sentiments remplis de respect et
de considération.
Agréez, je vous prie, les assurances de la haute considération avec la-
quelle j'ai l'honneur d'être, monsieur, &c.
Les expressions ci-dessus sont suivies de la formule d'usage:
Votre très-humble et très-obéissant, ou très-dévouée, ou très-affec-
tionné serviteur, &c., pour un homme.
Votre très-humble et très-obéissante, ou très-dévouée, ou très-affec-
tionnée servante, &c., pour une femme.-La signature se place immé-
diatement au-dessous.
Il est bon d'observer que le choix parmi ces locutions et beaucoup
d'autres, que nous aurions pu également donner, dépend, en général,
de la nature des liaisons et des rapports entre les personnes qui
s'écrivent.
LETTRES DE COMMERCE, &c.
Les lettres des négociants et des marchands' doivent être concises
et claires. Dans les expressions des ordres et avis, on doit plutôt
observer beaucoup de circonspection et d'exactitude, qu'un langage
éloquent et fleuri. Les cérémonies et les complimens en doivent
être bannis, ou du moins on doit s'en servir très-peu; parce que
dans les affaires de négoce, on ne doit envisager que l'utile: et,
d'ailleurs, le négociant qui a besoin de son temps le doit ménager,
et l'employer avantageusement.
Quand on a plusieurs sujets à traiter, il est bon de commencer une
1 On appelle, en Français, négociants ceux qui ne font le commerce que pour les
pays étrangers; et l'on nomme marchands ceux qui ne trafiquent, soit en gros ou ev
détail, que dans l'endroit où ils résident.
RECUEIL EPISTOLAIRE.
553
nouvelle ligne à chaque changement de matière: car cet usage est
très-commode pour les personnes à qui on écrit.
Un négociant qui écrit dans les pays étrangers doit être très-réservé
sur les nouvelles, et particulièrement celles d'état, dans ses lettres;
de peur de s'attirer de mauvaises affaires, et de faire, dans les pays
despotiques, arrêter ou ses lettres ou ses correspondants.
·
Un correspondant ou facteur, qui reçoit une lettre, doit être fort
exact à répondre clairement, article par article, à tout ce qu'elle con-
tient, de crainte de préjudicier son commerce, en y omettant quelques
particularités, ou en y laissant la moindre ambiguité.
D'un jeune Marchand à un Marchand en Gros.
MONSIEUR-Sur la recommandation d'un voisin, qui s'est beaucoup
étendu sur votre réputation, je crois devoir, en entrant dans le commerce,
m'adresser à vous, pour vous prier de m'envoyer une certaine quantité de
marchandises convenables à un jeune homme qui commence, de la pre-
mière qualité et aux prix les plus raisonnables: ce que je me crois d'autant
plus fondé à espérer, que mon intention est qu'à l'avenir toutes les affaires
que nous ferons soient au comptant.
Je suis, monsieur, &c.
Réponse du Marchand en Gros.
MONSIEUR -En réponse à l'honneur de la vôtre du 6 du courant, je vous
enverrai par un roulier qui part demain une petite partie des articles que je
tiens, que je vous commets comme un échantillon de leur qualité et de la
modération de leur prix. S'il vous plaisait de renouveler votre commande,
je ferais tout ce qu'il dépendrait de moi pour me montrer digne de votre
bienveillance. Je suis, en fesant des voeux sincères pour vos succès, votre
reconnaissant serviteur.
Pour annoncer l'arrivée de Marchandises.
MESSIEURS-Nous venons de recevoir l'avis de l'arrivée de vos deux bal-
lots dans cette douane. Nous allons les retirer, et par le prochain courrier
nous vous en dirons notre sentiment; et même, si la qualité de la marchan-
dise est bonne, ainsi que nous l'espérons, nous pourrons vous envoyer le
compte de vente. Nous n'avons rien autre chose à vous dire pour le
présent.
Nous sommes vos très-humbles et très-obéissants serviteurs.
Pour donner avis de la vente de Marchandises.
MESSIEURS :-Votre ballot, numéro cinq, est déjà vendu, et nous aurions
placé l'autre qui nous reste, plus avantageusement, si nous avions voulu
accorder trois mois de terme pour le payement: mais nous n'avons pas
jugé à propos de le faire sans votre participation. Vous recevrez ci-inclus
le compte de vente, montant à mille francs, dont nous vous avons crédités,
pour vous en faire remise par nos premières. Le prix que nous en avons
tiré est assez avantageux pour le temps: il nous donne lieu d'espérer que
vous serez satisfaits de ce premier essai, et que vous nous continuerez
l'honneur de vos ordres. Nous sommes très-parfaitement vos, &c.
4
554
RECUEIL EPISTOLAIRE.
D'un Commis à son Négociant.
MONSIEUR :-Présumant que la prolongation de votre séjour à la cam.
pagne est occasionnée par quelque aflaire imprévue, je crois de mon devoir
de m'informer de votre santé, et en même temps de vous assurer que l'on
donne ici à vos affaires de commerce toute l'attention et tout le soin qu'elles
exigent. Si donc votre absence peut vous procurer quelque avantage,
soyez sûr que vous pouvez la prolonger sans danger, quoiqu'au surplus
votre retour soit ardemment désiré par votre fidèle serviteur.
MONSIEUR
Réponse du Négociant à son Commis.
-Vous avez conjecturé juste; des événements inattendus ont
retardé mon départ d'ici: mais je suis convaincu de votre fidélité et de votre
vigilance. Je suis, grâces à Dieu, en bonne santé, et j'espere me mettre
bientôt en route pour revenir en ville.
Votre, &c.
D'un Négociant à un autre pour prendre des Informations sur un Commis.
MONSIEUR:-Mr. L. m'a fait la demande d'une place qui se trouve vacante
dans ma maison. Il me paraît honnête; mais l'apparence n'étant pas une
caution suffisante, je prends la liberté de vous demander franchement votre
opinion sur sa probité et sur ses talens. Il m'a dit avoir été employé quel-
que temps dans votre maison, et je désirerais savoir particulièrement pour-
quoi vous vous êtes quittés. Comme il doit venir la semaine prochaine, si
vous me faites réponse avant ce temps vous obligerez infiniment votre très-
humble serviteur.
Réponse.
MONSIEUR -La personne dont vous me parlez dans votre lettre est réelle-
ment digne et de votre confiance et de votre bienveillance. Il travaillait
sous moi lorsque j'étais associé avec Mr. F.; mais cette société dissoute,
j'ai été obligé de réformer plusieurs commis, pour diminuer mes dépenses,
et nous avons tous deux éprouvé le plus grand regret de cette séparation.
Je suis votre très-humble serviteur.
Mr. P, à Paris.
De Crédit,¹ pour un Étranger.
À BOSTON, 10 Avril, 1849.
MONSIEUR :-Vous recevrez celle-ci des mains de Monsieur T. Nelton,
Américain, que ses parents font voyager dans divers états de l'Europe. Je
vous prie de le munir de lettres de recommandation sur différentes places
de France, d'Allemagne, et d'Italie. Son dessein étant de se rendre d'ici
en droiture dans votre ville, j'ai cru ne pouvoir mieux faire que de vous
le recommander, d'autant que c'est une personne aussi distinguée par sa
naissance que par son mérite personnel: ayez donc la bonté de lui faire tout
l'accueil qui dépendra de vous, pendant le séjour qu'il doit faire dans votre
1 Les lettres qu'un banquier ou négociant donne à quelqu'un pour recevoir de
l'argent de ses correspondants, en des lieux éloignés, s'appellent iestres de crédit.
Quoique ces lettres soient différentes des lettres de change, elles ont à-peu-près les
mêmes privilèges.
RECUEIL EPISTOLAIRE.
555
ville, et de lui rendre tous les services possibles. Vous lui fournirez sur
ses doubles reçus tout l'argent dont il pourra avoir besoin jusqu'à la concur-
rence de dix mille francs, dont vous pourrez vous rembourser sur moi, en
me faisant passer un de ces reçus. J'ai l'honneur d'être, avec la plus par-
faite estime,
Monsieur, votre, &c.
Mr. P, à Paris.
Confirmation de la précédente.
À BOSTON, le 10 Avril, 1849.
MONSIEUR -Ce qui précède est la copie d'une lettre de crédit qui vous
sera remise par Monsieur T. Nelton, Américain. Comme je désire obliger
sa famille avec qui je suis en liaison; et pour qui j'ai accepté, avec plaisir,
l'occasion de lui être utile, en lui fournissant quelques lettres de crédit et
de recommandation sur différentes places, je vous supplie très-instam-
ment d'avoir égard à celle que je lui ai donnée sur vous, et de lui procurer
tous les amusements qui pourront lui rendre le séjour de Paris agréable,
Vous lui fournirez, s'il vous plaît, pour ses besoins, jusqu'à dix mille francs ;
et vous en prendrez une double quittance, dont vous m'en enverrez une, et
prendrez sur moi votre rembours des avances que vous lui aurez faites. Je
joins ici sa signature, afin que vous puissiez la reconnaître dans l'occasion,
et vous guider en conséquence. Je me flatte que vous me saurez gré de
vous avoir procuré la connaissance d'un jeune homme d'esprit, et qui a reçu
une très-belle éducation. J'ai l'honneur d'être,
1
Réponse.
Monsieur, votre, &c.
Mr. R, à Boston.
À PARIS, le 26 Juin, 1849.
MONSIEUR : J'ai reçu l'honneur de la vôtre du 10 d'Avril dernier, qui
me porte copie et confirmation d'une lettre de crédit et de recommandation
que vous avez fournie à Monsieur T. Nelton, Américain, qui doit passer
par Paris. Je me ferai un vrai plaisir de lui rendre tous les services qui dé-
pendront de moi, n'ayant rien tant à cœur que de vous témoigner par des
preuves réelles combien je fais cas de tout ce qui me peut venir de votre
part; et je vous prie d'être persuadé de mon exactitude dans les débourse-
ments que je lui ferai, et de la parfaite estime, avec laquelle j'ai l'honneur
de me dire très-véritablement,
Monsieur, votre,&c.
Réponse à la lettre de Crédit inserée ci-dessus.
Mr. R., à Boston.
À PARIS, le 4 Août, 1849.
MONSIEUR :-Votre lettre du 10 d'Avril me fut remise hier par Monsieur
T. Nelton, qui était entré le jour d'avant dans notre ville. J'eus le plaisir
de l'avoir à dîner chez moi le même jour, et d'apprendre par moi-même
1 Il est de la prudence d'envoyer, par la poste, la signature de la personne qui est
chargée de la lettre de crédit, et même de désigner sa figure; et cela pour éviter
qu'en cas de vol în de porte, quelqu'un ne se présente en sa place.
556.
RECUEIL EPISTOLAIR E.
que vous ne m'avez fait qu'une légère peinture de son mérite, qui, à ce que
j'en puis juger, va au-dela de tout ce qu'on en peut dire. Soyez persuadé
que ce sera avec le plus grand plaisir du monde que je m'empresserai de lui
être utile, et de lui rendre tous les services qui seront en mon pouvoir, pen-
dant son séjour dans cette ville. J'ai l'honneur de me dire, avec une par.
faite affection,
Monsieur, votre, &c.
DES BILLETS.
ILS supposent une sorte de familiarité entre ceux qui se lès envoient.
On en écrit aussi à ses inférieurs; on n'en reçoit point d'eux. Ils
diffèrent d'une lettre en ce qu'ils n'exigent aucun cérémonial, qu'ils
sont plus courts, qu'ils ne portent qu'un simple nom pour adresse,
que, jusqu'à la manière tortillée ou bizarre de les plier, ils bravent
toute étiquette, qu'enfin ils ne s'emploient guère que pour faire une
invitation, accompagner un petit présent, annoncer un événement de
société, se donner même une simple marque de souvenir, et tenir lieu
d'une visite.
Lorsqu'un mot agréable ou ingénieux se place naturellement dans
un billet, il y ajoute quelque prix.
"Les affaires et les ennuis continuent à me tourmenter. Je vous
attends à dîner aujourd'hui; venez jeter quelques fleurs sur ma vie."
Voltaire invita l'auteur de l'Art d'Aimer à souper chez Madame du
Châtelet par ce quatrain si connu:
Au nom du Pinde et de Cythere
Gentil Bernard est averti,
Que l'art d'aimer doit samedi
Venir souper chez l'art de plaire.
On écrit communément les billets en se servant de la troisième per-
sonne, et sous ce rapport, ils demandent beaucoup d'attention pour ne
pas être amphibologiques. Par exemple: M. A * * * prie Mr. B* **
de vouloir bien dîner chez LUI. Chez qui? Il y a evidemment ici une
équivoque au moins grammaticale. Madame D*** prévient Madame
G*** qu'elle a aujourd'hui sa loge à l'Opéra. À laquelle des deux se
rapportent ces pronoms elle et sa?
Il est facile d'imaginer d'autres manières de tourner sans amphibo-
logie ces billets qu'on nomme du matin. Par exemple: Madame de
M*** aura samedi au soir, un ou deux violons et quelques danseurs;
elle s'estimerait heureuse, si Madame et Mademoiselle de L***,
venaient embellir sa petite fête ainsi qu'elle a l'honneur de les en
prier.
RECUEIL EPISTOLAIRE.
557
Madame M*** a aujourd'hui sa loge aux Français. Le plaisir du spec-
tacle sera doublé pour elle si elle peut avoir l'avantage d'en jouir avec Ma
dame le P***, à qui elle offre une ou même deux places.
M. de *** serait bien aimable s'il pouvait aujourd'hui venir dîner chez M.
L., qui l'en prie avec instance et lui dit mille choses honnêtes.
Madame S*** envoie savoir des nouvelles de la migraine de Mademoi-
selle P***, à qui elle fait les plus tendres compliments. Elle espère quo
cette indisposition n'aura pas de suites, et que la déesse de la santé ne vou-
dra pas se brouiller avec les grâces.
Les billets suivants et leurs réponses relatives aux circonstances les
plus ordinaires de la société, peuvent servir de modèles en ce genre.
Lundi, à une heure.
Mr. de Cimar présente ses plus sincères compliments à Mlle. de Bourdic,
et lui demande la permission de l'accompagner à l'assemblée demain soir,
Réponse.
Lundi, trois heures.
Mlle. de B. fait mille remerciments à Mr. de C. pour son offre obligeante,
qu'elle est très-fâchée de ne pouvoir accepter, étant elle-même déjà enga-
gée.
Lundi, dix heures du matin.
Mme. Deshayes fait ses respectueux complimens à Mme. Maillard, et
l'engage à lui faire l'honneur de venir ce soir prendre le thé.
Réponse.
Onze heures du matin.
Mme. M. fait ces compliments à Mme. D.; elle se fait un plaisir d'accep-
ter son aimable invitation.
Mardi, à midi.
Mille compliments de la part de Mme. de Beauharnais à Mme. de Ste.
Amaranthe et à ses jeunes demoiselles: elle espère qu'elles sont arrivées
sans accident à la maison, et parfaitement remises des fatigues de la der-
nière soirée.
Réponse.
Mardi, à deux heures.
Mme. et Mlles. de Ste. A. sont sensibles à l'intérêt que leur témoigne
Mme. de B.; elles sont arrivées saines et sauves, et se portent toutes bien,
à l'exception de Joséphine, qui a attrapé un petit rhume.
Mercredi.
Mille compliments de Mme. de Ségur à Mlle. le Compte: elle la prie de
lui accorder le plaisir de sa société à dîner Dimanche prochain. On se
mettra à table à cinq heures.
1 Nom du principal théâtre de Paris.
46*
558
RECUEIL EPISTOLAIRE.
Réponse.
Mille compliments de Mlle. le C.; elle ne manquera pas de se rendre à
l'invitation de Mme. de S.
Lundi, 4 Novembre, 1849.
Devant donner une lecture, Jeudi prochain à 8 heures du soir, dans mon
grand salon d'étude, sur la littérature Française, je prends la liberté de vous
envoyer un billet d'admission pour vous et votre aimable famille. Je tâche-
rai de ne pas être ennuyeux.
Mardi matin, 5 Nov., 1849.
Nous acceptons avec reconnaissance l'invitation à votre lecture sur la lit-
térature Française. C'est un sujet pour nous si attrayant que je vous défie
d'être ennuyeux. J'y mènerai un ou deux amis.
LETTRES DE CHANGE.
Bon pour 1000 francs.
À LONDRES, le 4 Décembre, 1849.
MONSIEUR :—À vue il vous plaira payer, par cette première de change, à
Monsieur R, la somme de mille francs, pour valeur reçue de lui, et pas-
serez en compte, comme par avis de
Votre très-humble serviteur,
Monsieur D, Négociant à Bordeaux.
Pour en donner Avis.
À LONDRES, ce 4 Décembre, 1849.
C
MONSIEUR -Je vous ai tiré ce jourd'hui mille francs, payables a vue a
Monsieur R, pour valeur reçue de lui. Je vous prie d'y faire honneur,
et de m'en donner débit, dans mon compte; ce qu'espérant de votre ponc-
tualité, je suis,
Monsieur, votre, &c.
À BOSTON, Ce 18 Nov., 1849.
MONSIEUR:-À huit jours de vue, il vous plaira payer, par cette seule
lettre de change, à Monsieur N, ou à son ordre, la somme de deux
cents piastres, pour valeur reçue de lui en marchandises, que vous passerez
en compte, comme pa avis de
Bon pour 200 piastres.
Votre très-humble serviteur,
À Monsieur E, Negociant, à Charleston.
Da
BORDEREAU.
Mr. Frédéric Douille,
Doit à Jean Marot,
1849. 5 Sept.-Pour une paire de bottes, cuir fin,
Pour acquit,
f36.
JEAN MAROT.
INDEX.
:
¡A.
À, § 12, 163—5, to, at, in, 163,
13; used before the name of a city,
(338,) with.
À CÔTÉ E, § 163-10, by, by the
side of.
À LA,
À L', AU, AUX, § 8, to the.
À LAQUELLE, $79, to whom,
which.
À LE, À LES, § 12; what they mean.
N. 2, (p. 463.)
À LA MIENNE, § 104, to mine. (See
AU MIEN.)
À MOINS QUE... NE, $164-2, un-
less.
À MOI, À TOI, LUI, ELLE, &c.,
$ 63, to me, thee, him, her, &c.;
possessive, 106, mine, thine, &c.
À QUI, § 79, to whom; for persons
only.
A, AN, § 1, 3, un, une. (See Ar-
ticles, p. 462.) Never used before
Never used before
cent, a hundred; long-temps, a long
time; mille, a thousand; beaucoup,
a great many.
A FEW, SOME, $3, des, quelques;
never omitted in French.
A GREAT MANY, §6, beaucoup.
A HUNDRE, §6, cent.
A LONG TIME, § 6, long-temps.
A THOUSAND, 6, mille.
◊
ABIDE, (to,) by, $64, s'en tenir à.
ABLE, (to be,) pouvoir, 92, 175;
êlre en état, être à même de, 378.
ABOUT, 189, environ.
ABOVE, UP STAIRS, en haut.
ACCENTS: e (mute) changed to è
grave) in certain verbs, $144—4.
ACCENTS: é (acute) to grave in
others, 144-5.
ACCORDING TO, selon; according
to circumstances, selon les circon-
stances; that is, according to sircum-
stances, it depends, c'est seion, 317.
ACCOURIR, $64, to run to, up.
ACCUSTOM, (to,) accoutumer.
be accustomed to a thing, être accou-
tumé à quelque chose, 370.
To
ACHE, (the,) le mal; the earache,
le mal d'oreille; the heartache, le
mal de cœur, &c., 291.
ACQUAINTED (to be) with, connaî
tre; been acquainted with, connu;
to become acquainted with some-
body, to make some one's acquaint-
ance, faire connaissance de, (avec,)
quelqu'un; I have become acquaint-
ed with him or her, j'ai fait sa con-
naissance, 329; to be thoroughly ac
quainted with a thing, être au fait
d'une chose; to make one's self
thoroughly acquainted with a thing,
se mettre au fait d'une chose, 342.
ADIEU, adieu, farewell, God be
with you, good-by. Au plaisir de
vous revoir, (au revoir,) till I see you
again, I hope to see you again soon,
384.
ADJECTIVES: agree with their noun
in number, 107; in gender, 466, 284.
Feminine adjectives, 284; their for-
mation from masculine adjectives,
286, 287. Adjectives that have no
plural for the masculine gender, 491.
Comparison of adjectives, 490, 491.
Adjectives that are irregular in the
formation of their comparatives and
560
INDEX.
superlatives, 144. Adjectives sub- | tout à coup, tout à la fois, soudaine
鲞
​stantively used, 402. Place of the
adjective with regard to the substan-
tive, 132. The adjective which in
English follows how,stands in French
after the verb, 335. 2d partitive ar-
ticle before adj., (de,) $26. 1st par-
titive, if adj. is after the noun, § 27,
28. Two adject. qualify.ng the same
noun, do not take two articles, § 18
have a plur. and agree with the noun,
$ 137-4; end in e mute in the femin.
-5; when they require a masc. plur.
-6; -8; when a fem.-7; such a
man,-9; 10; formation of femin. |
and plur. of irreg. adj., (p. 490,-491 ;)
their place, 129-1-2-3:
|
ment, 287; all that which, all which,
all, $91. Never omitted in French,
tout ce qui, ce que.
ALLER, to go, 84; allé, gone, 165;
present tense, 88 to 96; été, past
participle of être, with the auxiliary
avoir used for allé, past participle of
aller, which is always connected
with être as auxiliary, 160; aller en
voiture à cheval, à pied, 214; aller,
to travel to a place, 213; aller bien,
to fit, to go right, 239. Aller and
venir, followed by infinitive, 374.
S'en aller, to go away, 219, 242, 243,
ALMOST, presque, 180.
ALONE, by one's self, seul, e, 367.
ALONG, le long du, de la, &c., 378.
ALOUD, haut, à haute voix, 264.
ALREADY, déjà, 152.
ALWAYS, toujours, 142.
AMUSE, (to,) one's self, (to enjoy
to divert, s'amuser à, 217.
AN, ANNÉE, year, their difference,
289, N. 3.
ADRESSER (s') à, § 64, to apply to.
ADVERBS, § 161. Adverbes; of place,
88, 193, 200; quality and manner,
26, 140, 180; of number, 165, 363;
of time, 90, 107, 108, 110, 189;
comparative, 66, 77, 78, 137; com-
parison of, 145; irregularly formed,
147. Their places, 161, 2, 3, 4;
how much, too much, &c.; adverb ANECDOTES: Witty answer of a
in French, adjective in English, 4. young prince, 411. The French lan-
How formed from adjectives, 5, 6, 7. | guage, 412. A shopkeeper's answer,
AFFORD (to), avoir les moyens, 327. | 411. The Emperor Charles V., 442.
AFTER, (Rule 1, N. 1,) 460, après; The entrance of a king into a town,
after them ($ 63,) après eux.
442. The last request of an old man,
The three questions, 444. An-
swer of a lazy young man, 445.
Hearing counsel, 445. Noble answer
of a lady, 445. Cornelia, 447. Po-
liteness, 450. Mildness, 447. The
contest of art, 451. Zeuxis, 451. The
corporal of Frederick the Great, 451.
Marshal de Turenne, 451. An affect-
ing narrative, 451. Interesting nar-
rative, 453.
AFTERWARDS, ensuite, 88.
AGREE, (to), to a thing, convenir de
quelque chose, 276; consentir à, 354.
AGAIN, (anew), de nouveau, 344.
AIMER à, to like to, &c., 114; aimer
mieux, to like better, to prefer, 263.
AINSI, thus or so, 152; ainsi que,
as, as well as, 331.
AISE, bien aise de, glad, 317; être
à son aise, to be comfortable, well
off, at one's ease; être mal à son
aise, être gêné, to be uncomfortable,
395.
ALIGHT, (to,) from one's horse, to
dismount, descendre de cheval, 270;
de voiture, 303.
ALL, every, tout, tous, toute, toutes,
110; all at once, all of a sudden, &c.;
|
443.
ANGRY (to be) with somebody, être
fâché contre quelqu'un ; about some-
thing, de quelque chose, 319.
ANY, some, (before a noun,) du,
de la, des, 55, 281; before an adjec
tive, de, 57, 281. See SOME. $ 62, en.
ANYBODY, Somebody, any one.
some one, quelqu'un, 39.
INDEX.
561
ANYTHING, Something, quelque
chose, 28; good, de bon, 28.
APPEAR, (to,) to look like, avoir
l'air, la mine; she looks angry, ap-
pears to be angry, elle a l'air fâché,
332.
APPLY, (to,) $ 64, s'adresser à.
APRÈS, 63, after; always fol-
lowed by the infinitives avoir or être.
ARE YOU HUNGRY, 28; thirsty, 28;
sleepy, 29.
ARTICLES, 461. Their distinction;
general obs., 463; difference in the
use of the article in French and
English, 2, 5; INDEFINITE, from
$
3 to 7; when the definite le, la, les,
is used for the English indefinite, § 7.
DEFINITE, 8; their functions, § 14;
placed before every noun, &c., § 15;
before proper names of countries,
$16; not of individuals, 17; when
two or more adjectives qualify the
same noun, do not repeat the article,
18; 1ST PARTITIVE, before nouns,
$19 to 25; 2D PARTITIVE, before an
adjective or after a negation, $ 26 to
28; POSSESSIVE, my, thy, &c., $ 29,
31; DEMONSTRATIVE, this, that,
these, those, Ce, cet, cette, ces.
AS FAR AS, jusqu'à, à la, à l', qu'au,
aux, $ 13.
AS MUCH... AS MANY... AS, § 138
-1, autant de... que de...
As... As, $138-1; aussi... que.
Assez de, § 137—2, enough; § 161
--4.
AT, to, in, 163—5, à, 7; chez; à,
before a city, 13; en, before a country.
Au, 8; aux, à la, &c., to the.
AU MIEN, à la mienne, aux miens,
aux miennes, 104; to mine.
AU MILIEU D'EUX, $63, in tne midst
of them.
|
AUTRE, d'autres, § 28.
AUXILIARY. Verbs which in Eng-
lish generally take to have for their
auxiliary, while in French they take
être, § 158—3.
AVANT, before, takes de before the
infinitive, 142; pas avant, not until,
310.
AVEC, with, § 63.
AVOIR, to have; eu, had, 160, 162,
Obs. 75. Avoir beau, in vain, 397.
When speaking of dimension we use
in French avoir when the English
use to be, 338.
IL Y A, there is, there are, 180, 238,
246, 247, 248, 338. Il y a cannot be
rendered into English by there is,
there are, when it is used in reply to
the question, How long is it since?
246; nor when it is used in reply to
the question, How far? Quelle
dis-
tance? 252.
AVOIR MAL, to ache, to feel a pain,
284.
AWAKE, (to,) réveiller, se réveiller,
269.
B.
BE, (to,) être; been, été, N. 2, 3,
157 (Obs. 74), 160; to be at home,
être à la maison, 84; to be in the
country, être à la campagne, 289.
To Be, is rendered by devoir, when
it expresses obligation, 185.
To Be, translated by avoir. Are
you hungry? Avez-vous faim? I
am thirsty, j'ai soif, 28: avez-vous
sommeil? sleepy, 29; chaud, froid,
peur, warm, cold, afraid, 31. What
is the matter? Qu'avez-vous? 34.
Am I afraid, ashamed? Ai-je peur ?
honte? 45. Am I right, wrong? Ai-
je raison? tort? 36. How old are
AUCUN, aucune, none, not any, you? Quel âge avez-vous? 180. How
162.
AUPARAVANT, 163-9; before.
§
AUTANT DE..., &c. See AS MUCH.
AUQUEL, $79; to whom, which,
auxquels, auxquelles, § 125.
high is his house? Combien sa maison
a-t-elle de haut ou de hauteur? It is
nearly fifty feet high, elle a environ
cinquante pieds de haut, 338.
To Be under obligations to some
562
INDEX.
one, avoir des obligations à quel-
qu'un, 336. My feet are cold, j'ai
froid aux pieds; her hands are cold,
elle a froid aux mains, 110.
BELOW, or down stairs, en bas,
193.
BESIDES, outre; besides that, ou.
tre cela; besides, (morcover,) en
To Be in want of, avoir besoin de, outre, 378.
112.
BETTER―than, mieux que de, 263.
To BE, translated by se porter, To be better, valoir mieux, 199. Ia
it better? Vaut-il mieux ? 270.
275.
To BE, translated by FAIRE. Is it
windy? Fait-il du vent? It is
stormy, il fait de l'orage. Is it foggy?
Fait-il du brouillard? 208, 215, 301.
(See WEATHER, WARM, COLD, DARK,
&c.) Is it good travelling? Fait-il
bon voyager? 213, 227, 228.
BE, (to,) followed by a present par-
ticiple, is translated by être with à
and an infinitive; I am reading, je
suis à lire, $ 156—7.
BEAU, bel, fine, handsome; how
these two words must be employed,
192, 287. Avoir beau, in vain, 397.
BEAUCOUP de, much, many, a
good deal of, very much, 65, 147,
376. Dir. 7-459, 137-2. Never
say un beaucoup, a great many.
BECAUSE, parce que, N. 1, 80, 187.
BECOME, (to,) devenir.* What has
become of him? Qu'est-il devenu?
225. What will become of him? |
Que deviendra-t-il? 242. What has
become of your aunt? Qu'est deve-
nue votre tante? 316. To become
ridiculous, tomber dans le ridicule,
388.
BEFORE, avant de. Do you speak
before you listen? Parlez-vous avant
d'écouter? 142. Before, devant, Obs. |
65, 250. The day before, la veille;
the day before Sunday, la veille de
dimanche, 340. Avant, devant, au-
paravant, their difference, § 163—9.
BEG, (to,) prier de, 304. To beg
some one's pardon, demander pardon
à quelqu'un, 383.
|
|
BETWEEN, entre, 329.
BIEN, well, 140, 147, 319. Bren,
well, a great deal, a great many, is
| always followed by the partitive ar-
ticle, but beaucoup is followed by the
preposition de, 376.
BIENTÔT, Soon, shortly, 185; soon,
very soon, 259.
BLOW, (a,) un coup, 244.
BLOW, (to,) to blow out, souffler
342; to blow out one's brains, brû-
ler la cervelle à quelqu'un; he has
blown out his brains, il s'est brûlé la
cervelle, 368.
BOARD, (to,) with any one or any-
where, être en pension, se mettre en
pension, 385.
BOARDING-HOUSE, (a,) a boarding-
school, une pension; to keep a board
ing-house, tenir* pension, 385.
BOAST, (to,) to brag, se faire valoir,
428.
BOIRE,* to drink; bu, drunk, 172.
BON, good, 26, 284; être bon à quel-
que chose, to be good for something.
A quoi cela est-il bon? Of what use
is that? Cela n'est bon à rien, it is
good for nothing, 251. Fait-il bon
vivre à Paris? Is it good living in
Paris? 213.
BORN, (to be,) être né, née; where
were you born? Où êtes-vous né,
(née?) 388.
BRING, apporter, amener; differ-
ence between these two verbs, 303.
BURST, (a,) un éclat. A burst of
laughter, un éclat de rire; to burst
BEHAVE, (to,) se comporter, 270, out, éclater; to burst out laughing,
393.
éclater de rire, faire un éclat de rire,
BELIEVE, (to croire,* 149 175. 432.
(See CROIRE *)
BUSINESS, (a piece of,) an affair
INDEX.
563
une affaire. To transact business, | what, or the thing which, 124,
faire des affaires, 295.
C'est-à-dire, (savoir,) that is to say,
Bur, mais, 42. But, e-que; I (i. e.) 348. C'est pourquoi, therefore,
have but one friend; je n'ai qu'un | 375.
ami, 65. Nothing but, ne-que. He
has nothing but enemies, il n'a que
des ennemis, 225.
CE, 38, he, she, it; when used
instead of il, elle, ils, elles.
CECI, this; cela, that, 38, N. 5:
BUT FOR, had it not been, were it use ceci, cela, to translate the latter,
not for, 164-6, sans.
Buy, (to,) acheter, 82,$144-4; 173,
N. 1. To buy, (to purchase,) faire
emplette de or faire des emplettes,
256.
By, par, 212. By rendered by de,
in the use of the passive voice, 212,
250. By, auprès de; to pass by a
place, passer auprès d'un endroit;
by the side of, à côté de, 266.
BY MYSELF, thyself, &c., $163-10.]
N. B. Seul, seuls, seule, seules.
C.
ÇA, contraction of cela, that, the
former, 38, N.5, 6.
ÇA ET LÀ, here and there, about,
367.
CALL, (to,) appeler, Obs. 78, 173.
What do you call that in French?
Comment cela s'appelle-t-il en Fran-
çais ? 320.
CARDINAL numbers, $ 137-4, used
for dates and sovereigns, 141. Note
on 2, 3, &c., to 10; 20, 80, 100, &c.
CARRY, (to,) to take, porter, me-
their distinction, 303.
CASI, (for,) comptant; to buy for
cash, acheter complant, 239.
ner
CAST (to) down, baisser; to cast
down one's eyes, baisser les yeux,
352.
CE, 30; cet, 41; ces, 44; cette,
283; this, that, these, those. Ceci,
cela, celui-ci, celui-là, $35. When
they must not be used, (N. 6, p.
469;) celui-ci, celui-là, ceux-ci, ceux-
LÀ, ( 36, 41, 50, 286 ; -ci, là, when
omitted, 468. Celle-ci, celle-là, cel-
les-ci, &c. Henrietta's, Celle de H.;
celus de, celui que, &c., $36. Ce que,
>
the former, when they apply not to
nouns, but to actions. Celui-ci, cel-
le-ci, this one; celui-là, celle-là, that
one. Cet autre, that one; celui qui,
celle que, he, she, the one who,
whom, &c.; him, her, &c. Ceux-
ci, celles-ci, these; ceux-là, celles-là,
those; ceux qui, &c., they who, that,
30, 48, 286, 207, $86. Celui, cule,
&c., have complements; lui, elle,
have none, 470, N. 1, 2.
CEDILLA, (cédille,) its use, p. 502
-1.
CELA, that, (meaning that thing,)
119, 168. When the English pro-
noun it relates to a preceding cir-
cumstance, it is rendered by cela;
when to a following, by il, 293.
CELUI DU, de la, de l', des ; celle
du, &c., 104, that of, or the pos-
sessive case-'s.
CENT, a hundred, takes an s when
plural and not followed by another
numeral, 184. Never preceded by
un except when followed by de; as,
un cent d'huitres, 100 oysters, $6, p.
462.
CEPENDANT, however, 134.
CE QU'IL Y A, $87-4, relat., not
inter., what is.
CE QUE, ce qui, $89, what; $90,
which. Ce pourquoi, § 92, what for,
for what; ce à quoi, dans quoi, avec
quoi, &c., $93, 94. Ce que, ce qui,
$120, what, that which.
CEUX. (See CELUI, &c.)
CHACUN, e, each one, 217, 470.
CHANGE, (to,) meaning to put on
other things, changer. Do you change
your hat? Changez-vous de chapeau ?
272.
564
INDEX.
CHAQUE, each; chaque homme, each | que, that, not omitted in French;
Ian, 217.
whether, si; whether, soit que, how
CHEZ, 84, 363, § 163-7, at, in, to. used, 4; but for, were it not for,
CINQUIÈME, 1-5, § 141, fifth. had it not been for, sans, -5. Conj.
COLD, froid. It is cold, il fait froid, with prétérit antérieur, 521.
52, 207. To have a cold, être en-
rhumé, 293. To catch a cold, pren-
dre froid, s'enrhumer, 356. I have a
cold, j'ai un rhume de cerveau, 293.
(See BE, translated by avoir.)
COLLECTIFS, (noms,)$140—10. (See
NOUNS.).
COMBIEN de? 65, 137-2, how
much? how many? ◊ 161-4.
COME, (to,) venir, 175. (See VE-
NIR.)
...
...
aussi
COMMENT! interj., § 121, what!
COMPARATIVES of equality, autant
de
que de
que,
$138-1; of inequality, plus de...
que de..., moins de... que de...,
plus... que. moins que.
COMPARISON of adj. and adv., 144;
irreg., 147.
.. •
COMPASSION, compassion, 372.
COMPLAIN, (to,) se plaindre de, 254.
COMPOUND form of the perfect,
$ 145-2.
COMPRENDRE, to understand, 182.
COMPTANT, for cash; acheter
comp-
tant, to buy for cash, 239.
لا
COMPTER, (no prepos.,) to intend,
135; compter sur, to depend on, $ 64.
CONDITIONNEL, 310, $148. (See
POTENTIAL.) Composé, $119.
POTENTIAL.)
(See
CONDUCT, (to,) conduire, 136; con-
ducted conduit, 175; one's self, se
conduire, 270.
CONJUGATIONS, conjugaisons, $144,
1st, 2d, 3d, 4th.
CONJUNCTIONS, conjonctions. (See
at (791) a list of those that govern the
subj.; all others govern the indicat.)
A moins que, de crainte que, &c.,
require ne. Jusqu'à, jusqu'à ce que,
their difference, 164-1. When a
conjunct. governs several verbs, -2;
when si, if, governs two verbs, -3;
|
CONNAÎTRE, to be acquainted with,
(to know,) 112, 140, 172, 329.
Consent, (to,) consentir, 278. I
consent to it, j'y consens, 354.
CONSENTIR, to consent, 278, 354.
CONVENIR, to suit, 237; de, to
agree to, 273.
CONVERSE (to) with, s'entretenir
avec, 429.
CÔTÉ, à côté ¹e, by, by the side of,
266. De ce côté-ci, &c., this side,
&c., 193.
COUNTRYMAN (what) are you? de
quel pays êtes-vous? 252, 318.
COUP, (un,) a blow, a kick, a
knock, a stab, a shot, a glance, a cla,
a slap, 244.
CRAINDRE, to fear, to dread, &c.,
220, 260.
CREDIT, (on,) à crédit, 239.
CROIRE, to believe, 144, 175; en
Dieu, in God, 226.
CROÎTRE, to grow, croissant, crû,
354.
CUEILLIR, to gather; du fruit,
fruit, 346.
CURTAIN, (the,) le rideau, la toile ;
the curtain rises, falls, la toile se
lève, se baisse, 352.
CUT, (to,) couper, 80; one's self
se couper, 217, 219, 254.
D.
DANS, en, 63, 105, 228, in, into;
163-11-12.
DARK, sombre, obscur, 208. It
grows dark, il se fait tard, nuit, 352.
DAVANTAGE, more, never precedes
a noun, 198.
DE, (partitive,) some or any, 57,
284. Of, from, $8; de, betweer!
nouns, 27, 404; locutions that re-
quire de before an infinitive, 80, 112,
228; de qui, of, from whom, $79.
INDEX.
565
DECEIVE, (to,) tromper, 219.
DIR. 2. Repetition of attending
DÉFAIRE, to undo; se défaire, to words, articles, proi ouns, &c., 457.
get rid of, 268.
DÉFIER, to distrust, § 64.
DÉJÀ, already, 152.
DELAY, (to,) to tarry, tarder; re-
turn soon, ne tardez pas à revenir,
394.
DEMEURER, to dwell, &c., takes
avoir and être as auxiliaries, 187,
N. 1.
DIR. 3. On the obj. pron. lui, tʊ
him, to her; leur, them, to them,
458.
The pre
DIR. 4. On obj. nouns.
pos. never understood.
DIR. 5. Find an infinit. in a dic
tionary, and form the tenses by the
rules, 459.
DIR. 6. On simple and compound
Conjunct. que, never
DEMI, e, half, moitié, § 141, invá sentences.
riable before the noun, 90.
omitted, 459.
DE LAQUELLE, duquel, &c., of
which, $79.
DIR. 7. Much, many, enough, &c
adverbs in French requiring de a a
DEPEND, (to,) upon, compter sur, | link.
s'en rapporter à, § 64.
DÉPIT, (en,) de, notwithstanding,
364.
DEPUIS, since, from, 342; depuis
que, since; depuis quand ? since what
time? When it requires ne before
the verb, 248, Obs. 114.
DES, some, any, $3; is never
omitted, § 4; not the plur. of de, § 10.
Des, from, since, 356; dès que, as
soon as, governs the prétérit anté-
rieur, 521.
DESQUELS, desquels, &c., of, from
whom, which, $79.
DESCENDRE, to go, to come, down;
it takes avoir and être, 303.
DÉTRUIRE, to destroy.
|
DIR. 8. On the formation of inter-
rogations, 459.
DIR. 9. Formation of the parfait,
460.
DISTRUST, (to,) se défier de, § 64.
Do, (to,) to make, faire; done,
made; fait, 168. To do one's best,
faire de son mieux, 249; one's
duty, son devoir, 348; good to
somebody, du bien à quelqu'un, 223,
372. Shall you soon have done
writing? Aurez-vous bientôt fini d'é-
crire? He has just done writing,
il vient d'écrire, 229, 232, 249.
do without, se passer de, 346. To do,
translated by se porter, 275.
To
DONT, of which, of whom, whose;
DEVANT, avant, before, their dif- ce dont, that of which, 228. The
ference, 163.
past participle preceded by dont does
DEVENIR, to become, 225, 242, not agree with it, 229.
316.
DEVOIR (See DUTY, 113), to owe,
80; are you to? devez-vous? 184,
185.
Always fol-
lowed by the nominative of the next
verb.
DORMIR, to sleep, 121-
DRESS, (to,) habiller, to undress;
DIALOGUE between a master and déshabiller, 269, 338, 400.
his pupils, 435.
DIE, mourir, 317. (See MOURIR.) |
DIRE, to tell, say; dit, said, 108,
121, 170.
DIRECT, (régime,) object. of a verb,
$47.
DIRECTION 1. On short English
Answers, 457.
DRINK, (to,) boire, 86, 121, 172
332; coffee, prendre le (du) café, 132.
DRIVE, (to,) to ride. See ALLER,
214.
DRY, sec; il fait sec, 208.
Du, some, any, $3; wnen used, 463.
DUQUEL, &c., of whom, &c., $79
86, 87, 126.
47
566
INDEX.
DUTY, devoir, 348.
DYE, (to,) to color, teindre, (en
noir,) 195.
E.
E (mute) changed to è (grave) § 144
-4; é (acute) to grave, § 144—5.
EACп, chaque, each one; chacun,
217, § 38.
EACH OTHER, l'un l'autre, &c., 331.
EARLY, de bonne heure, earlier, de
meilleure heure, plus tôt, 150.
ÉCRIRE, to write, écrit, written,
écrivez, write, 89, 111, 121, 172.
ELLE, she, 38. When ce must |
replace elle, N. 2; elle-méme, her-
self, 41, &c., d'elle, of, from her,
$ 47, 48-$ 63. Elle requires no
complement. Possessive, à elle, &c.,
106.
EISE (what), quoi encore, otherwise,
autrement, 113..
EN, some, any of it, of them, 59,
61, 63, $62. Y en, 87, 88. Its place
with personal pronouns, 96; of him,
&c., en, 113. Past participle does
not agree with en, 162, Obs. 76; from
it, them, &c., 185, 47, 48; $50.
EN, in, at, to, 375, 407, before the
name of a country. (§ 163-11 to 13.)
ENCORE, still, yet, &c., some, any
more, 73.
ENCRIER, inkstand, 41; écritoire,
(femin.)
ÉTEINDRE, to extinguish, 175.
ETRE, to be; été, been, 84, 157,
160. Où en étions-nous? where did
we stop? 383. Verbs that take être
as auxiliary, 530; past part. agrees
with nomin., 530. C'est, ce sont, it
is, &c., 241, 327, 338, 348; être
followed by the preposition à and an
infinitive, corresponds to the verb to
be followed by a present participle,
$ 156-7. (See IS IT NOT?)
ÉVENTAIL, fan, éventails, 45.
EVER, jamais, 157.
EVERY, all, tout, toute, &c. 110,
289, 219, 356.
73.
Eux, $38, they; more than they,
EUX-MÊMES, themselves, 411; ǹ
eux, to them, $63, d'eux, à eux, theirs,
$106.
F.
FAIRE, to make, to do; faisant,
fait, 83, 131, 168; you had better,
240; it is all over with me, 332; the
soup will be warmed, 348; I cannot
help it, 381; it grows dark, 352; to
think much of one, 354; to do one's
best, 249. FAIT, (si,) yes, 51, Obs. 26.
FALL, (to,) tomber, 270. Baisser.
The day, stocks fall, le jour baisse, le
change baisse, 352.
FALLOIR, to be necessary, must.
All verbs expressing necessity, obli-
ENDEAVOR, (to,) tâcher, 342. S'ef- gation, or want, are in French trans-
forcer, 404.
ENFTIR (s'), to fly, run away, 253,
262.
lated by FALLOIR, 197.
FAR, loin. How far? Quelle dis-
tance? 252; far off, de loin, 317; from
ENLIST, (to,) se faire soldat, s'en- thee, de toi, § 63.
rôler, 226.
ENNUYER (s'), to want amusement,
376.
ENSUITE, afterwards, 88.
ENTRER, (to,) dans, to go in, come
in, &c., 302.
ENTRETENIR, to keep, s'entretenir
anec, to converse with, 129.
ÉPICIER, grocer, 36.
Er, and, 35; 372, 374.
FARMER, fermier, 38.
FAULT, la faute. Whose fault is
it? À qui est la faute? 381; to find
fault with... trouver à redire à ………,
400.
FAVOR, (a,) un plaisir. Faire un..
110.
FEAR, (to,) craindre, 220, 260. For
fear of, de crainte (peur) de, 356; da
crainte (peu ¨) que.. ne, 417, § 164—1.
INDEX.
567
FEEL, (to,) sentir, 278. Tu feel a
pain, souffrir de, 334; sleepy, avoir
envie de dormir, 220.
..
FEW, (a,) books, quelques livres; a
few (of them,) en .. quelques uns, 69.
FIER (se) a, to trust to, $64.
FIFTH, 1-5, cinquième, § 141.
FILL, (to,) remplir, 302.
FIRE, (to,) tirer; a gun, a pistol,
un coup de fusil, de pistolet ; to some
one, à (sur) quelqu'un, 244.
FIRST, 1st, premier, ler, 70;
d'abord, 88.
FIRSTLY, 1stly, premièrement, 1ment,
363, 161-7.
FIT, (to,) aller bien, 239. (See
ALLER.)
cards, de cartes; faire une partio
de.. 342.
GÊNER, (se,) to inconvenience one's
self, 395.
GATHER, (to,) cueillir, 346.
GENERAL, général, généraux, 46.
GET, (to,) one's livelihood by,
gagner sa vie à, 307; made, faire
faire; dyed, faire teindre, 177, 196;
beaten, (whipped,) se faire battre ;
paid, payer; one's self invited to
dinner, inviter à dîner, 363; rid of
something, se défaire de quelque
chose; of somebody, se débarrasser
de quelqu'un, 268.
GIVE, (to,) donner, 94; rise to
difficulties, quarrels, suspicions, faire
FLEURIR, to blossom, is regular; to naître des difficultés, des querelles, des
flourish, irregular, 354.
FLUENTLY, Couramment, 321.
FLY, (to,) to run away, s'enfuir,
253, 262.
FOR, car, 107; during, pendant,
186. For and at, when used to ex-
press the price of a thing, not ren-
dered in French, 276; rendered by de,
276; by pour, for more bad luck, pour
surcroît de malheur, 334. For what,
what for, pourquoi, ce pourquoi, § 92.
FORMER, celui-là, $36; cela, when
applied to actions, 469, N. 5.
FORMERLY, autrefois, 155.
Fortnight, (a,) quinze jours; a
fortnight ago, il y a quinze jours, 247.
FRIGHTEN, (to,) effrayer, s'effrayer;
la moindre chose l'effraie, 374.
FROM, de, 252, 318; dès, 356; de
temps en temps, 356. From the, du,
$8.
FUTURE, (1st,) futur, $146; its
terminations. No used after si, if,
but the present is, -3; used after
quand, when, $146-4; ce qui, ce
que, aussitôt que, &c., -5; 2d fut.,
its formation, 299.
G.
GAME, (a,) une partie, at chess;
d'échecs; at billiards, de billard; at
soupçons, 406; up, renoncer à, § 64.
Go, (to,) aller, 84, 165; there, y
aller, 102, 165; round the house,
autour de la maison, faire le tour,
&c., 367; down, alight, descendre,
303; on foot, aller à pied, 214; on a
journey, faire un voyage, 295; to
bed, aller se coucher, se mettre au lit,
222; to the country, à la campagne,
289; to some one's house, chez quel-
qu'un, 84; to see some one, voir
quelqu'un, 332; a walking, se prome-
ner, 222; to go away, s'en aller
vous en allez-vous? 219, 242, 243; to
go for, aller chercher, 105; go out,
sortir, 110, 121, 150, 175; to be
going to, aller, (see it.) Are you
coming? Allez-vous venir? 90, N. 1.
Je vais, used instead of je veux, 88,
N. 1.
GROCER, épicier, 36.
;
GROW, (to,) croître, 354. It grows
dark, late, il se fait nuit, tard, 352.
H.
HABILLER, to dress, 269.
HAD it not been, § 164, sans.
HAIL, (to,) grêler, 228.
HAIR, to hate, 213.
HALF demi, demie. (See DENK
$ 141.)
J
568
INDEX.
HAYTEN, (to,) arriver, takes être, | many, combien de, 65. How many
254.
HARDLY, à peine, 180.
times, how often? combien de fois?
Once, une fois, deux fois, plusieurs
HAUT, (en,) above, up stairs; en fois, 165, 137, 2; § 161-4.
bas, below, down stairs, 193.
HAVE, (to,) avoir, had, eu, 160; a
cold, un rhume, 293; sore Anger,
mal au doigt, aux yeux, à l'œil, à la
main, aux dents, à la tête, 126, 234;
à la gorge, au côté, 295, 284. To
have just, venir de, 249, § 145—3.
HEALTH, santé, 332.
HEAR, (to...of,) entendre parler
de, 246; apprendre, 253.
HE, il, ce, lui; who, qui, that, que,
$38.
HER, son, sa, ses, 38, 44, 282, § 31;
la; to her, lui, $47, 48; herself,
elle-même, 41; it, (them,) to her,
le, la, les lui; -le-lui, -la-lui, -les-
lui, $58; her there, l'y, $57, 58;
her some, any, lui en, $59; her any
there, lui y en, $60. To her, à elle,
of, from her, d'elle, &c., §63; her-
self, (reflective,) se, s'y, 071; hers,
le sien, la sienne, &c., § 104; à elle,
$106.
HERE, ici, (y,) 110. Here and
there, 396. Here is, voici, 312.
HEURE. (See HOUR.)
HOWEVER, cependant, 134; quel-
que...que, quel que.
quels que...
que, &c., 422, 516.
•
HUNDRED, cent, 184. (See CENT.)
HURT, (to,) somebody, faire du mal
à quelqu'un, 223, 224; one's feel-
ings, faire de la peine à quelqu'un,
333.
I.
I, je, j', 25, 469. I who, that, mor
qui, que, 470.
Ici, (y,) here, 110.
IDIOMS, after INDEX,
IF, si, 107; when it losee the a,
372, § 146-3; when followed by
the present tense, 233, Obs. 105; by
the imperfect, 507, N. 1; when it
governs two verbs, 538, § 164—3.
IL, ils, he, it, they, 38; when
replaced by ce, 469, N. 2.
IMMEDIATELY, tout de suite, sur le
champ, 237.
IMPART, (to,) faire part de quelque
chose à quelqu'un, 397.
IMPERATIVE, impératif, 509, § 150;
HIM, lui, being the masculine of its formation, 1 to 6 of 150. Five
her, see the same paragraphs.
HOME, (at,) à la maison, 84.
HORS de, out; out of the city; dc-
hors, out of doors, 301, 307.
irregular ones, -7; regular ones, with
objectives and negation, -8. How
to translate, Come and see me, &c.,
-12.
HOUR, (the,) l'heure, at what IMPERFECT (the) of the Indicative,
o'clock, at one o'clock, at half past 506, § 147. Translated by French
one, à une heure et demie, 90. At 9 parfait and prétérit. Its terminations,
in the morning, in the evening, à neuf-1; how formed, -2; regular verbs,
heures du matin, du soir, 185. Early, excentions, --3; when used, -4;
earlier, sooner, 150. To ask the when it ends in iions, -5; in yions,
hour, 110.
-6; used after si, 507, § 148-4; of
How, how much, many, before an the POTENTIAL, Conditionnel, its ter-
exclamation. que. How good you minations; its formation, 507. Could,
are! que vous êtes bon ! &c., 335. would, how to translate them, 508-
How far, jusqu'où, 193, 252. How 4. I wish, when it is, je voudrais,
long, combien de temps, 246; since-5. SECOND IMPERFECT, Prétérit,
what time, depuis quand? 248; its terminations, 517, 518, § 153; re-
jusqu'à quand, 189 How much,gular and irregular verbs, list of the
INDEX.
569
'atter; use of the prétérit, 519, 520:
of the subjunctive, its formation; its
terminations, 416, 517. Impersonal
verbs govern the subjunctive, 515,
$ 151-4.
IMPROVE, (to,) to profit, faire des
progrès, 313.
IN, dans, 63, 105; in, dans, en,
their difference, 375. IN, translated
by à, 242, 367, 289; by de, 338; by
de, after a superlative; c'est le plus
beau pays de l'Europe, 446. In this
manner, de cette manière, 180. In a
short time, dans peu de temps, 375.
In, at, to, by à, 535, 163-5; not
translated, 537-14. In the midst
vf..., au milieu de..., 476, § 63.
INDEFINITE, (article,) never omitted
in the plural; when not used in the
singular; when replaced by the defi-
nite, 462.
INDICATIVE, Indicatif. Present,
500, 144; Imperfect, 507, $147;
Second Imperfect, Prétérit, 517,
153; Pluperfect, 520, $154; Se-
cond Pluperfect, Prétérit antérieur,
155; conjunctions after which it is
used, 521, (see those tenses;) Fu-
ture, 504; Second Future, 299.
INDIFFERENTLY, tant bien que mal,
396.
INDIRECT (régime) objective of a
preposition, $43.
INFINITIVE, 79; words which re-
quire it, with the preposition de, 80.
INFINITIVE, with its 4 terminations,
79, 80; words requiring it with the
preposition de, 80; governed by every
preposition except en, 521, 156-1;
§
remark on après, after,-Infinitive
governed by another verb, -2; im-
portant remark on it; different prepo-
sition in English and French; verbs
that govern it without a preposition,
-4; adj. and verbs that take à, -5;
those that take de, 6. After à,
the French infinitive translates the
present participle coming after the
verb to be, 399, 502, 144-6.
|
INQUIRE (to) after some one, de-
mander quelqu'un; qui demandez-
vous ? 204.
INSTANTLY, à l'instant, sur le
champ, (this instant,) 237.
INSTEAD of, au lieu de, 124.
INSTRUIRE, to instruct, instruisant,
instruit, 266.
INTRODUCE, (to,) présenter à, în-
troduire à, 476, $64.
Ir, le, l', 26; it, nomin., il, elle,
ce, $38; it is, c'est, ce sont, 469,
N. 2, 3; them, les, it, (to it, to them,)
y, 101; it, them, (of, from,) en, $47,
48, 50; it to me, before the verb,
me le, la, &c., te le, la; le lui, la
lui, &c., $57; after the verb, -le-
moi, -la-moi, &c., $58; it to it,
there, l'y, $57, 58; to it, of it, with
it or with them, applying to things,
are not translated after the verb,
63; it, (with reflective verbs,)
t'en, s'en, nous en, vous en, m'en,
478, $ 73.
Irs, son, sa, ses. What is its in-
finitive? Quel en est l'infinitif? 466,
31, N. 1.
J.
Jamais, ever; ne... jamais, never,
157.
JE, I, and before a vowel or h
mute, j', 25.
JEST, (to,) plaisanter, badiner, vous
vous moquez, you are jesting. He is
no joker, il n'entend pas raillerie,
381.
JETER, to throw, throw away, 173,
Obs. 73.
JOHN some, en .à Jean, 476,
$59.
JOUR, day, en plein jour, in broad
daylight, 407.
JOUR, JOURNÉE, their difference
283, N. 2.
JOUER, to play, takes de when an
instrument, and a when a game is
spoken of, 259; un tour, to play a
trick, 400.
47 *
670
INDEX.
JUDGE (to be a) of something, se
connaître en quelque chose, 351.
JUSQUE, up to, as far as, 189, 193;
jusqu'à ce que, until, 537, § 164.
JUST, (to have,) venir de. He has
but just come, il ne fait que d'ar-
river, 249, 504, § 145-3.
K.
KEEP, (to,) garder, 239; tenir,
274. To keep warm, cool, clean,
se tenir chaud, frais, propre, 365;
one's self ready, prêt, 274; on one's
guard against one, en garde contre
quelqu'un, 366; to maintain, entre-
tenir, 429; keep a boarding-school, |
house, tenir pension, 385.
KILL, (to,) tuer, 92; to kill by
shooting, tuer d'un coup d'arme à
feu, 367.
KNOW, (to,) savoir, connaître, 112,
140, 172; how to swim, nager, 135.
Difference of savoir and connaître,
329, N. 1.
I.
LA, (article feminine,) the, 281, 463.
LA, (objective pronoun,) her, it, 281,
472. LÀ, (y,) there, 110.
|
LEAGUE, (a,) une lieue; to walk
or travel a league, faire une lieue,
295.
LEARN, (to,) apprendre, 127, 179;
le Français, 129; by heart, par cœur,
208.
|
LEFT, to, on the left side or hand,
à gauche, sur la gauche, 378.
LEFT, (to have,) rester. When I
have paid for the horse, I shall have
only ten dollars left, quand j'auraı,
&c. They have one louis left, il leur
reste un louis, 300.
LE MIEN, la mienne, &c., 484,
$ 104 to 109; mine, used even after
être when ce is nominative, § 105.
LEQUEL? which one? lesquels,
35, 44, 230, 283, 488.
LESS, moins, the least, le moins,
147; less, fewer, moins, 272. (See
Moins.)
LEST, for fear, de peur (crainte)
que.. ne, 537, $164.
When it
.les, 466,
LEUR, S, their, 44, 282 ; le (la) leur,
les leurs, theirs, 49, 291.
must be translated by en
N. 2.
LEUR, them, to them, for persons,
282, Obs. 128, 472. Leur, (le, la, les,)
LAQUELLE, (relative,) which, 479, it or them, to them, 475, $57. Leur
$82; (interrogative,) $84.
LAST, dernier, èṛe, 71.
LATE, tard; too late, trop tard, 110.
LATELY, the other day, l'autre |
jour, dernièrement, 375.
LATTER, celui-ci, 468, $36; ceci,
when applied to actions, 469, N. 5.
Former, celui-là; cela.
LAUGH, (to,) rire, 325. (See RIRE.)
LAY (to) to one's charge, imputer à
quelqu'un; ne me l'imputez pas, 381.
LE, the, l', before a vowel or silent |
h, 25, 463.
LE, him, it, so, 168, 472; le lui,
les lui, it, them to him; -le-lui, -les-
lui, 475. Le, relating to a noun, an
adjective, or even a whole sentence,
is rendered by so, and frequently
omitted in English, 171, 173.
en, them some, 476, § 59. Leur y en,
some to them, there, $60.
LEVEL (on a) with, even with, d
fleur de, 354.
LIEU (au) de, instead of, 124; tenir
lieu de, 404.
LIGHTEN, (to,) faire des éclaires,
227.
LIKE, (to,) aimer; I like fish,
j'aime le poisson; to like, trouver;
how do you like that wine? comment
trouvez-vous ce vin? I like it well,
je le trouve bon, 208. As you like,
comme il vous plaira, 325.
LIKE better, (to,) prefer, aimer
mieux, 263, 264; to my liking, a
mon grě, 385.
LIRE, to read, lisant, lu, lisez, 110,
121, 148, 172
INDEX.
571
•
|
MANY, (much,) beaucoup de, 65,
not many, ne...: guère de, n'en...:
guère, 67, 459.
LITTLE, small, petit, 47; little, | s'y prendre, 552; faire en sorte de,
peu, 147, peu de; a little, un peu de, 364.
67; but or only a little, ne guère
de, 67; just a little, tant soi peu, 427.
LIVE, (to,) demeurer, 187, N. 3.
LONG, (to,) tarder de; I long to
see my brother, il me tarde de voir
mon frère, 394.
LONG, (so,) as, tant que, 401. How
long? combien, combien de temps?
246. How long since? (since what
time?) depuis quand? 248. How
long? jusqu'à quand? 189.
LONG-TEMPS,
(never un long-
lemps,) a long time, 462, $6.
Look, (to,) upon, donner sur ; the
window looks upon the street, la fe-
rêtre donne sur la rue, 364. (See |
APPEAR.) To look pleased with
somebody, faire bonne mine à quel-
qu'un'; displeased with, mauvaise
nine à, 332;-avoir l'air; to look
sad, avoir l'air triste, 384.
LORSQUE, quand, when, 242; used
with the prétérit antérieur, 521.
Lorsque is never used to ask a
question.)
LOSE, (to,) perdre, 182; one's wits,
perdre la tête, 334; sight of, perdre
de vue, 389.
|
MARCHER, to march, walk, step,
go, must not be mistaken for se pro-
mener, 295.
•
MATIN, matinée, morning, their
difference, 289.
Me, me, m', § 47; moi, § 48. It or
them to me, me le, la, les, §57. Me
to it there, m'y, §57; -y-moi, § 58.
Me some, m'en, 59. Me some there,
m'y en,
$60. Me, (to me,) à moi;
from me, de moi; near me, pres de
moi, 63; me, (reflective,) myself,
$71; m'en, myself of it, § 73.
MEAN, (to,) vouloir dire. What do
you mean? que voulez-vous dire?
399.
MEDDLE (to) with a thing, se mê-
ler de quelque chose. De quoi vous
mêlez-vous? what are you meddling
with? 295.
MEFIER, (se,) de, to mistrust, 476,
477, $64.
MÊME, mêmes, self, selves; moi-
même, myself; eux-mêmes, elles-mê-
mes, themselves-even, (adv.,) 344,
LUIRE, to shine, glitter, luisant, 471.
lui, 228.
M.
MENER, to take, to lead, not to be
used for porter, 303.
MENTIR, to utter a falsehood, to
Ma, my, mon, mes, 282, 466, § 31. | lie, mentant, menti, ne mentez pas,
MAIS, but, 42.
MAISON, (à la,) home; (see it.)
MAKE, (to,) do, faire, faisant, 121;
faites, 134; made, fait, 168. Faire
présent de quelque chose à quelqu'un,
376. To make sick, rendre malade,
293; one's self understood, se faire
comprendre, 370; comfortable, se
mettre à son aise, 395. To make
entreaties, faire des instances, 396.
MAL, bad; worse, pire, the worst,
le pire, 147; badly, 140: wrong,
bad, 319. (See HURT.)
226.
METTRE, to put, put on; mettant,
mis, mettez, 149, 168; au net, to
transcribe fairly, 356; à même de, to
enable, 378; se mettre à table, to sit
down to a meal, 407; à quelque chose,
to set about a thing, 340; à l'abri de
to shelter one's self from, 356.
MIDST (in the) of them, au milieu
d'elles, 476.
·
MIEUX, better, 147. De mon, ton,
son, &c., mieux, in the best way I,
thou, he, &c., can, 217, 249. (See
MANAGE, (to,) to go about a thing, BETTER.)
572
INDEX.
MIGHT, how translated, 509, $149. | the less, plus... moins, 492, 138
MILE, (a,) un mille. To walk or
travel a mile, faire un mille, 295.
MILIEU, (le,) the middle; au mi-
lieu. (See MIDST.)
-2.
MOUCHOIR, (le,) the handkerchief,
41.
MOURIR, to die, (lose life,) mou-
MILLE, a thousand; not un mille, rant, mort. L'homme est mort, sa fem-
462, § 6.
me n'est pas morte, 317; d'une ma-
MIEN, (le,) la mienne, &c., mine, ladie, of a disease, 323.
30, 49, 291.
MINE, le mien, la menne, &c., 30,
49, 291, 483, 484, 104 to 110. A
brother of mine, 203, 484.
MUCH, many, a good deal, very
much, beaucoup de, (before a noun.)
Much of it, en... beaucoup; not
much, ne..
.. guère de, 65, 376, 490.
MISTAKE, (to,) to be mistaken, se Much more, encore beaucoup, beau-
tromper, vous vous trompez, 219. coup plus. So much, tant, 78, 210,
MISTRUST, (to,) se méfier de, se dé- 293. Dir. 7, 459.
fier de, 477.
Moi, I, 38; me, to me, $47;
moi-même, myself, 41; moi qui,
who; moi que, I whom, 470; à moi,
de moi, always used after certain
verbs, 476. À moi, mine, 484, § 106.
MOINS, less, serves to form the
comparative and superlative of in-
equality, 146. Moins de, less, fewer,
(before a noun,) 78, 490, 492. When
there is a comparison between two
sentences, the verb which follows
plus or moins, requires the negative
ne. Cet homme a moins d'amis qu'il
ne pense, 272. The less... the less,
moins moins, 492.
•
MOITIÉ, (la,) the half, 499; demi.
MON, ma, mes, my, 25, 44, 282,
466
MONTER, to go up, mount, ascend;
takes avoir and être as auxiliaries,
304, N. 1.
MOONLIGHT, clair de lune. It is
moonlight, il fait clair de lune, 208.
·MONTH, (a,) un mois; their names,
499, 143.
• · •
•
MORE, plus; more than, (be-
fore an objective, plus de . que de;
plus de (before a number); plus que,
(before a nominative,) 78. One more
book, encore un livre; a few books
more, encore quelques livres, 73.
More, plus; the most, le plus, 146.
More, davantage, 198. The more...
MULTITUDE, (nouns of.) (See
NOUNS, 496—10.)
MUST, falloir, (see it.) Il being
its only nominative, see 197, Obs. 90.
My. (See MoN.) Myself, moi-
même, 471. Myself, (reflective,) me,
m', 478, $71; myself to it, m'y,
$72; myself of it, m'en, § 73.
N.
NAME, nom; proper names, noms
propres, 496, 497. Names of the
months, noms des mois, 499. What
is 'your name? Comment vous appe-
lez-vous? Je m'appelle Charles, 320.
NATIVE, (the,) l'homme né dans le
pays, 423.
• •
NË, part of the French negative,
532, 3, 4, 5, 162, an important sec.
tion. Ne is used without pas, with
the verbs cesser, to cease; oser, to
dare; pouvoir, savoir, to be abla,
322. Ne... guère de, n'en ... guèrr
ne. pas beaucoup de, n'en... · Pe
beaucoup; ne... que peu de, but li
tle, only a little, not much, &C., 67
Ne... ni, neither, ni,. nor; Je n'u
ni celui-ci ni celui-là, 32. Ne..
nulle part, nowhere, not anywhere,
89. Ne...pas, ne...
pas, ne... point, not, 28
Ne... pas encore, not yet, 152. N.
. plus, no longer, no more, not any
more, 74, 187. Ne... plus guère
de. (n'en... plus guère) not
•
•
INDEX.
573
•
much, many, more, 74. Ne...
NOT, ne... pas, ne.. point, 377,
only, but, Je n'ai qu'un ami, je n'en 378. Not any more, no more, ne...
ar qu'un, 65 ; ne... que, nothing but, plus de. Not much more, ne...
225. Ne...rien, nothing, not any-plus guère de, 74. Not quite, pas
thing, 28, requires de before an ad- tout à fait, 180. Not until, pas
jective, 29, Obs. 7. When the verb
When the verb avant, 310. Not yet, ne...
is understood, use rien without ne, core, 152. Not so much
as, ne...
left out with the verb, 34. Ne, when pas tant de... que de. Not so
used without pas, in comparison of as, ne...pas si...que, 492, $138
inequality, 492, § 138-3; when not-1.
used, 138-4; and when implied,
$
..
pas en-
...
Noмs, nouns, names. Les noms
Name.)
503, § 145—1. It is used when the des mois, of the months, 499. (See
negation is implied, 503, 145-1; |
248, Obs. 114. (See NEGATIONS.)
NEAR, près de; near me, près de
moi, 124; near six, près de six, 180;
near going, près d'aller, 260.
NEARLY, près de, 180; therea-
bouts, à peu près, 404.
5,
NEGATIONS, négations, 532, 3, 4,
162; its formation, 1; place of
ne and its complement, 2, 3, 4, 5;
when nominative, 6; with the in- |
finitive mood, -7; when the verb is
omitted,-8. Neither, non plus, -9.
List of negations and examples for,
3; 4; 5, 6; 7; 8 and 9.
•
•
•
•
NEITHER nor, ne ni...ni
32. Ni l'un ni l'autre; ni les
uns ni les autres, $162. I, neither.
moi non plus, § 162–9.
NEUF, nouveau, nouvel, new. Their
difference, 191, N. 1.
NEUTER VERBS, verbes neutres,
529, 158; what they are, and how
formed, -1; take être and avoir,
-2.
Verbs that take être, -3.
NEVER, ne...jamais, 157, 533.
NEW, neuf, nouveau, (nouvel, be-
fore a vowel or h mute, 191,) N. 1.
NIER, to deny, takes ne before
subjunctive, 516-8..
No, not any, ne... pas de, 55.
None, not any, ne... aucun, pas un.
No one, nobody, ne... personne, 422.
Nobody, not anybody, (nominative,
personne ne; nul ne, &c., 39. No
'onger, ne... plus, 187. No sooner,
pas plutôt, 521.
|
NOMINATIVE, nomeatif: 1st class,
with the verb; 2d, separated from
it, 468, § 38. Nominative frequently
left out in English; not in French,
470. N. B., 480, $ 87—1.
NOTHING, ne... .rien, (objective,)
422, 533; rien ne, (nominative,) 535.
Rien de bon, 29, Obs. 7. Nothing
but, ne... que, ne...rien ... que,
225.
NOTRE, plural, nos, our, 44, 282.
NÔTRE, (le, la,) les nôtres, ours,
30, 49, 291, 483.
NOTWITHSTANDING, malgré; not-
withstanding that, malgré cela, 364;
for all that, although, ne laisser pas
de: Il ne laisse pas de passer pour
honnête homme, 428.
NOUNS, noms, substantifs, 493,
140. Not used as adjectives, and
connected by some preposition,
140-1; functions of de, à, &c.,
2, 3, 4; no plural to proper names,
except when used as common, ~5;
articles left out in enumerations, -6;
formation of compound nouns, —7;
of the feminine, -8, 495; when a
noun is the object of two or three
verbs, -9; nouns of multitude,
10; possessive case, -11. Proper
names from the Greek and Latin,
of kingdoms, provinces, &c., 496,
497. Cardinal and ordinal numbers,
&c., with Notes and Obs., 497 to 499.
Names of the seasons, of months,
499.
574
INDEX.
EIL (') the eye; les yeux, the
eyes, 47.
Or, de; of, from the, du, 27, 82
112, 204, 229, 403. A book of mine;
turn, one of my books, un de mes
livres, 203, 484, § 107, 108.
Nous, we, us; nous qui, we who;
nous que, we whom, 469, 470; nous-
mêmes, ourselves; nous autres, we,
among us, 471; nous, us, to us, 472;
rous le, la, les, it, them to us, 475;
nous en, some, any to us, $59;
nous y en, us some there, $60; à
nous to us; de nous, of, from us,
$63; 476; nous, (reflective,) our-
selves, $71; nous y, (reflective,) our-
selves, (it,) § 72; nous en, ourselves
at it, § 73, 478; à nous, (possessive,) vent que, 137.
ours, 484,
106.
OFFRIR, to offer; offrant, offert,
offrez, 255.
OFTEN, souvent; as often as, aussi
souvent que; not so often as, moins
souvent que; oftener than, plus sou-
|
|
|
OMBRE, (une,) a shadow; à l'om-
Now, maintenant, à présent, 356; | bre de..., under the shade of, 356.
now and then, de loin, en loin, 396.
NUMBERS, nombres, (cardinal,) 65,
N. 1, 497; when used, 70, Obs. 32;
321, Obs. 146, 426; (ordinal,) 70, Obs.
33. Adverbs, premièrement, en pre-
mier lieu, first, firstly, &c., 363, 426.
0.
OBJECTIVE PRONOUNS, régimes,
471, § 43 to 47. Objective pronouns
before infinitives are turned into the
subjunctive, 472, $49; their places,
$48 to 65; one exception, $51;
double objectives, it to me, to thee,
&c., me le, la; te le, la, &c., always
before auxiliaries, 473, 52; when
attended by a preposition, go after
verbs, 475, 56; N. B. on their or-
der, $57. Personal and partitive,
me some, thee any, &c., m'en, t'en,
&c.; me some there, m'y en, &c.,
$59 to 61. Objective pronoun, with
a preposition, goes after the verb,
$63 to $66, 476; two or more ob-
jective cases, with a verb, go after,
◊ 64-2. Reflective, me, te, se;
nous, vous ; m'y, t'y, s'y, &c. ; m'en,
t'en, s'en, &c., 477, § 71, 72, 73.
|
ON, upon, sur; upon it, dessus,
175. On a small scale, en petit;
large scale, en grand, 404. Not
translated. On, not translated before
dates, &c., 537.
ON, one, the people, they; any
one, 191; when used, 224, Obs. 101;
when it takes l' before et, où, ou, si,
que, &c., 372, 488, 489.
ONCE, une fois; once a day, une
fois par jour, 210.
ONE, (people,) they or any one,
191, 224; one, un; the one, celui,
30; both, l'un et l'autre, 72. Never
translate the one by l'un, except when
it is connected with the other; as,
the one and the other.
ONE'S SELF, soi-même, 471; one's
self, (reflective,) se, 531; to one's
self, à soi; from one's self, de soi,
476.
ONLY, but, ne . que, 65; seule-
ment, 324; not only, non seulement.
OPPOSITE, vis-à-vis de, 387.
OR, ou, 30; or people, ou l'on,
372.
ORDINAL, (numbers,) nombres or-
dinaux, 497 to 499.
OBJECTIVE NOUNS, their place; OTHER, autre; another dollar, un
the preposition never omitted before autre dollar; some other dollars,
them, and it is repeated before every d'autres dollars. No other, ne...
ne, 473, $51.
pas d'autre. I have no other, je
OBLIGED, (to be,) or indebted to n'en ai pas d'autre, 69. Others
some one for...étre obligé, (redena-other people, autrui, 295.
ble,) à quelqu'un de..., 336
OTHERWISE, else, autrement, 113.
INDEX.
575
Ov, or, 30; ou l' on, or people,
372.
Où, where, whither, whereto, 86,
184. D'où, whence, where from, 200,
252.
OUGHT and SHOULD, (I,) rendered
by the conditionnel of devoir, je de
vrais, &c., 372, 509.
OUR, notre, nos, 44, 282; 466,
$31, 32.
PARTICIPLE, (present,) participe
présent, its formation and excep-
tions, 528. Difference in its use in
English and French, 527; en alone
governing it, what follows, 528-4;
when it qualifies a noun, 529–5;
when translated by a present parti-
ciple, 6; when by the indicative,
-7; by the infinitive, -8, or by a
noun, 9, 10; after to be, -11.
OURS, le, la nôtre, les nôtres, 30, How the present participle is to be
49, 291.
OUT, hors de; out of doors, de-
hors, 301, 307.
OUTRE, besides; outre cela, be-
sides that; en outre, moreover, 378.
OUVRIR, to open, ouvrant, ouvert,
ouvrez, 117, 175.
P.
PAIN, mal, 48, 284.
PAR, by, 210, 212, 213; par-ci,
par-là, here and there, 396.
PARAÎTRE, to appear, to seem,
429.
PARCE QUE, because, 80, 187.
PARFAIT, Perfect. (See the latter
word.)
PARFAIT or présent composé. (See
the latter.)
PARLER Français, to speak French,
472, § 47.
PARMI, among, 272.
PART, (de la... de,) from, 536-8.
Faire part de, to impart, 397.
PARTICIPIAL ADJECTIVE, adjectif
verbal, 529-5.
PARTICIPLE past, participe passé,
its formation, 157, 257; when used,
156, 525; when connected with être,
it agrees with the nominative, 212,
530; with avoir, it agrees with the
direct object, &c., 162, Obs. 75, 212,
286, 299, 526. It does not agree
with the pronouns en and dont, be-
cause they are not direct objects, 163,
Obs. 76; 229, Obs. 103, 526. Serves
to form the passive voice, 212. Some
difficulties explained, 527--5.
translated, 201, 280.
PARTICULAR, (to be,) y regarder de
près, 399.
PARTIR, to depart, to set out, par-
tant, parti, 142, 175.
PARTITIVE, (article,) article parti-
tif: 1st, before a noun, 465, § 19 to
25; 2d, before an adjective or after a
negation, § 26 to 28.
PARVENIR, to succeed, 237.
PAS, with ne before the verb, not,
27; pas tout, not all; pas du tout,
not at all, 115.
PASSER, (se... de,) to do without,
346.
PASSIVE VERBS, verbes passifs,
how formed, 212; not so much used
as in English, 530, 159; past par-
ciple agrees with nominative, -2;
on, as nominative, -3; the infini-
tive rendered by on, —4.
PAY (to) for, payer; to pay a man
for a horse, payer un cheval à un
homme, 201, Obs. 293. To pay some
one a visit, faire une visite (rendre
visite) à quelqu'un, 332.
PEINE, (,) scarcely, with prétérit
antérieur, 521.
PENDANT, during, for, 186.
PENKNIFE, canif, 32.
PENSER a, to think of, 476; y pen-
ser.
PENSION, boarding-house, school,
385.
PEOPLE, they, one, on, 468, 38;
488, 489.
PERFECT tense of the indicative,
parfait or présent composé, (see the
576
INDEX.
latter ;) of the subjunctive, its forma-
tion and use, 418.
PLEASED WITH, content de, 317.
PLEASURE, to give pleasure, faire
plaisir, 110.
88.
PLEASURE, (with,) avec plaisir, 47,
PERFECT, parfait, 503, $145; when
ne is to be used, -1; compound
form of the perfect, -2; I have
just, Je viens de..., ~3.
PERMETTRE, to permit, to allow, rains, 227.
371.
PERSONAL PRONOUNS, pronoms
personnels, 468, 38: 1st class, with
the verb, je, tu, il, &c.; 2d class,
separated from the verb, moi, toi, |
lui, &c.
PLEUVOIR, to rain; il pleut, it
PLUPERFECT (the) of the indica-
tive; its formation and use, 360,
520; of the subjunctive, its forma-
tion and use, 416 to 419: 2d pluper-
fect, prétérit antérieur, (see it,) 520,
155.
419.
PERSONNE ne, nobody, (nomina- PLUPERFECT of the subjunctive,
tive,) 39, 468; ne... personne, (ob-plusque parfait, its formation, &c.,
jective,) 422. Personne as a pronoun
is masculine; as a substantive, it is
feminine, 286, N. 1. Ne... personne
qui, que, nobody who, that, governs
the subjunctive, 515—5.
PEU, little, 147, 490; peu de, (be.
fore a noun,) 67; un peu de, a little,
67; à peu près, thereabout, nearly,
404.
PEUR, fear, afraid. Are you afraid?
Avez-vous peur? 31. De peur que...
ne..., (governs subjunctive,) for
fear, lest, 537, § 164.
PLACE, à ma, votre, sa place, in
my, your, his or her place, 367; of
objective pronouns, 473 to 477; of
adjectives, 493; of adverbs, 531, 532.
PLAINDRE, to pity; plaignant,
plaint; se plaindre, to complain,
254, 476.
PLAIRE, to please, to be pleased,
plaisant, plu; se plaire, 240, Obs. 109.
PLAISANTER, (badiner,) to jest, 381.
PLAISIR, (avec,) with pleasure, 47,
48.
PLAY, (to,) jouer, 126; upon an
instrument, d'un instrument; at
cards, aux cartes, 259; a trick on
some one, un tour à quelqu'un, 400.
PLEASE, (to,) plaire, se plaire;
some one, à quelqu'un. How are
you pleased here? Comment vous
plaisez-vous ici? 241. If you please,
■'il vous plaît, 325.
|
|
PLURAL, its formation in nouns
and adjectives, 44, 46, 47, 107, N. 1.
PLUS, more, serves to form the
comparative of inequality of adjec-
tives and adverbs; le plus, the most,
forms the superlative, 144. Differ-
ence between plus and davantage,
198. Plus de, more.. (before a noun,)
When there is a comparison
between two sentences, the verb
which follows plus or moins requires
ne, 272. Plus de, plus que, when
used, 490.
78.
PLûr à Dieu, plût au ciel, would to
God, require the subjunctive, 424.
PLUTÔT que, rather; plutôt que de,
rather than, 321; pas plus tôt, no
sooner, 521.
PONT, bridge, 157.
PORTE-CRAYON, pencil-case, 37;
porte-feuille, pocket-book, 41; their
plural, 494, § 140—7.
PORTER, to carry, to take; not to
be mistaken for mener, 303, Obs. 143.
POSSESSIVE articles or pronouns,
my, thy, &c., mon, ton, &c., 44,
108; ma, ta, &c., 282; 466, mine,
thine, &c., le mien, le tien, &c. 483
Possessive case of nouns, 30, 32;
493, § 140—2—11.
POTENTIAL, (imperfect,) condition.
nel, 507, $148, ends in rais, rais,
rait, rions, riez, raient, $148--1;
INDEX.
577
how formed, -2; after si, if, use the | de, connected with reflected verbs,
imperfect instead of the conditionnel, variously translated, 477, (§ 71 to 74 ;)
-3. Potential, (perfect,) conditionnel not transposed in English, when of
composé, 508, 149; its formation, what means of that which, de ce qui,
-1; with it s, if, is followed by que, 482, 97; to what, meaning to
pluperfect, -2; how to translate that which, à ce qui, que, § 98, may be
would, should, could, might, -3; I separated by the negation or objec
wish I knew it, je voudrais le su- tive pronoun, 536, 163-3 as far as,
voir; I wish I had known it, j'aurais jusqu'à, 464, 536; at, in, to, chez
voulu le savoir.
84, 536; from, de la part de; before,
avant, devant, auparavant, 536; by,
près de, à côté de; by myself, seul,
e, &c.; in, into, dans, en; at, in, to,
à, en; in, on, not translated before
dates, &c.
POTENTIAL. (See IMPERFECT.)
POUR, to, in order to, 92, 364.
POUR (to) out, verser; to pour out
some drink for, verser à boire à ...,
323.
A
POURQUOI, why? 81, 184; for
what, or what... for? 481.
POURSUIVRE, to pursue, 344.
POUVOIR, to be able, (can,) pouvant,
pu, 92, N. 1, 175; puis-je ? not
peux-je? can I?
PREMIER, ler, first, 1st, 70; pre-
mièrement, en premier lieu, 363, § 161
-7.
PRENDRE, to take, prenant, pris,
prenez, 132, 175, 352, 366; prendre,
to drink, 132; soin, care, 256; la
fuite, to make one's escape, to run
away, &c., 346; s'y prendre, to ma-
nage, to go about a thing, 352.
|
|
PRÈS DE, near, 260, 46, 537.
PRESENT (the) tense, indicative;
its formation, 500, § 144; three Eng-
lish present tenses expressed by one
in French, 114; verbs that take a
cedilla under the, (ç,) 502, § 144-1;
those that take e after g, −2; those
that change y into i, when it is fol-
lowed by e mute, -3; e mute
changed to è grave, -4; excepting
the terminations eler, eter, N. B.,
(acute) into è (grave), -5; true pre-
sent tense explained: I am reading,
je suis à lire, 6. Do and am, &c.,
used to interrogate, may be translated
by est-ce que. In some verbs, est-ce
que must be used, 139, N. 1, (459,
Dir. 8.) PRÉSENT COMPOSÉ or Par-
fait, English perfect, its formation,
167; its use, 168; 503, § 145. When
ne, without pas, is used with it, 505,
504; it translates the compound form
of the perfect, viz: I have been
reading, j'ai lu. I have just written,
is not rendered by the parfait, but
by je viens d'écrire. PRESENT OF
THE SUBJUNCTIVE, (78',) 408,
§ 151; its terminations; its formation
and exceptions, 151-1; its use,
PREPOSITIONS govern the infinitive
in French, except en, which governs
the prese it participle, 92, 201, 215,
460, 535. The English preposition
for, with he verbs to ask, demander,
to pay, payer, is not rendered in
French, 201, Obs. 93. At and for
not translated when used to express
the price of a thing, 276. Prepositions
formed with a and a noun take de
after them; almost all others have
no preposition, 266. Use of à, 100,
193, 404, 406, 464; use of de, 27,
403, 404; place of the preposition in
the sentence: always before the word-2, 513 to 515; different antece-
it governs, (488, § 129,) 536; not
transposed in French, 482, § 95; pre-
positions never omitted before objec-
tive nouns, 458 473, Dir. 4; d and
13,
dents that require the subjunctive,
515 to 517. In English, the state of
existence or of action, when in its
duration, is always expressed by the
48
578
INDEX.
compound perfect, while the French | whose, à qur? 103, mine, thine,
use the present tense. He has been
in Paris these three years, il y a trois
ans qu'il est à Paris, 274. Present
used after si, in connexion with the
future, (233, Obs. 105,) 505, § 146-3.
PRÉSENTER à, to present to, intro-
duce, 476, $ 64.
PRESENTLY, tout à l'heure, 237.
PRETEND, (to,) faire semblant de,
356.
PRÉTÉRIT, (le,) English second im-
perfect, 358. (See IMPERFECT.)
PRÉTÉRIT ANTÉRIEUR, second plu-
perfect, its formation, 520, § 155; its
use; conjunctions after which it is
used; practical rules, 362, 521.
PRIER de, to desire, beg, pray, re-
quest, 304.
PROMENER, (se.) to take an airing,
a walk for pleasure; aller se prome-
ner, to go walking; en carrosse, to go
in a carriage; à cheval, to ride on
horseback, to take a ride, 222.
&c., le mien, le tien, &c., used with
every verb, even être, when ce is no-
minative, 484, $ 104, 105; but when
il, elle, ils, elles, are nominatives, use
the following: à moi, a toi, &c., a
ces Messieurs.
ces Messieurs. A book of mine,
turn to, one of my books, $107. IN-
TERROGATIVE, who? qui; whom?
qui? 485, $111. Qui never leges
its i. What? quel, quelle, &c., que,
qu'est-ce que; after he verb, br
quoi? 112, 115. What? nomina-
tive, qu'est-ce qui? 486, § 116; go-
verned by a preposition, quoi? à
quoi, $117. What is in? &c. Qu'y
a-t-il dans..,§ 118; see to
.,§ 118; see to § 130. IN-
DEFINITE, on, one, people, &c. 488,
489; examples at 87, 94, 281, 107,
328, 38, 44, 108, 281, 30, 48, 276, 44,
283, 41, 43, 100, 283, 229, 39.
PROPER NAMES, noms propres,494,
496, 497.
PROPERLY, comme il faut, 204.
PROPOSER (se) de, to propose, in-
tend; je me propose de faire ce voy-
age, 1 propose going on that journey,
341.
|
PROVERBIAL forms of expression,
(at the end of INDEX.)
PULL, (to,) tirer, 244; to pull out,
arracher, s'arracher; he pulls out his
hair, il s'arrache les cheveux, 219.
PURCHASE (to) anything, faire em-
plette de quelque chose, faire des em-
plettes, 256.
PROMETTRE de, to promise, 179.
PRONOUNS, (possessive or articles,)
my, thy, &c., 466, §31; rule for
their use, 32; demonstrative, § 33;
al ways prefixed to a noun and repeat-
ed, 34; true demonstrative, 36,
37. PERSONAL, 468, 38 to 40; no-
minatives, separated from the verb, I
who, moi qui, thou who, toi qui, &c.
Objectives the same, followed by
que, 470, $40, 41. COMPOUND PER-
Sonal, myself, moi-même, &c., 471,
41. OBJECTIVE PRONOUNS, $42 to
50; their place, $51 to 56, Dir. 4.
Double objective pronouns, $57 to
63; examples at p. 94, &c.; with a
preposition, à moi, de toi, &c., §63
to 66. REFLECTIVE, 1st class, 477,
$67,71; 2d class, $68, 72; 3d class, QUAND, lorsque, when, 88, 242,
$ 69, 73, 74. RELATIVE, qui, who, with the prétérit antérieur, 521.
nominative, never omitted either in Quand même, though, followed by
French or English, 478, $75, 76. conditionnel, 425, 517.
Objective que, whom, that, which,
$75 to 80; personal, connected with
relatives, 483, $102. POSSESSIVE,
|
PUT, (to,) to put on, mettre, 168; to
put off, postpone, remettre à, 394; to
inconvenience one's self, se gêner,
|
|
395.
Q.
QUANT à, as to, as for; quent a
moi, as to me, 322.
QUATRE VINGTS, eighty, loses its
INDEX.
579
• when followed by another numeral, tout autant, 74, 76; tant de...que,
184.
so much... as, 78.
QUE, that, which, (relative pro-
noun,) 43; que de, than, (before a
noun,) 78; que, qui, take a euphonic
l before on, 372; que, used to avoid
the repetition of a conjunction, go-
verns the same mood as that conjunc-
tion; when the conjunction is si,
&c., que governs the subjunctive,
516. Qu'est-ce que c'est que cela?
what is that? Je ne sais pas ce que
c'est que cela, 319. Qu'est-ce que
cela peut-être? what can that be?
395. Que! exclamation! what! how!
335, 487.
QUOI, (after the verb or a preposi-
tion,) que, (before,) what? 100. Quoi!
admirative, what! 487. Quoi encore?
what else, more? 113.
QUOIQUE, whatever, 422; though,
417, governs the subjunctive.
R.
RAIN, (to,) pleuvoir, 227. Does it
rain? pleut-il? fait-il de la plure?
301. Il pleut à verse, it rains very
hard, it pours, 227.
RAPPELER, (se,) to recollect. Vous
rappelez-vous cela? do you recollect
QU'EST-CE QUE C'EST? what is it? that? I do, je me le rappelle, 261.
129, 171.
QUEL? what, which? (interroga-
tive,) 25; quels, 44; quelle, &c.,
283, 286, 485, 487.
QUEL que, quelle que, whatever,
in two words, govern the subjunc-
tive, 422, 516, 3d way. Quelque, 1st
way, however; 2d way, whatever,
govern subjunctives, 422, 516.
RATHER THAN, plutôt que de, 321.
READ, (to,) lire, lu, 172. (See
LIRE.)
|
RECOLLECT, (to,) se rappeler, se
souvenir, se ressouvenir, 262.
RECONNAÎTRE, to recognise, to
acknowledge, 272.
RÉDUIRE, to reduce, réduisant, ré-
duit, 344.
QUELQUE, S, some, any, a few, 68.
QUELQUE CHOSE, some, anything;
de bon, good, 88, 462, (takes de be-
fore an adjective.) Quelque chose que,
what ver, governs the subjunctive,
423, 516-13.
QUELQUE PART, some, anywhere, demeurer, 187, N. 1.
89, Obs.
RÉJOUIR (se) de quelque chose, to
rejoice at something, 223.
RELY, (to,) se fier à; you may rely
upon him, vous pouvez vous fier à lui,
&c., 348.
QUELQU'IN, Some, anybody, 39.
QUELQUES UNS, (en...,) a few,
some, 68.
QUESTION, (to be the,) to turn
upon, s'agir de: the question is, il
s'agit de, 391. Qu'en résulte-t-il? |
what of it? 483.
Qui, who? 100, 470, 230. À qui,
whose? 147, 483; to whom? 230,
N. B. The i is never cut off.
QUI QUE CE SOIT, whoever, governs
the subjunctive, 422, 516-13.
QUICK, fast, vite, 264.
QUITE (just) as much, as many,
REMAIN, (to,) rester, 182, N.1;
REMETTRE à, to postpone, put off,
394.
RENDRE, to return, give back, re-
store, 80, 199; rendre visite, to pay
a visit, 332.
RESTER, to remain, stay, 110;
takes avoir and être as auxiliary, 182,
N.1. Rester, to have left, 300.
RESTORE, rendre. (See it.)
RETENIR, to hold back, retain, re-
tenant, retenu retenez, 260.
RETURN, to give back, restore;
rendre, 80, 199. Retourner, to go
back, 428; revenir, to come back, 185.
RÉUSSIR à, to succeed, 342.
580
INDEX.
REVENIR, to come back, to return, | sail for, faire voile pour; under full
185.
RIDE (to) on horseback, aller (mon-
ter) à cheval, 214. To take a ride,
se promener à cheval, 222.
RIEN, (ne...,) qui, que, nothing
that, governs the subjunctive, 423.
RIGHT, (to be,) avoir raison, 36.
To the right, on the right side or
hand, à droite, sur la droite, 378. It
is right, c'est bien, 319.
RIRE, to laugh, riant, ri, riez. Se
rire (moquer) de quelqu'un, to laugh,
to deride one; rire au nez de quel-
qu'un, to laugh in a person's face,
325.
ROOM, (the,) la chambre; the front
room, la chambre de devant, sur le de-
vant; the back room, de derrière,
sur le derrière; the upper room, du
haut, d'en haut, 284.
RULES:1. All prepositions govern
the infinitive, N. 1, on Après, after,
460.
R. 2. Of two verbs, the second is
in the infinitive, &c., 461.
R. 3. Do you speak before you
listen? Parlez-vous avant d'écouter?
The French dispense with the second
nominative, when it is the same as
the first, 461.
R. 4. When the nominatives are
different, use the English construc-
tion, 461.
R. 5. When two or more nouns,
&c., govern a noun or a verb, they
must govern it without any preposi- |
tion or with the same, 461.
R. 6. Every French preposition
precedes the word it governs, is never
separated from it, and is repeated be-
fore every word, 461.
S.
|
sail, marcher à pleines voiles, 350.
SALT, (to,) saler, 92.
SALIR, to soil, dirty, 220.
SALUTATIONS, (daily,) salutations
journalières. At pp. 26, 29, 32, 33,
35, 37, 39, 40, 42, 44, 48, 50, 52,
54, 56, 58, 63, (N. B. On composing
an exercise on daily salutations, 70,
71, 73,) 104, 107, 112, 114, 119, 121,
123, 130, 134, 136, 139, 142.
SAME; the same thing, la même
chose; the same man, le même
homme; it is all one, (the same,)
c'est égal, c'est la même chose, 168,
307.
SANS, without, 215; sans doute,
without doubt, to be sure, 108.
SANTE, (la,) the health, 332.
SAVOIR, to know; sachant, su, sa-
chez, takes no preposition after it,
135, 175.
SATISFIED (to be) with some one or
something, être content de quelqu'un
ou de quelque chose, 210.
SCARCELY, à peine, 521.
SEASONS, (the,) les saisons, 499.
SECOND, second, e, 70. Secondly.
2d, secondement, 363, 532-7.
SEE, (to,) voir, voyant, vu, 172.
SEEM, (to,) paraître, sembler, 429.
SELF, selves, même, mêmes; my.
self, moi-même; themselves, eux-
mêmes, elles-mêmes; one's self, soi-
même, 154, 471.
SELON, according to; selon les
circonstances; c'est selon, it depends,
31".
SENTIR, to feel; sentant, senti,
278; to smell, 353.
SERVIR, to serve, wait upon, ser-
vant, servi, 254; se servir de, to
make use of, to use, 266; servir la
soupe, le dessert, to serve up the
SA, son, ses, his, her, 282, 466, soup, the dessert, 348. To be of
$32.
SAIL, (a,) une voile. To set sail,
mettre à la voile, 350, N. 1. To set
use, à quoi cela vous sert-il? of what
use is that to you? Servir de, to
stand instead, to be as; mon fusil me
INDEX.
581
sert de bâton, I use my gun as a
stick; servir de, to avail; à quoi
vous sert-il de pleurer? what avails
you to cry? cela ne me sert à rien, it
avails me nothing, 386. On a servi,
the meal is on the table, (is served
up ;) vous servirui-je de la soupe?
shall I help you to some soup? do
you choose any soup?
SET (to) out, to depart, leave, par-
tir, 142, 175.
SEUL, e, alone, by one's self, 137,
159, 367; seulement, non seulement,
not only, 324.
SHAWL, (a,) un châle, 34.
SHORTLY, (Soon,) bientôt, 108, 185.
SHOULD Or Ought. (See OUGHT.)
SHOW, faire voir, montrer, 134.
To show a disposition to, faire mine
de, 331; the show, (splendor, bright-
ness,) l'éclut; to make a great show,
faire de l'éclat, 432.
S1, if; the i is cut off before il, ils,
but nowhere else; after si, the pro-
noun on takes l', 372. Si usually
attends the conditionnel, and is fol-
lowed by the imparfait, 310, 507.
Que, used to avoid the repetition of
si, governs the subjunctive, 516—10.
Si, meaning granting, connects the
future with the present, 233, Obs. 105.
SI, so; si bien, so well, 165.
SIEN, (le,) la sienne, &c., his or
hers, 39, 49, 291, 483; à lui, à elle,
484.
SIDE, côté; by the side of, à côté
de, 266; this side, de ce côté-ci; on
that side, de ce côté-là, 193.
SILENT, (to be,) to stop speaking,
se taire, 392.
SINCE OF FROM, depuis; from that
time, depuis ce moment; my child-
hood, ma jeunesse; from here there,
depuis ici jusque là. Since, (consi-
dering, puisque, 342.
Srr (to) down, s'asseoir, 262; to
A seated, être assis, assise, 302.
SLEEP, (to,) dormir, 121; 215. Are
|
|
|
you sleepy? avez-vous sommeil ? 29.
To feel sleepy, avoir envie de dor-
mir, 220.
SLOW, slowly, lentement, 264.
SNOW, (to,) neiger, 227; it snows,
il fait de la neige, 301.
So, (it,) le, 171, Obs. 77; so, thus,
ainsi; so, so, comme cela; so that,
de sorte que, 230; so much, tant de;
so much as, tant que, 77, 210, 260.
SOIR, soirée, evening, their differ-
ence, 289, N. 2.
SOME OF ANY, (before a noun,) du,
de la, des; before an adjective or
after a negation,, de, 55, 284. Some of
it, of them, en, before the verb, 59;
some or any more, encore, used affir-
matively; encore du vin, encore des
boutons, 75. N. B. (Encore is placed
immediately after the verb.) Some-
thing, quelque chose; anything good,
quelque chose de bon, 29, 191; some-
times, quelque fois, 153; some, any-
where, quelque part; nowhere, not
anywhere, ne... nulle part, 89.
So much, many, tant, 77, 210, 260.
SON, sa, ses, his or hers, 38, 44,
282, 466, § 32.
SOON, very soon, bientot, 108, 185.
Aussitôt que, as soon as, aussitôt que,
215. No sooner, pas plus tot, with
prétérit antérieur, 521.
SORE, mal; a sore foot, mal au
pied, 110.
SORTIR, to go out, sortant, sorti,
110, 121, 150, 175.
SOUDAINEMENT, suddenly, all of a
sudden, 290.
SOUFFRIR, to suffer, souffrant,
souffert, 334.
Sous, under; dessous, under it.
177.
SOUVENIR (se) de, se ressouvenir
de, to remember, to recollect, 262.
SOUVENT, often; aussi souven!
que, as often as; plus souvent que,
oftener than; moins souvent que, not
so often as, 137.
48 *
582
INDEX.
f
SPEAK (to) French. (See PARLER.) I made, 27, 403, 493; à, when the lat
SPEECH, (a,) un discours. To make ter expresses the use of the former,
a speech, faire un discours, 295. 404, 494; à la, au, aux, to determine
SPEND (to) time at something, pas- it more precisely, 406, 494. Sub-
ser le temps à quelque chose, 250. stantives having a distinct form for
SPITE, (in... of,) en dépit de, 346. the feminine, 495; used for both
STEEL, acier, 55.
sexes, 298.
STEP, (a,) un pas. To walk a step,
faire un pas; to take a step, (mea-
sures,) faire une démarche, 295.
SUCCEED, (10,) parvenir à. Have
you succeeded in learning it? êtes-
vous parvenu à l'apprendre? 237.
réussir à; avez-vous réussi à l'ap-
prendre? 237, 342.
STORE, Store-house, magasin, 63.
STRIKE, (to,) frapper, 323. To be
struck with a thought, venir en SUCH, un tel, une telle, pareil,
pensée, à l'idée, à l'esprit. A thought | pareille, 307, 490-9, -10; un si bon
strikes me, il me vient une pensée, | livre.
366.
|
SUFFER, (to,) souffrir, 334; to suffer
one's self to be beaten, se laisser
battre; to let one's self fall, se laisser
tomber; to suffer one's self to be in-
sulted, se laisser insulter, 432.
SUFFIRE à, to suffice, be suffi-
cient, suffisant, sufi, 349.
SUIT, (to,) convenir à, 237.
SUITE, (tout de,) immediately, 237.
SUIVRE, to follow; suivant, suivi,
Suivre un conseil, to follow
334.
advice, 384.
SUBJECT. (See NOMINATIVE.)
SUBJUNCTIVE, subjonctif. (See
PRESENT, IMPERFECT, &c., 408.)
Present; how it ends, 513, § 151-1;
how it is formed, -2; eight excep-
tions. Its use, -2; important ob-
servation on it. When the antecedent
is a superlative, -3; when imper-
sonal, 4; interrogative, negative,
or conditional, -5; it expresses fear, |
&c., takes ne, -6, -7; douter, nier,
take ne, -8; what, que, governs,
-9,-10; whatever, however, -11,
quelque que, &c.; its connexion with
indicative, 12; whatever, whatso-explanation on its formation, 144;
ever, -13; quelque chose que, quoi followed by que or qui, requires the
que, quoique ce soit; whomsoever, subjunctive, 515-3.
qui que ce soit; when it must follow
qui, que, dont, &c., -14; when it
must begin the sentence, -15. Im-
perfect, 517; its formation. Per-
fect, (p. 418,) parfait. Pluperfect,
(p. 419,) plusque parfait.
SUBSTANTIVES, substan'ifs, noms,
formation of plural, 44. Exceptions,
46, N. 1, 2, 3, 281. Feminine, 281.
Genders, 194; 402, Obs. 163; 187,
Obs. 85; 297, Obs. 140; 314; 239,
N.1; 284; 356. Compound sub-
stantives, 47, N. 1, or 494-7; 183,
Obs. 82; 440, Obs. 171. De is put
between the name of the thing and
that of the substance of which it is
SUN, (the,) le soleil. We have too
much sun, il fait trop de soleil, 208.
SUPERLATIVE, superlatif, a new
SUR, on, upon, 175; dessus, upon
it, 177.
SURFAIRE, to overcharge, ask too
much, 344.
SURPRENDRE, to surprise, 374.
SURPRISE, (to,) étonner. To be
surprised at, s'étonner de, 374.
SWEET, doux, douce, 491.
SWEETEN, (to,) sucrer, adoucir, 92.
T.
TA, ton, tes, thy, 282, 108, 466.
TAIRE, (se,) to hold one's tongue,
be silent, taisant; tu; taisez-vous,
be silent, 392.
TAKE (to) place, avoir lieu, 165 ·
INDEX.
583
care of something, prendre (avoir) | KEEP.) S'en tenir à, to abide by,
soin de quelque chose, 256; of some 477.
one, to beware of one, prendre garde
à quelqu'un, 366; an airing in a car-
riage, se promener en carrosse, 222.
TANT, SO much; par an, a year;
par tête, a head, 210, 293; tant que,
so long as, 401; tant soi peu, just a
little, ever so little, 427; tant bien
que mal, indifferently, 396; tant que
vous voudrez, so, as long as you
please, 401, 492.
TARDER, to delay. (See the latter.)
TASTE, (to,) goûter, 129, 208; the
taste, le goût; each man has his
taste, chaque homme a son goût, 217.
TE, thee, to thee, te le, les, 108,
472. T'en, thee some; t'y en, thee
some there. Te, t'en, t'y, (reflective,)
478, 71, 72, 73.
TEACH, (10,) enseigner; to teach
some one something, enseigner quel-
que chose à quelqu'un; some one to
do something, apprendre à quelqu'un
à faire quelque chose, 266.
TEAR, (a,) une larme; to shed
tears, verser des larmes; with tears
in his, her, our, &c., eyes, les larmes
aux yev r, 323.
TEINDRE, to dye, color; teignant,
teint; en noir, en rouge, to dye black,
red, 195.
TENSES, (the,) les temps. Present,
114, 500 to 503, including true pre-
sent, je suis à lire, 502. Perfect,
167, 503, 504. First future, 231,
504 to 506; second future, 299. Im-
perfect, 305, 506. Imperfect of the
potential, conditionnel, 310, 507,
508. Perfect of the potential, 311,
508, 509. Imperative, 369, 509 to
513. Subjunctive present, 408, 513;
subjunctive imperfect, 416, 517. Per-
fect, 418. Pluperfect, 419. Prété-
rit or second imperfect of the indica.
tive, 368, 517 to 520. Pluperfect of
indicative is formed like the English
tense, by the imperfect of the auxi-
liary and past participle of the verb
to be conjugated, 520. Examples
after the 59th lesson, p. 305. Second
pluperfect, prétérit antérieur, 362,
520, 521. Infinitive, four termina-
tions of it, 80; explanations, 521 to
525.
527.
500.
Past participle, 156, 525 to
Present participle, 114, 448,
THAN, que de, (before nouns,) 78.
Than, before a number, is rendered
by de, and not by que; more than
nine, plus de neuf, 246.
THAT or Which, que, (relative,)
TEL, telle, tels, telles, such; un tel 43, 478. That, (meaning that thing,)
homme, une telle femme, such a man, cela, 168, 467, 469, N. 4. That, (the
woman; de tels hommes, de telles one,) celui, plural, ceux, celle, celles,
femmes, such men, women, 307. 30, 48, 286, 467. That which, the
Tel is not used with another adjec-one which, those which, celui que,
tive. Such a kind friend, un si bon ceux que, &c., 43, 48, 286, 467, 468.
ami, 490-9, -10.
That which, (the thing which,) ce
169.
TELL, (to,) to say, dire; told, dit, que, (objective,) ce qui, (nomina
tive,) 124, 481. That book of mine,
485.
TENIR, to hold; tenant, tenu; te-
nez. Tenez, the imperative, is used
as an exclamation, 203, Obs. 94. Se
venir prêt, to keep one's self ready,
274. Tenir pension, keep a boarding-
house, school, 385. Lieu de, to take
the place of, be instead of, 404. (See
|
THE, le, la, les, 25, 44, 281; its
connexion with prepositions, 463.
THEIR, leur, leurs, 44, 282; when
it must be translated by en...les,
466, N. 2.
THEIRS, le (la) leur, les leurs, 49,
584
INDEX.
291, 483; after il, elle, &c., à eux,
elles 484.
à
THEM, to them, leur. (See it.)
THEMSELVES, eux-mêmes, · elles-
mêmes, 471; (reflective,) se, s'y, s'en,
477, 478.
THEN, alors; until then, jusqu'-
alors, 189.
THERE, to it, at it, in it, 87, 101.
To go, to be, there, y aller, y étre,
87. There, là, y, 110. There is, il
y a, 180, 238, 246, 7, 8, 338. There
is, (behold,) voilà; there it is, le
voilà, la voilà; they are, les voilà,
(here is, voici,) 310, 312.
THINE, le tien, la tienne, &c., 108,
291, 483; after il, elle, &c., à toi,
484.
THINK (to) of, penser à, 476.
THIRD, troisième, 70; tiers, 499.
Thirdly, troisièmement, 363—7.
THIS, THAT, these, those, ce, cet,
cette, ces. This one, that one, these,
those, celui-ci, celui-là, &c., 30, 41,
44, 50, 286.
THOU, tu, 107.
THOUGH, quoique, (see it,) 417.
THOUSAND, (a,) mille, does not
take un, 462.
THROW, (to,) jeter, 173, 502, N. B.
THUNDER, le tonnerre. It thun-
ders very much, il fait beaucoup de
tonnerre, 215.
THUS, So, ainsi, 179.
THY, ton, ta, tes, 108, 282, 466.
THYSELF, toi-même, 471; (reflec-
tive,) te, t'y, t'en, 477, 478.
TIEN, (le,) la tienne, les trens, les
tiennes, thine, 108, 291, 483; à toi,
484.
TILL, until, jusque; till noon,
iusqu'à midi, 189; not until, pas
avant de, 310.
TIRED, (to be,) être las, lasse, 429;
to get tired, s'ennuyer, 376.
TIRER, to pull, draw, shoot, fire,
214.
To, à, 101, 102; to the, au, à la,
&c., 463; in order to, pour, 92.
+
Tor, thou; tor qui, que, 168, 470;
à toi, to thee, 476; à loi, thine, 484.
ToN, ta, tes, thy, 108, 282, 466.
Too, trop, 150; too much, many
trop, 66, 67; too late, trop tard;
soon, early, trop tôt; large, great,
trop grand; little, trop peu; 100
small, trop petit, 150.
TOUR À TOUR, alternately, by
turns, 404.
;
Tour, tous, all. Tout le vin
tous les livres, 110.
Tout autant,
quite (just) as much, 76. Tout de
suite, immediately, 108; pas du tout,
not at all, 115. Tout à
Tout à coup, all at
once, 290.
TOWARDS, envers, vers, 270, 393.
TRAVEL, (to,) voyager, 194, 213;
through Europe, faire le tour de
l'Europe, 400.
TREAT, (to) use somebody well,
(ill,) en user bien, (mal,) avec quel-
qu'un, 394.
TRICK, (to play a,) jouer un tour,
400.
TROMPER, to deceive, cheat; se
tromper, to make a mistake, 219.
TROP, too, too much, many, 65,
150.
TRUST (to) one, se fier à quelqu'un;
to distrust one, se défier de quel-
qu'un, 325.
TRUTH, (the,) la vérité; in truth,
indeed, en vérité! 47, 105.
Tu, thou, 107, N. 1.
TURN, (to,) a soldier, se faire sol-
dat, 225; to account, (make the best
| of,) faire valoir, 427; one into ridi-
cule, tourner quelqu'un en ridicule,
388. Turn, (the,) le tour To take
a turn, (a walk,) faire un tour, 242,
400.
|
T'y, thee to it there, 475; t'y en,
thee some there, 476; t'y, (reflcc-
tive,) thyself, 478.
U.
UN, une, a, an, one, 63, 69, 70,
285, 129; not used before cent, &c.,
INDEX.
585
177.
462 Pas un qui, que, not one that, | verbs are conjugated like their primi-
governs the subjunctive, 515-5. tives, 179. Auxiliaries, See A voir,
L'un l'autre,`` l'une l'autre, each ÊTRE. Verbs requiring être, to be, as
other; êtes vous contents l'un de auxiliary, 175, 530. Active verbs, 167.
l'autre? are you pleased with each Neuter, 175, 530. Passive, 212, 530.
other? Nous le sommes, we are, 331. Reflective, 217, 531. Always conju-
The one, (when not in apposition to gated with the auxiliary être, -4.
the other,) not l'un, but celui, 43. They always have two pronouns of
UNDER, sous; under it, dessous, the same person, -2. Impersonal,
227. They usually govern the sub-
junctive, 515-4. Do, am, &c., when
used to interrogate, may be rendered
by est-ce que? With some verbs
est-ce que must be used, 139. When
ne is used without pas, 322; être
connected by à with an infinitive
expresses the present tense, as Je
suis à lire, I am reading, 399, 502—6.
Most passive verbs may be made
reflected, 531-5.
UNDERSTAND, (to,) comprendre,
compris, 182; to make one's self
understood, se faire comprendre, 370. |
UNIPERSONAL VERBS govern the
subjunctive, 515—4.
UNLESS, à moins que...ne...,
govern the subjunctive, 537.
UNTIL, jusqu'à ce que, governs the
subjunctive, 537; jusqu'alors, 189.
UP, to get up, (to rise,) se lever,
222. To go up, monter, 304, N. 1;
to stand up, être debout; to remain
up, rester debout, 373. Up stairs, en
haut, 193. Up to the top, jusqu'en
haut, 428.
UPON, sur; upon it, dessus, 175.
Us, nous, à nous. See Nous.
USER, to wear out, 180. En user
bien (mal) avec quelqu'un. To treat
one well, (ill,) 394.
V.
VALOIR, to be worth; valant, valu,
valoir mieux, to be better, 199; la
peine, to be worth while. Cela en
vaut-il la peine? Is it worth while?
270. Faire valoir, to turn to account,
427.
VEILLE, (la,) the day before, 340.
VENIR, to come, venant, venu, 88,
121, 175. Venir de, to have just,
248, 504-3. Venir en pensée, (à
l'idée, à l'esprit,) to have a thought,
366. Venir and aller, are in French
followed by an infinitive, and the
conjunction and is not rendered, 374,
512-12.
|
|
VERS, envers, towards, 270; the
former is used physically, the latter
morally, 393.
VIS-À-VIS de, opposite to, 387.
VIVRE, to live, vivant, vécu, 214;
Fait-il bon vivre à Paris? Is the
living good in Paris? 315.
VOILÀ, there is; voici, here is;
voilà pourquoi, that is the reason
why; voilà pourquoi je le dis, there
fore I say so, 312.
VOILE, (un,) a veil, is masculine;
une voile, a sail, feminine, 350, N. 1.
À pleines voiles, (à toutes voiles,) un
der full sail, 350.
VOIR, to see, voyant, vu, voyez, 92,
121, 172.
VOTRE, plural vos, your, 25, 44,
282, 466.
VÔTRE, (le, la,) les vôtres, yours,
30, 291, 483.
VOULOIR, to be willing, to wish,
voulant, voulu, 83, 175.
Vous qui,
Vous, you, 25, 409.
you who, vous-même, s, yourself, 471.
Objective vous, you, to you, 472;
vous y, you there, 475; vous en, you
VERBS, verbes. The four conjuga- some, vous y en, you some there; à
tions, 80. Compound and derivative | vous, to-you, 476; vous (reflect.) 1st
vous
586
INDEX.
class, 477, vous y; 2d class, vous en; | que cela? 129, 171. What! que!
3d class, yourselves, 478; à vous, quoi! 487.
yours, 484, $106.
WHATEVER, whatsoever, quelque,
VOYAGER, (to travel,) 194, voya- | quel que, quelle que,&c., quelque chose
geant, 502-2.
que, quoique, quoi que ce soit, 422,
423, 516.
W.
WAKE, (to,) éveiller, réveiller, 369.
WALK, (to,) marcher, 295; to take
a walk, se promener; to go walking;
aller se promener, 222. To walk or
travel a mile, faire un mille, 295.
I
WANT, (to,) to be in want of, to
have need of, avoir besoin de, 112;
falloir, il faut, 197, Obs. 89; vouloir,
83, 175.
WARM, chaud. Are you warm?
avez-vous chaud? 31. Is it warm?
fait-il chaud? 53.
WAY, chemin, 105; on the way,
en chemin, 121; in this way, de cette
manière, 180; about asking the way,
378.
We, nous, 67, 409; we, nous au-
ires, 471.
WEATHER, (the,) le temps. How
is the weather? what weather is it?
quel temps fait-il? 53, 208.
|
WHEN, quand, lorsque, 88, 242
used with the prétérit antérieur, 521.
When connects two future tenses,
235, Obs. 106.
WHERE? où ? 86. Where from?
whence? d'où ? 200, 252. Where
did we stop? où en étions-nous ?
Somewhere, anywhere, quelque part;
nowhere, not anywhere, nulle part,
89.
WHICH OF WHAT? quel? quels ?
&c., 25, 27, 45, 386, 485, 486. Of
which, dont, 228, 481. Which one?
Lequel, laquelle? &c., 36, 45, 386.
Which, having a part of a sentence
for antecedent, is translated by ce
qui, ce que, 481, § 90. (See THAT.)
WHO? qui? whose? à qui? dont,
de qui, 100, 147; à qui, aux quels?
230. Whom? qui? 478; whom,
(relative,) que, 479.
WHOEVER, qui que ce soit, 422,
WELCOME, (to be,) être le bien 516.
venu, 376.
WELL, bien, 26, 147, 319. To be
well, être bien portant, e, être en bonne
santé; she is well, elle est bien por-
tante, elle se porte bien, elle est en
bonne santé, 330.
WET, damp, humide. Is the wea-
ther damp? Fait-il humide? 208.
WHAT? que? before a verb,) 29;
after verbs and prepositions, quoi?
100; que, quoi, qu'est-ce que? what,
nominative, qu'est-ce qui? what is,
was, &c., (interrogative,) followed by
a preposition, qu'y a-t-il...? qu'y
avait-il? 486. What, (or the thing
which,) ce qui, ce que, 124, 481 (89;
what is, (relative,) followed by a pre-
position, ce qu'il y a, 480-4. What?
qu'est-ce que c'est ? qu'est-ce que c'est
;
WHY? pourquoi? 81, 184.
WIPE, essuyer, 184, 502-3.
WISH, (to,) souhaiter, vouloir, dé-
sirer, 83, 131. I wish I had it, j
voudrais l'avoir, 508. I wish I had
been able to go, j'aurais voulu pou-
voir y aller, 509.
WITH, avec, 88. With, rendered
by de, 224, 254, 210, 303; by à, 338,
l'homme à l'habit bleu.
WITHDRAW, (to,) go away from,
s'éloigner de. I go from the fire, je
m'éloigne du feu, 260.
WITHOUT, Sans; without speak-
ing, sans parler, 215.
WORD, (the,) le mot, 50, 172
Words used with the preposition de
before an infinitive, 80. When a
word is composed of a noun and an
IDIOMATICAL EXPRESSIONS.
587
adjective, both take the mark of
the plural, 183. Compound words,
494.
WORTH, (to be,) valoir, 199. To
be worth while, valoir la peine, 270.
WOULD TO GOD, plût à Dieu, au
ciel, 424. How would must be trans-
lated, 508.
WRITE, (to,) écrire, écrit, 89, 121,
172.
WRONG, tort, 36. (See To BE.)
Y.
Y, to it, in it, 87. Y, there, (stands
before the verb.) Y aller, to go
there; y être, to be there. Its place
with the personal pronouns, and en,
87, Obs. 102, 110. Y, (ici,) here; y,
(là,) there, 110. Y regarder de près,
to be particular, 399. Y a-t-il? is
there? 180. (See THERE IS.) Y
translates the English objective pro-
noun it; when by itself, or governed
by a preposition, (in, with, &c.,) it is
connected with a yerb requiring the
preposition à, 473, $50.
YES, oui, 25. SI FAIT, 51, Obs. 26.
YESTERDAY, hier; the day before
yesterday; avant-hier, 107.
You, vous, 25, 409. (See Vous.)
YOUR, votre, vos, 25, 44, 282, 466.
YOURS, le, (la) vôtre, les vôtres,
30, 291, 483; à vous, 484.
YOURSELF, yourselves, vous-même.
vous-mêmes, 471; (reflected,) vous,
vous y, vous en, 477, 478.
IDIOMATICAL EXPRESSIONS.
She does everything gracefully.
These are very beautiful pictures.
Elle a de la grâce dans tout ce qu'elle
fait.
Voilà des tableaux d'une grande
beauté.
The German interest was contrary L'intérêt de l'Allemagne était op
to the Russian.
Cheer up, soldiers; the day is ours.
To sleep very late.
To be on the brink of ruin.
To cast a mist before one's eyes.
To fret and fume.
To share the profit.
To put somebody to the sword.
To meet with one's match.
What day of the month is it?
All blessings come from God.
Is that your opinion ?-Do not ques-
tion it.
posé à celui de la Russie.
Courage, soldats; la victoire est à
nous.
Dormir la grasse matinée.
Être à deux doigts de sa perte.
Jeter de la poudre aux yeux.
Jeter feu et flamme.
Partager le gâteau.
Passer quelqu'un au fil de l'épée.
Trouver son maître.
Quel quantième du mois avons-nous ?
Tous les biens nous viennent de Dieu
Est-ce là votre opinion?-Ne doutez
point que ce ne la soit.
Are those your servants ?-Yes, they Sont-ce là vos domestiques ?--Oui,
are.
ce les sont.
domestiques?--Oui,
Madam, are you the mother of that Madame, êtes-vous la mère de cet
child?—Yes, I am.
enfant ?-Oui, je la suis.
Ladies, are you the strangers that Mesdames, êtes-vous les elrangères
588
IDIOMATICAL EXPRESSIONS.
have been announced to me ?-
qu'on m'a annoncées ?-Oui, nous
les sommes.
Yes, we are.
Ladies, are you pleased with that Mesdames, êtes-vous contentes de
music?-Yes, we are.
Madam, are you a mother ?-Yes,
.
amı.
Madam, are you ill?—Yes, I am.
cette musique? Oui, nous le
sommes.
Madame, êtes-vous mère ?—Oui, je
le suis.
Madame, êtes-vous malade ?-Oui,
je le suis.
Madam, how long have you been Madame, depuis quel emps êtes-
married?-A year.
is it long since you arrived ?-A fort-
night.
Although that woman shows more
resolution than the others, she is
nevertheless not the least afflicted.
That woman has the art of shedding
tears, even when she is least
afflicted.
That woman proposed herself as a
model for her children.
vous mariée ?-Je le suis depuis
un an.
Y a-t-il long-temps que vous êtes
arrivée ?-Je le suis depuis quinze
jours.
Quoique cette femme montre plus de
fermeté que les autres, elle n'est
pas pour cela la moins affligée.
Cette femme à l'art de répandre des
larmes dans le temps même qu'elle
est le moins affligée.
Cette femme s'est proposée pour
modèle à ses enfants.
He (or she) has not succeeded in that Cette ruse ne lui a pas réussi.
stratagem.
To be free and open..
To be full of business.
To take fire presently.
The dry weather we had in the spring
has destroyed all the fruit.
To put to the vote.
Life is at stake.
My honor is concerned in it.
That is understood.
To act deliberately.
To go full speed.
Shall you go to the opera this even-
ing ?-Yes, I shall.
-Yes, I would.
Avoir le cœur sur les lèvres.
Avoir des affaires par-dessus les
yeux.
Avoir la tête près du bonnet.
La sécheresse qu'il y a eu au prin-
temps a fait périr tous les fruits.
Aller aux voix.
Il y va de la vie.
Il y va de mon honneur.
Cela va sans dire.
Aller pas à pas.
Aller à bride abattue.
Irez-vous ce soir à l'opéra ?—Oui,
j'irai.
Would you cheerfully go to Rome? Iriez-vous avee plaisir à Rome -
Oui, j'irais
THE END.

2

UNIVERSITY OF MINNESOTA
wils
448.2 014n
al synopsis, a nrich Gottfried, d. 1865.
New method of learning to read, write an
3 1951 002 380 203 E
3
2
QUAWN
EXTAWN-I
4
QUAWN--
1

0123456
0123456
0123456
654321
A4 Page 8543210
AIIM SCANNER TEST CHART #2
4 PT
6 PT
8 PT
Spectra
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz;:",/?$0123456789
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz;:”,./?$0123456789
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz;:',./?$0123456789
10 PT ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz;:",./?$0123456789
Times Roman
4 PT
6 PT
8 PT
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz;:'../?$0123456789
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz;:",./?$0123456789
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz;:",./?$0123456789
10 PT ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz;:",./?$0123456789
4 PT
6 PT
8 PT
Century Schoolbook Bold
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz;:",./?$0123456789
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz;:",./?$0123456789
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz;:",./?$0123456789
10 PT ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz;:",./?$0123456789
4 PT
6 PT
News Gothic Bold Reversed
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz;:'',/?$0123456789
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz;:',./?$0123456789
8 PT ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz;:",./?$0123456789
10 PT ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz;:",./?$0123456789
4 PT
6 PT
8 PT
Bodoni Italic
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz;:",./?80123456789
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz;:",./?$0123456789
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz;:",./?$0123456789
10 PT ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz;:",./?$0123456789
ΑΒΓΔΕΞΘΗΙΚΛΜΝΟΠΡΣΤΥΩΝΨΖαβγδεξθηικλμνοπορστνωχ ζ=7",/St=#°><ΕΞ
Greek and Math Symbols
4 PT
6 PT
8 PT
ΑΒΓΔΕΞΘΗΙΚΛΜΝΟΠΦΡΣΤΥΩΧΨΖαβγδεξθηικλμνοπφροτυωχψί=7",/S+=#°><><><=
ΑΒΓΔΕΞΘΗΙΚΛΜΝΟΠΦΡΣΤΥΩΧ Ζαβγδεξθηικλμνοπόρστυωχψίπτ",./St##°><><><Ξ
10 ΡΤ ΑΒΓΔΕΞΘΗΙΚΛΜΝΟΠΦΡΣΤΥΩΧΨΖαβγδεξθηικλμνοπορστνωχ ίΞτ",/St=#°><><=
White
MESH HALFTONE WEDGES
I
|
65
85
100
110
133
150
Black
Isolated Characters
e
3
1
2
3
a
4
5
6
7
о
8
9
0
h
B
O5¬♡NTC
65432
A4 Page 6543210
A4 Page 6543210
©B4MN-C
65432
MEMORIAL DRIVE, ROCHESTER, NEW YORK 14623
RIT ALPHANUMERIC RESOLUTION TEST OBJECT, RT-1-71
0123460
மய
6 E38
5 582
4 283
3 32E
10:
5326
7E28
8B3E
032E ▸
1253
223E
3 3EB
4 E25
5 523
6 2E5
17
分
​155自​杂
​14 E2 S
1323S
12E25
11ES2
10523
5836
835E
7832
0723
SBE 9
OEZE
1328
2 E32
3 235
4 538
5 EBS
6 EB
15853
TYWES
16 ELE
14532
13823
12ES2
11285
1053B
SBE6
8235
7523
◄ 2350
5 SER
10 EBS
8532
9538
7863
ROCHESTER INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY, ONE LOMB
PRODUCED BY GRAPHIC ARTS RESEARCH CENTER